1MRK502066-UUS A en Technical Manual Generator Protection REG670 2.1 ANSI

Relion 670 series
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and

Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Document ID: 1MRK 502 066-UUS

Issued: February 2016
Revision: A
Product version: 2.1
Copyright 2016 ABB. All rights reserved
Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor
used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic software written/
developed by: Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) and Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product
names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All
persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy
themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any
applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any
risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure would create a risk for
harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall
be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the equipment, and those so
responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or
mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely
ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the
manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB
be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the
application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on
the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use
within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is
the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN
60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN
60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the
international standards of the IEC 60255 series and ANSI C37.90.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1
Introduction..........................................................................43
This manual............................................................................................ 43
Intended audience.................................................................................. 43
Product documentation...........................................................................44
Product documentation set................................................................44
Document revision history................................................................. 45
Related documents............................................................................46
Document symbols and conventions...................................................... 46
Symbols.............................................................................................46
Document conventions...................................................................... 47
IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping..................................................48
Section 2
Available functions.............................................................. 57
Main protection functions........................................................................57
Back-up protection functions.................................................................. 58
Control and monitoring functions............................................................ 59
Communication.......................................................................................63
Basic IED functions.................................................................................65
Section 3
Analog inputs.......................................................................67
Introduction............................................................................................. 67
Function block.........................................................................................67
Signals.................................................................................................... 68
Settings...................................................................................................70
Monitored data........................................................................................78
Operation principle..................................................................................79
Technical data........................................................................................ 80
Section 4
Binary input and output modules.........................................83

Binary input.............................................................................................83
Binary input debounce filter............................................................... 83
Oscillation filter.................................................................................. 83
Settings..............................................................................................83
Setting parameters for binary input modules................................84
Setting parameters for binary input/output module.......................84
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ...............................85
Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and Injection equipment REX060, REX061, REX062
Technical manual
Table of contents
Local HMI screen behaviour................................................................... 85

Identification...................................................................................... 85
Settings..............................................................................................85
Local HMI signals................................................................................... 85
Identification...................................................................................... 85
Function block................................................................................... 86
Signals...............................................................................................86
Basic part for LED indication module......................................................87
Identification...................................................................................... 87
Function block................................................................................... 87
Signals...............................................................................................87
Settings..............................................................................................88
LCD part for HMI function keys control module...................................... 89
Identification...................................................................................... 89
Function block................................................................................... 89
Signals...............................................................................................89
Settings..............................................................................................89
Operation principle..................................................................................91
Local HMI...........................................................................................91
Keypad......................................................................................... 92
Display..........................................................................................94
LEDs.............................................................................................98
LED configuration alternatives...........................................................98
Functionality ................................................................................ 98
Status LEDs..................................................................................99
Indication LEDs............................................................................ 99
Function keys.................................................................................. 109
Functionality .............................................................................. 109
Operation principle..................................................................... 109
Section 6
Differential protection........................................................ 113

Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and T3WPDIF (87T)......113
Identification.................................................................................... 113
Functionality ................................................................................... 113
Function block................................................................................. 117
Signals.............................................................................................118
Settings............................................................................................122
Monitored data.................................................................................127
Operation principle.......................................................................... 128
Function calculation principles....................................................129
Technical manual
Table of contents
Logic diagram............................................................................. 153

Technical data................................................................................. 158
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87).....................159
Identification.................................................................................... 159
Functionality.................................................................................... 159
Function block................................................................................. 160
Signals.............................................................................................160
Settings............................................................................................161
Monitored data.................................................................................161
Logic diagram............................................................................. 163
Technical data................................................................................. 164
Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G)................................ 165
Identification.................................................................................... 165
Functionality.................................................................................... 165
Function block................................................................................. 166
Signals.............................................................................................166
Settings............................................................................................167
Monitored data.................................................................................169
Function calculation principles....................................................170
Fundamental frequency differential currents.............................. 170
Supplementary criteria................................................................175
Harmonic restrain....................................................................... 178
Open CT detection feature......................................................... 178
Cross-block logic scheme...........................................................180
Technical data................................................................................. 183
Low impedance restricted earth fault protection REFPDIF (87N).........184
Identification.................................................................................... 184
Functionality.................................................................................... 184
Function block................................................................................. 185
Signals.............................................................................................185
Settings............................................................................................186
Monitored data.................................................................................187
Fundamental principles of the restricted ground fault protection187
Restricted ground fault protection, low impedance differential
protection....................................................................................190
Calculation of differential current and bias current..................... 191
Detection of external ground faults.............................................192
Technical manual
Table of contents
Algorithm of the restricted ground fault protection......................194

Technical data................................................................................. 195
Section 7
Impedance protection........................................................197
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS (21).. 197
Identification.................................................................................... 197
Functionality.................................................................................... 197
Function block................................................................................. 198
Signals.............................................................................................198
Settings............................................................................................199
Full scheme measurement......................................................... 201
Impedance characteristic............................................................201
Basic operation characteristics...................................................202
Theory of operation.................................................................... 205
Simplified logic diagrams............................................................215
Technical data................................................................................. 219
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR
(21D).....................................................................................................219
Identification.................................................................................... 219
Functionality.................................................................................... 220
Function block................................................................................. 220
Signals.............................................................................................220
Settings............................................................................................221
Monitored data.................................................................................222
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
ZDMRDIR (21D)......................................................................... 223
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate
settings ZMRPDIS (21), ZMRAPDIS (21) and ZDRDIR (21D)............. 225
Identification.................................................................................... 226
Functionality.................................................................................... 226
Function block................................................................................. 227
Signals.............................................................................................227
Settings............................................................................................229
Full scheme measurement......................................................... 232
Impedance characteristic............................................................232
Minimum operating current.........................................................236
Measuring principles...................................................................236
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics 239
Technical manual
Table of contents

Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
FRPSPDIS (21).................................................................................... 246
Identification.................................................................................... 246
Functionality.................................................................................... 247
Function block................................................................................. 247
Signals.............................................................................................248
Settings............................................................................................249
Phase-to-ground fault................................................................. 252
Phase-to-phase fault.................................................................. 254
Three-phase faults......................................................................255
Load encroachment....................................................................256
Minimum operate currents..........................................................261
Technical data................................................................................. 267
High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS (21).................................... 267
Identification.................................................................................... 267
Functionality.................................................................................... 267
Function block................................................................................. 269
Signals.............................................................................................270
Settings............................................................................................272
Monitored data.................................................................................278
Filtering.......................................................................................279
Distance measuring zones......................................................... 279
Phase-selection element............................................................ 280
Directional element.....................................................................281
Fuse failure.................................................................................282
Power swings............................................................................. 282
Measuring principles...................................................................283
Simplified logic schemes............................................................ 297
Measurement..............................................................................303
Technical data................................................................................. 308
High speed distance protection for series compensated lines
ZMFCPDIS (21).................................................................................... 308
Identification.................................................................................... 309
Functionality.................................................................................... 309
Function block................................................................................. 311
Technical manual
Table of contents
Signals.............................................................................................312
Settings............................................................................................314
Monitored data.................................................................................322
Filtering.......................................................................................323
Distance measuring zones......................................................... 323
Phase-selection element............................................................ 324
Directional element.....................................................................325
Fuse failure.................................................................................326
Power swings............................................................................. 327
Measurement principles............................................................. 327
Simplified logic schemes............................................................ 341
Measurement..............................................................................346
Technical data................................................................................. 352
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM (78)......................................................352
Identification.................................................................................... 352
Functionality.................................................................................... 352
Function block................................................................................. 354
Signals.............................................................................................354
Settings............................................................................................355
Monitored data.................................................................................356
Technical data................................................................................. 360
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM (78)................................................ 361
Identification.................................................................................... 361
Functionality.................................................................................... 361
Function block................................................................................. 362
Signals.............................................................................................362
Settings............................................................................................363
Monitored data.................................................................................364
Lens characteristic......................................................................367
Detecting an out-of-step condition..............................................369
Maximum slip frequency.............................................................370
Taking care of the circuit breaker .............................................. 371
Design........................................................................................ 373
Technical data................................................................................. 374
Loss of excitation LEXPDIS(40)........................................................... 374
Identification.................................................................................... 375
6
Technical manual
Table of contents
Functionality.................................................................................... 375
Function block................................................................................. 375
Signals.............................................................................................376
Settings............................................................................................376
Monitored data.................................................................................377
Technical data................................................................................. 382
Sensitive rotor earth fault protection, injection based ROTIPHIZ (64R)383
Identification.................................................................................... 383
Functionality.................................................................................... 383
Description of input signals..............................................................383
Description of output signals........................................................... 384
Function block................................................................................. 386
Signals.............................................................................................386
Settings............................................................................................387
Monitored data.................................................................................388
The injection unit REX060.......................................................... 390
Rotor Earth Fault Protection function......................................... 391
General measurement of ground fault impedance..................... 392
Simplified logic diagram..............................................................394
Technical data................................................................................. 396
100% stator earth fault protection, injection based STTIPHIZ (64S).... 397
Identification.................................................................................... 397
Functionality.................................................................................... 397
Description of input signals..............................................................398
Description of output signals........................................................... 398
Function block................................................................................. 400
Signals.............................................................................................401
Settings............................................................................................401
Monitored data.................................................................................403
Configuration principle................................................................403
Generator system grounding methods....................................... 406
100% Stator earth fault protection function................................ 411
General measurement of ground fault impedance..................... 415
Measuring reference impedance................................................ 417
Simplified logic diagram..............................................................421
Technical data................................................................................. 422
Technical manual
Table of contents
Under impedance protection for generators and transformers

ZGVPDIS.............................................................................................. 423
Identification.................................................................................... 423
Functionality.................................................................................... 423
Function block................................................................................. 424
Signals.............................................................................................424
Settings............................................................................................425
Monitored data.................................................................................426
Operation principle of zone 1......................................................428
Under voltage seal-in..................................................................436
Technical data................................................................................. 437
Section 8
Current protection..............................................................439
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC (50).................. 439
Identification.................................................................................... 439
Functionality.................................................................................... 439
Function block................................................................................. 439
Signals.............................................................................................439
Settings............................................................................................440
Monitored data.................................................................................441
Technical data................................................................................. 442
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC(51/67).................. 442
Identification.................................................................................... 442
Functionality.................................................................................... 442
Function block................................................................................. 443
Signals.............................................................................................444
Settings............................................................................................446
Monitored data.................................................................................452
Technical data................................................................................. 460
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N)............. 461
Identification.................................................................................... 461
Functionality.................................................................................... 461
Function block................................................................................. 461
Signals.............................................................................................462
Technical manual
Table of contents
Settings............................................................................................462
Monitored data.................................................................................462
Technical data................................................................................. 463
Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero sequence or
negative sequence directionality) EF4PTOC (51N/67N)...................... 464
Identification.................................................................................... 464
Functionality.................................................................................... 464
Function block................................................................................. 465
Signals.............................................................................................465
Settings............................................................................................466
Monitored data.................................................................................474
Operating quantity within the function........................................ 475
Internal polarizing....................................................................... 476
External polarizing for ground-fault function............................... 478
Directional detection for ground fault function............................ 478
Base quantities within the protection.......................................... 478
Internal ground-fault protection structure....................................479
Four residual overcurrent steps..................................................479
Directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison function................................................................... 480
Second harmonic blocking element............................................483
Switch on to fault feature............................................................ 485
Technical data................................................................................. 487
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
protection NS4PTOC (46I2)..................................................................488
Identification.................................................................................... 488
Functionality.................................................................................... 489
Function block................................................................................. 489
Signals.............................................................................................490
Settings............................................................................................491
Monitored data.................................................................................496
Operating quantity within the function........................................ 496
Internal polarizing facility of the function.....................................497
External polarizing for negative sequence function.................... 498
Internal negative sequence protection structure.........................498
Four negative sequence overcurrent stages.............................. 498
Technical manual
Table of contents
Directional supervision element with integrated directional

comparison function................................................................... 500
Technical data................................................................................. 502
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
SDEPSDE (67N)...................................................................................503
Identification.................................................................................... 503
Functionality.................................................................................... 503
Function block................................................................................. 505
Signals.............................................................................................505
Settings............................................................................................506
Monitored data.................................................................................508
Function inputs........................................................................... 508
Technical data................................................................................. 516
Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR (49)...........517
Identification.................................................................................... 517
Functionality.................................................................................... 517
Function block................................................................................. 517
Signals.............................................................................................518
Settings............................................................................................518
Monitored data.................................................................................519
Technical data................................................................................. 524
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF(50BF)...........................................524
Identification.................................................................................... 524
Functionality.................................................................................... 524
Function block................................................................................. 525
Signals.............................................................................................525
Settings............................................................................................526
Monitored data.................................................................................527
Technical data................................................................................. 530
Pole discrepancy protection CCPDSC(52PD)...................................... 530
Identification.................................................................................... 530
Functionality.................................................................................... 531
Function block................................................................................. 531
Signals.............................................................................................531
Settings............................................................................................532
Monitored data.................................................................................533
10
Technical manual
Table of contents
Pole discrepancy signaling from circuit breaker......................... 536

Unsymmetrical current detection................................................ 536
Technical data................................................................................. 536
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)..............................536
Identification.................................................................................... 537
Functionality.................................................................................... 537
Function block................................................................................. 538
Signals.............................................................................................538
Settings............................................................................................539
Monitored data.................................................................................541
Low pass filtering........................................................................543
Calibration of analog inputs........................................................ 544
Technical data................................................................................. 545
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)................................545
Identification.................................................................................... 545
Functionality.................................................................................... 545
Function block................................................................................. 546
Signals.............................................................................................547
Settings............................................................................................547
Monitored data.................................................................................549
Low pass filtering........................................................................552
Calibration of analog inputs........................................................ 552
Technical data................................................................................. 554
Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for machines
NS2PTOC (46I2).................................................................................. 554
Identification.................................................................................... 554
Functionality.................................................................................... 554
Function block................................................................................. 556
Signals.............................................................................................556
Settings............................................................................................557
Monitored data.................................................................................558
Pickup sensitivity........................................................................ 560
Alarm function.............................................................................560
Logic diagram............................................................................. 561
Technical data................................................................................. 561
Accidental energizing protection for synchronous generator
AEGPVOC (50AE)................................................................................562
Technical manual
11
Table of contents
Identification.................................................................................... 562
Functionality .............................................................................. 562
Function block............................................................................ 563
Signals........................................................................................563
Settings.......................................................................................563
Monitored data............................................................................564
Technical data............................................................................ 565
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC (51V)...........566
Identification.................................................................................... 566
Functionality.................................................................................... 566
Function block................................................................................. 567
Signals.............................................................................................567
Settings............................................................................................568
Monitored data.................................................................................569
Measured quantities................................................................... 569
Base quantities........................................................................... 569
Overcurrent protection................................................................569
Logic diagram............................................................................. 571
Undervoltage protection............................................................. 572
Technical data................................................................................. 572
Generator stator overload protection, GSPTTR (49S)..........................573
Identification.................................................................................... 573
Functionality.................................................................................... 574
Function block................................................................................. 574
Signals.............................................................................................574
Settings............................................................................................575
Monitored data.................................................................................576
Technical data................................................................................. 583
Generator rotor overload protection, GRPTTR (49R)...........................583
Identification.................................................................................... 583
Functionality.................................................................................... 583
Function block................................................................................. 584
Signals.............................................................................................584
Settings............................................................................................585
Monitored data.................................................................................586
Technical data................................................................................. 596
12
Technical manual
Table of contents
Section 9
Voltage protection............................................................. 597

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)................................597
Identification.................................................................................... 597
Functionality.................................................................................... 597
Function block................................................................................. 598
Signals.............................................................................................598
Settings............................................................................................599
Monitored data.................................................................................601
Measurement principle............................................................... 602
Time delay.................................................................................. 603
Blocking...................................................................................... 608
Design........................................................................................ 609
Technical data................................................................................. 611
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)................................. 611
Identification.................................................................................... 611
Functionality OV2PTOV.................................................................. 612
Function block................................................................................. 612
Signals.............................................................................................612
Settings............................................................................................613
Monitored data.................................................................................615
Time delay.................................................................................. 617
Blocking...................................................................................... 622
Design........................................................................................ 622
Technical data................................................................................. 624
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)...............624
Identification.................................................................................... 624
Functionality.................................................................................... 625
Function block................................................................................. 625
Signals.............................................................................................625
Settings............................................................................................626
Monitored data.................................................................................628
Time delay.................................................................................. 628
Blocking...................................................................................... 634
Design........................................................................................ 634
Technical manual
13
Table of contents
Technical data................................................................................. 635

Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24)............................................ 636
Identification.................................................................................... 636
Functionality.................................................................................... 636
Function block................................................................................. 637
Signals.............................................................................................637
Settings............................................................................................637
Monitored data.................................................................................639
Measured voltage....................................................................... 642
Operate time of the overexcitation protection.............................642
Cooling....................................................................................... 646
Overexcitation protection function measurands......................... 646
Overexcitation alarm...................................................................647
Logic diagram............................................................................. 648
Technical data................................................................................. 648
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60)..................................... 649
Identification.................................................................................... 649
Functionality.................................................................................... 649
Function block................................................................................. 649
Signals.............................................................................................650
Settings............................................................................................650
Monitored data.................................................................................651
Technical data................................................................................. 653
100% Stator ground fault protection, 3rd harmonic based STEFPHIZ
(59THD)................................................................................................ 653
Identification.................................................................................... 653
Functionality.................................................................................... 653
Function block................................................................................. 655
Signals.............................................................................................655
Settings............................................................................................656
Monitored data.................................................................................657
Technical data................................................................................. 662
Section 10 Frequency protection.........................................................665

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81).............................................665
Identification.................................................................................... 665
Functionality.................................................................................... 665
14
Technical manual
Table of contents
Function block................................................................................. 665

Signals.............................................................................................666
Settings............................................................................................666
Monitored data.................................................................................667
Time delay.................................................................................. 668
Voltage dependent time delay.................................................... 668
Blocking...................................................................................... 670
Design........................................................................................ 670
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)...............................................671
Identification.................................................................................... 671
Functionality.................................................................................... 672
Function block................................................................................. 672
Signals.............................................................................................672
Settings............................................................................................673
Monitored data.................................................................................673
Time delay.................................................................................. 674
Blocking...................................................................................... 674
Design........................................................................................ 675
Technical data................................................................................. 675
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)............................ 676
Identification.................................................................................... 676
Functionality.................................................................................... 676
Function block................................................................................. 677
Signals.............................................................................................677
Settings............................................................................................677
Monitored data.................................................................................678
Time delay.................................................................................. 678
Blocking...................................................................................... 679
Design........................................................................................ 679
Technical data................................................................................. 680
Frequency time accumulation protection function FTAQFVR (81A).....681
Identification.................................................................................... 681
Functionality ................................................................................... 681
Function block ................................................................................ 681
Technical manual
15
Table of contents
Signals.............................................................................................682
Settings............................................................................................683
Monitored data.................................................................................683
Section 11 Multipurpose protection..................................................... 689

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC................................ 689
Identification.................................................................................... 689
Functionality.................................................................................... 689
Inadvertent generator energization.............................................690
Function block................................................................................. 690
Signals.............................................................................................691
Settings............................................................................................693
Monitored data.................................................................................700
Measured quantities within CVGAPC.........................................701
Base quantities for CVGAPC function........................................ 703
Built-in overcurrent protection steps........................................... 704
Built-in undercurrent protection steps.........................................709
Built-in overvoltage protection steps...........................................710
Built-in undervoltage protection steps........................................ 710
Inadvertent generator energizing................................................710
Logic diagram............................................................................. 712
Technical data................................................................................. 717
Section 12 System protection and control...........................................721

Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC..............................................................721
Identification.................................................................................... 721
Functionality.................................................................................... 721
Function block................................................................................. 721
Signals.............................................................................................721
Settings............................................................................................722
Filter calculation example................................................................ 726
Section 13 Secondary system supervision..........................................729

Current circuit supervision (87).............................................................729
Identification.................................................................................... 729
Functionality.................................................................................... 729
Function block................................................................................. 729
Signals.............................................................................................730
16
Technical manual
Table of contents
Settings............................................................................................730
Technical data................................................................................. 732
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC...................................................... 732
Identification.................................................................................... 733
Functionality.................................................................................... 733
Function block................................................................................. 733
Signals.............................................................................................734
Settings............................................................................................735
Monitored data.................................................................................736
Zero and negative sequence detection...................................... 736
Delta current and delta voltage detection................................... 738
Dead line detection.....................................................................741
Main logic................................................................................... 742
Technical data................................................................................. 745
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC (60).................................................745
Identification.................................................................................... 745
Functionality.................................................................................... 745
Function block................................................................................. 746
Signals.............................................................................................746
Settings............................................................................................747
Monitored data.................................................................................748
Technical data................................................................................. 749
Section 14 Control...............................................................................751
Synchronism check, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN (25)..................................................................................... 751
Identification.................................................................................... 751
Functionality.................................................................................... 751
Function block................................................................................. 752
Signals.............................................................................................752
Settings............................................................................................755
Monitored data.................................................................................757
Basic functionality.......................................................................758
Logic diagrams........................................................................... 758
Technical data................................................................................. 770
Interlocking (3)...................................................................................... 771
Technical manual
17
Table of contents
Functionality.................................................................................... 771
Logical node for interlocking SCILO (3)...........................................774
Identification............................................................................... 774
Functionality............................................................................... 774
Function block............................................................................ 775
Signals........................................................................................775
Logic diagram............................................................................. 775
Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3)....................... 776
Identification............................................................................... 776
Functionality............................................................................... 776
Function block............................................................................ 777
Logic diagram............................................................................. 777
Signals........................................................................................777
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)...........................778
Identification............................................................................... 778
Functionality............................................................................... 778
Function block............................................................................ 779
Logic diagram............................................................................. 780
Signals........................................................................................781
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3).................. 783
Identification............................................................................... 783
Functionality............................................................................... 783
Function block............................................................................ 784
Logic diagram............................................................................. 784
Signals........................................................................................785
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3).................................. 786
Identification............................................................................... 786
Functionality............................................................................... 786
Function block............................................................................ 787
Logic diagram............................................................................. 788
Signals........................................................................................790
Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)........................ 793
Identification............................................................................... 793
Functionality............................................................................... 793
Function blocks...........................................................................795
Logic diagrams........................................................................... 797
Signals........................................................................................802
Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3)............................................. 806
Identification............................................................................... 807
18
Technical manual
Table of contents
Functionality............................................................................... 807
Logic diagrams........................................................................... 808
Function block............................................................................ 812
Signals........................................................................................813
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)............................................ 816
Identification............................................................................... 817
Functionality............................................................................... 817
Function block............................................................................ 818
Logic diagram............................................................................. 819
Signals........................................................................................824
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)..............................827
Identification............................................................................... 827
Functionality............................................................................... 827
Function block............................................................................ 828
Logic diagram............................................................................. 829
Signals........................................................................................831
Position evaluation POS_EVAL.......................................................833
Identification............................................................................... 833
Functionality............................................................................... 833
Function block............................................................................ 833
Logic diagram............................................................................. 833
Signals........................................................................................834
Apparatus control APC......................................................................... 834
Functionality.................................................................................... 834
Error handling.................................................................................. 836
Bay control QCBAY......................................................................... 839
Functionality............................................................................... 839
Function block............................................................................ 839
Signals........................................................................................839
Settings.......................................................................................840
Local/Remote switch LOCREM, LOCREMCTRL............................ 842
Function block............................................................................ 842
Signals........................................................................................843
Settings.......................................................................................844
Switch controller SCSWI..................................................................846
Functionality .............................................................................. 846
Function block............................................................................ 846
Technical manual
19
Table of contents
Signals........................................................................................846
Settings.......................................................................................848
Circuit breaker SXCBR....................................................................855
Functionality .............................................................................. 855
Function block............................................................................ 856
Signals........................................................................................856
Settings.......................................................................................857
Circuit switch SXSWI....................................................................... 862
Functionality .............................................................................. 862
Function block............................................................................ 863
Signals........................................................................................863
Settings.......................................................................................864
Bay reserve QCRSV........................................................................869
Functionality............................................................................... 869
Function block............................................................................ 869
Signals........................................................................................870
Settings.......................................................................................871
Reservation input RESIN.................................................................873
Functionality............................................................................... 873
Function block............................................................................ 874
Signals........................................................................................874
Settings.......................................................................................875
Voltage control......................................................................................877
Identification.................................................................................... 877
Functionality.................................................................................... 877
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC
(84) and TCLYLTC (84)...................................................................878
Function block................................................................................. 882
Signals.............................................................................................883
Settings............................................................................................887
Monitored data.................................................................................888
Technical data................................................................................. 889
20
Technical manual
Table of contents
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation

SLGAPC............................................................................................... 890
Identification.................................................................................... 890
Functionality.................................................................................... 891
Function block................................................................................. 891
Signals.............................................................................................892
Settings............................................................................................893
Monitored data.................................................................................893
Graphical display........................................................................ 894
Selector mini switch VSGAPC.............................................................. 895
Identification.................................................................................... 895
Functionality.................................................................................... 896
Function block................................................................................. 896
Signals.............................................................................................896
Settings............................................................................................897
Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC898
Identification.................................................................................... 898
Functionality.................................................................................... 898
Function block................................................................................. 898
Signals.............................................................................................899
Settings............................................................................................899
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC...............................899
Identification.................................................................................... 899
Functionality.................................................................................... 899
Function block................................................................................. 900
Signals.............................................................................................900
Settings............................................................................................901
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS................ 902
Identification.................................................................................... 902
Functionality.................................................................................... 902
Function block................................................................................. 903
Signals.............................................................................................903
Settings............................................................................................904
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD.......................................... 920
Identification.................................................................................... 920
Technical manual
21
Table of contents
Functionality.................................................................................... 920
Function block................................................................................. 921
Signals.............................................................................................921
Settings............................................................................................922
Section 15 Logic..................................................................................923
Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94).............................................................. 923
Identification.................................................................................... 923
Functionality.................................................................................... 923
Function block................................................................................. 924
Signals.............................................................................................924
Settings............................................................................................925
Logic diagram............................................................................. 927
Technical data................................................................................. 931
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC..................................................................932
Identification.................................................................................... 932
Functionality.................................................................................... 932
Function block................................................................................. 933
Signals.............................................................................................933
Settings............................................................................................935
Technical data................................................................................. 936
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH..........................................................937
Identification.................................................................................... 937
Functionality.................................................................................... 937
Function block................................................................................. 937
Signals.............................................................................................937
Settings............................................................................................938
Technical data................................................................................. 939
Logic for group warning WRNCALH..................................................... 939
Identification.................................................................................... 939
Functionality.................................................................................... 939
Function block................................................................................. 940
Signals.............................................................................................940
Settings............................................................................................941
Technical data................................................................................. 941
22
Technical manual
Table of contents
Logic for group indication INDCALH.....................................................942

Identification.................................................................................... 942
Functionality.................................................................................... 942
Function block................................................................................. 942
Signals.............................................................................................942
Settings............................................................................................943
Technical data................................................................................. 944
Basic configurable logic blocks.............................................................944
AND function block AND................................................................. 945
Function block............................................................................ 945
Signals........................................................................................946
Technical data............................................................................ 946
Controllable gate function block GATE............................................946
Function block............................................................................ 946
Signals........................................................................................946
Settings.......................................................................................947
Technical data............................................................................ 947
Inverter function block INV.............................................................. 947
Function block............................................................................ 947
Signals........................................................................................947
Technical data............................................................................ 948
Loop delay function block LLD........................................................ 948
Function block............................................................................ 948
Signals........................................................................................948
Technical data............................................................................ 948
OR function block OR......................................................................949
Function block............................................................................ 949
Signals........................................................................................949
Technical data............................................................................ 949
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER........................................950
Function block............................................................................ 950
Signals........................................................................................950
Settings.......................................................................................950
Technical data............................................................................ 950
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY.......................951
Function block............................................................................ 951
Signals........................................................................................951
Settings.......................................................................................952
Technical data............................................................................ 952
Technical manual
23
Table of contents
Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY....................... 952

Function block............................................................................ 952
Signals........................................................................................953
Settings.......................................................................................953
Technical data............................................................................ 953
Settable timer function block TIMERSET........................................ 953
Function block............................................................................ 954
Signals........................................................................................954
Settings.......................................................................................955
Technical data............................................................................ 955
Exclusive OR function block XOR................................................... 955
Function block............................................................................ 955
Signals........................................................................................956
Technical data............................................................................ 956
Configurable logic blocks Q/T...............................................................956
ANDQT function block..................................................................... 958
Function block............................................................................ 958
Signals........................................................................................958
Technical data............................................................................ 958
Single point indication related signals combining function block
INDCOMBSPQT.............................................................................. 959
Function block............................................................................ 959
Signals........................................................................................959
Technical data............................................................................ 960
Single point input signal attributes converting function block
INDEXTSPQT..................................................................................960
Function block............................................................................ 960
Signals........................................................................................960
Technical data............................................................................ 961
Invalid logic function block INVALIDQT........................................... 961
Function block............................................................................ 962
Signals........................................................................................962
Technical data............................................................................ 963
Inverter function block INVERTERQT............................................. 963
Function block............................................................................ 963
Signals........................................................................................964
Technical data............................................................................ 964
ORQT function block....................................................................... 964
Function block............................................................................ 964
Signals........................................................................................964
24
Technical manual
Table of contents
Technical data............................................................................ 965

Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT...................................965
Function block............................................................................ 966
Signals........................................................................................966
Settings.......................................................................................966
Technical data............................................................................ 966
Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT.......................................966
Function block............................................................................ 967
Signals........................................................................................967
Settings.......................................................................................968
Technical data............................................................................ 968
Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT.......................................968
Function block............................................................................ 969
Signals........................................................................................969
Settings.......................................................................................969
Technical data............................................................................ 969
Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT................................... 969
Function block............................................................................ 970
Signals........................................................................................970
Settings.......................................................................................970
Technical data............................................................................ 971
Exclusive OR function block XORQT.............................................. 971
Function block............................................................................ 971
Signals........................................................................................971
Technical data............................................................................ 972
Extension logic package....................................................................... 972
Fixed signals FXDSIGN........................................................................973
Identification.................................................................................... 973
Functionality.................................................................................... 973
Function block................................................................................. 973
Signals.............................................................................................973
Settings............................................................................................974
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I.................................................974
Identification.................................................................................... 974
Function block................................................................................. 975
Signals.............................................................................................975
Monitored data.................................................................................976
Settings............................................................................................976
Technical manual
25
Table of contents
Technical data................................................................................. 977

Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation
BTIGAPC.............................................................................................. 977
Identification.................................................................................... 977
Functionality.................................................................................... 978
Function block................................................................................. 978
Signals.............................................................................................978
Settings............................................................................................979
Monitored data.................................................................................979
Technical data................................................................................. 980
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16................................................. 981
Identification.................................................................................... 981
Functionality.................................................................................... 981
Function block................................................................................. 981
Signals.............................................................................................981
Setting parameters.......................................................................... 982
Technical data................................................................................. 984
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation IT
BGAPC................................................................................................. 984
Identification.................................................................................... 984
Functionality.................................................................................... 984
Function block................................................................................. 985
Signals.............................................................................................985
Settings............................................................................................986
Technical data................................................................................. 987
Pulse integrator TIGAPC...................................................................... 987
Identification.................................................................................... 988
Functionality.................................................................................... 988
Function block................................................................................. 988
Signals.............................................................................................988
Settings............................................................................................988
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
supervision TEIGAPC...........................................................................991
Identification.................................................................................... 991
Functionality.................................................................................... 991
Function block................................................................................. 992
26
Technical manual
Table of contents
Signals.............................................................................................993
Settings............................................................................................993
Operation accuracy.................................................................... 995
Memory storage..........................................................................995
Technical data................................................................................. 995
Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP............................................. 996
Identification.................................................................................... 996
Functionality.................................................................................... 996
Function block................................................................................. 996
Signals.............................................................................................996
Settings............................................................................................997
Technical data................................................................................. 998
Comparator for real inputs - REALCOMP.............................................998
Identification.................................................................................... 998
Functionality.................................................................................... 998
Function block................................................................................. 999
Signals.............................................................................................999
Settings............................................................................................999
Operation principle........................................................................ 1000
Technical data............................................................................... 1001
Section 16 Monitoring........................................................................1003
Measurements.................................................................................... 1003
Identification.................................................................................. 1003
Functionality.................................................................................. 1004
Function block............................................................................... 1005
Signals...........................................................................................1007
Settings..........................................................................................1010
Monitored data...............................................................................1023
Measurement supervision........................................................ 1025
Measurements CVMMXN.........................................................1030
Phase current measurement CMMXU......................................1035
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU.................................................................. 1036
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI1036
Technical data............................................................................... 1036
Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63)................................................ 1038
Technical manual
27
Table of contents
Identification.................................................................................. 1038
Functionality.................................................................................. 1039
Function block............................................................................... 1039
Signals...........................................................................................1039
Settings..........................................................................................1040
Technical data............................................................................... 1041
Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71).............................................. 1042
Identification.................................................................................. 1042
Functionality.................................................................................. 1042
Function block............................................................................... 1042
Signals...........................................................................................1042
Settings..........................................................................................1043
Technical data............................................................................... 1044
Breaker monitoring SSCBR................................................................ 1045
Identification.................................................................................. 1045
Functionality.................................................................................. 1045
Function block............................................................................... 1046
Signals...........................................................................................1046
Settings..........................................................................................1047
Monitored data...............................................................................1049
Circuit breaker contact travel time............................................ 1051
Circuit breaker status................................................................1053
Remaining life of circuit breaker............................................... 1053
Accumulated energy.................................................................1054
Circuit breaker operation cycles............................................... 1056
Circuit breaker operation monitoring........................................ 1057
Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring..................................1058
Circuit breaker gas pressure indication.................................... 1058
Technical data............................................................................... 1059
Event function EVENT........................................................................ 1060
Identification.................................................................................. 1060
Functionality.................................................................................. 1060
Function block............................................................................... 1060
Signals...........................................................................................1061
Settings..........................................................................................1062
Disturbance report DRPRDRE........................................................... 1065
28
Technical manual
Table of contents
Identification.................................................................................. 1065
Functionality.................................................................................. 1066
Function block............................................................................... 1066
Signals...........................................................................................1068
Settings..........................................................................................1070
Monitored data...............................................................................1079
Technical data............................................................................... 1091
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP......................................... 1091
Identification.................................................................................. 1091
Functionality.................................................................................. 1091
Function block............................................................................... 1092
Signals...........................................................................................1092
Settings..........................................................................................1093
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP.................................... 1094
Identification.................................................................................. 1094
Functionality.................................................................................. 1094
Function block............................................................................... 1095
Signals...........................................................................................1095
Limit counter L4UFCNT...................................................................... 1096
Identification.................................................................................. 1096
Identification............................................................................. 1096
Functionality.................................................................................. 1096
Design...................................................................................... 1096
Reporting.................................................................................. 1098
Function block............................................................................... 1098
Signals...........................................................................................1098
Settings..........................................................................................1099
Monitored data...............................................................................1099
Technical data............................................................................... 1100
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC ........................................................ 1100
Identification.................................................................................. 1100
Functionality.................................................................................. 1100
Function block............................................................................... 1101
Signals...........................................................................................1101
Settings..........................................................................................1102
Technical manual
29
Table of contents
Operation accuracy.................................................................. 1103

Memory storage........................................................................1104
Technical data............................................................................... 1104
Section 17 Metering.......................................................................... 1105

Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT..............................................................1105
Identification.................................................................................. 1105
Functionality.................................................................................. 1105
Function block............................................................................... 1105
Signals...........................................................................................1106
Settings..........................................................................................1106
Monitored data...............................................................................1107
Technical data............................................................................... 1109
Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR.... 1109
Identification.................................................................................. 1109
Functionality.................................................................................. 1109
Function block............................................................................... 1110
Signals...........................................................................................1111
Settings..........................................................................................1112
Monitored data...............................................................................1113
Technical data............................................................................... 1117
Technical data.......................................................................... 1117
Section 18 Station communication.................................................... 1119

Communication protocols................................................................... 1119
Communication protocol diagnostics.................................................. 1119
DNP3 protocol.................................................................................... 1120
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol............................................. 1121
Communication interfaces and protocols...................................... 1121
Settings..........................................................................................1121
Technical data............................................................................... 1122
Generic communication function for Single Point indication
SPGAPC, SP16GAPC...................................................................1122
Functionality............................................................................. 1122
Function block.......................................................................... 1122
Signals......................................................................................1123
Settings.....................................................................................1124
Monitored data..........................................................................1124
Operation principle................................................................... 1125
30
Technical manual
Table of contents
Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC.. 1125

Functionality............................................................................. 1125
Function block.......................................................................... 1125
Signals......................................................................................1126
Settings.....................................................................................1126
Monitored data..........................................................................1127
Operation principle................................................................... 1127
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication.................. 1127
Functionality............................................................................. 1127
Function block.......................................................................... 1127
Signals......................................................................................1128
Settings.....................................................................................1128
Monitored data..........................................................................1128
Principle of operation................................................................1129
LON communication protocol............................................................. 1131
Functionality.................................................................................. 1131
Settings..........................................................................................1131
Technical data............................................................................... 1151
SPA communication protocol..............................................................1151
Functionality.................................................................................. 1151
Design........................................................................................... 1151
Settings..........................................................................................1152
Communication ports................................................................1160
Technical data............................................................................... 1161
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol......................................... 1161
Introduction....................................................................................1161
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS............................... 1161
Functionality............................................................................. 1161
Identification............................................................................. 1162
Function block.......................................................................... 1162
Signals......................................................................................1162
Settings.....................................................................................1163
Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR..............................................................................1163
Functionality............................................................................. 1163
Identification............................................................................. 1163
Function block.......................................................................... 1164
Signals......................................................................................1164
Technical manual
31
Table of contents
Settings.....................................................................................1164
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR..........1165
Functionality............................................................................. 1165
Identification............................................................................. 1165
Function block.......................................................................... 1165
Signals......................................................................................1166
Settings.....................................................................................1166
Function status ground-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF............1166
Functionality............................................................................. 1166
Identification............................................................................. 1166
Function block.......................................................................... 1166
Signals......................................................................................1167
Settings.....................................................................................1167
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT............................................................................... 1167
Functionality............................................................................. 1167
Identification............................................................................. 1167
Function block.......................................................................... 1168
Signals......................................................................................1168
Settings.....................................................................................1169
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED...................................... 1169
Functionality............................................................................. 1169
Identification............................................................................. 1170
Function block.......................................................................... 1170
Signals......................................................................................1170
Settings.....................................................................................1170
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV..................1171
Functionality............................................................................. 1171
Identification............................................................................. 1171
Function block.......................................................................... 1171
Signals......................................................................................1171
Settings.....................................................................................1172
Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRDEF1172
Functionality............................................................................. 1172
Identification............................................................................. 1172
Function block.......................................................................... 1172
Signals......................................................................................1173
Settings.....................................................................................1173
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD.................... 1175
Functionality............................................................................. 1175
32
Technical manual
Table of contents
Identification............................................................................. 1175
Function block.......................................................................... 1175
Signals......................................................................................1175
Settings.....................................................................................1175
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD...................... 1176
Functionality............................................................................. 1176
Identification............................................................................. 1176
Function block.......................................................................... 1176
Signals......................................................................................1176
Settings.....................................................................................1177
Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD................................................................................1177
Functionality............................................................................. 1177
Identification............................................................................. 1177
Function block.......................................................................... 1177
Signals......................................................................................1177
Settings.....................................................................................1178
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD 1178
Functionality............................................................................. 1178
Identification............................................................................. 1179
Function block.......................................................................... 1179
Signals......................................................................................1179
Settings.....................................................................................1180
IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD................................................................................1180
Functionality............................................................................. 1180
Identification............................................................................. 1180
Function block.......................................................................... 1181
Signals......................................................................................1181
Settings.....................................................................................1181
Operation principle ....................................................................... 1181
General.....................................................................................1181
Communication ports................................................................1193
Technical data............................................................................... 1193
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEINTLKRCV.............................................................................1193
Functionality.................................................................................. 1193
Function block............................................................................... 1194
Signals...........................................................................................1195
Settings..........................................................................................1196
Technical manual
33
Table of contents
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV.............................................. 1197

Function block............................................................................... 1197
Signals...........................................................................................1197
Settings..........................................................................................1199
GOOSE function block to receive a double point value
GOOSEDPRCV.................................................................................. 1199
Identification.................................................................................. 1199
Functionality.................................................................................. 1199
Function block............................................................................... 1199
Signals...........................................................................................1199
Settings..........................................................................................1200
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value GOOSEINTRCV.1201
Identification.................................................................................. 1201
Functionality.................................................................................. 1201
Function block............................................................................... 1201
Signals...........................................................................................1201
Settings..........................................................................................1202
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value GOOSEMVRCV1202
Identification.................................................................................. 1202
Functionality.................................................................................. 1203
Function block............................................................................... 1203
Signals...........................................................................................1203
Settings..........................................................................................1203
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value GOOSESPRCV1204
Identification.................................................................................. 1204
Functionality.................................................................................. 1204
Function block............................................................................... 1204
Signals...........................................................................................1205
Settings..........................................................................................1205
MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND...............................................1206
Functionality.................................................................................. 1206
Design........................................................................................... 1206
General.....................................................................................1206
Function block............................................................................... 1207
Signals...........................................................................................1207
Settings..........................................................................................1209
34
Technical manual
Table of contents

Security events on protocols SECALARM..........................................1210
Security alarm SECALARM........................................................... 1210
Signals......................................................................................1210
Settings.....................................................................................1210
Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG............................................. 1210
Activity logging ACTIVLOG........................................................... 1210
Settings..........................................................................................1211
Section 19 Remote communication...................................................1213

Binary signal transfer.......................................................................... 1213
Identification.................................................................................. 1213
Functionality.................................................................................. 1213
Function block............................................................................... 1214
Signals...........................................................................................1215
Settings..........................................................................................1216
Monitored data...............................................................................1219
Transmission of analog data from LDCM LDCMTransmit.................. 1221
Function block............................................................................... 1221
Signals...........................................................................................1221
Section 20 Basic IED functions......................................................... 1223

Authority check ATHCHCK.................................................................1223
Identification.................................................................................. 1223
Functionality.................................................................................. 1223
Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED1226
Authority management AUTHMAN.....................................................1229
Identification.................................................................................. 1229
AUTHMAN.....................................................................................1229
Settings..........................................................................................1229
FTP access with password FTPACCS............................................... 1230
Identification.................................................................................. 1230
FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS.................................................. 1230
Settings..........................................................................................1230
Authority status ATHSTAT..................................................................1231
Identification.................................................................................. 1231
Functionality.................................................................................. 1231
Function block............................................................................... 1231
Signals...........................................................................................1231
Technical manual
35
Table of contents
Settings..........................................................................................1231
Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG.......................... 1232
Functionality.................................................................................. 1232
Function block............................................................................... 1232
Signals...........................................................................................1233
Settings..........................................................................................1233
Internal signals......................................................................... 1235
Supervision of analog inputs.................................................... 1237
Technical data............................................................................... 1237
Time synchronization..........................................................................1238
Functionality.................................................................................. 1238
Settings..........................................................................................1238
General concepts..................................................................... 1243
Real-time clock (RTC) operation.............................................. 1245
Synchronization alternatives.....................................................1246
Technical data............................................................................... 1250
Parameter setting groups................................................................... 1250
Functionality.................................................................................. 1250
Function block............................................................................... 1250
Signals...........................................................................................1251
Settings..........................................................................................1251
ChangeLock function CHNGLCK....................................................... 1253
Functionality.................................................................................. 1253
Function block............................................................................... 1254
Signals...........................................................................................1254
Test mode functionality TEST.............................................................1255
Functionality.................................................................................. 1255
Function block............................................................................... 1255
Signals...........................................................................................1256
Settings..........................................................................................1256
IED identifiers..................................................................................... 1257
Functionality.................................................................................. 1257
Settings .........................................................................................1258
Product information.............................................................................1258
36
Technical manual
Table of contents
Functionality.................................................................................. 1258
Settings .........................................................................................1259
Factory defined settings................................................................ 1259
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI...................................................1260
Functionality.................................................................................. 1260
Function block............................................................................... 1260
Signals...........................................................................................1260
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ..............................................1261
Functionality.................................................................................. 1261
Function block............................................................................... 1262
Signals...........................................................................................1262
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI...................................................... 1262
Functionality.................................................................................. 1263
Function block............................................................................... 1263
Signals...........................................................................................1263
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI..................................................1264
Functionality.................................................................................. 1264
Function block............................................................................... 1264
Signals...........................................................................................1265
Settings..........................................................................................1266
Frequency values..................................................................... 1269
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM.................................................. 1270
Functionality.................................................................................. 1270
Function block............................................................................... 1270
Signals...........................................................................................1271
Settings..........................................................................................1271
Global base values GBASVAL........................................................... 1272
Identification.................................................................................. 1272
Functionality.................................................................................. 1272
Settings..........................................................................................1273
Primary system values PRIMVAL.......................................................1273
Identification.................................................................................. 1273
Functionality.................................................................................. 1273
Settings..........................................................................................1273
Denial of service DOS........................................................................ 1274
Technical manual
37
Table of contents
Functionality ................................................................................. 1274

Function blocks..............................................................................1274
Signals...........................................................................................1274
Settings..........................................................................................1275
Monitored data...............................................................................1275
Section 21 IED hardware.................................................................. 1277

Overview.............................................................................................1277
Variants of case size with local HMI display.................................. 1277
Case from the rear side................................................................. 1279
Hardware modules..............................................................................1284
Overview........................................................................................1284
Numeric processing module (NUM).............................................. 1285
Introduction...............................................................................1285
Functionality............................................................................. 1285
Block diagram...........................................................................1286
Power supply module (PSM)......................................................... 1286
Introduction...............................................................................1286
Design...................................................................................... 1287
Technical data.......................................................................... 1287
Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)................................. 1287
Transformer input module (TRM).................................................. 1287
Introduction...............................................................................1287
Design...................................................................................... 1288
Technical data.......................................................................... 1289
Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
(ADM) ........................................................................................... 1290
Introduction...............................................................................1290
Design...................................................................................... 1291
Binary input module (BIM)............................................................. 1293
Introduction...............................................................................1293
Design...................................................................................... 1293
Signals......................................................................................1296
Settings.....................................................................................1297
Monitored data..........................................................................1297
Technical data.......................................................................... 1298
Binary output modules (BOM)....................................................... 1299
Introduction...............................................................................1299
Design...................................................................................... 1299
38
Technical manual
Table of contents
Signals......................................................................................1300
Settings.....................................................................................1301
Monitored data..........................................................................1301
Technical data.......................................................................... 1305
Static binary output module (SOM)............................................... 1306
Introduction...............................................................................1306
Design...................................................................................... 1306
Signals......................................................................................1307
Settings.....................................................................................1308
Monitored data..........................................................................1308
Technical data.......................................................................... 1310
Binary input/output module (IOM)..................................................1311
Introduction...............................................................................1311
Design...................................................................................... 1312
Signals......................................................................................1314
Settings.....................................................................................1315
Monitored data..........................................................................1315
Technical data.......................................................................... 1317
mA input module (MIM)................................................................. 1320
Introduction...............................................................................1320
Design...................................................................................... 1320
Signals......................................................................................1322
Settings.....................................................................................1322
Monitored data..........................................................................1324
Technical data.......................................................................... 1324
Serial and LON communication module (SLM) ............................ 1324
Introduction...............................................................................1324
Design...................................................................................... 1325
Technical data.......................................................................... 1326
Galvanic RS485 communication module.......................................1326
Introduction...............................................................................1326
Design...................................................................................... 1326
Technical data.......................................................................... 1328
Optical ethernet module (OEM).....................................................1328
Introduction...............................................................................1328
Functionality............................................................................. 1328
Design...................................................................................... 1328
Technical data.......................................................................... 1329
Line data communication module (LDCM).................................... 1329
Introduction...............................................................................1329
Technical manual
39
Table of contents
Design...................................................................................... 1330
Technical data.......................................................................... 1331
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM).................. 1332
Introduction...............................................................................1332
Design...................................................................................... 1332
Functionality............................................................................. 1335
Technical data.......................................................................... 1335
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)..................................... 1336
Introduction...............................................................................1336
Design...................................................................................... 1336
Monitored data..........................................................................1336
Technical data.......................................................................... 1336
GPS antenna................................................................................. 1337
Introduction...............................................................................1337
Design...................................................................................... 1337
Technical data.......................................................................... 1338
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B................................. 1338
Introduction...............................................................................1338
Design...................................................................................... 1338
Settings.....................................................................................1339
Technical data.......................................................................... 1339
Dimensions......................................................................................... 1341
Case without rear cover.................................................................1341
Case with rear cover......................................................................1343
Flush mounting dimensions...........................................................1345
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions....................................... 1346
Wall mounting dimensions.............................................................1348
External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection.... 1348
External current transformer unit................................................... 1350
Mounting alternatives..........................................................................1350
Flush mounting.............................................................................. 1350
Overview...................................................................................1350
Mounting procedure for flush mounting.................................... 1351
19 panel rack mounting................................................................ 1352
Overview...................................................................................1352
Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting.....................1353
Wall mounting................................................................................1354
Overview...................................................................................1354
Mounting procedure for wall mounting..................................... 1355
How to reach the rear side of the IED...................................... 1355
40
Technical manual
Table of contents
Side-by-side 19 rack mounting.....................................................1356

Overview...................................................................................1356
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting................ 1357
IED mounted with a RHGS6 case............................................ 1357
Side-by-side flush mounting.......................................................... 1358
Overview...................................................................................1358
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting................1359
Technical data.................................................................................... 1359
Enclosure.......................................................................................1359
Electrical safety............................................................................. 1360
Connection system........................................................................ 1360
Influencing factors......................................................................... 1361
Type tests according to standard.................................................. 1362
Section 22 Injection equipment hardware......................................... 1365

Overview.............................................................................................1365
Front view of injection unit, coupling capacitor and shunt resitor unit1365
Injection unit REX060............................................................... 1365
REX060 Front panel controls................................................... 1366
Coupling capacitor unit REX061...............................................1368
Shunt resistor unit REX062...................................................... 1369
Injection unit REX060 from rear side.............................................1371
Injection unit REX060............................................................... 1371
Injection unit REX060......................................................................... 1371
Introduction....................................................................................1371
Design........................................................................................... 1371
Coupling capacitor unit REX061.........................................................1375
Introduction....................................................................................1375
Design........................................................................................... 1375
Shunt resistor unit REX062................................................................ 1376
Introduction....................................................................................1376
Design........................................................................................... 1376
Technical data.................................................................................... 1378
Hardware....................................................................................... 1378
Type tests according to standards.................................................1380
Influencing factors......................................................................... 1382
Section 23 Labels..............................................................................1385
Labels on IED..................................................................................... 1385
Labels on injection equipment............................................................ 1388
Technical manual
41
Table of contents
Section 24 Connection diagrams...................................................... 1393

Section 25 Inverse time characteristics.............................................1395
Application.......................................................................................... 1395
Principle of operation.......................................................................... 1398
Mode of operation..........................................................................1398
Inverse characteristics........................................................................ 1404
Section 26 Glossary.......................................................................... 1435

Glossary..............................................................................................1435
42
Technical manual
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 1
Introduction
1.1
This manual
The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks,
logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
1.2
Intended audience
This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel,
who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal
service.
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection
equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the IEDs. The
installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in handling
electronic equipment.
Technical manual
43
Section 1
Introduction
Decommissioning
Deinstalling & disposal
Maintenance
Operation
Product documentation set
Commissioning
1.3.1
Engineering
Product documentation
Planning & purchase
1.3
Installing
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Engineering manual
Installation manual
Commissioning manual
Operation manual
Application manual
Technical manual
Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd
IEC07000220 V4 EN
Figure 1:
The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle
The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the
various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions on
how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also
recommends a sequence for the engineering of protection and control functions, LHMI
functions as well as communication engineering for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, DNP3,
LON and SPA.
The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual
provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are organized
in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.
44
Technical manual
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The
manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance
during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external
circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as verifying
settings by secondary injection. The manual describes the process of testing an IED in a
substation which is not in service. The chapters are organized in the chronological order
in which the IED should be commissioned. The relevant procedures may be followed also
during the service and maintenance activities.
The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and
setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to
view calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.
The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted per
function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical
protection function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating
settings.
The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks,
logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported
by the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.
The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to the
IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding communication
protocol manual.
The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber security
when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role based access
control, and product engineering for cyber security related events are described and sorted
by function. The guideline can be used as a technical reference during the engineering
phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
1.3.2
Document revision history

Document revision/date
History
December 2015
First release
A/February 2016
Minor updates
Technical manual
45
Section 1
Introduction
1.3.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Related documents
Documents related to REG670
Document numbers
Application manual
1MRK 502 065-UUS
Commissioning manual
1MRK 502 067-UUS
Product guide
1MRK 502 068-BEN
Technical manual
1MRK 502 066-UUS
Type test certificate
1MRK 502 068-TUS
670 series manuals
Document numbers
Operation manual
1MRK 500 123-UUS
Engineering manual
1MRK 511 355-UUS
Installation manual
1MRK 514 024-UUS
Communication protocol manual, DNP3
1MRK 511 348-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition

2
1MRK 511 350-UEN
Point list manual, DNP3
1MRK 511 354-UUS
Accessories guide
1MRK 514 012-BUS
Connection and Installation components
1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST
1MRK 512 001-BEN
1.4
Document symbols and conventions
1.4.1
Symbols
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could
result in electrical shock.
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
personal injury.
The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or warning

about the temperature of product surfaces.
46
Technical manual
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Class 1 Laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes and do
not view directly with optical instruments.
The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the

concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard
which could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or
property.
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project
or how to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that
under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in
degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important that the
user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.
1.4.2
Document conventions
Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push
button icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use
and
.
HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press
.
Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
Technical manual
47
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered
by dashed lines.
1.5
the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the signal
name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must be
connected to another function block in the application configuration to achieve
a valid application configuration.
Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting
parameter signals that are only settable via the PST or LHMI.
If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix -int
is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues.
Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another
diagram have the suffix -cont.
Dimensions are provided both in inches and mm. If it is not specifically mentioned
then the dimension is in mm.
IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Table 1:
IEC61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping
Function block name
Edition 1 logical nodes
AEGPVOC
AEGGAPC
AEGPVOC
AGSAL
AGSAL
SECLLN0
AGSAL
ALMCALH
ALMCALH
ALMCALH
ALTIM
ALTIM
ALTMS
ALTMS
ALTRK
ALTRK
BCZSPDIF
BCZSPDIF
BCZSPDIF
BCZTPDIF
BCZTPDIF
BCZTPDIF
BDCGAPC
SWSGGIO
BBCSWI
BDCGAPC
BRCPTOC
BRCPTOC
BRCPTOC
BRPTOC
BRPTOC
BRPTOC
BTIGAPC
B16IFCVI
BTIGAPC
BUSPTRC_B1
BUSPTRC
BBSPLLN0
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B2
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B3
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
Table continues on next page
48
Technical manual
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block name
BUSPTRC_B4
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B5
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B6
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B7
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B8
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B9
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B10
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B11
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B12
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B13
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B14
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B15
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B16
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B17
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B18
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B19
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B20
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B21
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B22
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B23
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B24
BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC
BUTPTRC_B1
BUTPTRC
BBTPLLN0
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B2
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B3
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B4
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B5
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B6
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B7
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B8
BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC
BZISGGIO
BZISGGIO
BZISGAPC
BZITGGIO
BZITGGIO
BZITGAPC
BZNSPDIF_A
BZNSPDIF
BZASGAPC
BZASPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
Technical manual
49
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block name
BZNSPDIF_B
BZNSPDIF
BZBSGAPC
BZBSPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNTPDIF_A
BZNTPDIF
BZATGAPC
BZATPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
BZNTPDIF_B
BZNTPDIF
BZBTGAPC
BZBTPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
CBPGAPC
CBPLLN0
CBPMMXU
CBPPTRC
HOLPTOV
HPH1PTOV
PH3PTUC
PH3PTOC
RP3PDOP
CBPMMXU
CBPPTRC
HOLPTOV
HPH1PTOV
PH3PTOC
PH3PTUC
RP3PDOP
CCPDSC
CCRPLD
CCPDSC
CCRBRF
CCRBRF
CCRBRF
CCRWRBRF
CCRWRBRF
CCRWRBRF
CCSRBRF
CCSRBRF
CCSRBRF
CCSSPVC
CCSRDIF
CCSSPVC
CMMXU
CMMXU
CMMXU
CMSQI
CMSQI
CMSQI
COUVGAPC
COUVLLN0
COUVPTOV
COUVPTUV
COUVPTOV
COUVPTUV
CVGAPC
GF2LLN0
GF2MMXN
GF2PHAR
GF2PTOV
GF2PTUC
GF2PTUV
GF2PVOC
PH1PTRC
GF2MMXN
GF2PHAR
GF2PTOV
GF2PTUC
GF2PTUV
GF2PVOC
PH1PTRC
CVMMXN
CVMMXN
CVMMXN
D2PTOC
D2LLN0
D2PTOC
PH1PTRC
D2PTOC
PH1PTRC
DPGAPC
DPGGIO
DPGAPC
DRPRDRE
DRPRDRE
DRPRDRE
ECPSCH
ECPSCH
ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH
ECRWPSCH
ECRWPSCH
50
Technical manual
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block name
EF2PTOC
EF2LLN0
EF2PTRC
EF2RDIR
GEN2PHAR
PH1PTOC
EF2PTRC
EF2RDIR
GEN2PHAR
PH1PTOC
EF4PTOC
EF4LLN0
EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
EFPIOC
EFPIOC
EFPIOC
EFRWPIOC
EFRWPIOC
EFRWPIOC
ETPMMTR
ETPMMTR
ETPMMTR
FDPSPDIS
FDPSPDIS
FDPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS
FRPSPDIS
FPSRPDIS
FPSRPDIS
FTAQFVR
FTAQFVR
FTAQFVR
FUFSPVC
SDDRFUF
FUFSPVC
SDDSPVC
GENPDIF
GENPDIF
GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC
GOOSEBINRCV
BINGREC
GOOSEDPRCV
DPGREC
GOOSEINTLKRCV
INTGREC
GOOSEINTRCV
INTSGREC
GOOSEMVRCV
MVGREC
GOOSESPRCV
BINSGREC
GOOSEVCTRRCV
VCTRGREC
GOPPDOP
GOPPDOP
GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
GRPTTR
GRPTTR
GRPTTR
GSPTTR
GSPTTR
GSPTTR
GUPPDUP
GUPPDUP
GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
HZPDIF
HZPDIF
HZPDIF
INDCALCH
INDCALH
INDCALH
ITBGAPC
IB16FCVB
ITBGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPDIF
L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC

Technical manual
51
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block name
L4UFCNT
L4UFCNT
L4UFCNT
L6CPDIF
L6CPDIF
L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC
LAPPGAPC
LAPPLLN0
LAPPPDUP
LAPPPUPF
LAPPPDUP
LAPPPUPF
LCCRPTRC
LCCRPTRC
LCCRPTRC
LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOV
LCNSPTOV
LCNSPTOV
LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTUC
LCP3PTUC
LCP3PTUC
LCPTTR
LCPTTR
LCPTTR
LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOV
LCZSPTOV
LCZSPTOV
LD0LLN0
LLN0
LDLPSCH
LDLPDIF
LDLPSCH
LDRGFC
STSGGIO
LDRGFC
LEXPDIS
LEXPDIS
LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC
LFPTTR
LFPTTR
LFPTTR
LMBRFLO
LMBRFLO
LMBRFLO
LOVPTUV
LOVPTUV
LOVPTUV
LPHD
LPHD
LPTTR
LPTTR
LPTTR
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPDIF
LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPDIF
LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC
MVGAPC
MVGGIO
MVGAPC
NS2PTOC
NS2LLN0
NS2PTOC
NS2PTRC
NS2PTOC
NS2PTRC
NS4PTOC
EF4LLN0
EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
EF4PTRC
EF4RDIR
PH1PTOC
52
Technical manual
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block name
O2RWPTOV
GEN2LLN0
O2RWPTOV
PH1PTRC
O2RWPTOV
PH1PTRC
OC4PTOC
OC4LLN0
GEN4PHAR
PH3PTOC
PH3PTRC
GEN4PHAR
PH3PTOC
PH3PTRC
OEXPVPH
OEXPVPH
OEXPVPH
OOSPPAM
OOSPPAM
OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC
OV2PTOV
GEN2LLN0
OV2PTOV
PH1PTRC
OV2PTOV
PH1PTRC
PAPGAPC
PAPGAPC
PAPGAPC
PCFCNT
PCGGIO
PCFCNT
PH4SPTOC
GEN4PHAR
OCNDLLN0
PH1BPTOC
PH1PTRC
GEN4PHAR
PH1BPTOC
PH1PTRC
PHPIOC
PHPIOC
PHPIOC
PRPSTATUS
RCHLCCH
RCHLCCH
SCHLCCH
PSLPSCH
ZMRPSL
PSLPSCH
PSPPPAM
PSPPPAM
PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC
QCBAY
QCBAY
QCRSV
QCRSV
QCRSV
REFPDIF
REFPDIF
REFPDIF
ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC
ROV2PTOV
GEN2LLN0
PH1PTRC
ROV2PTOV
PH1PTRC
ROV2PTOV
SAPFRC
SAPFRC
SAPFRC
SAPTOF
SAPTOF
SAPTOF
SAPTUF
SAPTUF
SAPTUF
SCCVPTOC
SCCVPTOC
SCCVPTOC
SCILO
SCILO
SCILO
SCSWI
SCSWI
SCSWI
SDEPSDE
SDEPSDE
SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
Technical manual
53
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block name

SESRSYN

RSY1LLN0
AUT1RSYN
MAN1RSYN
SYNRSYN
SINGLELCCH

AUT1RSYN
MAN1RSYN
SYNRSYN
SCHLCCH
SLGAPC
SLGGIO
SLGAPC
SMBRREC
SMBRREC
SMBRREC
SMPPTRC
SMPPTRC
SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC
SP16GGIO
SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC
SPC8GGIO
SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC
SPGGIO
SPGAPC
SSCBR
SSCBR
SSCBR
SSIMG
SSIMG
SSIMG
SSIML
SSIML
SSIML
STBPTOC
STBPTOC
BBPMSS
STBPTOC
STEFPHIZ
STEFPHIZ
STEFPHIZ
STTIPHIZ
STTIPHIZ
STTIPHIZ
SXCBR
SXCBR
SXCBR
SXSWI
SXSWI
SXSWI
T2WPDIF
T2WPDIF
T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC
T3WPDIF
T3WPDIF
T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
TCLYLTC
TCLYLTC
TCLYLTC
TCSLTC
TCMYLTC
TCMYLTC
TCMYLTC
TEIGAPC
TEIGGIO
TEIGAPC
TEIGGIO
TEILGAPC
TEILGGIO
TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC
TMAGGIO
TMAGAPC
TPPIOC
TPPIOC
TPPIOC
TR1ATCC
TR1ATCC
TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC
TR8ATCC
TR8ATCC
TRPTTR
TRPTTR
TRPTTR
U2RWPTUV
GEN2LLN0
PH1PTRC
U2RWPTUV
PH1PTRC
U2RWPTUV

54
Technical manual
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block name
UV2PTUV
GEN2LLN0
PH1PTRC
UV2PTUV
PH1PTRC
UV2PTUV
VDCPTOV
VDCPTOV
VDCPTOV
VDSPVC
VDRFUF
VDSPVC
VMMXU
VMMXU
VMMXU
VMSQI
VMSQI
VMSQI
VNMMXU
VNMMXU
VNMMXU
VRPVOC
VRLLN0
PH1PTRC
PH1PTUV
VRPVOC
PH1PTRC
PH1PTUV
VRPVOC
VSGAPC
VSGGIO
VSGAPC
WRNCALH
WRNCALH
WRNCALH
ZC1PPSCH
ZPCPSCH
ZPCPSCH
ZC1WPSCH
ZPCWPSCH
ZPCWPSCH
ZCLCPSCH
ZCLCPLAL
ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH
ZCPSCH
ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH
ZCRWPSCH
ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF
ZCVPSOF
ZCVPSOF
ZGVPDIS
ZGVLLN0
PH1PTRC
ZGVPDIS
ZGVPTUV
PH1PTRC
ZGVPDIS
ZGVPTUV
ZMCAPDIS
ZMCAPDIS
ZMCAPDIS
ZMCPDIS
ZMCPDIS
ZMCPDIS
ZMFCPDIS
ZMFCLLN0
PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU
PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU
ZMFPDIS
ZMFLLN0
PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU
PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU
ZMHPDIS
ZMHPDIS
ZMHPDIS
ZMMAPDIS
ZMMAPDIS
ZMMAPDIS
ZMMPDIS
ZMMPDIS
ZMMPDIS
ZMQAPDIS
ZMQAPDIS
ZMQAPDIS
ZMQPDIS
ZMQPDIS
ZMQPDIS
ZMRAPDIS
ZMRAPDIS
ZMRAPDIS
Technical manual
55
Section 1
Introduction
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block name
56
ZMRPDIS
ZMRPDIS
ZMRPDIS
ZMRPSB
ZMRPSB
ZMRPSB
ZSMGAPC
ZSMGAPC
ZSMGAPC
Technical manual
Section 2
Available functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 2
Available functions
2.1
Main protection functions

Table 2:
IEC 61850
ANSI
Example of quantities
= number of basic instances
0-3
= option quantities
3-A03
= optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)
Function description
Generator
REG670 (Customized)
Differential protection
T2WPDIF
87T
Transformer differential protection, two winding
0-2
T3WPDIF
87T
Transformer differential protection, three winding
0-2
HZPDIF
87
1Ph high impedance differential protection
0-6
GENPDIF
87G
Generator differential protection
0-2
REFPDIF
87N
Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance
0-3
Impedance protection
ZMHPDIS
21
Fullscheme distance protection, mho characteristic
0-4
ZDMRDIR
21D
0-2
ZMFPDIS
21
High speed distance protection
01
ZMFCPDIS
21
High speed distance protection for series compensated

lines
01
PSPPPAM
78
Pole slip/out-of-step protection
0-1
OOSPPAM
78
Out-of-step protection
0-1
LEXPDIS
40
Loss of excitation
0-2
ROTIPHIZ
64R
Sensitive rotor ground fault protection, injection based
0-1
STTIPHIZ
64S
100% stator ground fault protection, injection based
0-1
ZGVPDIS
21
Underimpedance protection for generators and

transformers
01
Technical manual
57
Section 2
Available functions
2.2
IEC 61850
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Back-up protection functions

ANSI
REG670 (Customized)
Current protection
PHPIOC
50
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection
0-4
OC4PTOC
51_671)
Four step phase overcurrent protection
0-6
EFPIOC
50N
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection
0-2
EF4PTOC
51N
67N2)
Four step residual overcurrent protection
0-6
NS4PTOC
46I2
Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection
0-2
SDEPSDE
67N
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection
0-2
TRPTTR
49
Thermal overload protection, two time constant
0-3
CCRBRF
50BF
Breaker failure protection
0-4
CCPDSC
52PD
Pole discordance protection
0-4
GUPPDUP
37
Directional underpower protection
0-4
GOPPDOP
32
Directional overpower protection
0-4
NS2PTOC
46I2
Negative sequence time overcurrent protection for

machines
0-2
AEGPVOC
50AE
Accidental energizing protection for synchronous

generator
0-2
VRPVOC
51V
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection
0-3
GSPTTR
49S
Stator overload protection
0-1
GRPTTR
49R
Rotor overload protection
01
UV2PTUV
27
Two step undervoltage protection
0-2
OV2PTOV
59
Two step overvoltage protection
0-2
ROV2PTOV
59N
Two step residual overvoltage protection
0-3
OEXPVPH
24
Overexcitation protection
0-2
VDCPTOV
60
Voltage differential protection
0-2
STEFPHIZ
59THD
100% stator earth fault protection, 3rd harmonic based
0-1
Voltage protection
Frequency protection
SAPTUF
81
Underfrequency protection
0-6
SAPTOF
81
Overfrequency protection
0-6
SAPFRC
81
Rate-of-change frequency protection
0-3
58
Technical manual
Section 2
Available functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC 61850
ANSI
FTAQFVR
81A
REG670 (Customized)
Frequency time accumulation protection
0-12
General current and voltage protection
1-12
Multipurpose filter
0-6
Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC
General calculation
SMAIHPAC
1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage
2.3
IEC 61850
Control and monitoring functions

ANSI
Generator
REG670
Control
SESRSYN
25
Synchrocheck, energizing check and

synchronizing
0-2
APC30
Apparatus control for up to 6 bays, max 30

apparatuses (6CBs) incl. interlocking
0-1
QCBAY
Apparatus control
1+5/APC30
LOCREM
Handling of LRswitch positions
1+5/APC30
LOCREMCTRL
LHMI control of PSTO
1+5/APC30
TR8ATCC
90
Automatic voltage control for tap changer, parallel

control
TCMYLTC
84
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary

inputs
0-4
TCLYLTC
84
Tap changer control and supervision, 32 binary

inputs
0-4
SLGAPC
Logic rotating switch for function selection and

LHMI presentation
15
VSGAPC
Selector mini switch
20
DPGAPC
Generic communication function for Double Point

indication
16
SPC8GAPC
Single point generic control 8 signals
AUTOBITS
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0
SINGLECMD
Single command, 16 signals
I103CMD
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103
I103GENCMD
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103
50
Technical manual
59
Section 2
Available functions
IEC 61850
ANSI
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Generator
REG670
I103POSCMD
IED commands with position and select for IEC

60870-5-103
50
I103POSCMDV
IED direct commands with position for IEC

60870-5-103
10
I103IEDCMD
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD
Function commands user defined for IEC

60870-5-103
Secondary system
supervision
CCSSPVC
87
Current circuit supervision
0-5
Fuse failure supervision
0-3
60
Fuse failure supervision based on voltage

difference
0-3
94
Tripping logic
12
TMAGAPC
Trip matrix logic
12
ALMCALH
Logic for group alarm
WRNCALH
Logic for group warning
INDCALH
Logic for group indication
AND, GATE, INV,

LLD, OR,
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR
Basic configurable logic blocks (see Table 3)
40-280
ANDQT,
INDCOMBSPQT,
INDEXTSPQT,
INVALIDQT,
INVERTERQT,
ORQT,
PULSETIMERQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
XORQT
Configurable logic blocks Q/T (see Table 4)
01
AND, GATE, INV,

LLD, OR,
PULSETIMER,
SLGAPC,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET,
VSGAPC, XOR
Extension logic package (see Table 5)
01
FXDSIGN
Fixed signal function block
B16I
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion
18
FUFSPVC
VDSPVC
Logic
SMPPTRC
60
Technical manual
Section 2
Available functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC 61850
ANSI
Generator
REG670
BTIGAPC
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with Logic Node

representation
16
IB16
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion
18
ITBGAPC
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with Logic Node

representation
16
TIGAPC
Delay on timer with input signal integration
30
TEIGAPC
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression

and overflow supervision
12
INTCOMP
Comparator for integer inputs
12
REALCOMP
Comparator for real inputs
12
CVMMXN,
VMMXU, CMSQI,
VMSQI, VNMMXU
Measurements
CMMXU
Measurements
10
AISVBAS
Function block for service value presentation of

secondary analog inputs
EVENT
Event function
20
DRPRDRE,
A1RADRA4RADR,
B1RBDRB8RBDR
Disturbance report
SPGAPC
Generic communication function for Single Point

indication
64
SP16GAPC
Generic communication function for Single Point

indication 16 inputs
16
MVGAPC
Generic communication function for Measured

Value
24
BINSTATREP
Logical signal status report
RANGE_XP
Measured value expander block
66
Gas medium supervision
21
Monitoring
SSIMG
63
SSIML
71
Liquid medium supervision
SSCBR
Circuit breaker monitoring
0-12
I103MEAS
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR
Measurands user defined signals for IEC

60870-5-103
I103AR
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103
I103EF
Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT
Function status fault protection for IEC

60870-5-103
Technical manual
61
Section 2
Available functions
IEC 61850
ANSI
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Generator
REG670
I103IED
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103
I103SUPERV
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRDEF
Status for user defined signals for IEC

60870-5-103
20
L4UFCNT
Event counter with limit supervision
30
TEILGAPC
Running hour-meter
PCFCNT
Pulse-counter logic
16
ETPMMTR
Function for energy calculation and demand

handling
Metering
Table 3:
Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks
Basic configurable logic block
Total number of instances
AND
280
GATE
40
INV
420
LLD
40
OR
280
PULSETIMER
40
RSMEMORY
40
SRMEMORY
40
TIMERSET
60
XOR
40
Table 4:
Total number of instances for configurable logic blocks Q/T
Configurable logic blocks Q/T
ANDQT
120
INDCOMBSPQT
20
INDEXTSPQT
20
INVALIDQT
22
INVERTERQT
120
ORQT
120
PULSETIMERQT
40
RSMEMORYQT
40
62
Technical manual
Section 2
Available functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
SRMEMORYQT
40
TIMERSETQT
40
XORQT
40
Table 5:
Total number of instances for extended logic package
Extended configurable logic block
AND
180
GATE
49
INV
180
LLD
49
OR
180
PULSETIMER
59
SLGAPC
74
SRMEMORY
110
TIMERSET
49
VSGAPC
130
XOR
49
2.4
IEC 61850
Communication
ANSI
Generator
REG670
(Customized)
Station communication
LONSPA, SPA
SPA communication protocol
ADE
LON communication protocol
HORZCOMM
Network variables via LON
PROTOCOL
Operation selection between SPA and IEC 60870-5-103 for

SLM
RS485PROT
Operation selection for RS485
RS485GEN
RS485
DNPGEN
DNP3.0 communication general protocol
DNPGENTCP
DNP3.0 communication general TCP protocol
CHSERRS485
DNP3.0 for EIA-485 communication protocol
CH1TCP, CH2TCP,
CH3TCP, CH4TCP
DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol

Technical manual
63
Section 2
Available functions
IEC 61850
ANSI
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Generator
REG670
(Customized)
CHSEROPT
DNP3.0 for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication protocol
MST1TCP,
MST2TCP,
MST3TCP,
MST4TCP
DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol
DNPFREC
DNP3.0 fault records for TCP/IP and EIA-485 communication

protocol
IEC 61850-8-1
Parameter setting function for IEC 61850
GOOSEINTLKRCV
59
GOOSEBINRCV
GOOSE binary receive
16
GOOSEDPRCV
64
GOOSEINTRCV
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value
32
GOOSEMVRCV
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value
60
GOOSESPRCV
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value
64
MULTICMDRCV,
MULTICMDSND
Multiple command and transmit
FRONT, LANABI,
LANAB, LANCDI,
LANCD
Ethernet configuration of links
GATEWAY
Ethernet configuration of link one
OPTICAL103
IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial communication
RS485103
IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485
AGSAL
Generic security application component
LD0LLN0
IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0
SYSLLN0
IEC 61850 SYS LLN0
LPHD
Physical device information
PCMACCS
IED Configuration Protocol
SECALARM
Component for mapping security events on protocols such as

DNP3 and IEC103
FSTACCS
FSTACCSNA
Field service tool access via SPA protocol over ethernet

communication
ACTIVLOG
Activity logging parameters
ALTRK
Service Tracking
SINGLELCCH
Single ethernet port link status
PRPSTATUS
Dual ethernet port link status
60/10
Process bus communication IEC 61850-9-2 1)

PRP
IEC 62439-3 parallel redundancy protocol
0-1
Remote communication
64
Technical manual
Section 2
Available functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC 61850
ANSI
Binary signal transfer receive/transmit
Generator
REG670
(Customized)
6/36
Transmission of analog data from LDCM
Receive binary status from remote LDCM
6/3/3
1) Only included for 9-2LE products
2.5
Table 6:
Basic IED functions

Basic IED functions
IEC 61850 or function

name
Description
INTERRSIG
SELFSUPEVLST
Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN
Time synchronization module
BININPUT,
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
SYNCHSPA
Time synchronization
TIMEZONE
DSTBEGIN,
DSTENABLE, DSTEND
GPS time synchronization module
IRIG-B
SETGRPS
Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP
Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE
Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK
Change lock function
SMBI
Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO
Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI
Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12
Signal matrix for analog inputs
ATHSTAT
Authority status
ATHCHCK
Authority check
AUTHMAN
Authority management
FTPACCS
FTP access with password
SPACOMMMAP
SPA communication mapping

Technical manual
65
Section 2
Available functions

name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Description
SPATD
Date and time via SPA protocol
DOSFRNT
Denial of service, frame rate control for front port
DOSLANAB
Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port AB
DOSLANCD
Denial of service, frame rate control for OEM port CD
DOSSCKT
Denial of service, socket flow control
GBASVAL
Global base values for settings
PRIMVAL
Primary system values
ALTMS
Time master supervision
ALTIM
Time management
MSTSER
DNP3.0 for serial communication protocol
PRODINF
Product information
RUNTIME
IED Runtime Comp
CAMCONFIG
Central account management configuration
CAMSTATUS
Central account management status
TOOLINF
Tools Information component
SAFEFILECOPY
Safe file copy function
Table 7:
Local HMI functions

name
ANSI
Description
LHMICTRL
Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE
Local human machine language
SCREEN
Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
FNKEYTY1FNKEYTY5
FNKEYMD1
FNKEYMD5
Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600
LEDGEN
General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED
LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1
GRP3_LED15
Basic part for CP HW LED indication module
66
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 3
Analog inputs
3.1
Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all
directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be defined
in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected in the field
( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED
use primary system quantities. Setting values are in primary quantities as well and it is
important to set the data about the connected current and voltage transformers properly.
A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This analog
channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle information
will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and commissioning of the
IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and service values reading.
The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input
module (TRM) type.
3.2
Function block
The hardware channels appear in the signal matrix tool (SMT) and in ACT
when a TRM is included in the configuration with the hardware
configuration tool. In the SMT or the ACT they can be mapped to the
desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and used internally in the
configuration.
Technical manual
67
Section 3
Analog inputs
3.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 8:
Name
Type
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
Analog input module status
CH1(I)
STRING
Analogue current input 1
CH2(I)
STRING
Analog current input 2
CH3(I)
STRING
CH4(I)
STRING
CH5(I)
STRING
CH6(I)
STRING
CH7(I)
STRING
CH8(I)
STRING
CH9(I)
STRING
CH10(I)
STRING
CH11(I)
STRING
CH12(I)
STRING
Table 9:
Name
68
TRM_12I Output signals
TRM_6I_6U Output signals

Type
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
CH1(I)
STRING
CH2(I)
STRING
CH3(I)
STRING
CH4(I)
STRING
CH5(I)
STRING
CH6(I)
STRING
CH7(V)
STRING
Analog voltage input 7
CH8(V)
STRING
CH9(V)
STRING
CH10(V)
STRING
CH 11(V)
STRING
CH12(V)
STRING
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 10:
Name
TRM_6I Output signals

Type
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
CH1(I)
STRING
CH2(I)
STRING
CH3(I)
STRING
CH4(I)
STRING
CH5(I)
STRING
CH6(I)
STRING
Table 11:
Name

Type
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
CH1(I)
STRING
CH2(I)
STRING
CH3(I)
STRING
CH4(I)
STRING
CH5(I)
STRING
CH6(I)
STRING
CH7(I)
STRING
CH8(V)
STRING
CH9(V)
STRING
CH10(V)
STRING
CH 11(V)
STRING
CH12(V)
STRING
Table 12:
Name

Type
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
CH1(I)
STRING
CH2(I)
STRING
CH3(I)
STRING
CH4(I)
STRING
CH5(I)
STRING
CH6(I)
STRING
CH7(I)
STRING

Technical manual
69
Section 3
Analog inputs
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
STRING
CH9(I)
STRING
CH10(V)
STRING
CH 11(V)
STRING
CH12(V)
STRING
Table 13:
Name
3.4
Description
CH8(I)
Type
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
CH1(I)
STRING
CH2(I)
STRING
CH3(I)
STRING
CH4(I)
STRING
CH5(I)
STRING
CH6(I)
STRING
CH7(I)
STRING
CH8(I)
STRING
CH9(I)
STRING
CH10(I)
STRING
CH 11(V)
STRING
CH12(V)
STRING
Settings
Dependent on ordered IED type.
70
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 14:
Name
PhaseAngleRef
Table 15:
Name
AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
TRM40-Ch1 - Ch12
TRM41-Ch1 - Ch12
MU1-IA
MU1-IB
MU1-IC
MU1-I0
MU1- VA
MU1- VB
MU1-VC
MU1-V0
MU2-IA
MU2-IB
MU2-IC
MU2-I0
MU2-VA
MU2-VB
MU2-VC
MU2-V0
MU3-IA
MU3-IB
MU3-IC
MU3-I0
MU3-VB
MU2-VB
MU3-VC
MU3-V0
MU4-L1I - L4I
MU4-L1U - L4U
MU5-L1I - L4I
MU5-L1U - L4U
MU6-L1I - L4I
MU6-L1U - L4U
Unit
Step
Default
TRM40-Ch1
Description
Reference channel
for phase angle
presentation
TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite
CTsec1
1 - 10
Rated CT secondary current
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
Rated CT primary current
CT_WyePoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
Technical manual
71
Section 3
Analog inputs
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec7
1 - 10
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint8
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec8
1 - 10
CTprim8
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint9
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec9
1 - 10
CTprim9
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint10
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec10
1 - 10
CTprim10
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint11
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec11
1 - 10
CTprim11
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint12
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec12
1 - 10
CTprim12
1 - 99999
3000
72
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 16:
Name
TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
VTsec7
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
Rated VT secondary voltage
VTprim7
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Rated VT primary voltage
VTsec8
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim8
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim9
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim10
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec11
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim11
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec12
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim12
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Technical manual
73
Section 3
Analog inputs
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 17:
TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
Table 18:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec3
1 - 10

74
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec7
1 - 10
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
VTsec8
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim8
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim9
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim10
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec11
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim11
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec12
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim12
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Step
Default
Table 19:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Description
CT_WyePoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000

Technical manual
75
Section 3
Analog inputs
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec7
1 - 10
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint8
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec8
1 - 10
CTprim8
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint9
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec9
1 - 10
CTprim9
1 - 99999
3000
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim10
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec11
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim11
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec12
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim12
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
76
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 20:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec1
1 - 10
CTprim1
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec2
1 - 10
CTprim2
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec3
1 - 10
CTprim3
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec4
1 - 10
CTprim4
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec5
1 - 10
CTprim5
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec6
1 - 10
CTprim6
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec7
1 - 10
CTprim7
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint8
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec8
1 - 10
CTprim8
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint9
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec9
1 - 10
CTprim9
1 - 99999
3000
CT_WyePoint10
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject

CTsec10
1 - 10

Technical manual
77
Section 3
Analog inputs
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTprim10
1 - 99999
3000
VTsec11
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim11
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
VTsec12
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim12
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
3.5
Monitored data
Table 21:
Name
Status
Table 22:
Name
STATUS
Table 23:
Name
STATUS
Table 24:
Name
STATUS
Table 25:
Name
STATUS
78
AISVBAS Monitored data

Type
INTEGER
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
2=AngRefLow
3=Uncorrelated
Unit
-
Description
Service value status
TRM_12I Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Unit
-
Description
TRM_6I_6U Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Unit
-
Description
TRM_6I Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Unit
-
Description

Type
BOOLEAN
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Unit
-
Description
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 26:
Name
STATUS
Table 27:
Name
STATUS
3.6

Type
BOOLEAN
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Unit
-
Description

Type
BOOLEAN
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Unit
-
Description
Operation principle
The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are typically
star (WYE) connected and can be connected with the Star (WYE) point towards the object
or away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.
The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:
Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into the
object.
Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out from
the object.
For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see figure 2)
Forward means the direction is into the object.

Reverse means the direction is out from the object.
Technical manual
79
Section 3
Analog inputs
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Reverse
Forward
Forward
Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object
Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"ToObject"
Set parameter
CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is
"FromObject"
en05000456-2.vsd
ANSI05000456 V2 EN
Figure 2:
Internal convention of the directionality in the IED
If the settings of the primary CT is correct, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or

ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows towards
the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the protected object.
The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and
VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and
primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated
ratios.
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main menu/
Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool or on the HMI.
3.7
Technical data
Table 28:
TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer modules
Quantity
Rated value
Current
In = 1 or 5 A
Operative range
(0-100) x In
Permissive overload
4 In cont.
100 In for 1 s *)
Burden
< 150 mVA at In = 5 A

< 20 mVA at In = 1 A
Ac voltage
Vn = 120 V
Operative range
(0340) V
Nominal range
(0.2-40) In
0.5288 V
80
Technical manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Quantity
Rated value
Permissive overload
420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden
< 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency
fn = 60/50 Hz
*)
Nominal range
5%
max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.
Table 29:
TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer modules
Quantity
Rated value
Current
In = 1 or 5 A
Permissive overload
1.1 In cont.
1.8 In for 30 min at In = 1 A
Burden
< 350 mVA at In = 5 A

< 200 mVA at In = 1 A
Ac voltage
Vn = 120 V
Operative range
(0340) V
Permissive overload
420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden
< 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency
fn = 60/50 Hz
Table 30:
Nominal range
(0-1.8) In at In = 1 A
(0-1.6) In at In = 5 A
0.5288 V
5%
CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type
Rated voltage and current
Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type
250 V AC, 20 A
4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring

lug terminals
250 V AC, 20 A
4 mm2 (AWG12)
Technical manual
81
82
Section 4
Binary input and output modules
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 4
4.1
Binary input
4.1.1
Binary input debounce filter

The debounce filter eliminates bounces and short disturbances on a binary input.
A time counter is used for filtering. The time counter is increased once in a millisecond
when a binary input is high, or decreased when a binary input is low. A new debounced
binary input signal is forwarded when the time counter reaches the set DebounceTime
value and the debounced input value is high or when the time counter reaches 0 and the
debounced input value is low. The default setting of DebounceTime is 1 ms.
The binary input ON-event gets the time stamp of the first rising edge, after which the
counter does not reach 0 again. The same happens when the signal goes down to 0 again.
4.1.2
Oscillation filter
Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields
from for example nearby breakers. An oscillation filter is used to reduce the disturbance
from the system when a binary input starts oscillating.
An oscillation counter counts the debounced signal state changes during 1 s. If the counter
value is greater than the set value OscBlock, the input signal is blocked. The input signal
is ignored until the oscillation counter value during 1 s is below the set value OscRelease.
4.1.3
Settings
OscBlock must always be set to a value greater than OscRelease. If this is
not done, oscillation detection will not function correctly, and the
resulting behaviour will be undefined.
Technical manual
83
Section 4
4.1.3.1
Table 31:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Setting parameters for binary input modules

BIM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
DebounceTime
0.001 - 0.020
0.001
0.001
Debounce time for binary inputs
OscBlock
1 - 40
Hz
40
Oscillation block limit
OscRelease
1 - 30
Hz
30
Oscillation release limit
4.1.3.2
Setting parameters for binary input/output module
Table 32:
IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Binary input/output module in operation (On) or

not (Off)
DebounceTime
0.001 - 0.020
0.001
0.001
OscBlock
1 - 40
Hz
40
OscRelease
1 - 30
Hz
30
84
Technical manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 5
5.1
Local HMI screen behaviour
5.1.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Local HMI screen behaviour
5.1.2
Table 33:
SCREEN
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Settings
SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DisplayTimeout
1 - 120
Min
10
Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel
-100 - 100
10
Contrast level for display
Default screen
DefaultScreen
EvListSrtOrder
Latest on top
Oldest on top
Latest on top
Sort order of event list
AutoIndicationDRP
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Automatic indication of disturbance report
SubstIndSLD
No
Yes
No
Substitute indication on single line diagram
InterlockIndSLD
No
Yes
No
Interlock indication on single line diagram
BypassCommands
No
Yes
No
Enable bypass of commands
5.2
Local HMI signals
5.2.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Local HMI signals
LHMICTRL
Technical manual
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
85
Section 5
5.2.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS
HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD
IEC09000320 V1 EN
Figure 3:
5.2.3
Signals
Table 34:
Name
RSTLEDS
Table 35:
Name
86
LHMICTRL function block
LHMICTRL Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Input to reset the LCD-HMI LEDs
LHMICTRL Output signals

Type
Description
HMI-ON
BOOLEAN
Backlight of the LCD display is active
RED-S
BOOLEAN
Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-S
BOOLEAN
Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady
YELLOW-F
BOOLEAN
Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
RSTPULSE
BOOLEAN
A reset pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCDHMI are cleared
LEDSRST
BOOLEAN
Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not ON
Technical manual
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
5.3
Basic part for LED indication module
5.3.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Basic part for LED indication module
LEDGEN
Basic part for LED indication HW

module
GRP1_LED1 GRP1_LED15
5.3.2
Function block
LEDGEN
BLOCK
RESET
NEWIND
ACK
IEC09000321 V1 EN
Figure 4:
LEDGEN function block
GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
IEC09000322 V1 EN
Figure 5:
GRP1_LED1 function block
The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example. The 15 LEDs in each of the three groups
have a similar function block.
5.3.3
Signals
Table 36:
Name
LEDGEN Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Input to block the operation of the LEDs
RESET
BOOLEAN
Input to acknowledge/reset the indication LEDs
Technical manual
87
Section 5
Table 37:
LEDGEN Output signals
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
New indication signal if any LED indication input is set
ACK
BOOLEAN
A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged
GRP1_LED1 Input signals
Name
Table 39:
Name
Description
NEWIND
Table 38:
5.3.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Type
Default
Description
HM1L01R
BOOLEAN
Red indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01Y
BOOLEAN
Yellow indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
HM1L01G
BOOLEAN
Green indication of LED1, local HMI alarm group 1
Settings
LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
tRestart
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.0
Defines the disturbance length
t_MaxTripDelay
0.1 - 100.0
0.1
1.0
Maximum time for the definition of a

disturbance
Table 40:
Name
GRP1_LED1 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SequenceType
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
Sequence type for LED 1, local HMI alarm

group 1
LabelOff
0 - 18
G1L01_OFF
Label string shown when LED 1, alarm group 1

is off
LabelRed
0 - 18
G1L01_RED

is red
LabelYellow
0 - 18
G1L01_YELLOW

is yellow
LabelGreen
0 - 18
G1L01_GREEN

is green
88
Technical manual
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
5.4
LCD part for HMI function keys control module
5.4.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
LCD part for HMI Function Keys Control

module
5.4.2
IEC 60617
identification
FNKEYMD1 FNKEYMD5
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
FNKEYMD1
^LEDCTL1
^FKEYOUT1
IEC09000327 V1 EN
Figure 6:
FNKEYMD1 function block
Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block for
every function key button.
5.4.3
Signals
Table 41:
FNKEYMD1 Input signals
Name
Type
LEDCTL1
BOOLEAN
Table 42:
Type
FKEYOUT1
Table 43:
Name
Description
LED control input for function key
FNKEYMD1 Output signals
Name
5.4.4
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Output controlled by function key
Settings
FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Mode
Disabled
Toggle
Pulsed
Disabled
Output operation mode
PulseTime
0.001 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Pulse time for output controlled by LCDFn1
LabelOn
0 - 18
LCD_FN1_ON
Label for LED on state
LabelOff
0 - 18
LCD_FN1_OFF
Label for LED off state
Technical manual
89
Section 5
Table 44:
FNKEYTY1 Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Type
Disabled
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Description
Disabled
Function key type
Menu shortcut for function key
MenuShortcut values are product dependent and created dynamically depending on the
product main menu.
90
Technical manual
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
5.5
Operation principle
5.5.1
Local HMI
ANSI13000239-2-en.vsd
ANSI13000239 V2 EN
Figure 7:
Local human-machine interface
The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements:
Technical manual
91
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Keypad
Display (LCD)
LED indicators
Communication port for PCM600
The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.
5.5.1.1
Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views or
menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide
help and switch between local and remote control mode.
The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as
menu shortcut or control buttons.
92
Technical manual
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
24
1
23
2
18
3
19
4
5
6
20
21
22
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
ANSI15000157-1-en.vsdx
ANSI15000157 V1 EN
Figure 8:
LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-buttons

and RJ-45 communication port
1...5 Function button

6
Close
Open
Escape
Left
10
Down
11
Up
12
Right
13
Key
14
Enter
15
Remote/Local
16
Uplink LED
17
Not in use
18
Multipage
Technical manual
93
Section 5
5.5.1.2
19
Menu
20
Clear
21
Help
22
Communication port
23
Programmable indication LEDs
24
IED status LEDs
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Display
The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) with a
resolution of 320 x 240 pixels. The character size can vary.
The display view is divided into four basic areas.
94
Technical manual
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC15000270-1-en.vsdx
IEC15000270 V1 EN
Figure 9:
Display layout
1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)
The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long to be
shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated with three
dots.
The content area shows the menu content.
The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and the
object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears on
the right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not fit in
the display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.
Technical manual
95
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC15000138 V1 EN
Figure 10:
Truncated path
The number after : (colon sign) at the end of the function instance, for example, 1 in
SMAI1:1, indicates the number of that function instance.
The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the
function buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback
signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the required signal
with PCM600.
96
Technical manual
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN
Figure 11:
Function button panel
The indication LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the indication LEDs.
Three indication LED pages are available.
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN
Figure 12:
Indication LED panel
The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel
is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the
ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both panels have a dynamic width that
depends on the label string length.
Technical manual
97
Section 5
5.5.1.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Normal, Pickup and
Trip.
There are 15 programmable indication LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The texts related to each threecolor LED are divided into three panels.
There are 3 separate panels of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one
LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated
since there are three LED groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority, with red being
the highest and green the lowest priority. For example, if on one panel there is an
indication that requires the green LED to be lit, and on another panel there is an indication
that requires the red LED to be lit, the red LED takes priority and is lit. The LEDs can be
configured with PCM600 and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI or
PCM600.
Information panels for the indication LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button.
Pressing that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged LED is
indicated with a highlight. Such lines can be selected by using the Up/Down arrow
buttons. Pressing the Enter key shows details about the selected LED. Pressing the ESC
button exits from information pop-ups as well as from the LED panel as such.
The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any panel is lit.
If there are un-acknowledged indication LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks. To
acknowledge LEDs, press the Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to description of
this menu for details).
There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons
and
. They
can, for example, represent the status of a circuit breaker. The LEDs are controlled by the
function block OPENCLOSE_LED which must be configured to show the status of the
breaker.
5.5.2
LED configuration alternatives
5.5.2.1
Functionality
The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx
(x=1-15) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs. The
input and output signals of the function blocks are configured with PCM600. The input
signal for each LED is selected individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is controlled
by the GRPn_LEDx (n=1-3) function block that controls the color and the operating
mode.
98
Technical manual
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence types
are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restarting
mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signalling system
in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.
5.5.2.2
Status LEDs
There are three status LEDs above the LCD in front of the IED: green, yellow and red.
The green LED has a fixed function that presents the healthy status of the IED. The yellow
and red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a
disturbance report is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The red
LED can be used to indicate a trip command.
Here is a typical configuration of the status LEDs:
Green LED: unlit > no power; blinking > startup or abnormal situation (IED is not in
service); steady > IED is in service
Yellow LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > IED is in Testmode (IED is not
in normal service); steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the yellow
LED on has been active
Red LED: unlit > no attention required; blinking > user performs a common write
from PCM600; steady > at least one of the signals configured to turn the red LED on
has been active
The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function,
DRPRDRE, by connecting a pickup or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR
binary input function block using the PCM600, and configuring the setting to Off,Pickup
or Trip for that particular signal.
5.5.2.3
Indication LEDs
Operating modes
Collecting mode
LEDs that are used in the collecting mode of operation are accumulated continuously
until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable when the LEDs are
used as a simplified alarm system. When all three inputs (red, yellow and green) are
connected to different sources of events for the same function block, collecting mode
shows the highest priority LED color that was activated since the latest
acknowledgment was made. If a number of different indications were made since the
latest acknowledgment, it is not possible to get a clear view of what triggered the
latest event without looking at the sequence of events list. A condition for getting the
Technical manual
99
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
sequence of events is that the signals have been engineered in the disturbance
recorder.
Re-starting mode
In the re-starting mode of operation each new pickup resets all previous active LEDs
and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined for
re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will initiate a
reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a settable time
after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum time limit has
elapsed. In sequence 6, the restarting or reset mode means that upon occurrence of
any new event, all previous indications will be reset. This facilitates that only the LED
indications related to the latest event is shown.
Acknowledgment/reset
From local HMI
The active LED indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual

acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common
signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive edge
triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is performed via the
button and menus on the LHMI.
From function input
The active LED indications can also be acknowledged/reset via an input,

CLRLEDS, to the function block LHMICTRL. This input can for example be
configured to a binary input operated from an external push button or a function
button. The function is positive edge triggered, not level triggered. This means
that even if the button is continuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only
affects indications active at the moment when the button is first pressed.
Automatic reset
The automatic reset can only be performed for LED indications defined for restarting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the
automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will
be indicated with a steady light.
Operating sequence
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type, the LED follows the
input signal completely. For the Latched type, each LED latches to the corresponding
input signal until it is reset.
100
Technical manual
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED
separately. The following 6 sequences are available:
Sequence 1: Follow-S
Sequence 2: Follow-F
Sequence 3: LatchedAck-F-S
Sequence 4: LatchedAck-S-F
Sequence 5: LatchedColl-S
Sequence 6: LatchedReset-S
For sequence 1 and 2, which are of the Follow type, the acknowledgment (Ack ) /reset
function is not applicable because the indication shown by the LED follows its input
signal. Sequence 3 and 4, which are of the Latched type with acknowledgement, are only
working in collecting (Coll) mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and
collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting
(Reset) mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and
F = Flash.
At the activation of the input signal to any LED, the indication on the corresponding LED
obtains a color that corresponds to the activated input, and operates according to the
selected sequence diagrams shown below.
In the sequence diagrams the different statuses of the LEDs are shown using the following
symbols:
= No indication
G=
Green
= Steady light
Y=
Yellow
= Flash
R=
Red
IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN
Figure 13:
Symbols used in the sequence diagrams
Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows the corresponding input signals all the time with a steady light. It
does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs
in its operation.
Technical manual
101
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Activating
signal
LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN
Figure 14:
Operating Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to the same LED, the priority
color it shows is in accordance with the color described above. An example of the
operation when two colors are activated in parallel to the same LED is shown in Figure
15.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED
IEC09000312 V1 EN
Figure 15:
Operating sequence 1, two colors
Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead of
showing steady light.
Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the
indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal is
not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a steady
light.
102
Technical manual
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN
Figure 16:
Operating Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S
The sequence described below is valid only if the same function block is
used for all three colour LEDs.
When an acknowledgment is performed, all indications that appear before the indication
with higher priority has been reset, will be acknowledged, independent of if the low
priority indication appeared before or after acknowledgment. In Figure 17 it is shown the
sequence when a signal of lower priority becomes activated after acknowledgment has
been performed on a higher priority signal. The low priority signal will be shown as
acknowledged when the high priority signal resets.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED
Acknow
IEC09000313 V1 EN
Figure 17:
Operating Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S), 2 colors involved
If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained. Acknowledgment
of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low priority indications, which
are not visible according to Figure 18.
Technical manual
103
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED
Acknow.
IEC09000314 V1 EN
Figure 18:
Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 1
If an indication with higher priority appears after acknowledgment of a lower priority

indication the high priority indication will be shown as not acknowledged according to
Figure 19.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED
Acknow.
IEC09000315 V1 EN
Figure 19:
Operating sequence 3, three colors involved, alternative 2
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light have
been alternated.
Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of
the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to sequence
104
Technical manual
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the reset that is,
immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new reading and
storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the other LEDs in its
operation.
Activating
signal
LED
Reset
IEC01000235 V2 EN
Figure 20:
Operating Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S
That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with lower
priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to Figure
21.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED
Reset
IEC09000316 V1 EN
Figure 21:
Operating sequence 5, two colors
Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other LEDs
set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still activated will
not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive edge of that the
manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals is performed.
Technical manual
105
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of LEDs set for other
sequences.
Timing diagram for sequence 6
Figure 22 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN
Figure 22:
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same

disturbance
Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.
106
Technical manual
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Disturbance
tRestart
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000240 V2 EN
Figure 23:
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances
Figure 24 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one has
reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
Technical manual
107
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000241 V2 EN
Figure 24:
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same

disturbance but with reset of activating signal between
Figure 25 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.
108
Technical manual
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000242 V2 EN
Figure 25:
Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset
5.5.3
Function keys
5.5.3.1
Functionality
Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the left of
the LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each button
has an indication LED that can be configured in the application configuration.
When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate between
default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control a binary
signal.
5.5.3.2
Operation principle
Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled from
the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output status of
the actual function block will change. These binary outputs can in turn be used to control
other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O outputs etc.
Technical manual
109
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function block also has a number of settings and parameters
that control the behavior of the function block. These settings and parameters are normally
set using the PST.
Operating sequence
The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.
Setting OFF
This mode always sets the outputs to a low value (0).
Input value
Output value
IEC09000330 V2 EN
Figure 26:
Sequence diagram for setting OFF
Setting TOGGLE
In this mode the output toggles each time the function key has been pressed for more than
500ms. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block executes. The
function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.
Input value
500ms
500ms
500ms
Output value
IEC09000331 V2 EN
Figure 27:
Sequence diagram for setting TOGGLE
Setting PULSED
In this mode the output sets high (1) when the function key has been pressed for more than
500ms and remains high according to set pulse time. After this time the output will go back
to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects it being high and there is
no output pulse.
110
Technical manual
Section 5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the
edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is zero;
else the trigger edge is lost.
Input value
500ms
500ms
pulse time
Output value
500ms
500ms
pulse time
pulse time
IEC09000332 V2 EN
Figure 28:
Sequence diagram for setting PULSED
Input function
All function keys work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain
function button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this function block
becomes active, and will light the yellow function button LED when high. This
functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off. It has been
implemented this way for safety reasons; the idea is that the function key LEDs should
always reflect the actual status of any primary equipment monitored by these LEDs.
Technical manual
111
112
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 6
6.1
Transformer differential protection T2WPDIF and

T3WPDIF (87T)
6.1.1
Identification
Transformer differential protection, twowinding
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87T
T2WPDIF
3Id/I
SYMBOL-BB V1 EN
Transformer differential protection,

three-winding
87T
T3WPDIF
3Id/I
SYMBOL-BB V1 EN
6.1.2
Functionality
The Transformer differential protection is provided with internal CT ratio matching,
phase shift compensation and settable zero sequence current elimination.
The function can be provided with up to six three-phase sets of current inputs if enough
HW is available. All current inputs are provided with percentage bias restraint features,
making the IED suitable for two- or three-winding transformer in multi-breaker station
arrangements.
Technical manual
113
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Two-winding applications
352
152
xx05000048_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000048 V1 EN
two-winding power transformer
352
152
xx05000049_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000049 V1 EN
two-winding power transformer with unconnected

delta tertiary winding
152
352
252
xx05000050_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000050 V1 EN
twowinding power transformer with two circuit

breakers on one side
152
352
252
452
xx05000051_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000051 V1 EN

114
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
twowinding power transformer with two circuit

breakers and two CT-sets on both sides
Three-winding applications
452
152
352
xx05000052_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000052 V1 EN
threewinding power transformer with all three

windings connected
452
152
352
252
xx05000053_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000053 V1 EN
threewinding power transformer with two circuit

breakers and two CT-sets on one side
Technical manual
115
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
152
252
552
352
452
xx05000057_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000057 V1 EN
Autotransformer with two circuit breakers and two

CT-sets on two out of three sides
Figure 29:
CT group arrangement
for differential
protection
The setting facilities cover the application of the differential protection to all types of
power transformers and auto-transformers with or without load tap changer as well as
shunt reactors and local feeders within the station. An adaptive stabilizing feature is
included for heavy through-fault currents.By introducing the load tap changer position,
the differential protection pick-up can be set to optimum sensitivity thus covering internal
faults with low fault current level.
Harmonic restraint is included for inrush and overexcitation currents respectively, crossblocking is also available. Adaptive stabilization is also included for system recovery
inrush and CT saturation during external faults. A high set unrestrained differential
current protection element is included for a very high speed tripping at high internal fault
currents.
Included is an sensitive differential protection element based on the theory of negative
sequence current component. This element offers the best possible coverage of power
transformer windings turn to turn faults.
116
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
6.1.3
Function block
T2WPDIF (87T)
I3PW1CT1*
TRIP
I3PW1CT2*
TRIPRES
I3PW2CT1*
TRIPUNRE
I3PW2CT2*
TRNSUNR
TAPOLTC1
TRNSSENS
OLTC1AL
PICKUP
BLOCK
PU_A
BLKRES
PU_B
BLKUNRES
PU_C
BLKNSUNR
BLK2H
BLKNSSEN
BLK2H_A
BLK2H_B
BLK2H_C
BLK5H
BLK5H_A
BLK5H_B
BLK5H_C
BLKWAV
BLKWAV_A
BLKWAV_B
BLKWAV_C
IDALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
ID_A
ID_B
ID_C
IDMAG_A
IDMAG_B
IDMAG_C
IBIAS
IDMAG_NS
ANSI06000249 V2 EN
Figure 30:
T2WPDIF (87T) function block
Technical manual
117
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
T3WPDIF (87T)
I3PW1CT1*
TRIP
I3PW1CT2*
TRIPRES
I3PW2CT1*
TRIPUNRE
I3PW2CT2*
TRNSUNR
I3PW3CT1*
TRNSSENS
I3PW3CT2*
PICKUP
TAPOLTC1
PU_A
TAPOLTC2
PU_B
OLTC1AL
PU_C
OLTC2AL
BLK2H
BLOCK
BLK2H_A
BLKRES
BLK2H_B
BLKUNRES
BLK2H_C
BLKNSUNR
BLK5H
BLKNSSEN
BLK5H_A
BLK5H_B
BLK5H_C
BLKWAV
BLKWAV_A
BLKWAV_B
BLKWAV_C
IDALARM
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
ID_A
ID_B
ID_C
IDMAG_A
IDMAG_B
IDMAG_C
IBIAS
IDMAG_NS
ANSI06000250 V2 EN
Figure 31:
6.1.4
T3WPDIF (87T) function block
Signals
Table 45:
Name
T2WPDIF (87T) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3PW1CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase winding primary CT1
I3PW1CT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase winding secondary CT1
I3PW2CT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
TAPOLTC1
INTEGER
Most recent tap position reading on OLTC 1
OLTC1AL
BOOLEAN
OLTC1 alarm
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKRES
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for restrained differential feature
118
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLKUNRES
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for unrestrained differential feature
BLKNSUNR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for unrestrained negative sequence

differential protection
BLKNSSEN
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for sensitive negative sequence differential

protection
Table 46:
Name
T2WPDIF (87T) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General, common trip signal
TRIPRES
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from restrained differential protection
TRIPUNRE
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from unrestrained differential protection
TRNSUNR
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from unrestrained negative sequence

TRNSSENS
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from sensitive negative sequence differential

protection
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Common pickup signal from any phase
PU_A
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from phase A
PU_B
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from phase B
PU_C
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from phase C
BLK2H
BOOLEAN
Common second harmonic block signal from any phase
BLK2H_A
BOOLEAN
Second harmonic block signal, phase A
BLK2H_B
BOOLEAN
Second harmonic block signal, phase B
BLK2H_C
BOOLEAN
Second harmonic block signal, phase C
BLK5H
BOOLEAN
Common fifth harmonic block signal from any phase
BLK5H_A
BOOLEAN
Fifth harmonic block signal, phase A
BLK5H_B
BOOLEAN
Fifth harmonic block signal, phase B
BLK5H_C
BOOLEAN
Fifth harmonic block signal, phase C
BLKWAV
BOOLEAN
Common block signal, waveform criterion, from any

phase
BLKWAV_A
BOOLEAN
Block signal, waveform criterion, phase A
BLKWAV_B
BOOLEAN
Block signal, waveform criterion, phase B
BLKWAV_C
BOOLEAN
Block signal, waveform criterion, phase C
IDALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for sustained diff currents in all three phases
OPENCT
BOOLEAN
An open CT was detected
OPENCTAL
BOOLEAN
Open CT Alarm output signal. Issued after a delay ...
ID_A
REAL
Value of the instantaneous differential current, phase A
ID_B
REAL
Value of the instantaneous differential current, phase B
ID_C
REAL
Value of the instantaneous differential current, phase C

Technical manual
119
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Description
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental frequency differential

current, phase A
IDMAG_B
REAL

current, phase B
IDMAG_C
REAL

current, phase C
IBIAS
REAL
Magnitude of the bias current, which is common to all

phases
IDMAG_NS
REAL
Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current
Table 47:
Name
120
Type
IDMAG_A
T3WPDIF (87T) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3PW1CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW1CT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW3CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase winding tertiary CT1
I3PW3CT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase winding tertiary CT2
TAPOLTC1
INTEGER
TAPOLTC2
INTEGER
OLTC1AL
BOOLEAN
OLTC1 alarm
OLTC2AL
BOOLEAN
OLTC2 alarm
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKRES
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for restrained differential feature
BLKUNRES
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for unrestrained differential feature
BLKNSUNR
BOOLEAN

BLKNSSEN
BOOLEAN

protection
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 48:
Name
T3WPDIF (87T) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIPRES
BOOLEAN
TRIPUNRE
BOOLEAN
TRNSUNR
BOOLEAN

TRNSSENS
BOOLEAN

protection
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_A
BOOLEAN
PU_B
BOOLEAN
PU_C
BOOLEAN
BLK2H
BOOLEAN
Common second harmonic block signal from any phase
BLK2H_A
BOOLEAN
Second harmonic block signal, phase A
BLK2H_B
BOOLEAN
Second harmonic block signal, phase B
BLK2H_C
BOOLEAN
Second harmonic block signal, phase C
BLK5H
BOOLEAN
Common fifth harmonic block signal from any phase
BLK5H_A
BOOLEAN
Fifth harmonic block signal, phase A
BLK5H_B
BOOLEAN
Fifth harmonic block signal, phase B
BLK5H_C
BOOLEAN
Fifth harmonic block signal, phase C
BLKWAV
BOOLEAN
Common block signal, waveform criterion, from any

phase
BLKWAV_A
BOOLEAN
Block signal, waveform criterion, phase A
BLKWAV_B
BOOLEAN
Block signal, waveform criterion, phase B
BLKWAV_C
BOOLEAN
Block signal, waveform criterion, phase C
IDALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for sustained diff currents in all three phases
OPENCT
BOOLEAN
OPENCTAL
BOOLEAN
ID_A
REAL
Value of the instantaneous differential current, phase A
ID_B
REAL
Value of the instantaneous differential current, phase B
ID_C
REAL
Value of the instantaneous differential current, phase C
IDMAG_A
REAL

current, phase A
IDMAG_B
REAL

current, phase B
Technical manual
121
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
6.1.5
Table 49:
Name
Type
Description
IDMAG_C
REAL

current, phase C
IBIAS
REAL
Magnitude of the bias current, which is common to all

phases
IDMAG_NS
REAL
Magnitude of the negative sequence differential current
Settings
T2WPDIF (87T) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SOTFMode
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation mode for switch onto fault
tAlarmDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000
Time delay for diff currents alarm level
IDiffAlarm
0.05 - 1.00
IB
0.01
0.20
Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr, usually

W1 curr.
IdMin
0.05 - 0.60
IB
0.01
0.30
Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr, usually

W1 curr.
IdUnre
1.00 - 100.00
IB
0.01
10.00
Unrestrained protection limit, multiple of

Winding 1 rated current
CrossBlockEn
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Off/On for cross-block logic between

phases
NegSeqDiffEn
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Off/On for neg. seq. differential

protections
IMinNegSeq
0.02 - 0.20
IB
0.01
0.04
Negative sequence current must be higher

than this level to be used
NegSeqROA
30.0 - 120.0
Deg
0.1
60.0
Operate Angle for internal / external negative

sequence fault discriminator
Unit
Step
Default
Table 50:
Name
T2WPDIF (87T) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Description
EndSection1
0.20 - 1.50
IB
0.01
1.25
End of section 1, multiple of Winding 1 rated

current
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
IB
0.01
3.00
End of section 2, multiple of Winding 1 rated

current
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
Slope in section 2 of operate-restrain

characteristic, in %
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0

I2/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
15.0
Max. ratio of second harmonic to fundamental

harm dif. curr. in %

122
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Unit
Step
Default
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
25.0
Max. ratio of fifth harmonic to fundamental

OpenCTEnable
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Open CT detection feature. Open CTEnable

Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
3.000
Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is

detected
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250
Reset delay in s. After delay, diff. function is

activated
tOCTUnrstDelay
0.10 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
Unrestrained diff. protection blocked after this

delay, in s
Step
Default
Table 51:
Values (Range)
Description
T2WPDIF (87T) Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
GlobalBaseSelW1
1 - 12
Global base selector for winding 1
GlobalBaseSelW2
1 - 12
ConnectTypeW1
WYE (Y)
Delta (D)
WYE (Y)
Connection type of winding 1: Y-wye or D-delta
ConnectTypeW2
WYE (Y)
Delta (D)
WYE (Y)
ClockNumberW2
0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
0 [0 deg]
Phase displacement between W2 & W1=HV

winding, hour notation
ZSCurrSubtrW1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enable zer. seq. current subtraction for W1

side, On / Off
ZSCurrSubtrW2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled

side, On / Off
TconfigForW1
No
Yes
No
Two CT inputs (T-config.) for winding 1, YES /

NO
CT1RatingW1
1 - 99999
3000
CT primary rating in A, T-branch 1, on transf.

W1 side
CT2RatingW1
1 - 99999
3000
CT primary in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W1 side
TconfigForW2
No
Yes
No

NO
CT1RatingW2
1 - 99999
3000

W2 side
Technical manual
123
Section 6
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT2RatingW2
1 - 99999
3000

W2 side
LocationOLTC1
Not Used
Winding 1 (W1)
Winding 2 (W2)
Not Used
Transformer winding where OLTC1 is located
LowTapPosOLTC1
0 - 10
OLTC1 lowest tap position designation (e.g. 1)
RatedTapOLTC1
1 - 100
OLTC1 rated tap/mid-tap position designation

(e.g. 6)
HighTapPsOLTC1
1 - 100
11
OLTC1 highest tap position designation (e.g.

11)
TapHighVoltTC1
1 - 100
OLTC1 end-tap position with winding highest

no-load voltage
StepSizeOLTC1
0.01 - 30.00
0.01
1.00
Voltage change per OLTC1 step in percent of

rated voltage
Step
Default
Table 52:
Name
T3WPDIF (87T) Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
tAlarmDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000
Time delay for diff currents alarm level
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
IDiffAlarm
0.05 - 1.00
IB
0.01
0.20
Dif. cur. alarm, multiple of base curr, usually

W1 curr.
SOTFMode
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation mode for switch onto fault feature
IdMin
0.05 - 0.60
IB
0.01
0.30
Section1 sensitivity, multi. of base curr, usually

W1 curr.
IdUnre
1.00 - 100.00
IB
0.01
10.00
Unrestr. prot. limit, multi. of base curr. usually

W1 curr.
CrossBlockEn
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Off/On for cross-block logic between

phases
NegSeqDiffEn
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Off/On for neg. seq. differential

protections
IMinNegSeq
0.02 - 0.20
IB
0.01
0.04
Neg. seq. curr. limit, mult. of base curr, usually

W1 curr.
NegSeqROA
30.0 - 120.0
Deg
0.1
60.0
Operate Angle for internal / external negative

sequence fault discriminator
124
Description
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 53:
T3WPDIF (87T) Group settings (advanced)
Name
Unit
Step
Default
EndSection1
0.20 - 1.50
IB
0.01
1.25
End of section 1, multi. of base current, usually

W1 curr.
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
IB
0.01
3.00
End of section 2, multi. of base current, usually

W1 curr.
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0

SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0

I2/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
15.0
Max. ratio of second harmonic to fundamental

I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
25.0
Max. ratio of fifth harmonic to fundamental

OpenCTEnable
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Open CT detection feature. Open CTEnable

Off/On
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
3.000
Open CT: time in s to alarm after an open CT is

detected
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250

activated
tOCTUnrstDelay
0.10 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00

delay, in s
Step
Default
Table 54:
Values (Range)
Description
T3WPDIF (87T) Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
GlobalBaseSelW1
1 - 12
GlobalBaseSelW2
1 - 12
GlobalBaseSelW3
1 - 12
ConnectTypeW1
WYE (Y)
Delta (D)
WYE (Y)
ConnectTypeW2
WYE (Y)
Delta (D)
WYE (Y)
ConnectTypeW3
WYE (Y)
Delta (D)
Delta (D)
ClockNumberW2
0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
0 [0 deg]


Technical manual
125
Section 6
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ClockNumberW3
0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
5 [150 deg lag]

ZSCurrSubtrW1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled

side, On / Off
ZSCurrSubtrW2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled

side, On / Off
ZSCurrSubtrW3
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled

side, On / Off
TconfigForW1
No
Yes
No

NO
CT1RatingW1
1 - 99999
3000

W1 side
CT2RatingW1
1 - 99999
3000
CT primary in A, T-branch 2, on transf. W1 side
TconfigForW2
No
Yes
No

NO
CT1RatingW2
1 - 99999
3000

W2 side
CT2RatingW2
1 - 99999
3000

W2 side
TconfigForW3
No
Yes
No

NO
CT1RatingW3
1 - 99999
3000

W3 side
CT2RatingW3
1 - 99999
3000

W3 side
LocationOLTC1
Not Used
Winding 1 (W1)
Winding 2 (W2)
Winding 3 (W3)
Not Used
LowTapPosOLTC1
0 - 10
RatedTapOLTC1
1 - 100

(e.g. 6)
HighTapPsOLTC1
1 - 100
11

11)
TapHighVoltTC1
1 - 100

no-load voltage
126
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Unit
Step
Default
StepSizeOLTC1
0.01 - 30.00
0.01
1.00

rated voltage
LocationOLTC2
Not Used
Winding 1 (W1)
Winding 2 (W2)
Winding 3 (W3)
Not Used
LowTapPosOLTC2
0 - 10
RatedTapOLTC2
1 - 100

(e.g. 6)
HighTapPsOLTC2
1 - 100
11

11)
TapHighVoltTC2
1 - 100

no-load voltage
StepSizeOLTC2
0.01 - 30.00
0.01
1.00

rated voltage
6.1.6
Values (Range)
Description
Monitored data
Table 55:
Name
T2WPDIF (87T) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OCTSIDE
INTEGER
Open CT side : 1 -> W 1 (pri), 2

-> W 2 (sec)
OPENCTIN
INTEGER
Open CT on Input : 1 for input

1, 2 for input 2
OPENCTPH
INTEGER
Open CT in Phase : 1 for A, 2

for B, 3 for C
IDMAG_A
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase A
IDMAG_B
REAL
phase B
IDMAG_C
REAL
phase C
IBIAS
REAL
Magnitude of the bias current,

which is common to all phases
IDMAG_NS
REAL
Magnitude of the negative

sequence differential current
Technical manual
127
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 56:
T3WPDIF (87T) Monitored data
Name
6.1.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IDMAG_A
REAL
phase A
IDMAG_B
REAL
phase B
IDMAG_C
REAL
phase C
IBIAS
REAL
Magnitude of the bias current,

which is common to all phases
IDMAG_NS
REAL
Magnitude of the negative

sequence differential current
Operation principle
The task of the power transformer differential protection is to determine whether a fault
is within the protected zone, or outside of the protected zone. The protected zone is limited
by the position of current transformers (see Figure 32), and in principle can include more
objects than just a transformer. If the fault is found to be internal, the faulty power
transformer must be quickly disconnected from the system.
The main CTs are normally supposed to be Wye connected. The main CTs can be
grounded in anyway (that is, either "ToObject" or "FromObject"). However internally the
differential function will always use reference directions towards the protected
transformer as shown in Figure 32. Thus the IED will always internally measure the
currents on all sides of the power transformer with the same reference direction towards
the power transformer windings as shown in Figure 32. For more information see the
Application manual.
IW1
E1S1
IW2
Z1S1
Z1S2
IW1
IW2
E1S2
IED
en05000186_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000186 V1 EN
Figure 32:
128
Typical CT location and definition of positive current direction

Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Even in a healthy power transformer, the currents are generally not equal when they flow
through it. This is due to the ratio of the number of turns of the windings and the
connection group of the protected transformer. Therefore the differential protection must
first correlate all currents to each other before any calculation can be performed.
First, compensation for the protected transformer transformation ratio and connection
group is made, and only then are the currents compared phase-wise. This makes external
auxiliary (interposing) current transformers unnecessary. Conversion of all currents to the
common reference side of the power transformer is performed by pre-programmed
coefficient matrices, which depends on the protected power transformer transformation
ratio and connection group. Once the power transformer phase shift, rated currents and
voltages have been entered by the user, the differential protection is capable to calculate
off-line matrix coefficients required in order to perform the on-line current comparison by
means of a fixed equation.
The negative-sequence-current-based internal-external fault discriminator, is used with
advantage in order to determine whether a fault is internal or external. It not only
positively discriminates between internal and external faults, but can also independently
detect minor faults which may not be sensed by the "usual" differential protection based
on operate-restrain characteristic.
For all differential functions it is the common trip that is used to initiate a
trip of a breaker. The separate trip signals from the different parts lacks the
safety against maloperation. This will in some cases result in a 6 ms time
difference between, for example restrained trip is issued and common trip
is issued. The separate trip signals are only used for information purpose
of which part that has caused the trip.
6.1.7.1
Function calculation principles

To make a differential IED as sensitive and stable as possible, restrained differential
characteristics have been developed and is now adopted as the general practice in the
protection of power transformers. The protection should be provided with a proportional
bias, which makes the protection operate for a certain percentage differential current
related to the current through the transformer. This stabilizes the protection under through
fault conditions while still permitting the system to have good basic sensitivity. The
following chapters explain how these quantities are derived.
Fundamental frequency differential currents

The fundamental frequency differential current is a vectorial sum (sum of fundamental
frequency phasors) of the individual phase currents from the different sides of the
protected power transformer.
Technical manual
129
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Before any differential current can be calculated, the power transformer phase shift, and
its transformation ratio, must be accounted for. Conversion of all currents to a common
reference is performed in two steps:
all current phasors are phase-shifted to (referred to) the phase-reference side,
(whenever possible the first winding with wye connection)
all currents magnitudes are always referred to the first winding of the power
transformer (typically transformer high-voltage side)
The two steps of conversion are made simultaneously on-line by the pre-programmed
coefficient matrices, as shown in equation 1 for a two-winding power transformer, and in
equation 2 for a three-winding power transformer.
These are the internal compensation within the differential function. The
protected power transformer data is always entered per its nameplate. The
Differential function will correlate nameplate data and select proper
reference windings.
IDA
I _ A _ W 1
I _ A _ W 2
IDB = A I _ B _ W 1 + Vn _ W 2 B I _ B _ W 2
Vn _ W 1
IDC
I _ C _ W 1
I _ C _ W 2
1
(Equation 1)
EQUATION1879 V1 EN
where:
130
1.
is the resulting Differential Currents
2.
is the current contribution from the W1 side
3.
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IDA
I _ A _ W 1
I _ A _ W 2
IL _ A _ W 3
IDB = A I _ B _ W 1 + Vn _ W 2 B I _ B _ W 2 + Vn _ W 3 C IL _ B _ W 3
Vn _ W 1
Vn _ W 1
IDC
I _ C _ W 1
I _ C _ W 2
IL _ C _ W 3
1
(Equation 2)
EQUATION1882-ANSI V1 EN
where:
1.
is the resulting Differential Currents
2.
3.
4.
and where, for equation 1 and equation 2:

ID_A
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phaseA (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_B
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase B (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_C
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phaseC (in W1 side primary amperes)
I_A_W1
is the fundamental frequency phase current in phaseA on the W1 side
I_B_W1
is the fundamental frequency phase current in phaseB on the W1 side
I_C_W1
is the fundamental frequency phase current in phaseC on the W1 side
I_A_W2
is the fundamental frequency phase current in phaseA on the W2 side
I_B_W2
is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase B on the W2 side
I_C_W2
is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase C on the W2 side
I_A_W3
is the fundamental frequency phase current in phase A on the W3 side
I_B_W3
is the fundamental frequency phase current in phaseB on the W3 side
I_C_W3
Vn_W1
is transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W1 side (setting parameter)
Vn_W2
Vn_W3
A, B and C
are three by three matrices with numerical coefficients
Values of the matrix A, B and C coefficients depend on:

1.
The Power transformer winding connection type, such as wye (Y/y) or delta (D/d)
Note! The capitalized letter Y or D is used to represent the high voltage (HV)
side of the transformer and the smaller letter y or d to represent lower
voltage(LV) level. When neutral bushing of a wye winding is brought out, the
Technical manual
131
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
same may be represented as YN or yn depending on whether the winding is HV

or LV.
2.
3.
The Transformer phase shift such as Yd1, Dy11, YNautod5, Yy0d5 and so on, which
introduce phase displacement between individual windings currents in multiples of
30. Since the HV and LV winding voltages are in phase for wye/wye or Delta/Delta
transformers, the same is represented in IEC as represented as Dd0, Yy0. Polarity
reversal in one of the windings would give 180 degree phase displacement which can
be represented by clock position 6. Such transformers can thus be represented as Dd6
or Yy6. It is also possible to rename the phases ABC to CAB or BCA, giving 120 or
240 degree displacements, represented by clock positions 4 & 8 . Polarity reversals in
one of the windings would provide clock positions 10 & 2. These can all be
represented for example: Yy0, Yy2, Yy4, Dd0, Dd6. ANSI wye/Delta or Delta/wye
transformers have the HV winding leading the LV winding by 30degrees. This can be
represented by Yd1 or Dy1. Again considering polarity reversals and renaming of
phases gives rise to other clock positions 4,7,5,11
The Settings for elimination of zero sequence currents for the individual windings.
When the end user enters all these parameters, transformer differential function
automatically calculates the matrix coefficients. During this calculations the following
rules are used:
For the phase reference, the first winding with set wye (Y) connection is always used. For
example, if the power transformer is a Yd1 power transformer, the HV winding (Y) is
taken as the phase reference winding. If the power transformer is a Dy1, then the LV
winding (y) is taken for the phase reference. If there is no wye connected winding, such
as in Dd0 type of power transformers, then the HV delta winding (D) is automatically
chosen as the phase reference winding.
The fundamental frequency differential currents are in general composed of currents of all
sequences, that is, the positive-, the negative-, and the zero-sequence currents. If the zerosequence currents are eliminated (see section "Optional Elimination of zero sequence
currents"), then the differential currents can consist only of the positive-, and the negativesequence currents. When the zero-sequence current is subtracted on one side of the power
transformer, then it is subtracted from each individual phase current.
As it can be seen from equation 1 and equation 2 the first entered winding (W1) is always
taken for ampere level reference (current magnitudes from all other sides are always
transferred to W1 side). In other words, within the differential protection function, all
differential currents and bias current are always expressed in HV side primary Amperes.
It can be shown that the values of the matrix A, B & C coefficients (see equation 1 and
equation 2) can be pre-calculated in advance depending on the relative phase shift between
the reference winding and other power transformer windings.
132
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 57 summarizes the values of the matrices for all standard phase shifts between
windings.
Table 57:
Matrices for differential current calculation

Matrix with Zero Sequence
Reduction set to On
Matrix for Reference Winding
2 -1 -1
1
-1 2 -1
3
-1 -1 2
Matrix for winding with 30

lagging
1 -1 0
1
0 1 -1
3
-1 0 1
1
1
1
3
-2
-2
-2
(Equation 6)
0 -1 1
1 0 -1
3
-1 1 0
-1 -1 2
1
2 -1 -1
3
-1 2 -1
-1 0 1
1 -1 0
3
0 1 -1
-2
1
1
3
1
(Equation 7)
EQUATION1234 V1 EN
(Equation 10)
Not applicable. Matrix on the left

used.
(Equation 11)
EQUATION1235 V1 EN
Matrix for winding which is in

opposite phase
EQUATION1231 V1 EN

used.
0 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
(Equation 9)
EQUATION1233 V1 EN

lagging

used.
(Equation 8)
EQUATION1232 V1 EN

lagging
(Equation 4)
0 -1 0
0 0 -1
-1 0 0
EQUATION1230 V1 EN

lagging
EQUATION1228 V1 EN
(Equation 5)
EQUATION1229 V1 EN

lagging
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
(Equation 3)
EQUATION1227 V1 EN

Reduction set to Off
-2 1
1 -2
EQUATION1236 V1 EN
(Equation 12)
-1 0 0
0 -1 0
0 0 -1
EQUATION1237 V1 EN
(Equation 13)
Technical manual
133
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A

Reduction set to On
leading
-1 1 0
1
0 -1 1
3
1 0 -1
EQUATION1238 V1 EN

leading

leading

leading
0 1 -1
-1 0 1
3
1 -1 0
1
1
-2
3
1
1
1
-2
EQUATION1242 V1 EN

leading
(Equation 15)
EQUATION1241 V1 EN
0 1 0
0 0 1
1 0 0
EQUATION1240 V1 EN
(Equation 16)

used.
(Equation 17)
-2
1
1
(Equation 18)
1 0 -1
1
-1 1 0
3
0 -1 1
EQUATION1244 V1 EN

used.
(Equation 14)
-1 2 -1
1
-1 -1 2
3
2 -1 -1
EQUATION1239 V1 EN

Reduction set to Off
0 0 -1
-1 0 0
0 -1 0
EQUATION1243 V1 EN
(Equation 19)

used.
(Equation 20)
By using this table complete equation for calculation of fundamental frequency

differential currents for two winding power transformer with YNd5 phase shift and
enabled zero sequence current reduction on HV side will be derived. From the given
power transformer phase shift the following is possible to be concluded:
1.
2.
The HV wye (Y) connected winding will be used as the reference winding and zero
sequence currents shall be subtracted on that side
The LV winding is lagging for 150
With the help of table 57, the following matrix equation can be written for this power
transformer:
134
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
ID _ A
2 -1 -1 I _ A _ W 1
-1 0 1 I _ A _ W 2
ID _ B = 1 -1 2 -1 I _ B _ W 1 + Vr _ W 2 1 1 -1 0 I _ B _ W 2
3

Vr _ W 1 3

ID _ C
-1 -1 2 I _ C _ W 1
0 1 -1 I _ C _ W 2
(Equation 21)
where:
ID_A
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase A (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_B
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase B (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_C
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase C (in W1 side primary amperes)
I_A_W1
I_B_W1
I_C_W1
I_A_W2
I_B_W2
I_C_W2
Vn_W1
Vn_W2
As marked in equation 1 and equation 2, the first term on the right hand side of the
equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents from the W1
side to the fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated for eventual power
transformer phase shift. The second term on the right hand side of the equation, represents
the total contribution from the individual phase currents from the W2 side to the
fundamental frequency differential currents, compensated for eventual power transformer
phase shift and transferred to the power transformer W1 side. The third term on the right
hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase
currents from the W3 side to the fundamental frequency differential currents,
compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift and transferred to the power
transformer W1 side. These current contributions are important, because they are used for
calculation of common bias current.
The fundamental frequency differential currents are the "usual" differential currents, the
magnitudes which are applied in a phase-wise manner to the operate - restrain
characteristic of the differential protection. The magnitudes of the differential currents
can be read as service values from the function and they are available as outputs
IDMAG_A, IDMAG_B, IDMAG_C from the differential protection function block. Thus
they can be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any
external or internal fault condition.
Technical manual
135
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
On-line compensation for load tap changer movement

A load tap changer is a mechanical device, which is used to step-wise change number of
turns within one power transformer winding. Consequently the power transformer overall
turns ratio is changed. Typically the load tap changer is located within the HV winding
(that is, winding 1, W1) of the power transformer. By operating load tap changer, it is
possible to step-wise regulate voltage on the LV side of the power transformer. However
at the same time the differential protection for power transformer becomes unbalanced.
Differential function in the IED has built-in feature to continuously monitor the load tap
changer position and dynamically compensate on-line for changes in power transformer
turns ratio.
Differential currents are calculated as shown in equation 1 and equation 2. By setting
parameters, the winding location of the OLTC is defined. Also, the voltage change of each
step. Thus, if for example the load tap changer is located within winding 1 the no-load
voltage Un_W1 will be treated as a function of the actual load tap changer position in
equation 1 and equation 2. Thus for every load tap changer position a corresponding value
for Vn_W1 will be calculated and used in the above mentioned equations. By doing this,
complete on-line compensation for load tap changer movement is achieved. Differential
protection will be ideally balanced for every load tap changer position and no false
differential current will appear irrespective of actual load tap changer position.
Typically the minimum differential protection pickup for power transformer with load tap
changer is set between 30% to 40%. However with this load tap changer compensation
feature it is possible to set the differential protection in the IED more sensitive with a
pickup value of 15% to 20%.
Load tap changer position is measured within the IED by Tap changer control and
supervision, (TCLYLTC ,84). Within this function block, the load tap changer position
value is continuously monitored to insure its integrity.
When any error in the load tap changer position is detected an alarm is given. This signal
shall be connected to the OLTCxAL input of the differential function block. While
OLTCxAL input has a logical value of one the differential protection minimum pickup,
originally defined by setting parameter IdMin, will be increased by the set range of the
load tap changer. Alternatively the differential current alarm feature can be used to alarm
for any problems in the whole load tap changer compensation chain.
It shall be noted that:
136
two-winding differential protection in the IED can on-line compensate for one load
tap changer within the protected power transformer
three-winding differential protection in the IED can on-line compensate for up to two
load tap changers within the protected power transformer
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Differential current alarm

Fundamental frequency differential current level is monitored all the time within the
differential function. As soon as all three fundamental frequency differential currents are
above the set threshold defined by setting parameter IDiffAlarm a delay on pickup timer
is started. When the pre-set time, defined by setting parameter tAlarmDelay, has expired
the differential current alarm is generated and output signal IDALARM is set to logical
value one. This feature can be effectively used to provide alarm when load tap changer
position compensation is used and something in the whole compensation chain goes
wrong. This alarm can be as well used with some additional IED configuration logic to
desensitize the differential function.
Bias current
The bias current is calculated as the highest current amongst all individual winding current
contributions to the total fundamental frequency differential currents, as shown in
equation 1 and equation 2. All individual winding current contributions are already
referred to the power transformer winding one side (power transformer HV winding) and
therefore they can be compared regarding their magnitudes. There are six (or nine in the
case of a three-winding transformer) contributions to the total fundamental differential
currents, which are the candidates for the common bias current. The highest individual
current contribution is taken as a common bias (restrain) current for all three phases. This
"maximum principle" makes the differential protection more secure, with less risk to
operate for external faults and in the same time brings more meaning to the breakpoint
settings of the operate - restrain characteristic.
It shall be noted that if the zero-sequence currents are subtracted from the separate
contributions to the total differential current, then the zero-sequence component is
automatically eliminated from the bias current as well. This ensures that for secondary
injection from just one power transformer side the bias current is always equal to the
highest differential current regardless of the fault type. During normal through-load
operation of the power transformer, the bias current is equal to the maximum load current
from two (three) -power transformer windings.
The magnitudes of the common bias (restrain) current expressed in HV side amperes can
be read as service value from the function. At the same time it is available as an output
IBIAS from the differential protection function block. It can be connected to the
disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any external or internal fault
condition.
For application with so called "T" configuration, that is, two restraint CT inputs from one
side of the protected power transformer, such as in the case of breaker-and-a-half schemes
the primary CT ratings can be much higher than the rating of the protected power
transformer. In order to determine the bias current for such T configuration, the two
separate currents flowing in the T-side are scaled down to the protected power transform
level by means of additional settings. This is done in order to prevent unwanted desensitizing of the overall differential protection. In addition to that, the resultant currents
Technical manual
137
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
(the sum of two currents) into the protected power transformer winding, which is not
directly measured is calculated, and included in the common bias calculation. The rest of
the bias calculation procedure is the same as in protection schemes without breaker-anda-half arrangements.
Optional Elimination of zero sequence currents

To avoid unwanted trips for external ground-faults, the zero sequence currents should be
subtracted on the side of the protected power transformer, where the zero sequence
currents can flow at external ground-faults.
The zero sequence currents can be explicitly eliminated from the differential currents and
common bias current calculation by special, dedicated parameter settings, which are
available for every individual winding.
Elimination of the zero sequence component of current is necessary whenever:
the protected power transformer cannot transform the zero sequence currents to the
other side.
the zero sequence currents can only flow on one side of the protected power
transformer.
In most cases, power transformers do not properly transform the zero sequence current to
the other side. A typical example is a power transformer of the wye-delta type, for example
YNd1. Transformers of this type do not transform the zero sequence quantities, but zero
sequence currents can flow in the grounded wye connected winding. In such cases, an
external ground-fault on the wye-side causes zero sequence current to flow on the wyeside of the power transformer, but not on the other side. This results in false differential
currents - consisting exclusively of the zero sequence currents. If high enough, these false
differential currents can cause an unwanted disconnection of the healthy power
transformer. They must therefore be subtracted from the fundamental frequency
differential currents if an unwanted trip is to be avoided.
For delta windings this feature shall be enabled only if a grounding transformer exists
within the differential zone on the delta side of the protected power transformer.
Removing the zero sequence current from the differential currents decreases to some
extent the sensitivity of the differential protection for internal ground-faults. In order to
counteract this effect to some degree, the zero sequence current is subtracted not only from
the three fundamental frequency differential currents, but from the bias current as well.
Restrained and unrestrained limits of the differential protection

The power transformer differential protection function uses two limits, to which actual
magnitudes of the three fundamental frequency differential currents are compared at each
execution of the function.
138
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The unrestrained (that is, non-stabilized, "instantaneous") part of the differential

protection is used for very high differential currents, where it should be beyond any doubt,
that the fault is internal. This settable limit is constant and not proportional to the bias
current. Neither harmonic, nor any other restrain is applied to this limit, which is therefore
allowed to trip the power transformer instantaneously.
The restrained (stabilized) part of the differential protection compares the calculated
fundamental differential (operating) currents and the bias (restrain) current, by applying
them to the operate - restrain characteristic. Practically, the magnitudes of the individual
fundamental frequency differential currents are compared with an adaptive limit. This
limit is adaptive because it is dependent on the bias (that is, restrain) current magnitude.
This limit is called the operate - restrain characteristic. It is represented by a double-slope,
double-breakpoint characteristic, as shown in figure 33. The restrained characteristic is
determined by the following 5 settings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
IdMin (Sensitivity in section 1, multiple of trans. HV side rated current set under the
parameter RatedCurrentW1)
EndSection1 (End of section 1, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current set
under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
EndSection2 (End of section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current set
under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
SlopeSection2 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current
set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
SlopeSection3 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current
set under the parameter RatedCurrentW1)
The restrained characteristic in figure 33 is defined by the settings:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
IdMin
EndSection1
EndSection2
SlopeSection2
SlopeSection3
Technical manual
139
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
operate current
[ times IBase ]
Operate
unconditionally
UnrestrainedLimit
Operate
conditionally
2
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
SlopeSection3
1
IdMin
SlopeSection2
Restrain
0
0
EndSection1
EndSection2
restrain current
[ times IBase ]
en05000187-2.vsd
IEC05000187 V2 EN
Figure 33:
Description of the restrained, and the unrestrained operate

characteristics
where:
slope = D Ioperate 100%

D Irestrain
EQUATION1246 V1 EN
The operate - restrain characteristic is tailor-made and can be designed freely by the user
after his needs. The default characteristic is recommended to be used. It gives good results
in a majority of applications. The operate - restrain characteristic has in principle three
sections with a section-wise proportionality of the operate value to the bias (restrain)
current. The reset ratio is in all parts of the characteristic equal to 0.95.
Section 1: This is the most sensitive part on the characteristic. In section 1, normal
currents flow through the protected circuit and its current transformers, and risk for higher
false differential currents is relatively low. An un-compensated on-load tap-changer is a
140
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
typical reason for existence of the false differential currents in this section. The slope in
section 1 is always zero percent.
Section 2: In section 2, a certain minor slope is introduced which is supposed to cope with
false differential currents proportional to higher than normal currents through the current
transformers.
Section 3: The more pronounced slope in section 3 is designed to result in a higher
tolerance to substantial current transformer saturation at high through-fault currents,
which may be expected in this section.
The operate - restrain characteristic should be designed so that it can be expected that:
for internal faults, the operate (differential) currents are always with a good margin
above the operate - restrain characteristic
for external faults, the false (spurious) operate currents are with a good margin below
the operate - restrain characteristic
Fundamental frequency negative sequence differential currents

Existence of relatively high negative sequence currents is in itself a proof of a disturbance
on the power system, possibly a fault in the protected power transformer. The negativesequence currents are a measurable indication of an abnormal condition, similar to the
zero sequence current. One of the several advantages of the negative sequence currents
compared to the zero sequence currents is that they provide coverage for phase-to-phase
and power transformer turn-to-turn faults. Theoretically, the negative sequence currents
do not exist during symmetrical three-phase faults, however they do appear during initial
stage of such faults for a long enough time (in most cases) for the IED to make the proper
decision. Further, the negative sequence currents are not stopped at a power transformer
by the Yd, or Dy connection type. The negative sequence currents are always properly
transformed to the other side of any power transformer for any external disturbance.
Finally, the negative sequence currents are not affected by symmetrical through-load
currents.
For power transformer differential protection applications, the negative sequence based
differential currents are calculated by using exactly the same matrix equations, which are
used to calculate the traditional phase-wise fundamental frequency differential currents.
The same equation shall be fed by the negative sequence currents from the two power
transformer sides instead of individual phase currents, as shown in matrix equation 23 for
a case of two-winding, YNd5 power transformer.
Technical manual
141
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IDNS _ A
2 -1 -1 INS _ W 1
-1 0 1 INS _ W 2
IDNS _ B = 1 -1 2 -1 a INS _ W 1 + Vn _ W 2 1 1 -1 0 a INS _ W 2
Vn _ W 1
3

3
IDNS _ C
-1 -1 2 a 2 INS _ W 1
0 1 -1 a 2 INS _ W 2
1
3
(Equation 23)
EQUATION1560 V1 EN
where:
1.
is the Negative Sequence Differential Currents
2.
is the Negative Sequence current contribution from the W1 side
3.
is the Negative Sequence current contribution from the W2 side
and where:
IDNS_A
is the negative sequence differential current in phase A (in

W1 side primary amperes)
IDNS_B
is the negative sequence differential current in phase B (in

IDNS_C
is the negative sequence differential current in phase C (in

INS_W1
is the negative sequence current on the W1 side in primary

amperes (phase A reference)
INS_W2
is the negative sequence current on the W2 side in primary

amperes (phase A reference)
Vn_W1
is the transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on the W1

side (setting parameter)
Vn_W2
is the transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage on W2 side

(setting parameter)
is the complex operator for sequence quantities,
a=e
j 120
=-
EQUATION1248 V1 EN
1
2
+ j
3
2
(Equation 24)
Because the negative sequence currents always form the symmetrical three phase current
system on each transformer side (that is, negative sequence currents in every phase will
always have the same magnitude and be phase displaced for 120 electrical degrees from
each other), it is only necessary to calculate the first negative sequence differential current
that is, IDNS_A.
142
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
As marked in equation 23, the first term on the right hand side of the equation, represents
the total contribution of the negative sequence current from the W1 side compensated for
eventual power transformer phase shift. The second term on the right hand side of the
equation, represents the total contribution of the negative sequence current from the W2
side compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift and transferred to the power
transformer W1 side. These negative sequence current contributions are phasors, which
are further used in directional comparisons, to characterize a fault as internal or external.
See section "Internal/external fault discriminator" for more information.
The magnitudes of the negative sequence differential current expressed in the HV side A
can be read as service values from the function. In the same time it is available as outputs
IDMAG_NS from the differential protection function block. Thus, it can be connected to
the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any external or internal fault
condition.
Internal/external fault discriminator

The internal/external fault discriminator is a very powerful and reliable supplementary
criterion to the traditional differential protection. It is recommended that this feature shall
be always used (that is, enabled) when protecting three-phase power transformers. The
internal/external fault discriminator detects even minor faults, with a high sensitivity and
at high speed, and at the same time discriminates with a high degree of dependability
between internal and external faults.
The internal/external fault discriminator responds to the magnitudes and the relative phase
angles of the negative-sequence fault currents at the different windings of the protected
power transformer. The negative sequence fault currents must first be referred to the same
phase reference side, and put to the same magnitude reference. This is done by the matrix
expression (see equation 23).
Operation of the internal/external fault discriminator is based on the relative position of
the two phasors representing the winding one (W1) and winding two (W2) negative
sequence current contributions, respectively, defined by expression shown in
equation 23. It performs a directional comparison between these two phasors. First, the
LV side phasor is referred to the HV side (W1 side): both the magnitude, and the phase
position are referred to the HV (W1 side). Then the relative phase displacement between
the two negative sequence current phasors is calculated. In case of three-winding power
transformers, a little more complex algorithm is applied, with two directional tests. The
overall directional characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator is shown in
figure 34, where the directional characteristic is defined by two setting parameters:
1.
2.
IMinNegSeq
NegSeqROA
Technical manual
143
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
90 deg
120 deg
If one or the
other of
currents is too
low, then no
measurement
is done, and
120 degrees
is mapped
Internal/external
fault boundary
NegSeqROA
(Relay
Operate
Angle)
180 deg
0 deg
IMinNegSeq
Internal
fault
region
External
fault
region
270 deg
en05000188-3-en.vsd
IEC05000188 V3 EN
Figure 34:
Operating characteristic of the internal/external fault discriminator
In order to perform directional comparison of the two phasors their magnitudes must be
high enough so that one can be sure that they are due to a fault. On the other hand, in order
to guarantee a good sensitivity of the internal/external fault discriminator, the value of this
minimum limit must not be too high. Therefore this limit value, called IminNegSeq, is
settable in the range of 0.02 to 0.20 times the IBase of the power transformer winding one.
The default value is 0.04. Note that, in order to enhance stability at higher fault currents,
the relatively very low threshold value IminNegSeq is dynamically increased at currents
higher than normal currents: if the bias current is higher than 110% of IBase ,then 10% of
the bias current is added to the IminNegSeq. Only if the magnitudes of both negative
sequence current contributions are above the actual limit, the relative position between
these two phasors is checked. If either of the negative sequence current contributions,
which should be compared, is too small (less than the set value for IminNegSeq), no
directional comparison is made in order to avoid the possibility to produce a wrong
decision. This magnitude check guarantees stability of the algorithm, when the power
transformer is energized. The setting NegSeqROA represents the Relay Operate Angle,
which determines the boundary between the internal and external fault regions. It can be
selected in a range from 30 degrees to 90 degrees, with a step of 0.1 degree. The default
value is 60 degrees. The default setting 60 degree favours security in comparison to
dependability.
144
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
If the above condition concerning magnitudes is fulfilled, the internal/external fault

discriminator compares the relative phase angle between the negative sequence current
contributions from W1 and W2 sides of the power transformer using the following two
rules:
If the negative sequence current contributions from the W1 and the W2 sides are in
phase, the fault is internal (that is, both phasors are within protected zone)
If the negative sequence currents contributions from W1 and W2 sides are 180
degrees out of phase, the fault is external (that is, W1 phasors is outside protected
zone)
For example, for any unsymmetrical external fault, ideally the respective negative
sequence current contributions from the W1 and W2 power transformer sides will be
exactly 180 degrees apart and equal in magnitude, regardless the power transformer turns
ratio and phase displacement. An example is shown in figure 35, which shows trajectories
of the two separate phasors representing the negative sequence current contributions from
the HV and LV sides of an Yd5 power transformer (after compensation of the transformer
turns ratio and phase displacement) by using equation 23) for an unsymmetrical external
fault. Observe that the relative phase angle between these two phasors is 180 electrical
degrees at any point in time. No current transformer saturation was assumed for this case.
Technical manual
145
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
"steady state"
for HV side
neg. seq. phasor
90
60
150
30
10
ms
180
0
0.1 kA
10
ms
0.2 kA
0.3 kA
0.4 kA
330
210
240
270
"steady state"
for LV side
neg. seq. phasor
Contribution to neg. seq. differential current from HV side

Contribution to neg. seq. differential current from LV side
en05000189.vsd
IEC05000189 V1 EN
Figure 35:
Trajectories of Negative Sequence Current Contributions from HV and

LV sides of Yd5 power transformer during external fault
Under external fault conditions, the relative angle is theoretically equal to 180 degrees.
During internal faults, the angle shall ideally be 0 degrees, but due to possible different
negative sequence source impedance angles on the W1 and W2 sides of the protected
power transformer, it may differ somewhat from the ideal zero value. However, during
heavy faults, CT saturation might cause the measured phase angle to differ from 180
degrees for an external, and from 0 degrees for an internal fault. See figure 36 for an
example of a heavy internal fault with transient CT saturation.
146
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Dire ctiona l Compa ris on Crite rion: Inte rna l fa ult a s s e e n from the HV s ide
90
e xcurs ion
from 0 de gre e s
due to CT
s a tura tion
60
120
35 ms
150
30
de finite ly
a n inte rna l
fa ult
180
e xte rna l
fa ult
re gion
0.5 kA
330
210
trip c o mmand
in 12 ms
Inte rna l fa ult
de cla re d 7 ms
a fte r inte rna l
fa ult occure d
1.0 kA
240
300
270
1.5 kA
HV s ide contribution to the tota l ne ga tive s e que nce diffe re ntia l curre nt in kA
Dire ctiona l limit (within the re gion de limite d by 60 de gre e s is inte rna l fa ult)
en05000190.vsd
IEC05000190 V1 EN
Figure 36:
Operation of the internal/external fault discriminator for internal fault with

CT saturation
It shall be noted that additional security measures are implemented in the internal/external
fault discriminator algorithm in order to guarantee proper operation with heavily saturated
current transformers. The trustworthy information on whether a fault is internal or
external is typically obtained in about 10ms after the fault inception, depending on the
setting IminNegSeq, and the magnitudes of the fault currents. During heavy faults,
approximately 5ms time to full saturation of the main CT is sufficient in order to produce
a correct discrimination between internal and external faults.
Unrestrained, and sensitive negative sequence protections

Two sub functions, which are based on the internal/external fault discriminator with the
ability to trip a faulty power transformer, are parts of the traditional power transformer
differential protection.
The unrestrained negative sequence differential protection
The unrestrained negative sequence protection is activated if one or more pickup signals
have been set by the traditional differential protection algorithm. This happens because
one or more of the fundamental frequency differential currents entered the operate region
on the operate - restrain characteristic. So, this protection is not independent of the
Technical manual
147
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
traditional restrained differential protection - it is activated after the first start signal has
been placed.
If the same fault has been positively recognized as internal, then the unrestrained negative
sequence differential protection places its own trip request.
Any block signals by the harmonic and/or waveform criteria, which can block the
traditional differential protection are overridden, and the differential protection operates
quickly without any further delay.
This logic guarantees a fast disconnection of a faulty power transformer for any internal
fault.
If the same fault has been classified as external, then generally, but not unconditionally,
a trip command is prevented. If a fault is classified as external, the further analysis of the
fault conditions is initiated. If all the instantaneous differential currents in phases where
pickup signals have been issued are free of harmonic pollution, then a (minor) internal
fault, simultaneous with a predominant external fault can be suspected. This conclusion
can be drawn because at external faults, major false differential currents can only exist
when one or more current transformers saturate. In this case, the false instantaneous
differential currents are polluted by higher harmonic components, the 2nd, the 5th etc.
Sensitive negative sequence based turn-to-turn fault protection
The sensitive, negative sequence current based turn-to-turn fault protection detects the
low level faults, which are not detected by the traditional differential protection until they
develop into more severe faults, including power transformer iron core. The sensitive
protection is independent from the traditional differential protection and is a very good
complement to it. The essential part of this sensitive protection is the internal/external
fault discriminator. In order to be activated, the sensitive protection requires no pickup
signal from the traditional power transformer biased differential protection. If magnitudes
of HV and LV negative sequence current contributions are above the set limit for
IminNegSeq, then their relative positions are determined. If the disturbance is
characterized as an internal fault, then a separate trip request will be placed. Any decision
on the way to the final trip request must be confirmed several times in succession in order
to cope with eventual CT transients. This causes a short additional operating time delay
due to this security count. For very low level turn-to-turn faults the overall response time
of this protection is about 30ms.
Instantaneous differential currents

The instantaneous differential currents are calculated from the instantaneous values of the
input currents in order to perform the harmonic analysis and waveform analysis upon each
one of them (see section "Harmonic and waveform block criteria" for more information).
The instantaneous differential currents are calculated using the same matrix expression as
shown in equation 1 and equation 2. The same matrices A, B and C are used for these
148
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
calculations. The only difference is that the matrix algorithm is fed by instantaneous
values of currents, that is, samples.
Harmonic and waveform block criteria

The two block criteria are the harmonic restrain and the waveform restrain. These two
criteria have the power to block a trip command by the traditional differential protection,
which produces pickup signals by applying the differential currents, and the bias current,
to the operate - restrain characteristic.
Harmonic restrain
The harmonic restrain is the classical restrain method traditionally used with power
transformer differential protections. The goal is to prevent an unwanted trip command due
to magnetizing inrush currents at switching operations, or due to magnetizing currents at
over-voltages.
The magnetizing currents of a power transformer flow only on one side of the power
transformer and are therefore always the cause of false differential currents. The harmonic
analysis (the 2nd and the 5th harmonic) is applied to the instantaneous differential currents.
Typical instantaneous differential currents during power transformer energizing are
shown in figure 37. The harmonic analysis is only applied in those phases, where pickup
signals have been set. For example, if the content of the 2nd harmonic in the instantaneous
differential current of phase A is above the setting I2/I1Ratio, then a block signal is set for
that phase, which can be read as BLK2H_A output of the differential protection.
Waveform restrain
The waveform restrain criterion is a good complement to the harmonic analysis. The
waveform restrain is a pattern recognition algorithm, which looks for intervals within each
fundamental power system cycle with low instantaneous differential current. This interval
is often called current gap in protection literature. However, within differential function
this criterion actually searches for long-lasting intervals with low rate-of-change in
instantaneous differential current, which are typical for the power transformer inrush
currents. Block signals BLKWAV_A(B,C) are set in those phases where such behavior is
detected. The algorithm does not require any end user settings. The waveform algorithm
is automatically adapted dependent only on the power transformer rated data.
Technical manual
149
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Current [%]
400kV Currents
I_A
I_B
I_C
Time [cycles]
en05000343_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000343 V1 EN
Figure 37:
Inrush currents to a transformer as seen by a protective IED. Typical is a

high amount of the 2nd harmonic, and intervals of low current, and low
rate-of-change of current within each period.
Cross-blocking between phases

The basic definition of the cross-blocking is that one of the three phases can block
operation (that is, tripping) of the other two phases due to the harmonic pollution of the
differential current in that phase (that is, waveform, 2nd or 5th harmonic content). In
differential algorithm the user can control the cross-blocking between the phases via the
setting parameter CrossBlockEn=Enabled.
When parameter CrossBlockEn=Enabled cross blocking between phases is introduced.
There is no time settings involved, but the phase with the operating point above the set bias
characteristic (in the operate region) will be able to cross-block the other two phases if it
is itself blocked by any of the previously explained restrained criteria. As soon as the
operating point for this phase is below the set bias characteristic (that is, in the restrain
region) cross blocking from that phase will be inhibited. In this way cross-blocking of the
temporary nature is achieved. It should be noted that this is the default setting value for this
parameter.
When parameter CrossBlockEn=Disabled, any cross blocking between phases will be
disabled. It is recommended to use the value Disabled with caution in order to avoid the
unwanted tripping during initial energizing of the power transformer.
Switch onto fault feature

The transformer differential function has a built-in, advanced switch onto fault feature.
This feature can be enabled or disabled by a setting parameter SOTFMode. When enabled
this feature ensures quick differential protection tripping in cases where a transformer is
150
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
energized with an internal fault (for example, forgotten grounding on transformer LV

side). Operation of this feature is based on the fact that a current gap (term current gap is
explained under waveblock feature above) will exist within the first power system cycle
when healthy power transformer is energized. If this is not the case the waveblock
criterion will reset quickly. This quick reset of the waveblock criterion will temporarily
disable the second harmonic blocking feature of the differential protection function. This
consequently ensures fast operation of the transformer differential function for a switch
onto a fault condition. It shall be noted that this feature is only active during initial power
transformer energizing, under the first 50 ms. When the switch onto fault feature is
disabled by the setting parameter SOTFMode, the waveblock and second harmonic
blocking features work in parallel and are completely independent from each other.
Open CT detection feature

Transformer differential protection has a built-in, advanced open CT detection feature.
A sudden inadvertently opened CT circuit may cause an unexpected and unwanted
operation of the Transformer differential protection under normal load conditions.
Damage of secondary equipment may occur due to high voltage from open CT circuit
outputs. It is always an advantage, from the point of view of security and reliability, to
have the open CT detection function to block the transformer differential protection
function in case of an open CT condition, and produce an alarm signal to the operational
personnel to quickly correct the open CT condition.
The built-in open CT feature can be enabled or disabled by the setting parameter
OpenCTEnable (Disabled/Enabled). When enabled, this feature tries to prevent maloperation when a loaded main CT connected to Transformer differential protection is by
mistake open circuited on the secondary side. Note that this feature can only detect
interruption of one CT phase current at a time. If two or even all three-phase currents of
one set of CTs are accidentally interrupted at precisely the same time, this feature cannot
operate. Transformer differential protection generates a trip signal if the false differential
current is sufficiently high. An open CT circuit is typically detected in 1214 ms, and if
the load in the protected circuit is relatively high, about the nominal load, the unwanted
trip cannot always be prevented. Still, the information about what was the cause of the
open CT secondary circuit, is vital.
The principle applied to detect an open CT is a simple pattern recognition method, similar
to the waveform check used by the Power transformer differential protection in order to
detect the magnetizing inrush condition. The open CT detection principle is based on the
fact that for an open CT, the current in the phase with the open CT suddenly drops to zero
(that is, as seen by the protection), while the currents of the other two phases continue as
before.
The open CT function is supposed to detect an open CT under normal conditions, that is,
with the protected multi-terminal circuit under normal load (10...110% of the rated load).
If the load currents are very low or zero, the open CT condition cannot be detected. In
addition to load condition requirement, Open CT function also checks the differential
Technical manual
151
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
current on faulty phase. If the differential current is lower than 50% of IdMin, the open CT
condition cannot be detected. Therefore, the Open CT algorithm only detects an open CT
if the load on the power transformer is 10...110% of rated load and the differential current
is higher than 50% of IdMin on that phase. The search for an open CT starts 60 seconds
(50 seconds in 60 Hz systems) after the transformer is energized. The Open CT detection
feature can also be explicitly deactivated by setting: OpenCTEnable = 0 (Disabled ).
If an open CT is detected and the output OPENCT set to 1, then all the differential
functions are blocked, except the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential. An alarm
signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report to operational
personnel for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected. When the open CT
condition is removed (that is, the previously open CT is reconnected), the functions
remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which is also defined by a setting
(tOCTResetDelay). This is to prevent an eventual mal-operation after the reconnection of
the previously open CT secondary circuit.
The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the defective
CT secondary circuit. The algorithm clearly indicates the IED side, CT input and phase in
which an open CT condition has been detected. These indications are provided via the
following outputs from the Transformer differential protection function:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Output OPENCT provides instant information to indicate that an open CT circuit has
been detected.
Output OPENCTAL provides a time-delayed alarm that the open CT circuit has been
detected. Time delay is defined by the parameter tOCTAlarmDelay.
Integer output OPENCTIN provides information on the local HMI regarding which
open CT circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No 2).
Integer output OPENCTPH provides information on the local HMI regarding in
which phase an open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase A; 2= Phase B; 3= Phase
C).
Once the open CT condition is declared, the algorithm stops to search for further open CT
circuits. It waits until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. Note that once the open
CT condition has been detected, it can be reset automatically within the differential
function. It is not possible to externally reset an open CT condition. To reset the open CT
circuit alarm automatically, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
Bias current is for at least one minute smaller than 110%

The open CT condition in the defective CT circuit has been corrected (for example,
current asymmetry disappears)
The above two conditions are fulfilled for a longer time than defined by the setting
parameter tOCTResetDelay
If an open CT has been detected in a separate group of three CTs, the algorithm is reset
either when the missing current returns to the normal value, or when all three currents
152
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
become zero. After the reset, the open CT detection algorithm starts again to search for
open CT circuits within the protected zone.
6.1.7.2
Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for transformer differential protection are shown in the
following figures.
IED
Differential function
Derive equation to calculate differential currents
Phasors &
samples
Phasors &
samples
Phasor calculation of
individual phase current
Trafo
Data
individual phase current
152
A/D conversion scaling with

CT ratio
52
A/D conversion scaling with

CT ratio
ADM
Instantaneous (sample based)

Differential current, phase A
ID_A

Differential current, phase B
ID_B

Differential current, phase C
ID_C
IDMAG_NS
Negative sequence diff current

& NS current contribution from
individual windings
IDMAG_A
Fundamental frequency (phasor

based) Diff current, phase A &
phase current contributions from
individual windings
IDMAG_B

based) Diff current, phase B &
individual windings
IDMAG_C

based) Diff current, phase C &
individual windings
MAX
IBIAS
Settings for Zer. Seq.

Current Reduction
ANSI05000166_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000166 V2 EN
Figure 38:
Treatment of measured currents within IED for transformer differential function
Figure 38 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done in case of a twowinding transformer.
The following currents are inputs used in the power transformer differential protection
function. They must all be expressed in power system (primary) A.
Technical manual
153
Section 6
1.
2.
3.
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Instantaneous values of currents (samples) from the HV, and LV sides for twowinding power transformers, and from the HV, the first LV, and the second LV side
for three-winding power transformers.
Currents from all power transformer sides expressed as fundamental frequency
phasors with their real and imaginary parts. These currents are calculated within the
protection function by the fundamental frequency Fourier filters.
Negative sequence currents from all power transformer sides expressed as phasors.
These currents are calculated within the protection function by the symmetrical
components module.
The power transformer differential protection:

1.
2.
3.
154
Calculates three fundamental frequency differential currents and one common bias
current. The zero-sequence component can optionally be eliminated from each of the
three fundamental frequency differential currents and at the same time from the
common bias current.
Calculates three instantaneous differential currents. They are used for harmonic, and
waveform analysis. Instantaneous differential currents are useful for post-fault
analysis using disturbance recording
Calculates negative-sequence differential current. Contributions to it from both (all
three) power transformer sides are used by the internal/external fault discriminator to
detect and classify a fault as internal or external.
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BLKUNRES
a
IdUnre
AND
b>a
TRIPUNRE_A
IDMAG_A
IBIAS
PU_A
AND
BLOCK
BLKRES
AND
OR
IDA
NOT
2nd
Harmonic
BLK2H_A
5th
Harmonic
BLK5H_A
BLKWAV_A
Wave
block
Cross Block
from B or C phases
CrossBlockEn=Enabled
TRIPRES_A
AND
OR
AND
Cross Block
to B or C phases
ANSI05000168 V2 EN
Figure 39:
Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for Phase A
Technical manual
155
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Internal/
External
Fault
discrimin
ator
Neg.Seq. Diff
Current
Contributions
EXTFAULT
INTFAULT
TRNSSENS
AND
TRNSUNR
AND
OpNegSeqDiff=On
IBIAS
t
0
b>a
Constant
BLKNSSEN
BLKNSUNR
BLOCK
PU_A
PU_B
OR
PU_C
en05000167_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000167 V1 EN
Figure 40:
Transformer differential protection simplified logic diagram for external/

internal fault discriminator
TRIPRES_A
TRIPRES_B
TRIPRES_C
OR
TRIPRES
OR
TRIPUNRE
TRIPUNRE_A
TRIPUNRE_B
TRIPUNRE_C
TRNSSENS
OR
TRIP
TRNSUNR
en05000278_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000278 V1 EN
Figure 41:
156
Transformer differential protection internal grouping of tripping signals
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
OR
PICKUP
OR
BLK2H
OR
BLK5H
OR
BLKWAV
BLK2H_A
BLK2H_B
BLK2H_C
BLK5H_A
BLK5H_B
BLK5H_C
BLKWAV_A
BLKWAV_B
BLKWAV_C
en05000279_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000279 V1 EN
Figure 42:
Transformer differential protection internal grouping of logical signals
Logic in figures 39, 40, 41 and 42 can be summarized as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
The three fundamental frequency differential currents are applied in a phase-wise

manner to two limits. The first limit is the operate-restrain characteristic, while the
other is the high-set unrestrained limit. If the first limit is exceeded, a pickup signal
PICKUP is set. If the unrestrained limit is exceeded, an immediate unrestrained trip
TRIPUNRE and common trip TRIP are issued.
If a pickup signal is issued in a phase the harmonic and the waveform block signals
are checked. Only a pickup signal, which is free of all of its block signals can result
in a trip command. If the cross-block logic scheme is applied, then only if all phases
with set pickup signal are free of their respective block signals, a restrained trip
TRIPRES and common trip TRIP are issued
If a pickup signal is issued in a phase, and the fault has been classified as internal, then
any eventual block signals are overridden and unrestrained negative-sequence trip
TRNSUNR and common trip TRIP are issued without any further delay. This feature
is called the unrestrained negative-sequence protection 110% bias.
The sensitive negative sequence differential protection is independent of any pickup
signals. It is meant to detect smaller internal faults such as turn-to-turn faults, which
are often not detected by the traditional differential protection. The sensitive negative
sequence differential protection pickup whenever both contributions to the total
negative sequence differential current (that must be compared by the internal/
external fault discriminator) are higher than the value of the setting IMinNegSeq. If a
fault is positively recognized as internal, and the condition is stable with no
interruption for at least one fundamental frequency cycle the sensitive negative
Technical manual
157
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
5.
6.
sequence differential protection TRNSSENS and common trip TRIP are issued. This
feature is called the sensitive negative sequence differential protection.
If a pickup signal is issued in a phase (see signal PU_A), even if the fault has been
classified as an external fault, then the instantaneous differential current of that phase
(see signal ID_A) is analyzed for the 2nd and the 5th harmonic contents (see the blocks
with the text inside: 2nd Harmonic; Wave block and 5th Harmonic). If there is less
harmonic pollution than allowed by the settings I2/I1Ratio, and I5/I1Ratio, (then the
outputs from the blocks 2nd harmonic and 5th harmonic is 0) then it is assumed that
a minor simultaneous internal fault must have occurred. Only under these conditions
a trip command is allowed (the signal TRIPRES_A is = 1). The cross-block logic
scheme is automatically applied under such circumstances. (This means that the cross
block signals from the other two phases B and C is not activated to obtain a trip on the
TRIPRES_A output signal in figure 39)
All pickup and blocking conditions are available as phase segregated as well as
common (that is three-phase) signals.
IDMAG_A Diff
a
a>b
b
IDiffAlarm
IDMAG_B Diff
a
a>b
&
IDiffAlarm
IDMAG_C Diff
0-tAlarmDelay
0
IDALARM
a
a>b
b
IDiffAlarm
ANSI06000546 V2 EN
Figure 43:
6.1.8
Differential current alarm logic
Technical data
Table 58:
T2WPDIF, T3WPDIF (87T) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operating characteristic
Adaptable
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 90%
Unrestrained differential current limit
(100-5000)% ofIBase on high voltage

winding
1.0% of set value

158
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Minimum pickup
(5-60)% of IBase
1.0% of In
Second harmonic blocking
(5.0-100.0)% of fundamental
differential current
1.0% of In
Note: Fundamental
magnitude = 100% of In
Fifth harmonic blocking
(5.0-100.0)% of fundamental
differential current
5.0% of In
Note: Fundamental
magnitude = 100% of In
Connection type for each of the

windings
Wye or delta
Phase displacement between high

voltage winding, W1 and each of the
windings, W2 and W3. Hour notation
011
Trip time at 0 to 2 x Id, restrained

function
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Id, restrained

function
Min. = 10 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Trip time at 0 to 5 x Id, unrestrained

function
Min. = 10 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Reset time at 5 to 0 x Id, unrestrained

function
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time
2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Id
6.2
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF

(87)
6.2.1
Identification
1Ph High impedance differential

protection
IEC 61850
identification
HZPDIF
IEC 60617
identification
Id
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87
SYMBOL-CC V2 EN
6.2.2
Functionality
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87) functions can be used when
the involved CTs have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing characteristics. It
utilizes an external CT secondary current summation by wiring. Actually all CT
Technical manual
159
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
secondary circuits which are involved in the differential scheme are connected in parallel.
External series resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor which are both mounted
externally to the IED, are also required.
The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED accessories in the Product Guide.
HZPDIF (87) can be used to protect generator stator windings, tee-feeders or busbars,
reactors, motors, auto-transformers, capacitor banks and so on. One such function block
is used for a high-impedance restricted earth fault protection. Three such function blocks
are used to form three-phase, phase-segregated differential protection. Several function
block instances (for example, six) can be available in a single IED.
6.2.3
Function block
HZPDIF (87)
ISI*
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRIP
ALARM
MEASVOLT
ANSI05000363 V2 EN
Figure 44:
6.2.4
Signals
Table 59:
Name
HZPDIF (87) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
ISI
GROUP
SIGNAL
Single phase current input
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
Table 60:
Name
160
HZPDIF (87) function block
HZPDIF (87) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm signal
MEASVOLT
REAL
Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
6.2.5
Table 61:
Name
Settings
HZPDIF (87) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
AlarmPickup
5 - 500
10
Alarm voltage level on CT secondary
tAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Time delay to activate alarm
TripPickup
10 - 900
100
Pickup voltage level in volts on CT secondary

side
R series
50 - 20000
Ohm
250
Value of series resistor in Ohms
6.2.6
Monitored data
Table 62:
Name
MEASVOLT
6.2.7
HZPDIF (87) Monitored data

Type
REAL
Values (Range)
-
Unit
kV
Description
Measured RMS voltage on CT
secondary side
Operation principle
High impedance protection system is a simple technique which requires that all CTs, used
in the protection scheme, have relatively high knee point voltage, similar magnetizing
characteristic and the same ratio. These CTs are installed in all ends of the protected
object. In order to make a scheme all CT secondary circuits belonging to one phase are
connected in parallel. From the CT junction points a measuring branch is connected. The
measuring branch is a series connection of one variable setting resistor (or series resistor)
RS with high ohmic value and an over-current element. Thus, the high impedance
differential protection responds to the current flowing through the measuring branch.
However, this current is result of a differential voltage caused by this parallel CT
connection across the measuring branch. Non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil) is used in
order to protect entire scheme from high peak voltages which may appear during internal
faults. Typical high impedance differential scheme is shown in Figure 45. Note that only
one phase is shown in this figure.
Technical manual
161
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
RS
1
I> (50)
2
GUID-C7509DA3-F6AA-4BA0-9D08-EAA376663AFA V1 EN
Figure 45:
HZPDIF scheme
Where in the Figure:

1.
2.
shows one main CT secondary winding connected in parallel with all other CTs, from
the same phase, connected to this scheme.
shows the scheme earthing point.
It is of utmost importance to insure that only one earthing point exists
in such protection scheme.
3.
4.
shows the setting (stabilizing) resistor RS.

shows the over-current measuring element.
The series connection of stabilizing resistor and over-current element
is designated as measuring branch.
5.
6.
7.
shows the non-linear resistor (that is, metrosil).

V is the voltage across the CT paralleling point (for example, across the measuring
branch).
I is the current flowing through the measuring branch.
V and I are interrelated in accordance with the following formula
V=RS I.
162
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Due to the parallel CT connections the high impedance differential relay can only measure
one current and that is the relay operating quantity. That means that there is no any
stabilizing quantity (that is, bias) in high-impedance differential protection schemes.
Therefore in order to guaranty the stability of the differential relay during external faults
the operating quantity must not exceed the set pickup value. Thus, for external faults, even
with severe saturation of some of the current transformers, the voltage across the
measuring branch shall not rise above the relay set pickup value. To achieve that a suitable
value for setting resistor RS is selected in such a way that the saturated CT secondary
winding provides a much lower impedance path for the false differential current than the
measuring branch. In case of an external fault causing current transformer saturation, the
non-saturated current transformers drive most of the spill differential current through the
secondary winding of the saturated current transformer and not through the measuring
brunch of the relay. The voltage drop across the saturated current transformer secondary
winding appears also across the measuring brunch, however it will typically be relatively
small. Therefore, the pick-up value of the relay has to be set above this false operating
voltage.
See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.
6.2.7.1
Logic diagram
The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance differential
protection function HZPDIF (87), see Figure 46.
The function utilizes the raw samples from the single phase current input connected to it.
Thus the twenty samples per fundamental power system cycle are available to the
HZPDIF function. These current samples are first multiplied with the set value for the
used stabilizing resistor in order to get voltage waveform across the measuring branch.
The voltage waveform is then filtered in order to get its RMS value. Note that used
filtering is designed in such a way that it ensures complete removal of the DC current
component which may be present in the primary fault current. The voltage RMS value is
then compared with set Alarm and Trip thresholds. Note that the TRIP signal is
intentionally delayed on drop off for 30 ms within the function. The measured RMS
voltage is available as a service value from the function. The function has block and trip
block inputs available as well.
Technical manual
163
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
AlarmPickup
0-tAlarm
0
AlarmPickup
0.03s
0
en05000301_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000301 V1 EN
Figure 46:
6.2.8
Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF

(87)
Technical data
Table 63:
HZPDIF (87)technical data
Function
164
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip voltage
(10-900) V
I=V/R
1.0% of In at I < In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
>95% at (30-900) V
Maximum continuous
power
V>Pickup2/SeriesResistor 200 W
Trip time at 0 to 10 x Vd
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 to 0 x
Vd
Min. = 75 ms
Max. = 95 ms
2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Vd
Trip time at 0 to 2 x Vd
Min. = 25 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x
Vd
Min. = 50 ms
Max. = 70 ms
15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vd
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
6.3
Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G)
6.3.1
Identification
Generator differential protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87G
GENPDIF
Id>
SYMBOL-NN V1 EN
6.3.2
Functionality
Short circuit between the phases of the stator windings causes normally very large fault
currents. The short circuit gives risk of damages on insulation, windings and stator iron
core. The large short circuit currents cause large forces, which can cause damage even to
other components in the power plant, such as turbine and generator-turbine shaft.
To limit the damage due to stator winding short circuits, the fault clearance must be as fast
as possible (instantaneous). If the generator block is connected to the power system close
to other generating blocks, the fast fault clearance is essential to maintain the transient
stability of the non-faulted generators.
Normally, the short circuit fault current is very large, that is, significantly larger than the
generator rated current. There is a risk that a short circuit can occur between phases close
to the neutral point of the generator, thus causing a relatively small fault current. The fault
current can also be limited due to low excitation of the generator. Therefore, it is desired
that the detection of generator phase-to-phase short circuits shall be relatively sensitive,
detecting small fault currents.
It is also of great importance that the generator differential protection does not trip for
external faults, with large fault currents flowing from the generator.
To combine fast fault clearance, as well as sensitivity and selectivity, the generator
differential protection is normally the best choice for phase-to-phase generator short
circuits.
Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G) is also well suited for protection of
shunt reactors or small busduct.
Technical manual
165
Section 6
6.3.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
GENPDIF (87G)
I3PNCT1*
TRIP
I3PNCT2*
TRIPRES
I3PTCT1*
TRIPUNRE
I3PTCT2*
TRNSUNR
BLOCK
TRNSSENS
BLKRES
PICKUP
BLKUNRES
PU_A
BLKNSUNR
BFI_B
BLKNSSEN
BFI_C
DESENSIT
BLKH
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
ID_A
ID_B
ID_C
IDMAG_NS
IBIAS
ANSI11000212 V1 EN
Figure 47:
6.3.4
Signals
Table 64:
Name
166
GENPDIF (87G) function block
GENPDIF (87G) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3PNCT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Neutral side input1
I3PNCT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Neutral side input2
I3PTCT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Terminal side input1
I3PTCT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Terminal side input2
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKRES
BOOLEAN
Block of trip command by the restrained diff. protection
BLKUNRES
BOOLEAN
Block of trip by unrestrained "instantaneous" diff. prot.
BLKNSUNR
BOOLEAN

BLKNSSEN
BOOLEAN

protection
DESENSIT
BOOLEAN
Raise pick up: function temporarily desensitized
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 65:
GENPDIF (87G) Output signals
Name
6.3.5
Table 66:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIPRES
BOOLEAN
TRIPUNRE
BOOLEAN
TRNSUNR
BOOLEAN

TRNSSENS
BOOLEAN

protection
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_A
BOOLEAN
BFI_B
BOOLEAN
BFI_C
BOOLEAN
BLKH
BOOLEAN
Common harmonic block signal
OPENCT
BOOLEAN
OPENCTAL
BOOLEAN
ID_A
REAL
Instantaneous differential current A; in primary Amperes
ID_B
REAL
Instantaneous differential current B; in primary Amperes
ID_C
REAL
Instantaneous differential current C; in primary Amperes
IDMAG_NS
REAL
Negative Sequence Differential current; in primary

Amperes
IBIAS
REAL
Magnitude of the common Bias current; in primary

Amperes
Settings
GENPDIF (87G) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
IdMin
0.05 - 1.00
IB
0.01
0.25
Section 1 sensitivity, multiple of generator

rated current
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
IB
0.01
10.00
Unrestr. prot. limit, multiple of generator rated

current
OpNegSeqDiff
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Negative Sequence Differential Enable Off/On
IMinNegSeq
0.02 - 0.20
IB
0.01
0.04
Neg. sequence curr. limit, as multiple of gen.

rated curr.
Technical manual
167
Section 6
Table 67:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
GENPDIF (87G) Group settings (advanced)

Unit
Step
Default
EndSection1
0.20 - 1.50
IB
0.01
1.25
End of section 1, multiple of generator rated

current
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
IB
0.01
3.00
End of section 2, multiple of generator rated

current
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0

SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0

OpCrossBlock
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Enable/ Disable for cross-block logic

between phases
NegSeqROA
30.0 - 120.0
Deg
0.1
60.0
Operate Angle of int/ext neg. seq. fault

discriminator, deg
HarmDistLimit
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
10.0
(Total) relative harmonic distorsion limit,

percent
TempIdMin
1.0 - 5.0
IdMin
0.1
2.0
Temp. Id pickup when input raisePickUp=1,

multiple of IdMin
AddTripDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Additional trip delay, when input

raisePickUp=1
OperDCBiasing
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation DC biasing On / Off
OpenCTEnable
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable/Disable open CT detection
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
1.000
Open CT: time to alarm if an open CT is

detected, in sec
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250

activated
tOCTUnrstDelay
0.100 - 100.000
0.001
10.000

delay, in s
Table 68:
Name
Values (Range)
Description
GENPDIF (87G) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
InvertCT2Curr
No
Yes
No
Invert CT 2 curr., yes (1) or no (0). Default is no

(0).
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12
Selection of one of the Global Base Value

groups
168
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
6.3.6
Monitored data
Table 69:
Name
6.3.7
GENPDIF (87G) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IDMAG_A
REAL
Fund. freq. differential current,

phase A; in primary A
IDMAG_B
REAL

phase B; in primary A
IDMAG_C
REAL

phase C; in primary A
IDMAG_NS
REAL
Negative Sequence
Differential current; in primary
Amperes
IBIAS
REAL
Magnitude of the common

Bias current; in primary
Amperes
Operation principle
The task of Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G) is to determine whether a
fault is within the protected zone, or outside the protected zone. The protected zone is
delimited by the position of current transformers, as shown in figure 48.
IEC06000430 V2 EN
Figure 48:
Position of current transformers; the recommended (default) orientation
If the fault is internal, the faulty generator must be quickly tripped, that is, disconnected
from the network, the field breaker tripped and the agent to the prime mover interrupted.
GENPDIF (87G) function always uses reference (default) directions of CTs towards the
protected generator as shown in figure 48. Thus, it always measures the currents on the
two sides of the generator with the same reference direction towards the generator
windings. With the orientation of CTs as in figure 48, the difference of currents flowing
in, and out, of a separate stator winding phase is simply obtained by summation of the two
currents fed to the differential protection function.
Numerical IEDs have brought a large number of advantages and new functionality to the
protective relaying. One of the benefits is the simplicity and accuracy of calculating
symmetrical components from individual phase quantities. Within the firmware of a
numerical IED, it is no more difficult to calculate negative-sequence components than it
Technical manual
169
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
is to calculate zero-sequence components. Diversity of operation principles integrated in

the same protection function enhances the overall performance without a significant
increase in cost.
A novelty in GENPDIF (87G), namely the negative-sequence-current-based internalexternal fault discriminator, is used advantageously in order to determine whether a fault
is internal or external. Indeed, the internal-external fault discriminator not only positively
discriminates between internal and external faults, but can independently detect minor
faults which may not be ascertained (until they develop into more serious faults) by the
"usual" differential protection based only on operate-restrain characteristic.
GENPDIF (87G) is using fundamental frequency phase current phasors and negative
sequence current phasors. These quantities are derived outside the differential protection
function block, in the general pre-processing blocks. GENPDIF (87G) is also using with
advantage the DC component of the instantaneous differential current and the 2nd and 5th
harmonic components of the instantaneous differential currents. The instantaneous
differential currents are calculated from the input samples of the instantaneous values of
the currents measured at both ends of the stator winding. The DC and the 2nd and 5th
harmonic components of each separate instantaneous differential current are extracted
inside the differential protection.
6.3.7.1
Function calculation principles

To make a differential protection as sensitive and stable as possible, the restrained
differential characteristic is used. The protection must be provided with a proportional
bias, which makes the protection operate for a certain percentage differential current
related to the current through the generator stator winding. This stabilizes the protection
under through fault conditions while still permitting the system to have good basic
sensitivity. The following chapters explain how these quantities are calculated.
The fundamental frequency phasors of the phase currents from both sides of the generator
(the neutral side and the terminal side) are delivered to the differential protection function
by the pre-processing module of the IED.
6.3.7.2
Fundamental frequency differential currents

The fundamental frequency RMS differential current is a vectorial sum (that is, sum of
fundamental frequency phasors) of the individual phase currents from the two sides of the
protected generator. The magnitude of the fundamental frequency RMS differential
current, in phase A, is as calculated in equation 25:
Idiff _ A = [(Re( IAn + IAt )) 2 + (Im( IAn + IAt )) 2 ]
ANSIEQUATION2316 V2 EN
170
(Equation 25)
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
One common fundamental frequency bias current is used. The bias current is the
magnitude of the highest measured current in the protected circuit. The bias current is not
allowed to drop instantaneously, instead, it decays exponentially with a predefined time
constant. These principles make the differential IED more secure, with less risk to operate
for external faults. The maximum principle brings as well more meaning to the
breakpoint settings of the operate-restrain characteristic.
Ibias = max( IAn, IBn, ICn, IAt , IBt , ICt )

(Equation 26)
IAn
IAt
Idiff
IAt
IAn
ANSI07000018 V3 EN
Figure 49:
Internal fault
Technical manual
171
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IAn
IAt
External fault: IAn = - IAt
IAt
IAn
Idiff = 0
en07000019-2_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000019 V2 EN
Figure 50:
External fault
Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G) function uses two mutually

independent characteristics to which magnitudes of the three fundamental frequency
RMS differential currents are compared at each execution of the differential protection
function. These two characteristics divide, each of them independently, the operate
current restrain current plane into two regions: the operate (trip) region and the restrain
(block) region, as shown in figure 52. Two kinds of protection are obtained:
the non-stabilized (instantaneous unrestrained) differential protection

the stabilized differential protection
The non-stabilized (instantaneous) differential protection is used for very high differential
currents, where it must be beyond any doubt, that the fault is internal. This limit, (defined
by the setting UnrestrainedLimit), is a constant, not proportional dependent on the bias
(restrain) current. No harmonic or any other restrain is applied to this limit, which is,
therefore, called the unrestrained limit. The reset ratio of the unrestrained characteristic is
equal to 0.95.
The stabilized differential protection applies a differential (operate) current, and the
common bias (restrain) current, on the operate-restrain characteristic, as shown in
figure 52. Here, the actual limit, where the protection can operate, is dependent on the bias
(restrain) current. The operate value, is stabilized by the bias current. This operate
restrain characteristic is represented by a double-slope, double-breakpoint characteristic.
The restrained characteristic is determined by the following 5 settings:
172
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IdMin (Sensitivity in section 1, set as multiple of generator rated current)

EndSection1 (End of section 1, set as multiple of generator rated current)
EndSection2 (End of section 2, set as multiple of generator rated current)
SlopeSection2 (Slope in section 2 of the characteristic, set in percent)
SlopeSection3 (Slope in section 3 of the characteristic, set in percent)
slope = D Ioperate 100%

D Irestrain
(Equation 27)
EQUATION1246 V1 EN
Note that both slopes are calculated from the characteristics break points.
The operate-restrain characteristic is tailor-made, in other words, it can be constructed by

the user. A default operate-restrain characteristic is suggested which gives acceptably
good results in a majority of applications. The operate-restrain characteristic has in
principle three sections with a section-wise proportional dependence of the operate value
to the common restrain (bias) current. The reset ratio is in all parts of the characteristic
equal to 0.95.
Section 1 is the most sensitive part on the characteristic. In section 1, normal currents flow
through the protected circuit and its current transformers, and risk for higher false
differential currents is low. With generators, the only cause of small false differential
currents in this section can be tolerances of the current transformers used on both sides of
the protected generator. Slope in section 1 is always zero percent. Normally, with the
protected machine at rated load, the restrain, bias current will be around 1 p.u., that is,
equal to the machine rated current.
In section 2, a certain minor slope is introduced which is supposed to cope with false
differential currents proportional to higher than normal currents through the current
transformers.
The more pronounced slope in section 3 is designed to result in a higher tolerance to
substantial current transformer saturation at high through-fault currents, which can be
expected in this section.
Temporarily decreased sensitivity of differential protection is activated if the binary input
DESENSIT is (temporarily) set to 1 (TRUE). In this case, a new, separate limit is
superposed to the otherwise unchanged operate-bias characteristic. This limit is called
TempIdMin and it is available as a setting. The value of the setting TempIdMin must be
given as a multiple of the setting IdMin. In this case no trip command can be issued if all
fundamental frequency differential currents are below the value of the setting
TempIdMin.
Technical manual
173
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
AddTripDelay: If the input DESENSIT is activated also the operation time of the
protection function can be increased by using the setting AddTripDelay.
operate current
[ times IBase ]
Operate
unconditionally
UnrestrainedLimit
Operate
conditionally
2
Section 1
TempIdMin
IdMin
Section 2
Section 3
SlopeSection3
1
SlopeSection2
Restrain
0
0
EndSection1
EndSection2
restrain current
[ times IBase ]
en06000637.vsd
IEC06000637 V2 EN
Figure 52:
Operate-restrain characteristic
GENPDIF (87G) can also be temporarily desensitized if the Boolean setting

OperDCBiasing is set to 1 (TRUE). In this case, the DC component is extracted on-line
from the instantaneous differential currents. The highest DC component is taken as a kind
of bias in the sense that the highest sensitivity of the differential protection is inversely
proportional to the ratio of this DC component to the maximum fundamental frequency
differential current. Similar to the desensitization described above, a separate
(temporary) additional limit is activated. The value of this limit is bounded to either the
generator rated current, or 3 times IdMin, whichever is smaller. This temporary extra limit
decays exponentially from its maximum value with a time constant equal to T = 1 second.
This feature must be used when unmatched CTs are used on the generator or shunt reactor,
especially where a long DC time constant can be expected. The new limit is superposed
on the otherwise unchanged operate-bias characteristic, and temporarily determines the
highest sensitivity of the differential protection. This temporary sensitivity must be lower
than the sensitivity in section 1 of the operate-bias characteristic.
174
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
This DC desensitization is not active, if a disturbance has been detected

and characterized as internal fault.
6.3.7.3
Supplementary criteria
To relieve the burden of constructing an exact optimal operate-restrain characteristic, two
special features supplement the basic stabilized differential protection function, making
Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G) a very reliable one.
The supplementary criteria are:
Internal/external fault discriminator (enhances, or blocks, the trip command)

Harmonic restrain (blocks only)
The internal/external fault discriminator is a very reliable supplementary criterion. It

discriminates with a high speed between internal and external faults. The discriminator is
the main part of what is here called the negative-sequence-current-based differential
protections. It is recommended that this feature is always used (that is, enabled,
OpNegSeqDiff = On).
If a fault is classified as internal, then any eventual block signals by the harmonic criterion
are ignored, and the differential protection can operate very quickly without any further
delay.
If a fault (disturbance) is classified as external, then generally, but not unconditionally, a
trip command is prevented. If a fault is classified as external, harmonic analysis of the fault
conditions is initiated.
If all the differential currents which caused their respective pickup signals to be set, are
free of harmonic pollution, that is, if no harmonic block signal has been set, then a (minor)
internal fault, simultaneous with a predominant external fault, can be suspected. This
conclusion can be drawn because at external faults, major false differential currents can
only exist when one or more current transformers saturate transiently. In this case, the
false instantaneous differential currents are highly polluted by higher harmonic
components, the 2nd, and the 5th.
The existence of relatively high negative-sequence currents is in itself an indication of a
disturbance, as the negative-sequence currents are superimposed, pure-fault quantities.
The negative-sequence currents are measurable indications of abnormal conditions. The
negative sequence currents are particularly suitable for directional tests. The negative
sequence internal or external fault discriminator works satisfactorily even in case of threephase faults. Because of the fundamental frequency components (50/60 Hz) of the
decaying DC offset of the fault currents, the system is not fully symmetrical immediately
Technical manual
175
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
after the fault. Due to the transient existence of the negative sequence system, faults can
be distinguished as internal or external, even for three-phase faults.
The internal or external fault discriminator responds to the relative phase angles of the
negative sequence fault currents at both ends of the stator winding. Observe that the source
of the negative sequence currents at unsymmetrical faults is at the fault point.
If the two negative sequence currents, as seen by the differential relay, flow in the
same direction (that is with the CTs oriented as in figure 48), the fault is internal. If
the two negative sequence currents flow in opposite directions, the fault is external.
Under external fault condition, the relative angle is theoretically equal to 180. Under
internal fault condition, the angle is ideally 0, but due to possible different negativesequence impedance angles on both sides of the internal fault, it may differ somewhat
from 0.
The setting NegSeqROA, as shown in figure 53, represents the so called Relay Operate
Angle, which determines the boundary between the internal and external fault regions. It
can be selected in the range 30 to 90, with a step of 1. The default value is 60. The
default setting, 60, favors somewhat security in comparison to dependability.
Magnitudes of both negative-sequence currents which are to be compared as to their phase
positions in the complex plane must be high enough so that one can be sure that they are
due to a fault. The limit value IMinNegSeq is settable in the range [0.02 0.20] of the
protected generator rated current. Adaptability is introduced if the bias current is higher
than 150 % rated current. Adaptability is introduced 10 ms after this limit of 150 % rated
current has been crossed so that the internal/external discriminator is given the time to
detect correctly a fault before an eventual CT saturation sets in. The threshold
IMinNegSeq is dynamically increased by 4 % of the bias current, in case of internal faults,
and by 8 % of the bias current in case of external faults. Only if magnitudes of both
currents are above the limit IMinNegSeq, the angle between the two currents is calculated.
If any of the two currents is too small, no decision is taken regarding the relative position
of the fault, and this feature then remains inactive rather than to produce a wrong decision.
The relative angle is then assigned the value of 120 (2.094 radians). If this value persists,
then this is an indication that no directional comparison has been made. Neither internal,
nor external fault (disturbance) is declared in this case.
176
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
90 deg
120 deg
NegSeqROA
(Relay Operate Angle)
Angle could not be

measured. One or both
currents too small
Internal fault
region
180 deg
0 deg
IminNegSeq
External fault
region
Internal /
external fault
boundary.
Default 60 deg
The characteristic is defined by the

settings:
IMinNegSeq and NegSeqROA
270 deg
en06000433-2.vsd
IEC06000433 V2 EN
Figure 53:
NegSeqROA determines the boundary between the internal and external

fault regions
Unrestrained negative sequence differential protection

If one or more pickup signals have been set by the restrained differential protection
algorithm, because one or more of the fundamental frequency differential currents entered
the operate region of the restrained differential protection, then the internal/external
fault discriminator can enhance the final, common, trip command by the differential
protection. If a fault is classified as internal, then any eventual block signals by the
harmonic criterion are ignored, and the differential protection operates immediately
without any further delay. This makes the overall generator differential protection very
fast. Operation of this protection is signaled on the output of GENPDIF (87G) as
TRNSUNRE.
Sensitive negative sequence differential protection

The difference from the unrestrained negative sequence differential protection, described
above, is that the sensitive one does not require any pickup signal to be set. It is enough that
both of the negative sequence currents, contributions to the total negative sequence
differential current, which should be compared, are above the setting IMinNegSeq. Thus,
this protection can be made very sensitive. Further, an intentional delay of one cycle is
added in order not to inadvertently operate for some eventual transients. Further, the
sensitive negative sequence differential protection is automatically disabled when the bias
Technical manual
177
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
current exceeds 1.5 times the rated current of the protected generator. Operation of this
protection is signaled on the output of the function as TRNSENS.
6.3.7.4
Harmonic restrain
Harmonic restrain is the classical restrain method traditionally used with power
transformer differential protections. The goal there was to prevent an unwanted trip
command due to magnetizing inrush currents at switching operations, due to magnetizing
currents at over-voltages, or external faults. Harmonic restrain is just as useful with
Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G). The harmonic analysis is only
executed in those phases, where pickup signals have been set.
There is no magnetizing inrush to a generator, but there may be some in case of shunt
reactors. The false initial differential currents of a shunt reactor have an appreciable
amount of higher harmonic currents.
At external faults dangerous false differential currents can arise for different reasons,
mainly due to saturation of one or more current transformers. The false differential
currents display in this case a considerable amount of higher harmonics, which can,
therefore, be used to prevent an unwanted trip of a healthy generator or shunt reactor.
If a fault is recognized as external by the internal/external fault discriminator, but
nevertheless one or more pickup signals have been set, the harmonic analysis is initiated
in the phases with pickup signal, as previously described. If all of the instantaneous
differential currents, where trip signals have been set, are free of higher harmonics (that
is the cross-block principle is imposed temporarily), a (minor) internal fault is assumed to
have happened simultaneously with a predominant external one. A trip command is then
allowed.
6.3.7.5
Open CT detection feature

Transformer differential protection has a built-in, advanced open CT detection feature.
A sudden inadvertently opened CT circuit may cause an unexpected and unwanted
operation of the Transformer differential protection under normal load conditions.
Damage of secondary equipment may occur due to high voltage from open CT circuit
outputs. It is always an advantage, from the point of view of security and reliability, to
have the open CT detection function to block the transformer differential protection
function in case of an open CT condition, and produce an alarm signal to the operational
personnel to quickly correct the open CT condition.
The built-in open CT feature can be enabled or disabled by the setting parameter
OpenCTEnable (Disabled/Enabled). When enabled, this feature tries to prevent maloperation when a loaded main CT connected to Transformer differential protection is by
mistake open circuited on the secondary side. Note that this feature can only detect
178
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
interruption of one CT phase current at a time. If two or even all three-phase currents of
one set of CTs are accidentally interrupted at precisely the same time, this feature cannot
operate. Transformer differential protection generates a trip signal if the false differential
current is sufficiently high. An open CT circuit is typically detected in 1214 ms, and if
the load in the protected circuit is relatively high, about the nominal load, the unwanted
trip cannot always be prevented. Still, the information about what was the cause of the
open CT secondary circuit, is vital.
The principle applied to detect an open CT is a simple pattern recognition method, similar
to the waveform check used by the Power transformer differential protection in order to
detect the magnetizing inrush condition. The open CT detection principle is based on the
fact that for an open CT, the current in the phase with the open CT suddenly drops to zero
(that is, as seen by the protection), while the currents of the other two phases continue as
before.
The open CT function is supposed to detect an open CT under normal conditions, that is,
with the protected multi-terminal circuit under normal load (10...110% of the rated load).
If the load currents are very low or zero, the open CT condition cannot be detected. In
addition to load condition requirement, Open CT function also checks the differential
current on faulty phase. If the differential current is lower than 50% of IdMin, the open CT
condition cannot be detected. Therefore, the Open CT algorithm only detects an open CT
if the load on the power transformer is 10...110% of rated load and the differential current
is higher than 50% of IdMin on that phase. The search for an open CT starts 60 seconds
(50 seconds in 60 Hz systems) after the transformer is energized. The Open CT detection
feature can also be explicitly deactivated by setting: OpenCTEnable = 0 (Disabled ).
If an open CT is detected and the output OPENCT set to 1, then all the differential
functions are blocked, except the unrestrained (instantaneous) differential. An alarm
signal is also produced after a settable delay (tOCTAlarmDelay) to report to operational
personnel for quick remedy actions once the open CT is detected. When the open CT
condition is removed (that is, the previously open CT is reconnected), the functions
remain blocked for a specified interval of time, which is also defined by a setting
(tOCTResetDelay). This is to prevent an eventual mal-operation after the reconnection of
the previously open CT secondary circuit.
The open CT algorithm provides detailed information about the location of the defective
CT secondary circuit. The algorithm clearly indicates the IED side, CT input and phase in
which an open CT condition has been detected. These indications are provided via the
following outputs from the Transformer differential protection function:
Technical manual
179
Section 6
1.
2.
3.
4.
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Output OPENCT provides instant information to indicate that an open CT circuit has
been detected.
Output OPENCTAL provides a time-delayed alarm that the open CT circuit has been
detected. Time delay is defined by the parameter tOCTAlarmDelay.
Integer output OPENCTIN provides information on the local HMI regarding which
open CT circuit has been detected (1=CT input No 1; 2=CT input No 2).
Integer output OPENCTPH provides information on the local HMI regarding in
which phase an open CT circuit has been detected (1=Phase A; 2= Phase B; 3= Phase
C).
Once the open CT condition is declared, the algorithm stops to search for further open CT
circuits. It waits until the first open CT circuit has been corrected. Note that once the open
CT condition has been detected, it can be reset automatically within the differential
function. It is not possible to externally reset an open CT condition. To reset the open CT
circuit alarm automatically, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
Bias current is for at least one minute smaller than 110%

The open CT condition in the defective CT circuit has been corrected (for example,
current asymmetry disappears)
The above two conditions are fulfilled for a longer time than defined by the setting
parameter tOCTResetDelay
If an open CT has been detected in a separate group of three CTs, the algorithm is reset
either when the missing current returns to the normal value, or when all three currents
become zero. After the reset, the open CT detection algorithm starts again to search for
open CT circuits within the protected zone.
6.3.7.6
Cross-block logic scheme

According to the cross-block logic, to issue a common trip command, the harmonic
contents in all phases with a pickup signal set (pickup = TRUE) must be below the limit
defined with the setting HarmDistLimit. In the opposite case, no trip command is issued.
The cross-block logic is active if the setting OpCrossBlock = Yes. By always using the
cross-block logic, the false trips can be prevented for external faults in cases where the
internal or external fault discriminator should for some reason fail to declare an external
fault. For internal faults, the higher frequency components of an instantaneous differential
current are most often relatively low, compared to the fundamental frequency component.
While for an external (heavy) fault, they can be relatively high. For external faults with
moderate fault currents, there can be little or no current transformer saturation and only
small false differential currents.
The principle design of the Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G) is shown in
figure 54.
180
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Phasors IAN, IBN,ICN
Phasors IAT, IBT,ICT
Calculation
Idiff and Ibias
Magnitude
Idiff and Ibias
Diff.prot.
characteristic
TRIP
Signals
Pickup
phase
selective
PICKUP
Signals
BLOCK
Signals
Samples IAN, IBN,ICN
Samples IAT, IBT,ICT
Calculation
instantaneous
Idiff
Samples Idiff
Hamonic
analysis: DC,
2nd and 5th
Harm.
Block
Pickup
and trip
logic
INTFAULT
EXTFAULT
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
The sensitive protection is deactivated

above bias current > 150 % rated
current.
Phasor IAN (neg.seq.)
Phasor IAT (neg.seq.)
Calculation
negative
sequence
Idiff
Internal/
External Fault
Discriminator
and Sensitive
differential
protection
Analog
Outputs
Intern/
extern
Fault
ANSI06000434 V2 EN
Figure 54:
Simplified principle design of the Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G)
Simplified logic diagrams of the function are shown in figures 55, 56, 57 and 58.
Technical manual
181
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BLKUNRES
a
IdUnre
AND
b>a
TRIPUNRE_A
IDMAG_A
IBIAS
PU_A
AND
BLOCK
BLKRES
AND
OR
ID_A
TRIPRES_A
NOT
2nd and
5th
Harmonic
BLKH
Cross Block
from B or C
AND
Cross Block
To B or C
AND
OpCrossBlock=Yes
ANSI07000020 V3 EN
Figure 55:
Generator differential logic diagram 1
Internal/
External
Fault
discrimin
ator
Neg.Seq. Diff
Current
Contributions
Constant
INTFAULT
TRNSSENS
AND
OpNegSeqDiff=On
IBIAS
EXTFAULT
b>a
BLKNSSEN
BLKNSUNR
BLOCK
AND
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
TRNSUNR
OR
en07000021_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000021 V2 EN
Figure 56:
182
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
OR
PICKUP
OR
BLKH
BLKH_A
BLKH_B
BLKH_C
en07000022_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000022 V1 EN
Figure 57:
TRIPRES_A
TRIPRES_B
TRIPRES_C
OR
TRIPRES
OR
TRIPUNRE
TRIPUNRE_A
TRIPUNRE_B
TRIPUNRE_C
TRIP
OR
TRNSSENS
TRNSUNR
en07000023_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000023 V1 EN
Figure 58:
6.3.8
Technical data
Table 70:
GENPDIF (87G) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Unrestrained differential current limit
(1-50)p.u. of IBase
1.0% of set value
Reset ratio
> 95%
Minimum pickup
(0.051.00)p.u. of
1.0% of In
Negative sequence current level
(0.020.20)p.u. of
1.0% of In
Trip time at 0 to 2 x IdMin

restrained function
Min. = 25 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x IdMin

restrained function
Min. = 10 ms
Max. = 25 ms
IBase
IBase
Technical manual
183
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip time at 0 to 5 x IdUnre

unrestrained function
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 5 to 0 x IdUnre

unrestrained function
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time, unrestrained function
2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x
IdUnre
Impulse margin time unrestrained function
10 ms typically
Trip time at 0 to 5 x IMinNegSeq

Negative sequence unrestrained function
Min. = 25 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at 5 to 0 x IMinNegSeq

Negative sequence unrestrained function
Min. = 30 ms
Max. = 45 ms
6.4
Low impedance restricted earth fault protection

REFPDIF (87N)
6.4.1
Identification
Restricted earth-fault protection, low
impedance
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87N
REFPDIF
IdN/I
SYMBOL-AA V1 EN
6.4.2
Functionality
Restricted fault protection, low-impedance function REFPDIF (87N) can be used on all
solidly or low-impedance grounded windings. The REFPDIF (87N) function provides
high sensitivity and high speed tripping as it protects each winding separately and thus
does not need inrush stabilization.
The REFPDIF function is a percentage biased function with an additional zero sequence
current directional comparison criterion. This gives excellent sensitivity and stability
during through faults.
REFPDIF can also protect autotransformers. Five currents are measured at the most
complicated configuration as shown in Figure 59.
184
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
152
252
352
452
xx05000058_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000058 V1 EN
Figure 59:
6.4.3
Examples of applications of the REFPDIF (87N)
Function block
REFPDIF (87N)
I3P*
TRIP
I3PW1CT1*
PICKUP
I3PW1CT2*
DIR_INT
I3PW2CT1*
BLK2H
I3PW2CT2*
IRES
BLOCK
IN
IBIAS
IDIFF
ANGLE
2NDHARM
ANSI06000251 V3 EN
Figure 60:
6.4.4
REFPDIF (87N) function block
Signals
Table 71:
Name
REFPDIF (87N) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for ground current input
I3PW1CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for primary CT1 current input
I3PW1CT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for primary CT2 current input
Technical manual
185
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Group signal for secondary CT1 current input
I3PW2CT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for secondary CT2 current input
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
REFPDIF (87N) Output signals
Name
Table 73:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 72:
6.4.5
Default
I3PW2CT1
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip by restricted earth fault protection function
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Pickup by restricted earth fault protection function
DIR_INT
BOOLEAN
Directional Criteria satisfied for internal fault
BLK2H
BOOLEAN
Block due to 2-nd harmonic
IRES
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental frequency residual current
IN
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental frequency ground current
IBIAS
REAL
Magnitude of the bias current
IDIFF
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental frequency differential current
ANGLE
REAL
Direction angle from zero sequence feature
2NDHARM
REAL
Second harmonic ratio
Settings
REFPDIF (87N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
IdMin
4.0 - 100.0
%IB
0.1
10.0
Maximum sensitivity in % of IBase
CTFactorPri1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CT factor for HV side CT1 (CT1rated/ HVrated

current)
CTFactorPri2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CT factor for HV side CT2 (CT2rated/ HVrated

current)
CTFactorSec1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CT factor for MV side CT1 (CT1rated/ MVrated

current)
CTFactorSec2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CT factor for MV side CT2 (CT2rated/ MVrated

current)
Table 74:
Name
ROA
186
REFPDIF (87N) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
60 - 90
Unit
Deg
Step
1
Default
60
Description
Relay operate angle for zero sequence
directional feature
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 75:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
6.4.6
REFPDIF (87N) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
groups
Monitored data
Table 76:
Name
REFPDIF (87N) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IRES
REAL
frequency residual current
IN
REAL
frequency ground current
IBIAS
REAL
Magnitude of the bias current
IDIFF
REAL
frequency differential current
ANGLE
REAL
deg
Direction angle from zero

sequence feature
2NDHARM
REAL
Second harmonic ratio
6.4.7
Operation principle
6.4.7.1
Fundamental principles of the restricted ground fault protection

Restricted fault protection, low impedance function (REFPDIF, 87N) detects ground
faults on grounded power transformer windings, most often an grounded wye winding.
REFPDIF (87N) is a unit protection of the differential type. Since REFPDIF (87N) is
based on the zero sequence current, which theoretically only exists in case of a ground
fault, REFPDIF (87N) can be made very sensitive regardless of normal load currents. It is
the fastest protection a power transformer winding can have. The high sensitivity and the
high speed tend to make such a protection unstable. Special measures must be taken to
make it insensitive to conditions for which it should not operate, for example, heavy
through faults of phase-to-phase type or heavy external ground faults.
REFPDIF (87N) is a differential protection of the low impedance type. All three-phase
currents, and the neutral point current, must be fed separately to REFPDIF(87N). The
fundamental frequency components of all currents are extracted from all input currents,
while other eventual zero sequence components, such as the 3rd harmonic currents, are
fully suppressed. Then the residual current phasor is calculated from the three line current
phasors. This zero sequence current phasor is added to the neutral current vectorially, in
order to obtain differential current.
Technical manual
187
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The following facts may be observed from Figure 61 and Figure 62, where the three line
CTs are shown as connected together in order to measure the residual 3Io current, for the
sake of simplicity.
ROA (Relay Operate Angle)

ROA = 60 deg
IN
REFPDIF never operates for any faults

external to the protected zone.
Currents 3Io and IN are theoretically
180o out of phase for any external
ground-fault.
ANSI05000724 V3 EN
Figure 61:
188
Zero sequence currents at an external ground fault
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Uzs
Uzs
IN
ANSI05000725 V3 EN
Figure 62:
1.
2.
Zero sequence currents at an internal ground fault
For an external ground fault (Figure 61), the residual current 3Io and the neutral
current IN have equal magnitude, but they are seen within the IED as 180 degrees outof-phase if the current transformers are connected as in Figure 61, which is the ABB
recommended connection. The differential current becomes zero as both CTs ideally
measure exactly the same component of the ground fault current.
For an internal fault, the total ground fault current is composed generally of two zero
sequence currents. One zero sequence current (3IZS1) flows towards the power
transformer neutral point and into the ground, while the other zero sequence current
(3IZS2) flows into the connected power system. These two primary currents can be
expected to have approximately opposite directions (about the same zero sequence
impedance angle is assumed on both sides of the ground fault). However, on the
secondary CT sides of the current transformers, they will be approximately in phase
if the current transformers are oriented as in Figure 59, which is the orientation
recommended by ABB. The magnitudes of the two currents may be different,
dependent on the magnitudes of zero sequence impedances of both sides. No current
can flow towards the power system, if the only point where the system is grounded,
is at the protected power transformer. Likewise, no current can flow into the power
Technical manual
189
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
3.
4.
system, if the winding is not connected to the power system (circuit breaker open and
power transformer energized from the other side).
For both internal and external ground faults, the current in the neutral connection IN
always has the same direction, which is towards the ground (except in case of
autotransformers where the direction can vary).
The two internally processed zero sequence currents are 3Io and IN. The vectorial sum
is the REFPDIF (87N) differential current, which is equal to Idiff = IN +3Io .
The line zero sequence (residual) current is calculated from 3 line (terminal) currents. A
bias quantity must give stability against false operations due to high through fault currents.
To stabilize REFPDIF at external faults, a fixed bias characteristic is implemented.
REFPDIF (87N) should also be stable against heavy phase-to-phase internal faults, not
including ground. These faults may also give false zero sequence currents due to saturated
line CTs. Such faults, however are without neutral current, and can thus be eliminated as
a source of danger.
As an additional measure against unwanted operation, a directional check is made in
agreement with the above points 1 and 2. Operation is only allowed if the currents 3Io and
IN (as shown in Figure 61 and Figure 62) are both within the operating region. By taking
a smaller ROA, REFPDIF (87N) can be made more stable under heavy external fault
conditions, as well as under the complex conditions, when external faults are cleared by
other protections.
6.4.7.2
Restricted ground fault protection, low impedance differential protection

Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance (REFPDIF, 87N) is a protection of
differential type, a unit protection, whose settings are independent of any other protection.
It has some advantages compared to the transformer differential protection. It is less
complicated, as no current phase correction or magnitude correction are needed, not even
in the case of an eventual on-load tap changer (OLTC). REFPDIF (87N) is not sensitive
to inrush and overexcitation currents. The only danger is an eventual current transformer
saturation.
REFPDIF (87N) has only one operate-bias characteristic, which is described in the table
77 and shown in Figure 63.
Table 77:
Data of the operate-bias characteristic of REFPDIF(87N)
Default sensitivity Idmin Max. base

(zone 1)
sensitivity Idmin
(zone 1)
% IBase
% IBase
30
190
Min. base sensitivity End of zone First slope

Idmin (zone 1)
1
Second
slope
% IBase
100
% IBase
125
%
70
100
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The differential protection REFPDIF (87N) calculates a differential current and a bias
current. In case of internal ground faults, the differential current is theoretically equal to
the total ground fault current. The bias current is supposed to give stability to
REFPDIF(87N). The bias current is a measure of how high the currents are and how
difficult the conditions are under which the CTs operate. With a high bias, difficult
conditions can be suspected, and it will be more likely that the calculated differential
current has a component of a false current, primarily due to CT saturation. This law is
formulated by the operate-bias characteristic. This characteristic divides the Idiff - Ibias
plane in two areas. The area above the operate-bias characteristic is the operate area, while
the one below is the block area, see Figure 63.
Figure 63:
6.4.7.3
Operate - bias characteristic of the Restricted earth-fault protection, low

impedance REFPDIF (87N)
Calculation of differential current and bias current

The differential current (operate current), as a fundamental frequency phasor, is
calculated as (with designations as in Figure 61 and Figure 62):
Idiff = IN + 3 Io
EQUATION1533 V1 EN
(Equation 29)
where:
IN is current in the power transformer neutral as a fundamental frequency phasor.
3Io is residual current of the power transformer terminal currents as a phasor.
If there are two three-phase CT inputs, as in breaker-and-a-half configurations, see figure
10, then their respective residual currents are added within the REFPDIF (87N) function
so that:
I3PW1 = I3PW1CT1 + I3PW1CT2
where the signals are defined in the input and output signal tables for REFPDIF (87N).
The bias current is a measure (expressed internally as a true fundamental frequency
current in Amperes) of how difficult the conditions are under which the instrument current
transformers operate. Dependent on the magnitude of the bias current, the corresponding
zone (section) of the operate-bias characteristic is applied, when deciding whether to trip,
or not to trip. In general, the higher the bias current, the higher the differential current
required to produce a trip.
Technical manual
191
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The bias current is the highest current of all separate input currents to REFPDIF (87N),
that is, of current in phase A, phase B, phase C, and the current in the neutral point
(designated as IN in Figure 61 and in Figure 62).
If there are two feeders included in the zone of protection of REFPDIF (87N), as in case
of an auto-transformer with two feeders included on both sides, then the respective bias
current is found as the relatively highest of the following currents:
current[1] = max (I3PW1CT1)
1
CTFactorPri1
(Equation 30)
EQUATION1526 V1 EN
1
CTFactorPri2
(Equation 31)
EQUATION1527 V1 EN
1
CTFactorSec1
(Equation 32)
EQUATION1528 V1 EN
1
CTFactorSec2
(Equation 33)
EQUATION1529 V1 EN
current[5] = IN
(Equation 34)
EQUATION1530 V1 EN
The bias current is thus generally equal to none of the input currents. If all primary ratings
of the CTs were equal to IBase, then the bias current would be equal to the highest current
in Amperes. IBase shall be set equal to the rated current of the protected winding where
REFPDIF (87N) function is applied.
6.4.7.4
Detection of external ground faults

External faults are more common than internal ground faults for which the restricted
ground fault protection should operate. It is important that the restrictedground fault
protection remains stable during heavy external ground and phase-to-phase faults, and
also when such a heavy external fault is cleared by some other protection such as
overcurrent, or ground fault protection. The conditions during a heavy external fault, and
particularly immediately after the clearing of such a fault may be complex. The circuit
breakers poles may not open exactly at the same moment, some of the CTs may still be
highly saturated, and so on.
192
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The detection of external ground faults is based on the fact that for such a fault a high
neutral current appears first, while a false differential current only appears if one or more
current transformers saturate.
An external fault is thus assumed to have occurred when a high neutral current suddenly
appears, while at the same time the differential current Idiff remains low, at least for a
while. This condition must be detected before a trip request is placed within REFPDIF.
Any search for external fault is aborted if a trip request has been placed. A condition for
a successful detection is that it takes not less than 4ms for the first CT to saturate.
For an internal fault, a true differential current develops immediately, while for an external
fault it only develops if a CT saturates. If a trip request comes first, before an external fault
could be positively detected, then it must be an internal fault.
If an external fault has been detected, then the REFPDIF is temporarily desensitized.
Directional criterion
The directional criterion is applied in order to positively distinguish between internal and
external ground faults. This check is an additional criterion, which should prevent
malfunctions at heavy external ground faults, and during the disconnection of such faults
by other protections. Ground faults on lines connecting the power transformer occur much
more often than ground faults on a power transformer winding. It is important therefore
that the Restricted ground fault protection, low impedance (REFPDIF87N) must remain
stable during an external fault, and immediately after the fault has been cleared by some
other protection.
For an external ground faults with no CT saturation, the residual current in the lines (3Io)
and the neutral current (IN in Figure 61) are theoretically equal in magnitude and are 180
degrees out-of-phase. The current in the neutral (IN) serves as a directional reference
because it has the same direction for both internal and external ground faults. The
directional criterion in REFPDIF (87N) protection makes it a current-polarized
protection.
However, if one or more CTs saturate under external fault conditions, then the measured
currents 3Io and IN may no longer be equal, nor will their positions in the complex plane
be exactly 180 degrees apart. There is a risk that the resulting false differential current Idiff
enters the operate area of the operate-restrain characteristic under external fault
conditions. If this happens, a directional test may prevent a malfunction.
A directional check is only executed if:
1.
2.
a trip request signal has been issued (REFPDIF (87N) function PICKUP signal set to
1)
the residual current in lines (3Io) is at least 3% of the IBase current.
Technical manual
193
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
If a directional check is either unreliable or not possible to do, due to too small currents,
then the direction is cancelled as a condition for an eventual trip.
If a directional check is executed, the REFPDIF (87N) protection operation is only
allowed if currents 3Io and IN (as seen in Figure 61 and Figure 62) are both within the
operating region determined by the set value of ROA, in degrees.
ROA = 60 to 90 degrees; where ROA stands for Relay Operate Angle.
Second harmonic analysis

When energizing a transformer a false differential current may appear in ground fault
protection, low impedance function (REFPDIF 87N). The phase CTs may saturate due to
a high DC component with a long duration, but the current through the neutral CT does not
have either the same DC component or the same magnitude and the risk for saturation of
this CT is not as high. As a result the differential current due to the saturation may be so
high that it reaches the operate characteristic. A calculation of the content of 2nd harmonic
in the neutral current is made when the neutral current, residual current and bias current
are within some windows and some timing criteria are fulfilled. If the ratio between
second and fundamental harmonic exceeds 40%, REFPDIF (87N) is blocked.
6.4.7.5
Algorithm of the restricted ground fault protection

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
194
Check if current in the neutral Ineutral (IN) is less than 50% of the base sensitivity
Idmin. If yes, only service values are calculated, then REFPDIF (87N) algorithm is
not used.
If current in the Ineutral (IN) is more than 50% of Idmin, then determine the bias
current Ibias.
Determine the differential (operate) current Idiff as a phasor, and calculate its
magnitude.
Check if the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is above the operate-bias characteristic. If yes,
increment the trip request counter by 1. If the point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to be below
the operate-bias characteristic, then the trip request counter is reset to zero.
If the trip request counter is still zero, search for an eventual heavy external ground
fault. The search is only made if the neutral current is at least 50% of the Idmin
current. If an external ground fault has been detected, a flag is set which remains set
until the external fault has been cleared. The external fault flag is reset to zero when
Ineutral falls below 50% of the base sensitivity Idmin. Any search for an external fault
is aborted if trip request counter is more than zero.
As long as the external fault persists, an additional temporary trip condition is
introduced. This means that REFPDIF (87N) is temporarily desensitized.
If point P(Ibias, Idiff) is found to be above the operate-bias characteristic), so that trip
request counter is more than zero, a directional check can be made. The directional
check is made only if Iresidual (3Io) is more than 3% of the IBase current. If the result
Technical manual
Section 6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.
9.
6.4.8
of the check means external fault, then the internal trip request is reset. If the
directional check cannot be executed, then direction is no longer a condition for a trip.
When neutral current, residual current and bias current are within some windows and
some timing criteria are fulfilled, the ratio of 2nd to fundamental harmonic is
calculated. If it is found to be above 60% the trip request counter is reset and TRIP
remains zero.
Finally, a check is made if the trip request counter is equal to, or higher than 2. If yes,
and at the same instance of time tREFtrip, the actual bias current at this instance of time
tREFtrip is at least 50% of the highest bias current Ibiasmax (Ibiasmax is the highest
recording of any of the three phase currents measured during the disturbance), then
REFPDIF (87N) sets output TRIP to 1. If the counter is less than 2, the TRIP signal
remains zero.
Technical data
Table 78:
REFPDIF (87N) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip characteristic
Adaptable
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
>95%
Minimum pickup, IdMin
(4.0-100.0)% of IBase
1.0% of In
Directional characteristic
Fixed 180 degrees or 60 to 90

degrees
2.0 degrees
Trip time, trip at 0 to 10 x IdMin
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, trip at 10 to 0 x IdMin
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
60.0% of fundamental (hidden

setting)
1.0% of In
Technical manual
195
196
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 7
7.1
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic

ZMHPDIS (21)
7.1.1
Identification
Full-scheme distance protection, mho

characteristic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617 identification
ZMHPDIS
ANSI/IEEE
C37.2 device
number
21
S00346 V1 EN
7.1.2
Functionality
The numerical mho line distance protection is a, up to four zone full scheme protection for
detection of short circuit and earth faults. The numerical mho line distance protection is a
four zone full scheme protection for detection of short circuit and earth faults.
The full scheme technique provides back-up protection of power lines with high
sensitivity and low requirement on remote end communication.
The four zones have fully independent measuring and settings, which gives high
flexibility for all types of lines.
Built-in selectable zone timer logic is also provided in the function.
The function can be used as under impedance back-up protection for transformers and
generators.
Technical manual
197
Section 7
7.1.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
ZMHPDIS (21)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TR_A
CURR_INP*
TR_B
VOLT_INP*
TR_C
POL_VOLT*
TRPG
BLOCK
TRPP
BLKZ
PICKUP
BLKZMTD
PU_A
BLKHSIR
PU_B
BLKTRIP
PU_C
BLKPG
PHG_FLT
BLKPP
PHPH_FLT
EXTNST
PU_TIMER
INTRNST
DIRCND
PHSEL*
LDCND
ANSI06000423 V2 EN
Figure 64:
7.1.4
ZMHPDIS (21) function block
Signals
Table 79:
Name
ZMHPDIS (21) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Connection for current sample signals
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Connection for voltage sample signals
CURR_INP
GROUP
SIGNAL
Connection for current signals
VOLT_INP
GROUP
SIGNAL
Connection for voltage signals
POL_VOLT
GROUP
SIGNAL
Connection for polarizing voltage
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
Block due to fuse failure
BLKZMTD
BOOLEAN
Block signal for blocking of time domaine function
BLKHSIR
BOOLEAN
Blocks time domain function at high SIR
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
Blocks all operate output signals
BLKPG
BOOLEAN
Blocks phase-to-ground operation
BLKPP
BOOLEAN
Blocks phase-to-phase operation
EXTNST
BOOLEAN
External start
INTRNST
BOOLEAN
Internal start
198
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
External directional condition
PHSEL
INTEGER
Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase

selector
LDCND
INTEGER
External load condition (loop enabler)
ZMHPDIS (21) Output signals
Name
Table 81:
Name
Description
INTEGER
Table 80:
7.1.5
Default
DIRCND
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip General
TR_A
BOOLEAN
Trip phase A
TR_B
BOOLEAN
Trip phase B
TR_C
BOOLEAN
Trip phase C
TRPG
BOOLEAN
Trip phase-to-ground
TRPP
BOOLEAN
Trip phase-to-phase
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Pickup General
PU_A
BOOLEAN
Pickup phase A
PU_B
BOOLEAN
Pickup phase B
PU_C
BOOLEAN
Pickup phase C
PHG_FLT
BOOLEAN
Pickup phase-to-ground
PHPH_FLT
BOOLEAN
Pickup phase-to-phase
PU_TIMER
BOOLEAN
Pick up timer
Settings
ZMHPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DirMode
Disabled
Offset
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction mode
LoadEncMode
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Load encroachment mode Off/On
ReachMode
Overreach
Underreach
Overreach
Reach mode Over/Underreach
Technical manual
199
Section 7
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ZnTimerSel
Timers seperated
Timers linked
Internal start
Start from PhSel
External start
Timers seperated
Zone timer selection
OpModePG
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhaseGround loops
ZPG
0.005 - 3000.000
Ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Positive sequence impedance setting for

Phase-Ground loop
ZAngPG
10 - 90
Deg
85
Angle for positive sequence line impedance for

Phase-Ground loop
KN
0.00 - 3.00
0.01
0.80
Magnitude of earth return compensation factor

KN
KNAng
-180 - 180
Deg
-15
Angle for ground return compensation factor

KN
ZRevPG
0.005 - 3000.000
Ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Reverse reach of the phase to ground

loop(magnitude)
tPG
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Delay time for operation of phase to ground

elements
IMinPUPG
10 - 30
%IB
20
Minimum operation phase to ground current
OpModePP
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhasePhase loops
ZPP
0.005 - 3000.000
Ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Impedance setting reach for phase to phase

elements
ZAngPP
10 - 90
Deg
85
Angle for positive sequence line impedance for

Phase-Phase elements
ZRevPP
0.005 - 3000.000
Ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Reverse reach of the phase to phase

loop(magnitude)
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Delay time for operation of phase to phase
IMinPUPP
10 - 30
%IB
20
Minimum operation phase to phase current
Table 82:
Name
ZMHPDIS (21) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OffsetMhoDir
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Direction mode for offset mho
OpModetPG
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone timer,

Ph-G
OpModetPP
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-ph
200
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 83:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
ZMHPDIS (21) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
-
Step
Default
7.1.6
Operation principle
7.1.6.1
Full scheme measurement
Description
groups
The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which
means that each fault loop for phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-phase faults are
executed in parallel for all zones.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a phase selector element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one independent
distance protection function with six measuring elements.
7.1.6.2
Impedance characteristic
The Mho distance function ZMHPDIS is present with four instances so that four separate
zones could be designed. Each instance can be selected to be either forward or reverse with
positive sequence polarized mho characteristic; alternatively self polarized offset mho
characteristics is also available. One example of the operating characteristic is shown in
Figure 65 A) where zone 5 is selected offset mho.
The directional mho characteristic of Figure 65 has a dynamic expansion due to the source
impedance. Instead of crossing the origin as for the mho to the left of Figure 65, which is
only valid where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the
coordinates of the negative source impedance giving an expansion of the circle of Figure
65 D) .
Technical manual
201
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
D
jx
Mho, zone4
Zs=0
Mho, zone3
Mho, zone2
Mho, zone1
Zs=Z1
Zs=2Z1
R
IEC11000223 V2 EN
Figure 65:
Mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the mho characteristic
The polarization quantities used for the mho circle are 100% memorized positive
sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho circle
during faults than a plain cross polarized characteristic. However, if the source impedance
is high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the security of the function
too much with high loading and mild power swing conditions.
The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cuts off a section of
the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the setting parameter
LoadEnchMode to Enabled. Enabling of the load encroachment function increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering with the load impedance. The
algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the Faulty phase identification with load
encroachment for mho function FMPSPDIS (21), where also the relevant settings can be
found. Information about the load encroachment from FMPSPDIS (21) to the zone
measurement is given in binary format to the input signal LDCND.
7.1.6.3
Basic operation characteristics

Each impedance zone can be switched OnEnabled and OffDisabled by the setting
parameter Operation.
202
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Each zone can be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter
DirModeSel.
The mho characteristics can be classified into - Offset or Directional. The directional mho
characteristics can be set to Offset, Forward or Reverse by the setting parameter
DirMode. The offset mho characteristic can be set to Forward or Reverse or NonDirectional by the setting parameter OffsetMhoDir.
The operation for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase fault can be individually switched
Enabled and Disabled by the setting parameter OpModePG and OpModePP.
For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is possible to
improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to Underreach. In this mode the
reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by 20% and the filtering is also
introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring. If the ReachMode is set to
Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and no extra filtering introduced. The
latter setting is recommended for overreaching pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3 elements and
reverse zone where overreaching on transients is not a major issue either because of less
likelihood of overreach with higher settings or the fact that these elements do not initiate
tripping unconditionally.
The offset Mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by the
setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a directional line
is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from the directional element
and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal to the input DIRCND.
When DirMode is set to offset and offsetMhoDir is set as Non-Directional, ZDMRDIR
does not have any effect on the measurement loop and operation of the function. When
DirMode is selected as Forward or Reverse, a directional line is introduced. Information
about the directional line is given from the directional element (ZDMRDIR) and given to
the measuring element as binary coded signal to the input DIRCND.
The zone reach for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase fault is set individually in
polar coordinates.
The impedance is set by the parameters ZPG and ZPP and the corresponding angles by the
parameters ZAngPG and ZAngPP.
Compensation for ground-return path for faults involving ground is done by setting the
parameter KN and KNAng where KN is the magnitude of the ground-return path and
KNAng is the angle of the ground-return path.
KN =
Z 0 - Z1
3 Z1
IECEQUATION14023 V1 EN
Technical manual
(Equation 35)
203
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
KNAng = ang
Z 0 - Z1
3 Z1
)
(Equation 36)
where
Z0
is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in /phase
Z1
is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in /phase
The phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase measuring loops can be time delayed

individually by setting the parameter tPG and tPP respectively. To release the time delay,
the operation mode for the timers, OpModetPG and OpModetPP, has to be set to On. This
is also the case for instantaneous operation. In instantaneous case, the timers tPG and tPP
need to be set as zero.
The operate timers triggering input depends on the parameter ZnTimerSel setting. The
parameter ZnTimerSel can be set to:
Timers separated: Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the

respective measuring loop pickup signals.
Timers linked: Start of any of the phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase loops will
trigger both the phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase timers.
Internal start: Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the
INTRNST input.
Start from PhSel: The phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the
STCND and LDCND inputs. Each of the two inputs consist binary status information
related to the six measuring loops. Hence if any of the measuring loop status is high
in both two inputs STCND and LDCND, then the timers will be triggered. In case when
LoadEnchMode is off then only STCND enables the timer.
It is not recommended to use this timer setting for the Zone instance
where LoadEnchMode is off.
External start: Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the

EXTNST input.
The function can be blocked in the following ways:
204
activating of input BLOCK blocks the whole function

activating of the input BLKZ (fuse failure) blocks all output signals
activating of the input BLKZMTD blocks the delta based time domain algorithm
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the high speed part of the algorithm for high
SIR values
activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals
activating the input BLKPG blocks the phase-to-ground fault loop outputs
activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs
The activation of input signal BLKZ can be made by external fuse failure function or from
the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In both cases the
output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the input BLKZ in the
Mho distance function block (ZMHPDIS, 21)
The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been detected by
ZSMGAPC to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall be connected to the
BLKZMTD output signal of ZSMGAPC function.
At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the built-in
resonance circuit in the CVT, which reduce the secondary voltage for a while. The input
BLKHSIR is connected to the output signal HSIR on ZSMGAPC for increasing of the
filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when permissive underreach scheme is
selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.
7.1.6.4
Theory of operation
The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of an operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor by 90
degrees or more, the function operates and gives a trip output.
Phase-to-phase fault
Mho
The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as in Figure 66. The condition for deriving the
angle is according to equation 37.
b = ang (V AB - I AB ZPP ) - ang (V pol )

Technical manual
(Equation 37)
205
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
where
V AB
is the voltage vector difference between phases A and B
EQUATION1790-ANSI
V1 EN
I AB
is the current vector difference between phases A and B
EQUATION1791-ANSI
V1 EN
ZPP
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault
Vpol
is the polarizing voltage
The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage (VAB for
phase A to B fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of the Mho circle for
close in faults.
Operation occurs if 90270
IABX
Vcomp=VAB - IAB ZPP
I AB ZPP
V pol
V AB
IABR
en07000109_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000109 V1 EN
Figure 66:
206
Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A-to-B fault
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the setting
parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has the settable
angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180.
The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle between the two
compensated voltages Vcomp1 and Vcomp2 is greater than or equal to 90 (figure 67).
The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for A-to-B fault can be defined according to equation 38.
V -(-IAB ZRevPP)
b = arg
V -IAB ZPP
(Equation 38)
where
is the VAB voltage
EQUATION1801 V1 EN
ZRevPP
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in reverse direction
Technical manual
207
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IABjX
V comp1 = VAB - IAB ZPP
I AB ZPP
Vcomp2 = V =IFZF =VAB

IABR
- I AB
Z Re vPP
en07000110_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000110 V1 EN
Figure 67:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase A-to-B
fault.
Operation occurs if 90270.

Offset mho, forward direction
When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria beside the
one for offset mho (90<<270) is introduced, that is the angle between the voltage and
the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and fourth quadrant. See
figure 68. Operation occurs if 90270 and ArgDirArgNegRes.
where
ArgDir
is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR (21D).
ArgNegRes
is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR (21D).
is calculated according to equation 38
The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the mho
directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See Directional
impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR ,21D) for information about the
mho directional element.
208
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IABjX
ZPP
VAB
ArgNegRes
IAB
ArgDir
en07000111_ansi
ANSI07000111 V1 EN
Figure 68:
Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase A-to-B

fault
Offset mho, reverse direction

The operation area for offset mho in reverse direction is according to figure 69. The
operation area in second quadrant is ArgNegRes+180.
Operation occurs if 90270 and 180 - ArgDir ArgNegRes + 180
The is derived according to equation 38 for the mho circle and is the angle between the
voltage and current.
Technical manual
209
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
X
ZPP
ArgNegRes
IAB
ArgDir
VAB
ZRevPP
en06000469_ansi.ep
ANSI06000469 V1 EN
Figure 69:
Operation characteristic for reverse phase A-to-B fault
Phase-to-ground fault
Mho
The measuring of ground faults uses ground-return compensation applied in a
conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence from
the ground-return path.
For a ground fault in phase A, the compensation voltage Vcomp can be derived, as shown
in Figure 70.
210
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Vcomp = V
pol
- I A Z loop
(Equation 39)
where
Vpol
is the polarizing voltage (memorized VA for Phase A-to- ground fault)
Zloop
is the loop impedance, which in general terms can be expressed as
Z1+ZN = Z 1 1 + KN
where
Z1
is the positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase)
KN
is the zero-sequence compensator factor
The angle between the Vcomp and the polarize voltage Vpol for a A-to-ground fault is
b = arg V A - I A + IN KN ZPE - arg(Vpol)
(Equation 40)
EQUATION1592 V1 EN
where
VA
is the phase voltage in faulty phase A
IA
is the phase current in faulty phase A
IN
is the zero-sequence current in faulty phase A (3I0)
KN
Z0-Z1
3 Z1
the setting parameter for the zero sequence
compensation consisting of the magnitude KN and the
angle KNAng.
Vpol
is the 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage VA
Technical manual
211
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IAX
IAZN
V comp
I A Z loop
IAZPE
Vpol
f
IA (Ref)
IAR
en06000472_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000472 V1 EN
Figure 70:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A-toground fault

Offset mho
The characteristic for offset mho at ground fault is a circle containing the two vectors from
the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the setting reach for the positive
sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The vector ZPE in the
impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPE
+180.
The condition for operation at phase-to-ground fault is that the angle between the two
compensated voltages Vcomp1 and Vcomp2 is greater or equal to 90 see figure 71. The
angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for A-to-ground fault can be defined as
212
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IABjX
V comp1 = VA - IA ZPE
IA ZPE
VA
V comp2 = VA - (-IA ZRevPE)

I AB R
- IA Z RevPe
en 06000465_ansi. vsd
ANSI06000465 V1 EN
Figure 71:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase A-toground fault

Offset mho, forward direction
In the same way as for phase-to-phase fault, selection of forward direction of offset mho
will introduce an extra criterion for operation. Beside the basic criteria for offset mho
according to equation 41 and 90270, also the criteria that the angle between the
voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. See
figure 72. Operation occurs if 90270 and ArgDirArgNegRes.
where
ArgDir
is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR (21D).
ArgNegRes
is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR (21D).
is calculated according to equation 41
Technical manual
213
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IA jX
VA
ArgNegRes
IAR
IA
ArgDir
en 06000466_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000466 V1 EN
Figure 72:
Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for A-toground fault
Offset mho, reverse direction

In the same way as for offset in forward direction, the selection of offset mho in reverse
direction will introduce an extra criterion for operation compare to the normal offset mho.
The extra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the fault current shall lie between
the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. The operation area in second quadrant is
limited by the blinder defined as 180 -ArgDir and in fourth quadrant ArgNegRes+180,
see figure 73.
The conditions for operation of offset mho in reverse direction for A-to-ground fault is
90270 and 180-ArgdirArgNegRes+180.
The is derived according to equation 41 for the offset mho circle and is the angle
between the voltage and current.
214
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
X
ZPE
ArgNegRes
IA
ArgDir
VA
ZRevPE
en06000470_ansi.ep
ANSI06000470 V1 EN
Figure 73:
7.1.6.5
Simplified characteristic for offset mho in reverse direction for A-toground fault
Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones
The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phaseto-ground as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG. The phase-to-phase
signals are designated by AB, BC and CA.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical
signal for each separate measuring loop:
Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above.
Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 74.
The ZMHPDIS (21) function block is used in the IED for each zone.
Technical manual
215
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from Phase
selection with load encroachment function FMPSPDIS (21) within the IED, which are
converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for
each condition separately. Input signal PHSEL is connected from FMPSPDIS (21)
function output signal PHSCND.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the relevant signals
depending on the setting of the parameter DirMode. Input signal DIRCND must be
configured to the STDIRCND output signal on ZDMRDIR (21D) function.
OffsetMhoDir=
Non-directional
AND
AND
DirMode=Offset
PHSEL
T
F
AND
AND
LoadEnchMode=
On/Off
LDCND
T
F
True
AND
Release
DIRCND
OffsetMhoDir=
Forward/Reverse
DirMode=
Forward/Reverse
AND
BLKZ
BLOCK
OR
ANSI11000216 V1 EN
Figure 74:
Simplified logic for release start signal
When load encroachment mode is switched on (LoadEnchMode=On), start signal PHSEL

is also checked against LDCND signal.
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits when the zone operates in
directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 74.
216
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Composition of the phase pickup signals is presented in figure 75.
Release
PU_AG
PU_BG
PU_CG
PHG_FLT
OR
AND
PU_A
OR
AND
AND
PU_B
OR
PU_AB
PU_BC
AND
AND
PU_C
OR
PU_CA
AND
OR
OR
PICKUP
PHPH_FLT
ANSI11000217 V1 EN
Figure 75:
Composition of pickup signals
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 76.
Technical manual
217
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Timer tPP=On
0-tPP
0
AND
PHPH_FLT
OR
Timer tPG=On
AND
PHG_FLT
0-tPG
0
PU_A
AND
PU_B
AND
PU_C
AND
TRIP
0
15 ms
AND
BLKTRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
ANSI11000218 V2 EN
Figure 76:
Tripping logic for the distance protection zone
Zone timer logic for the distance protection is symbolically presented in figure 77.
STPE
BLOCK
&
&
a
a=b
b
Internal
start
Internal
start
a
b
TRPE
tON
t
STTIMER
&
a<b
&
tON
t
&&
TRPP
STPP
ZnTimerSel
FALSE
1
internalCommonStart
1 timers seperated
2 timers linked
3 internal start
phSelStart
4 start from phSel
externalCommonStart
5 external start
IEC12000463 V2 EN
Figure 77:
218
Zone timer logic
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.1.7
Technical data
Table 84:
ZMHPDIS (21) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones, phase-toground
Max 4 with selectable direction
Minimum trip current
(1030)% of IBase
Positive sequence impedance,

phase-to-ground loop
(0.0053000.000) W/phase
Positive sequence impedance

angle, phase-to-ground loop
(1090) degrees
Reverse reach, phase-to-ground

loop (Magnitude)
(0.0053000.000) /phase
2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.5-30) x In
Angle: 85 degrees
Magnitude of ground return

compensation factor KN
(0.003.00)
Angle for ground compensation

factor KN
(-180180) degrees
Dynamic overreach
<5% at 85 degrees measured

with CVTs and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay phase-phase

and phase-ground operation
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2% or 60 ms whichever is
greater
Trip time
22 ms typically
IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio
105% typically
Reset time at 0.5 to 1.5 x Zreach
Min. = 30 ms
Max. = 45 ms
7.2

ZDMRDIR (21D)
7.2.1
Identification
Directional impedance element for mho
characteristic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21D
ZDMRDIR
S00346 V1 EN
Technical manual
219
Section 7
7.2.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Functionality
The phase-to-ground impedance elements can be supervised by a phase unselective
directional function based on symmetrical components (option).
7.2.3
Function block
I3P*
V3P*
ZDMRDIR (21D)
DIR_CURR
DIR_VOLT
DIR_POL
PUFW
PUREV
STDIRCND
ANSI06000422 V2 EN
Figure 78:
7.2.4
Signals
Table 85:
Name
ZDMRDIR (21D) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for current input
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for voltage input
Table 86:
Name
220
ZDMRDIR (21D) function block
ZDMRDIR (21D) Output signals

Type
Description
CURR
GROUP SIGNAL
Group signal for current signals to Mho function
VOLT
GROUP SIGNAL
Group signal for voltage signals to Mho function
POL
GROUP SIGNAL
Group signal for polarization voltage signals to Mho

function
PUFW
BOOLEAN
Pickup in forward direction
PUREV
BOOLEAN
Pickup in reverse direction
STDIRCND
INTEGER
Binary coded directional information per measuring loop
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 87:
ZDARDIR Input signals
Name
Type
Current signals
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage signals
I3PPOL
GROUP
SIGNAL
Polarisation current signals
DIRCND
INTEGER
Binary coded directional signal
ZDARDIR Output signals
Name
Table 89:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 88:
7.2.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
FWD_G
BOOLEAN
Forward start signal from phase-to-ground directional

element
REV_G
BOOLEAN
Reverse start signal from phase-to-ground directional

element
DIREFCND
INTEGER
Pickuo direction Binary coded
Settings
ZDMRDIR (21D) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DirEvalType
Impedance
Comparator
Imp/Comp
Comparator
Directional evaluation mode Impedance /

Comparator
AngNegRes
90 - 175
Deg
115
Angle of blinder in second quadrant for forward

direction
AngDir
5 - 45
Deg
15
Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward

direction
IMinPUPG
5 - 30
%IB
Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops
IMinPUPP
5 - 30
%IB
10
Minimum pickup phase-phase current for

Phase-Phase loops
Table 90:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
ZDMRDIR (21D) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Technical manual
Description
groups
221
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 91:
ZDARDIR Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PolMode
-3U0
-V2
IPol
Dual
-3U0Comp
-V2comp
-3U0
Polarization quantity for opt dir function for P-G

faults
AngleRCA
-90 - 90
Deg
75
Characteristic relay angle (= MTA or base

angle)
IPickup
5 - 200
%IB
Minimum operation current in % of IBase
VPolPU
4 - 100
%VB
Minimum polarizing voltage in % of VBase
IPolPU
5 - 100
%IB
10
Minimum polarizing current in % of IBase
Table 92:
Name
ZDARDIR Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AngleOp
90 - 180
Deg
160
Operation sector angle
Kmag
0.50 - 3000.00
Ohm
0.01
40.00
Boost-factor in -V0comp and -V2comp

polarization
Step
Default
Table 93:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.2.6
ZDARDIR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
-
Description
groups
Monitored data
Table 94:
Name
ZDMRDIR (21D) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
A_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in phase A
B_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in phase B
C_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in phase C
Aph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase A
Aph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase A
Bph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase B
222
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Bph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase B
Cph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase C
Cph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase C
7.2.7
Operation principle
7.2.7.1
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR (21D)

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance element for mho
characteristic (ZDMRDIR ,21D). Equation 42 and equation 43 are used to classify that the
fault is in the forward direction for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase fault
respectively.
- AngDir < Ang
0.85 V 1A + 0.15 V 1 AM
IA
< AngNeg Re s
(Equation 42)
EQUATION1618 V1 EN
- AngDir < Ang
0.85 V 1 AB + 0.15 V 1 ABM

IAB
< AngNeg Re s
(Equation 43)
EQUATION1620 V1 EN
Where:
AngDir
Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15
(= -15 degrees)
AngNegRes
Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 79 for mho characteristics.
V1A
Positive sequence phase voltage in phase A
V1AM
Positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A
IA
Phase current in phase A
V1AB
Voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
V1ABM
Memorized voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
IAB
Current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
The default settings for AngDir and AngNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 79) and they should not be changed unless system studies show
the necessity.
Technical manual
223
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
If one sets DirEvalType to Comparator (which is recommended when using the mho
characteristic) then the directional lines are computed by means of a comparator-type
calculation, meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-circles (of infinite
radius). The default setting value Impedance otherwise means that the directional lines are
implemented based on an impedance calculation equivalent to the one used for the
quadrilateral impedance characteristics.
When Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
(ZDMRDIR) is used together with Fullscheme distance protection, mho
characteristic (ZMHPDIS) the following settings for parameter
DirEvalType is vital:
alternative Comparator is strongly recommended

alternative Imp/Comp should generally not be used
alternative Impedance should not be used. This altenative is intended
for use together with Distance protection zone, quadrilateral
characteristic (ZMQPDIS)
X
Zset reach point
AngNegRes
-AngDir
-Zs
en06000416_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000416 V1 EN
Figure 79:
Setting angles for discrimination of forward fault
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180
degrees.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows: STDIRCND =
AN*1 + BN*2 + CN*4 + AB*8 + BC*16 + CA*32
Example: If only ANpickup, the value is 1, if pickup in AN and CN are detected, the value
is 1+4=5.
224
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 5%

of the set base voltage VBase, thus the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical
faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive
sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100ms, the following occurs:
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the
condition seals in.
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip continues.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the
reverse direction remains in operation.
If the current decreases below the minimum operate value, no directional indications
will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
The Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR ,21D) function
has the following output signals:
The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation and is
derived from a binary coded signal as follows:
bit 11
(2048)
bit 10
(1024)
bit 9
(512)
bit 8
(256)
bit 7
(128)
bit 6
(64)
REV_CA1=1
REV_BC=1
REV_AB=1
REV_C=1
REV_B=1
REV_A=1
bit 5
(32)
bit 4
(16)
bit 3
(8)
bit 2
(4)
bit 1
(2)
bit 0
(1)
FWD_CA=1
FWD_BC=1
FWD_AB=1
FWD_C=1
FWD_B=1
FWD_A=1
The PUFW output is a logical signal with value 1 or 0. It is made up as an OR-function of

all the forward starting conditions, that is, FWD_A, FWD_B, FWD_C, FWD_AB,
FWD_BC and RWD_CA. The PUREV output is similar to the PUFW output, the only
difference being that it is made up as an OR-function of all the reverse starting conditions,
that is, REV_A, REV_B, REV_C. REV_AB, REV_BC and REV_CA.
7.3
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic,

separate settings ZMRPDIS (21), ZMRAPDIS (21) and
ZDRDIR (21D)
Technical manual
225
Section 7
7.3.1
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Identification
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral
characteristic, separate settings (zone
1)
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ZMRPDIS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
S00346 V1 EN
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral

characteristic, separate settings (zone
2-5)
ZMRAPDIS
21
S00346 V1 EN
Directional impedance quadrilateral
7.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
ZDRDIR
IEC 60617
identification
Z<->
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21D
Functionality
The line distance protection is up to five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-ground fault for each of the
independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and reactive reach gives
flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer connected to overhead lines and
cables of different types and lengths.
Mho alternative quadrilateral characteristic is available.
ZMRPDIS (21) together with Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable
angle FRPSPDIS (21) has functionality for load encroachment, which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode.
226
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.3.3
Function block
ZMRPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
PHSEL
DIRCND
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
RI
BFI_A
BFI_B
PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI08000248 V1 EN
Figure 80:
ZMRPDIS (21) function block
ZMRAPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
PHSEL
DIRCND
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
BFI
PU_A
BFI_B
PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI08000290 V1 EN
Figure 81:
ZMRAPDIS (21) function block
ZDRDI R (21D)
I3P*
V3P*
STDI RCND
ANSI10000007 V1 EN
7.3.4
Signals
Table 95:
Name
ZMRPDIS (21) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition
Technical manual
227
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Blocks all trip outputs
PHSEL
INTEGER

selector
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 96:
Name
ZMRPDIS (21) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TR_A
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from phase A
TR_B
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from phase B
TR_C
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from phase C
RI
BOOLEAN
General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop
BFI_A
BOOLEAN
BFI_B
BOOLEAN
PU_C
BOOLEAN
PHPUND
BOOLEAN
Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected phase

or loop
Table 97:
Name
ZMRAPDIS (21) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Blocks all trip outputs
PHSEL
INTEGER

selector
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 98:
Name
ZMRAPDIS (21) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TR_A
BOOLEAN
TR_B
BOOLEAN
228
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
BFI
BOOLEAN
General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop
PU_A
BOOLEAN
BFI_B
BOOLEAN
PU_C
BOOLEAN
PHPUND
BOOLEAN
Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected phase

or loop
Table 99:
ZDRDIR (21D) Input signals
Name
Type
group connection for current abs 2
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
group connection for voltage abs 2
ZDRDIR (21D) Output signals

Type
STDIRCND
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Name
Table 101:
Default
I3P
Table 100:
7.3.5
Description
TR_C
Description
INTEGER
Binary coded directional information per measuring loop
Settings
ZMRPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OperationDir
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev
X1PP
0.10 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-Ph
R1PP
0.01 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-Ph
X1PG
0.10 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-G
R1PG
0.01 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00

angle, Ph-G
RFPP
0.10 - 3000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
X0PG
0.10 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
100.00
Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G
RFPG
0.10 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G
Technical manual
229
Section 7
Name
Step
Default
R0PG
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic

angle, Ph-G
OperationPP
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
OpModetPP
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone timer,

Ph-Ph
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPG
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
OpModetPG
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled

Ph-G
tPG
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of trip, Ph-G
IMinPUPP
10 - 1000
%IB
20
Minimum operate delta current for PhasePhase loops
IMinPUPG
10 - 1000
%IB
20
IMinOpIR
5 - 1000
%IB
Minimum operate residual current for PhaseGround loops
Table 102:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Table 103:
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Description
ZMRPDIS (21) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
groups
ZMRAPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OperationDir
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev
X1PP
0.10 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-Ph
R1PP
0.01 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00

angle, Ph-Ph
X1PG
0.10 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-G
R1PG
0.01 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00

angle, Ph-G
RFPP
0.10 - 3000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph
X0PG
0.10 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
100.00
Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G
RFPG
0.10 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G
230
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Step
Default
R0PG
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00

angle, Ph-G
OperationPP
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
OpModetPP
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled

Ph-Ph
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph
OperationPG
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
OpModetPG
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled

Ph-G
tPG
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of trip, Ph-G
IMinPUPP
10 - 1000
%IB
20
IMinPUPG
10 - 1000
%IB
20
Table 104:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Table 105:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
ZMRAPDIS (21) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
groups
ZDRDIR (21D) Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IMinPUPP
5 - 30
%IB
10
Minimum pickup phase-phase current for

Phase-Phase loops
IMinPUPG
5 - 30
%IB
AngNegRes
90 - 175
Deg
115
Angle of blinder in second quadrant for forward

direction
AngDir
5 - 45
Deg
15
Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward

direction
Table 106:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
ZDRDIR (21D) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Technical manual
Description
groups
231
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.3.6
Operation principle
7.3.6.1
Full scheme measurement

means that each fault loop for phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-phase faults for
forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 82 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five, impedancemeasuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and variant.
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 1
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 2
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 3
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 4
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 5
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 6
ANSI05000458 V2 EN
Figure 82:
The different measuring loops at phase-to-ground fault and phase-tophase fault.
schemes which mostly uses a pickup of an overreaching element to select correct voltages
and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.
7.3.6.2
Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended for
phase-to-ground faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, three-phase
faults.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in figure 83 and figure 84. The phase-to-ground
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic
presents the per phase reach.
232
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
X (Ohm/loop)
RFPG
R1+Rn
RFPG
Xn =
X1+Xn
Rn =
jn
RFPG
jn
X0-X1
3
R0-R1
3
R (Ohm/loop)
RFPG
X1+Xn
RFPG
R1+Rn
RFPG
ANSI05000661 V3 EN
Figure 83:
Characteristic for phase-to-ground measuring , ohm/loop domain
Technical manual
233
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
RFPP
(Ohm/phase)
R1PP
RFPP
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
3
3
PE
--1X
11FWPE
XX
00
PE
-X
X
0
PG
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
=
XNFW
XNFW==
3 33
X1PP
R (Ohm/phase)
RFPP
RFPP
X1PP
RFPP
2
R1PP
RFPP
2
en07000062.vsd
IEC07000062 V2 EN
Figure 84:
Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring
The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 85.
Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive reach for
phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.
234
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VA
Ip
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-ground
fault in phase A
Phase-to-ground
element
RFPG
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
VA
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase A-B
IN
(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IA
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-phase
element A-B
RFPP
IB
(Arc resistance)
VB
R1 + j X1
VA
Three-phase
fault
IA
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
Phase-to-phase
element A-C
IC
VC
ANSI05000181 V2 EN
Figure 85:
Fault loop model
The R1 and jX1 in figure 85 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The settings RFPG and RFPP are the eventual fault
resistances in the faulty place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 85, there is of course fault current
flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration merely reflects
the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction through
the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 86.
The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for forward and reverse
direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.
Technical manual
235
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
IEC05000182 V2 EN
Figure 86:
7.3.6.3
Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones
Minimum operating current

The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMRPDIS, 21)
is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-ground loop AG (BG or CG) is blocked if IA (IB or IC) < IMinPUPG.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phaseto-ground loops can be blocked when IN < IMinOpIR, regardless of the phase currents.
IA (IB or IC) is the RMS value of the current in phase IA (IB or IC). IN is the RMS value
of the vector sum of the three-phase currents, that is residual current 3I0.
The phase-to-phase loop AB (BC or CA) is blocked if IAB (BC or CA)< IMinPUPP.
All three current limits IMinPUPG, IMinOpIR and IMinPUPP are
automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to
operate in reverse direction, that is OperationDir=Reverse
7.3.6.4
Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
236
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 44 (example for a phase A

to phase B fault).
VA - VB
Zapp =
IA - IB
(Equation 44)
EQUATION1545 V1 EN
Here V and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)
The ground return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-ground
faults (example for a phase A to ground fault) according to equation 45.
V_A
Z app =
I _ A + IN KN
EQUATION1546 V1 EN
(Equation 45)
Where:
V_A, I_A and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN
is defined as:
KN =
Z 0 - Z1
3 Z1
EQUATION-2105 V2 EN
Z 0 = R 0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V2 EN
Z 1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V2 EN
Where
R0
is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach
X0
is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach
R1
is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach
X1
is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach
Technical manual
237
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same reach
along the line for all types of faults.
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and
reactance X.
The formula given in equation 45 is only valid for radial feeder application without load.
When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-ground fault, conventional distance
protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. The IED
has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter. The
check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into memory
locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of voltage (V), current
(I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from the input memory and
fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the
loop impedance according to equation 46,
V =R i +
Di
w0 Dt
(Equation 46)
EQUATION1547 V1 EN
in complex notation, or:

Re (V ) = R Re (I ) +
X
w0
D Re (I )
Dt
(Equation 47)
EQUATION1548 V1 EN
Im (V ) = R Im (I ) +
EQUATION1549 V1 EN
X
w0
D Im (I )
Dt
(Equation 48)
with
238
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
w0 = 2 p f 0
(Equation 49)
EQUATION356 V1 EN
where:
Re
designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im
designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0
designates the rated system frequency
The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value of
the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for the
Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
Rm =
Im (V) D Re (I) - Re (V) Dlm(I)

D Re (I) lm(I) - Dlm(I) Re (I)
(Equation 50)
EQUATION1550 V1 EN
X m = w0 D t
Re (V) lm(I) - lm(V ) Re (I)

D Re (I) lm(I) - Dlm(I) Re (I)
(Equation 51)
EQUATION1551 V1 EN
The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set zone
reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping results.
This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive voltage
transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked positive
sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited directional
sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.
7.3.6.5
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance quadrilateral
function ZDRDIR (21D). Equation 52 and equation 53 are used to classify that the fault
is in forward direction for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase fault.
- ArgDir < arg
0.8 V 1L1 + 0.2 V 1L1 M

I L1
< ArgNeg Re s
EQUATION1552 V2 EN
Technical manual
(Equation 52)
239
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
For the AB element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

- ArgDir < arg
0.8 V 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 V 1L1 L 2 M

I L1 L 2
< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 53)
EQUATION1553 V2 EN
where:
AngDir
is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to 15
(= -15 degrees) and
AngNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 87.
V1A
is positive sequence phase voltage in phase A
V1AM
is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A
IA
is phase current in phase A
V1AB
is voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
V1ABM
is memorized voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
IAB
is current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)
The setting of AngDir and AngNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (as shown in figure 87). It should not be changed unless system studies have
shown the necessity.
ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the output
STDIRCND.
STDIR=
240
FWD_A*1+FWD_B*2+FWD_C*4+FWD_AB*8+
+FWD_BC*16+FWD_CA*32+REV_A*64+REV_B*128+REV_C*256+
+REV_AB*512+REV_BC*1024+REV_CA*2048
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
AngNegRes
AngDir
en05000722_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000722 V1 EN
Figure 87:
Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in

Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR (21D)
The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180
degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds 5% of
the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100 ms the following occurs:
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between
10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until
the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
Technical manual
241
Section 7
7.3.6.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A

Distance protection zones
The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phaseto-ground as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG.. The phase-to-phase
signals are designated by AB, BC and CA.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical
signal for each separate measuring loop:
Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above.
Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 88.
The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from Phase
selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function FRPSPDIS (21)
within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into
corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. Input signal PHSEL is
connected to FRPSPDIS (21) function output STCNDZ.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals
depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be configured to the
STDIRCND output on directional function ZDRDIR (21D) function.
242
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PUZMPP
OR
PHSEL
NDIR_AB
AB
AND
BC
AND
CA
AND
NDIR_CA
AG
AND
NDIR_A
BG
AND
NDIR_B
CG
AND
NDIR_BC
NDIR_C
STNDPE
OR
OR
LOVBZ
BLOCK
AND
OR
BLOCFUNC
PHPUND
BLK
ANSI99000557 V2 EN
Figure 88:
Conditioning by a group functional input signal PHSEL, external start

condition
Composition of the phase pickup signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 75.
Technical manual
243
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
NDIR_A
OR
NDIR_B
NIDR_C
NDIR_AB
OR
AND
0
15ms
AND
0
15ms
AND
0
15ms
AND
0
15ms
NDIR_BC
NDIR_CA
OR
OR
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PICKUP
BLK
ANSI09000889 V1 EN
Figure 89:
Composition of pickup signals in non-directional operating mode
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates in
directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 90.
244
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
NDIR_A
DIR_A
AND
AND
NDIR_C
DIR_C
AND
NDIR_AB
DIR_AB
AND
NDIR_BC
DIR_BC
AND
NDIR_CA
DIR_CA
PU_ZMPG
OR
NDIR_B
DIR_B
OR
OR
OR
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PU_ZMPP
OR
BLK
OR
AND
PICKUP
0
15 ms
ANSI09000888 V2 EN
Figure 90:
Composition of pickup signals in directional operating mode
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 76.
Technical manual
245
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Timer tPP=enable
PUZMPP
tPP
AND
AND
0-tPP
0
BLOCFUNC
OR
OR
tPG
Timer tPG=enable
PUZMPG
0-tPG
0
AND
AND
AND
BLKTR
BLK
OR
TRIP
0
15 ms
PU_A
AND
TR_A
PU_B
AND
TR_B
PU_C
AND
TR_C
ANSI09000887 V3 EN
Figure 91:
Tripping logic for the distance protection zone
7.4
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with

settable angle FRPSPDIS (21)
7.4.1
Identification
Phase selection, quadrilateral
characteristic with settable angle
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
FRPSPDIS
Z<phs
SYMBOL-DD V1 EN
246
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.4.2
Functionality
The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that single pole
tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in today's power systems.
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS (21) is
designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance function dependent on
the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make fault
resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FRPSPDIS (21) has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive
setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with the
load.
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important information
about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously
measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them with the set
values.
7.4.3
Function block
FRPSPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
DIRCND
TRIP
BFI
FWD_A
FWD_B
FWD_C
FWD_G
REV_A
REV_B
REV_C
REV_G
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NDIR_C
NDIR_G
FWD_1PH
FWD_2PH
FWD_3PH
PHG_FLT
PHPH_FLT
PHSELZ
DLECND
ANSI08000430 V2 EN
Figure 92:
FRPSPDIS (21) function block
Technical manual
247
Section 7
7.4.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 107:
Name
Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 108:
Name
248
FRPSPDIS (21) Input signals
FRPSPDIS (21) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip by pilot communication scheme logic
BFI
BOOLEAN
Start in any phase or loop
FWD_A
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phaseA - forward direction
FWD_B
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phase B - forward direction
FWD_C
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phase C - forward direction
FWD_G
BOOLEAN
Ground fault detected in forward direction
REV_A
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phase A- reverse direction
REV_B
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phase B - reverse direction
REV_C
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phase C - reverse direction
REV_G
BOOLEAN
Ground fault detected in reverse direction
NDIR_A
BOOLEAN
Non directional fault detected in Phase A
NDIR_B
BOOLEAN
Non directional fault detected in Phase B
NDIR_C
BOOLEAN
Non directional fault detected in Phase C
NDIR_G
BOOLEAN
Non directional phase-to-ground fault detected
FWD_1PH
BOOLEAN
Single phase-to-ground fault in forward direction
FWD_2PH
BOOLEAN
Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction
FWD_3PH
BOOLEAN
Three phase fault in forward direction
PHG_FLT
BOOLEAN
Release condition to enable phase-ground measuring

elements
PHPH_FLT
BOOLEAN
Release condition to enable phase-phase measuring

elements
PHSELZ
INTEGER
21 pickup with load encroachment and 3I0
DLECND
INTEGER
Pickup for load encroachment and 3I0
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.4.5
Table 109:
Name
Settings
FRPSPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3I0BLK_PP
10 - 100
%IPh
40
3I0 limit for disabling phase-to-phase

measuring loops
3I0Enable_PG
10 - 100
%IPh
20
3I0 pickup for releasing phase-to-ground

measuring loops
RLdFwd
1.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
80.00
Forward resistive reach for the load impedance

area
RldRev
1.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
80.00
Reverse resistive reach for the load impedance

area
LdAngle
5 - 70
Deg
30
Load angle determining the load impedance

area
X1
0.50 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
Positive sequence reactance reach
R1PP
0.10 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00

angle, Ph-Ph
R1PG
0.10 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
1.50

angle, Ph-G
X0
0.50 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
Zero sequence reactance reach
R0PG
0.50 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00

angle, Ph-G
RFltFwdPP
0.50 - 3000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward
RFltRevPP
0.50 - 3000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
RFltFwdPG
1.00 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, forward
RFltRevPG
1.00 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, reverse
IMinPUPP
5 - 500
%IB
10
IMinPUPG
5 - 500
%IB
Table 110:
Name
FRPSPDIS (21) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TimerPP
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

Ph-Ph
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph
TimerPE
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

Ph-G
tPG
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
Time delay to trip, Ph-E
Technical manual
249
Section 7
Table 111:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.4.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
FRPSPDIS (21) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
groups
Operation principle
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS, 21) includes
six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-ground faults, and three
intended for phase-to-phase as well as for three-phase faults.
The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the combination
of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of faults.
The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FRPSPDIS (21) uses information from
the directional function ZDRDIR to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or reverse
direction.
The pickup condition PHSELZ is essentially based on the following criteria:
Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without ground
connection
Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.
The current pickup condition PHSELI is based on the following criteria:
Residual current criteria

No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the load area
is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be determined by the
minimum operating current limits.
Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.
The PHSELI output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the distance

zones directional function ZDRDIR.
There are output from FRPSPDIS (21) that indicate whether a pickup is in forward or
reverse direction or non-directional, for example FWD_A, REV_A and NDIR_A.
These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional function
and the impedance setting of FRPSPDIS (21) function. Their operating characteristics are
illustrated in figure 93.
250
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
60
60
R
60
R
60
Non-directional (ND)
Forward (FWD)
Reverse (REV)
en05000668_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000668 V1 EN
Figure 93:
Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation of

Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS, 21)
The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment".
The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming from
the directional function ZDRDIR (21D). It shall be connected to the STDIR output on
ZDRDIR (21D). This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on the distance
measuring zones, that is, the ZMRPDIS (21) block.
The code built up for the directionality is as follows:
STDIR=
FWD_A*1+FWD_B*4+FWD_C*16+FWD_AB*64+
+FWD_BC*256+FWD_CA*1024+REV_A*2+REV_B*8+REV_C*32+
+REV_AB*128+REV_BC*512+REV_CA*2048
If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have pickup in forward
direction in phase A. If the binary code is 3 then we have pickup in forward direction in
phase A and B etc.
The or PHSEL output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary coded information,
in this case information about the condition for opening correct fault loop in the distance
measuring element. It shall be connected to the PHSEL input on the ZMRPDIS distance
measuring zones (21) block.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:
Technical manual
251
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PHSEL = AG*1+BG*2+CG*4+AB*8+BC*16+CA*32
7.4.6.1
Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS, 21).
ZPHSn =
VA( B , C )
IA( B , C )
(Equation 54)
EQUATION1554 V1 EN
where:
n
corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)
The characteristic for FRPSPDIS (21) function at phase-to-ground fault is according to

figure 94. The characteristic has a settable angle for the resistive boundary in the first
quadrant of 70.
The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the ground-return path defined
according to equation 57 and equation 58.
RN =
R 0 PE - R1PE
3
EQUATION-2125 V1 EN
XN =
X 0 - X1
3
EQUATION1257 V1 EN
252
(Equation 55)
(Equation 56)
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
X (ohm/loop)
R1PE+RN
RFRvPE
RFFwPE
X1+XN
RFFwPE
R (Ohm/loop)
RFRvPE
X1+XN
RFFwPE
RFRvPE
R1PE+RN
IEC09000633 V1 EN
Figure 94:
Characteristic of FRPSPDIS (21) for phase to fault (directional lines are

drawn as "line-dot-dot-line")
Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to equation 57
and equation 58.
3 I0 0.5 IMinOpPE
(Equation 57)
EQUATION2108 V1 EN
3 I0
3I 0 Enable _ PG
100
Iph max
(Equation 58)
where:
IMinOpPE
is the minimum operation current for forward zones
3I0Enable_PG is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-toground fault loops (in %).
Iphmax
is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.
Technical manual
253
Section 7
7.4.6.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FRPSPDIS (21) is according to
equation 59.
ZPHS =
Vm - Vn
-2 In
(Equation 59)
Vm is the leading phase voltage, Vn the lagging phase voltage and In the phase current in
the lagging phase n.
The operation characteristic is shown in figure 95.
X (ohm/phase)
0.5FRvPP
R1PP 0.5RFFwPP
X1
0.5RFFwPP
R (ohm/phase)
0.5RFRvPP
0.5RFRvPP
R1PP
X1
0.5RFFwPP
IEC09000634 V1 EN
Figure 95:
254
The operation characteristic for FRPSPDIS (21) at phase-to-phase fault

(directional lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line")
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
In the same way as the condition for phase-to-ground fault, there are current conditions
that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are according
to equation 60 or equation 61.
3I 0 < 3I 0Enable _ PG
(Equation 60)
3I 0 < 3I 0BLK _ PP
(Equation 61)
where:
3I0Enable_PG is the minimum operation current for forward ground measuring loops,
7.4.6.3
3I0BLK_PP
is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and
Iphmax
is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.
Three-phase faults
The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase fault,
that is equation 59, equation 60 and equation 61 are used to release the operation of the
function.
However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all directions.
At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counter-clockwise. The
characteristic is shown in figure 96.
Technical manual
255
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
X (ohm/phase)
4 X1PP
3
0.5RFFwPPK3
X1K3
30 deg
RFwPP
2
3
R (ohm/phase)
0.5RFRvPPK3
K3 = 2 / sqrt(3)
30 deg
IEC09000635 V2 EN
Figure 96:
7.4.6.4
The characteristic of FRPSPDIS (21) for three-phase fault (set angle 70)
Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based on the
corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always active, but
can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 98. As illustrated, the resistive
blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector
is the same in all four quadrants.
256
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
RLdFwd
LdAngle
LdAngle
LdAngle
LdAngle
RLdRev
en05000196_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000196 V1 EN
Figure 97:
Characteristic of load encroachment function
The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is dependent

on the chosen operation mode of FRPSPDIS (21) function. When output signal PHSELZ
is selected, the characteristic for FRPSPDIS (21) (and also zone measurement depending
on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment characteristic, see figure 99.
When output signal PHSELI is selected, the operation characteristic will be as in
figure 98. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current and the
distance measuring zones.
Technical manual
257
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PHSELZ
DLECND
ANSI10000099 V1 EN
Figure 98:
Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation mode

when load encroachment is activated
When FRPSPDIS (21) is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 99. The figure shows a distance
measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area of the zone
together with the load encroachment is highlighted in black.
258
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
X
"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone
Distance measuring zone
Load encroachment
characteristic
R
Directional line
en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN
Figure 99:
Operating characteristic in forward direction when load encroachment is

activated
Figure 99 is valid for phase-to-ground. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the
operate area is transformed according to figure 100. Notice in particular what happens
with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone. Due to the 30degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 100 degrees instead of the
original 70 degrees (if the angle setting is 70 degrees). The blinder that is nominally
located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach
around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load
encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.
Technical manual
259
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
X (W /
phase)
Phase selection
Quadrilateral zone
Distance measuring zone
R (W /
phase)
IEC09000049 V1 EN
Figure 100:
Operating characteristic for FRPSPDIS (21) in forward direction for

three-phase fault, ohm/phase domain
The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 101. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement as the
quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic clockwise by
30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same time the characteristic
will "shrink" by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and RLdRv reach, which is valid at load or
three-phase fault.
260
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC08000437.vsd
IEC08000437 V1 EN
Figure 101:
Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases
There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the quadrilateral
characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected by a fault between
two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage in quadrant one. The
relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four should not be a problem even for
applications on series compensated lines.
7.4.6.5
Minimum operate currents

The operation of Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS, 21) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain threshold
values.
The phase-to-ground loop n is blocked if In<IMinPUPG, where In is the RMS value of the
current in phase n (A or B or C).
The phase-to-phase loop mn is blocked if (2In<IMinOpPPIMinPUPP).
Technical manual
261
Section 7
7.4.6.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A

Figure 102 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground
operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and logic
circuits, when only a phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase measurement is available within
the IED.
LDEblock
3 I 0 0.5 IMinPUPG
3I 0
3 I 0 Enable _ PG
100
IRELPG
Iphmax
0
15ms
AND
Bool to
integer
BLOCK
3I 0 < IMinPUPG
AND
3I 0 <
3I 0 BLK _ PP
100
STPG
10ms
0
IRELPG
0
20ms
AND
0
15ms
AND
DLECND
STPP
IRELPP
Iph max
ANSI09000149 V3 EN
Figure 102:
Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground operating conditions (residual

current criteria)
A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A PHSEL output
signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and current
criteria, refer to figure 102. This signal can be configured to STCND functional input
signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the phaseto-phase and phase-to-ground zone measuring elements and their phase related pickup
and tripping signals.
Figure 103 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase selective
signals NDIR_A (B or C). Internal signals ZMn and ZMmn (m and n change between A,
B and C according to the phase) represent the fulfilled operating criteria for each separate
loop measuring element, that is within the characteristic.
262
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
INDIR_A
INDIR_B
INDIR_C
IRELPG
LDEblockA
ZMA
LDEblockB
ZMB
LDEblockC
ZMC
LDEblockAB
ZMAB
LDEblockBC
ZMBC
LDEblockCA
ZMCA
AND
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
PHSEL_G
PHSEL_A
PHSEL_B
PHSEL_C
INDIR_AB
INDIR_BC
INDIR_CA
IRELPP
OR
0
15 ms
PHSEL_PP
ANSI00000545 V4 EN
Figure 103:
Composition on non-directional phase selection signals
Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is presented
schematically in figure 104 and figure 105. The directional criteria appears as a condition
for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity for simultaneous
and evolving faults on lines within the complex network configurations. Internal signals
DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding directional signals for measuring
loops with phases Ln and Lm. Designation FW (figure 105) represents the forward
direction as well as the designation RV (figure 104) represents the reverse direction. All
directional signals are derived within the corresponding digital signal processor.
Figure 104 presents additionally a composition of a PHSELZ output signal, which is
created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be configured to
PHSEL functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the
operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground zone measuring elements and their
phase related pickup and tripping signals.
Technical manual
263
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
INDIR_A
AND
DRV_A
INDIR_AB
AND
DRV_AB
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
REV_A
INDIR_CA
AND
DRV_CA
INDIR_B
AND
DRV_B
REV_G
INDIR_AB
AND
INDIR_BC
INDIR_A
INDIR_B
INDIR_C
INDIR_AB
INDIR_BC
INDIR_CA
AND
DRV_BC
INDIR_C
AND
DRV_C
REV_B
Bool to
integer
PHSELZ
INDIR_BC
AND
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
REV_C
INDIR_CA
AND
REV_PP
ANSI00000546 V3 EN
Figure 104:
264
Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
AND
INDIR_A
DFW_A
AND
AND
OR
INDIR_AB
DFW_AB
AND
OR
INDIR_CA
DFW_CA
OR
AND
FWD_IPH
0
15 ms
FWD_A
0
15 ms
FWD_G
0
15 ms
FWD_B
0
15 ms
FWD_2PH
0
15 ms
FWD_C
0
15 ms
FWD_3PH
AND
INDIR_AB
AND
OR
INDIR_BC
DFW_BC
0
15 ms
AND
AND
INDIR_B
DFW_B
15 ms
0
AND
AND
OR
15 ms
0
INDIR_C
DFW_C
AND
AND
INDIR_BC
AND
OR
INDIR_CA
AND
AND
OR
FWD_PP
0
15 ms
ANSI05000201 V3 EN
Figure 105:
Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction
Figure106 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and START, where internal
signals STNDPP, STFWPP and STRVPP are the equivalent to internal signals STNDPE,
STFWPE and STRVPE, but for the phase-to-phase loops.
Technical manual
265
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
TimerPP=Disabled
tPP
t
AND
OR
TimerPE=Disabled
tPE
t
AND
AND
OR
TRIP
AND
STNDPP
STFWPP
OR
STRVPP
OR
STNDPE
STFWPE
RI
OR
STRVPE
ANSI08000441 1-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000441-1 V1 EN
Figure 106:
266
TRIP and START signal logic
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.4.7
Technical data
Table 112:
FRPSPDIS (21) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(5-500)% of IBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reactive reach, positive

sequence
(0.503000.00) /phase
Resistive reach, positive

sequence
(0.101000.00) /phase
Reactive reach, zero sequence
(0.509000.00) /phase
Resistive reach, zero sequence
(0.503000.00) /phase
2.0% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
Fault resistance, phase-toground faults, forward and

reverse
(1.009000.00) /loop
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph faults,

forward and reverse
(0.503000.00) /loop
Load encroachment criteria:

Load resistance, forward and
reverse
Safety load impedance angle
(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-70) degrees
Reset ratio
105% typically
7.5
High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS (21)
7.5.1
Identification
High speed distance protection zone
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
ZMFPDIS
S00346 V1 EN
7.5.2
Functionality
The ZMFPDIS function is a six zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for
phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-ground faults for each of the
Technical manual
267
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
independent zones, which makes the function suitable in applications with single-phase
autoreclosing.
In each measurement zone, ZMFPDIS function is designed with the flexibility to operate
in either quadrilateral or mho characteristic mode for separate phase-to-earth or phase-tophase loops.
The zones can operate independently of each other. Zones 3 to 5 in directional (forward
or reverse) or non-directional mode. Zone1 and zone2 are designed to measure in forward
direction only, while one zone (ZRV) is designed to measure in the reverse direction. This
makes them suitable, together with a communication scheme, for protection of power
lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal
lines, and so on.
A built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the distance
zones in the load exporting end during phase-to-ground faults on heavily loaded power
lines. It also reduces underreach in the importing end.
The ZMFPDIS function block itself incorporates a phase-selection element and a
directional element, contrary to previous designs in the 600-series, where these elements
were represented with separate function-blocks.
The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change criteria
(i.e. delta quantities), with significantly increased dependability. Naturally, there is also a
phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its operation only on voltage
and current phasors.
The directional element utilizes a set of well-established quantities to provide fast and
correct directional decision during various power system operating conditions, including
close-in three-phase faults, simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-sequence infeed.
268
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.5.3
Function block
ZMFPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKZ1
BLKZ2
BLKZ3
BLKZ4
BLKZ5
BLKZRV
BLKTRZ1
BLKTRZ2
BLKTRZ3
BLKTRZ4
BLKTRZ5
BLKTRZRV
TRIP
TRZ1
TR_A_Z1
TR_B_Z1
TR_C_Z1
TRZ2
TR_A_Z2
TR_B_Z2
TR_C_Z2
TRZ3
TRZ4
TRZ5
TRZRV
BFI_3P
PU_Z1
PU_ND_Z1
PU_Z2
PU_A_Z2
PU_B_Z2
PU_C_Z2
PU_ND_Z2
PU_Z3
PU_ND_Z3
PU_Z4
PU_ND_Z4
PU_Z5
STND_Z5
PU_ZRV
PU_A_RV
PU_B_RV
PU_C_RV
STNDRV
PHPUN D
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NDIR_C
FWD_A
FWD_B
FWD_C
FWD_G
REV_A
REV_B
REV_C
REV_G
FWD_1PH
FWD_2PH
FWD_3PH
PHG_FLT
PHPH_FLT
ANSI11000433 V3 EN
Figure 107:
ZMFPDIS (21) function block
Technical manual
269
Section 7
7.5.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 113:
Name
ZMFPDIS (21) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Blocks and resets timers and outputs of entire function
LOVBZ
BOOLEAN
BLKZ1
BOOLEAN
Blocks and resets zone 1 timers and outputs
BLKZ2
BOOLEAN
BLKZ3
BOOLEAN
BLKZ4
BOOLEAN
BLKZ5
BOOLEAN
BLKZRV
BOOLEAN
Blocks and resets reverse zone timers and outputs
BLKTRZ1
BOOLEAN
Blocks and resets zone 1 timers and trip outputs
BLKTRZ2
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ3
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ4
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ5
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZRV
BOOLEAN
Blocks and resets reverse zone timers and trip outputs
Table 114:
Name
ZMFPDIS (21) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip in any phase or phases from any zone or zones
TRZ1
BOOLEAN
Trip in any phase or phases from zone 1 - forward

direction
TR_A_Z1
BOOLEAN
Trip in phase A from zone 1 foward direction
TR_B_Z1
BOOLEAN
Trip in phase B from zone 1 forward direction
TR_C_Z1
BOOLEAN
Trip in phase C from zone 1 forward direction
TRZ2
BOOLEAN

direction
TR_A_Z2
BOOLEAN
Trip in phase A from a zone 2 forward direction
TR_B_Z2
BOOLEAN
TR_C_Z2
BOOLEAN
TRZ3
BOOLEAN
Trip in any phase or phases from zone 3 - zone direction
TRZ4
BOOLEAN
270
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Description
TRZ5
BOOLEAN
TRZRV
BOOLEAN
Trip in any phase or phases from zone RV - reverse dir.
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
Pickup in any phase or phases from any zone or zones
PU_Z1
BOOLEAN
Pick up of any phase or phases from a Zone 1 fault in the

forward direction
PU_ND_Z1
BOOLEAN
Pick up any phase or phases from zone 1 - any direction
PU_Z2
BOOLEAN

forward direction
PU_A_Z2
BOOLEAN
Pick up of phase A for a zone 2 fault in forward direction
PU_B_Z2
BOOLEAN
Pick up for phase B fault in forward direction
PU_C_Z2
BOOLEAN
Pick up in phase C for a zone 2 fault in the forward

direction
PU_ND_Z2
BOOLEAN
Pick uo in any phase or phases for a zone 2 fault in any

direction
PU_Z3
BOOLEAN

forward direction
PU_ND_Z3
BOOLEAN
Pick up any phase or phases from zone 3- any direction
PU_Z4
BOOLEAN
Pick up in any pjase or phases for a zone 4 fault - zone

direction
PU_ND_Z4
BOOLEAN
Pick up any phase or phases from zone -4 any direction
PU_Z5
BOOLEAN
Pick up in any phase or phase for Zone 5 - Zone

direction
STND_Z5
BOOLEAN
Pick up in any phase or phases from a zone 5 fault in any

direction
PU_ZRV
BOOLEAN
Pick up in any phase or phase for a reverse fault
PU_A_RV
BOOLEAN
Pick up for a phase A reverse fault
PU_B_RV
BOOLEAN
Pick up for a phase B revers fault
PU_C_RV
BOOLEAN
Pick up for a phase C reverse fault
STNDRV
BOOLEAN
Pick up for a reverse zone for a fauult in nay direction
PHPUND
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in any phase or phases - any direction
NDIR_A
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phase A - any direction
NDIR_B
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phase B - any direction
NDIR_C
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phase C - any direction
FWD_A
BOOLEAN
FWD_B
BOOLEAN
FWD_C
BOOLEAN
FWD_G
BOOLEAN
forward fault involving ground
REV_A
BOOLEAN
REV_B
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
271
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
7.5.5
Table 115:
Name
Type
Description
REV_C
BOOLEAN
REV_G
BOOLEAN
Fault in reverse direction involving ground
FWD_1PH
BOOLEAN
Single-phase fault detected - forward direction
FWD_2PH
BOOLEAN
Two-phase fault detected - forward direction
FWD_3PH
BOOLEAN
Three-phase fault detected - forward direction
PHG_FLT
BOOLEAN
Ph-G zone measurement enabled - any direction
PHPH_FLT
BOOLEAN
Ph-Ph zone measurement enabled - any direction
Settings
ZMFPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable operation of the function
RLdFwd
0.01 - 5000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
60.00
Resistance determining the load impedance

area - forward
RLdRvFactor
1 - 1000
%RLdF
w
100
Resistance factor determining the load

impedance area - reverse
XLd
0.01 - 10000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
400.00

area - forward
LdAngle
5 - 70
Deg
30
Angle determining the load impedance area
CVTType
Any
Passive type
None (Magnetic)
Passive type
CVT selection determining filtering of the

function
OpModePPZ1
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral
Enabled/Disabled and characteristic setting for

Ph-Ph loops, zone 1
OpModePGZ1
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-G loops, zone 1
X1PPZ1
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph,

zone 1
R1PPZ1
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-Ph,

zone 1
X1PGZ1
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G,

zone 1
R1PZG1
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
Positive sequence resistive reach, Ph-G, zone

1
X0Z1
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
100.00
Zero sequence reactance reach, zone 1
R0Z1
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
Zero sequence resistive reach, zone 1
272
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Step
Default
RFPPZ1
Values (Range)
0.01 - 9000.00
Unit
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Description
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1
RFPGZ1
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, zone 1
tPPZ1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone 1
tPGZ1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay to trip, Ground-Earth, zone 1
IMinOpPPZ1
10 - 6000
%IB
10
Minimum operate ph-ph current for PhasePhase loops, zone 1
IMinOpPGZ1
5 - 6000
%IB
10
minimum operate phase current for phaseground loops. zone 1
OpModePPZ2
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-Ph loops, zone 2
OpModePGZ2
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-G loops, zone 2
X1Z2
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
Positive sequence reactance reach, zone 2
R1Z2
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X0Z2
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0Z2
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
RFPPZ2
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFPGZ2
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-g, Zone 2
tPPZ2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
tPGZ2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Time delay to trip, Phase-Ground, zone 2
IMinOpPPZ2
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ2
5 - 6000
%IB
10
Minimum operate phase current for phase ground loops, zone 2
OpModePPZ3
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-Ph loops, zone 3
OpModePGZ3
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-G loops, zone 3
DirModeZ3
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
X1Z3
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1Z3
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
Positive sequence resistive reach, zone 3
X0Z3
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0Z3
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
RFPPZ3
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00

Technical manual
273
Section 7
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Step
Default
RFPGZ3
0.01 - 9000.00
Unit
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Description
tPPZ3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
tPGZ3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
IMinOpPPZ3
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ3
5 - 6000
%IB
10
Minimum operate phase current for phaseground loops, zone 3
OpModePPZ4
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-Ph loops, zone 4
OpModePGZ4
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-G loops, zone 4
DirModeZ4
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction of zone 4 (which will be the Fw

direction of zone 4)
X1Z4
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1Z4
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X0Z4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
R0Z4
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
RFPPZ4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFPEZ4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
tPPZ4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
tPGZ4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
Time delay to trip, Phase-ground, zone 4
IMinOpPPZ4
10 - 6000
%IB
10
How start of trip delay timers should be linked

for zone 4
IMinOpPGZ4
5 - 6000
%IB
10
OpModePPZ5
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-Ph loops, zone 5
OpModePGZ5
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-G loops, zone 5
DirModeZ5
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward

X1Z5
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
R1Z5
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
X0Z5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00

274
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Step
Default
R0Z5
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
RFPPZ5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFPEZ5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
tPPZ5
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.600
tPGZ5
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.600
IMinOpPPZ5
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ5
5 - 6000
%IB
10
OpModePPZRV
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-Ph loops, zone RV
OpModePGZRV
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-G loops, zone RV
tPPZRV
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone RV
tPEZRV
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay to trip, Phase -Ground, zone RV
IMinOpPPZRV
10 - 6000
%IB
10
Minimum operate ph-ph current for PhasePhase loops, zone RV
IMinOpPGZRV
5 - 6000
%IB
10
Minimum operate phase current for phaseground loops, zone RV
X1ZRV
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
Positive sequence reactance reach, zone RV
R1ZRV
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
Positive sequence resistive reach, zone RV
X0ZRV
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
Zero sequence reactance reach, zone RV
R0ZRV
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
Zero sequence resistive reach, zone RV
RFPPZRV
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV
RFPGZRV
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Fault resistance reach Ph-G. zone RV
Step
Default
Table 116:
Name
Unit
Description
ZMFPDIS (21) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Description
ZoneLinkPU
Phase Selection
1st starting zone
Phase Selection
Select. of start source for all ZoneLinked trip

delay timers
3I0Enable_PG
5 - 400
%MaxIP
h
400
3I0 limit for releasing Phase-to-Ground

measuring loops
TimerModeZ1
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-G trip output,

zone 1
Technical manual
275
Section 7
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TimerLinksZ1
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
no links
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)

for zone 1
TimerModeZ2
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
On/off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-G trip output,

zone 2
TimerLinksZ2
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
no links
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)

for zone 2
TimerModeZ3
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH

Zone 3
TimerLinksZ3
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
no links
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)

for zone 3
TimerLinksZ4
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
On/off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-G trip output

Zone 4
TimerLinksZ4
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
no links
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)

for zone 4
TimerModeZ5
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH

zone 5
TimerLinksZ5
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
no links
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)

for zone 5
TimerModeZRV
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
On/off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-G trip outout,

zone RV
TimerLinksZRV
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
no links
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)

for zone RV
276
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 117:
Name
ZMFPDIS (21) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
ZDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range, Int

Db: In %s
ZMax
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
1500.0
Maximum value in ohm
ZRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
ZAngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
Table 118:
Name
ZMFPDIS (21) Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ZZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
100
Zero point clamping
ZHiHiLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
1350.0
High High limit in ohm
ZHiLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
1200.0
High limit in ohm
ZLowLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
300.0
Low limit in ohm
ZLowLowLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
150.0
Low Low limit in ohm
ZMin
0.000 - 5000.000
Ohm
0.001
0.005
Minimum value in ohm
ZLimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range and is common

for all limits
ArgLdMinEd2
5 - 70
Deg
Minimum settable angle determining the load

impedance area, for 61850 Ed.2 settings
ArgLdMaxEd2
5 - 70
Deg
70
Maximum settable angle determining the load

RLdFwMinEd2
0.01 - 5000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
0.01
Minimum settable resistance determining the

load impedance area, for 61850 Ed.2 settings
RLdFwMaxEd2
0.01 - 5000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5000.00
Maximum settable resistance determining the

Technical manual
277
Section 7
7.5.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Monitored data
Table 119:
Name
278
ZMFPDIS (21) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
A_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
B_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
C_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
ABDir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in loop AB
BCDIR
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in looop BC
CADir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in loop CA
Aph_R
REAL
Ohm
Aph_X
REAL
Ohm
Bph_R
REAL
Ohm
Bph_X
REAL
Ohm
Cph_R
REAL
Ohm
Cph_X
REAL
Ohm
ZAIMAG
REAL
Ohm
ZA Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZAANGIM
REAL
deg
ZA Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZBIMAG
REAL
Ohm
ZB Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZBANGIM
REAL
deg
ZB Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZCIMAG
REAL
Ohm
ZC Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZCANGIM
REAL
deg
ZC Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.5.7
Operation principle
Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the following text without
its zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of BLKZ3) when the description is equally valid for
all zones.
7.5.7.1
Filtering
Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the ZMFPDIS
function are derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a half cycle filter.
The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed based
on the estimated power system frequency.
A half cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while odd
harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even harmonics.
Even harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach however; instead there will
be a slightly variable underreach, on average in the same order as the magnitude ratio
between the harmonic and fundamental component.
7.5.7.2
Distance measuring zones

means that ground fault loop for phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-phase faults for
Figure 108 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the six distance zones.
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 1
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 2
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 3
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 4
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 5
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 6
ANSI05000458 V2 EN
Figure 108:
The different measuring loops at phase-to-ground fault and phase-tophase fault
Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance protection function
with six measuring elements.
Technical manual
279
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Transients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the transient overreach of a
distance protection. At the same time these transients can be very diverse in nature from
one type to the other; in fact, more diverse than can be distinguished by the algorithm itself
in the course of a few milliseconds. So, a setting (CVTtype) is introduced in order to inform
the algorithm about the type of CVT applied and thus providing the advantage of knowing
how performance should be optimized, even during the first turbulent milliseconds of the
fault period.
There are two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive and the active
type, which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device that is employed. The
active type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a negative impact on operate
times. However, this will be evident primarily at higher source impedance ratios (SIRs),
SIR 5 and above, or close to the reach limit.
The IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little or no use in relation to this. It is not
primarily the damping of transients that is important; it is the frequency content of the
transients that is decisive, i.e. how difficult it is to filter out the specific frequency. So,
even if two CVTs, one passive and the other active type, comply with the same transient
class, the active type requires more extensive filtering in order to avoid transient
overreach.
To avoid overreach and at the same time achieve fast operate times, a supplementary
circular characteristic is implemented. A circular characteristic exists for every measuring
loop and quadrilateral/mho characteristic. There are no specific reach settings for this
circular zone. It uses the normal quadrilateral/mho zone settings to determine a reach that
will be appropriate. This implies that the circular characteristic will always have
somewhat shorter reach than the quadrilateral/mho zone.
7.5.7.3
Phase-selection element
The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change criteria
(i.e. delta quantities) with significantly increased dependability. Naturally, there is also a
phase selection criterion operating in parallel which bases its operation only on voltage
and current phasors.
This continuous criteria will, in the vast majority of cases, operate in parallel and carry on
the fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some particularly
difficult faults on heavily loaded lines, the continuous criteria might not be sufficient, for
example, when the estimated fault impedance resides within the load area defined by the
load encroachment characteristic. In this case, the indication will be restricted to a pulse
lasting for one or two power system cycles.
The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish faults
with minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is not restricted
by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change phase. This significantly
280
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
improves performance for remote phase-to-ground faults on heavily loaded lines. One
exception, however, are three-phase faults to which the load encroachment characteristic
always has to be applied in order to distinguish fault from load.
Phase-to-phase-ground faults (also called double ground faults) will practically always
activate phase-to-phase zone measurements. This is a substantial difference compared to
the previous phase selection function (FDPSPDIS). Measurement in two phase-to-ground
loops at the same time is associated with so-called simultaneous faults: two ground faults
at the same time, one each on the two circuits of a double line, or when the zero sequence
current is relatively high due to a source with low Z0/Z1 ratio. In fact, in these situations
zone measurement will be released both for the related phase-to-ground loops and the
phase-to-phase loop simultaneously. On the other hand, simultaneous faults closer to the
remote bus will gradually take on the properties of a phase-to-phase-ground fault and the
function will eventually use phase-to-phase zone measurements also here.
In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely of zero sequence nature
(all phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed in the phase-to-ground
loops only for a phase-to-phase-ground fault.
However, should it be desirable to use phase-to-ground (and only phase-to-ground) zone
measurement for phase-to-phase-ground faults, there is a setting 3I0Enable_PG that can
be lowered from its excessive default value to the level above which phase-to-ground
measurement should be activated.
7.5.7.4
Directional element
Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is provided
by comparing a positive sequence based polarizing voltage with phase currents. For extra
security, especially in making a very fast decision, this method is complemented with an
equivalent comparison where, instead of the phase current, the change in phase current is
used. Moreover, a basic negative sequence directional evaluation is taken into account as
a reliable reference during high load condition. Finally, zero sequence directional
evaluation is used whenever there is more or less exclusive zero sequence in-feed.
Fundamentally, the directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per measuring
loop, are defined by the following equations.
-15<arg
PolA
< 120
(Equation 62)
-15<arg
PolAB
< 120
AB
Technical manual
(Equation 63)
281
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Where:
VPolA
is the polarizing voltage for phase A.
IA
is the phase current in phase A.
VPolAB
is the polarizing voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A).
IAB
is the current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A).
The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees.
Since the polarizing voltage is also used for the Mho distance characteristics, the
magnitude of the voltage is just as interesting as the phase. If there are symmetrical
conditions and the measured per phase positive sequence voltage magnitude is above 75%
of the base voltage before the fault, the pre-fault magnitude will be memorized and used
as long as there is a fault. The phase angle however will only be memorized (locked) for
75 ms at a time, not to lose synchronism with the real system voltage.
Should the positive sequence voltage drop below 2% of the base voltage, it will be
considered invalid. In this situation, directional signals and pickups from Mho elements
will be sealed-in and kept static as long as there is a fault.
For ZMFCPDIS, when option SeriesComp is chosen for OperationSC, the voltages of
faulty phases will be discarded in order not to affect the polarizing voltage with voltage
reversal.
7.5.7.5
Fuse failure
The ZMFPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse failure
supervision (FUFSPVC) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the binary input
VTSZ is used for this purpose.
A built-in supervision feature within high-speed distance protection itself, based on phase
current change, will ensure that the FUFSPVC blocking signal is received in time.
Namely, an intentional time delay will be introduced if no current magnitude change
greater than 5% of IBase has been detected for any of the three phase currents.
7.5.7.6
Power swings
There is need for external blocking of the ZMFPDIS function during power swings, either
from the Power Swing Blocking function (ZMRPSB) or an external device.
282
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.5.7.7
Measuring principles
Quadrilateral characteristic
ZMFPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones separately.
Set OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx to Quadrilateral, to choose particular measuring loop
in a zone to work as quadrilateral distance protection.
All ZMFPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics
presented in figure 110 and figure 109. The phase-to-ground characteristic is given in
ohms-per-loop domain while the phase-to-phase characteristic is given in ohms-perphase domain.
RFPP
(Ohm/phase)
R1PP
RFPP
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
11FWPE
XX
-X-1X
X00PE
0PE
PG
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
XNFW
XNFW===
3
3 3
X1PP
j
R (Ohm/phase)
RFPP
RFPP
X1PP
RFPP
2
R1PP
RFPP
2
IEC11000416 V1 EN
Figure 109:
ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring
Technical manual
283
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
X (Ohm/loop)
(Ohm/loop)
ANSI11000415 V1 EN
Figure 110:
ZMFPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-ground measuring, ohm/loop

domain
The faulty loop in relation to the fault type can be presented as in figure 111. The main
intention with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive reach should be
interpreted and set. Note in particular that the setting RFPP always represents the total
fault resistance of the loop, regardless the fact that the fault resistance (arc) may be divided
into parts like for three-phase or phase-to-phase faults. The R1 + jX1 represent the positive
sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location.
284
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IA
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-ground
element
VA
Phase-to-ground
fault in phase A
RFPG
(Arc + tower
resistance)
N
IG
(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IA
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-phase
element A-B
VA
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase
A-B
RFPP
IB
(Arc resistance)
VB
R1 + j X1
IA
Three-phase
fault or Phase-tophase-ground fault
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
VA
Phase-to-phase
element A-C
IC
VC
ANSI11000419 V3 EN
Figure 111:
Fault loop model
Mho characteristic
ZMFPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones separately.
Set OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx setting to Mho or Offset, to choose a particular
measuring loop in a zone to work as mho (or Offset Mho) distance protection.
Zones 3 to 5 can be selected to be either forward or reverse with positive sequence
polarized mho characteristic; alternatively self polarized offset mho characteristics. The
operating characteristic is in accordance to figure 65 where zone 5 is selected offset mho.
Technical manual
285
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
X
Z4
Z3
ZS=0
Z2
Z1
Z5
R
R
ZS=Z1
ZRV
ZS=2Z1
IEC15000056 V1 EN
Figure 112:
Mho, offset mho characteristics and the source impedance influence on

the mho characteristic
The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance. Instead of
crossing the origin, as for the mho to the left of figure 65, which is only valid where the
source impedance (Zs) is zero, the crossing point is moved to the coordinates of the
negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle shown to the right of figure
65. Z1 denotes the complex positive sequence impedance.
The magnitude of the polarizing voltage is determined completely by the positive
sequence voltage magnitude from before the fault. This will give a somewhat less
dynamic expansion of the mho circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is
high, the dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too
much with high loading and mild power swing conditions.

In ZMFPDIS, each zone measurement loop characteristic can be set to mho characteristic
or offset mho characteristic by setting zxOpModePE or zxOpModePP (where x is 1-5
depending on selected zone).
ZMFPDIS fixes zone 1 and 2 in Forward mode and zone RV in Reverse mode. Zone 3-5
can be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter DirModeZx
(where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone).
If DirModeZx (where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone) is selected as Non-directional,
the directional element will not have any effect on the measurement loop and operation of
the function. When DirModeZx (where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone) is selected as
Forward or Reverse, directional lines are introduced. Information about the directional
286
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
lines is given from the directional element. Basic Mho characteristics with different mode
settings are indicated in figure 113.
OpModePP/PEZx = Mho
Zone 1, Zone 2 and
DirModeZ3-5 = Forward
OpModePP/PEZx = Mho
Zone RV and
DirModeZ3-5 = Reverse
OpModePP/PEZx = Offset
Zone 1, Zone 2 and
OpModePP/PEZx = Mho
Only Zone 3-5
DirModeZ3-5 = Non-directional
Zone RV and
Only Zone 3-5
IEC15000055 V1 EN
Figure 113:
Mho characteristics
For each zone, the impedance is set in cartesian coordinates (resistance and reactance)
which is the same as for quadrilateral characteristic.
The ZMFPDIS function has only one set of reach setting so the reverse will be the same
as for the forward reach, meaning that the non-directional offset mho characteristic will
always be centered around the origin. In detail, for Zone 1, the resistive and reactance
reaches for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault are set individually using the
settings R1PPZ1, X1PPZ1, R1PEZ1, X1PEZ1, X0Z1 and R0Z1. In Zone 2-5 and Zone RV,
Technical manual
287
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
the same zone reach settings are used for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase (R1Zx,
X1Zx, X0Zx and R0Zx, x=2-5 or RV).
Theory of operation
Mho
The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as in figure 66. The condition for deriving the
( )
b = arg VAB - I AB Z 1set - arg V pol
(Equation 64)
where
V AB
EQUATION1790ANSI V1 EN
I AB
Z 1set
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in zone direction
For Zone 1,
Z 1set = R1PPZ 1 + j X 1PPZ 1

(Equation 65)
where
R1PPZ1
is the positive sequence resistive reach for phase-to-phase fault for zone 1
X1PPZ1
is the positive sequence reactance reach for phase-to-phase fault for zone 1
For Zone 2-5 and RV
Z 1set = R1Zx + j X 1Zx

288
(Equation 66)
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
where
R1Zx
is the positive sequence resistive reach for zone x (x=2-5 and RV)
X1Zx
is the positive sequence reactance reach for zone x (x=2-5 and RV)
Vpol
Operation occurs if 90270
I AB jX
I L1L 2 Z1set
Vcomp VAB I AB Z1set
VAB
V pol
I AB R
ANSI15000060 V1 EN
Figure 114:
Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are given by the
two vectors Z 1set and Z 1RVset where Z 1set and Z 1RVset are settable through the
resistance and reactance settings in forward and reverse directions.
compensated voltages is greater than or equal to 90 (figure 115). The angle will be 90
for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for A to B fault can be defined according to equation below.
Technical manual
289
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
V I Z1
AB
AB
set
= arg
VAB I AB Z 1RVset
(Equation 67)
where
Z 1RVset
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault opposite to zone direction and is
defined as
For Zone 1,
Z 1RVset = R1PPZ 1 + j X 1PPZ 1

For Zone 2-5 and RV,
Z 1RVset = R1Zx + j X 1Zx

290
(Equation 68)
(Equation 69)
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
I AB jX
Vcomp1 VAB I AB Z 1set
I AB Z 1set
VAB
Vcomp 2 VAB ( I AB Z 1RVset )
I AB Z 1RVset
I AB R
ANSI15000058 V1 EN
Figure 115:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase A to B

fault
Operation occurs if 90270 .

The measuring of earth faults uses earth return compensation applied in a conventional
way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence from the earth
return path.
Compensation for earth return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the positive
and zero sequence impedance of the line. It is known that the ground compensation factor
KN is,
Technical manual
291
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
KN =
Z 0set Z 1set
3 Z 1set
Z 0set = R 0Zx + j X 0 Zx
For Zone 1,
Z 1set = R1PEZ 1 + j X 1PEZ 1

For Zone 2-5 and RV,
Z 1set = R1Zx + j X 1Zx

(Equation 70)
where
Z 0set
Z 1set
R1PEZ1
is the positive sequence resistive reach of the line in /phase for

phase-to-ground fault for zone 1
X1PEZ1
is the positive sequence reactance reach of the line in /phase for

phase-to-ground fault for zone 1
R0Zx
is the zero sequence resistive reach of the line in /phase for zone x
(x=2-5, or RV)
X0Zx
is the zero sequence reactance reach of the line in /phase for zone
x (x=2-5, or RV)
For an earth fault in phase A, the angle between the compensation voltage and the
polarizing voltage Vpol is,
292
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
= arg [VA ( I A + 3I 0 K N ) Z 1set ] arg(V pol )

(Equation 71)
where
VA
IA

3I0
is the zero-sequence current in faulty phase A
Z 1set
is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in /phase for

phase-to-ground fault in zone direction
Vpol
is the polarizing voltage for phase A
Technical manual
293
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IAjX
Vcomp VA ( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1set
3I 0 K N Z1set
VA
I A Z1set
V pol
IAR
ANSI15000059 V1 EN
Figure 116:

Offset mho
The condition for operation of offset mho at phase-to-earth fault is that the angle
between the two compensated voltages is equal to or greater than 90, see figure 71. The
= arg VA ( I A + 3I 0 K N ) Z 1set arg VA ( I A + 3I 0 K N Z 1RVset ]
(Equation 72)
where
Z 1RVset
294

phase-to-ground fault opposite to zone direction and is defined as,
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
For Zone 1,
Z 1RVset = R1PEZ 1 + j X 1PEZ 1

(Equation 73)
For Zone 2-5 and

RV,
Z 1RVset = R1Zx + j X 1Zx

(Equation 74)
IA jX
Vcomp1 VA ( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1set
( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1set
VA
Vcomp 2 VA ( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1RVset )
( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1RVset
IA R
ANSI15000057 V1 EN
Figure 117:
Operation occurs if 90 270 .
7.5.7.8
Load encroachment
In some cases the measured load impedance might enter the set zone characteristic
without any fault on the protected line. This phenomenon is called load encroachment and
it might occur when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred
onto the protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated on the left in
Technical manual
295
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
figure118. The entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is of course not
desirable and the way to handle this with conventional distance protection is to consider
this with the resistive reach settings, that is, to have a security margin between the distance
zone characteristic and the minimum load impedance. Such a solution has the drawback
that it will reduce the sensitivity of the distance protection, that is, the ability to detect
resistive faults.
The IED has a built in feature which shapes the characteristic according to the
characteristic shown in figure118. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the
possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-ground faults at remote
line end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle LdAngle, the resistive blinder
for the zone measurement can be set according to figure118 affording higher fault
resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load encroachment.
Separate resistive blinder settings are available in forward and reverse direction.
The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines, where
there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary
sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy
loaded, medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get sufficient fault
resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not a major problem. See section "".
X
Zm
Zm
ZL
Load impedance area in
forward direction
R
LdAngle
LdAngle
R
LdAngle
LdAngle
RldRev
RLdFwd
ANSI05000495 V2 EN
Figure 118:
Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic
[1]
[1] RLdRv=RLdRvFactor*RLdFw
296
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.5.7.9
Simplified logic schemes

PHSA, PHSB,...PHSCA are internal binary logical signals from the Phase-selection
element. They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones and determine
which loops should be released to possibly issue a pickup or a trip.
FWA, FWB,...FWCA and RVA, RVB,...RVCA are the internal binary signals from the
Directional element. An FW signal is activated if the criteria for a forward fault or load is
fulfilled for its particular loop. The equivalent applies to the reverse (RV) signals.
The internal input 'IN present' is activated if the residual current (3I0) exceeds 10% of the
maximum phase current magnitude and at the same time is above 5% of IBase. However,
if current transformer saturation is detected, this criterion is changed to residual voltage
(3V0) exceeding 5% of VBase/sqrt(3) instead.
FWD(n & mn)
DIR(n & mn)Z1
FWD(n & mn)
DIR(n & mn)Z2
REV(n & mn)
DIR(n & mn)ZRV

DirModeZ3-5
TRUE (1)
FWD(n & mn)
REV(n & mn)
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
DIR(n & mn)Z3-5
ANSI12000137 V1 EN
Figure 119:
Connection of directional signals to Zones
Technical manual
297
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PGZx
OR
ZMAZx
PHSA
DIRAZx
ZMBZx
PHSB
DIRBZx
ZMCZx
PHSC
DIRCZx
AND
AND
AND
AND
AZx
OR
AND
AND
ZMABZx
PHSAB
DIRABZx
ZMLBCZx
PHSBC
DIRBCZx
ZMCAZx
PHSCA
DIRCAZx
BZx
OR
AND
AND
OR
AND
CZx
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
PPZx
NDZx
ANSI12000140 V1 EN
Figure 120:
298
Intermediate logic
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
TimerModeZx =
Enable Ph-Ph,
Ph-G
AND
PPZx
AND
PGZx
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKZx
BLKTRZx
OR
AND
AND
TZx
OR
OR
AND
tPPZx
0
AND
OR
TimerLinksZx
OR
ZoneLinkStart
PUPHS
tPPZx
0
OR
Phase Selection
1st pickup zone
LNKZ1
LNKZ2
LNKZRV
OR
LNKZ3
LNKZ4
LNKZ5
LoopLink (tPP-tPG)
LoopLink & ZoneLink
no links
FALSE (0)
AND
LNKZx
TimerLinksZx =
LoopLink & ZoneLink
ANSI12000139 V2 EN
Figure 121:
Logic for linking of timers
Technical manual
299
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
TZx
0
15 ms
BLKTRZx
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKZx
TRIPZx
AND
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AZx
BZx
CZx
PPZx
PGZx
OR
NDZx
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
TR_A_Zx
TR_B_Zx
TR_B_Zx
PU_A_Zx
PU_B_Zx
PU_C_Zx
PU_Zx
PU_ND_Zx
ANSI12000138 V1 EN
Figure 122:
300
Pickup and trip outputs
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
OR
PHSA
PHSB
PHG_FLT
PHSC
PHSAB
PHSBC
PHSCA
OR
BLOCK
LOVBZ
PHPH_FLT
OR
OR
PU_ND
PU_PHS
ANSI12000133 V1 EN
Figure 123:
Additional pickup outputs 1
Technical manual
301
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PHSA
FWA
PHSB
FWB
PHSC
FWC
AND
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
FWD_A
AND
PHSAB
FWAB
PHSBC
FWBC
PHSCA
FWCA
AND
AND
FWD_B
FWD_C
AND
OR
IN present
BLOCK
LOVBZ
AND
=1
FWD_G
FWD_1PH
OR
=2
=3
FWD_2PH
FWD_3PH
ANSI12000134 V1 EN
Figure 124:
302
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PHSA
RVA
PHSB
RVB
PHSC
RVC
AND
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
REV_A
AND
PHSAB
RVAB
PHSBC
RVBC
PHSCA
RVCA
AND
AND
REV_B
REV_C
AND
OR
IN present
BLOCK
LOVBZ
AND
REV_G
OR
ANSI12000141 V1 EN
Figure 125:
7.5.7.10
Measurement
Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further
process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks.
The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED and
built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
Locally by means of the local HMI

Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report function
Zero point clamping

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise
in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a setting (XZeroDb
where X equals Z).
Technical manual
303
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in the function block by
means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 126. The monitoring has two
different modes of operating:
Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or Highhigh limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit (XLowLim)
or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 126.
Y
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1
Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
IEC05000657 V2 EN
Figure 126:
Presentation of operating limits
Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: Highhigh limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may be
connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get measurement
supervision as binary signals.
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 126.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between the
operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.
304
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Actual value of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of the
value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following basic
reporting modes are available:
Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

Magnitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)
Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting
(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of magnitude or
integral dead-band reporting.
In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y4
Y1
Y5
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt
t (*)
Value 5
Value 4
t (*)
Value 3
t (*)
Value 2
Value 1
t (*)
IEC05000500 V2 EN
Figure 127:
Periodic reporting
Technical manual
305
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Magnitude dead-band supervision

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is
larger than the Y pre-defined limits that are set by user (UDbRepIn), then the measuring
channel reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the information flow to a
minimum necessary. Figure 128 shows an example with the magnitude dead-band
supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are
evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
Value Reported
Y
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y1
Value Reported
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
t
IEC99000529 V2 EN
Figure 128:
Magnitude dead-band supervision reporting
After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set around
it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than defined by
the Y set limits.
Integral dead-band reporting
The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set limit
(XDbRepInt), figure 129, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band
supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
306
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 129 serves as a basic value for further measurement.
A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly measured value and is
multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The absolute values of these integral
values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded. This occurs with the value Y2 that is
reported and set as a new base for the following measurements (as well as for the values
Y3, Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods.
A1 >=
pre-set value
Y
A >=
pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value
Y3
Y2
Value Reported
(1st)
A1
Value
Reported
A2
Value
Reported
Y4
A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
A4
A3
Value
Reported
Y1
A5
A6
A7
Y5
Value
Reported
t
IEC99000530 V2 EN
Figure 129:
Reporting with integral dead-band supervision
Measurement ZMMXU
The magnitude and angle of the impedance for each phase are available on the outputs
(ZLxMAG and ZLxANGL (x=1,2,3)). Each analogue output has a corresponding
supervision level output (ZLxRANG, ZLxANGR). The supervision output signal is an
integer in the interval 0-4, see section Measurement supervision.
Impedance measurement is calculated based on VA / IA , VB / IB , VC / IC , where VX and
IX are phase-to-ground voltage and phase-to-ground current.

When the operating current is too low, the impedance measurement can be erroneous. In
order to avoid such error, minimum operating current will be checked. For phase currents
Technical manual
307
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
lower than 3% of IBase, the magnitude of impedance is force to 9999999 and the angle is
forced to 0 degree.
Inside the function, to ensure the readability of the output for the users, ZLxMAG and
ZLxANGL (x=1,2,3) will not change more often than a certain time period, for example,
every 100 ms.
7.5.8
Technical data
Table 120:
ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS (21) technical data
Function
7.6
308
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
3 selectable
directions, 3 fixed
directions
Minimum operate current, phaseto-phase and phase-to-ground
(5-6000)% of IBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Positive sequence reactance

reach, phase-to-ground and
phase-to-phase loop
(0.01 - 3000.00) ohm/

phase
Positive sequence resistance

reach, phase-to-ground and
phase-to-phase loop
(0.00 - 1000.00) ohm/

phase
(0.01 - 9000.00) ohm/p
Zero sequence resistive reach
(0.00 - 3000.00) ohm/p
Fault resistance reach, phase-toground and phase-to-phase
(0.01 -9000.00) ohm/l
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at 85 degrees
measured with CVTs
and 0.5 < SIR < 30
Definite time delay to trip, phaseto-ground and phase-to-phase

operation
(0.000-60.000) s
2.0% or 35 ms whichever is greater
Operate time
16 ms typically
IEC 60255-121
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Reset ratio
105% typically
2.0% of static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Angle: At 0 degrees and 85 degrees
High speed distance protection for series compensated

lines ZMFCPDIS (21)
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.6.1
Identification
High speed distance protection zone
(zone 1-6)
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
ZMFCPDIS
S00346 V1 EN
7.6.2
Functionality
High speed distance protection (ZMFCPDIS, 21) provides sub-cycle, down towards halfcycle, operate time for basic faults within 60% of the line length and up to around SIR 5.
At the same time, it is specifically designed for extra care during difficult conditions in
high voltage transmission networks, like faults on long heavily loaded lines and faults
generating heavily distorted signals. These faults are handled with utmost security and
dependability, although sometimes with reduced operating speed.
High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS is fundamentally the same function as
ZMFPDIS but provides more flexibility in zone settings to suit more complex
applications, such as series compensated lines. In operation for series compensated
networks, the parameters of the directional function are altered to handle voltage reversal.
The ZMFCPDIS function is a six-zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for
phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-ground faults for each of the
independent zones, which makes the function suitable in applications with single-phase
autoreclosing.
In each measurement zone, ZMFCPDIS function is designed with the flexibility to operate
in either quadrilateral or mho characteristic mode for separate phase-to-earth or phase-tophase loops.
The zones can operate independently of each other. Zones 3 to 5 in directional (forward
or reverse) or non-directional mode. Zone1 and zone2 are designed to measure in forward
direction only, while one zone (ZRV) is designed to measure in the reverse direction. This
makes them suitable, together with a communication scheme, for protection of power
lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal
lines, and so on.
A new built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of the
distance zones in the load exporting end during phase-to-ground faults on heavily loaded
power lines. It also reduces underreach in the importing end.
Technical manual
309
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The ZMFCPDIS function block incorporates a phase-selection element and a directional

element, contrary to previous designs in the IED series, where these elements were
represented with separate function blocks.
The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change criteria,
with significant increased dependability. Naturally, there is also a part operating with
continuous criteria that operates in parallel
The directional element utilizes a set of well-established quantities to provide fast and
correct directional evaluation during various conditions, including close-in three-phase
faults, simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-sequence in-feed.
310
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.6.3
Function block
ZMFCPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKZ1
BLKZ2
BLKZ3
BLKZ4
BLKZ5
BLKZRV
BLKTRZ1
BLKTRZ2
BLKTRZ3
BLKTRZ4
BLKTRZ5
BLKTRZRV
TRIP
TRZ1
TR_A_Z1
TR_B_Z1
TR_C_Z1
TRZ2
TR_A_Z2
TR_B_Z2
TR_C_Z2
TRZ3
TRZ4
TRZ5
TRZRV
BFI_3P
PU_Z1
PU_ND_Z1
PU_Z2
PU_A_Z2
PU_B_Z2
PU_C_Z2
PU_ND_Z2
PU_Z3
PU_ND_Z3
PU_Z4
PU_ND_Z4
PU_Z5
STND_Z5
PU_ZRV
PU_A_RV
PU_B_RV
PU_C_RV
STNDRV
PHPUN D
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NDIR_C
FWD_A
FWD_B
FWD_C
FWD_G
REV_A
REV_B
REV_C
REV_G
FWD_1PH
FWD_2PH
FWD_3PH
PHG_FLT
PHPH_FLT
ANSI11000422 V2 EN
Figure 130:
ZMFCPDIS (40) function block
Technical manual
311
Section 7
7.6.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 121:
Name
ZMFCPDIS (21) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
LOVBZ
BOOLEAN
BLKZ1
BOOLEAN
BLKZ2
BOOLEAN
BLKZ3
BOOLEAN
BLKZ4
BOOLEAN
BLKZ5
BOOLEAN
BLKZRV
BOOLEAN
Blocks and resets reverse zone timers and outputs
BLKTRZ1
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ2
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ3
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ4
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ5
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZRV
BOOLEAN
Blocks and resets reverse zone timers and trip outputs
Table 122:
Name
ZMFCPDIS (21) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip in any phase or phases from any zone or zones
TRZ1
BOOLEAN

direction
TR_A_Z1
BOOLEAN
Trip in phase A from zone 1 foward direction
TR_B_Z1
BOOLEAN
TR_C_Z1
BOOLEAN
TRZ2
BOOLEAN

direction
TR_A_Z2
BOOLEAN
Trip in phase A from a zone 2 forward direction
TR_B_Z2
BOOLEAN
TR_C_Z2
BOOLEAN
TRZ3
BOOLEAN
TRZ4
BOOLEAN
312
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Description
TRZ5
BOOLEAN
TRZRV
BOOLEAN
Trip in any phase or phases from zone RV - reverse dir.
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
Pickup in any phase or phases from any zone or zones
PU_Z1
BOOLEAN

forward direction
PU_ND_Z1
BOOLEAN
Pick up any phase or phases from zone 1 - any direction
PU_Z2
BOOLEAN

forward direction
PU_A_Z2
BOOLEAN
Pick up of phase A for a zone 2 fault in forward direction
PU_B_Z2
BOOLEAN
Pick up for phase B fault in forward direction
PU_C_Z2
BOOLEAN
Pick up in phase C for a zone 2 fault in the forward

direction
PU_ND_Z2
BOOLEAN
Pick uo in any phase or phases for a zone 2 fault in any

direction
PU_Z3
BOOLEAN

forward direction
PU_ND_Z3
BOOLEAN
Pick up any phase or phases from zone 3- any direction
PU_Z4
BOOLEAN
Pick up in any pjase or phases for a zone 4 fault - zone

direction
PU_ND_Z4
BOOLEAN
Pick up any phase or phases from zone -4 any direction
PU_Z5
BOOLEAN
Pick up in any phase or phase for Zone 5 - Zone

direction
STND_Z5
BOOLEAN
Pick up in any phase or phases from a zone 5 fault in any

direction
PU_ZRV
BOOLEAN
Pick up in any phase or phase for a reverse fault
PU_A_RV
BOOLEAN
Pick up for a phase A reverse fault
PU_B_RV
BOOLEAN
Pick up for a phase B revers fault
PU_C_RV
BOOLEAN
Pick up for a phase C reverse fault
STNDRV
BOOLEAN
Pick up for a reverse zone for a fauult in nay direction
PHPUND
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in any phase or phases - any direction
NDIR_A
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phase A - any direction
NDIR_B
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phase B - any direction
NDIR_C
BOOLEAN
Fault detected in phase C - any direction
FWD_A
BOOLEAN
FWD_B
BOOLEAN
FWD_C
BOOLEAN
FWD_G
BOOLEAN
forward fault involving ground
REV_A
BOOLEAN
REV_B
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
313
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
7.6.5
Table 123:
Name
Type
Description
REV_C
BOOLEAN
REV_G
BOOLEAN
Fault in reverse direction involving ground
FWD_1PH
BOOLEAN
Single-phase fault detected - forward direction
FWD_2PH
BOOLEAN
Two-phase fault detected - forward direction
FWD_3PH
BOOLEAN
Three-phase fault detected - forward direction
PHG_FLT
BOOLEAN
Ph-G zone measurement enabled - any direction
PHPH_FLT
BOOLEAN
Ph-Ph zone measurement enabled - any direction
Settings
ZMFCPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OperationSC
NoSeriesComp
SeriesComp
NoSeriesComp
Selection of series compensation operation

Off / On
RLdFwd
0.01 - 5000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
60.00

area - forward
RLdRvFactor
1 - 1000
%RLdF
w
100
Resistance factor determining the load

impedance area - reverse
XLd
0.01 - 10000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
400.00

area - forward
LdAngle
5 - 70
Deg
30
Angle determining the load impedance area
CVTType
Any
Passive type
None (Magnetic)
Passive type
CVT selection determining the filtering of the

function
OpModePPZ1
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-Ph loops, zone 1
OpModePGZ1
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-G loops, zone 1
X1FwPPZ1
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1,

forward dir.
R1FwPPZ1
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1,

forward dir.
X1RvPPZ1
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 1, reverse

direction
X1FwPGZ1
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-G, zone 1,

forward dir.
314
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Step
Default
R1FwPGZ1
Values (Range)
0.00 - 1000.00
Unit
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
Description
Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-G, zone 1,
forward dir.
X0FwPGZ1
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
100.00
Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-G, zone 1,

forward direction
R0FwPGZ1
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-G, zone 1,

forward direction
X1RvPgZ1
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
30.00
Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-G, zone 1, reverse

direction
RFPPZ1
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFPGZ1
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
tPPZ1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tPGZ1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay to trip, Ground-Earth, zone 1
IMinOpPPZ1
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ1
5 - 6000
%IB
10
minimum operate phase current for phaseground loops. zone 1
OpModePPZ2
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-Ph loops, zone 2
OpModePGZ2
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-G loops, zone 2
X1FwPPZ2
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00

forward dir.
R1FwPPZ2
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00

forward dir.
X1RvPPZ2
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 2, reverse

direction
X1FwPGZ2
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00

forward dir.
R1FwPGZ2
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00

forward dir.
X0FwPGZ2
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-G, zone 2,

forward direction
R0FwPGZ2
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-G, zone 2,

forward direction
X1RvPGZ2
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-G, zone 2, reverse

direction
RFPPZ2
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFPGZ2
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-g, Zone 2
tPPZ2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
tPGZ2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400

Technical manual
315
Section 7
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IMinOpPPZ2
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ2
5 - 6000
%IB
10
Minimum operate phase current for phase ground loops, zone 2
OpModePPZ3
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-Ph loops, zone 3
OpModePGZ3
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-G loops, zone 3
DirModeZ3
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward
X1FwPPZ3
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00

zone direction
R1FwPPZ3
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00

zone direction
RFFwPPZ3
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00

zone direction
X1RvPPZ3
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-Ph, zone 3, opposite

to zone dir
RFRvPPZ3
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00

zone direction
X1FwPGZ3
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00

zone direction
R1FwPGZ3
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00

zone direction
X0FwPGZ3
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-G, zone 3, zone

direction
R0FwPGZ3
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-G, zone 3, zone

direction
RFFwPGZ3
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, zone 3, zone

direction
X1RvPGZ3
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-G, zone 3, opposite

to zone dir
RFRvPGZ3
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, zone 3, opposite

to zone dir.
tPPZ3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
tPGZ3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
IMinOpPPZ3
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ3
5 - 6000
%IB
10
316
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OpModePPZ4
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-Ph loops, zone 4
OpModePGZ4
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-G loops, zone 4
DirModeZ4
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward

X1FwPPZ4
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00

zone direction
R1FwPPZ4
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00

zone direction
RFFwPPZ4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4, zone

direction
X1RvPPZ4
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00

to zone dir
RFRvPPZ4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 4,

opposite to zone dir.
X1FwPGZ4
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00

zone direction
R1FwPGZ4
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00

zone direction
X0FwPGZ4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00

direction
R0FwPGZ4
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00

direction
RFFwPGZ4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00

direction
X1RvPGZ4
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00

to zone dir
RFRvPGZ4
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00

to zone dir.
tPPZ4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
tPGZ4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
IMinOpPPZ4
10 - 6000
%IB
10

for zone 4
IMinOpPGZ4
5 - 6000
%IB
10
OpModePPZ5
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-Ph loops, zone 5
Technical manual
317
Section 7
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OpModePGZ5
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-G loops, zone 5
DirModeZ5
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Forward

X1FwPPZ5
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00

zone direction
R1FwPPZ5
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00

zone direction
RFFwPPZ5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5, zone

direction
X1RvPPZ5
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00

to zone dir
RFRvPPZ5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone 5,

opposite to zone dir.
X1FwPGZ5
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00

zone direction
R1FwPGZ5
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00

zone direction
X0FwPGZ5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00

direction
R0FwPGZ5
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00

direction
RFFwPGZ5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00

direction
X1RvPGZ5
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00

to zone dir
RFRvPGZ5
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00

to zone dir.
tPPZ5
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.600
tPGZ5
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.600
IMinOpPPZ5
10 - 6000
%IB
10
IMinOpPGZ5
5 - 6000
%IB
10
OpModePPZRV
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-Ph loops, zone RV
OpModePGZRV
Disabled
Quadrilateral
Mho
MhoOffset
Quadrilateral

Ph-G loops, zone RV
318
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Step
Default
X1FwPPZRV
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
Positive seq. reactance reach, Ph-Ph, zone

RV, reverse dir.
R1FwPPZRV
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV,

reverse dir.
X1RvPPZRV
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
Pos. seq. react, reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV,

forward direction
X1FwPGZRV
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
Pos. seq. react, reach, Ph-G, zone RV, reverse

direction
R1FwPGZRV
0.00 - 1000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5.00
Positive seq. resistive reach, Ph-G, zone RV,

reverse dir.
X0FwPGZRV
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
120.00
Zero seq. reactance reach, Ph-G, zone RV,

reverse direction
R0FwPGZRV
0.00 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
15.00
Zero seq. resistive reach, Ph-G, zone RV,

reverse direction
X1RvPGZRV
0.01 - 3000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
40.00
Pos. seq. react. reach, Ph-G, zone RV, forward

direction
tPPZRV
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay to trip, Phase-Phase, zone RV
tPEZRV
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay to trip, Phase -Ground, zone RV
IMinOpPPZRV
10 - 6000
%IB
10
Minimum operate ph-ph current for PhasePhase loops, zone RV
IMinOpPGZRV
5 - 6000
%IB
10
Minimum operate phase current for phaseground loops, zone RV
RFPPZRV
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
30.00
Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, zone RV
RFPGZRV
0.01 - 9000.00
Ohm/l
0.01
100.00
Fault resistance reach Ph-G. zone RV
Step
Default
Table 124:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
ZMFCPDIS (21) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Description
ZoneLinkPU
Phase Selection
1st starting zone
Phase Selection
Select. of start source for all ZoneLinked trip

delay timers
3I0Enable_PG
5 - 400
%MaxIP
h
400
3I0 limit for releasing Phase-to-Ground

measuring loops
TimerModeZ1
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
On/Off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-G trip output,

zone 1
TimerLinksZ1
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
no links
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)

for zone 1
TimerModeZ2
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH

zone 2
Technical manual
319
Section 7
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TimerLinksZ2
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
no links
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)

for zone 2
TimerModeZ3
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH

Zone 3
TimerLinksZ3
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
no links
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)

for zone 3
TimerLinksZ4
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
On/off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-G trip output

Zone 4
TimerLinksZ4
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
no links
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)

for zone 4
TimerModeZ5
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH

zone 5
TimerLinksZ5
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
no links
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)

for zone 5
TimerModeZRV
Disable all
Enable Ph-G
Enable PhPh
Enable Ph-G PhPH
Enable Ph-G
PhPH
On/off setting for Ph-Ph and Ph-G trip outout,

zone RV
TimerLinksZRV
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)
LoopLink &
ZoneLink
no links
LoopLink (tPP &

tPG)

for zone RV
320
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 125:
Name
ZMFCPDIS (21) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
ZDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
ZMax
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
1500.0
Maximum value in ohm
ZRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
ZAngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
Table 126:
Name
ZMFCPDIS (21) Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ZZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
100
Zero point clamping
ZHiHiLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
1350.0
High High limit in ohm
ZHiLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
1200.0
High limit in ohm
ZLowLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
300.0
Low limit in ohm
ZLowLowLim
0.0 - 5000.0
Ohm
0.1
150.0
Low Low limit in ohm
ZMin
0.000 - 5000.000
Ohm
0.001
0.005
Minimum value in ohm
ZLimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
ArgLdMinEd2
5 - 70
Deg
Minimum settable angle determining the load

ArgLdMaxEd2
5 - 70
Deg
70
Maximum settable angle determining the load

RLdFwMinEd2
0.01 - 5000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
0.01
Minimum settable resistance determining the

RLdFwMaxEd2
0.01 - 5000.00
Ohm/p
0.01
5000.00
Maximum settable resistance determining the

Technical manual
321
Section 7
7.6.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Monitored data
Table 127:
Name
322
ZMFCPDIS (21) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
A_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
B_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
C_Dir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
ABDir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in loop AB
BCDIR
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in looop BC
CADir
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction in loop CA
Aph_R
REAL
Ohm
Aph_X
REAL
Ohm
Bph_R
REAL
Ohm
Bph_X
REAL
Ohm
Cph_R
REAL
Ohm
Cph_X
REAL
Ohm
ZAIMAG
REAL
Ohm
ZA Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZAANGIM
REAL
deg
ZA Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZBIMAG
REAL
Ohm
ZB Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZBANGIM
REAL
deg
ZB Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZCIMAG
REAL
Ohm
ZC Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
ZCANGIM
REAL
deg
ZC Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.6.7
Operation principle
Settings, input and output names are sometimes mentioned in the following text without
its zone suffix (i.e. BLKZx instead of BLKZ3) when the description is equally valid for
all zones.
7.6.7.1
Filtering
Practically all voltage, current and impedance quantities used within the ZMFCPDIS
function are derived from fundamental frequency phasors filtered by a half-cycle filter.
The phasor filter is frequency adaptive in the sense that its coefficients are changed based
on the estimated power system frequency.
A half-cycle filter will not be able to reject both even and odd harmonics. So, while odd
harmonics will be completely attenuated, accuracy will be affected by even harmonics.
Even harmonics will not cause the distance zones to overreach; instead there will be a
slightly variable underreach, on average in the same order as the magnitude ratio between
the harmonic and the fundamental component.
7.6.7.2
Distance measuring zones

means that ground fault loop for phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-phase faults for
Figure 108 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the six distance zones.
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 1
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 2
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 3
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 4
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 5
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 6
ANSI05000458 V2 EN
Figure 131:
The different measuring loops at phase-to-ground fault and phase-tophase fault
schemes which mostly uses a pickup of an overreaching element to select correct voltages
Technical manual
323
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection function with six measuring elements.
Transients from CVTs may have a significant impact on the transient overreach of a
distance protection. At the same time these transients can be very diverse in nature from
one type to the other; in fact, more diverse than can be distinguished by the algorithm itself
in the course of a few milliseconds. So, a setting is introduced in order to inform the
algorithm about the type of CVT applied and thus providing the advantage of knowing
how performance should be optimized, even during the first turbulent milliseconds of the
fault period.
There are two types of CVTs from the function point of view, the passive and the active
type, which refers to the type of ferro-resonance suppression device that is employed. The
active type requires more rigorous filtering which will have a negative impact on operate
times. However, this will be evident primarily at higher source impedance ratios (SIRs),
SIR 5 and above, or close to the reach limit.
The IEC 60044-5 transient classification is of little or no use in relation to this. It is not
primarily the damping of transients that is important; it is the frequency content of the
transients that is decisive, i.e. how difficult it is to filter out the specific frequency. So,
even if two CVTs, one passive and the other active type, comply with the same transient
class, the active type requires more extensive filtering in order to avoid transient
overreach.
To avoid overreach and at the same time achieve fast operate times, a supplementary
circular characteristic that includes some alternative processing (retained from REL 531)
is implemented. One such circular characteristic exists for every measuring loop and
quadrilateral/mho characteristic. There are no specific reach settings for this circular zone.
It uses the normal quadrilateral/mho zone settings to determine a reach that will be
appropriate. This implies that the circular characteristic will always have somewhat
shorter reach than the quadrilateral/mho zone.
7.6.7.3
Phase-selection element
The operation of the phase-selection element is primarily based on current change criteria.
The current change criteria itself can however only be relied on for a short period
following the fault inception (during what we will call the current change phase).
Subsequent switching in the network may render the change in current invalid. So,
naturally, the phase-selection element also operates on continuous criteria.
The phase-selection element can, owing to the current change criteria, distinguish faults
with minimum influence from load and fault impedance. In other words, it is not restricted
by a load encroachment characteristic during the current change phase. This significantly
improves performance for remote phase-to-ground faults on heavily loaded lines. One
324
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
exception, however, is three-phase faults, for which the load encroachment characteristic
always has to be applied, in order to distinguish fault from load.
The continuous criteria will in the vast majority of cases operate in parallel and carry on
the fault indication after the current change phase has ended. Only in some particularly
difficult faults on heavily loaded lines the continuous criteria might not be sufficient, for
example, when the estimated fault impedance resides within the load area defined by the
load encroachment characteristic. In this case, the indication will be restricted to a pulse
lasting for one or two power system cycles.
Phase-to-phase-ground faults (also called double ground faults) will practically always
activate phase-to-phase zone measurements. This is a substantial difference compared to
the previous phase selection function in the 500- and 600-series (that is, FDPSPDIS).
Measurement in two phase-to-ground loops at the same time is associated with so-called
simultaneous faults: two ground faults at the same time, one each on the two circuits of a
double line, or when the zero sequence current is relatively high due to a source with low
Z0/Z1 ratio.In fact, in these situations zone measurement will be released both for the
related phase-to-ground loops and the phase-to-phase loop simultaneously. On the other
hand, simultaneous faults closer to the remote bus will gradually take on the properties of
a phase-to-phase-ground fault and the function will eventually use phase-to-phase zone
measurements also here.
In cases where the fault current infeed is more or less completely lack of zero sequence
nature (all phase currents in phase), the measurement will be performed in the phase-toground loops only for a phase-to-phase-ground fault.
However, should it be desirable to use phase-to-ground (and only phase-to-ground) zone
measurement for phase-to-phase-ground faults, the setting INReleasePE can be lowered
from its excessive default value to the level above which phase-to-ground measurement
should be activated.
7.6.7.4
Directional element
Several criteria are employed when making the directional decision. The basis is provided
by comparing a positive sequence based polarizing voltage with phase currents. For extra
security, especially in making a very fast decision, this method is complemented with an
equivalent comparison where, instead of the phase current, the change in phase current is
used. Moreover, a basic negative sequence directional evaluation is taken into account as
a reliable reference during high load condition. Finally, zero sequence directional
evaluation is used whenever there is more or less exclusive zero sequence in-feed.
Fundamentally, the directional sectors that represent forward direction, one per measuring
loop, are defined by the following equations.
Technical manual
325
Section 7
-15<arg
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PolA
< 120
(Equation 75)
-15<arg
PolAB
< 120
AB
(Equation 76)
Where:
VPolA
is the polarizing voltage for phase A.
IA
is the phase current in phase A.
VPolAB
is the polarizing voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A).
IAB
is the current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A).
The corresponding reverse directional sectors range from 165 to -60 degrees.
Since the polarizing voltage is also used for the Mho distance characteristics, the
magnitude of the voltage is just as interesting as the phase. If there are symmetrical
conditions and the measured per phase positive sequence voltage magnitude is above 75%
of the base voltage before the fault, the pre-fault magnitude will be memorized and used
as long as there is a fault. The phase angle however will only be memorized (locked) for
75 ms at a time, not to lose synchronism with the real system voltage.
Should the positive sequence voltage drop below 2% of the base voltage, it will be
considered invalid. In this situation, directional signals and pickups from Mho elements
will be sealed-in and kept static as long as there is a fault.
For ZMFCPDIS, when option SeriesComp is chosen for OperationSC, the voltages of
faulty phases will be discarded in order not to affect the polarizing voltage with voltage
reversal.
7.6.7.5
Fuse failure
The ZMFCPDIS function has to be blocked by an additional function like the Fuse failure
supervision (FUFSPVC) or an equivalent external device. Typically, the binary input
VTSZ is used for this purpose.
However, to guarantee that also very fast operation is blocked in a fuse failure situation,
there is a built-in supervision based on change in current that will delay operation before
the FUFSPVC blocking signal is received. The delay will be introduced if no (vector)
magnitude change greater than 5% of IBase has been detected in any of the phase currents.
326
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.6.7.6
Power swings
There is need for external blocking of the ZMFCPDIS function during power swings,
either from the Power Swing Blocking function (ZMRPSB) or an external device.
7.6.7.7
Measurement principles
Quadrilateral characteristic
ZMFCPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones
separately. Set OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx to Quadrilateral, to choose particular
measuring loop in a zone to work as quadrilateral distance protection.
All ZMFCPDIS zones operate according to the non-directional impedance characteristics
presented in figure 132 and figure 133. The phase-to-ground characteristic is illustrated
with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic presents the per-phase
reach.
Technical manual
327
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
X (Ohm/loop)
R1PG+RNFw
RFRvPG
RFFwPG
X 0 PG X 1FwPG
3
PG
1RVPGX 1RvPG
XX00PE
X 1XRVPE
XNRV
XNRv
= XNFw
XNRV
==
3
3
X 1FwPG
XNFw =
XX0 PE
X1X
FWPE
0 PG
1FWPG
XNFW
XNFW==
3 3
X1FwPG+XNFw
RNFw =
R0 PG R1PG
3
R (Ohm/loop)
RFRvPG
RFFwPG
X1RvPG+XNRv
N
RFRvPG
RFFwPG
R1PG+RNRv
ANSI11000417 V1 EN
Figure 132:
328
ZMFCPDIS Characteristic for phase-to-ground measuring loops, ohm/

loop domain
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
RFRvPP
(Ohm/phase)
R1PP
RFFwPP
X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
XX00PE
PE
11FWPE
X
X-1X
0
PG
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
XNFW
XNFW===
3
3 3
X1FwPP
j
jN
RFRvPP
RFFwPP
j
R (Ohm/phase)
X1RvPP
jN
RFRvPP
RFFwPP
IEC11000418 V1 EN
Figure 133:
ZMFCPDIS Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops
Note that for ZMFCPDIS, the reverse zone ZRV, as well as any of zones
3-5, that are set to DirMode=Reverse will get their operating impedances
inverted (rotated 180 degrees) internally in order to make use of the main
settings, which are the settings designated Fw. Therefore, a reverse zone
will have its Fw-settings (RFFwPPZRV, X1FwPGZ3, and so on) applied
in the third quadrant, that is, towards the busbar instead of the line.
The fault loop reach in relation to each fault type may also be presented as in figure 111.
The main intension with this illustration is to make clear how the fault resistive reach
should be interpreted. Note in particular that the setting RFPP always represents the total
fault resistance of the loop, even while the fault resistance (arc) may be divided into parts
like for three-phase or phase-to-phase-to-ground faults. The R1 and jX1 represent the
positive sequence impedance from the measuring point to the fault location.
Figure 134:
Fault loop model
Technical manual
329
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IA
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-ground
element
VA
Phase-to-ground
fault in phase A
RFPG
(Arc + tower
resistance)
N
IG
(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IA
R1 + j X1
Phase-to-phase
element A-B
VA
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase
A-B
RFPP
IB
(Arc resistance)
VB
R1 + j X1
IA
Three-phase
fault or Phase-tophase-ground fault
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
R1 + j X1
0.5RFPP
VA
Phase-to-phase
element A-C
IC
VC
Mho characteristic
ZMFCPDIS implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the six zones
separately. Set OpModePEZx or OpModePPZx setting to Mho or Offset, to choose a
particular measuring loop in a zone to work as mho (or Offset Mho) distance protection.
Zones 3 to 5 can be selected to be either forward or reverse with positive sequence
polarized mho characteristic; alternatively self polarized offset mho characteristics. The
operating characteristic is in accordance to figure 65 where zone 5 is selected offset mho.
330
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
X
Z4
Z3
ZS=0
Z2
Z1
Z5
R
R
ZS=Z1
ZRV
ZS=2Z1
IEC15000056 V1 EN
Figure 135:
Mho, offset mho characteristics and the source impedance influence on

the mho characteristic
The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance. Instead of
crossing the origin, as for the mho to the left of figure 65, which is only valid where the
source impedance (Zs) is zero, the crossing point is moved to the coordinates of the
negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle shown to the right of figure
65. Z1 denotes the complex positive sequence impedance.
The magnitude of the polarized voltage is determined completely by the positive sequence
voltage magnitude from before the fault. This will give a somewhat less dynamic
expansion of the mho circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is high, the
dynamic expansion of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too much
with high loading and mild power swing conditions.
In ZMFPDIS, each zone measurement loop characteristic can be set to mho characteristic
or offset mho characteristic by setting zxOpModePE or zxOpModePP (where x is 1-5
depending on selected zone).
ZMFPDIS fixes zone 1 and 2 in Forward mode and zone RV in Reverse mode. Zone 3-5
can be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter DirModeZx
(where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone).
If DirModeZx (where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone) is selected as Non-directional,
the directional element will not have any effect on the measurement loop and operation of
the function. When DirModeZx (where x is 3-5 depending on selected zone) is selected as
Forward or Reverse, directional lines are introduced. Information about the directional
Technical manual
331
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
lines is given from the directional element. Basic Mho characteristics with different mode
settings are indicated in figure 136.
OpModePP/PEZx = Mho
Zone 1, Zone 2 and
OpModePP/PEZx = Mho
Zone RV and
Zone 1, Zone 2 and
OpModePP/PEZx = Mho
Only Zone 3-5
X
Zone RV and
Only Zone 3-5
IEC15000065.vsdx
IEC15000065 V1 EN
Figure 136:
Mho characteristics
For each zone, the impedance is set in cartesian coordinates (resistance and reactance)
which is the same as for quadrilateral characteristic.
ZMFCPDIS function uses separate sets of reach settings in forward and reverse directions
for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault. These settings are R1FwPPZx,
X1FwPPZx, X1RvPPZx, R1FwPEZx, X1FwPEZx, X1RvPEZx, R0FWPEZx, X0FwPPZx
(x=1-5 or RV). Thus, the center of the Non-directional offset mho circle can be arbitrary
located in the circle (figure 136).
332
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Note that the reverse ZoneRV, as well as any of zones 3-5, that are set to
DirModeZx=Reverse will get their operating impedances inverted (rotated 180 degrees)
internally in order to make use of the main settings, which are the settings designated Fw.
Therefore, a reverse zone will have its Fw-settings (R1FwPPZRV, X1FwPEZ3, and so on)
applied in the third quadrant, that is, towards the busbar instead of the line.
In Non-directional mode, for both Mho and Quad, the reach settings are equal to Forward
mode in this respect. The Fw settings apply in the first quadrant and the Rv settings
apply in the third quadrant.
Theory of operation
The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as in figure 66. The condition for deriving the
( )
b = arg VAB - I AB Z 1set - arg V pol

(Equation 77)
where
V AB
I AB
Z 1set
Vpol
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in zone direction
Z 1set = R1FwPPZx + j X 1FwPPZx

(Equation 78)
where
R1FwPP
Zx
is the positive sequence resistive reach for phase-to-phase fault in zone direction for zone x (x=1-5
and RV)
X1FwPP
Zx
is the positive sequence reactance reach for phase-to-phase fault in zone direction for zone x (x=1-5
and RV)
Technical manual
333
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage (VAB for
phase A to B fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of the mho circle for
close in faults.
I AB jX
I L1L 2 Z1set
Vcomp VAB I AB Z1set
VAB
V pol
I AB R
ANSI15000060 V1 EN
Figure 137:
Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are given by the
two vectors Z 1set and Z 1RVset where Z 1set and Z 1RVset are settable through the
resistance and reactance settings in forward and reverse directions.
compensated voltages is greater than or equal to 90 (figure 115). The angle will be 90
for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for A to B fault can be defined according to equation 67.
334
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
V I Z1
AB
AB
set
= arg
VAB I AB Z 1RVset
(Equation 80)
where
Z 1RVset
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault

opposite to zone direction and is defined as
Z 1RVset = R1RvPPZx + j X 1RvPPZx

(Equation 81)
where
X1RvPPZx
is the positive sequence reactance reach for phase-to-phase fault

opposite to zone direction for zone x (x=1-5 and RV)
R1RvPPZx
is the positive sequence resistive reach for phase-to-phase fault

opposite to zone direction for zone x (x=1-5 and RV) and is internally
calculated according to the equation below,
R1FwPPZx
R1RvPPZx = X 1RvPPZx
X 1FwPPZx
Technical manual
(Equation 82)
335
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
I AB jX
Vcomp1 VAB I AB Z 1set
I AB Z 1set
VAB
Vcomp 2 VAB ( I AB Z 1RVset )
I AB Z 1RVset
I AB R
ANSI15000058 V1 EN
Figure 138:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase A to B

fault
Operation occurs if 90270 .

The measuring of earth faults uses earth return compensation applied in a conventional
way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence from the earth
return path.
Compensation for earth return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the positive
and zero sequence impedance of the line. It is known that the ground compensation factor
KN is,
KN =
Z 0set Z 1set
3 Z 1set
336
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Z 0set = R 0 FwPEZx + j X 0 FwPEZx

Z 1set = R1FwPEZx + j X 1FwPEZx

(Equation 83)
where
Z 0set
Z 1set
R0FwPEZx
is the zero sequence resistive reach of the line in /phase for phaseto-ground fault in zone direction for zone x (x=1-5, or RV)
X0FwPEZx
is the zero sequence reactance reach of the line in /phase for phaseto-ground fault in zone direction for zone x (x=1-5, or RV)
R1FwPEZx
is the positive sequence resistive reach of the line in /phase for

phase-to-ground fault in zone direction for zone x (x=1-5, or RV)
X1FwPEZx
is the positive sequence reactance reach of the line in /phase for

phase-to-ground fault in zone direction for zone x (x=1-5, or RV)
For an earth fault in phase A, the angle between the compensation voltage and the
polarizing voltage Vpol is,
= arg [VA ( I A + 3I 0 K N ) Z 1set ] arg(V pol )

(Equation 84)
where
VA
IA

3I0
is the zero-sequence current in faulty phase A
Z 1set

phase-to-ground fault in zone direction
Vpol
is the polarizing voltage in phase A
Technical manual
337
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IAjX
Vcomp VA ( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1set
3I 0 K N Z1set
VA
I A Z1set
V pol
IAR
ANSI15000059 V1 EN
Figure 139:

Offset mho
The condition for operation of offset mho at phase-to-earth fault is that the angle
between the two compensated voltages is equal to or greater than 90, see figure 71. The
= arg VA ( I A + 3I 0 K N ) Z 1set arg VA ( I A + 3I 0 K N Z 1RVset ]
(Equation 85)
where
Z 1RVset
338

phase-to-ground fault opposite to zone direction and is defined as,
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Z 1RVset = R1RvPEZx + j X 1RvPEZx

(Equation 86)
where
X1RvPEZx
is the positive sequence reactance reach for phase-to-ground fault

opposite to zone direction for zone x (x=1-5 and RV)
R1RvPEZx
is the positive sequence resistive reach for phase-to-ground fault

opposite to zone direction for zone x (x=1-5 and RV) and expressed
by,
R1FwPEZx
R1RvPEZx = X 1RvPEZx
X 1FwPEZx
(Equation 87)
IA jX
Vcomp1 VA ( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1set
( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1set
VA
Vcomp 2 VA ( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1RVset )
( I A 3I 0 K N ) Z1RVset
IA R
ANSI15000057 V1 EN
Figure 140:

Technical manual
339
Section 7
7.6.7.8
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Load encroachment
In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on
the protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when
an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line.
The effect of load encroachment is illustrated in the left part of figure 141. The entrance
of the load impedance inside the characteristic is not allowed and the previous way of
handling this was to consider it with the settings, that is, with a security margin between
the distance zone and the minimum load impedance. This has the drawback that it will
reduce the sensitivity of the protection, that is, the ability to detect resistive faults.
The IED has a built-in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right part
of figure 141. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to detect high
fault resistances, especially for phase-to-ground faults at remote line end.For example, for
a given setting of the load angle LdAngle the resistive blinder for the zone measurement
can be expanded according to the right part of the figure 141, given higher fault resistance
coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load encroachment. This is valid in
both directions.
The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines, where
there might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary
sensitivity of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy
loaded medium long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get sufficient fault
resistance coverage. Load encroachment is not a major problem. Nevertheless, always set
RLdFwd, RldRev and LdAngleaccording to the expected maximum load since these
settings are used internally in the function as reference points to improve the performance
of the phase selection.
X
Zm
Zm
ZL
Load impedance area in
forward direction
R
LdAngle
LdAngle
R
LdAngle
LdAngle
RldRev
RLdFwd
ANSI05000495 V2 EN
Figure 141:
340
Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.6.7.9
Simplified logic schemes

PHSA, PHSB,...PHSCA are internal binary logical signals from the Phase-selection
element. They correspond directly to the six loops of the distance zones and determine
which loops should be released to possibly issue a pickup or a trip.
FWA, FWB,...FWCA and RVA, RVB,...RVCA are the internal binary signals from the
Directional element. An FW signal is set true if the criteria for a forward fault or load is
fulfilled for its particular loop. The equivalent applies to the reverse (RV) signals.
The internal input 'IN present' is true if the residual current (3I0) exceeds 7% of IBase.
However, if current transformer saturation is detected, this criterion is changed to residual
voltage (3V0) exceeding 5% of VBase/sqrt(3) instead.
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
OR
PHSA
PHSB
PHG_FLT
PHSC
PHSAB
PHSBC
PHSCA
OR
BLOCK
LOVBZ
PHPH_FLT
OR
OR
PU_ND
PU_PHS
ANSI12000133 V1 EN
Figure 142:
Technical manual
341
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PHSA
FWA
PHSB
FWB
PHSC
FWC
AND
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
FWD_A
AND
PHSAB
FWAB
PHSBC
FWBC
PHSCA
FWCA
AND
AND
FWD_B
FWD_C
AND
OR
IN present
BLOCK
LOVBZ
AND
=1
FWD_G
FWD_1PH
OR
=2
=3
FWD_2PH
FWD_3PH
ANSI12000134 V1 EN
Figure 143:
FWD(n & mn)
DIR(n & mn)Z1
FWD(n & mn)
DIR(n & mn)Z2
REV(n & mn)
DIR(n & mn)ZRV

DirModeZ3-5
TRUE (1)
FWD(n & mn)
REV(n & mn)
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
DIR(n & mn)Z3-5
ANSI12000137 V1 EN
Figure 144:
342
Connection of directional signals to zones
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
TZx
0
15 ms
BLKTRZx
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKZx
TRIPZx
AND
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AZx
BZx
CZx
PPZx
PGZx
OR
NDZx
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
TR_A_Zx
TR_B_Zx
TR_B_Zx
PU_A_Zx
PU_B_Zx
PU_C_Zx
PU_Zx
PU_ND_Zx
ANSI12000138 V1 EN
Figure 145:
Pickup and trip outputs
Technical manual
343
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
TimerModeZx =
Enable Ph-Ph,
Ph-G
AND
PPZx
AND
PGZx
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKZx
BLKTRZx
OR
AND
tPPZx
0
AND
TZx
OR
OR
AND
tPPZx
0
AND
OR
TimerLinksZx
OR
ZoneLinkStart
PUPHS
OR
Phase Selection
1st pickup zone
LNKZ1
LNKZ2
LNKZRV
OR
LNKZ3
LNKZ4
LNKZ5
LoopLink (tPP-tPG)
LoopLink & ZoneLink
no links
FALSE (0)
AND
LNKZx
TimerLinksZx =
LoopLink & ZoneLink
ANSI12000139 V2 EN
Figure 146:
344
Logic for linking of timers
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PHSA
RVA
PHSB
RVB
PHSC
RVC
AND
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
OR
0
15 ms
AND
REV_A
AND
PHSAB
RVAB
PHSBC
RVBC
PHSCA
RVCA
AND
AND
REV_B
REV_C
AND
OR
IN present
BLOCK
LOVBZ
AND
REV_G
OR
ANSI12000141 V1 EN
Figure 147:
Technical manual
345
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PGZx
OR
ZMAZx
PHSA
DIRAZx
ZMBZx
PHSB
DIRBZx
ZMCZx
PHSC
DIRCZx
AND
AND
AND
AND
AZx
OR
AND
AND
ZMABZx
PHSAB
DIRABZx
ZMLBCZx
PHSBC
DIRBCZx
ZMCAZx
PHSCA
DIRCAZx
BZx
OR
AND
AND
OR
AND
CZx
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
PPZx
NDZx
ANSI12000140 V1 EN
Figure 148:
7.6.7.10
Intermediate logic
Measurement
built-in options.
346

Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Zero point clamping

in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a setting (XZeroDb
where X equals Z).
Y
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1
Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
IEC05000657 V2 EN
Figure 149:
Technical manual
347
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A

Cyclic reporting
348
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y4
Y1
Y5
t (*)
Value 5
Value 4
t (*)
Value 3
t (*)
Value 2
Value 1
t (*)
IEC05000500 V2 EN
Figure 150:
Periodic reporting

Technical manual
349
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Value Reported
Y
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y1
Value Reported
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
t
IEC99000529 V2 EN
Figure 151:
the Y set limits.
Y3, Y4 and Y5).
350
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A1 >=
pre-set value
Y
A >=
pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value
Y3
Y2
Value Reported
(1st)
A1
Value
Reported
A2
Value
Reported
Y4
A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
A4
A3
Value
Reported
Y1
A5
A6
A7
Y5
Value
Reported
t
IEC99000530 V2 EN
Figure 152:
Measurement ZMMXU
The magnitude and angle of the impedance for each phase are available on the outputs
(ZLxMAG and ZLxANGL (x=1,2,3)). Each analogue output has a corresponding
supervision level output (ZLxRANG, ZLxANGR). The supervision output signal is an
integer in the interval 0-4, see section Measurement supervision.
Impedance measurement is calculated based on VA / IA , VB / IB , VC / IC , where VX and
IX are phase-to-ground voltage and phase-to-ground current.

When the operating current is too low, the impedance measurement can be erroneous. In
order to avoid such error, minimum operating current will be checked. For phase currents
lower than 3% of IBase, the magnitude of impedance is force to 9999999 and the angle is
forced to 0 degree.
Inside the function, to ensure the readability of the output for the users, ZLxMAG and
ZLxANGL (x=1,2,3) will not change more often than a certain time period, for example,
every 100 ms.
Technical manual
351
Section 7
7.6.8
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 128:
ZMFCPDIS (21) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
3 selectable
directions, 3 fixed
directions
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph

and Ph-E
(5 - 6000)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir
Positive sequence reactance

reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop
(30 - 3000) /phase
Positive sequence resistance

reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop
(30 - 3000) /phase
(100.00 - 9000.00) /p
Zero sequence resistive reach
(15.00 - 3000.00) /p
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E and

Ph-Ph
(1.00 - 9000.00) /l
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at 85 deg
measured with CVT's
and 0.5 < SIR <30
Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E

and Ph-Ph operation
(0.000 - 60.000) s
Operate time
16 ms typically
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach
Min = 20 ms
Max = 35 ms
Reset ratio
105% typically
" +- 2.0% static accuracy +- 2.0 deg static

angular accuracy Conditions: Voltage range:
(0.1 - 1.1) x Ur Current range: (0.5 - 30) x Ir
Angle: At 0 deg and 85 deg"

IEC 60255-121
-
7.7
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM (78)
7.7.1
Identification
7.7.2
IEC 61850
identification
Pole slip protection
PSPPPAM
IEC 60617
identification
Ucos
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
78
Functionality
The phenomenon pole slip, also named out of step conditions, occurs when there is phase
opposition between different parts of a power system. This is often shown in a simplified
352
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
way as two equivalent generators connected to each other via an equivalent transmission
line and the phase difference between the equivalent generators is 180.
Angle = 90
Angle = -90
Centre of Pole Slip

en07000003.vsd
IEC07000003 V1 EN
Figure 153:
The centre of pole slip
The centre of the pole slip can occur in the generator itself or somewhere in the power
system. When a pole slip occurs within the generator it is essential to trip the generator. If
the centre of pole slip occurs outside any generator the power system should be split into
two different parts that could have the ability to get stable operating conditions.
Pole slip protection (PSPPPAM ,78) function in the IED can be used both for generator
protection application as well as, line protection applications.
The situation with pole slip of a generator can be caused by different reasons.
A short circuit may occur in the external power grid, close to the generator. If the fault
clearing time is too long, the generator will accelerate so much, that the synchronism
cannot be maintained.
Undamped oscillations occur in the power system, where generator groups at different
locations, oscillate against each other. If the connection between the generators is too
weak the magnitude of the oscillations will increase until the angular stability is lost.
The operation of a generator having pole slip will give risk of damages to the generator,
shaft and turbine.
Technical manual
353
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
At each pole slip there will be significant torque impact on the generator-turbine
shaft.
In asynchronous operation there will be induction of currents in parts of the generator
normally not carrying current, thus resulting in increased heating. The consequence
can be damages on insulation and stator/rotor iron.
The Pole slip protection (PSPPPAM ,78) function shall detect pole slip conditions and trip
the generator as fast as possible if the locus of the measured impedance is inside the
generator-transformer block. If the centre of pole slip is outside in the power grid, the first
action should be to split the network into two parts, after line protection action. If this fails
there should be operation of the generator PSPPPAM (78) in zone 2, to prevent further
damages to the generator, shaft and turbine.
7.7.3
Function block
PSPPPAM (78)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRIP1
BLOCK
TRIP2
BLKGEN
PICKUP
BLKMOTOR
ZONE1
EXTZONE1
ZONE2
GEN
MOTOR
SFREQ
SLIPZOHM
SLIPZPER
VCOS
VCOSPER
ANSI10000045 V1 EN
Figure 154:
7.7.4
Signals
Table 129:
Name
354
PSPPPAM (78) function block
PSPPPAM (78) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Current group connection
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage group connection
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKGEN
BOOLEAN
Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOTOR
BOOLEAN
Block operation in motor direction
EXTZONE1
BOOLEAN
Extension of zone1 with zone2 region
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 130:
PSPPPAM (78) Output signals
Name
7.7.5
Table 131:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
TRIP1
BOOLEAN
Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1
TRIP2
BOOLEAN
Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Common start signal
ZONE1
BOOLEAN
First slip in zone1 region
ZONE2
BOOLEAN
First slip in zone2 region
GEN
BOOLEAN
Generator is faster than the system
MOTOR
BOOLEAN
Generator is slower than the system
SFREQ
REAL
Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM
REAL
Slip impedance in ohms
SLIPZPER
REAL
Slip impedance in percent of ZBase
VCOS
REAL
UCosPhi voltage
VCOSPER
REAL
VCosPhi voltage in percent of VBase
Settings
PSPPPAM (78) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Enable / Disable
OperationZ1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Enable/Disable zone Z1
OperationZ2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Enable/Disable zone Z2
ImpedanceZA
0.00 - 1000.00
0.01
10.00
Forward impedance in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZB
0.00 - 1000.00
0.01
10.00
Reverse impedance in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZC
0.00 - 1000.00
0.01
10.00
Impedance of zone1 limit in % of Zbase
AnglePhi
72.00 - 90.00
Deg
0.01
85.00
Angle of the slip impedance line
pick up Angle
0.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
110.0
Rotor angle for the pickup signal
TripAngle
0.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
90.0
Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals
N1Limit
1 - 20
Count limit for the trip1 signal
N2Limit
1 - 20
Count limit for the trip2 signal
Table 132:
Name
ResetTime
PSPPPAM (78) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
5.000
Technical manual
Description
Time without slip to reset all signals
355
Section 7
Table 133:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PSPPPAM (78) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MeasureMode
PosSeq
AB
BC
CA
PosSeq
Measuring mode (PosSeq, AB, BC, CA)
InvertCTcurr
No
Yes
No
Invert current direction
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
7.7.6
Monitored data
Table 134:
Name
7.7.7
PSPPPAM (78) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
SFREQ
REAL
Hz
Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM
REAL
Ohm
Slip impedance in ohms
SLIPZPER
REAL
Slip impedance in percent of

ZBase
VCOS
REAL
kV
UCosPhi voltage
VCOSPER
REAL
VCosPhi voltage in percent of

VBase
Operation principle
If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the impedance and
voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signaled. If the generator is slower
than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to right and motoring is signaled
(the power system drives the generator as if it were a motor).
The movements in the impedance plane can be seen in Figure 155. The transient behavior
is described by the transient EMF's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the transient system
impedance ZS.
356
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Zone 1
EB
Zone 2
Xd
XT
XS
IED
EA
jX
A
XS
Pole slip
impedance
movement
XT
Apparent generator
impedance
Xd
B
IEC06000437 V2 EN
Figure 155:
Movements in the impedance plain
where:
X'd
= transient reactance of the generator
XT
= short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer
ZS
= impedance of the power system A
The detection of rotor angle is enabled when:
Technical manual
357
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general
setting).
the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 VBase
the voltage Ucos (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an angular
velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and
the corresponding direction is not blocked.
en07000004.vsd
IEC07000004 V1 EN
Figure 156:
Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the

equivalent generators
An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle exceeds the
angle set for 'WarnAngle'.
Slipping is detected when:
a change of rotor angle of min. 50 ms is recognized

the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB.
When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in zone 1
and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone 1 when signal
EXTZONE1 is high (external device detects the direction of the centre of slipping).
358
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
After the first slip, the signals ZONE1 or ZONE2 and depending on the direction of slip
- either GEN or MOTOR are issued.
Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line is
crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements.
Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of rotor
movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is crossed in the
opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite direction within ZA-ZB
resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip.
The TRIP1 tripping command and signal are generated after N1 slips in zone 1, providing
the rotor angle is less than TripAngle. The TRIP2 signal is generated after N2 slips in zone
2, providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle.
All signals are reset if:
the direction of movement reverses

the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or
no rotor relative movement was detected during the time ResetTime.
Technical manual
359
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Imin > 0.10 IBase
AND
Vcos< 0.92 VBase
PICKUP
AND
0.2 Slip.Freq. 8 Hz
startAngle
ZONE1
AND
Z cross line ZC - ZB
ZONE2
AND
Z cross line ZA - ZC
Counter
a
b
N1Limit
ab
TRIP1
AND
tripAngle
OR
TRIP
Counter
a
ab
b
N2Limit
TRIP2
AND
ANSI07000005.vsd
ANSI07000005 V2 EN
Figure 157:
7.7.8
Simplified logic diagram for pole slip protection PSPPPAM (78)
Technical data
Table 135:
PSPPPAM (78) technical data
Function
360
Range or value
Accuracy
Impedance reach
(0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase
2.0% of Vn/In
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters
(1 - 20)
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.8
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM (78)
7.8.1
Identification
Out-of-step protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
OOSPPAM
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
78
<
7.8.2
Functionality
The out-of-step protection OOSPPAM (78) function in the IED can be used for both
generator protection and as well for line protection applications.
The main purpose of the OOSPPAM (78) function is to detect, evaluate, and take the
required action during pole slipping occurrences in the power system.
The OOSPPAM (78) function detects pole slip conditions and trips the generator as fast
as possible, after the first pole-slip if the center of oscillation is found to be in zone 1,
which normally includes the generator and its step-up power transformer. If the center of
oscillation is found to be further out in the power system, in zone 2, more than one poleslip is usually allowed before the generator-transformer unit is disconnected. A parameter
setting is available to take into account the circuit breaker opening time. If there are several
out-of-step relays in the power system, then the one which finds the center of oscillation
in its zone 1 should operate first.
Two current channels I3P1 and I3P2 are available in OOSPPAM function to allow the
direct connection of two groups of three-phase currents; that may be needed for very
powerful generators, with stator windings split into two groups per phase, when each
group is equipped with current transformers. The protection function performs a simple
summation of the currents of the two channels I3P1 and I3P2.
Technical manual
361
Section 7
7.8.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
OOSPPAM (78)
I3P1*
TRIP
I3P2*
TRIPZ1
V3P*
TRIPZ2
BLOCK
PICKUP
BLKGEN
GENMODE
BLKMOT
MOTMODE
EXTZ1
R
X
SLIPFREQ
ROTORANG
VCOSPHI
ANSI12000188 V2 EN
Figure 158:
7.8.4
OOSPPAM (78) function block
Signals
Table 136:
Name
OOSPPAM (78) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group connection for three-phase current input 1
I3P2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group connection for three-phase current input 2
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group connection for three-phase voltage input
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKGEN
BOOLEAN
Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOT
BOOLEAN
Block operation in motor direction
EXTZ1
BOOLEAN
Extension of zone1 reach to zone2 settings
Table 137:
Name
OOSPPAM (78) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip, issued when either zone 1 or zone 2 trip
TRIPZ1
BOOLEAN
Zone 1 trip
TRIPZ2
BOOLEAN
Zone 2 trip
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Set when measured impedance enters lens

characteristic
GENMODE
BOOLEAN
Generator rotates faster than the system during pole slip
MOTMODE
BOOLEAN
Generator rotates slower than the system during pole

slip
REAL
Real part of measured positive-sequence impedance %

of VBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)

362
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
7.8.5
Table 138:
Name
Type
Description
REAL
Imaginary part of measured positive-seq impedance %

of VBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
SLIPFREQ
REAL
Slip frequency in Hz
ROTORANG
REAL
Rotor angle as estimated by the out-of-step function
VCOSPHI
REAL
Estimated Ucos(Phi) voltage during pole slip, in V
Settings
OOSPPAM (78) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OperationZ1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Zone1 Enable/Disable
ReachZ1
1.00 - 100.00
% ZFw
0.01
50.00
Percentage part of total forward impedance;

defines Z1 reach
OperationZ2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Z2 Enable/Disable
tBreaker
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
0.040
Breaker opening time; use default 0s value if it

is unknown
Table 139:
Name
OOSPPAM (78) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NoOfSlipsZ1
1 - 20
Number of pole-slips in zone 1 required for

zone 1 trip
NoOfSlipsZ2
1 - 60
Number of pole-slips in zone 2 required for

zone 2 trip
tReset
1.000 - 60.000
0.001
6.000
Time without any slip required to completely

reset function
Table 140:
Name
OOSPPAM (78) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
ForwardR
0.00 - 1000.00
%ZB
0.01
1.00
Real part of total forward impedance for Z2, in

% of VBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
ForwardX
0.00 - 1000.00
%ZB
0.01
10.00
Imag. part of total forward impedance for Z2, in

Technical manual
363
Section 7
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Step
Default
ReverseR
0.00 - 1000.00
%ZB
0.01
1.00
Real part of source impedance behind relay, in

ReverseX
0.00 - 1000.00
%ZB
0.01
10.00
Imag. part of source impedance behind relay,

in % of VBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
InvertCTCurr
No
Yes
No
Invert current direction
Table 141:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OOSPPAM (78) Non group settings (advanced)

Step
Default
pick up Angle
90.0 - 130.0
Deg
0.1
110.0
Angle between two rotors to get the pick up

signal, in deg
TripAngle
15.0 - 90.0
Deg
0.1
60.0
Maximum rotor angle to allow trip signals, in

deg
7.8.6
Values (Range)
Description
Monitored data
Table 142:
Name
7.8.7
Unit
OOSPPAM (78) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
CURRENT
REAL
Magnitude of the measured

positive-sequence current, in
A
VOLTAGE
REAL
kV
Magnitude of the measured

positive-sequence voltage, in
V
REAL
Real part of measured

positive-sequence impedance
REAL
Imaginary part of measured

positive-seq impedance % of
VBase/(sqrt(3)*IBase)
SLIPFREQ
REAL
Hz
Slip frequency in Hz
ROTORANG
REAL
deg
Rotor angle as estimated by

the out-of-step function
VCOSPHI
REAL
kV
Estimated Ucos(Phi) voltage

during pole slip, in V
Operation principle
General
Under balanced and stable conditions, a generator operates with a constant rotor angle
(power angle), delivering active electrical power to the power system, which is
364
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
approximately equal to the input mechanical power on the generator axis.The currents and
voltages are constant and stable. An out-of-step condition is characterized by periodic
changes in the rotor angle, that leads to a wild flow of the synchronizing power; so there
are also periodic changes of rotational speed, currents and voltages. When displayed in the
complex impedance plane, these changes are characterized by a cyclic change in the
complex load impedance Z(R, X) as measured at the terminals of the generator, or at the
location of the instrument transformers of a power line connecting two power subsystems.
This is shown in Figure 159.
trajectory
1.5
of Z(R, X)
The 2nd
pole slip
occurred
Imaginary part (X) of Z in Ohms
The 1st
pole slip
occurred
Pre-disturbance
RE
normal load
- - -------- - - Z(R, X)
- - 3 ------ ------ - - Zone 2
--- 2 1 --0
---^ --^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ -^- ^ ^ ^ --^
-Zone 1
------ relay
-R in Ohms
-limit of reach -----lens determined
- - ---- -----0- - pre-disturbance Z(R, X)
- by the setting - - - - -------- - - - - 1 Z(R, X) under 3-phase fault
Pickup Angle = 120 SE
2 Z(R, X) when fault cleared
0.5
-0.5
-1
to the 3rd
pole-slip
X in Ohms
-1.5
-1
-0.5
Z when pole-slip declared
0
0.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
1.5
ANSI10000109 V1 EN
Figure 159:
Loci of the complex impedance Z(R, X) for a typical case of generator

losing step after a short circuit that was not cleared fast enough
Under typical, normal load conditions, when the protected generator supplies the active
and the reactive power to the power system, the complex impedance Z(R, X) is in the 1st
quadrant, point 0 in Figure 159. One can see that under a three-phase fault conditions, the
centre of oscillation is at the point of fault, point 1, which is logical, as all three voltages
are zero or near zero at that point. Under the fault conditions the generator accelerated and
when the fault was finally cleared, the complex impedance Z(R, X) jumped to the point 2.
By that time, the generator has already lost its step, Z(R, X) continues its way from the
right-hand side to the left-hand side, and the 1st pole-slip cannot be avoided. If the
generator is not immediately disconnected, it will continue pole-slipping see Figure
159, where two pole-slips (two pole-slip cycles) are shown. Under out-of-step conditions,
the centre of oscillation is where the locus of the complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses the
(impedance) line connecting the points SE (Sending End), and RE (Receiving End). The
point on the SE RE line where the trajectory of Z(R, X) crosses the impedance line can
Technical manual
365
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
change with time and is mainly a function of the internal induced voltages at both ends of
the equivalent two-machine system, that is, at points SE and RE.
Measurement of the magnitude, direction and rate-of-change of load impedance relative
to a generators terminals provides a convenient and generally reliable means of detecting
whether machines are out-of-step and pole-slipping is taking place. Measurement of the
rotor (power) angle is important as well.
Rotor (power) angle can be thought of as the angle between the two lines, connecting
point 0 in Figure 159, that is, Z(R, X) under normal load, with the points SE and RE,
respectively. These two lines are not shown in Figure 159. Normal values of the power
angle, that is, under stable, steady-state, load conditions, are from 30 to 60 electrical
degrees. It can be observed in Figure 160 that the angle reaches 180 degrees when the
complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses the impedance line SE RE. It then changes the sign,
and continues from -180 degrees to 0 degrees, and so on. Figure 160 shows the rotor
(power) angle and the magnitude of Z(R, X) against time for the case from Figure 159.
Impe dance Z in Ohm and rotor a ngle in radian
4
3
|Z| in Ohms
angle in rad
normal
load
rotor (power)
angle
Z(R, X) unde r fa ult lies

on the impe dance line
or nea r (for 3-ph faults )
|Z|
0
0
fault 500 ms
fa ult
occ urrs
-1
Unde r 3-pha s e fa ult

condition rotor a ngle
of a pp. 180 de gre e s
is m e a s ure d ...
-2
3
2
-3
1
-4
200
400
Z(R,X) cros s e d
the im pe da nce line , Z-line ,
conne cting points S E - RE
600
800
1000
Time in millis econds
1200
1400
IEC10000110 V2 EN
Figure 160:
Rotor (power) angle and magnitude of the complex impedance Z(R, X)

against the time
In order to be able to fully understand the principles of OOSPPAM (78), a stable case, that
is, a case where the disturbance does not make a generator to go out-of-step, must be
shown.
366
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
SE
0.8
RE
G
relay
0.4
0.2
0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6
this circle forms

the right-hand side
edge of the lens
-0.8
-1
Z(R,X) 20 ms
after line out
fault
- - - - - RE
- ----- ----- 4 - ---zone 2 - ------ 2
---1
------ fault
-3
X-line ^ -^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ ^
^
^
^ ^ ^ ^ ^-- ^ ^ ^ -^
----- Z-line
--------limit of
-- relay
lens -reach
-110 -----zone 1- ------------ ------- ---- - -- - - -- - SE
0.6
-1
X [Ohm]
-0.5
pre-fault
Z(R,X)
5
0
0 pre-fault Z(R, X)
3 Z(R, X) under fault
5 Z 20 ms after line out
6 pow er line reclosed
0
0.5
1.5
ANSI10000111 V1 EN
Figure 161:
A stable case where the disturbance does not make the generator to go
out-of-step
It shall be observed that for a stable case, as shown in Figure 161, where the disturbance
does not cause the generator to lose step, the complex impedance Z(R, X) exits the lens
characteristic on the same side (point 4) it entered it (point 2), and never re-enters the lens.
In a stable case, where the protected generator remains in synchronism, the complex
impedance returns to quadrant 1, and, after the oscillations fade, it returns to the initial
normal load position (point 0), or near.
7.8.7.1
Lens characteristic
A precondition in order to be able to construct a suitable lens characteristic is that the
power system in which OOSPPAM (78) is installed, is modeled as a two-machine
equivalent system, or as a single machine infinite bus equivalent power system. Then the
impedances from the position of OOSPPAM (78) in the direction of the normal load flow
(that is from the measurement point to the remote system) can be taken as forward. The
lens characteristic, as shown in Figure159 and Figure161, is obtained so that two equal in
size but differently offset Mho characteristics are set to overlap. The resultant lens
characteristic is the loci of complex impedance Z(R, X) for which the rotor (power) angle
is constant, for example 110 degrees or 120 degrees; if the rotor (power) angle approaches
this value, then there is a high risk to have an out of step condition. The limit-of- reach
circle is constructed automatically by the algorithm; it is about 10% wider than the the
circle that has the line SE-RE as diameter (that is the out-of-step characteristic which
Technical manual
367
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
corresponds to the rotor (power) angle of 90 degrees). Figure 162 illustrates construction
of the lens characteristic for a power system.
X
Position of the OOS
- RE
- - relay is the origin of
--- the R - X plane
-- -------- Ze
-- Zone 2
--X-line
--determined
-- Zline
--by the ^ ^- ^
--^ ^ ^- ^
-^ ^ ^ ^
setting
^ ^ ^ --- ^
--^ ^ ^ReachZ1 --Ztr
R
---- Zone 1 -relay
-120 -- Z(R,X) ---- Z-line --Zgen
----limit-of-reach -- Lens is -the locus
--circle depends on-of constant
rotor (power)
----the position of the -- - angle,
e.g.
120.
- points SE and RE
- - -- - - - - - - Lens' width determined
SE
by the setting Pickup Angle
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6
-0.8
-0.6
-0.4
-0.2
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
ANSI10000112 V1 EN
Figure 162:
Construction of the lens characteristic for a power system
ReverseZ(ReverseR, ReverseX)
Zgen(Rgen, Xgen)
ForwardZ(ForwardR, ForwardX)
Ztr(Rtr, Xtr)
Zline(Rline, Xline)
Transformer
13.8 / 220 kV
Generator
13.8 kV
13.8 kV
Zeq(Req, Xeq)
Infinite power
system
Power line
220 kV
System
equivalent
SE
REG
RE
Out-Of-Step
protection
OOSPPAM
ReverseR = Rg
ReverseX = Xd
ForwardR = Rtr + Rline + Req

For wardX = Xtr + Xline + Xeq
All impedances must be referred to the generator voltage 13.8 kV

ANSI10000113 V1 EN
Figure 163:
368
Example of an actual power system
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
To be able to automatically construct the lens characteristic for a system shown in Figure
163, the actual power system must be modeled as a two-machine equivalent system, or as
a single machine infinite bus equivalent system, the following information is necessary:
Zgen(Rgen, Xgen), Ztr(Rtr, Xtr), Zline(Rline, Xline), Zeq(Req, Xeq), and the setting
PickupAngle, for example 120 degrees. All impedances must be referred to the voltage
level where the out-of-step protection relay is placed; in the case shown in Figure 163 the
relay is connected to the terminals of the generator and, therefore, the previous quantities
shall be referred to the generator nominal voltage and nominal current. The impedances
from the position of the out-of-step protection in the direction of the normal load flow can
be taken as forward.
The out-of-step relay, as in Figure 163 looks into the system and the impedances in that
direction are forward impedances:
ForwardX = Xtr + Xline + Xeq (All values referred to generator voltage)

ForwardR = Rtr + Rline + Req (All values referred to generator voltage)
The impedances that can be measured in the reverse direction are:
ReverseX = Xd' (Generator transient reactance suitable for this protection)

ReverseR = Rg (Relatively very small, can often be neglected)
Resistances are much smaller than reactances, but in general can not be neglected. The
ratio (ForwardX + ReverseX) / (ForwardR + ReverseR) determines the inclination of the
Z-line, connecting the point SE (Sending End) and RE (Receiving End), and is typically
approximately 85 degrees. While the length of the Z-line depends on the values of
ForwardX, ReverseX, ForwardR, and ReverseR, the width of the lens is a function of the
setting PickupAngle.The lens is broader for smaller values of the PickupAngle, and
becomes a circle for PickupAngle = 90 degrees.
When the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the lens, pole slipping is imminent, and a
pickup signal is issued. The angle recommended to form the lens is 110 or 120 degrees,
because it is this rotor (power) angle where problems with dynamic stability usually begin.
Rotor (power) angle 120 degrees is sometimes called the angle of no return because if
this angle is reached under generator power swings, the generator is most likely to lose
step.
7.8.7.2
Detecting an out-of-step condition

An out-of-step condition is characterized by periodic changes of the rotor angle, that leads
to a wild flow of the synchronizing power; so there are also periodic changes of rotational
speed, currents and voltages. When displayed in the complex impedance plane, these
changes are characterized by a cyclic change in the complex load impedance Z(R, X) as
measured at the terminals of the generator, or at the location of the instrument
transformers of a power line connecting two power sub-systems. This was shown in
Technical manual
369
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Figure 159. When a synchronous machine is out-of-step, pole-slips occur. To recognize a

pole-slip, the complex impedance Z(R,X) must traverse the lens from right to left in case
of a generator and in the opposite direction in case of a motor. Another requirement is that
the travel across the lens takes no less than a specific minimum traverse time, typically
40...60 milliseconds. The above timing is used to discriminate a fault from an out-of-step
condition. In Figure 159, some important points on the trajectory of Z(R, X) are
designated. Point 0: the pre-fault, normal load Z(R, X). Point 1: impedance Z under a
three-phase fault with low fault resistance: Z lies practically on, or very near, the Z-line.
Transition of the measured Z from point 0 to point 1 takes app. 20 ms, due to Fourier
filters. Point 2: Z immediately after the fault has been cleared. Transition of the measured
Z from point 1 to point 2 takes approximately 20 ms, due to Fourier filters. The complex
impedance then travels in the direction from the right to the left, and exits the lens on the
opposite side. When the complex impedance exits the lens on the side opposite to its
entrance, the 1st pole-slip has already occurred and more pole-slips can be expected if the
generator is not disconnected. Figure 159 shows two pole-slips. Figures like Figure 159
and Figure 161 are always possible to draw by means of the analog output data from the
pole-slip function, and are of great help with eventual investigations of the performance
of the out-of-step function.
7.8.7.3
Maximum slip frequency

A pole-slip may be detected if it has a slip frequency lower than a maximum value fsMax.
The specific value of fsMax depends on the setting (parameter) PickupAngle (which
determines the width of the lens characteristic). A parameter in this calculation routine is
the value of the minimum traverse time, traverseTimeMin. The minimum traverse time is
the minimum time that the travel of the complex impedance Z(R, X) through the lens, from
one side to the other, must last in order to recognize that a pole-slip has occurred. The value
of the internal constant traverseTimeMin is a function of the set PickupAngle.For values of
PickupAngle <= 110, traverseTimeMin = 50 ms. For values PickupAngle > 110,
traverseTimeMin = 40 ms. The expression which relates the maximum slip frequency
fsMax and the traverseTimeMin is as follows:
fsMax [ Hz ]
PickupAngle []
1000
1.000
traverseTimeMin [ ms ]
180 []
(Equation 88)
The maximum slip frequency fsMax for traverseTimeMin = 50 ms is:

PickupAngle = 90 fsMax = 20 0.500 = 10.000 Hz
(default 110)
The maximum slip frequency fsMax for traverseTimeMin = 40 ms is:

370
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A

The minimum value of fsMax is 6.994 Hz. When PickupAngle = 110 degrees, fsMax =
7.777 Hz. This implies, that the default PickupAngle = 110 degrees covers 90% of cases
as, the typical final slip frequency is between 2 - 5Hz. In practice, however, before the slip
frequency, for example 7.777 Hz, is reached, at least three pole-slips have occurred. In
other words, if we consider a linear increase of frequency from 50 Hz to 57.777 Hz, at least
three pole-slips will occur (in fact: (57.777 - 50) / 2 = 3.889). The exact instantaneous slipfrequency expressed in Hz (corresponding to number of pole slips per second) is difficult
to calculate. The easiest and most exact method is to measure time between two successive
pole slips. This means that, the instantaneous slip-frequency is measured only after the
second pole-slip, if the protected machine is not already disconnected after the first poleslip. The measured value of slipsPerSecond (SLIPFREQ) is equal to the average slipfrequency of the machine between the last two successive pole-slips.
7.8.7.4
Taking care of the circuit breaker

Although out-of-step events are relatively rare, the out-of-step protection should take care
of the circuit breaker health. The electromechanical stress to which the breaker is exposed
shall be minimized. The maximum currents flowing under out-of-step conditions can be
even greater that those for a three-phase short circuit on generator terminals; see Figure
165. The currents flowing are highest at rotor angle 180 degrees, and smallest at 0 degrees,
where relatively small currents flow. To open the circuit breaker at 180 degrees, when not
only the currents are highest, but the two internal (that is, induced) voltages at both ends
are in opposition, could be fatal for the circuit breaker. There are two methods available
in order to minimize the stress; the second method is more advanced than the first one.
The first method

The circuit breaker is only allowed to break the current when the rotor angle has become
less than the set value TripAngle, on its way to 0 electrical degrees. A recommended value
for the setting TripAngle is 90 degrees or less, for example 60 degrees. Figure 164
illustrates the case with TripAngle = 90 degrees. The offset Mho circle represents loci of
the complex impedance Z(R, X) for which the rotor (power) angle is 90 degrees. If the
circuit breaker must not open before the rotor angle has reached 90 degrees on its way
towards 0 degrees, then it is clear that the circle delimits the R X plane into a no trip
and a trip region. For TripAngle = 90 degrees, the trip command will be issued at point
3 when the complex impedance Z(R, X) exits the circle. By that time the relay logic had
already ascertained the loss of step, and the general decision to trip the generator has
already been taken.
Technical manual
371
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The second method

This method is more exact. If the break-time of the circuit breaker is known, (and specified
as the setting tBreaker) than it is possible to initiate a trip (break) command almost exactly
tBreaker milliseconds before the rotor (power) angle reaches 0 degrees, where the
currents are at their minimum possible values. The breaker contacts open at almost exactly
0 degrees, as illustrated in Figure 165 for tBreaker = 0.060 s. The point in time when the
breaker opening process must be initiated is estimated by solving on-line the so called
synchronizer differential equation. Note that if tBreaker is left on the initial (default)
value, which is zero (0), then the alternative setting TripAngle decides when the trip
command is given. If specified tBreaker > 0, for example tBreaker = 0.040 second, then
automatically, the TripAngle is ignored and the second, more exact method applied.
0.6
trip
region
0.4
0.2
3
here rotor
angle
is -90
no trip
region
inside
circle
-0.2
-0.4
outside the
circle is the trip
region for
TripAngle <= 90
-0.6
-0.4
X[Ohm]
RE - Receiving End (infinite bus)

loci of Z(R, X)
no trip
region
1
2
no trip
region
rotor angle
= 180
relay
here
rotor angle
is +90
R[Ohm]
Z - line connects
points SE & RE
this circle
is loci of
the rotor
angle = 90
SE - Sending End (generator)

-0.2
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
IEC10000114 V1 EN
Figure 164:
372
The imaginary offset Mho circle represents loci of the impedance Z(R, X)
for which the rotor angle is 90 degrees
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Current in kA, trip command to CB, rotor angle in rad
35
very high currents due

to out-of-step condition
pos. seq. current in kA

trip command to CB
30
rotor angle in radian

fault cleared
25
2nd
20
current increases under

fault conditions
current decreases
15
fault
occurs
10
5
trip command
issued here
normal load current
min. current
tBreaker = 60 ms
rotor angle
0
-5
after 1st
pole slip
angle towards 0
0
200
400
600
800
Time in milliseconds
1000
1200
IEC10000115 V1 EN
Figure 165:
7.8.7.5
Trip initiation when the break-time of the circuit breaker is known
Design
At every execution of the function the following is calculated: active power P, reactive
power Q, rotor angle ROTORANG, quantity UCOSPHI, the positive-sequence current
CURRENT and voltage VOLTAGE. All other quantities, that can as well be read as outputs,
are only calculated if the Z(R, X) enters the limit of reach zone, which is a circle in the
complex (R X) plane. When the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the limit-of-reach
region, the algorithm:
determines in which direction the impedance Z moves, that is, the direction the lens
is traversed
measures the time taken to traverse the lens from one side to the other one
If the traverse time is more than the limit 40 or 50 ms, a pole-slip is declared. If the
complex impedance Z(R, X) exits the lens on the same side it entered, then it is a stable
case and the protected machine is still in synchronism. If a pole-slip has been detected,
then it is determined in which zone the centre of oscillation is located. If the number of
actual pole-slips exceeds the maximum number of allowed pole-slips in either of the
zones, a trip command is issued taking care of the circuit breaker safety.
Technical manual
373
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
UPSRE
UPSIM
UPSMAG
IPSRE
IPSIM
R
X
Calculation of
R and X parts
of the complex
positivesequence
impedance
Z(R, X)
R
X
Z(R,X)
Z(R,X)
within limit of
reach?
NO
Return
YES
UCOSPHI
Z(R,X)
within lens
characteristic?
NO
ROTORANG
Function alert
SLIPFREQ
YES
LEFT
Motor losing
step ?
Calculation of
positive- sequence
active power P,
reactive power Q,
rotor angle
ROTORANG
and
UCOSPHI
Z(R,X)
entered lens
from?
GENMODE
Z(R,X)
exited lens
on the left- hand
side?
Generator losing
step ?
YES
RIGHT
Was
traverse time
more than
50 ms?
P
MOTMODE
NO
NO
YES (pole- slip!)
UCOSPHI
ZONE 2
>= 1
Number
of pole- slips
exceeded in
a zone?
ROTORANG
TRIP
NO
TRIPZ1
Open
circuit
breaker
safely
ZONE 1
TRIPZ2
IEC10000116 V3 EN
Figure 166:
7.8.8
OOSPPAM (78) Simplified function block
Technical data
Table 143:
OOSPPAM (78) technical data
Function
7.9
374
Range or value
Accuracy
Impedance reach
(0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase
2.0% of Vn/(3 In)
Rotor pickup angle
(90.0 - 130.0) degrees
5.0 degrees
Rotor trip angle
(15.0 - 90.0) degrees
5.0 degrees
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters
(1 - 20)
Loss of excitation LEXPDIS(40)
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.9.1
Identification
Loss of excitation
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
40
LEXPDIS
<
SYMBOL-MM V1 EN
7.9.2
Functionality
There are limits for the under-excited operation of a synchronous machine. A reduction of
the excitation current weakens the coupling between the rotor and the stator. The machine
may lose the synchronism and start to operate like an induction machine. Then, the
reactive power consumption will increase. Even if the machine does not loose
synchronism it may not be acceptable to operate in this state for a long time. Reduction of
excitation increases the generation of heat in the end region of the synchronous machine.
The local heating may damage the insulation of the stator winding and the iron core.
To prevent damages to the generator it should be tripped when excitation is lost.
7.9.3
Function block
LEXPDIS (40)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRZ1
BLKTRZ2
TRIP
TRZ1
TRZ2
PICKUP
PU_Z1
PU_Z2
XOHM
XPERCENT
ROHM
RPERCENT
ANSI0700031 V1 EN
Figure 167:
LEXPDIS (40) function block
Technical manual
375
Section 7
7.9.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 144:
LEXPDIS (40) Input signals
Name
Type
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTRZ1
BOOLEAN
Block trip of zone Z1
BLKTRZ2
BOOLEAN
Block trip of zone Z2
LEXPDIS (40) Output signals
Name
Table 146:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 145:
7.9.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
TRZ1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from impedance zone Z1
TRZ2
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from impedance zone Z2
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Common start signal
PU_Z1
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from impedance zone Z1
PU_Z2
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from impedance zone Z2
XOHM
REAL
Reactance in Primary Ohms
XPERCENT
REAL
Reactance in percent of Zbase
ROHM
REAL
Resistance in Primary Ohms
RPERCENT
REAL
Resistance in percent of Zbase
Settings
LEXPDIS (40) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OperationZ1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Disable/Enable zone Z1
XoffsetZ1
-1000.00 - 1000.00
0.01
-10.00
Offset of Z1 circle top point along X axis in % of

Zbase
Z1diameter
0.01 - 3000.00
0.01
100.00
Diameter of impedance circle for Z1 in % of

Zbase
tZ1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.01
Trip time delay for Z1
376
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OperationZ2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Disable/Enable zone Z2
XoffsetZ2
-1000.00 - 1000.00
0.01
-10.00
Offset of Z2 circle top point along X axis in % of

Zbase
Z2diameter
0.01 - 3000.00
0.01
200.00
Diameter of impedance circle for Z2 in % of

Zbase
tZ2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
Trip time delay for Z2
Step
Default
Table 147:
Name
LEXPDIS (40) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Description
DirSuperv
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Off/On for additional directional

criterion
XoffsetDirLine
-1000.00 - 3000.00
0.01
0.00
Offset of directional line along X axis in % of

Zbase
DirAngle
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
-13.0
Angle between directional line and R-axis in

degrees
Step
Default
Table 148:
Name
LEXPDIS (40) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
MeasureMode
PosSeq
AB
BC
CA
PosSeq
Measuring mode (PosSeq, AB, BC, CA)
Table 149:
Name
InvertCTcurr
7.9.6
LEXPDIS (40) Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
No
Yes
Unit
Step
Default
No
Description
Invert CT current
Monitored data
Table 150:
Name
LEXPDIS (40) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
XOHM
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in Primary Ohms
XPERCENT
REAL
Reactance in percent of Zbase
ROHM
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in Primary Ohms
RPERCENT
REAL
Resistance in percent of
Zbase
Technical manual
377
Section 7
7.9.7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Operation principle
The Loss of excitation (LEXPDIS ,40) protection in the IED measures the apparent
impedance seen out from the generator.The measurement loop of apparent impedance can
be chosen as the positive sequence loop or any one of the three phase-to-phase loops
depending on the available current and voltage signals. It is recommended to use positive
sequence quantities for function operation.
Measured mode
Zposseq
Measured apparent impedance
Vposseq
I posseq
ZAB
VA - VB
IA - IB
ZBC
(Equation 90)
VB - VC
IB - IC
ZCA
(Equation 89)
(Equation 91)
VC - VA
IC - IA
(Equation 92)
There are three characteristics in LEXPDIS (40) protection as shown in figure 168.
Naimly:
378
Offset mho circle for Z1

Offset mho circle for Z2
Directional blinder
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
UnderexitationProtection
protection
Underexcitation
Restrainarea
area
Restrain
R
R
Directional
blinder
Z1, Fast zone

Z2, Slow zone
IEC06000455 V2 EN
Figure 168:
Three characteristics in LEXPDIS (40) protection
When the apparent impedance reaches the zone Z1 this zone will operate, normally with
a short delay. The zone is related to the dynamic stability of the generator.
When the apparent impedance reaches the zone Z2 this zone will operate, normally with
a longer delay. The zone is related to the static stability of the generator.
LEXPDIS (40) protection also has a directional blinder (supervision). See figure 168.
In LEXPDIS (40) function the zone measurement is done as shown in figure 169.
Technical manual
379
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Offset
R
XoffsetZ1
Z1diameter
Z (apparent impedance)
Z1 = Z - (XoffsetZ1 +
Z1diameter/2)
Z1 or Z2
en06000456-2.vsd
IEC06000456 V2 EN
Figure 169:
Zone measurement in LEXPDIS (40) protection function
The impedance Z1 is constructed from the measured apparent impedance Z and the
impedance corresponding to the centre point of the impedance characteristic (Z1 or Z2).
If the magnitude of this impedance is less than the radius (diameter/2) of the characteristic,
this part of the protection will operate.
If the directional restrain is set Disabled the impedance zone operation will start the
appropriate timer and LEXPDIS (40) will trip after the set delay (tZ1 or tZ2).
If the directional restrain is set Enabled the directional release function must also operate
to enable operation. A new impedance is constructed from the measured apparent
impedance Z and the XoffsetDirLine point on the y-axis. If the phase angle of this
impedance is less than the set DirAngle LEXPDIS (40) function will be released, see
figure 170.
380
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Underexcitation Protection
Restrain area
XoffsetDirLine
DirAngle
Z (apparent impedance)
en06000457.vsd
IEC06000457 V1 EN
Figure 170:
Impedance constructed as XoffsetDirLine in LEXPDIS (40) protection
LEXPDIS (40) function is schematically described in figure 171.
Technical manual
381
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Positive
sequence
current
phasor
Positive
sequence
voltage
phasor
Apparent
impedance
calculation
Z in
Z1 char.
AND
Z in
Z2 char.
AND
pickupZ1
tZ1
0
TripZ1
pickupZ2
tZ2
0
TripZ2
Dir.
Restrain
OR
Dir.Restrain Enabled
en060004582_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000458 V2 EN
Figure 171:
7.9.8
Simplified logic diagram of LEXPDIS (40) protection
Technical data
Table 151:
LEXPDIS (40) technical data
Function
382
Range or value
Accuracy
X offset of Mho top point for Zone

1 and Zone 2
(1000.001000.00)% of ZBase
5.0% of Vn/In
Diameter of Mho circle for Zone 1

and Zone 2
(0.03000.00)% of ZBase
5.0% of Vn/In
Independent time delay for Zone

1 when impedance jumps from
the outside the set circle to the
center of the set circle
(0.00-6000.00) s
greater
Independent time delay for Zone

2 when impedance jumps from
the outside the set circle to the
center of the set circle
(0.00-6000.00) s
greater
Trip time, pickup when

impedance jumps from the
outside the set circle to the center
of the set circle
Min. = 35 ms
Max. = 50 ms
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.10
Sensitive rotor earth fault protection, injection based

ROTIPHIZ (64R)
7.10.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Sensitive rotor earth fault protection,

injection based
7.10.2
ROTIPHIZ
IEC 60617
identification
Rre<
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
64R
Functionality
The sensitive rotor earth fault protection (ROTIPHIZ, 64R) is used to detect ground faults
in the rotor windings of generators. ROTIPHIZ (64R) is applicable for all types of
synchronous generators.
To implement the above concept, a separate injection box is required. The injection box
generates a square wave voltage signal at a certain preset frequency which is fed into the
rotor winding.
The magnitude of the injected voltage signal and the resulting injected current is measured
through a resistive shunt located within the injection box. These two measured values are
fed to the IED. Based on these two measured quantities, the protection IED determines the
rotor winding resistance to ground. The resistance value is then compared with the preset
fault resistance alarm and trip levels.
The protection function can detect ground faults in the entire rotor winding and associated
connections.
Requires injection unit REX060 and a coupling capacitor unit REX061 for correct
operation.
7.10.3
Description of input signals

The inputs to the sensitive rotor earth-fault protection function block are as shown in table
152.
Technical manual
383
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 152:
Input signal
7.10.4
Description of various inputs

Description
USV
The measured injection voltage. This signal is taken from a pre-processor block, the AI output.
The analog voltage input AI1 is linked to the phase A in the pre-processor block in the Signal
Matrix tool.
USI
The measured injection current. This signal is taken from a pre-processor block, the AI output.
In the pre-configured version, the analog voltage input AI2 is linked to the phase B in the preprocessor block in the Signal Matrix tool.
BLOCK
Input to block the function
ZREFSEL
The selection of any of the predefined reference impedances. There is a possibility to change
from one set reference impedance to another. Two different reference impedances are
available.
Description of output signals

The outputs of the sensitive rotor earth-fault protection function block are as shown in
table 153.
Table 153:
Output signal
Description of various outputs

Description
TRIP
Common trip command signal
TRIPDC
is the trip command signal at DC-side ground fault
TRIPAC
is the trip command signal at AC-side ground fault
BFI
is a common signal for both AC and DC side of exciter
PU_DC
is the start signal at DC-side ground fault
PU_DC
is the start signal at AC-side ground fault
ALARM
Signal activated after a set time delay, if the calculated fault resistance gets lower than the
set alarm level
ERROR
Error signal which is boolean with values 0 and 1
ERRSTAT
Status coded signal giving type of error. See table 154
RAVE
Measured resistance to ground in at an injected frequency (real part of the complex

impedance)
XAVE
Measured reactance to ground in at the injected frequency (imaginary part of the

complex impedance)
FREQV
Measured frequency of the injected voltage
RFAULT
Estimated fault resistance in
ZREF
Selected reference impedance number
384
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Output signal
Description
ZREFRE
The real part (resistance) of the used reference impedance
ZREFIM
The imaginary part (reactance) of the used reference impedance
VRMSSTAT
This signal is set true, if the measured RMS voltage is larger than the set limit VLimRMS
ERRSTAT output signal

Convert the integer output signal to binary and see table below for interpretation of
individual bits:
Table 154:
Priority 3
Bit 7
Interference
detected
Definition of errors
Bit 6
Undercurrent
ERRSTAT output integer

Priority 2
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Undervoltage
Overcurrent
Overvoltage
Priority 3
Bit 2
Frequency
difference
Bit 1
Priority 1
No current
Bit 0
No voltage
The ERRSTAT description will be shown in clear text in ICT.

The priority of the signals is set that the group priority 1 overrides the group priority 2 and
3, and priority 2 overrides priority 3. Note that the ERRSTAT signal can enable several
error cases at the same time.
Following errors is detected and derived in the Error block:
B0 = Injected voltage signal not found

B1 = Injected current signal not found
B2 = Voltage and current signal frequency differs
B3 = Measured total RMS voltage too high
B4 = Measured total RMS current too high
B5 = Injected voltage signal too low
B6 = Injected current signal too low
B7 = External interference voltage detected
ERRSTAT = BitToInt[B7,,B1,B0] The priority of the error conditions that will be

flagged out:
Prio1 = B0, B1
Prio2 = B3, B4, B5, B6
Prio3 = B2, B7
RFAULT output signal
Technical manual
385
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The injection equipment provides calculation of the fault resistance:
7.10.5
If the fault resistance is equal or below 10 k, RFAULT is displayed in

If the fault resistance is above 10 k, RFAULT is initially displayed as -1000 until
the fault resistance has reached a stable value and then displayed in
RFAULT displayed as -2000 means error
Function block
ROTIPHIZ (64R)
USV*
TRIP
USI*
TRIPDC
BLOCK
TRIPAC
ZREFSEL
BFI
PU_DC
PU_DC
ALARM
ERROR
ERRSTAT
RAVE
XAVE
FREQV
RFAULT
ZREF
ZREFRE
ZREFIM
VRMSSTAT
ANSI10000297 V1 EN
Figure 172:
7.10.6
Signals
Table 155:
Name
386
ROTIPHIZ (64R) function block
ROTIPHIZ (64R) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
USV
GROUP
SIGNAL
Injected voltage signal
USI
GROUP
SIGNAL
Injected current signal (voltage over shunt)
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
ZREFSEL
INTEGER
Reference impedance selection
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 156:
ROTIPHIZ (64R) Output signals
Name
7.10.7
Table 157:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip (common AC and DC side of exciter)
TRIPDC
BOOLEAN
Trip for DC side of exciter
TRIPAC
BOOLEAN
Trip for AC side of exciter
BFI
BOOLEAN
Initiate (common AC and DC side of exciter)
PU_DC
BOOLEAN
Pick up for DC side of exciter
PU_AC
BOOLEAN
Pick up for AC side of exciter
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm
ERROR
BOOLEAN
Error
ERRSTAT
INTEGER
Error indication
RAVE
REAL
Measured resistance to earth in Ohm at inj freq
XAVE
REAL
Measured reactance to earth in Ohm at inj freq
FREQV
REAL
Measured frequency of injected voltage into rotor
RFAULT
REAL
Estimated fault resistance in Ohm
ZREF
INTEGER
ZREFRE
REAL
Used reference impedance real part in Ohm
ZREFIM
REAL
Used reference impedance imaginary part in Ohm
VRMSSTAT
BOOLEAN
RMS voltage status, TRUE when > VLimRMS
Settings
ROTIPHIZ (64R) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Enable/Disable
RTrip
100 - 100000
Ohm
1000
Trip limit of fault resistance in Ohm
RAlarm
100 - 1000000
Ohm
10000
Alarm limit of fault resistance in Ohm
tAlarm
0.00 - 600.00
1.00
30.00
Alarm time delay
FactACLim
0.01 - 2.00
0.01
0.25
Scale factor for rotor earth fault on AC side of

exciter
tTripAC
0.000 - 60.000
1.000
10.000
Time delay for trip on AC side of exciter
VLimRMS
1 - 1000
100
RMS voltage level
Table 158:
Name
FreqInjected
ROTIPHIZ (64R) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
75.000 - 250.000
Unit
Hz
Step
0.001
Default
113.000
Technical manual
Description
Injected frequency
387
Section 7
Table 159:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
ROTIPHIZ (64R) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
k1Real
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
10000.000
Multiplication factor k1 for calibration, real part
k1Imag
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Multiplication factor k1 for calibration,

imaginary part
k2Real
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
0.000
Addition factor k2 for calibration, real part in

Ohm
k2Imag
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
0.000
Addition factor k2 for calibration, imaginary part

in Ohm
RefR1
0.001 1000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
1000000.000
Reference resistance R1 in ohm
RefX1
-1000000.000 1000000.000
Ohm
0.001
2000.000
Reference reactance X1 in ohm
RefR2
0.001 1000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
1000000.000
RefX2
-1000000.000 1000000.000
Ohm
0.001
2000.000
Table 160:
Name
FilterLength
7.10.8
ROTIPHIZ (64R) Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
1s
2s
Step
Default
1s
Description
Length of filter buffer
Monitored data
Table 161:
Name
388
Unit
ROTIPHIZ (64R) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
RAVE
REAL
Ohm
Measured resistance to earth

in Ohm at inj freq
XAVE
REAL
Ohm
Measured reactance to earth

in Ohm at inj freq
FREQV
REAL
Hz
Measured frequency of
injected voltage into rotor
RFAULT
REAL
Ohm

Ohm
ZREF
INTEGER
Selected reference
impedance number
ZREFRE
REAL
Ohm
Used reference impedance

real part in Ohm
ZREFIM
REAL
Ohm

imaginary part in Ohm
VRMSSTAT
BOOLEAN
RMS voltage status, TRUE

when > VLimRMS
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.10.9
Operation principle
The protection principle is based on injection of voltage to the exciter point of the field
circuit.
8
Step
-up
Transformer
U>
Vinj
Rshunt
GEN
ROTOR EF
5
6
REX061
I
RN
REX060/ RIM module
REG670
Generator Protection Panel
ANSI11000014 V1 EN
Figure 173:
Example installation for rotor injection
Generator unit consisting of a synchronous generator and a step-up transformer
Generator field winding
Capacitor coupling unit which is used to provide insulation barrier between rotor circuit and injection
equipment
Cable used to inject the square-wave signal into the rotor circuit
Connection for measurement of injected current. This signal is amplified in REX060 before it is passed
on to IED for evaluation.
Connection for measurement of injected voltage. This signal is amplified in REX060 before it is passed
on to IED for evaluation.
Two VT inputs into IED which are used to measure injected current and voltage
Protection for excessive over-voltages posed by generator. REX060 can withstand without damage
maximum voltage of 120V and when used together with REX062 up to 240V.
The injection signals are generated in a separate unit, REX060. The signals have square
wave form and are injected to the generator via the coupling capacitor unit REX061 to the
excitation circuit.
Technical manual
389
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
In the REX060 unit the injection voltage and current signals are amplified to a level
adapted to the analogue voltage inputs of IED. In IED the measured signals evaluated to
detect rotor ground faults.
7.10.9.1
The injection unit REX060

IED and
Injection
connectors
Top view
Back view
Power
connector
Front view
Keylock
LED
X11
X61
X81
18
Front-plate
X82
Rotor
Stator
Power
Backplane
HMI with logic
18
X62
PSM
Injection Stator
Injection Rotor
Injection LED
Injection switch
IEC11000015 V1 EN
Figure 174:
Injection unit REX060
The REX060 unit is a common unit that can be configured for either rotor or stator ground
fault protection, or for both. The REX060 have separate modules for rotor and stator
protection. The REX060 generate square wave signals, where one is used for injection to
the stator neutral point and the other to the field winding circuit (rotor circuit), if
configured for both stator and rotor protection. The injected voltage and currents are
measured by the unit and amplified, resulting in voltage signals both for the injected
voltage and current, and adapted to the analogue inputs of IED. The injection unit REX060
shall be located close to the IED, preferably in the same cubicle.
For the Sensitive rotor earth fault protection, there are some settings necessary for
REX060:
System frequency: 50/60 Hz

Injected frequency for rotor circuit injection is settable in 1 Hz steps 75 250 Hz.
Gain factor in four steps
REX060 will also continuously check the measured signal for detection of saturation
which could cause error in the evaluation in IED. If saturation level is reached a binary
signal, connected to IED, is activated. Also other errors in the injection circuit will initiate
a binary signal to IED for blocking of the function.
390
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Rotor injection output is protected against high voltages by a relay blocking the injection
circuit. This blocking remains blocked by stored status in non-volatile memory.
The output is also protected by a fuse. If this fuse is blown, it is caused by external voltage
source, since the injection unit cannot provide enough energy to blow this fuse.
Refer to the Hardware section in this manual for a detailed description of REX060.
7.10.9.2
Rotor Earth Fault Protection function

The injection to the rotor is schematically shown in figure 175.
Iinj
Crot
DC
Rf
Crot
Vinj
AC
REX061
Rf
Iinj
+
Vinj
Rotor Reference
Impedance
ANSI11000065 V1 EN
Figure 175:
Equivalent diagram for Sensitive rotor earth fault protection principle
The impedance ZMeasured is equal to the capacitive reactance between the rotor winding
and ground (1/Crot) and the ground fault resistance (Rf). The series resistance in the
injection circuit is eliminated. Rf is very large in the non-faulted case and the measured
impedance, called the rotor reference impedance and can be calculated as :
Z ref = - j
1
wCrot
EQUATION2510 V1 EN
alternative
1
= jwCrot
Z ref
EQUATION2511 V1 EN
Where
Technical manual
391
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
w = 2p finj
EQUATION2512 V1 EN
The injected frequency finj of the square wave, is a set value, deviating from the
fundamental frequency (50 or 60 Hz). The injected frequency can be set within the range
75 250 Hz with the recommended value 113 Hz in 50 Hz systems and 137 Hz in 60 Hz
systems.
Rseries is a resistance in the REX061 unit used to protect against overvoltage to the
injection unit. Such overvoltages can occur if the unit is fed from static excitation system.
The injection unit REX060 is connected to the generator and to IED as shown in figure
173.
7.10.9.3
General measurement of ground fault impedance

From the REX060 the injected voltage and current are delivered as AC voltages to IED.
The injected voltage and current is measured and analyzed in the protection function
software within IED. The measured injected voltage and current are first processed by
means of special filtering so that the signals are referred to the injected frequency only.
The bare complex impedance is, see fig 176:
Z bare =
V Inj
I Inj
An equivalent circuit for the measured impedance is shown in figure 176.
ZMeasured
Zbare
Z series
Iinj
+
Rf
Z shunt
Vinj
-
ANSI11000003 V1 EN
Figure 176:
392
Equivalent of the impedance measurement

Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
In non-faulted operation Rf is very large. A healthy impedance is calculated as:
Z Measured = k1 Z bare + k 2
EQUATION2501 V1 EN
For definition of k1 and k2, see figure 177

The factors k1 and k2 [] are derived from measurements during commissioning, where
calibration to known fault resistance will be used to convert the measurement to true
primary impedance. The factor k1 will compensate for transformer ratio and other factors
to achieve impedance values related to the primary system. The factor k2 [] will
compensate for the series impedance Zseries
The healthy impedance measured at non-faulted conditions is referred to as the reference
impedance in further text.
In IED the measured impedance is compared to the reference impedance. In case of a
ground fault, the fault impedance is estimated and compared to the set values RAlarm and
RTrip.
The measured values are transferred to the primary impedance values by taking the actual
impedance value through the complex transformation given by the equation.
Ztrue = k1 Z measured + k2
GUID-20ADF3F6-6A89-4B5F-B0DA-9740C4FD5482 V1 EN
The factors k1 and k2 [] are derived during the calibration measurements under
commissioning. As support for the calibration, the Injection Commissioning tool must be
used. This tool is an integrated part of the PCM600 tool.
In connection to this calibration, the reference impedance is also derived. In case of a rotor
ground fault with fault impedance Zf, the measured admittance is:
1
1
1
=
+
Z Z ref Z f
=
1
1
1
= Zf
Z Z ref
EQUATION2405 V1 EN
The real part gives the fault conductance.

1
1
1
= Re
Rf
Z Z ref
EQUATION2421 V1 EN
Technical manual
393
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
RAlarm and RTrip are the two resistance levels given in the settings. The values of RAlarm
and RTrip are given in .
An alarm signal ALARM is given after a set delay tAlarm if Rf < RAlarm
A initiate signal BFI is given if Rf < RTrip
See figure 179
7.10.9.4
Simplified logic diagram

ROTIPHIZ (64R)
Vinj
Rshunt
2
6
Rf
Z Measured
Compare &
Evaluate
Z bare
S
K2
I Inj
v_i_ref
V Inj
v_v_ref
K1
ZRef1
ZRef2
REX060
REG670
ANSI10000327 V1 EN
Figure 177:
394
Simplified logic diagram for sensitive rotor earth fault protection, injection
based ROTIPHIZ (64R)
The sensitive rotor earth fault protection function receives amplified injected voltage and current
via the REX060 unit as two voltages signals. (Voltage inputs in the IED)
The phasor of injected voltage VInj and phasor of injected current IInj is calculated by using special
filter from raw samples. Observe that phasors are calculated for the injected frequency.
The complex bare impedance is calculated from Vinj / Iinj.
4, 5
The complex measured impedance is derived as ZMeasured = Zbare*k1 + k2 [].
The fault resistance (Rf) is calculated from the complex measured impedance and a selected
complex reference.
Selection of one (out of maximum 2) ZRef.
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Rf
OR
Alarm
Adaptive
TripDelay
Trip
IEC10000326-3.vsd
IEC10000326 V2 EN
Figure 178:
ROTIPHIZ (64R) Alarm and trip logic
If the fault resistance Rf is smaller than RAlarm and longer than alarm delay (using delayon), output ALARM is set. If the fault resistance Rf is smaller than RTrip, using internal trip
time characteristic, output signal TRIP is set after the calculated time. For trip time delay,
see fig 179
When 1s filter length is used and the fault resistance is equal to the set value RTrip, the trip
time is about 10 s. If the fault resistance is estimated to be 0 , the trip delay is 2 s. For
values in between, the delay follows the linear interpolation describing the fault resistance
time characteristic.
Technical manual
395
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Trip time
10 FilterLength
2 FilterLength
Fault resistance
RTrip
RAlarm
IEC11000002 V1 EN
Figure 179:
Trip time characteristic as function of fault resistance
A third high level step for the detection of excitation system ground faults on the AC side
of the excitation rectifier is available. This step uses the network frequency (50 or 60 Hz)
for the evaluation. If a ground fault occurs at the AC side of the excitation system rectifier,
there is a fundamental frequency component at the measured voltage and current injection
points.
The third high level step is not applicable if mixed signals are used, that is when the
REX060 is used for both rotor and stator ground fault protection and only two, instead of
four, analog inputs on the IED are used.
7.10.10
Technical data
Table 162:
ROTIPHIZ (64R) technical data
Function
Range or value
Fault resistance sensitivity
Injection frequency
Accuracy
Can be reached at
steady state operating
condition of the machine
500 k
Typically
20 - 50 k
(75.000 - 250.000) Hz
0.1 Hz

396
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip limit of fault resistance
(100 - 100000)
5% of 1 k at Rf 1 k
5% of set value at 1 k < Rf 20 k
10% of set value at Rf > 20 k
Alarm limit of fault resistance
(100 - 1000000)
5% of 1 k at Rf 1 k
5% of 10 k at 1 k < Rf 20 k
10% of set value at 20 k < Rf 200 k
Operate time, start at Rf ~ 0 and

filter length = 1 s
1.00 s typically
Operate time, trip at Rf ~ 0 and

filter length = 1 s
3.00 s typically
Alarm time delay at Rf ~ 0 and

filter length = 1 s
(0.00 - 600.00) s
0.2% or 2.00 s whichever is greater
7.11
100% stator earth fault protection, injection based

STTIPHIZ (64S)
7.11.1
Identification
100% stator earth fault protection,
injection based
7.11.2
IEC 61850
identification
STTIPHIZ
IEC 60617
identification
Rse<
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
64S
Functionality
The 100% stator earth-fault protection STTIPHIZ (64S) is used to detect ground faults in
the stator windings of generators and motors. STTIPHIZ (64S) is applicable for generators
connected to the power system through a unit transformer in a block connection. An
independent signal with a certain frequency different from the generator rated frequency
is injected into the stator circuit. The responce of this injected signal is used to detect stator
ground faults.
To implement the above concept, a separate injection box is required. The injection box
generates a square wave voltage signal which for example can be fed into the secondary
winding of the generator neutral point voltage transformer or grounding transformer. This
signal propagates through this transformer into the stator circuit.
The magnitude of the injected voltage signal is measured on the secondary side of the
neutral point voltage transformer or grounding transformer. In addition, the resulting
injected current is measured through a resistive shunt located within the injection box.
These two measured values are fed to the IED. Based on these two measured quantities,
Technical manual
397
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
the IED determines the stator winding resistance to ground. The resistance value is then
compared with the preset fault resistance alarm and trip levels.
The protection function can not only detect the ground fault at the generator star point, but
also along the stator windings and at the generator terminals, including the connected
components such as voltage transformers, circuit breakers, excitation transformer and so
on. The measuring principle used is not influenced by the generator operating mode and
is fully functional even with the generator at standstill. It is still required to have a standard
95% stator earth-fault protection, based on the neutral point fundamental frequency
displacement voltage, operating in parallel with the 100% stator earth-fault protection
function.
Requires injection unit REX060 and optional shunt resistor unit REX062 for correct
operation.
7.11.3
Description of input signals

The inputs to the 100% stator earth fault protection function block are as shown in the
table.
Table 163:
Input signal
7.11.4
Description of various inputs

Description
USV
The measured injection voltage. This signal is taken from a pre-processor block, the AI output.
The analog voltage input AI1 is linked to the phase A in the pre-processor block in the Signal
Matrix tool.
USI
The measured injection current. This signal is taken from a pre-processor block, the AI output.
In the pre-configured version, the analog voltage input AI2 is linked to the phase B in the preprocessor block in the Signal Matrix tool.
BLOCK
Input to block the function
ZREFSEL
The selection of any of the pre-defined reference impedances. The reference impedance can
differ, for example, with the generator breaker open or closed. Therefore, there is a possibility
to change from one set reference impedance to another. Five different reference impedances
are available.
Description of output signals

The outputs of the 100% stator earth fault protection function block are as shown in the
table.
398
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 164:
Output signal
Description of various outputs

Description
TRIP
Trip command signal
BFI
Signal activated, if the calculated fault resistance gets lower than the set level
ALARM
Signal activated after a set time delay, if the calculated fault resistance gets lower than the
set alarm level
OPCIRC
Signal indicating open stator injection circuit (interruption)
ERROR
Error signal which is boolean with values 0 and 1
ERRSTAT
Status coded signal giving type of error. See below table
RAVE
Measured stator resistance to earth in at an injected frequency (real part of the complex
impedance)
XAVE
Measured stator reactance to earth in at the injected frequency (imaginary part of the
complex impedance)
FREQV
Measured frequency of the injected voltage
RFAULT
ZREF
ZREFRE
The real part (resistance) of the used reference impedance
ZREFIM
The imaginary part (reactance) of the used reference impedance
VRMSSTAT
This signal is set true, if the measured RMS voltage is larger than the set limit ULimRMS
IRMSSTAT
This signal is set true, if the measured RMS current is larger than the set limit ILimRMS
ERRSTAT output signal

Convert the integer output signal to binary and see table below for interpretation of
individual bits:
Table 165:
Priority 3
Bit 7
Interference
detected
Definition of errors
Bit 6
Undercurrent
ERRSTAT output integer

Priority 2
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Undervoltage
Overcurrent
Overvoltage
Priority 3
Bit 2
Frequency
difference
Bit 1
Priority 1
No current
Bit 0
No voltage
The ERRSTAT description will be shown in clear text in ICT.

The priority of the signals is set that the group priority 1 overrides the group priority 2 and
3, and priority 2 overrides priority 3. Note that the ERRSTAT signal can enable several
error cases at the same time.
Following errors is detected and derived in the Error block:
Technical manual
399
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
B0 = Injected voltage signal not found

B1 = Injected current signal not found
B2 = Voltage and current signal frequency differs
B3 = Measured total RMS voltage too high
B4 = Measured total RMS current too high
B5 = Injected voltage signal too low
B6 = Injected current signal too low
B7 = External interference voltage detected
ERRSTAT = BitToInt[B7,,B1,B0] The priority of the error conditions that will be

flagged out:
Prio1 = B0, B1
Prio2 = B3, B4, B5, B6
Prio3 = B2, B7
RFAULT output signal

The injection equipment provides calculation of the fault resistance:
7.11.5
If the fault resistance is equal or below 10 k, RFAULT is displayed in

If the fault resistance is above 10 k, RFAULT is initially displayed as -1000 until
the fault resistance has reached a stable value and then displayed in
RFAULT displayed as -2000 means error
Function block
STTIPHIZ (64S)
USV*
TRIP
USI*
BFI
BLOCK
ALARM
ZREFSEL
OPCIRC
ERROR
ERRSTAT
RAVE
XAVE
FREQV
RFAULT
ZREF
ZREFRE
ZREFIM
VRMSSTAT
ANSI10000298 V1 EN
Figure 180:
400
STTIPHIZ (64S) function block
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.11.6
Signals
Table 166:
STTIPHIZ (64S) Input signals
Name
Type
Injected voltage signal
USI
GROUP
SIGNAL
Injected current signal (voltage over shunt)
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
ZREFSEL
INTEGER
Reference impedance selection
STTIPHIZ (64S) Output signals
Name
Table 168:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 167:
7.11.7
Default
USV
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
BFI
BOOLEAN
Initiate
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm
OPCIRC
BOOLEAN
Injection circuit open
ERROR
BOOLEAN
Error
ERRSTAT
INTEGER
Error indication
RAVE
REAL
Measured resistance to earth in Ohm at inj freq
XAVE
REAL
Measured reactance to earth in Ohm at inj freq
FREQV
REAL
Measured frequency of injected voltage into stator
RFAULT
REAL
Estimated fault resistance in Ohm
ZREF
INTEGER
ZREFRE
REAL
Used reference impedance real part in Ohm
ZREFIM
REAL
Used reference impedance imaginary part in Ohm
VRMSSTAT
BOOLEAN
RMS voltage status, TRUE when > VLimRMS
Settings
STTIPHIZ (64S) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Enable/Disable
RTrip
100 - 10000
Ohm
1000
Trip limit of fault resistance in Ohm
RAlarm
100 - 100000
Ohm
5000
Alarm limit of fault resistance in Ohm
tAlarm
0.00 - 600.00
1.00
30.00
Alarm time delay
OpenCircLim
100 - 10000000
Ohm
10000000
Open circuit limit in Ohm
VLimRMS
1 - 1000
100
RMS voltage level
Technical manual
401
Section 7
Table 169:
Name
FreqInjected
Table 170:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
STTIPHIZ (64S) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
50.000 - 250.000
Unit
Hz
Step
0.001
Default
87.000
Description
Injected frequency
STTIPHIZ (64S) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
k1Real
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
10000.000
Multiplication factor k1 for calibration, real part
k1Imag
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
0.000
Multiplication factor k1 for calibration,

imaginary part
k2Real
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
0.000
Addition factor k2 for calibration, real part in

Ohm
k2Imag
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
0.000
Addition factor k2 for calibration, imaginary part

in Ohm
RefR1
0.001 1000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
1000.000
RefX1
-1000000.000 1000000.000
Ohm
0.001
2000.000
RefR2
0.001 1000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
1000.000
RefX2
-1000000.000 1000000.000
Ohm
0.001
2000.000
RefR3
0.001 1000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
1000.000
RefX3
-1000000.000 1000000.000
Ohm
0.001
2000.000
RefR4
0.001 1000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
1000.000
RefX4
-1000000.000 1000000.000
Ohm
0.001
2000.000
RefR5
0.001 1000000000.000
Ohm
0.001
1000.000
RefX5
-1000000.000 1000000.000
Ohm
0.001
2000.000
Table 171:
Name
FilterLength
402
STTIPHIZ (64S) Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
1s
2s
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
1s
Description
Length of filter buffer
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.11.8
Monitored data
Table 172:
Name
7.11.9
STTIPHIZ (64S) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
RAVE
REAL
Ohm
Measured resistance to earth

in Ohm at inj freq
XAVE
REAL
Ohm
Measured reactance to earth

in Ohm at inj freq
FREQV
REAL
Hz
Measured frequency of
injected voltage into stator
RFAULT
REAL
Ohm

Ohm
ZREF
INTEGER
Selected reference
impedance number
ZREFRE
REAL
Ohm

real part in Ohm
ZREFIM
REAL
Ohm

imaginary part in Ohm
VRMSSTAT
BOOLEAN
RMS voltage status, TRUE

when > VLimRMS
Operation principle
The protection function is based on signal injection into a stator winding. These square
wave signals are generated in a separate injection unit REX060.
The injection signals are connected to the stator winding via:
secondary winding of a voltage transformer (VT) located at the stator neutral point
open delta winding of a three-phase VT set located at generator terminals
secondary winding of a distribution transformer (DT) located at the stator neutral
point; note that REX062 is typically required for such arrangement
open delta winding of a three-phase grounding transformer (GT) located at generator
terminals; note that REX062 is typically required for such arrangement
In the REX060 unit the injection voltage and current signals are amplified to a level
adapted to the analogue voltage inputs of IED. In IED the measured signals are processed
and evaluation will give detection of stator faults.
7.11.9.1
Configuration principle
Figure 181 shows a typical installation for stator injection.
Technical manual
403
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
10
Step-up
Transformer
U>
Vinj
1
Rshunt
GEN
Generator
100% SEF
I
RN
REX060/SIM module
8
3
95 % SEF
REG670
Generator Protection Panel
ANSI11000067 V1 EN
Figure 181:
404
Example installation for stator injection
Generator unit consisting of a synchronous generator and a step-up transformer
Grounding resistor for the stator winding
Neutral point VT which is used as injection point and also to provide galvanic separation between
primary circuit and injection equipment
Cable used to inject the square-wave signal into the stator circuit
Connection for measurement of injected current. This signal is amplified in REX060 before it is given to
REG670 for evaluation.
Cable for measurement of injected voltage at the injection point. This signal is amplified in REX060
before it is given to REG670 for evaluation.
Two VT inputs into REG670 which are used to measure injected current and voltage
Cable for 95% stator earth-fault protection
Separate VT input in REG670 used for 95% stator earth-fault protection
10
Protection for excessive over-voltages posed by generator. REX060 can withstand without damage
maximum voltage of 120V and when used together with REX062 up to 240V.
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The injection unit REX060

IED and
Injection
connectors
Top view
Back view
Power
connector
Front view
Keylock
LED
X11
X61
X81
18
Front-plate
X82
Rotor
Stator
Power
Backplane
HMI with logic
18
X62
PSM
Injection Stator
Injection Rotor
Injection LED
Injection switch
IEC11000015 V1 EN
Figure 182:
The REX060 unit is a common unit with it's own built-in Power Supply Module (PSM) of
the same type as used in the IED that can be equipped for either rotor or stator ground fault
protection, or for both. The REX060 has specific injection modules for rotor and stator
protection. The REX060 generates square wave signals, where one is used for injection to
the stator neutral point and the other to the field winding circuit (rotor circuit), if
configured for both stator and rotor protection. The injected voltages and currents are
measured by the unit and amplified, giving voltage signals both for the injected voltage
and current, and adapted to the analogue inputs of IED. The injection unit REX060 shall
be located close to the IED.
For the stator ground fault protection, there are some settings necessary for REX060:
System frequency: 50/60 Hz

Injected frequency for stator neutral point is settable in 1 Hz steps 50 250 Hz.
VT/DT maximum fundamental frequency voltage during ground fault in the stator
winding
REX060 will also continuously check the measured signal for detection of saturation
which could cause error in the evaluation in IED. If saturation level is reached, a binary
output contact is activated, which is connected to IED. Also other errors in injection will
activate another output contact to IED for blocking the function.
Stator injection output is protected against voltages exceeding maximum operating range
(10% of rated VT/DT) by a relay blocking the injection circuit. This blocking remains
blocked by stored status in non-volatile memory. Note REX060 is designed to cope with
such voltages of up to 120V. When optional REX062 resistor unit is used, REX060 can
cope with voltages of up to 240V at injection point.
Technical manual
405
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The output is also protected by a fuse. If this fuse is blown, it is caused by external voltage
source, since the injection unit cannot provide enough energy to blow this fuse.
Refer to the Hardware section in this manual for a detailed description of REX060.
7.11.9.2
Generator system grounding methods

There are several principles for system grounding of synchronous generators. The choice
of grounding method depends on different factors:
Limitation of earth fault current at stator ground fault

Damping of transient overvoltages in the generator system
Required insulation level to withstand overvoltage in healthy phases at single
phase ground fault
or Y coupled stator windings
Connection of a single generator via a step up transformer or connection of more than
one generator via a common step up transformer
Normally the generator system has some kind of high resistance grounding, giving ground
fault current within the range 5 20 A, thus preventing serious damages in case of stator
ground faults. Direct grounding will give too high ground fault current level. Isolated
generator system will give risk of transient overvoltages.
Below some alternatives for generator system grounding are shown;
406
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
C
IEC110000066-1-en.vsd
IEC11000066 V1 EN
Figure 183:
Generator grounding alternatives
High-resistance grounding with a neutral point resistor
Effective high-resistance grounding via a distribution transformer
High-resistance grounding via a delta, grounded-wye transformer
These earthing alternatives are characterized by the following properties:

A: High-resistance grounding with a neutral point resistor
This grounding method utilizes a high resistance in the primary circuit by inserting
resistor RN between the generator neutral and the ground. The actual resistance value of
RN is generally in order of k. Such high resistance is required in order to limit the primary
ground fault current to a quite small value (i.e. always < 20A and quite often < 10A
primary). Actual primary ground fault current can be calculated as follows:
EF_Max
G _ Ph - Ph
3 RN
EQUATION2515 V1 EN
where:
RN
is the ohmic value of the primary resistor
UG_Ph-Ph
is the protected generator rated phase-to-phase voltage
Technical manual
407
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Typically a VT is connected in parallel with this resistor in order to measure voltage in the
stator neutral point.
The VT must have a rating of at least 100VA and a rated secondary
winding voltage of up to 120V. It must adhere to IEC 61869-3:2011
section 5.5.301 Rated Output Values and the standard values specified
according to burden range II.
The maximum voltage on the secondary side of the VT for an ground fault at generator
terminals can be calculated as:
U EF_Max =
U G _ Ph - Ph
3
U2
U1
EQUATION2516 V1 EN
where:
U2/U1
is the turn (i.e. rated voltage) ratio of the VT
UG_Ph-Ph
is the protected generator rated phase to phase voltage
B: Effective high-resistance grounding via a distribution transformer

This earthing method utilizes a distribution transformer that provides high resistance in
the primary circuit by utilizing a small resistor RN connected to the secondary winding of
the distribution transformer. The primary winding of the distribution transformer is
connected between the generator neutral and ground. The actual resistance value RN is
generally extremely small (i.e. typically < 1); however, the imposed ohmic value to the
primary circuit becomes quite high (i.e. in the order of k). The equivalent resistance in
the primary circuit can be calculated as follows:
2
U1
REq =
RN
U2
EQUATION2517 V1 EN
where:
408
U1/U2
is the turn (i.e. rated voltage) ratio of the distribution transformer
RN
is the ohmic value of the resistor connected to the secondary winding
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The distribution transformer typically has rating of several kVA (e.g. 33kVA) and rated
secondary winding voltage of up to 240V. Note that maximum voltage on the secondary
side of the distribution transformer for an ground fault at generator terminals can be
calculated as follows:
U EF_Max =
U G _ Ph - Ph
3
U2
U1
EQUATION2516 V1 EN
where:
U2/U1
is the turn (i.e. rated voltage) ratio of the distribution transformer
UG_Ph-Ph
Note that in case of an ground fault in the stator, the secondary current through the RN
resistor will be often in order of couple of hundred amperes. This maximum secondary
current can be calculated as follows:
I EF _ Sec =
U EF _ Max
RN
EQUATION2518 V1 EN
C: High-resistance grounding via a delta, grounded-wye transformer

This grounding method utilizes a specially constructed three-phase, five-limb power
transformer that provides high resistance in the primary circuit by utilizing a relatively
small resistor RN connected to the secondary open-delta connected windings. The primary
windings of this transformer is star (i.e. wye) connected and this neutral point is directly
connected to ground. The actual resistance value RN is relatively small (i.e. typically <
5); however, the imposed ohmic value to the primary circuit becomes quite high (i.e. in
the order of k). The equivalent resistance in the primary circuit can be calculated as
follows:
2
U1
REq =
RN
3 U 2
EQUATION2519 V1 EN
where:
Technical manual
409
Section 7
U1/U2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
is the turn (i.e. rated voltage) ratio of one phase of the power transformer, e.g.
8 kV
3
500V
3
EQUATION2521 V1 EN
RN
is the ohmic value of a resistor connected to the secondary open-delta windings
The three-phase power transformer typically has rating of several tens of kVA (e.g.
129kVA) and rated secondary winding voltage of up to 550V. Note that maximum voltage
across secondary resistor RN for an ground fault at generator terminals can be calculated
as follows:
U EF_Max =
3 U G _ Ph - Ph
U2
U1
EQUATION2520 V1 EN
where:
U2/U1
is the turn (i.e. rated voltage) ratio of one phase of the power transformer, e.g.
500V
3
8 kV
3
EQUATION2522 V1 EN
UG_Ph-Ph
Note that in case of an ground fault in the stator, the secondary current through the RN
resistor will be often in order of couple of hundred amperes. This maximum secondary
current can be calculated as follows:
I EF _ Sec =
U EF _ Max
RN
EQUATION2518 V1 EN
For all the alternatives the 100% stator earth fault protection can be applied.
410
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.11.9.3
100% Stator earth fault protection function

The injection to the stator is schematically shown in figure 184. It should be observed that
in this figure injection equivalent circuit is also shown with all impedances and injection
generator related to the primary side of the neutral point voltage transformer. Points a &
b indicate connection terminals for the injection equipment. Similar equivalent circuit can
be drawn for all other types of generator stator grounding shown in latter figures.
Z Bare
Z Measured
Z series
Cstat
R fault
Iinj
a
VN
Rf
Cstat
RN
ZmT
+
Vinj
-
b
Iinj
+
RN
Stator Reference
Impedance ZRef
Vinj
-
b
ANSI11000008 V1 EN
Figure 184:
High-resistance generator grounding with a neutral point resistor
There are some alternatives for connection of the neutral point resistor as shown in figure
185 (low voltage neutral point resistor connected via a DT).
Technical manual
411
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Cstat
Iinj
a
+
RN
Vinj
b
ANSI11000009 V1 EN
Figure 185:
Effective high-resistance generator grounding via a distribution

transformer
Another alternative is shown in figure 186 (High-resistance grounding via a delta,

grounded-wye transformer). In this case the transformer must withstand the large
secondary current caused by primary ground fault. The resistor typically has to be divided
as shown in figure 186 to limit the voltage to the injection equipment in case of ground
fault at the generator terminal. This voltage is often in the range 400 500 V. As the open
delta connection gives three times the zero sequence phase voltage this gives too high
voltage at the injection point if the resistance is not divided as shown in the figure 186 . By
dividing the resistor in two parts it shall be ensured that maximum voltage imposed back
on injection equipment is equal to or less than 240V.
412
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
I inj
RN
C stat
Vinj
b
ANSI11000010 V1 EN
Figure 186:
High-resistance generator grounding via a delta, grounded-wye

transformer
It is also possible to make the injection via VT open delta connection, as shown in figure
187.
Technical manual
413
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
V1 / V2
Y
I inj
+
Rd
Vinj
-
stat
V
R d >> 1 RN
V2
RN
ANSI11000011 V1 EN
Figure 187:
Injection via open delta VT connection
It must be observed that the resistor Rd is normally applied for ferro-resonance damping.
The resistance Rd is will have very little contribution to the ground fault current as it has
high resistance. This injection principle can be used for applications with various
generator system grounding methods. It is therefore recommended to make the injection
via the open delta VT on the terminal side in most applications.
Accuracy for STTIPHIZ (64S) is installation dependent and it mainly depends on the
characteristic of grounding or voltage transformer used to inject signal into the stator.
Note that large variation of the ambient temperature and variation of stator capacitance
414
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
and conductance to ground between standstill and fully loaded machine will also limit the
possible setting level for the alarm stage. As a consequence 10 k sensitivity can be
typically reached without problem. Depending on particular installation alarm sensitivity
of up to 50 k may be reached at steady state operating condition of the machine.
Note that it is possible to connect two REG670 in parallel to the REX060 injection unit in
order to obtain redundant measurement in two separate IEDs. However, at commissioning
both REG670 IEDs must be connected during calibration procedure.
7.11.9.4
General measurement of ground fault impedance

From the REX060 the injected voltage and current are delivered as AC voltages to IED.
The injected voltage and current is measured and analyzed in the protection function
software within IED. The measured injected voltage and current are first processed by
means of special filtering so that the signals are referred to the injected frequency only.
The bare complex impedance is, see fig 184:
Z bare =
U Inj
I Inj
EQUATION2500 V1 EN
An equivalent circuit for the measured impedance is shown in figure 176.
ZMeasured
ZBare
Z series
Iinj
+
Rf
Z shunt
Uinj
-
IEC11000003 V1 EN
Figure 188:
Equivalent of the impedance measurement
In non-faulted operation Rf is very large. A healthy impedance is calculated as:
Technical manual
415
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Z Measured = k1 Z bare + k 2
EQUATION2501 V1 EN
For definition of k1 and k2, see figure 177

The factors k1 and k2 [] are derived from measurements during commissioning, where
calibration to known fault resistance will be used to convert the measurement to true
primary impedance. The factor k1 will compensate for transformer ratio and other factors
to achieve impedance values related to the primary system. The factor k2 [] will
compensate for the series impedance Zseries
The healthy impedance measured at non-faulted conditions is referred to as the reference
impedance in further text.
In IED the measured impedance is compared to the reference impedance. In case of an
ground fault, the fault impedance is estimated and compared to the set values RAlarm and
RTrip.
If the measured impedance is larger than the setting openCircuitLimit, the output OPCIRC
is set TRUE. If OPCIRC is set, it means there is a strong likelihood that the generator
neutral resistor is not anymore connected to ground, since only the capacitive part in the
circuit is left. The open circuit is only applied on the stator winding protection. To make
the open circuit limit more stable a hysteresis is added. If OPCIRC is TRUE, the measured
fault impedance must drop below open circuit limit * (1 - OpenCircLim) to reset. The
hysteresis is hidden and set to a default value of 10% of open Circuit limit for the stator.
Open- circuit
characteristics
no open- circuit
open- circuit
Open Circuit
Hysteresis
{Z
Measured
} re
openCircuitLimit
IEC11000073 V1 EN
Figure 189:
Open circuit characteristics
Blocking: The output OPCIRC is blocked during an error occurring and during
initialization of function.
Detailed Set: If the total measured real part of the impedance is greater than the setting
OpenCircLim the output OPCIRC is TRUE, see figure 176.
416
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.11.9.5
Measuring reference impedance

The healthy impedance is equal to the parallel connection of the neutral point resistor
(RN), the capacitive reactance between the stator windings and ground (1/Cstat), the
transformer magnetization impedance (ZmT) and the ground fault resistance (Rf). The
series resistance in the injection circuit is eliminated by k2. Rf is very large in the nonfaulted case and the measured impedance is equal to the stator reference impedance:
1
Z ref
1
RN
+ jw C stat +
1
Z mT
EQUATION2502 V1 EN
Where
w = 2p finj
EQUATION2503 V1 EN
The injected frequency finj of the square wave, is a set value, deviating from the
fundamental frequency (50 or 60 Hz). The injected frequency can be set within the range
50 250 Hz with recommend value 87 Hz in 50 Hz systems and 103 Hz in 60 Hz systems.
The reference impedance can vary depending on the operational state. The reason for this
can be the following:
The influence from the impedance ZmT will be different when the generator is standstill and when it is in operation
The capacitance to ground will vary if the generator breaker is open or closed
The capacitance will vary if the generator is energized or not depending on stator end
winding corona protection
Non-linearity of used injection transformer, different properties at low and high total
voltage and temperature changes
Impedance to ground is affected by auxiliary loads connected between generator and
unit transformer. If these loads vary, the estimated ground fault resistance will be
affected.
The difference from the first reference impedance is identified by monitoring impedance
(RAVE + jXRAVE) during different operation modes. This impedance is available as a
service value from the stator function both on built-in HMI and in ICT tool. If the
difference is significant more than one reference impedance is required. In the ICT up to
five different sets of reference impedances can be derived during commissioning for
different states of operation and downloaded to the protection function as different values
Technical manual
417
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
of the reference impedance; RefRn and RefXn where n = 1, 2, and up to 5. Switching of

reference impedance can be made automatically.
During commissioning ICT also makes cross-calculations between acquired
references, giving basically the calculated fault resistance between each existing
reference combination. This would be the fault resistance measured by the function when
the reference change occurs from one reference to another if the real generator impedance
stays the same, in other words a worst case scenario.
RMS voltage (rmsVolt) value at the injection point can be used for detecting when a
reference needs to be changed and logical outputs can be set to reflect whether the RMS
voltage is higher or lower than a prescribed value. There is one such output for the voltage
signal and one for the current signal. It is advantageous to use RMS to determine a change
of machine condition because the RMS makes a distinction between the measured values
and the total amplitude of the signal. The standstill condition only contains the injected
frequency, while the full load condition and full speed condition contains other
frequencies, which amplitudes may change under varying machine conditions.
In case of a stator ground fault with fault impedance Zf the measured admittance will be:
1
Z
1
Z ref
1
Zf
EQUATION2513 V1 EN
and this gives:
1
Zf
1
Z
1
Z ref
EQUATION2514 V1 EN
and the real part gives the fault conductance:

1
1
1
= Re Z Z ref
Rf
EQUATION2421 V1 EN
In the settings there are given two resistance levels:
RAlarm given in . If
R f < RAlarm
EQUATION2524 V1 EN
418
an alarm signal ALARM is given after a set delay tAlarm.

RTrip given in . If
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
R f < RTrip
EQUATION2523 V1 EN
a start signal BFI is given.

If the fault resistance is slightly below the set value RTrip the trip time will be about 10 s
with default filter length of 1 s. If the fault resistance is estimated to 0 the trip delay will
be 2 s with default filter length of 1 s. For values in between the delay will follow linear
interpolation describing the fault resistance time relation, as shown in figure 190.
Note that actual tripping time is dependent on the set parameter FilterLength which has
default value of 1s.
Trip time
10 FilterLength
2 FilterLength
Fault resistance
RTrip
RAlarm
IEC11000002 V1 EN
Figure 190:
Trip time characteristic as function of fault resistance
During run-up and shut down of the generator, i.e. when the rotational speed of the
generator changes, there will occur harmonic voltages with varying frequency at the
injection equipment connection point (for example see voltage generator Vn in Figure
184). If such frequencies interfere with the injected frequency this might create an error in
the fault resistance estimation. Such situations are identified in the function and the
function is automatically stabilized to prevent unwanted operation of the protection.
In connection with this calibration the reference impedance is also derived.
Technical manual
419
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
It is possible to have up to five different reference impedances. The need to change

reference impedance is due to different operating conditions for the generator, for
instance:
1.
2.
3.
Generator stand still

Generator running, not synchronized to the power network
Generator in normal operation, synchronized to the power network
The following automatic choice for the actual reference impedance can for example be
made:
Generator voltage < set value and generator circuit breaker open: Reference
impedance 1
Generator voltage > set value and generator circuit breaker open: Reference
impedance 2
Generator voltage > set value and generator circuit breaker closed: Reference
impedance 3
The monitoring, enabled in ICT, will give indication if several reference impedance
values are needed.
From the measured impedance the stator ground fault resistance can be estimated since the
reference impedance is known. An alarm level () is set at a higher value and the ALARM
signal is activated after a set alarm delay time. A trip level () is also set at a lower value.
When the trip level is reached a TRIP signal is activated as shown in figure 190.
420
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.11.9.6
Simplified logic diagram

STTIPHIZ
Uinj
Rshunt
2
6
Rf
Z Measured
Compare &
Evaluate
I Inj
u_i_sef
U Inj
u_u_sef
Z Bare
X
K2
K1
ZRef1
ZRef2
REX060
ZRef3
ZRef4
SELECT REFERENCE
ZRef5
95% Trip
tON=0.5s
t
a
a>b
b
UN
UN> = 5%
un
95% Stator earth fault protection
REG670
IEC10000325 V1 EN
Figure 191:
Simplified logic diagram for 100% stator earth fault protection STTIPHIZ
The 100% stator earth fault protection function receives amplified injected voltage and current via
the REX060 unit as two voltage signals. (Voltage inputs in the REG670).
The phasor of injected voltage UInj and phasor of injected current IInj is calculated by using special
filter from raw samples. Observe that phasors are calculated for the injected frequency.
The complex bare impedance is calculated from Uinj / Iinj.
4, 5
The complex measured impedance is derived as ZMeasured = Zbare*k1 + k2.
The fault resistance (RFault) is calculated from the complex measured impedance and a selected
complex reference.
Selection of one (out of maximum 5) ZRef.
Fourier filter to derive the phasor of zero sequence voltage at fundamental frequency
The 95% stator earth fault zero sequence over voltage function must operate in parallel with
STTIPHIZ.
Technical manual
421
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Rf
OR
Alarm
Adaptive
TripDelay
Trip
IEC10000326-3.vsd
IEC10000326 V2 EN
Figure 192:
STTIPHIZ alarm and trip logic
If the fault resistance Rf is smaller than RAlarm and last longer than set alarm delay, output
ALARM is set. If the fault resistance Rf is smaller than RTrip, output signal TRIP is set after
the calculated time. For trip time delay, see fig 190
7.11.10
Technical data
Table 173:
STTIPHIZ technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Can be reached at
steady state operating
condition of the machine
50 k
Typically
10 k
Injection frequency
(50.000 - 250.000) Hz
0.1 Hz
Injection voltage
240 V
Trip limit of fault resistance
(100 - 10000)
5% of 1 k at Rf 1 k
Alarm limit of fault resistance
(100 - 100000)
5% of 1 k at Rf 1 k
10% of 10 k at 1 k < Rf 10 k
Fault resistance sensitivity
422
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip time, start at Rf ~ 0 and filter

length = 1 s
1.00 s typically
Trip time, trip at Rf ~ 0 and filter

length = 1 s
3.00 s typically
Alarm time delay at Rf ~ 0 and

filter length = 1 s
(0.00 - 600.00) s
0.2% or 2.00 s whichever is greater
7.12
Under impedance protection for generators and

transformers ZGVPDIS
7.12.1
Identification
Under impedance function for
generators and transformers
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ZGVPDIS
ANSI/
IEEEidentification
21G
S00346 V1 EN
7.12.2
Functionality
The under impedance protection is a three zone full scheme impedance protection using
offset mho characteristics for detecting faults in the generator, generator-transformer and
transmission system. The three zones have fully independent measuring loops and
settings. The functionality also comprises an under voltage seal-in feature to ensure
issuing of a trip even if the current transformer goes into saturation and, in addition, the
positive-sequence-based load encroachment feature for the second and the third
impedance zone. Built-in compensation for the step-up transformer vector group
connection is available.
Technical manual
423
Section 7
7.12.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
ZGVPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKUV
TRIP
TRZ1
TRZ2
TRZ3
27 Trip
PICKUP
PU_Z1
PU_Z2
PU_Z3
27 PU
ANSI14000063 V1 EN
Figure 193:
7.12.4
Signals
Table 174:
Name
ZGVPDIS (21) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Connection for current sample signals
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Connection for voltage sample signals
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of the function
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
Block due to fuse failure
BLKUV
BOOLEAN
Block of the under voltage seal in
Table 175:
Name
424
ZGVPDIS (21) function block
ZGVPDIS (21) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General Trip
TRZ1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal Zone 1
TRZ2
BOOLEAN
Trip signal Zone 2
TRZ3
BOOLEAN
Trip signal Zone 3
27 Trip
BOOLEAN
Trip from Under voltage seal in
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Pickup
PU_Z1
BOOLEAN
Pick up Zone 1
PU_Z2
BOOLEAN
Pick up Zone 2
PU_Z3
BOOLEAN
Pick up zone 3
27 PU
BOOLEAN
Pick up under voltage seal in
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.12.5
Table 176:
Name
Settings
ZGVPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
On
Disabled
ImpedanceAng
5 - 90
Deg
80
Impedance angle in degrees, common for all

zones
IMinOp
5 - 80
%IB
10
Minimum operate phase current
OpModeZ1
Disabled
PP Loops
PP Loops
Operation mode of Zone 1: Off/Ph-Ph loops
Z1Fwd
3.0 - 100.0
% Zb
0.1
8.0
Zone 1 forward reach in % of rated impedance,

100%=full load
Z1Rev
3.0 - 100.0
% Zb
0.1
8.0
Zone 1 reverse reach in % of rated impedance,

100%=full load
tZ1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay to operate for Zone 1
OpModeZ2
Disabled
PP Loops
EnhancedReach
EnhancedReach
Operation mode of Zone 2: Off/Ph-Ph/

EnhancedReach
Z2Fwd
3.0 - 200.0
% Zb
0.1
15.0

100%=full load
Z2Rev
3.0 - 200.0
% Zb
0.1
8.0

100%=full load
tZ2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
OpModeZ3
Disabled
PP Loops
EnhancedReach
EnhancedReach
Operation mode of Zone 3: Disable/Ph-Ph/

EnhancedReach
Z3Fwd
3.0 - 200.0
% Zb
0.1
75.0

100%=full load
Z3Rev
3.0 - 200.0
% Zb
0.1
8.0

100%=full load
tZ3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.500
OpMode27pickup
Disabled
Z2pick up
Z3pick up
Disabled
Enable under voltage seal in (Disable/Z2Start/

Z3Start)
27_COMP
5 - 90
%VB
70
Pickup value of under voltage seal in
timeDelay27
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Time delay to operate for under voltage seal in
Technical manual
425
Section 7
Table 177:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
ZGVPDIS (21) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
RLd
5 - 120
% Zb
50
Resistive reach in % for load encroachment

charateristics
LdAngle
5 - 85
Deg
38
Load encroachment inclination of load angular

sector
LoadEnchModZ2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable load encroachement for Zone 2 enable/

disable
LoadEnchModZ3
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enable load encroachement for Zone 3 enable/

disable
Table 178:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.12.6
ZGVPDIS (21) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
1 - 12
Step
Description
groups
Monitored data
Table 179:
ZGVPDIS (21) Monitored data
Name
7.12.7
Default
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VA
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase A
VB
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase B
VC
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase C
IA
REAL
Current in phase A
IB
REAL
Current in phase B
IC
REAL
Current in phase C
Operation principle
The reach values for all the zones are set in percentage of impedance base value. The
impedance base value is calculated using the generator current and voltage ratings.
The base value of impedance can be calculated according to equation 93.
ZBase =
VBase
3 IBase
(Equation 93)
Where,
ZBase
426
is the base value of impedance
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VBase
is the line-to-line voltage rating at the generator terminal
IBase
is the line current rating at the generator terminal
The minimum trip current is provided using the setting IMinOp.

All the outputs will be blocked by activation of the BLOCK or BLKZ input.
Offset mho characteristic

ZGVPDIS consists of three distance elements operated for three zones separately. Each
zone consists of measuring loops which uses self-polarized offset mho characteristics
with both forward and reverse reach settings for the detection of the fault in the respective
zone. The operating characteristics of all the three zones are shown in Figure 194. The
ImpedanceAngle setting is common to all three zones.
jX
Offset Mho, Zone3
Offset Mho, Zone2

Offset Mho, Zone1
ImpedanceAng
R
IEC11000294 V2 EN
Figure 194:
Offset mho characteristics of three zones
The complete functionality is shown in figure 195.
Technical manual
427
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
V3P
I3P
BLKZ
BLOCK
PU_Z1
ZONE 1
TRZ1
OpModetZ1
Z1Fw
Z1Rev
tZ1
PICKUP
OR
PU_Z2
ZONE 2
OpModetZ2
Z2Fw
Z2Rev
tZ2
LoadEnchModZ2
TRZ2
TRIP
OR
OR
ZONE 3
PU_Z3
OpModetZ3
Z3Fw
Z3Rev
tZ3
LoadEnchModZ3
TRZ3
LoadEnch
RLd
LdAngle
UVSealIn
27 Trip
OpMode27pickup
27_COMP
timeDelay27
27 PU
BLOCKUV
ANSI11000295 V2 EN
Figure 195:
7.12.7.1
Block diagram of ZGVPDIS
Operation principle of zone 1

In general, the zone 1 must cover the generator winding, the cables or busbars and step up
transformer.
Under impedance functionality is provided as selective protection for the phase-to-phase
faults in zone 1. Hence the functionality of zone 1 includes only phase-to-phase measuring
loops.
Zone 1 functionality can be set to PP Loops or Disabled using the setting OpModeZ1.
428
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Figure 196 shows the functionality of zone 1.

BLOCK
BLKZ
V3P
I3P
Comparator
ZAB <
EnableZone1
Z1Fw
Z1Rev
pickupZone1
Timer Logic
Comparator
ZBC
<
EnableZone1
Z1Fw
Z1Rev
OR
tripZone1
tOpDelayZ1
opModetZ1
Comparator
ZCA <
EnableZone1
Z1Fw
Z1Rev
ANSI11000297_1.en.vsd
ANSI11000297 V1 EN
Figure 196:
Block diagram of zone 1
The functionality included in zone 1:
Comparator to detect, if the operating impedance has entered inside zone 1 offset mho
characteristic.
All three phase-to-phase loops are implemented separately.
Forward and reverse reach values are provided in percentage of impedance base value
at generator.
Trip time delay is provided.
Comparator characteristics
The comparator consists of offset mho characteristics. Three individual comparators are
provided in the three phase-to-phase loops. The offset mho characteristic is as shown in
figure 197.
Technical manual
429
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
I AB jX
I A B Z1FW
Vcomp1= VAB - I AB Z1FW
Vcomp 2 = VA B + IABZ1REV
I A B jX
- I AB Z 1REV
ANSI11000296 V1 EN
Figure 197:
Simplified offset mho characteristics for A-B fault in zone 1
Criteria: Operation occurs if 90 270.

In the above characteristics, Z1Fwd and Z1Rev are the forward and reverse reach
percentage values and ImpedanceAng is the characteristic angle provided for the zone 1
operation region.
Z 1Fwd
Z 1Fwd ImpedanceAng
(Equation 94)
Z 1Rev = Z 1rev ImpedanceAng

(Equation 95)
Voltage and current phasors selected for phase-to-phase loops are:

Sl.No
Phase-to-phase loop
1
A-B
B-C
C-A
Voltage phasor
Current phasor
VAB
IAB
VBC
IBC
VCA
ICA
Trip time
The operate time delay for zone 1 can be provided using the setting tZ1.
430
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.12.7.2

Figure 198 shows the function block diagram describing the functionality of zone 2.
EnableZone2 = Max Curr PhG
V3P
Zero
sequence
Voltage
Compensation
I3P
BLOCK
BLKZ
Max Curr
Loop logic
Measuring Loop
phase-to-ground
(ZA<,ZB<,ZC<)
T
F
EnableZone2
Z2Fwd
Z2Rev
LineAngle
PU_Z2
OR
AND
Measuring Loop
phase-to-phase
(ZAB<,ZBC<,ZCA<)
EnableZone2
Z2Fwd
Z2Rev
LineAngle
AND
LoadEnchMod2
Timer
T
TRZ2
tZ2
OpModeZ2
Load
Encroachment
RLd
LdAngle
ANSI11000298 V2 EN
Figure 198:
Block diagram of zone 2
Zone 2 can be used to cover up to the HV side of the transformer and the HV bus bar. It
also covers to some degree, the stator winding. The time to trip is provided in order to
coordinate with the zone 1 element on the shortest outgoing line from the bus.
Zone 2 coverage provides backup for the phase-to-phase and three-phase faults in
generator. It also protects LV winding of generator transformer and phase-to-ground,
phase-to-phase and three-phase faults in the HV side of transformer and bus. A separate
maximum current feature is provided in phase-to-ground loop selection which gives
correct reach measurement for phase-to-phase fault on HV side. Zero sequence
compensation for the phase voltages is given in phase-to-ground measuring loops in order
to prevent operation for the stator ground faults.
Zone 2 can be selected for different measuring loops using the setting OpModeZ2. The
OpModeZ2 can be selected as Disabled or PP Loops or EnhancedReach. If the OpModeZ2
is selected as EnhancedReach, the loop used for measurements is the phase-to-earth
measuring loop (AG, BG and CG) which is with maximum phase current of all the three
phase currents.
Technical manual
431
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Figure 199 shows the logic to detect the phase to ground loop with maximum phase
current.
a
i1Mag
pickupPh1
NOT
i2Mag
a
b
pickupPh2
AND
AND
OR
pickup
B
a==b
pickupPh3
OR
i3Mag
AND
a==b
NOT
AND
AND
C
a==b
MAX
ANSI11000307 V1 EN
Figure 199:
Logic diagram for the selection of the maximum current loop
The phase-to-ground voltage is compensated with zero sequence voltage in order to avoid
the function operating for ground faults in zone 1, that is, complete generator stator
winding and LV winding of the power transformer.
The reach settings for zone 2 can be provided using the Z2Fwd, Z2Rev and ImpedanceAng
settings. The Z2Fwd is forward reach setting and Z2Rev is reverse reach setting. The offset
mho characteristic for phase-to-ground loop is shown in Figure 200. The offset mho
characteristics for phase-to-phase loop is shown in Figure 201.
432
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
I A jX
I A Z 2 FW
Vcomp1 = V AG - V 0 - I A Z 2 FW
Vcomp 2 = V AG - V 0 + I A Z 2 REV
I A jX
- I A Z 2 REV
ANSI11000299 V1 EN
Figure 200:
Simplified offset mho characteristics for A-to-G fault in zone 2

IAB jX
IAB Z 2 FW
Vcomp1 = VAB - IAB Z 2 FW
Vcomp 2 = VAB + IAB Z 2 REV
IAB jX
- IAB Z 2 REV
ANSI11000300 V1 EN
Figure 201:
Simplified offset mho characteristics for A-to-B fault in zone 2
Technical manual
433
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Operation occurs if 90 270.

Impedance defined in the Figure 200 and 201 is described in equation 96.
Z 2 Fwd
Z 2 Fwd ImpedanceAng
Z 2 Rev
Z 2 Rev ImpedanceAng
(Equation 96)
GUID-007D6357-B7CF-4C21-B772-2245F06C83A2 V2 EN
Voltage and current phasors selected for different measuring loops:

Phase Phase:
Sl.No
Measuring Loop
A-B
B-C
C-A
Voltage Phasor
Current Phasor
VAB
IAB
VBC
IBC
VCA
ICA
Enhanced Reach:
Sl.No
Measuring Loop
IA
IB
IC
Voltage Phasor
Current Phasor
VAG - V 0
IA
VBG - V 0
IB
VCG - V 0
IC
Trip time
The operate time delay for zone 2 can be provided using the setting tZ2.
Zone 2 is provided load encroachment detection feature based on positive sequence
components measurements.. This feature avoids the function from operating due to load
encroachment. The load encroachment feature for zone 2 can be set using
LoadEnchModZ2 to Enabled or Disabled.
7.12.7.3

Zone 3 is used to cover up to the HV side of the transformer, interconnecting bus network
and outgoing lines. The time to trip should be provided in order to coordinate with the
transmission line protection.
434
Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The Zone3 functionality is same as zone2, hence the explanation of zone 2 applies for zone
3, except the zone 3 has separate reach (Z3Fw, Z3Rev), operate timer (tZ3) and load
encroachment enable (LoadEnchModZ3) settings.
7.12.7.4
Load encroachment
The load encroachment characteristics can be set for zone2 and zone3. Load
encroachment can be enabled for zone 2 by setting LoadEnchModZ2 to Enabled.
Similarly the load encroachment for zone 3 can be enabled by setting LoadEnchModZ3 to
Enabled.
The load encroachment characteristic is based on positive sequence quantities and can be
set using the settings RLd and LdAngle.
RLd is the positive sequence resistive reach value in percentage. LdAngle is angle in
degrees from the origin to the resistive axis as shown in Figure 202.
ANSI11000304 V1 EN
Figure 202:
Load encroachment characteristics
Technical manual
435
Section 7
7.12.7.5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Under voltage seal-in

The under voltage seal-in logic ensures the trip under fault condition, where as under
impedance function will reset due to CT saturation. The pickup signal of zone 2 and zone
3 elements trigger the under voltage seal-in. This can be selected using the setting
OpMode27pickup. The setting OpMode27pickup can be selected as Disabled or Z2pick up
or Z3pick up. Select Z2Start to choose zone 2 for triggering the seal-in logic. Similarly,
select Z2pick up to choose zone 3 for triggering the seal-in logic.
Under voltage seal-in is activated from the criterion based on line-to-line voltage
magnitude. The voltage criteria checks by comparing all three line-to-line voltage levels
with the level given by the setting parameter 27_COMP. If any loop detects lower voltage,
the under voltage seal-in logic gets triggered, provided the respective selected zone start
is also high. Once the under voltage seal-in logic is triggered, the pick-up signal 27 PU
becomes high. If it is constantly high for a time longer than the setting timeDelay27, the
tripping signal 27 Trip is issued as a pulse signal with a duration of one second.
Figure 203 shows the functionality of under voltage seal-in for zone 2 and zone 3.
q-1
BLOCK
BLKUV
OR
AND
Zone 2 picukp
AND
EnableUV =
0 = UV OFF
1 =Z2 pickup
2 =Z3 pickup
int
b0
uP1P2
OR
b1
Zone 3 pickup
27_COMP
27 PU
Drop-Off
timer
0
10 ms
OR
timeDelay27
0
27 Trip
tPulse = 1sec
q1
AND
a<b
Comparator
with
hysterisis relative as 5%
uP2P3
27_COMP
a<b
OR
Comparator
with
uP3P1
27_COMP
a
a<b
b
Comparator
with
ANSI11000306 V3 EN
Figure 203:
436
Under voltage seal-in for zone 2 and zone 3

Technical manual
Section 7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
7.12.8
Technical data
Table 180:
ZGVPDIS (21) Technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
Forward reach
(3.0 - 200.0)% of Zn
where Zn=VBase/3IBase
5.0% of set impedance

Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1 - 1.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.5 - 30) x In
Reverse reach
(3.0 - 200.0)% of Zn
where Zn=VBase/3IBase
5.0% of set impedance

Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1 - 1.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.5 - 30) x In
Impedance angle
(5 - 90) degrees
Reset ratio
105% typically
Pickup time at 1.2 to 0.8 x set

impedance
Min. = 15 ms
Independent time delay to operate

at 1.2 to 0.8 x set impedance
Max. = 35 ms
(0.000 60.000) s
Technical manual
greater
437
438
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 8
Current protection
8.1
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC

(50)
8.1.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Instantaneous phase overcurrent

protection 3-phase output
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50
PHPIOC
3I>>
SYMBOL-Z V1 EN
8.1.2
Functionality
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and
short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.
8.1.3
Function block
PHPIOC (50)
I3P*
BLOCK
MULTPU
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
ANSI04000391 V2 EN
Figure 204:
8.1.4
PHPIOC (50) function block
Signals
Technical manual
439
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 181:
PHPIOC (50) Input signals
Name
Type
Three phase current
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
MULTPU
BOOLEAN
Enable current pickup value multiplier
PHPIOC (50) Output signals
Name
Table 183:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 182:
8.1.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from any phase
TR_A
BOOLEAN
TR_B
BOOLEAN
TR_C
BOOLEAN
Settings
PHPIOC (50) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OpModeSel
2 out of 3
1 out of 3
1 out of 3
Select operation mode (2 of 3 / 1 of 3)
Pickup
5 - 2500
%IB
200
Phase current pickup in % of IBase
Table 184:
Name
MultPU
Table 185:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
440
PHPIOC (50) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
0.5 - 5.0
Unit
-
Step
0.1
Default
1.0
Description
Multiplier for operate current level
PHPIOC (50) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
groups
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 186:
Name
PHPIOC (50) Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PU_MinEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
Minimum settable operate phase current level

in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2 settings
PU_MaxEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
2500
Maximum settable operate phase current level

in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2 settings
8.1.6
Monitored data
Table 187:
Name
8.1.7
PHPIOC (50) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IA
REAL
Current in phase A
IB
REAL
Current in phase B
IC
REAL
Current in phase C
Operation principle
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental frequency
components, as well as sampled values of each phase current. These phase current values
are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output function
PHPIOC (50). In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set operation current
value of the function Pickup. If a phase current is larger than the set operation current a
signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal will, without delay,
activate the output signal TR_x(x=A, B or C) for this phase and the TRIP signal that is
common for all three phases.
There is an operation mode (OpModeSel) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the parameter
is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is set to 2 out of 3
at least two phase signals must be activated for trip.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current (MultPU)
via a binary input (MULTPU). In some applications the operation value needs to be
changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
PHPIOC (50) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.
Technical manual
441
Section 8
Current protection
8.1.8
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 188:
PHPIOC (50) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip current
(5-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95% at (502500)% of IBase
Trip time at 0 to 2 x Iset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 to 0 x Iset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 25 ms
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Min. = 5ms
Max. = 15ms
Min. = 25ms
Max. = 40 ms
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at t = 100 ms
8.2

OC4PTOC(51/67)
8.2.1
Identification
3-phase output
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51_67
OC4PTOC
TOC-REVA V2 EN
8.2.2
Functionality
The four step three-phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC (51/67) has
independent inverse time delay settings for steps 1 to 4.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional user
defined time characteristic.
442
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage polarized with memory. The
function can be set to be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
A second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block each
step individually.
8.2.3
Function block
OC4PTOC (51_67)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRST1
BLOCK
TRST2
BLKTR
TRST3
BLK1
TRST4
BLK2
TR_A
BLK3
TR_B
BLK4
TR_C
MULTPU1
TRST1_A
MULTPU2
TRST1_B
MULTPU3
TRST1_C
MULTPU4
TRST2_A
TRST2_B
TRST2_C
TRST3_A
TRST3_B
TRST3_C
TRST4_A
TRST4_B
TRST4_C
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
PU_ST3
PU_ST4
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
PU_ST2_C
PU_ST3_A
PU_ST3_B
PU_ST3_C
PU_ST4_A
PU_ST4_B
PU_ST4_C
2NDHARM
DIR_A
DIR_B
DIR_C
ANSI06000187 V2 EN
Figure 205:
OC4PTOC (51_67) function block
Technical manual
443
Section 8
Current protection
8.2.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 189:
Name
OC4PTOC (51_67) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of Step1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of Step2
BLK3
BOOLEAN
Block of Step3
BLK4
BOOLEAN
Block of Step4
MULTPU1
BOOLEAN
When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step1
MULTPU2
BOOLEAN
MULTPU3
BOOLEAN
MULTPU4
BOOLEAN
Table 190:
Name
OC4PTOC (51_67) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
TRST1
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal from step1
TRST2
BOOLEAN
TRST3
BOOLEAN
TRST4
BOOLEAN
TR_A
BOOLEAN
TR_B
BOOLEAN
TR_C
BOOLEAN
TRST1_A
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from step1 phase A
TRST1_B
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from step1 phase B
TRST1_C
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from step1 phase C
TRST2_A
BOOLEAN
TRST2_B
BOOLEAN
TRST2_C
BOOLEAN
TRST3_A
BOOLEAN
TRST3_B
BOOLEAN
444
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Description
TRST3_C
BOOLEAN
TRST4_A
BOOLEAN
TRST4_B
BOOLEAN
TRST4_C
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Common pickup signal
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
Common pickup signal from step1
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
PU_ST3
BOOLEAN
PU_ST4
BOOLEAN
PU_A
BOOLEAN
PU_B
BOOLEAN
PU_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_A
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from step1 phase A
PU_ST1_B
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from step1 phase B
PU_ST1_C
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from step1 phase C
PU_ST2_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST3_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST3_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST3_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST4_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST4_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST4_C
BOOLEAN
PU2NDHARM
BOOLEAN
Second harmonic detected
DIR_A
INTEGER
Direction for phase A
DIR_B
INTEGER
Direction for phase B
DIR_C
INTEGER
Direction for phase C
Technical manual
445
Section 8
Current protection
8.2.5
Table 191:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Settings
OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
AngleRCA
40 - 65
Deg
55
Relay characteristic angle (RCA)
AngleROA
40 - 89
Deg
80
Relay operation angle (ROA)
NumPhSel
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Number of phases required for phase selection

(1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
DirModeSel1
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of step 1 (Disabled, Nondir,

Forward, Reverse)
Characterist1
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time delay curve type for step 1
Pickup1
5 - 2500
%IB
1000
Operating phase current level for step 1 in % of

IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Def time delay or add time delay for inverse

char of step 1
TD1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
Time dial multiplier for the inverse time delay

for step 1
IMin1
1 - 10000
%IB
100
Minimum operate current for step1 in % of

IBase
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 1
MultPU1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Multiplier for current operate level for step 1
DirModeSel2
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

Forward, Reverse)
446
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist2
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Pickup2
5 - 2500
%IB
500

IBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400

char of step 2
TD2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for

step 2
IMin2
1 - 10000
%IB
50

IBase
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

step 2
MultPU2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
DirModeSel3
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

Forward, Reverse)
Characterist3
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Technical manual
447
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Pickup3
5 - 2500
%IB
250

IBase
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800

char of step 3
TD3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

step 3
IMin3
1 - 10000
%IB
33

IBase
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

step 3
MultPU3
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
DirModeSel4
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

Forward, Reverse)
Characterist4
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Pickup4
5 - 2500
%IB
175

IBase
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000

char of step 4
TD4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

for step 4
IMin4
1 - 10000
%IB
17

IBase
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

step 4
MultPU4
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
448
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 192:
Name
OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PUMinOpPhSel
1 - 100
%IB
Minimum current for phase selection in % of

IBase
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
%IB
20
Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in % of

fundamental curr
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset curve type for step 1
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
Constant reset time for step 1
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 1
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 1
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 1
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 1
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve for step 1
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve for step 1
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve for step 1
HarmBlock1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable block of step 1 for harmonic restraint
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 2
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

curve for step 2
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

curve for step 2
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

curve for step 2
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 2
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

curve for step 2
HarmBlock2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

Technical manual
449
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 3
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 3
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

curve for step 3
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

curve for step 3
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

curve for step 3
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 3
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

curve for step 3
HarmBlock3
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 4
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 4
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

curve for step 4
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

curve for step 4
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

curve for step 4
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 4
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

curve for step 4
HarmBlock4
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain
450
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 193:
Name
OC4PTOC (51_67) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MeasType
DFT
RMS
DFT
Selection between DFT and RMS

measurement
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
Table 194:
Name
OC4PTOC (51_67) Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PU1_MinEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
Minimum settable operating phase current

level for step 1 in % of IBase, for 61850 Ed.2
settings
PU1_MaxEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
2500
Maximum settable operating phase current

settings
PU2_MinEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB

settings
PU2_MaxEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
2500

settings
PU3_MinEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB

settings
PU3_MaxEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
2500

settings
PU4_MinEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB

settings
PU4_MaxEd2Set
5 - 2500
%IB
2500

settings
Technical manual
451
Section 8
Current protection
8.2.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Monitored data
Table 195:
Name
8.2.7
OC4PTOC (51_67) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
DIR_A
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction for phase A
DIR_B
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction for phase B
DIR_C
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
Direction for phase C
IA
REAL
Current in phase A
IB
REAL
Current in phase B
IC
REAL
Current in phase C
Operation principle
The Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC (51_67) is divided into four
different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and 4,
an operation mode is set by DirModeSelx: Disable/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.
The protection design can be divided into four parts:
The direction element

The harmonic restraint blocking function
The four step over current function
The mode selection
If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter
DirModeSelx shall be left to default value, Non-directional.
452
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
faultState
Direction
Element
I3P
dirPhAFlt
dirPhBFlt
dirPhCFlt
4 step over current

element
One element for each
step
faultState
PICKUP
V3P
TRIP
Harmonic
Restraint
Element
harmRestrBlock
enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
ANSI05000740 V2 EN
Figure 206:
Functional overview of OC4PTOC (51/67)
A common setting for all steps, NumPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase currents
to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out
of 3.
The sampled analog phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function block.
Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step phase
overcurrent protection 1 and 3-phase output function OC4PTOC (51/67), it is possible to
select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to select
either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).
If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and
higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option is
selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition to the
fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current DC
Technical manual
453
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values are fed
to OC4PTOC (51/67).
In a comparator, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the set operation current value
of the function (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3, Pickup4) for each phase current. If a phase
current is larger than the set operation current, outputs PICKUP, PU_STx, PU_A, PU_B
and PU_C are activated without delay. Output signals PU_A, PU_B and PU_C are
common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the activation. The
PICKUP signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall be noted that the
selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation of directional
part of OC4PTOC (51/67) .
Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local HMI
for OC4PTOC (51/67) function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in service
operational checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in relation
to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the preprocessing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain current level.
The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as current angle
in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the directional
function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement at close in
faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a combination of the
apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The following combinations are
used.
Phase-phase short circuit:
Vref _ AB = VA - VB
I dir _ AB = I A - I B
(Equation 97)
GUID-4F361BC7-6D91-47B5-8119-A27009C0AD6A V1 EN
Vref _ BC = VB - VC
I dir _ BC = I B - I C
(Equation 98)
Vref _ CA = VC - VA
I dir _ CA = IC - I A
(Equation 99)
Phase-ground short circuit:

454
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Vref _ A = VA
I dir _ A = I A
(Equation 100)
Vref _ B = VB
I dir _ B = I B
(Equation 101)
Vref _ C = VC
I dir _ C = I C
(Equation 102)
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds 4%

of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between
10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until
the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and an
angle window ROADir.
Technical manual
455
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Reverse
Uref
RCA
ROA
ROA
Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
IEC05000745 V1 EN
456
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Reverse
Vref
RCA
ROA
ROA
Forward
Idir
en05000745_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000745 V1 EN
Figure 207:
Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection
The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle sector
from AngleRCA for directional borders.
A minimum current for directional phase pickup current signal can be set.
PUMinOpPhSel is the pickup level for directional evaluation of IA, IB and IC. The
directional signals release the overcurrent measurement in respective phases if their
current amplitudes are higher than the pickup level (PUMinOpPhSel) and the direction of
the current is according to the set direction of the step.
If no blockings are given, the pickup signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available.It is
also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic.
The possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in section "Inverse
characteristics".
Technical manual
457
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
All four steps in OC4PTOC (51/67) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The
binary input BLKx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.
|IOP|
Pickupx
Characteristx=DefTime
a
AND
OR
a>b
0-tx
0
PUx
STx
AND
0-txMin
0
AND
Inve rse
Characteristx=Inve rse
DirModeSelx=Disa bled
OR
STAGE x_DIR_Int
DirModeSelx=Non-dire ctional
DirModeSelx=Forward
DirModeSelx=Reverse
FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
AND
OR
AND
ANSI12000008 V3 EN
Figure 208:
458
Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
I3P
DFWDLx
DFWDLxx
V3P
Directional
Element
AngleRCA
DREVLx
DREVLxx
FORWARD_int
Directional
Release
Block
AngleROA
REVERSE_int
STLx
PUminOpPhSel
Greater
Comparator
x- means three phases 1,2 and 3

xx means phase to phase 12,23,31
ANSI15000266 V1 EN
Figure 209:
OC4 directional release block diagram
Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse

characteristics".
There is a possibility to activate a preset change (MultiPUx, x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the set
operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the operation
value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching state.
The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The pickup signals from the
function can be blocked from the binary input BLK.The trip signals from the function can
be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
A harmonic restrain of the Four step overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC 51_67
can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental
frequency component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined by parameter
2ndHarmStab setting, any of the four overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by
parameter HarmRestrainx setting. When the 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active, the
OC4PTOC 51_67 function output signal ST2NDHRM will be set to logical value one.
Technical manual
459
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BLOCK
a
0.07*IBase
a>b
b
a
a>b
IOP
Extract second
harmonic current
component
Extract
fundamental
current component
AND
a
a>b
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
2ndHarmStab
IEC13000014 V2 EN
Figure 210:
8.2.8
Technical data
Table 196:
OC4PTOC (51/67) technical data
Function
Setting range
Accuracy
Trip current, step 1 - 4
(5-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95% at (502500)% of

lBase
Minimum operate current, step 1 - 4
(1-10000)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
(40.065.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
Relay operating angle (ROA)
(40.089.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
(5100)% of fundamental
2.0% of In
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x

Iset, step 1 - 4
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2 % or 35 ms whichever is greater
Minimum trip time for inverse

curves , step 1 - 4
(0.000-60.000) s
0.2 % or 35 ms whichever is
greater
Inverse time characteristics, see

table 977, table 978 and table 979
16 curve types
See table 977, table 978 and table

979
Trip time, pickup non-directional at

0 to 2 x Iset
Min. = 15 ms
Reset time, pickup non-directional

at 2 to 0 x Iset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
-
Max. = 30 ms

460
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Setting range
Accuracy
Operate time, start non-directional

at 0 to 10 x Iset
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at

10 to 0 x Iset
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
8.3
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC

(50N)
8.3.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Instantaneous residual overcurrent

protection
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50N
EFPIOC
IN>>
IEF V1 EN
8.3.2
Functionality
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N) has a low transient
overreach and short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous ground-fault
protection, with the reach limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line at
minimum source impedance. EFPIOC (50N) is configured to measure the residual current
from the three-phase current inputs and can be configured to measure the current from a
separate current input.
8.3.3
Function block
EFPIOC (50N)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKAR
MULTPU
TRIP
ANSI06000269 V2 EN
Figure 211:
EFPIOC (50N) function block
Technical manual
461
Section 8
Current protection
8.3.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 197:
EFPIOC (50N) Input signals
Name
Type
Three phase currents
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKAR
BOOLEAN
Block from auto recloser
MULTPU
BOOLEAN
Enable current multiplier
EFPIOC (50N) Output signals
Name
Type
TRIP
Table 199:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 198:
8.3.5
Default
I3P
Description
BOOLEAN
Trip signal
Settings
EFPIOC (50N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Pickup
5 - 2500
%IB
200
Operate residual current level in % of IBase
Table 200:
Name
MultPU
Table 201:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.3.6
EFPIOC (50N) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
0.5 - 5.0
Step
0.1
Default
1.0
Description
Multiplier for operate current level
EFPIOC (50N) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
groups
Monitored data
Table 202:
Name
IN
462
Unit
EFPIOC (50N) Monitored data

Type
REAL
Values (Range)
-
Unit
A
Description
Residual current
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.3.7
Operation principle
The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current, as well as
from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This current value is fed to
the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC,50N). In a comparator the
RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the function (Pickup). If the
residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is set
to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TRIP.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via a
binary input (enable multiplier MULTPU). In some applications the operation value
needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
EFPIOC (50N) function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals
from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated
during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.
8.3.8
Technical data
Table 203:
EFPIOC (50N) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip current
(5-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of In at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95% at (502500)% of lBase
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 15 ms
Min. = 25 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at t = 100 ms
Technical manual
463
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.4
Four step residual overcurrent protection, (Zero

sequence or negative sequence directionality)
EF4PTOC (51N/67N)
8.4.1
Identification
Four step residual overcurrent
protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
EF4PTOC
4(IN>)
4
4
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51N_67N
alt
TEF-REVA V2 EN
8.4.2
Functionality
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC (51N/67N) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step.
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined characteristic.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of
the steps.
IDir, VPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or negative
sequence.
Second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be used as main protection for phase-to-ground faults.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the
case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage
transformer circuit failure.
Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic
in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weak-end infeed
functionality are available as well.
Residual current can be calculated by summing the three phase currents or taking the input
from neutral CT
464
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.4.3
Function block
EF4PTOC (51N_67N)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRST1
I3PPOL*
TRST2
I3PDIR*
TRST3
BLOCK
TRST4
BLKTR
TRSOTF
BLK1
PICK UP
BLK2
PUST1
BLK3
PUST2
BLK4
PUST3
MULTPU1
PUST4
MULTPU2
PUSOTF
MULTPU3
PUFW
MULTPU4
PUREV
52A
2NDHARMD
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
ANSI06000424 V4 EN
Figure 212:
8.4.4
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function block
Signals
Table 204:
Name
EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group connection for operate current
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group connection for polarizing voltage
I3PPOL
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group connection for polarizing current
I3PDIR
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group connection for directional current
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
General block
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1 (Pickup and trip)
BLK2
BOOLEAN
BLK3
BOOLEAN
BLK4
BOOLEAN
MULTPU1
BOOLEAN
MULTPU2
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
465
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
MULTPU4
BOOLEAN
52a
BOOLEAN
Breaker position
CLOSECMD
BOOLEAN
Breaker close command
OPENCMD
BOOLEAN
Breaker open command
EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Output signals
Name
Table 206:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 205:
8.4.5
Default
MULTPU3
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General trip signal
TRST1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from step 1
TRST2
BOOLEAN
TRST3
BOOLEAN
TRST4
BOOLEAN
TRSOTF
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from switch onto fault function
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PUST1
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal step 1
PUST2
BOOLEAN
PUST3
BOOLEAN
PUST4
BOOLEAN
PUSOTF
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from switch onto fault function
PUFW
BOOLEAN
Pick up foward direction
PUREV
BOOLEAN
Pick up reverse direction
2NDHARMD
BOOLEAN
2nd harmonic block signal
Settings
EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
EnDir
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enabling the Directional calculation
AngleRCA
-180 - 180
Deg
65
Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA)
polMethod
Voltage
Current
Dual
Voltage
Type of polarization
466
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VPolMin
1 - 100
%VB
Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of

VBase
IPolMin
2 - 100
%IB
Minimum current level for polarization in % of

IBase
RNPol
0.50 - 1000.00
Ohm
0.01
5.00
Real part of source impedance used for current

polarisation
XNPol
0.50 - 3000.00
Ohm
0.01
40.00
Imaginary part of source imp. used for current

polarisation
INDirPU
1 - 100
%IB
10
Residual current level in % of IBase for

Direction release
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
Operate level of 2nd harmonic curr in % of

fundamental curr
BlkParTransf
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable blocking at energizing of parallel

transformers
Use_PUValue
ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4
ST4
Current pickup blocking at parallel transf

(step1, 2, 3 or 4)
SOTF
Disabled
SOTF
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime
Disabled
SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/Undertime/

SOTF&Undertime)
SOTFSel
Open
Closed
CloseCommand
Open
Select signal to activate SOTF: CB-Open/ Closed/ -Close cmd
StepForSOTF
Step 2
Step 3
Step 2
Select start from step 2 or 3 to start SOTF
HarmBlkSOTF
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable harmonic restrain function in SOTF
tSOTF
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Time delay for SOTF
t4U
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Switch-onto-fault active time
ActUndrTimeSel
CB position
CB command
CB position
Select signal to activate under time (CB Pos /

CB Command)
tUnderTime
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
Time delay for under time
DirModeSel1
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of step 1 (Off, Non-dir,

Forward, Reverse)
Technical manual
467
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist1
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Time delay characteristic for step 1
Pickup1
1 - 2500
%IB
100
Residual current operate level for step 1 in % of

IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

char of step 1
TD1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
Time multiplier for the step 1 selected time

characteristic
IMin1
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
100.00
Minimum operate residual current for step 1 in

% of IBase
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum operate time for inverse time

characteristic step 1
MultPU1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Multiplier for the residual current setting value

for step 1
HarmBlock1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
DirModeSel2
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

Forward, Reverse)
468
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist2
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Pickup2
1 - 2500
%IB
50

IBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400

char of step 2
TD2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

characteristic
IMin2
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
50

% of IBase
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

MultPU2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

for step 2
HarmBlock2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
DirModeSel3
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

Forward, Reverse)
Technical manual
469
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist3
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Pickup3
1 - 2500
%IB
33

IBase
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800

char of step 3
TD3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

characteristic
IMin3
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
33

% of IBase
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

MultPU3
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

for step 3
HarmBlock3
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
DirModeSel4
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

Forward, Reverse)
470
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist4
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Pickup4
1 - 2500
%IB
17

IBase
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200

char of step 4
TD4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

characteristic
IMin4
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
17

% of IBase
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

MultPU4
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

for step 4
HarmBlock4
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Table 207:
Name
EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Reset curve type for step1 (Instantaneous /

IEC / ANSI)
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
Reset time delay for step 1
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Param P for customized inverse trip time curve

for step 1
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Param A for customized inverse trip time curve

for step 1
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Param B for customized inverse trip time curve

for step 1
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Param C for customized inverse trip time curve

for step 1

Technical manual
471
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Param PR for customized inverse reset time

curve for step 1
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Param TR for customized inverse reset time

curve for step 1
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Param CR for customized inverse reset time

curve for step 1
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous

IEC / ANSI)
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

for step 2
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

for step 2
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

for step 2
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

for step 2
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

curve for step 2
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 2
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

curve for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous

IEC / ANSI)
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

for step 3
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

for step 3
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

for step 3
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

for step 3
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

curve for step 3
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 3
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

curve for step 3
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous

IEC / ANSI)
472
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

for step 4
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

for step 4
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

for step 4
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

for step 4
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

curve for step 4
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 4
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

curve for step 4
Table 208:
Name
Step
Default
Description
EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
SeqTypeIDir
Zero seq
Neg seq
Zero seq
Choice of measurand for directional current
SeqTypeIPol
Zero seq
Neg seq
Zero seq
Choice of measurand for polarizing current
SeqTypeVPol
Zero seq
Neg seq
Zero seq
Choice of measurand for polarizing voltage
Table 209:
Name
EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PU1_MinEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB
Minimum settable operate residual current

settings
PU1_MaxEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB
2500
Maximum settable operate residual current

settings
PU2_MinEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB

settings
PU2_MaxEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB
2500

settings
Technical manual
473
Section 8
Current protection
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PU3_MinEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB

settings
PU3_MaxEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB
2500

settings
PU4_MinEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB

settings
PU4_MaxEd2Set
1 - 2500
%IB
2500

settings
8.4.6
Monitored data
Table 210:
Name
8.4.7
EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IOp
REAL
Operating current level
VPol
REAL
kV
Polarizing voltage level
IPol
REAL
Polarizing current level
VPOLIANG
REAL
deg
Polarizing angle between

voltage and current
IPOLIANG
REAL
deg
Polarizing current angle
Operation principle
This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the
configuration tool:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I3P, input used for Operating Quantity. Supply the zero-sequence magnitude
measuring functionality.
V3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity. Supply either zero or negative
sequence voltage to the directional functionality
I3PPOL, input used for Current Polarizing Quantity. Provide polarizing current to
the directional functionality. This current is normally taken from the grounding of a
power transformer.
I3PDIR, input used for Directional detection. Supply either zero or negative
sequence current to the directional functionality.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
Configuration Tool within PCM600.
474
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.4.7.1
Operating quantity within the function

The function always uses Residual Current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The residual
current can be:
1.
directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to

the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/
67N) function input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for example, connected
to:
2.
parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases

(Holm-Green connection).
one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT).
one single current instrument transformer located between power system WYE
point and ground (that is, current transformer located in the neutral grounding
of a WYE connected transformer winding).
one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a
protected object (that is, current transformer located between two WYE points
of double WYE shunt capacitor bank).
calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in PCM600).
In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three inputs into
the pre-processing block by using the following formula (will take I2 from SMAI
AI3P connected to I3PDIR input which was connected to I3P input also):
If zero sequence current is selected,

I op = 3 Io = IA + IB + IC
(Equation 103)
where:
IA, IB, IC
are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor
magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC (51N/67N) protection to compare it with the set
operation current value of the four steps (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If the
residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in nondirectional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will,
without delay, activate the output signal PUSTx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a common
PICKUP signal.
Technical manual
475
Section 8
Current protection
8.4.7.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Internal polarizing
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction to
the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.
Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected the protection will use the residual voltage -3V0 as
polarizing quantity V3P.
This voltage can be:
1.
2.
directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to

67N) function input V3P). This dedicated IED VT input shall be then connected to
open delta winding of a three phase main VT.
calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) analog
function input V3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate -3V2 from the first
three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
VPol=3V0=(VA +VB +VC)

EQUATION2012 V1 EN
(Equation 105)
where:
VA, VB, VC
are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

In order to use this, all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED VT
inputs.
The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived.
This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional current, in order
to determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to enable
voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum
level defined by setting parameter VpolMin.
476
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
It shall be noted that residual voltage (-3V0) or negative sequence voltage (-3V2) is used
to determine the location of the ground fault. This insures the required inversion of the
polarizing voltage within the ground-fault function.
Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual current (3I0)
as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:
1.
directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600 to

67N) function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then typically
connected to one single current transformer located between power system WYE
point and ground (current transformer located in the WYE point of a WYE connected
transformer winding).
2.
For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input can
be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three phases
(Holm-Green connection).
calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first three
inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
I Pol = 3 Io = IA + IB + IC
(Equation 107)
where:
IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor is then
multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance in order to calculate
equivalent polarizing voltage VIPol in accordance with the following formula:
VIPol = Zo S I Pol = ( RNPol + j XNPOL ) I Pol
(Equation 108)
which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).
In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger
than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.
Technical manual
477
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
VTotPol = VVPol + VIPol = -3V0 + Z 0 s IPol = -3V0 + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) IPol
(Equation 109)
Vpol and Ipol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence component
depending upon the user selection.
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage VTotPol will be used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the ground fault (Forward/
Reverse).
8.4.7.3
External polarizing for ground-fault function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting
is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKx to provide external
directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following
functions if available in the IED:
1.
2.
8.4.7.4
Distance protection directional function.

Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose protection
function.
Directional detection for ground fault function

Zero sequence components will be used for detecting directionality for ground fault
function. In some cases zero sequence quantities might detect directionality wrong.
Negative sequence quantities will be used in such scenario. The user can select either zero
sequence components or negative sequence components for detecting directionality with
the parameter SeqTypeIPol. I3PDIR input always connected to the same source as I3P
input.
8.4.7.5
Base quantities within the protection

The base quantities are entered as global settings for all functions in the IED. Base current
(IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes.
Base voltage (VBase) shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected
object in primary kV.
478
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.4.7.6
Internal ground-fault protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
8.4.7.7
Four residual overcurrent steps.

Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based ground-fault protection
schemes (permissive or blocking).
Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking
during switching of parallel transformers.
Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of breaker
problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.
Four residual overcurrent steps

Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring
quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in facilities:
Directional mode can be set to Disabled/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By this

parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted that the
directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the residual overcurrent
step itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common directional
supervision element.
Residual current pickup value.
Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter setting
it is possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the ground-fault protection.
Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available. For the
complete list of available inverse curves please refer to section "Inverse
characteristics".
Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For the
complete list of available reset curves please refer to section "".
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite
time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and
parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (Enabled/Disabled). By this
parameter setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second harmonic
content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.
Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary
signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup
value when function binary input MULTPUx has logical value 1.
Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 213.
Technical manual
479
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BLKTR
EMULTX
IMinx
Characteristx=DefTime
a>b
tx
|IOP|
AND
TRSTx
OR
a>b
MultPUx
PUSTx
AND
T
F
Pickupx
AND
Inverse
tMin
BLKx
BLOCK
Characteristx=Inverse
2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int
OR
HarmRestrainx=Disabled
DirModex=Off
OR
STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
DirModex=Reverse
FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
AND
OR
AND
ANSI10000008 V3 EN
Figure 213:
Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4
The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output signals
for respective step, and PUSTx and TRSTx, can be blocked from the binary input BLKx.
The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.
8.4.7.8
Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function
It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent steps shall
be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional
supervision element and the integrated directional comparison function.
The protection has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current lop is
always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting polMethod.
The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the following three ways:
480
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
1.
2.
3.
When polMethod = Voltage, VPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
WhenpolMethod = Dual, VPol + IPol ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 214, in order to determine the direction of the ground fault.
Operating area
PUREV
0.6 * INDirPU
Characteristic for reverse

release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg
Characteristic
for PUREV
40% of
INDirPU
RCA +85 deg
RCA
65
VPol = -3V0
-RCA +85 deg
RCA -85 deg
Characteristic for forward

release of measuring steps
INDirPU
PUFW
I op = 3I0
Operating area
Characteristic
for PUFW
ANSI11000243-1-en.ai
ANSI11000243 V1 EN
Figure 214:
Operating characteristic for ground-fault directional element using the

zero sequence components
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:
Directional element will be internally enabled to trip as soon as Iop is bigger than 40%
of IDirPU and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and
reverse areas in the operating characteristic.
Technical manual
481
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will set
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function output binary signals:
1.
2.
PUFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is bigger than
setting parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects fault in
forward direction.
PUREV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is bigger
than 60% of setting parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects
fault in reverse direction.
These signals shall be used for communication based ground-fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step is shown in figure 215:
482
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
|IopDir|
a
a>b
b
0.6
PUREV
AND
REVERSE_Int
X
a
a>b
IDirPU
0.4
FORWARD_Int
PUFW
AND
FWD
polMethod=Voltage
OR
polMethod=Dual
VPolMin
VPol
polMethod=Current
OR
IPol
0.0
RNPol
XNPol
T
0.0 F
IPolMin
I3PDIR
AND
FORWARD_Int
AND
REVERSE_Int
Directional
Characteristic
AngleRCA
VTPol
RVS
T
F
Complex
Number
VIPol
0.0
T
F
STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int
OR
AND
BLOCK
ANSI07000067 V4 EN
Figure 215:
8.4.7.9
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step
Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC can
be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx. If the ratio of the 2nd
harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual
current exceeds the preset level (defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab) then ST2NDHRM
function output signal is set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the
function block will be applicable.
Blocking from 2nd harmonic element activates if all three criteria are satisfied:
Technical manual
483
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
1.
2.
3.
Current fundamental frequency component > IMinOpHarmBlk

Current second harmonic component > IMinOpHarmBlk
Ratio of the 2nd harmoinc component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined parameter
2ndHarmStab setting
If all the above three conditions are fulfilled then ST2NDHRM function output signal is
set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the function block is
applicable.
In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can be set
in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be required to
stabilize EF4PTOC (51N67N) during switching of parallel transformers in the station. In
case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the
transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the asymmetric
inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial saturation of the
transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of
the inrush currents of the two transformers is in phase opposition. The summation of the
two currents thus gives a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current is
however significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel
transformer energizing, is a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore we
have high 2nd harmonic current component initially. After a short period this current is
however small and the normal 2nd harmonic blocking resets. If the BlkParTransf function
is activated the 2nd harmonic restrain signal is latched as long as the residual current
measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level by using setting
UseStartValue.
This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-in
feature is activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
1.
2.
3.
Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On.

Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms.
Residual current magnitude is higher than the set pickup value for one of the four
residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting Use_PUValue it is possible to
select which one of the four pickup values that will be used (Pickup1 or Pickup2 or
Pickup3 or Pickup4).
Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking signal
is sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by parameter
setting Use_PUValue (see condition 3 above).
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in figure 216.
484
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BLOCK
a
0.07*IBase
IOP
a>b
Extract second
harmonic current
component
Extract
fundamental
current component
a>b
2NDHARMD
AND
a>b
2ndHarmStab
q-1
0-70ms
0
OR
AND
OR
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a>b
Use_PUValue
Pickup1>
Pickup2>
Pickup3>
Pickup4>
ANSI13000015 V1 EN
Figure 216:
8.4.7.10
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers feature
Switch on to fault feature

Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic
(SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either SOTF
or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk to close it
onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The SOTF logic
will enable fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during which SOTF and
Under-Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the setting parameter t4U.
The SOTF logic uses the pickup signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected by
setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from change in
circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The setting
Technical manual
485
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
parameter SOTFSel can be set for activation of CB position open change, CB position
closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current pickup from step 2 or
3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay tSOTF. This delay is
normally set to a short time (default 200 ms).
The Under-Time logic always uses the pickup signal from the step 4. The Under-Time
logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function. The
Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This enables
high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker closing.
This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately after switching
of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is activated either from change in circuit
breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command pulses. This selection is
done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a pickup from step 4 this logic will
give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a relatively short time
(default 300 ms). Practically the Under-Time logic acts as circuit breaker polediscrepancy protection, but it is only active immediately after breaker switching. The
Under-Time logic can only be used in solidly or low impedance grounded systems.
SOTF
Open
t4U
Closed
SOTFSel
Close command
tSOTF
AND
AND
PUST2
StepForSOTF
PUST3
OperationMode
BLOCK
Disabled
SOTF
UNDERTIME
TRIP
Undertime
tUnderTime
2nd Harmonic
EnHarmRestSOTF
AND
Undertime
OR
Open
OR
Close
t4U
Close command
ActUndrTimeSel
AND
PUST4
ANSI06000643 V4 EN
Figure 217:
486
Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function is shown in figure 218:
signal to
communication
scheme
Directional Check
Element
INPol
3V0
Direction
Element
4
operatingCurrent
ground FaultDirection
3I0
step over current

element
One element for each
step
TRIP
angleValid
DirModeSel
enableDir
3I0
Harmonic
Restraint
Element
harmRestrBlock
or
pickup step 2 , 3 and 4

Blocking at parallel
transformers
SwitchOnToFault
DirModeSel
Mode
Selection
enableDir
TRIP
CB
pos
or cmd
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
en 06000376_ ansi. vsd

ANSI06000376 V1 EN
Figure 218:
8.4.8
Functional overview of EF4PTOC (51N/67N)
Technical data
Table 211:
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95% at (10-2500)% of lBase
Relay characteristic angle

(RCA)
(-180 to 180) degrees
2.0 degrees
Trip current for directional release
(1100)% of lBase
For RCA 60 degrees:

2.5% of In at I In
2.5% of I at I > In
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x

Iset, step 1 - 4
(0.000-60.000) s
greater

Technical manual
487
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Minimum operate time for inverse

curves, step 1 - 4
(0.000 - 60.000) s
greater
Inverse time characteristics, see

Table 977, Table 978 and Table
979
16 curve types
See Table 977, Table 978 and

Table 979
(5100)% of fundamental
2.0% of In
Minimum polarizing voltage
(1100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Minimum polarizing current
(2-100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
Real part of source Z used for

current polarization
(0.50-1000.00) W/phase
Imaginary part of source Z used

for current polarization
(0.503000.00) W/phase
Trip time, pickup non-directional

at 0 to 2 x Iset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, pickup nondirectional at 2 to 0 x Iset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Trip time, pickup non-directional

at 0 to 10 x Iset
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
8.5
Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (46I2)
8.5.1
Identification
Four step negative sequence
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2

device number
NS4PTOC
I2
46I2
4
4
alt
IEC10000053 V1 EN
488
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.5.2
Functionality
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC, (4612) ) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional user
defined characteristic.
The directional function is voltage polarized.
NS4PTOC (4612) can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of the
steps.
NS4PTOC (4612) can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase
short circuits, phase-phase-ground short circuits and single phase ground faults.
NS4PTOC (4612) can also be used to provide a system backup for example, in the case of
the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer
circuit failure.
Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication logic
in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. The same logic as for directional zero
sequence current can be used. Current reversal and weak-end infeed functionality are
available.
8.5.3
Function block
NS4PTOC (46I2)
I3P*
I3PDIR*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLK1
BLK2
BLK3
BLK4
MULTPU1
MULTPU2
MULTPU3
MULTPU4
TRIP
TRST1
TRST2
TRST3
TRST4
PICK UP
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
PU_ST3
PU_ST4
PUFW
PUREV
ANSI10000054 V1 EN
Figure 219:
NS4PTOC (4612) function block
Technical manual
489
Section 8
Current protection
8.5.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 212:
Name
Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group connection for operate current
I3PDIR
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group connection for directional current
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group connection for polarizing voltage
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
General block
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
BLK1
BOOLEAN
BLK2
BOOLEAN
BLK3
BOOLEAN
BLK4
BOOLEAN
MULTPU1
BOOLEAN
MULTPU2
BOOLEAN
MULTPU3
BOOLEAN
MULTPU4
BOOLEAN
Table 213:
Name
490
NS4PTOC (46I2) Input signals
NS4PTOC (46I2) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General trip signal
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
TRST3
BOOLEAN
TRST4
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
PU_ST3
BOOLEAN
PU_ST4
BOOLEAN
PUFW
BOOLEAN
Forward directional pickup signal
PUREV
BOOLEAN
Reverse directional pickup signal
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.5.5
Table 214:
Name
Settings
NS4PTOC (46I2) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
EnDir
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enabling the Directional calculation
AngleRCA
-180 - 180
Deg
65
VPolMin
1 - 100
%VB
Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of

VBase
I2>Dir
1 - 100
%IB
10
Residual current level in % of IBase for

Direction release
DirModeSel1
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

Forward, Reverse)
Characterist1
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
I2-1>
1 - 2500
%IB
100
Negative sequence current op level for step 1

in % of IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of step 1 when definite time char. is

selected
TD1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

characteristic
IMin1
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
100.00
Minimum current for step 1
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

MultPU1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Multiplier for scaling the current setting value

for step 1
Technical manual
491
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DirModeSel2
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

Forward, Reverse)
Characterist2
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
I2-2>
1 - 2500
%IB
50

in % of IBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400

selected
TD2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

characteristic
IMin2
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
50
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

MultPU2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

for step 2
DirModeSel3
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

Forward, Reverse)
492
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Characterist3
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
I2-3>
1 - 2500
%IB
33

in % of IBase
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800

selected
TD3
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

characteristic
IMin3
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
33
t3Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

MultPU3
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

for step 3
DirModeSel4
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional

Forward, Reverse)
Characterist4
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Technical manual
493
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
I2-4>
1 - 2500
%IB
17

in % of IBase
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200

selected
TD4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05

characteristic
IMin4
1.00 - 10000.00
%IB
1.00
17
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

MultPU4
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

for step 4
Table 215:
Name
NS4PTOC (46I2) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous

IEC / ANSI)
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

for step 1
tACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

for step 1
tBCrv1
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

for step 1
tCCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

for step 1
tPRCrv1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

curve for step 1
tTRCrv1
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step
tCRCrv1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

curve for step 1
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous

IEC / ANSI)
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

for step 2
tACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

for step 2
tBCrv2
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

for step 2
494
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tCCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

for step 2
tPRCrv2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

curve for step 2
tTRCrv2
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 2
tCRCrv2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Param C for customized inverse reset time

curve for step 2
ResetTypeCrv3
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous

IEC / ANSI)
tReset3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

for step 3
tACrv3
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

for step 3
tBCrv3
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

for step 3
tCCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

for step 3
tPRCrv3
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

curve for step 3
tTRCrv3
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 3
tCRCrv3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

curve for step 3
ResetTypeCrv4
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous

IEC / ANSI)
tReset4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tPCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

for step 4
tACrv4
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500

for step 4
tBCrv4
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00

for step 4
tCCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

for step 4
tPRCrv4
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

curve for step 4
tTRCrv4
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500

curve for step 4
tCRCrv4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

curve for step 4
Technical manual
495
Section 8
Current protection
Table 216:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.5.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
NS4PTOC (46I2) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
1 - 12
Default
1
Description
groups
Monitored data
Table 217:
NS4PTOC (46I2) Monitored data
Name
8.5.7
Step
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IOp
REAL
Operating current level
VPol
REAL
kV
Polarizing voltage level
VPOLIANG
REAL
deg
Polarizing angle between

voltage and current
Operation principle
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (4612) function has the
following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool:
1.
2.
3.
I3P, input used for Operating Quantity.

V3P, input used for Polarizing Quantity.
I3PDIR, input used for "Directional finding"
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in the
Configuration Tool within PCM600.
8.5.7.1
Operating quantity within the function

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (46I2) function always
uses negative sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative sequence
current is calculated from three-phase current input within the IED. The pre-processing
block calculates I2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the
following formula:
I2 =
1
3
IA + a IB + a IC
496
)
(Equation 110)
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
where:
IA, IB, IC
are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1120 deg
a2
similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1240 deg
The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC (4612) protection to compare it with
the set operation current value of the four steps (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4).
If the negative sequence current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used
in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This
signal, without delay, activates the output signal PU_STx (x=1 - 4) for this step and a
common PICKUP signal.
8.5.7.2
Internal polarizing facility of the function

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the fault
(Forward/Reverse).
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (4612) function uses the
voltage polarizing method.
NS4PTOC (4612) uses the negative sequence voltage -V2 as polarizing quantity V3P.
This voltage is calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED. The preprocessing block calculates -V2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block
by using the following formula:
V2 =
1
3
VA + a VB + a VC
2
where:
VA, VB, VC
are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

To use this all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.
This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine
the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing the magnitude
of polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined by setting VpolMin.
Technical manual
497
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Note that V2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the required
inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.
8.5.7.3
External polarizing for negative sequence function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this setting
is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKx (where x indicates the
relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional control (that is, torque
control) by for example using one of the following functions if available in the IED:
8.5.7.4
Distance protection directional function

Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose protection
function
Internal negative sequence protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
Four negative sequence overcurrent steps

Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with
integrated directional comparison step for communication based negative sequence
protection schemes (permissive or blocking)
Each part is described separately in the following sections.
8.5.7.5
Four negative sequence overcurrent stages

Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as
measuring quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in
facilities:
498
Operating mode (Disabled/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this parameter

setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the directional decision
(Forward/Reverse) is not made within the overcurrent stage itself. The direction of
the fault is determined in common Directional Supervision Element described in
the next paragraph.
Negative sequence current pickup value.
Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter setting
it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative sequence overcurrent
function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are available.
For the complete list of available inverse curves, refer to Chapter ""
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this

parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For the
complete list of available reset curves, refer to Chapter ""
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite
time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and
parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by external
binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase negative sequence
current pickup value when function binary input MULTPUx has logical value 1.
Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in the
following figure:
ANSI09000684 V1 EN
Figure 220:
Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4
NS4PTOC (4612) can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The pickup
signals from NS4PTOC (4612) for each stage can be blocked from the binary input
BLKx. The trip signals from NS4PTOC (4612) can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.
Technical manual
499
Section 8
Current protection
8.5.7.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function
At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must be set as
directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision
element and the integrated directional comparison function.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 214, to determine the direction of the fault.
Reverse
Area
Vpol=-V2
AngleRCA
Forward
Area
Iop = I2
ANSI10000031 V1 EN
Figure 221:
Operating characteristic for fault directional element
Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:
500
Directional element is internally enable to trip as soon as Iop is bigger than 40% of
INDirPU and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and
reverse areas in the operating characteristic.
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set

NS4PTOC (4612) output binary signals:
1.
2.
PUFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward area, see
fig 214 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting INDirPU)
PUREV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse
area, see fig 214. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting
INDirPU)
These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection communication
schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step is shown in figure 215:
|IopDir|
a
a>b
b
0.6
PUREV
AND
REVERSE_Int
X
a
a>b
IDirPU
0.4
FORWARD_Int
PUFW
AND
FWD
polMethod=Voltage
OR
polMethod=Dual
VPolMin
VPol
polMethod=Current
OR
IPol
0.0
RNPol
XNPol
T
0.0 F
IPolMin
I3PDIR
AND
FORWARD_Int
AND
REVERSE_Int
Directional
Characteristic
AngleRCA
VTPol
RVS
T
F
Complex
Number
VIPol
0.0
T
F
STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int
OR
AND
BLOCK
ANSI07000067 V4 EN
Figure 222:
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step
Technical manual
501
Section 8
Current protection
8.5.8
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 218:
NS4PTOC (46I2) technical data
Function
502
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip value, step 1 - 4
(1-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase
Independent time delay at 0 to 2

x Iset, step 1 - 4
(0.000-60.000) s
greater
Minimum operate time for

inverse curves, step 1 - 4
(0.000 - 60.000) s
greater
Inverse time characteristics,

see table 977, table 978 and
table 979
16 curve types

979
Minimum trip current, step 1 - 4
(1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In

(RCA)
2.0 degrees
Trip current for directional

release
(1100)% of IBase
For RCA 60 degrees:

2.5% of In at I In
2.5% of I at I > In
Minimum polarizing voltage
(1100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Minimum polarizing current
(2-100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
Real part of negative sequence

source impedance used for
current polarization
(0.50-1000.00) W/phase
Imaginary part of negative

sequence source impedance
used for current polarization
(0.503000.00) W/phase
Trip time, pickup nondirectional at 0 to 2 x Iset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Trip time, pickup nondirectional at 0 to 10 x Iset
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Transient overreach
<10% at = 100 ms
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.6
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE (67N)
8.6.1
Identification
Sensitive directional residual over
current and power protection
8.6.2
IEC 61850
identification
SDEPSDE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
67N
Functionality
In networks with high impedance grounding, the phase-to-ground fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for ground fault
protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-ground fault current is almost independent
of the fault location in the network.
Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-toground faults in high impedance grounded networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and the
residual voltage (-3V0), compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively, the
function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle .
Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-toground faults in high impedance grounded networks. The protection uses the residual
power component 3I0 3V0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and
the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle.
A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or
inverse time delay.
A backup neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional residual
overvoltage protection.
In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to ground via the capacitances
between the phase conductors and ground, the residual current always has -90 phase shift
compared to the residual voltage (3V0). The characteristic angle is chosen to -90 in such
a network.
In resistance grounded networks or in Petersen coil grounded, with a parallel resistor, the
active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for
the ground fault detection. In such networks, the characteristic angle is chosen to 0.
Technical manual
503
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
As the magnitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the selectivity
of the ground fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.
When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when
should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider the
following:
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity. The setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of IBase, 1 A
or 5 A. This sensitivity is in most cases sufficient in high impedance network
applications, if the measuring CT ratio is not too high.
Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time
characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance grounded networks, with
large capacitive ground fault currents. In such networks, the active fault current
would be small and by using sensitive directional residual power protection, the
operating quantity is elevated. Therefore, better possibility to detect ground faults. In
addition, in low impedance grounded networks, the inverse time characteristic gives
better time-selectivity in case of high zero-resistive fault currents.
Phase
currents
IN
Phase
ground
voltages
VN
ANSI13000013 V1 EN
Figure 223:
Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block
Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxA, GRPxB and GRPxC. For 3I0
to be calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.
Directional and power functionality uses IN and VN. If a connection is made to GRPxN
this signal is used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxA, GRPxB and GRPxC the
internally calculated sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3V0) will be used.
504
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.6.3
Function block
SDEPSDE (67N)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRDIRIN
BLOCK
TRNDIN
BLKTR
TRVN
BLKTRDIR
PICKUP
BLKNDN
PUDIRIN
BLKVN
PUNDIN
PUVN
PUFW
PUREV
CND
VNREL
ANSI07000032 V2 EN
Figure 224:
8.6.4
SDEPSDE (67N) function block
Signals
Table 219:
Name
SDEPSDE (67N) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for current
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for voltage
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Blocks all the outputs of the function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Blocks the trip outputs of the function
BLKTRDIR
BOOLEAN
Blocks the directional operate outputs of the function
BLKNDN
BOOLEAN
Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs
BLKVN
BOOLEAN
Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs
Table 220:
Name
SDEPSDE (67N) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General trip of the function
TRDIRIN
BOOLEAN
Trip of the directional residual over current function
TRNDIN
BOOLEAN
Trip of non directional residual over current
TRVN
BOOLEAN
Trip of non directional residual over voltage
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
General pickup of the function
PUDIRIN
BOOLEAN
Pickup of the directional residual over current function
PUNDIN
BOOLEAN
Pickup of non directional residual over current
PUVN
BOOLEAN
Pickup of non directional residual over voltage
Technical manual
505
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
8.6.5
Table 221:
Name
Type
Description
PUFW
BOOLEAN
Pickup of directional function for a fault in forward

direction
PUREV
BOOLEAN
Pickup of directional function for a fault in reverse

direction
CND
INTEGER
Direction of fault. A general signal common to all three

mode of residual over current protection
VNREL
BOOLEAN
Residual voltage release of operation of all directional

modes
Settings
SDEPSDE (67N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OpModeSel
3I0Cosfi
3I03V0Cosfi
3I0 and fi
3I0Cosfi
Selection of operation mode for protection
DirMode
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction of operation forward or reverse
RCADir
-179 - 180
Deg
-90
Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp
-10.0 - 10.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
Relay characteristic angle compensation
ROADir
0 - 90
Deg
90
Relay open angle ROA used as release in

phase mode, in deg
INCosPhiPU
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
1.00
Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res over

current in % of IBase
SN_PU
0.25 - 200.00
%SB
0.01
10.00
Set level for 3I03U0cosFi, starting inv time

count in % of SBase
INDirPU
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
5.00
Set level for directional residual over current

prot in % of IBase
tDef
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Definite time delay directional residual

overcurrent, in sec
SRef
0.03 - 200.00
%SB
0.01
10.00
Reference value of res power for inverse time

count in % of SBase
TDSN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
0.10
Time multiplier setting for directional residual

power mode
OpINNonDir
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation of non-directional residual

INNonDirPU
1.00 - 400.00
%IB
0.01
10.00
Set level for non directional residual over

current in % of IBase
tINNonDir
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Time delay for non-directional residual over

current, in sec
506
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TimeChar
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type
IEC Norm. inv.
Operation curve selection for IDMT operation
t_MinTripDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.040
Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves, in

sec
TDIN
0.05 - 2.00
0.01
1.00
IDMT time mult for non-dir res over current

protection
OpVN
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation of non-directional residual

overvoltage protection
VN_PU
1.00 - 200.00
%VB
0.01
20.00
Set level for non-directional residual over

voltage in % of VBase
tVN
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Time delay for non-directional residual over

voltage, in sec
INRelPU
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
1.00
Residual release current for all directional

modes in % of IBase
VNRelPU
1.00 - 300.00
%VB
0.01
3.00
Residual release voltage for all direction

modes in % of UBase
Step
Default
Table 222:
Name
SDEPSDE (67N) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.040
Time delay used for reset of definite timers, in

sec
tPCrv
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Setting P for customer programmable curve
tACrv
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
13.500
Setting A for customer programmable curve
tBCrv
0.00 - 20.00
0.01
0.00
Setting B for customer programmable curve
tCCrv
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Setting C for customer programmable curve
ResetTypeCrv
Immediate
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
IEC Reset
Reset mode when current drops off.
tPRCrv
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500
Setting PR for customer programmable curve
tTRCrv
0.005 - 100.000
0.001
13.500
Setting TR for customer programmable curve
tCRCrv
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Setting CR for customer programmable curve
Technical manual
Description
507
Section 8
Current protection
Table 223:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Table 224:
Name
RotResV
8.6.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
SDEPSDE (67N) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
Global base selection for function groups
SDEPSDE (67N) Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
0 deg
180 deg
Unit
Step
Default
180 deg
Description
Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if
necessary
Monitored data
Table 225:
SDEPSDE (67N) Monitored data
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
INCOSPHI
REAL
Magnitude of residual current

along the polarizing quantity
3I0cos(Fi-RCA)
IN
REAL
Measured magnitude of the

residual current 3I0
VN
REAL
kV
Measured magnitude of the

residual voltage 3V0
SN
REAL
MVA
Measured magnitude of
residual power 3I03V0cos(FiRCA)
ANG FI-RCA
REAL
deg
Angle between 3V0 and 3I0

minus RCA (Fi-RCA)
8.6.7
Operation principle
8.6.7.1
Function inputs
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P and
V3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage are taken from pre-processor
blocks.
The sensitive directional ground fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage (|
=ang(3I0)-ang(Vref)|). The reference voltage (Vref) is the polarizing quantity which is
used for directionality and is defined as Vref = -3V0 ejRCADir, that is -3V0 inversely
508
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
rotated by the set characteristic angle RCADir. RCADir is normally set equal to 0 in a high
impedance grounded network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component
is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is set equal to -90 in an isolated
network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when 3I0cos gets
larger than the set value.
Vref
RCA = 0, ROA = 90
3I0
= ang(3I0) - ang(3Vref)
-3V0=Vref
3I0 cos
en06000648_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000648 V1 EN
Figure 225:
RCADir set to 0
Technical manual
509
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Vref
RCA = -90, ROA = 90
3I0
3I0 cos
= ang(3I0) ang(Vref)
-3V0
en06000649_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000649 V1 EN
Figure 226:
RCADir set to -90
For trip, the operating quantity 3I0 cos , the residual current 3I0, and the residual voltage
3V0 must be larger than the set levels : INCosPhiPU, INRelPU and VNRelPU. Refer to the
simplified logical diagram in Figure 230.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function picks up, binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are activated.
If the output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef the binary
output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated. The trip from this sub-function has
definite time delay.
ROADir is Relay Operating Angle. ROADir is identifying a window around the reference
direction in order to detect directionality. Figure 227 shows the restrictions made by the
ROADir.
510
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
RCADir 0
3I0
Trip area
3V0 Vref
3I0 cos
ROADir
ANSI06000650 V3 EN
Figure 227:
Characteristic with ROADir restriction
The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined
as 3I0cos ( + 180) the set value.
It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle error
with a setting RCAComp as shown in the Figure 228:
Technical manual
511
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
RCADir = 0
Trip area
-3V0 =Vref
Instrument
transformer
angle error
RCAcomp
Characteristic after
angle compensation
3I0 (prim)
3I0 (to prot)
ANSI06000651 V2 EN
Figure 228:
Explanation of RCAComp
Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3V0 cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage (Vref =
-3V0 e-jRCA) compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (|=ang(3I0)
ang(Vref)|). The function operates when 3I0 3V0 cos gets larger than the set value
SN>. Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure 230.
For trip, the residual power 3I0 3V0 cos , the residual current 3I0 and the release
voltage 3V0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN_PU, INRelPU and VNRelPU).
If the output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef or after
512
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
the inverse time delay (setting TDSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get
activated.
The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is
defined as 3I0 3V0cos ( + 180) the set value.
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time
delay.
The inverse time delay is defined as:
tinv =
TDSN (3I 0 3V0 cos (reference))

3I 0 3V0 cos (measured )
(Equation 111)
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and

The function will operate if the residual current is larger than the set value and the angle |
= ang(3I0)-ang(Vref)| is within the sector RCADir ROADir
RCA = 0
ROA = 80
Operate area
3I0
Vref=-3V0
ANSI06000652 V2 EN
Figure 229:
Example of characteristic
For trip, Residual current 3I0 shall be larger than both INRelPU and INDirPU, and residual
voltage 3V0 shall be larger than the VNRelPU. In addition, the angle shall be in the set
area defined by ROADir and RCADir. Refer to the simplified logical diagram in Figure
230.
Technical manual
513
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
If the output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN remain active for the set delay tDef the binary
output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN get activated.
The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is defined
as is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180 ROADir
This variant has definite time delay.
Directional functions
For all the directional functions there are directional pickup signals PUFW: fault in the
forward direction, and PUREV: fault in the reverse direction. Even if the directional
function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction, a fault in the reverse direction
will give the pickup signal PUREV. Also if the directional function is set to operate for
faults in the reverse direction, a fault in the forward direction will give the pickup signal
PUFW.
Non-directional ground fault current protection

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The
function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as alternative
or backup to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure selectivity the
distance protection can block the non-directional ground fault current function via the
input BLKNDN.
The non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as sum of the
phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country faults with high
residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the sensitive ground fault
protection will saturate.
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time
delay (TimeChar parameter). The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3.
For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDirPU).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.
When the function picks up, binary output signal PUNDIN is activated. If the output signal
PUNDIN remains active for the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the
binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN get activated.
Residual overvoltage release and protection

All the directional functions shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher than
a set level VNRelPU.
514
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
In addition, there is also a separate non-directional residual over voltage protection, with
its own definite time delay tVN and set level VN_PU.
For trip, the residual voltage 3V0 shall be larger than the set level (VN_PU).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKVN.
When the function picks up, binary output signal PUVN is activated. If the output signal
PUVN is active for the set delay tVNNonDir, the binary output signals TRIP and TRUN
get activated. A simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in Figure 230.
PUNDIN
INNonDirPU
UN_PU
0-t
0
TRNDIN
0-t
0
TRVN
PUVN
OpMODE=INcosPhi
Pickup_N
AND
INCosPhiPU
OpMODE=INVNCosPhi
AND
OR
PUDIRIN
AND
INVNCosPhiPU
SN
Phi in RCA +- ROA
AND
TRDIRIN
TimeChar = InvTime
AND
OpMODE=IN and Phi
TimeChar = DefTime
DirMode = Forw
AND
AND
OR
PUFW
Forw
DirMode = Rev
AND
PUREV
Rev
en06000653_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000653 V1 EN
Figure 230:
Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive ground fault current protection
Technical manual
515
Section 8
Current protection
8.6.8
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 226:
SDEPSDE (67N) technical data
Function
516
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip level for 3I0cosj

directional residual
overcurrent
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Trip level for 3I03V0cosj

directional residual power
(0.25-200.00)% of SBase
1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
Trip level for 3I0 and j residual

overcurrent
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
1.0% of In at In
1.0% of I at I > In
Trip level for non-directional

overcurrent
(1.00-400.00)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Trip level for non-directional

residual overvoltage
(1.00-200.00)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Residual release current for all

directional modes
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Residual release voltage for

all directional modes
(1.00-300.00)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Trip time for non-directional

residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x
Iset
Min. = 40 ms
Reset time for non-directional

Iset
Min. = 40 ms
Trip time for directional

Iset
Min. = 110 ms
Reset time for directional

Iset
Min. = 20 ms
Independent time delay for

non-directional residual
overvoltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x Vset
(0.000 60.000) s

non-directional residual
overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
(0.000 60.000) s

directional residual
(0.000 60.000) s

greater
Inverse characteristics, see

table 983, table 984 and table
985
16 curve types

985

(RCADir)
2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle (ROADir)
(0 to 90) degrees
2.0 degrees
Max. = 65 ms
Max. = 65 ms
Max. = 160 ms
Max. = 60 ms
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.7
Thermal overload protection, two time constants

TRPTTR (49)
8.7.1
Identification
Thermal overload protection, two time
constants
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
49
TRPTTR
SYMBOL-A V1 EN
8.7.2
Functionality
If a power transformer reaches very high temperatures the equipment might be damaged.
The insulation within the transformer will experience forced ageing. As a consequence of
this the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground faults will increase.
The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the transformer
(temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the
transformer with two time constants, which is based on current measurement.
Two warning pickup levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to be
done before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase
to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer.
The estimated time to trip before operation is presented.
8.7.3
Function block
TRPTTR (49)
I3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
PICKUP
COOLING
ALARM1
MULTPU
ALARM2
RESET
LOCKOUT
WARNING
ANSI06000272 V2 EN
Figure 231:
TRPTTR (49) function block
Technical manual
517
Section 8
Current protection
8.7.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 227:
TRPTTR (49) Input signals
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
COOLING
BOOLEAN
Cooling input Disabled/ Enabled. Changes Ib setting

and time constant
MULTPU
BOOLEAN
Enable Multiplier for currentReference setting
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset of function
TRPTTR (49) Output signals
Name
Table 229:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 228:
8.7.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip Signal
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal
ALARM1
BOOLEAN
First level alarm signal
ALARM2
BOOLEAN
Second level alarm signal
LOCKOUT
BOOLEAN
Lockout signal
WARNING
BOOLEAN
Warning signal: Trip within set warning time
Settings
TRPTTR (49) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
IRef
10.0 - 1000.0
%IB
1.0
100.0
Reference current in % of IBase
IRefMult
0.01 - 10.00
0.01
1.00
Multiplication Factor for reference current
IBase1
30.0 - 250.0
%IB
1.0
100.0
Base current,IBase1 without Cooling input in %

of IBase
IBase2
30.0 - 250.0
%IB
1.0
100.0
Base Current,IBase2, with Cooling input ON in

% of IBase
Tau1
1.0 - 500.0
Min
1.0
60.0
Time constant without cooling input in min, with

IBase1
Tau2
1.0 - 500.0
Min
1.0
60.0
Time constant with cooling input in min, with

IBase2
IHighTau1
30.0 - 250.0
%IB1
1.0
100.0
Current Sett, in % of IBase1 for rescaling TC1

by TC1-IHIGH
518
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Tau1High
5 - 2000
%tC1
100
Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is > IHIGHTC1
ILowTau1
30.0 - 250.0
%IB1
1.0
100.0
Current Set, in % of IBase1 for rescaling TC1

by TC1-ILOW
Tau1Low
5 - 2000
%tC1
100
Multiplier in % to TC1 when current is < ILOWTC1
IHighTau2
30.0 - 250.0
%IB2
1.0
100.0

by TC2-IHIGH
Tau2High
5 - 2000
%tC2
100
Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is >IHIGHTC2
ILowTau2
30.0 - 250.0
%IB2
1.0
100.0

by TC2-ILOW
Tau2Low
5 - 2000
%tC2
100
Multiplier in % to TC2 when current is < ILOWTC2
ITrip
50.0 - 250.0
%IBx
1.0
110.0
Steady state operate current level in % of

IBasex
Alarm1
50.0 - 99.0
%Itr
1.0
80.0
First alarm level in % of heat content trip value
Alarm2
50.0 - 99.0
%Itr
1.0
90.0
Second alarm level in % of heat content trip

value
LockoutReset
10.0 - 95.0
%Itr
1.0
60.0
Lockout reset level in % of heat content trip

value
ThetaInit
0.0 - 95.0
1.0
50.0
Initial Heat content, in % of heat content trip

value
Warning
1.0 - 500.0
Min
0.1
30.0
Time setting, below which warning would be

set (in min)
tPulse
0.01 - 0.30
0.01
0.10
Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec).
Step
Default
Table 230:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.7.6
TRPTTR (49) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
-
Description
groups
Monitored data
Table 231:
Name
TRPTTR (49) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
HEATCONT
REAL
Percentage of the heat

content of the transformer
I-MEASUR
REAL
Current measured by the

function in % of the rated
current
TTRIP
INTEGER
Estimated time to trip (in min)

Technical manual
519
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
8.7.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
TRESLO
INTEGER
Estimated time to reset of the

function (in min)
TTRIPCAL
INTEGER
0=Not Active
1=Long Time
2=Active
Calculated time status to trip:

not active/long time/active
TRESCAL
INTEGER
0=Not Active
1=Long Time
2=Active
Calculated time status to

reset: not active/long time/
active
Operation principle
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the true
RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to the
protection function.
From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat content) is
calculated according to the expression:
Q final
I
=
I ref
(Equation 112)
EQUATION1171 V1 EN
where:
I
is the largest phase current
Iref
is a given reference current
If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level
corresponding to the set operate (trip) current, then the pickup output signal PICKUP will
be activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
520
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Q final > Q n
If
(Equation 113)
EQUATION1172 V1 EN
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final
Dt
- Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
(Equation 114)
EQUATION1173 V1 EN
Q final < Qn
If
(Equation 115)
EQUATION1174 V1 EN
Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Qn -1 ) e
Dt
(Equation 116)
EQUATION1175 V1 EN
where:
Qn
is the calculated present temperature
Qn-1
is the calculated temperature at the previous time step
Qfinal
is the calculated final (steady state) temperature with the actual current
Dt
is the time step between calculation of the actual and final temperature
is the thermal time constant of the protected circuit given in minutes. There are different time
constants depending on the cooling used. Please refer to manufacturer's manuals for details
The calculated transformer relative temperature can be monitored and it is exported from
the function as a real figure HEATCONT.
When the transformer temperature reaches any of the set alarm levels Alarm1 or Alarm2
the corresponding output signal ALARM1 or ALARM2 is activated. When the
temperature of the object reaches the set trip level which corresponds to continuous
current equal to ITrip the output signal TRIP is activated.
There is also a calculation of the time to trip with the present current. This calculation is
only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation
temperature:
final trip
ttrip ln

final n
Technical manual
(Equation 117)
521
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The calculated time to trip can be monitored and it is exported from the function as an
integer output TTRIP.
After a trip there can be a lockout to inhibit reconnecting the tripped circuit. The output
lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when the temperature of the object is above the set
lockout release temperature setting ResLo.
The time to lockout release is calculated by the following cooling time calculation.
Q
- Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final
Q final - Q n
(Equation 118)
EQUATION1177 V1 EN
In the above equation, the final temperature is calculated according to equation 112. The
calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the function as
a real figure, TRESLO.
When the current is so high that it has given a pickup signal PICKUP, the estimated time
to trip is continuously calculated and given as analog output TTRIP. If this calculated time
get less than the setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output WARNING is activated.
In case of trip a pulse with a set duration tPulse is activated.
522
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Final Temp
> TripTemp
RESET
PICKUP
HEATCONT
Calculation
of heat
content
I3P
ENMULT
Calculation
of final
temperature
ALARM1
Actual Temp >

Alarm1,Alarm2
Temp
ALARM2
Current base used

TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp
COOLING
Management of
setting
parameters: Tau,
IBase
S
R
Tau used
LOCKOUT
Actual Temp
< Recl
Temp
Calculation
of time to
trip
Calculation
of time to
reset of
lockout
TTRIP
WARNING
TRESCAL
ANSI05000833 V2 EN
Figure 232:
Functional overview of TRPTTR (49)
Technical manual
523
Section 8
Current protection
8.7.8
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 232:
TRPTTR (49) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Base current 1 and 2
(30250)% of IBase
1.0% of In
Trip time:
Ip = load current before overload

occurs
Time constant = (0.10500.00)
minutes

greater
Alarm pickup 1 and 2
(5099)% of heat content trip

value
2.0% of heat content trip
Trip current
(50250)% of IBase
1.0% of In
Reset level temperature
(1095)% of heat content trip
2.0% of heat content trip
I 2 - I p2
t = t ln
I 2 - I ref 2
EQUATION1356 V2 EN
(Equation 119)
I = actual measured current

Ip = load current before overload
occurs
Iref = reference load current
8.8
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF(50BF)
8.8.1
Identification
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase
activation and output
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50BF
CCRBRF
3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN
8.8.2
Functionality
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup tripping of the surrounding
breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF (50BF) can be current-based,
contact-based or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.
A current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve high
security against inadvertent operation.
524
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.
CCRBRF (50BF) can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single pole
tripping applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF (50BF) the current criteria
can be set to trip only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase plus the
residual current pickups. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip command.
CCRBRF (50BF) function can be programmed to give a single- or three-phase re-trip of
its own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect
initiation due to mistakes during testing.
8.8.3
Function block
CCRBRF (50BF)
I3P*
BLOCK
BFI_3P
BFI_A
BFI_B
BFI_C
52A_A
52A_B
52A_C
52FAIL
TRBU
TRBU2
TRRET
TRRET_A
TRRET_B
TRRET_C
CBALARM
ANSI06000188 V2 EN
Figure 233:
8.8.4
CCRBRF (50BF) function block
Signals
Table 233:
Name
CCRBRF (50BF) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase group signal for current inputs
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
Three phase breaker failure initiation
BFI_A
BOOLEAN
Phase A breaker failure initiation
BFI_B
BOOLEAN
Phase B breaker failure initiation
BFI_C
BOOLEAN
Phase C breaker failure initiation
52a_A
BOOLEAN
Circuit breaker closed in phase A
52a_B
BOOLEAN
Circuit breaker closed in phase B
52a_C
BOOLEAN
Circuit breaker closed in phase C
52FAIL
BOOLEAN
CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantaneously
Technical manual
525
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 234:
CCRBRF (50BF) Output signals
Name
8.8.5
Table 235:
Name
Type
Description
TRBU
BOOLEAN
Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2
BOOLEAN
Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection

function
TRRET
BOOLEAN
Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET_A
BOOLEAN
Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase A
TRRET_B
BOOLEAN
Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase B
TRRET_C
BOOLEAN
Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase C
CBALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for faulty circuit breaker
Settings
CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
FunctionMode
Current
Contact
Current/Contact
Current
Detection for trip based on Current/Contact/

Current&Contact
BuTripMode
2 out of 4
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
1 out of 3
Back-up trip modes: 2 out of 4 or 1 out of 3 or 1

out of 4
RetripMode
Retrip Off
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
Retrip Off
Oper mode of re-trip logic: OFF/CB Pos Check/

No CB Pos Check
Pickup_PH
5 - 200
%IB
10
Pickup_N
2 - 200
%IB
10
Operate residual current level in % of IBase
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of re-trip
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Time delay of back-up trip
t2MPh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase

pickup
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Trip pulse duration
Table 236:
Name
CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Pickup_BlkCont
5 - 200
%IB
20
I> in % of IBase block operation using Function

Mode Contact
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.030
Additional time delay to 27P2TDLY for a

second back-up trip
tCBAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Time delay for alarm when faulty circuit breaker

indicated
526
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 237:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.8.6
CCRBRF (50BF) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Step
Default
1
Description
groups
Monitored data
Table 238:
Name
8.8.7
Unit
CCRBRF (50BF) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IA
REAL
Measured current in phase A
IB
REAL
Measured current in phase B
IC
REAL
Measured current in phase C
IN
REAL
Measured residual current
Operation principle
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF (50BF) is initiated from the protection trip command,
either from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.
The initiate signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective
initiate signals enable single pole re-trip function. The re-trip attempt is made after a set
time delay t1. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With the
current check, the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is
larger than the operate current level.
The initiate signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
initiate the back-up trip timer. The function detects the successful breaker opening, either
by detection of low current through RMS evaluation and a special adapted current
algorithm or by open contact indication. The special algorithm enables a very fast
detection of successful breaker opening, that is, fast resetting of the current measurement.
If the current and/or contact detection has not detected breaker opening before the backup timer has run its time a back-up trip is initiated.
Further the following possibilities are available:
The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip
pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse
2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed breaker.
In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3 where
it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4 where it
is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high residual current
Technical manual
527
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or residual current) shall
be high for breaker failure detection.
The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the setting
of phase current detection.
It is possible to have different back-up time delays for single-phase faults and for
multi-phase faults.
The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this option
activated for small load currents only.
It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the
circuit breaker is incapable to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.
30 ms
BFI_3P
BFI_A
BFP Started A
OR
AND
S
R
BLOCK
SR
150ms
Time out A
AND
OR
Reset A
Retrip Time Out A

BackupTrip A
OR
ANSI09000976 V2 EN
Figure 234:
Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF (50BF) starting logic
Pickup_PH
a
b
FunctionMode
a>b
Current
OR
AND
OR
Time out A
OR
Current and Contact
I_A
AND
Current High A
CB Closed A
AND
OR
BFP Started A
a
Pickup_BlkCont
52a_A
Reset A
Contact
a>b
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
Contact Closed A
ANSI09000977 V1 EN
Figure 235:
528
Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF (50BF), CB position evaluation
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BFP Started A
RetripMode
OR
TRRET
OR
TRRET_A
OR
OR
AND
CB Pos Check
CB Closed A
52FAIL
TRRET_B
tPulse
AND
No CBPos Check
1
TRRET_C
From other
phases
Retrip Time Out A
t1
0
AND
ANSI09000978 V4 EN
Figure 236:
Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function
BFP Started A
BFP Started B
AND
BFP Started C
AND
IN
Pickup_N
BUTripMode
1
From other
phases
a>b
Contact Closed A
2 out of 4
1 out of 4
1 out of 3
Current High B
Current High C
OR
OR
Current High A
52FAIL
AND
AND
BFP Started A
t2
OR
0
AND
OR
From other
phases
BFP Started B
AND
AND
Backup Trip A
t2MPh
0
OR
tPulse
From other Backup Trip B

phases
Backup Trip C
OR
2 of 3
OR
TRBU
tPulse
BFP Started C
S
AND
SR
t3
OR
TRBU2
ANSI09000979 V4 EN
Figure 237:
Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip logic function
The internal logical signals PU_A, PU_B, PU_C have logical value 1 when the current in
the respective phase has the magnitude larger than the setting parameter Pickup_PH.
Technical manual
529
Section 8
Current protection
8.8.8
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 239:
CCRBRF (50BF) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip phase current
(5-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio, phase current
> 95%
Trip residual current
(2-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio, residual

current
> 95%
Phase current pickup for

blocking of contact
function
(5-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95%
Trip time for current

detection
10 ms typically
Reset time for current

detection
15 ms maximum
Time delay for re-trip at 0

to 2 x Iset
(0.000-60.000) s
greater
Time delay for back-up trip

at 0 to 2 x Iset
(0.000-60.000) s
greater
Time delay for back-up trip

at multi-phase pickup at 0
to 2 x Iset
(0.000-60.000) s
greater
Additional time delay for a

second back-up trip at 0 to
2 x Iset
(0.000-60.000) s
greater
Time delay for alarm for

faulty circuit breaker
(0.000-60.000) s
greater
8.9
Pole discrepancy protection CCPDSC(52PD)
8.9.1
Identification
Pole discrepancy protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
52PD
CCPDSC
PD
SYMBOL-S V1 EN
530
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.9.2
Functionality
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal stress
on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative
sequence current functions.
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation warrants
the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation.
The Pole discrepancy protection function CCPDSC (52PD) operates based on
information from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with
additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents when required.
8.9.3
Function block
CCPDSC (52PD)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
52B_A
52A_A
52B_B
52A_B
52B_C
52A_C
TRIP
PICK UP
ANSI13000305 V2 EN
Figure 238:
8.9.4
CCPDSC (52PD) function block
Signals
Table 240:
Name
CCPDSC (52PD) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase currents
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKDBYAR
BOOLEAN
Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing

cycle
CLOSECMD
BOOLEAN
Close command to CB
OPENCMD
BOOLEAN
Open command to CB
EXTPDIND
BOOLEAN
Pole discrepancy signal from CB logic

Technical manual
531
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Phase A Pole opened indication from CB
52a_A
BOOLEAN
Phase A Pole closed indication from CB
52b_B
BOOLEAN
Phase B Pole opened indication from CB
52a_B
BOOLEAN
Phase B Pole closed indication from CB
52b_C
BOOLEAN
Phase C Pole opened indication from CB
52a_C
BOOLEAN
Phase C Pole closed indication from CB
CCPDSC (52PD) Output signals
Name
Table 242:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 241:
8.9.5
Default
52b_A
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal to CB
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay
Settings
CCPDSC (52PD) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
Time delay between trip condition and trip

signal
ContactSel
Disabled
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.
Disabled
Contact function selection
CurrentSel
Disabled
CB oper monitor
Continuous monitor
Disabled
Current function selection
CurrUnsymPU
0 - 100
80
Unsym magn of lowest phase current

compared to the highest.
CurrRelPU
0 - 100
%IB
10
Current magnitude for release of the function in

% of IBase
Table 243:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
532
CCPDSC (52PD) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
groups
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.9.6
Monitored data
Table 244:
CCPDSC (52PD) Monitored data
Name
8.9.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IMin
REAL
Lowest phase current
IMax
REAL
Highest phase current
Operation principle
The detection of pole discrepancy can be made in two different ways. If the contact based
function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary contacts of the
circuit breaker so that a pole discrepancy is indicated, see figure 239.
C.B.
52a
52a
52a
52b
poleDiscrepancy Signal from C.B.
52b
52b
ANSI_en05000287.vsd
ANSI05000287 V1 EN
Figure 239:
Pole discrepancy external detection logic
This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this signal
will pickup a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.
There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase contact
open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 240.
Technical manual
533
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
C.B.
52a
poleOneClosed from C.B.

52a
poleTwoClosed from C.B.

52a
52b
poleThreeClosed from C.B.

poleOneOpened from C.B.
52b
poleTwoOpened from C.B.

52b
poleThreeOpened from C.B.

en05000288_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000288 V1 EN
Figure 240:
Pole discrepancy signals for internal logic
In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discrepancy the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay.
Pole discrepancy can also be detected by means of phase selective current measurement.
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS value
of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the largest phase current are derived. If
the smallest phase current is lower than the setting CurrUnsymPU times the largest phase
current the settable trip timer (tTrip) is started. The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the
set delay. The TRIP signal is a pulse 150 ms long. The current based pole discrepancy
function can be set to be active either continuously or only directly in connection to
breaker open or close command.
The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing
function, so that the pole discrepancy function can be blocked during sequences with a
single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.
534
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR
PolPosAuxCont
AND
52b_A
52a_A
52b_B
52a_B
52b_C
52a_C
Pole
Disc repancy
detection
150 ms
AND
OR
0- t
0
TRIP
PD signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
t+ 200 ms
OR
AND
Unsymmetry current
detection
en 05000747_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000747 V1 EN
Figure 241:
Simplified block diagram of pole discrepancy function CCPDSC (52PD) contact and current based
CCPDSC (52PD) is disabled if:
The IED is in TEST mode and CCPDSC (52PD) has been blocked from the local HMI
The input signal BLOCK is high
The input signal BLKDBYAR is high
The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discrepancy
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal functions
in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions. Through OR
gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.
The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discrepancy operation when a single phase
autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal 1PT1 on
SMBRREC (79) function block. If the autoreclosing function is an external device, then
BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input in the IED and this binary input is
connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress from the external
autoreclosing device.
If the pole discrepancy protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate a trip
signal TRIP:
Pole discrepancy signaling from the circuit breaker.

Unsymmetrical current detection.
Technical manual
535
Section 8
Current protection
8.9.7.1
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Pole discrepancy signaling from circuit breaker

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole
discrepancy status, then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discrepancy signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact for
each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase
connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval tTrip (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip pulse
command TRIP is generated by the Polediscrepancy function (52PD).
8.9.7.2
Unsymmetrical current detection

Unsymmetrical current indicated if:
any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymPU of the highest current in the three
phases.
the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelPU of IBase.
If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal signal
INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time delay tTrip
if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has received a command
to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms limitation is for avoiding
unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions.
The pole discrepancy protection is informed that a trip or close command has been given
to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command information)
and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can be connected to
terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field (that is from
auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software connected to the
outputs of other integrated functions (that is close command from a control function or a
general trip from integrated protections).
8.9.8
Technical data
Table 245:
CCPDSC (52PD) technical data
Function
8.10
536
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip current
(0100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
Independent time delay between

trip condition and trip signal
(0.000-60.000) s
greater
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.10.1
Identification
Directional underpower protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
GUPPDUP
P<
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
37
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN
8.10.2
Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a
torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does
not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes
a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system.
This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies
no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it
consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the
rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The
task of the low forward power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.
Figure 242 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher
margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted
operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the
underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One
should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator
is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive
value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
Technical manual
537
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Underpower IED
Overpower IED
Trip
Line
Trip
Line
Margin
Margin
Tripping point
without
turbine torque
Tripping point
without
turbine torque
ANSI06000315 V1 EN
Figure 242:
8.10.3
Protection with underpower IED and overpower IED
Function block
GUPPDUP (37)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLOCK1
BLOCK2
TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
PICKUP
PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
ANSI07000027 V2 EN
Figure 243:
8.10.4
Signals
Table 246:
Name
538
GUPPDUP (37) function block
GUPPDUP (37) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLOCK1
BOOLEAN
Block of stage 1
BLOCK2
BOOLEAN
Block of stage 2
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 247:
GUPPDUP (37) Output signals
Name
8.10.5
Table 248:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
TRIP1
BOOLEAN
Trip of stage 1
TRIP2
BOOLEAN
Trip of stage 2
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Common pickup
PICKUP1
BOOLEAN
Pickup of stage 1
PICKUP2
BOOLEAN
Pickup of stage 2
REAL
Active Power in MW
PPERCENT
REAL
Active power in % of SBase
REAL
Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT
REAL
Reactive power in % of SBase
Settings
GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OpMode1
Disabled
UnderPower
UnderPower
Operation mode for stage 1 Off / On
Power1
0.0 - 500.0
%SB
0.1
1.0
Stage 1 underpower setting in Angle1 direction

in % of SBase
Angle1
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
Characteristic angle for max power senistivity

stage 1
TripDelay1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.06
Drop-off delay for stage 1
OpMode2
Disabled
UnderPower
UnderPower
Power2
0.0 - 500.0
%SB
0.1
1.0
Power setting for stage 2 in % of SBase
Angle2
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0

stage 2
TripDelay2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
DropDelay2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.06
Technical manual
539
Section 8
Current protection
Table 249:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TD
0.000 - 0.999
0.001
0.000
Low pass filter coefficient for power

measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1
0.2 - 5.0
%SB
0.1
0.5
Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % SBase
Hysteresis2
0.2 - 5.0
%SB
0.1
0.5
Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % SBase
IMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude correction compensates current

error at 5% of Ir
IMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

error at 30% of Ir
IMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

error at 100% of Ir
VMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude correction compensates voltage

error at 5% of Ur
VMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

error at 30% of Ur
VMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

error at 100% of Ur
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
Corr of error betw current and voltage angles at

5% of Ir
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000

30% of Ir
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000

100% of Ir
Table 250:
Name
GUPPDUP (37) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
Mode
A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
Pos Seq
Selection of measured current and voltage
540
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.10.6
Monitored data
Table 251:
Name
8.10.7
GUPPDUP (37) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
REAL
MW
Active Power in MW
PPERCENT
REAL
Active power in % of SBase
REAL
MVAr
Reactive power in MVAr
QPERCENT
REAL
Reactive power in % of SBase
Operation principle
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in
figure 244. The function has two stages with individual settings.
Chosen current
phasors
Chosen voltage
phasors
P
Complex
power
calculation
Derivation of
S( composant)
in Char angle
S( angle)
S( angle ) <
Power1
t
0
TRIP1
PICKUP1
S( angle ) <
Power2
t
0
TRIP2
PICKUP2
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
ANSI06000438 V2 EN
Figure 244:
Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks.
The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in
table 252.
Technical manual
541
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 252:
Complex power calculation
Set value: Mode

A, B, C
Formula used for complex power calculation
S = V A I A* + VB I B* + VC I C *
Arone
S = V AB I A* - VBC IC *
PosSeq
(Equation 126)
S = 3 VB I B*
(Equation 125)
S = 3 VA I A*
(Equation 124)
S = VCA ( I C * - I A* )
(Equation 123)
S = VBC ( I B* - IC * )
CA
(Equation 122)
S = VAB ( I A* - I B* )
BC
(Equation 121)
S = 3 VPosSeq I PosSeq*
AB
(Equation 120)
(Equation 127)
S = 3 VC I C *
(Equation 128)
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated.
If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90 the
reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). For
directional underpower protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For directional overpower
protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is
542
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal
is activated if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a
common signal PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a
common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)). For
generator low forward power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to
0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller
value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-power1(2)
would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 Power1(2)) is
corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will reset after
a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out and that the
timer of the stage will reset.
8.10.7.1
Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible to
introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will
make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
S = TD SOld + (1 TD ) SCalculated
(Equation 129)
Where
S
is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold
is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

TD
is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter TD is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay). When
TD is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for TD=0.92 in
case of slow operating functions.
Technical manual
543
Section 8
Current protection
8.10.7.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class
0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30
and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is
constant and linear in between, see example in figure 245.
% of In
Magnitude
compensation
+10
IMagComp5
Measured
current
IMagComp30
IMagComp100
30
-10
Degrees
100
% of In
0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant
Angle
compensation
+10
Measured
current
IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
30
100
% of In
-10
ANSI05000652 V3 EN
Figure 245:
Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and the
amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values or in the
disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base
power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of
base power: QPERCENT.
544
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.10.8
Technical data
Table 253:
GUPPDUP (37) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Power level
for Step 1 and Step 2
(0.0500.0)% of SBase
1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
where
Sr= 1,732*Vn*In
Characteristic angle
(-180.0180.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
Independent time delay to trip for

Step 1 and Step 2 at 2 to 0.5 x Sn
and k=0.000
(0.01-6000.00) s
greater
8.11
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)
8.11.1
Identification
Directional overpower protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
GOPPDOP
P>
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
32
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN
8.11.2
Functionality
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a
torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does
not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes
a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system.
This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies
no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it
consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the
rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The
task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.
Technical manual
545
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Figure 246 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher
margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted
operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set the
underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One
should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator
is higher than 1%.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive
value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
Underpower IED
Overpower IED
Trip
Line
Trip
Line
Margin
Margin
Tripping point
without
turbine torque
Tripping point
without
turbine torque
ANSI06000315 V1 EN
Figure 246:
8.11.3
Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED
Function block
GOPPDOP (32)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLOCK1
BLOCK2
TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
PICKUP
PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
ANSI07000028 V2 EN
Figure 247:
546
GOPPDOP (32) function block
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.11.4
Signals
Table 254:
GOPPDOP (32) Input signals
Name
Type
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLOCK1
BOOLEAN
Block of stage 1
BLOCK2
BOOLEAN
Block of stage 2
GOPPDOP (32) Output signals
Name
Table 256:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 255:
8.11.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
TRIP1
BOOLEAN
Trip of stage 1
TRIP2
BOOLEAN
Trip of stage 2
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Common pickup
PICKUP1
BOOLEAN
Pickup of stage 1
PICKUP2
BOOLEAN
Pickup of stage 2
REAL
Active power P in MW
PPERCENT
REAL
Active power P in % of SBase
REAL
Reactive power Q in MVAr
QPERCENT
REAL
Reactive power Q in % of SBase
Settings
GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OpMode1
Disabled
OverPower
OverPower
Power1
0.0 - 500.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
Stage 1 overpower setting in Angle1 direction

in % of SBase
Angle1
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0

stage 1
TripDelay1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
DropDelay1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.06

Technical manual
547
Section 8
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OpMode2
Disabled
OverPower
OverPower
Power2
0.0 - 500.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
Stage 2 overpower setting in Angle2 direction

in % of SBase
Angle2
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0

stage 2
TripDelay2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
DropDelay2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.06
Step
Default
Table 257:
Name
GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Description
0.000 - 0.999
0.001
0.000

measurement, P and Q
Hysteresis1
0.2 - 5.0
%SB
0.1
0.5
Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of SBase
Hysteresis2
0.2 - 5.0
%SB
0.1
0.5
Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of SBase
IMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

error at 5% of Ir
IMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

error at 30% of Ir
IMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

error at 100% of Ir
VMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

error at 5% of Ur
VMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

error at 30% of Ur
VMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

error at 100% of Ur
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000

5% of Ir
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000

30% of Ir
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000

100% of Ir
548
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 258:
Name
GOPPDOP (32) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
Mode
A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
Pos Seq
8.11.6
Monitored data
Table 259:
Name
8.11.7
GOPPDOP (32) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
REAL
MW
Active power P in MW
PPERCENT
REAL
Active power P in % of SBase
REAL
MVAr
Reactive power Q in MVAr
QPERCENT
REAL
Reactive power Q in % of
SBase
Operation principle
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown in
figure 248. The function has two stages with individual settings.
Technical manual
549
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Chosen current
phasors
Chosen voltage
phasors
P
Complex
power
calculation
Derivation of
S(composant)
in Char angle
S(angle)
S(angle) >
Power1
TRIP1
PICKUP1
S(angle) >
Power2
TRIP2
PICKUP2
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
ANSI06000567 V2 EN
Figure 248:
Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing blocks.
The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as shown in
table 260.
Table 260:
Complex power calculation
Set value: Mode

A,B,C

*
S = V A I A + V B I B + V C IC
(Equation 130)
EQUATION2038 V1 EN
Arone
S = V AB I A - V BC I C
S = 3 V PosSeq I PosSeq
(Equation 132)
EQUATION2040 V1 EN
A,B
(Equation 131)
EQUATION2039 V1 EN
PosSeq
S = V AB (I A - I B )
(Equation 133)
EQUATION2041 V1 EN
B,C
S = V BC (I B - I C )
EQUATION2042 V1 EN
(Equation 134)
550
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Set value: Mode

C,A

*
S = V CA (I C - I A )
(Equation 135)
EQUATION2043 V1 EN
S = 3 V A IA
(Equation 136)
EQUATION2044 V1 EN
S = 3 V B IB
(Equation 137)
EQUATION2045 V1 EN
S = 3 V C IC
EQUATION2046 V1 EN
(Equation 138)
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is calculated.
If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle is 90 the
reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2). A
pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger than
the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is activated
if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a common signal
PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a common signal TRIP
will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) drop-power1(2)). For
generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to 0.02
p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller value.
The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2), Hysteresis1(2):
drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-power1(2)
would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 Power1(2)) is
corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset after
a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out ant that the
timer of the stage will reset.
Technical manual
551
Section 8
Current protection
8.11.7.1
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Low pass filtering

introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This will
make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
(Equation 139)
EQUATION1959 V1 EN
Where
S
is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold
is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k
is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.92 in case
of slow operating functions.
8.11.7.2

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get class
0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30
and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is
constant and linear in between, see example in figure 249.
552
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
% of In
Magnitude
compensation
+10
IMagComp5
Measured
current
IMagComp30
IMagComp100
30
-10
Degrees
100
% of In
0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant
Angle
compensation
+10
Measured
current
IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
30
100
% of In
-10
ANSI05000652 V3 EN
Figure 249:
Calibration curves
amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance
report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base power:
PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base
power: QPERCENT.
Technical manual
553
Section 8
Current protection
8.11.8
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 261:
GOPPDOP (32) technical data
Function
Range or value
Power level
Accuracy
(0.0500.0)% of SBase
When measuring transformer
inputs are used, the following
accuracy can be obtained for low
pickup settings which are typical
for reverse power protection
application:
Characteristic angle
(-180.0180.0) degrees
Trip time, pickup at 0.5 to 2 x Sr

and k=0.000
Min. =10 ms
Reset time, pickup at 2 to 0.5 x Sr

and k=0.000
Min. = 35 ms

Step 1 and Step 2 at 0.5 to 2 x Sn
and k=0.000
(0.01-6000.00) s
1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
Pickup value=0.5% of Sn
Pickup accuracy of 0.20% of Sn*)
Pickup value=0.2% of Sn
Pickup accuracy of 0.15% of Sn*)
whereSn= 1,732*Vn*In
2.0 degrees
Max. = 25 ms
Max. = 55 ms
greater
*) To achieve this accuracy for reverse power protection it is also recommended to apply settings k=0.990 and
Mode=PosSeq. These settings will help to minimize the overall measurement error ensuring the best
accuracy for this application.
8.12
Negativ sequence time overcurrent protection for

machines NS2PTOC (46I2)
8.12.1
Identification
Negative sequence time overcurrent
protection for machines
8.12.2
IEC 61850
identification
NS2PTOC
IEC 60617
identification
2I2>
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
46I2
Functionality
Negative-sequence time overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC (46I2) is
intended primarily for the protection of generators against possible overheating of the
rotor caused by negative sequence current in the stator current.
554
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The negative sequence currents in a generator may, among others, be caused by:
Unbalanced loads
Line to line faults
Line to ground faults
Broken conductors
Malfunction of one or more poles of a circuit breaker or a disconnector
NS2PTOC (46I2) can also be used as a backup protection, that is, to protect the generator
in case line protections or circuit breakers fail to clear unbalanced system faults.
To provide an effective protection for the generator for external unbalanced conditions,
NS2PTOC (46I2) is able to directly measure the negative sequence current. NS2PTOC
(46I2) also has a time delay characteristic which matches the heating characteristic of the
2
generator I 2 t = K as defined in standard IEEE C50.13.
where:
I2
is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated generator

current
is operating time in seconds
is a constant which depends of the generators size and design
NS2PTOC (46I2) has a wide range of K settings and the sensitivity and capability of
detecting and tripping for negative sequence currents down to the continuous capability of
a generator.
In order to match the heating characteristics of the generator a reset time parameter can be
set.
A separate definite time delayed output is available as an alarm feature to warn the
operator of a potentially dangerous situation.
Technical manual
555
Section 8
Current protection
8.12.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
NS2PTOC (46I2)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKST1
BLKST2
BLKTR
TRIP
TR1
TR2
START
ST1
ST2
ALARM
NSCURR
ANSI08000359.vsdx
ANSI08000359 V3 EN
Figure 250:
8.12.4
Signals
Table 262:
Name
NS2PTOC (46I2) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group connection for neg seq.
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip signals
Table 263:
Name
556
NS2PTOC (46I2) function block
NS2PTOC (46I2) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Common start signal
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
Pick up signal from step 1
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
Pick up signal from step 2
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm signal
NSCURR
REAL
Negative sequence current in primary amps
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.12.5
Table 264:
Name
Settings
NS2PTOC (46I2) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tAlarm
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
3.00
Time delay for alarm ( operated by pick up

signal) in seconds
OpStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enable execution of step 1
I2-1>
3 - 500
%IB
10
Negative sequence current level for step 1 in %

of IBase
CurveType1
Definite
Inverse
Definite
Selection of definite or inverse time-characteri.

for step 1
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
Definite time delay for trip of step 1, in sec
tResetDef1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for reset of definite timer of step 1,

in sec
K1
1.0 - 99.0
0.1
10.0
Neg. seq. capability value of generator for step

1, in sec
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

step 1
t1Max
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1000.00
Maximum trip delay for step 1, in sec
ResetMultip1
0.01 - 20.00
0.01
1.00
Reset multiplier for K1, defines reset time of

inverse curve
OpStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
I2-2>
3 - 500
%IB
10
Negative sequence current level for step 2 in %

of IBase
CurveType2
Definite
Inverse
Definite
Selection of definite or inverse time-characteri.

for step 2
t2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
Definite time delay for trip of step 2, in sec
tResetDef2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for reset of definite timer of step 2,

in sec
K2
1.0 - 99.0
0.1
10.0
Neg. seq. capability value of generator for step

2, in sec
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

step 2
t2Max
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1000.00
Maximum trip delay for step 2, in sec
ResetMultip2
0.01 - 20.00
0.01
1.00
Reset multiplier for K2, defines reset time of

inverse curve
Technical manual
557
Section 8
Current protection
Table 265:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.12.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
NS2PTOC (46I2) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Step
Default
1
Description
groups
Monitored data
Table 266:
Name
NSCURR
8.12.7
Unit
NS2PTOC (46I2) Monitored data

Type
REAL
Values (Range)
-
Unit
A
Description
Negative sequence current in
primary amps
Operation principle
The negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC, 46I2)
function directly measures the amplitude of the negative phase sequence component of the
measured current. NS2PTOC (46I2) sets the PICKUP, PU_ST1 or PU_ST2 outputs active
and starts to count trip time only when the measured negative sequence current value rises
above the set value of parameters I2-1> or I2-2> respectively.
To avoid oscillation in the output signals, a certain hysteresis has been included. For both
steps, the reset ratio is 0.97.
Step 1 of NS2PTOC (46I2) can operate in the Definite Time (DT) or Inverse Time (IDMT)
mode depending on the selected value for the CurveType1 parameter. If CurveType1=
Definite, NS2PTOC (46I2) operates with a Definite Time Delay characteristic and if
CurveType1 = Inverse, NS2PTOC (46I2) operates with an Inverse Time Delay
characteristic. Step 2 is operating in an analogous way as Step 1.
Definite time delay is not dependent on the magnitude of measured negative sequence
current. Once the measured negative sequence current exceeds the set level, the settable
definite timer t1 or t2 respectively, starts to count and the corresponding trip signal gets
activated after the pre-set definite time delay has elapsed. Reset time in definite time mode
is determined by the setting parameters tResetDef1 or tResetDef2 respectively. If
NS2PTOC (46I2) has already picked up but not tripped and measured negative sequence
current goes below the pickup value, the pickup outputs remains active for the time
defined by the resetting parameters.
A BLOCK input signal resets NS2PTOC (46I2) momentarily.
When the parameter CurveType1 is set to Inverse, an inverse curve is selected according
to selected value for parameter K1. The minimum trip time setting of parameter t1Min and
reset time parameter ResetMultip1 also influence step operation. However, to match the
558
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
heating characteristics of the generator, the reset time is depending on the setting of
parameter K1, which must be set according to the generators negative sequence current
capacity.
K = I 2 2t
EQUATION2112 V1 EN
Where:
I2
is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated generator current
is operating time in seconds
is a constant [s], which depends on generator size and design
Operate
time
t1Max
(Default= 1000 s)
t1Min
(Default= 5 s)
K1
Current I2-1>
IEC09000691 V2 EN
Figure 251:
Inverse time characteristic with t1Min and t1Max
For a detailed description of inverse time characteristic, see chapter "Inverse

characteristics".
The reset time is exponential and is given by the following expression:
Technical manual
559
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
ResetMultip
ResetTime [ s ] =
2
K1
I
NS
1
I Pickup
(Equation 140)
Where
8.12.7.1
INS
is the measured negative sequence current
IPickup
is the desired pickup level in pu of rated generator current
ResetMultip
is multiplier of the generator capability constant K equal to setting K1 and thus defines reset
time of inverse time characteristic
Pickup sensitivity
The trip pickup levels Current I2-1> and I2-2> of NS2PTOC (46I2) are freely settable
over a range of 3 to 500 % of rated generator current IBase. The wide range of pickup
setting is required in order to be able to protect generators of different types and sizes.
After pickup, a certain hysteresis is used before resetting pickup levels. For both steps the
reset ratio is 0.97.
8.12.7.2
Alarm function
The alarm function is operated by PICKUP signal and used to warn the operator for an
abnormal situation, for example, when generator continuous negative sequence current
capability is exceeded, thereby allowing corrective action to be taken before removing the
generator from service. A settable time delay tAlarm is provided for the alarm function to
avoid false alarms during short-time unbalanced conditions.
560
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.12.7.3
Logic diagram
0-t1
0
CurveType1=Definite
Negative sequence current
a
b
TRST1
OR
a>b
I2-1>
PU_ST1
AND
Inverse
Operation=Enabled
0-txMin
0
AND
BLK1
BLOCK
CurveType1=Inverse
ANSI08000466 V4 EN
Figure 252:
Simplified logic diagram for step 1 of Negative sequence time overcurrent

protection for machines (NS2PTOC, 46I2)
Step 2 for Negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC, 46I2)
is similar to step 1.
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
PICKUP
OR
ALARM
0-tAlarm
0
TRST1
TRST2
TRIP
OR
ANSI09000690 V3 EN
Figure 253:
8.12.8
Simplified logic diagram for the PICKUP, ALARM and TRIP signals for
NS2PTOC (46I2)
Technical data
Table 267:
NS2PTOC (46I2) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(3-500)% of IBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
>95%
Trip time, pickup at 0 to 2 x Iset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, pickup at 2 to 0 x Iset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms

Technical manual
561
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip time, pickup at 0 to 10 x Iset
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, pickup at 10 to 0 x Iset
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Time characteristics
Definite or Inverse
Inverse time characteristic, step 1 - 2
K=1.0-99.0
greater
Reset Multiplier = 0.01-20.00
greater
Minimum trip time for inverse time

characteristic, step 1 - 2
(0.000-60.000) s
greater
Maximum trip delay at 0.5 to 2 x Iset,

step 1 - 2
(0.00-6000.00) s
greater
Independent time delay at 0.5 to 2 x

Iset, step 1 - 2
(0.00-6000.00) s
greater
Independent time delay for Alarm at

0.5 to 2 x Iset
(0.00-6000.00) s
greater
I2 t = K
Reset time, inverse characteristic,
step 1 - 2
I 22t = K
8.13
Accidental energizing protection for synchronous

generator AEGPVOC (50AE)
8.13.1
Identification
Accidental energizing protection for
synchronous generator
8.13.1.1
IEC 61850
identification
AEGPVOC
IEC 60617
identification
U
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50AE
Functionality
Inadvertent or accidental energizing of off-line generators has occurred often enough due
to operating errors, breaker head flashovers, control circuit malfunctions, or a
combination of these causes. Inadvertently energized generator operates as induction
motor drawing a large current from the system. The voltage supervised overcurrent
protection is used to detect the inadvertently energized generator.
Accidental energizing protection for synchronous generator (AEGPVOC, 50AE) takes
the maximum phase current input and maximum phase to phase voltage inputs from the
562
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
terminal side. AEGPVOC (50AE) is enabled when the terminal voltage drops below the
specified voltage level for the preset time.
8.13.1.2
Function block
AEGPVOC (50AE)
I3P*
TRIP
U3P*
START
BLOCK
ARMED
BLKTR
ANSI13000302 V1 EN
Figure 254:
8.13.1.3
AEGPVOC (50AE) Function block
Signals
Table 268:
AEGPVOC (50AE) Input signals
Name
Type
Three Phase Current input
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three Phase Voltage input
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
AEGPVOC (50AE) Output signals
Name
Table 270:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 269:
8.13.1.4
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from accidental energizing of generator

protection
RI
BOOLEAN
Start signal from accidental energizing of generator

protection
ENABLED
BOOLEAN
True when accidental energizing of generator protection

is armed
Settings
AEGPVOC (50AE) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
IPickup
5 - 900
%IB
120
tOC
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.030
Trip time daly for overcurrent level

Technical manual
563
Section 8
Current protection
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
27_pick_up
2 - 150
%VB
50
Undervoltage level to arm protection in % of

Vbase
tArm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Time delay to arm protection with undervoltage

pickup
59_Drop_out
2 - 200
%VB
80
Over voltage level to disarm protection in % of

Vbase
tDisarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
Time delay to disarm protection when voltage

greater than drop out level
Table 271:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.13.1.5
AEGPVOC (50AE) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Step
Default
1
Description
groups
Monitored data
Table 272:
Name
8.13.1.6
Unit
AEGPVOC (50AE) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IMAX
REAL
Maximum value of current
VMAX
REAL
kV
Maximum value of phase to

phase voltage
Operation principle
Accidental energizing protection for synchronous generator AEGPVOC (50AE) function
is connected to three phase current input either from the generator terminal side or from
generator neutral point side and three phase voltage from the generator terminals. The
maximum of the three phase-to-phase voltages and maximum of the three phase currents
are measured.
When the maximum phase-to-phase voltage is less than the 27_pick_up for the period
tArm, it is ensured that the generator is off-line. The Enabled signal will initiate the
overcurrent function. If the calculated maximum current of the three phases is larger than
IPickup for the period tOC then the TRIP signal becomes activated. Also PICKUP signal
becomes activated when overcurrent is detected.
When the maximum phase-to-phase voltage is larger than 59_Drop_out for a period
longer than tDisarm, it is ensured generator is on line. During this state, undervoltage
operation is disarmed, blocking the overcurrent operation and thus the function becomes
inoperative.
564
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BLOCK input can be used to block AEGPVOC (50AE). In addition, the BLKTR input
that blocks the TRIP signal is also present. The input BLKTR can be used if AEGPVOC
(50AE) is to be used only for monitoring purposes.
Imax_DFT
a
a>b
b
IPickup
AND
Operation = Enabled
BLOCK
TRIP
0-tOC
0
RI
Enabled
Uph-ph_max_DFT
a
ab
b
59_Drop_out
0-tDisarm
0
OUT
NOUT
OR
ON - Delay
ANSI09000784 V2 EN
Figure 255:
8.13.1.7
AEGPVOC (50AE) logic diagram
Technical data
Table 273:
AEGPVOC (50AE) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip value, overcurrent
(5-900)% of IBase
1.0% of In at IIn
1.0% of I at I>In
Reset ratio, overcurrent
>95% at (20900)% of IBase
Transient overreach,
overcurrent function
<10% at = 100 ms
Critical impulse time,

overcurrent
Impulse margin time,

overcurrent
15 ms typically
Trip value, undervoltage
(2-150)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Critical impulse time,

undervoltage
10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset
Impulse margin time,

undervoltage
15 ms typically

Technical manual
565
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip value, overvoltage
(2-200)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Definite time delay,

overcurrent, at 0 to 2 x Iset
(0.000-60.000) s
greater

undervoltage, at 1.2 x Vset to
0.8 x Vset
(0.000-60.000) s
Less than 35 ms (0.2% or 35

ms, whichever is greater) at 1.2
x Vset to 0.8 x Vset

overvoltage, at 0.8 x Vset to
1.2 x Vset
(0.000-60.000) s
Less than 35 ms (0.2% or 35

ms, whichever is greater) at 0.8
x Vset to 1.2 x Vset
8.14
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection

VRPVOC (51V)
8.14.1
Identification
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent
protection
8.14.2
IEC 61850
identification
VRPVOC
IEC 60617
identification
I>/U<
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51V
Functionality
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VRPVOC, 51V) function can be used as
generator backup protection against short-circuits.
The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level that can be used either with
definite time or inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can be voltage controlled/
restrained.
One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic is also available within the
function in order to provide functionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage
seal-in.
566
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.14.3
Function block
VRPVOC (51V)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKOC
BLKUV
TRIP
TROC
27 Trip
PICKUP
PU_OC
27 PU
ANSI12000184 V2 EN
Figure 256:
8.14.4
VRPVOC (51V) function block
Signals
Table 274:
Name
VRPVOC (51V) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase group signal for current inputs
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function both stages
BLKOC
BOOLEAN
Block of voltage restraint overcurrent stage (ANSI 51V)
BLKUV
BOOLEAN
Block of under voltage function
Table 275:
Name
VRPVOC (51V) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
TROC
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from voltage restrained overcurrent stage
27 Trip
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from undervoltage function
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_OC
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from voltage restrained overcurrent stage
27 PU
BOOLEAN
Pick up signal from undervoltage function
Technical manual
567
Section 8
Current protection
8.14.5
Table 276:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Settings
VRPVOC (51V) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Pickup_Curr
2.0 - 5000.0
%IB
1.0
120.0
Pick up current level in % of IBase
Characterist
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
IEC Norm. inv.
Time delay curve type for 51V Voltage

restrained overcurrent
tDef_OC
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
Definite time delay for Over Current
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
1.00
Time multiplier for Inverse Definite Minimum

Time curves
t_MinTripDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
0.05
Minimum operate time for Inverse Definite

Minimum Time curve
Operation_UV
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation of under-voltage stage (ANSI 27)

Off / On
PickUp_Volt
2.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
Voltage for pickup of under-voltage stage in %

of UBase
tDef_UV
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
Definite time time delay when used for UnderVoltage
EnBlkLowV
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable internal low voltage level blocking for

Under-Voltage
BlkLowVolt
0.0 - 5.0
%VB
0.1
3.0
Internal low voltage level for blocking of UV in

% of VBase
Table 277:
Name
VRPVOC (51V) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VDepMode
Step
Slope
Slope
Voltage dependent mode OC (step, slope)
VDepFact
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
25.0
Pick up current level in % of pickup when V<

25% of VBase
VHighLimit
30.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
100.0
Voltage high limit setting in % of VBase
568
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 278:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.14.6
VRPVOC (51V) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
groups
Monitored data
Table 279:
VRPVOC (51V) Monitored data
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IMAX
REAL
Maximum phase current

magnitude
VUMIN
REAL
kV
Minimum ph-to-ph voltage

magnitude
8.14.7
Operation principle
8.14.7.1
Measured quantities
The voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC (51V) function is always
connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool
(ACT), but it will always measure the maximum of the three-phase currents and the
minimum of the three phase-to-phase voltages. If frequency tracking mode for
preprocessing blocks is used, then the function operates properly in wide frequency range
(e.g. 10-90 Hz).
8.14.7.2
Base quantities
GlobalBaseSel defines the particular Global Base Values Group where the base quantities
of the function are set. In that Global Base Values Group:
IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes.
VBase shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary
kV.
8.14.7.3
Overcurrent protection
The overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
with the set pickup level. The overcurrent step picks up if the magnitude of the measured
current quantity is higher than the set level.
Technical manual
569
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection operation is made dependent of a measured voltage quantity.
This means that the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not constant but decreases with
the decrease in magnitude of the measured voltage quantity. This feature affects the
pickup current value of both definite time and inverse time IDMT overcurrent protection;
in particular the overcurrent with IDMT curve operates faster during low voltage
conditions. Two different types of dependencies are available:
Voltage restrained overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Slope); the

pickup level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 257. The
voltage restrained characteristic is defined by the two points: (0.25*VBase ;
VDepFact *Pickup_Curr/100*IBase) and (VHighLimit/100*VBase; Pickup_Curr/
100*IBase). In the first point the factor 0.25 that multiply VBase cannot be changed.
Pickup level of the current
PickupCurr
VDepFact * PickupCurr
0,25
VHighLimit
VBase
ANSI10000123 V2 EN
Figure 257:
570
Example for pickup level of the current variation as function of measured

voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation
Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode = Step); the

pickup level of the overcurrent stage changes according to the Figure 258.
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Pickup level of the current
PickupCurr
VDepFact * PickupCurr
VHighLimit
VBase
ANSI10000124 V2 EN
Figure 258:
8.14.7.4
Example for pickup level of the current variation as function of measured

voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation
Logic diagram
DEF time
selected
MaxPhCurr
0-tDef_OC
0
OR
TROC
PU_OC
a>b
PickupCurr
Voltage
control or
restraint
feature
Inverse
Inverse
time
selected
MinPh-Ph Voltage
ANSI10000214 V2 EN
Figure 259:
Simplified internal logic diagram for overcurrent function
Technical manual
571
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
DEF time
selected
MinPh-PhVoltage
0-tDef_UV
0
TRUV
b>a
PickupVolt
PU_UV
AND
Operation_UV=Disabled
BLKUV
ANSI10000213 V2 EN
Figure 260:
8.14.7.5
Simplified internal logic diagram for undervoltage function
Undervoltage protection
The undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step picks up if the magnitude of the measured
voltage quantity is lower than the set level.
The pickup signal starts a definite time delay. If the value of the pickup signal is one for
longer than the set time delay, the undervoltage step sets its trip signal to one.
This undervoltage functionality together with additional ACT logic can be used to provide
functionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.
8.14.8
Technical data
Table 280:
VRPVOC (51V) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Pickup overcurrent
(2.0 - 5000.0)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
> 95%
Trip time, pickup

Min. = 15 ms
Reset time, pickup

Min. = 15 ms
Trip time, pickup

Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, pickup

Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Max. = 30 ms
-
Max. = 30 ms

572
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Independent time delay to

trip at 0 to 2 x Iset
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
greater
Inverse time
characteristics,
see tables 977 and 978
13 curve types
See tables 977 and 978
Minimum trip time for

inverse time characteristics
(0.00 - 60.00) s
greater
High voltage limit, voltage

dependent operation
(30.0 - 100.0)% of VBase
1.0% of Vr
Pickup undervoltage
(2.0 - 100.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vr
Reset ratio, undervoltage
< 105%
Trip time pickup

undervoltage at 2 to 0 x Vset
Min. = 15 ms
Reset time pickup

undervoltage at 0 to 2 x Vset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
-
Max. = 30 ms
Independent time delay to

trip, undervoltage at 2 to 0 x
Vset
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
greater
Internal low voltage

blocking
(0.0 - 5.0)% of VBase
0.25% of Vn
Overcurrent:
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Undervoltage:
Impulse margin time
10ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset

15 ms typically
8.15
Generator stator overload protection, GSPTTR (49S)
8.15.1
Identification
Generator stator overload protection
IEC 61850
identification
GSPTTR
Technical manual
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
49S
573
Section 8
Current protection
8.15.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Functionality
The generator overload function, GSPTTR (49S) is used to protect the stator winding
against excessive temperature as a result of overcurrents. The functions operating
characteristic is designed in accordance with the American standard IEEE-C50.13.
If internal generator components exceed its design temperature limit, damage can be the
result. Damage to generator insulation can range from minor loss of life to complete
failure, depending on the severity and duration of the temperature excursion. Excess
temperature can also cause mechanical damage due to thermal expansion. Since
temperature increases with current, it is logical to apply overcurrent elements with inverse
time characteristics.
For its operation the function either measures the true RMS current of the stator winding
or waited sum of the positive and negative sequence components in the stator winding.
The function is designed to work on 50/60 Hz systems.
8.15.3
Function block
GSPTTR (49S)
I3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
PICKUP
SETLKOUT
LOCKOUT
RSTLKOUT
79M BLOCK
ANSI12000027 V2 EN
Figure 261:
8.15.4
Signals
Table 281:
Name
574
GSPTTR (49S) function block
GSPTTR (49S) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Current Group Connection
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
SETLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Input for forcing the output LOCKOUT
RSTLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Reset of the output LOCKOUT and theta to 0%
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 282:
GSPTTR (49S) Output signals
Name
8.15.5
Table 283:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General trip signal from the function
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
General pickup signal from the function
LOCKOUT
BOOLEAN
Trip lockout output (latched)
79M BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block machine closing command
Settings
GSPTTR (49S) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
IPickup
105.0 - 900.0
0.1
110.0
Current pickup value for overload protection
ReclsLevTheta
1.0 - 100.0
0.1
70.0
Level for theta in percent below which the

generator can be reconnected to grid
TD1
1.00 - 200.00
0.01
37.50
Time multiplier for thermal charact. operate

time delay
AutoLockout
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Auto lockout enables activation of LOCKOUT

when TRIP is set
tPulse
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Minimum pulse length of the trip signal
t_MinTripDelay
1.0 - 120.0
0.1
10.0
Minimum time, used in operate characteristic
t_MaxTripDelay
100.0 - 2000.0
0.1
300.0
Maximum time, used in operate characteristic
tCutOff
10.0 - 2000.0
0.1
120.0
Cut-off time, used in operate characteristic
tReset
10.0 - 2000.0
0.1
120.0
Time required for Theta to reset from 100% to

0%
Step
Default
Table 284:
Name
GSPTTR (49S) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Description
PosSeqFactor
0.0 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Weighting factor for the positive sequence

current
NegSeqFactor
0.0 - 10.0
0.1
6.0
Weighting factor for the negative sequence

current
Table 285:
Name
GSPTTR (49S) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MeasurCurrent
RMS
PosSeqNegSeq
RMS
Measured current quantity (RMS or weighted

sum of positive and negative sequence)
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
Technical manual
575
Section 8
Current protection
8.15.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Monitored data
Table 286:
GSPTTR (49S) Monitored data
Name
8.15.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IMEAS
REAL
Measured current, used for

calculation of operate time
THETA
REAL
Overload in percent of set trip

level (i.e. Trip=100%)
Operation principle
The stator overload protection can be illustrated in three separate sub-blocks, see
Figure262.
block
Overload
characteristic
Current
measurement
Trip logic
IEC12000013 V1 EN
Figure 262:
Representation of the stator overload protection
Current measurement
Three phase currents are measured either on the high voltage (HV) side of the generator
or on the neutral side of the stator winding, see Figure
576
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Step-up
transformer
HV- side
IA I B I C
Excitation
transformer
Two
alternative
measurement
points
for the stator
overload
function
Field breaker
Neutral side
ANSI12000012 V2 EN
Figure 263:
Measurement of stator current
The selection of current measurement is done by using the parameter MeasurCurrent::
When MeasurCurrent = RMS (default); the maximum true RMS current value from
the three-phase input currents is used as the measured quantity for the stator overload
protection.
When MeasurCurrent = PosSeqNegSeq; the weighted sum of positive and negative
sequence stator currents in primary amperes is used as the measured quantity for the
stator overload protection. This current value is calculated from the connected threephase input currents, see Figure.
The weighted sum of positive and negative sequence stator currents is calculated as per the
following equation.
I = PosSeqFactor I12 + NegSeqFactor I 22

GUID-8768BBBF-3EF7-4D4A-9FF6-DF4A07272812 V1 EN
(Equation 141)
Where:
Technical manual
577
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
I is current value in primary amperes used by the overload function

I1 is stator positive sequence current in primary amperes
I2 is stator negative sequence current in primary amperes
PosSeqFactor is a setting factor to multiply the positive sequence current and its default value is 1.0
NegSeqFactor is a setting factor to multiply the negative sequence current and its default value is 6.0
The measured current used by the function is available as a service value.
Overload characteristics
Stator winding temperature increases with the current. Thus, it is logical to apply over
current elements with inverse time-current characteristics for overload protection. The
function operating characteristic is designed in accordance with the American standard
IEEE-C50.13. This standard specifies the following operating points:
Table 287:
Operate time in accordance with IEEE-C50.13 standard
Current (% of IBase)
Trip time (s)
116
120
130
60
154
30
226
10
In order to obtain such operating characteristic the stator overload function utilizes the
following formula in order to calculate the operate time:
ttr =
TD1
2
1
IBase
GUID-7CF0FE5A-F5CE-44EC-A2D7-F1E05849171C V1 EN
(Equation 142)
Where:
ttr is trip time in seconds
TD1 is a multiplier (it shall have default value of 41.4 in order to get the operating points as prescribed by the
standard, see Table287)
I is measured current by the function
IBase is base current (stator winding rated current)
578
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
In addition to this equation based operating characteristic, the stator overload function has
some additional cut-off features. The actual overall operating characteristic of the stator
overload function is shown in Figure264
t (s)
t_MaxTripDelay
tCutOff
t tr
TD1
I
IBase
t_MinTripDelay
I (A)
IBase IPickup
ANSI12000009 V1 EN
Figure 264:
Operating characteristic for overload function
As shown in Figure 264 it is possible to define the maximum (t_MaxTripDelay) and

minimum (t_MinTripDelay) operate time for the function regardless of the level of the
measured current. In addition to this it is also possible to specify the cut-off time below
which the IDMT curve defined by the above equation will be used. Note that tCutOff shall
be always set to the smaller value than t_MaxTripDelay.
The trip time of the stator overload function is calculated by using the integration principle
(see Chapter Inverse time characteristics in the Technical Manual for more
information). As a service value from the stator overload function regarding this
integration process the Theta parameter, proportional to the stator heating content, is
provided. This parameter has value of 100% when function gives the trip signal. Thus, in
simple words, it represent a percentage of the function trip level. As soon as the measured
current is above the pick-up level IPickup and no block signal is present, the output signal
PICKUP is activated and the Theta parameter is incremented following the inverse
characteristic given in Figure264. When Theta has reached value 100%, the output signal
TRIP is set. The minimum trip signal duration is defined by the parameter tPulse. Note
also that the 79M BLOCK signal will remain one as long as Theta > ReclsLevTheta. Thus
Technical manual
579
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
the parameter ReclsLevTheta represents the Theta value below which is safe again to reconnect the tripped generator to the network.
The output signal PICKUP will reset if the measured current falls below reset level or if
BLOCK signal is set to one. However the Theta value is stored in the IED memory and it
starts to decay slowly following a linear reset characteristic defined by the parameter
tReset. The parameter tReset actually defines the rest time for Theta from value 100 to
zero. Note that if an overload condition happens again, the last Theta value is used as a
starting point for the calculation. Thus the stator winding will be properly protected
against varying current levels.
580
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Imeasured
IBase * IPickup
Pickup hysteresis
t
THETA
100
ReclsLevTheta
TRIP
PICKUP
t
tReset
ANSI12000014 V1 EN
Figure 265:
Operating principles of the stator overload function
Technical manual
581
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Tripping logic
This tripping logic provides some additional features regarding blocking and tripping
options available within the function. The list below describes functionality of every
binary input and output from the function which influence the trip logic.
Available binary inputs:
BLOCK prevents operation of overload feature, at the same time all binary outputs are
forced to zero.
SETLKOUT forces lockout operation (output LOCKOUT) by external signal
RESET resets lockout and forces Theta value to zero
Available binary outputs:
TRIP, operation of the overload feature
PICKUP, current bigger than IPickup level
LOCKOUT, sealed-in TRIP output signal from the function. Note that lockout feature is
only enabled by setting AutoLockout = Enabled
79M BLOCK, output signal active as long as Theta > ReclsLevTheta, which can be used
to block closing of the generator CB
Simplified logic diagram for lockout functionality is shown in Figure266.
AutoLockout
TRIP
AND
OR
AND
AND
LOCKOUT
SETLKOUT
RESET
NOT
BLOCK
IEC12000010 V1 EN
Figure 266:
582
Trip Lockout logic
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
8.15.8
Technical data
Table 288:
GSPTTR (49S) technical data
Function
Range or value
Current start level for overload

protection
(105.0900.0)% of IBase
Reset ratio
>95%
Start time at 0 to 2 x Iset
Min. = 50 ms
Accuracy
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Max. = 170 ms
Thermal time characteristic
According to
IEEE Std C50.132005

greater
Minimum operate time for thermal

characteristic
(1.0120.0) s

greater
Maximum operate time for

thermal characteristic
(100.02000.0) s

greater
8.16
Generator rotor overload protection, GRPTTR (49R)
8.16.1
Identification
Generator rotor overload protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
49R
GRPTTR
<
SYMBOL-MM V1 EN
8.16.2
Functionality
The generator overload function, GRPTTR (49R) is used to protect the rotor winding
against excessive temperature as a result of overcurrents. The functions operating
characteristic is designed in accordance with the American standard IEEE-C50.13.
If internal generator components exceed its design temperature limit, damage can be the
result. Damage to generator insulation can range from minor loss of life to complete
failure, depending on the severity and duration of the temperature excursion. Excess
temperature can also cause mechanical damage due to thermal expansion. Rotor
components such as bars and end rings are vulnerable to this damage. Since temperature
Technical manual
583
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
increases with current, it is logical to apply overcurrent elements with inverse time
characteristics.
For its operation the function either measures the true RMS current of the excitation
transformer or calculates the DC current in the rotor winding. The rotor winding DC
current can be calculated from the AC currents measured on either high voltage side (HV)
or low voltage side (LV) side of the excitation transformer. For the HV side measurement
ratings of the excitation transformer shall be given. The use of the DC current is default
(i.e. recommended) measurement for generators with static excitation system. When the
DC current is used, the function can provide a DC current ripple alarm, due to possible
problem with the static excitation equipment. The rotor DC current can be also sent to the
plant supervisory system via communication channel or displayed on the IED built-in
HMI.
The function can also detect undercurrent condition in the rotor winding which indicates
either under-excitation or loss of excitation condition of the generator.
The function is designed to work on 50/60 Hz systems.
8.16.3
Function block
GRPTTR (49R)
I3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
37 TRIP
BLOCK37
PICKUP
SETLKOUT
37 PICKUP
RSTLKOUT
LOCKOUT
79M BLOCK
ALRIPPLE
IMEAS
ANSI12000028 V2 EN
Figure 267:
8.16.4
Signals
Table 289:
Name
584
GRPTTR (49R) function block
GRPTTR (49R) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Current Group Connection
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLOCK37
BOOLEAN
Block under-current protection feature
SETLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Input for forcing the output LOCKOUT
RSTLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Reset of the output LOCKOUT and theta to 0%
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 290:
GRPTTR (49R) Output signals
Name
8.16.5
Table 291:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General trip signal from the function
37 TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from under-current feature
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
General pickup signal from the function
37 PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Pickup from under-current feature
LOCKOUT
BOOLEAN
Trip lockout output (latched)
79M BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block machine closing command
ALRIPPLE
BOOLEAN
Ripple alarm, is set (with delay-on 20ms) if

instRippleAlarm is active longer than tAlarmRipple
IMEAS
REAL
Measured current, used for calculation of operate time
Settings
GRPTTR (49R) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
IPickup
105.0 - 900.0
0.1
110.0
Current pickup value for overload protection
ReclsLevTheta
1.0 - 100.0
0.1
70.0
Level for theta in percent below which the

generator can be reconnected to grid
TD1
1.00 - 200.00
0.01
33.75
Time multiplier for thermal charact. operate

time delay
AutoLockout
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Auto lockout enables activation of LOCKOUT

when TRIP is set
tPulse
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Minimum pulse length of the trip signal
t_MinTripDelay
1.0 - 120.0
0.1
10.0
Minimum time, used in operate characteristic
t_MaxTripDelay
100.0 - 2000.0
0.1
300.0
Maximum time, used in operate characteristic
tCutOff
10.0 - 2000.0
0.1
120.0
Cut-off time, used in operate characteristic
tReset
10.0 - 2000.0
0.1
120.0
Time required for Theta to reset from 100% to

0%
OpAlarmRipple
On
Disabled
Disabled
Operation Off / On of alarmRipple feature
AlmRippleLev
10.0 - 100.0
0.1
25.0
Alarm ripple level in percent
tAlarmRipple
0.1 - 600.0
0.1
5.0
Alarm ripple time, the alarm ripple has to be

active longer than the specified time to set
output al
37 Enable
Disabled
On
Disabled
Operation Off / On for under-current protection

feature
37 PICKUP
5.0 - 500.0
0.1
10.0
Under-current feature pickup level
37 trip delay
0.0 - 600.0
0.1
1.0
Under-current feature trip delay
Technical manual
585
Section 8
Current protection
Table 292:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
GRPTTR (49R) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MeasurCurrent
RMS
DC
DC
Measured current quantity (RMS or Calculated

DC)
CT_Location
LV_winding
HV_winding
LV_winding
Excitation transformer winding where used CT

is located
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
VrLV
10.0 - 3000.0
0.1
400.0
Excitation transformer LV winding rated Ph-Ph

voltage in V
VrHV
0.10 - 100.00
kV
0.01
11.00
Excitation transformer HV winding rated Ph-Ph

voltage in kV
PhAngleShift
-180 - 180
Deg
30
30
Phase angle shift across excitation transformer

(degrees)
8.16.6
Monitored data
Table 293:
Name
8.16.7
GRPTTR (49R) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IMEAS
REAL
Measured current, used for

calculation of operate time
IDC
REAL
Average DC current value,

used for alarm and trip logic
THETA
REAL
Overload in percent of set trip

level (i.e. Trip=100%)
RIPPLVAL
REAL
DC ripple as percent of
measured DC current
Operation principle
The rotor overload protection GRPTTR (49R) can be illustrated in five separate subblocks, see Figure262.
586
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
block
Overload
characteristic
Current
measurement
Trip logic
block
Undercurrent
protection for rotor
winding
block
Alarm Ripple
Detection
IEC12000016 V1 EN
Figure 268:
Representation of the rotor overload protection
Each of these five sub-blocks will be described in the following sections of this document.
Current measurement
Three phase currents are measured either on the high voltage side (HV) or on the low
voltage side (LV) of the excitation transformer, see Figure269.
Technical manual
587
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Step- up
transformer
Pri- side (HV)

IA IB IC
Excitation
transformer
VA
Va
Two alternative
measurement points
for the rotor overload
function
Sec- side(LV)
I a Ib I c
Field breaker
ANSI12000019 V2 EN
Figure 269:
Measurement of rotor currents
The selection of current measurement is done by using the parameter MeasurCurrent:
When MeasurCurrent = RMS; The maximum true RMS current value from the threephase input currents is used as the measured quantity for the rotor overload
protection.
MeasurCurrent = DC (default); The calculated rotor winding DC current in primary
amperes is used as the measured quantity for the rotor overload protection. The DC
current is calculated from the connected three-phase input currents, see Figure269.
This DC current calculation is valid for any type of three phase rectifier bridge (i.e.
either diode or thyristor based).
In order to properly calculate the rotor winding DC current the physical location of the
used CT is defined by the parameter CT_Location
588
When CT_Location = LV_winding (default) is selected, it means that the used CT is

located on the secondary, low-voltage side (LV) of the excitation transformer which
directly feeds into the rectifier bridge, see Figure269. In that case the rotor winding
instantaneous DC current iDC is calculated as per the following equation
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
iDC =
ia + ib + ic
2
GUID-8C279C3B-3CDE-47FA-ADD3-1E5CFD4F7536 V2 EN
(Equation 143)
where ia, ib and ic are instantaneous sampled values of the three-phase currents from LV
side of the excitation transformer. Note that this calculation is done twenty times per
power system cycle. After that the average DC current value IDC is calculated over one
power system cycle by using the following formula:
20
I DC =
DC
20
GUID-5D825381-66DE-404D-B3E9-471B13A394A5 V1 EN
(Equation 144)
The average DC current value IDC is used further within the rotor overload function for the
operating characteristic calculations and for the service value.
When CT_Location = HV_winding is selected, it means that the used CT is located

on the primary, high-voltage side (HV) of the excitation transformer, see Figure269.
In that case the measured HV side three-phase currents (IA, IB, IC) are first transferred
to the LV side currents (ia, ib, ic) by using the rating data of the excitation transformer.
The excitation transformer ratings are specified by the following three setting
parameters:
VrLV: LV winding rated ph-ph voltage in Volts.
VrHV: HV winding rated ph-ph voltage in kV.
PhAngleShift: HV side to LV side phase angle shift in degrees (it has value of +30 for Dy1 excitation
transformer and -30 for Dy11 excitation transformer)
Once the measured currents are transferred from the HV side to the LV side of the
excitation transformer the same calculations are performed as in case when CT is located
on the LV side.
The measured current used by the function is available as a service value.
Overload characteristics
Rotor winding temperature increases with the current. Thus, it is logical to apply over
current elements with inverse time-current characteristics for overload protection. The
function operating characteristic is designed in accordance with the American standard
IEEE-C50.13. This standard specifies the following operating points:
Technical manual
589
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 294:
Operate time in accordance with IEEE-C50.13 standard
Current (% of IBase)
Trip time (s)
113
120
125
60
146
30
209
10
In order to obtain such operating characteristic the rotor overload function utilizes the
following formula in order to calculate the operate time:
ttr =
TD1
2
1
IBase
GUID-7CF0FE5A-F5CE-44EC-A2D7-F1E05849171C V1 EN
(Equation 145)
Where:
ttr is triptime in seconds
TD1 is a multiplier (it shall have default value of 33.8 in order to get the operating points as prescribed by the
standard, see Table287)
I is measured current by the function
IBase is base current (rotor winding rated current when DC current is used as measured current)
In addition to this equation based operating characteristic, the rotor overload function has
some additional cut-off features. The actual overall operating characteristic of the rotor
overload function is shown in Figure270.
590
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
t (s)
t_MaxTripDelay
tCutOff
t tr
TD1
I
IBase
t_MinTripDelay
I (A)
IBase IPickup
ANSI12000011 V1 EN
Figure 270:
Operating characteristic for the overload function
As shown in Figure 270 it is possible to define the maximum (t_MaxTripDelay) and

minimum (t_MinTripDelay) trip time for the function regardless of the level of the
measured current. In addition to this it is also possible to specify the cut-off time below
which the IDMT curve defined by the above equation will be used. Note that tCutOff shall
be always set to the smaller value than t_MaxTripDelay.
The trip time of the rotor overload function is calculated by using the integration principle
(see Chapter Inverse time characteristics in the Technical Manual for more
information). As a service value from the rotor overload function regarding this
integration process the Theta parameter, proportional to the rotor heating content, is
provided. This parameter has value of 100% when function issues the trip signal. Thus, in
simple words, it represent a percentage of the function trip level. As soon as the measured
current is above the pick-up level IPickup and no block signal is present, the output signal
PICKUP is activated and the Theta parameter is incremented following the inverse
characteristic given in Figure 271. When theta has reached value 100%, the output signal
TRIP is set. The minimum trip signal duration is defined by the parameter tPulse. Note
also that the BLKRECL signal will remain one as long as Theta > ReclsLevTheta. Thus the
parameter ReclsLevTheta represents the Theta value below which is safe again to reconnect the tripped generator to the network.
The output signal PICKUP will reset if the measured current falls below reset level or if
BLOCK signal is set to one. However the Theta value is stored in the IED memory and it
Technical manual
591
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
starts to decay slowly following a linear reset characteristic defined by the parameter
tReset. The parameter tReset actually defines the rest time for Theta from value 100% to
zero. Note that if an overload condition happens again, the last theta value is used as a
starting point for the calculation. Thus the rotor winding will be properly protected against
varying current levels.
592
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Imeasured
IBase * IPickup
Pickup hysteresis
t
THETA
100
ReclsLevTheta
TRIP
PICKUP
t
tReset
ANSI12000015 V1 EN
Figure 271:
Operating principles of the rotor overload function
Technical manual
593
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Under current protection of rotor winding

One undercurrent protection level with definite time delay is available within the function.
It can be used to either alarm or trip for low-excitation/loss-of-excitation condition of the
machine. This built-in feature monitors the level of the measured current. As soon as it is
lower than the pre-set value (i.e. parameter 37 PICKUP) it will start a timer (i.e defined by
parameter 37 trip delay). Once this timer has expired the signal 37 TRIP will be given. In
order to avoid unwanted tripping of this undercurrent feature when machine is
disconnected from the network it shall be supervised by appropriate signal (e.g. blocked
when generator CB is open). Simplified logic diagram of this feature is given in
Figure272.
37 Enable
MeasurCurrent
<
37 PICKUP
37 trip delay
AND
37 TRIP
IBase
BLOCK37
NOT
BLOCK
NOT
ANSI12000021 V1 EN
Figure 272:
Undercurrent protection feature
Tripping logic
This tripping logic provides some additional features regarding blocking and tripping
options available within the function. The list below describes functionality of every
binary input and output from the function which influence the trip logic.
Available binary inputs:
BLOCK prevents operation of overload and undercurrent features, at the same time all
binary outputs are forced to zero.
BLOCK37 prevents operation of undercurrent feature only
SETLKOUT forces lockout operation (output LOCKOUT) by external signal
RESET resets lockout and forces Theta value to zero
594
Technical manual
Section 8
Current protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Available binary outputs:

TRIP, operation of the overload feature
37 TRIP, operation of the undercurrent feature
PICKUP, current bigger than IPickup level
37 PICKUP, current smaller than 37 PICKUP level
LOCKOUT, sealed-in TRIP output signal from the function. Note that lockout feature is
only enabled by setting AutoLockout = On
79M BLOCK, output signal active as long as Theta > ReclsLevTheta, which can be used
to block closing of the generator CB
Simplified logic diagram for lockout functionality is shown in Figure273.
AutoLockout
TRIP
AND
OR
AND
AND
LOCKOUT
SETLKOUT
RESET
NOT
BLOCK
IEC12000020 V1 EN
Figure 273:
Trip Lockout logic
Alarm ripple detection

The rotor winding is provided with DC excitation current through the rectifier bridge and
the excitation transformer. In case a fault happens in the rectifier circuit, for example a
short circuit or broken diode/thyristor, the rotor system is endangered, due to asymmetry
in the three phase currents. This asymmetry will cause a ripple in the rotor DC current.
This alarm method estimates the ripple of the rotor DC current and if it exceed the preset
level (parameter AlmRippleLev) it will start a timer (defined by parameter tAlarmRipple).
Once this timer has expired the signal ALRIPPLE will be given.
The service value for the ripple level is provided. It is recommended to check the natural
ripple of the rotor DC current at site before the level for parameter AlmRippleLev is set.
Note that this ripple supervision shall only be used if the rotor DC current is used as
measured quantity.
Technical manual
595
Section 8
Current protection
8.16.8
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 295:
GRPTTR (49R) technical data
Function
596
Range or value
Accuracy
Overcurrent start level for

overload protection
(105.0900.0)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
>95%
Start time, overcurrent at 0 to 2 x

Iset
Min = 50 ms
Thermal time characteristic
According to
IEEE Std C50.132005

greater
Minimum operate time for thermal

characteristic
(1.0120.0) s

greater
Maximum operate time for

thermal characteristic
(100.02000.0) s

greater
Undercurrent start level
(5.0500.0)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir at I Ir
1.0% of I at I > Ir
Start time, undercurrent at 2 to 0 x

Iset
Min = 15 ms

undercurrent function at 2 to 0 x
Iset
(0.0600.0) s
Max = 170 ms
Max = 30 ms
greater
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.1
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)
9.1.1
Identification
Two step undervoltage protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
27
UV2PTUV
3U<
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
V2 EN
9.1.2
Functionality
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions. Two
step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV, 27) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed backup to primary protection.
UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
UV2PTUV (27) has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.
Technical manual
597
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.1.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
UV2PTUV (27)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLK1
BLKTR2
BLK2
TRIP
TRST1
TRST1_A
TRST1_B
TRST1_C
TRST2
TRST2_A
TRST2_B
TRST2_C
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
PU_ST2_C
ANSI06000276 V2 EN
Figure 274:
9.1.4
UV2PTUV (27) function block
Signals
Table 296:
Name
UV2PTUV (27) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase voltages
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR1
BOOLEAN
Block of trip signal, step 1
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLKTR2
BOOLEAN
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Table 297:
Name
UV2PTUV (27) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST1_A
BOOLEAN
TRST1_B
BOOLEAN
TRST1_C
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
TRST2_A
BOOLEAN

598
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
9.1.5
Table 298:
Name
Type
Description
TRST2_B
BOOLEAN
TRST2_C
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_C
BOOLEAN
Settings
UV2PTUV (27) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OperationStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of

3, 3 of 3) from step 1
Pickup1
1.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
70.0
Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & InverseTime curve) in % of VBase, step 1
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
Definitive time delay of step 1
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

step 1
TD1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

for step 1
IntBlkSel1
Disabled
Block of trip
Block all
Disabled
Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1
IntBlkStVal1
1 - 50
%VB
20
Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of

VBase, step 1
tBlkUV1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for

step 1
Technical manual
599
Section 9
Voltage protection
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
HystAbs1
0.0 - 50.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 1
OperationStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3

Pickup2
1.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

step 2
TD2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

step 2
IntBlkSel2
Disabled
Block of trip
Block all
Disabled
Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2
IntBlkStVal2
1 - 50
%VB
20
Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of

VBase, step 2
tBlkUV2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for

step 2
HystAbs2
0.0 - 50.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
Table 299:
Name
UV2PTUV (27) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
0.025
Description
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for

step 1
tIReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 1
ACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 1
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00

curve for step 1
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0

curve for step 1
DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Parameter D for customer programmable

curve for step 1
PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 1

600
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CrvSat1
0 - 100
Tuning param for prog. under voltage InverseTime curve, step 1
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025

curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of Time Delay reset curve for step 2
tIReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00

curve for step 2
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0

curve for step 2
DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

curve for step 2
PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
CrvSat2
0 - 100
Tuning param for prog. under voltage InverseTime curve, step 2
Table 300:
Name
UV2PTUV (27) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ConnType
PhN DFT
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
PhN DFT
Group selector for connection type
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
9.1.6
Monitored data
Table 301:
Name
UV2PTUV (27) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VA
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase A
VB
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase B
VC
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase C
Technical manual
601
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.1.7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Operation principle
Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV ,27) is used to detect low power system
voltage. UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If
one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding PICKUP
signal is generated. UV2PTUV (27) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP based on 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If the voltage remains
below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the
corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to disconnection of the
related high voltage equipment, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available,
that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level the function is blocked and no
PICKUP or TRIP signal is generated.The time delay characteristic is individually chosen
for each step and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay.
UV2PTUV (27) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-tophase fundamental value, phase-to-ground true RMS value or phase-to-phase true RMS
value. The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The voltage
related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-to-phase
voltage. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage under:
Vpickup < (%) VBase(kV )
3
(Equation 146)
EQUATION1606 V1 EN
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

Vpickup < (%) VBase(kV)
(Equation 147)
When phase-to-ground voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of
three.
9.1.7.1
Measurement principle
Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV (27) measures phase-to-ground or
phase-to-phase voltages and compare against set values, Pickup1 and Pickup2. The
parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the PICKUP
outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be lower than
the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding PICKUP signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
602
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
9.1.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
undervoltage (TUV). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
customer programmable inverse curve
The type A curve is described as:

t=
TD
Vpickup < -V
Vpickup <
(Equation 148)
where:
Vpickup
<
Set value for step 1 and step 2
Measured voltage
The type B curve is described as:

t=
TD 480
Vpickup < -V
- 0.5
32
Vpickup <
2.0
+ 0.055
EQUATION1608 V1 EN
(Equation 149)
The customer programmable curve can be created as:
TD A
+D
t=
P
Vpickup < -V

-C
B
Vpickup

EQUATION1609 V1 EN
(Equation 150)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to
compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup< down to Vpickup<
Technical manual
603
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
(1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup< (1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
-C > 0
100
(Equation 151)
EQUATION1435 V1 EN
The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of the
different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 25.3 "Inverse characteristics".
Figure 275:
Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Voltage
VA
VB
VC
IDMT Voltage
Time
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the user
set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT)
and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode
(TUV). If the pickup condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the
delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2
for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the inverse time) the
corresponding pickup output is reset. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the pickup condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the
signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the undervoltage function the
TUV reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the
drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is
linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 276 and figure 277.
604
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
tIReset1
Voltage
tIReset1
PICKUP
HystAbs1
Measured
Voltage
TRIP
PICKUP1
Time
t
PICKUP
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer
Instantaneous
Linearly
decreased
Time
ANSI05000010 V3 EN
Figure 276:
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types
Technical manual
605
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
tIReset1
Voltage
PICKUP
PICKUP
tIReset1
HystAbs1
Measured Voltage
TRIP
PICKUP 1
Time
t
PICKUP
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer
Time
Instantaneous
Linearly
decreased
ANSI05000011 V2 EN
Figure 277:
Voltage profile causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different reset
types
Definite timer delay
606
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
When definite time delay is selected the function will trip as shown in figure 278. Detailed
information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure 279 and
figure 280 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the
definite time delayed stage is ensured.
PU_ST1
V
Pickup1
a
a<b
R tReset1
TRST1
t1
0
AND
ANSI09000785 V3 EN
Figure 278:
Detailed logic diagram for step 1, DT operation
Pickup1
PU_ST1
TRST1
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000039 V3 EN
Figure 279:
Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset
Technical manual
607
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Pickup1
PU_ST1
TRST1
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000040 V3 EN
Figure 280:
9.1.7.3
Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation
Blocking
It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27) partially or
completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTR1:
blocks all trip outputs of step 1
BLK1:
blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1
BLKTR2:
BLK2:
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the trip
output of step 1, or both the trip and the PICKUP outputs of step 1, are blocked. The
characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking can
also be set to Disabled resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings and
functionality are valid also for step 2.
In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get very
low. The event will PICKUP both the under voltage function and the blocking function,
as seen in figure 281. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than the time
delay of under voltage function.
608
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Disconnection
Normal voltage
Pickup1
Pickup2
tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000466 V1 EN
Figure 281:
9.1.7.4
Blocking function
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral
voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS filters
of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to the set value,
and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special
logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the
PICKUP condition. The design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27) is
schematically shown in Figure 282.
Technical manual
609
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VA
VB
VC
Comparator
VA < V1<
Comparator
VB < V1<
Comparator
VC < V1<
PU_ST1_A
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
Phase 1
PU_ST1_B
Phase 2
Phase 3
IntBlkStVal1
PICKUP
MinVoltSelector
Time integrator
tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
Pickup
t1
t1Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST1
OR
TRST1_A
Step 1
TRST1_B
TRIP
TRST1_C
TRST1
OR
Comparator
VA < V2<
Comparator
VB < V2<
Comparator
VC < V2<
PU_ST2_A
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
IntBlkStVal2
PICKUP
Phase 1
PU_ST2_B
Phase 2
Pickup
t2
Phase 3 t2Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PU_ST2_C
PU_ST2
OR
TRST2_A
Step 2
MinVoltSelector
Time integrator
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
TRST2_B
TRIP
TRST2_C
TRST2
OR
PICKUP
OR
OR
TRIP
ANSI05000012 V3 EN
Figure 282:
610
Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
9.1.8
Technical data
Table 302:
UV2PTUV (27) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip voltage, low and high

step
(1.0100.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Absolute hysteresis
(0.050.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Internal blocking level,

step 1 and step 2
(1.050.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Inverse time
characteristics for step 1
and step 2, see table 989
See table 989
Definite time delay, step 1

at 1.2 to 0 x Vset
(0.00-6000.00) s
less than 40 ms
Definite time delay, step 2

at 1.2 to 0 x Vset
(0.000-60.000) s
less than 40 ms
Minimum trip time, inverse

characteristics
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% or 40ms whichever is

greater
Trip time, pickup at 2 to 0 x

Vset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, pickup at 0 to 2

x Vset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Trip time, pickup at 1.2 to 0

x Vset
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, pickup at 0 to

1.2 x Vset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 35 ms
5 ms typically at 1.2 to 0 x Vset
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
9.2
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)
9.2.1
Identification
Two step overvoltage protection
IEC 61850
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59
OV2PTOV
3U>
SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN
Technical manual
611
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.2.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Functionality OV2PTOV
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as sudden
power loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.
OV2PTOV (59) has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.
OV2PTOV (59) has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.
9.2.3
Function block
OV2PTOV (59)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLK1
BLKTR2
BLK2
TRIP
TRST1
TRST1_A
TRST1_B
TRST1_C
TRST2
TRST2_A
TRST2_B
TRST2_C
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
PU_ST2_C
ANSI06000277 V2 EN
Figure 283:
9.2.4
Signals
Table 303:
Name
612
OV2PTOV (59) function block
OV2PTOV (59) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for three phase voltage input
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR1
BOOLEAN
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLKTR2
BOOLEAN
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 304:
OV2PTOV (59) Output signals
Name
9.2.5
Table 305:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST1_A
BOOLEAN
TRST1_B
BOOLEAN
TRST1_C
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
TRST2_A
BOOLEAN
TRST2_B
BOOLEAN
TRST2_C
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2_C
BOOLEAN
Settings
OV2PTOV (59) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OperationStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3

Pickup1
1.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
Technical manual
613
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

step 1
TD1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

for step 1
HystAbs1
0.0 - 50.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
OperationStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3

Pickup2
1.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

step 2
TD2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

step 2
HystAbs2
0.0 - 50.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
Table 306:
Name
Step
Default
Description
OV2PTOV (59) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
0.025
Description
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous

step 1
tIReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 1
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00

curve for step 1
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0

curve for step 1
DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

curve for step 1
PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 1
CrvSat1
0 - 100
Tuning param for programmable over voltage

TOV curve, step 1

614
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025

curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
tIReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00

curve for step 2
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0

curve for step 2
DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

curve for step 2
PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
CrvSat2
0 - 100

TOV curve, step 2
Table 307:
Name
Step
Default
Description
OV2PTOV (59) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ConnType
PhN DFT
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS
PhN DFT
Group selector for connection type
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
9.2.6
Monitored data
Table 308:
Name
9.2.7
OV2PTOV (59) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VA
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase A
VB
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase B
VC
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase C
Operation principle
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV (59) has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or threephase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding PICKUP signal is issued.
Technical manual
615
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
OV2PTOV (59) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of

the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains above the set value
for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is
issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either,
definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage VBase,
which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.
OV2PTOV (59) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-tophase fundamental value, phase-to-ground RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value. The
choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.
The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase
voltage. OV2PTOV (59) will trip if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the
set base voltage VBase. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage over:
Vpickup > (%) VBase(kV ) / 3
(Equation 152)
EQUATION1610 V2 EN
and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

Vpickup > (%) VBase(kV)
(Equation 153)
EQUATION1992 V1 EN
When phase-to-ground voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root of
three.
9.2.7.1
All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
Pickup1 for Step 1 and Pickup2 for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2
influence the requirements to activate the PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or
3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the
corresponding PICKUP signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis is included.
616
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
9.2.7.2
Time delay
delay (TOV). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C

TD
V Vpickup >
Vpickup >
t=
(Equation 154)
EQUATION1625 V2 EN
where:
Vpickup
>
Measured voltage

t=
TD 480
+ 0.035
V Vpickup >
0.5
32
Vpickup >
(Equation 155)
The type C curve is described as:

t=
TD 480
+ 0.035
V Vpickup >
32
0.5
Vpickup >
(Equation 156)
The customer programmable curve is defined by the below equation, where A, B, C, D, k

and p are settings:
t=
TD A
V - Vpickup
-C
B
Vpickup
+D
EQUATION1616 V1 EN
Technical manual
(Equation 157)
617
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to
compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup up to Vpickup (1.0 +
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the
CrvSatn
-C > 0
100
(Equation 158)
EQUATION1435 V1 EN
The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay
integration, see figure 284. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are
shown in section "Inverse characteristics".
Voltage
IDMT Voltage
VA
VB
VC
Time
ANSI05000016 V2 EN
Figure 284:
Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Operation of the trip signal requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode
(TOV). If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the
delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2
for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding
PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be
noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must be fulfilled again
and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. The
hysteresis value for each step is settable HystAbsn (where n means either 1 or 2
respectively) to allow a high and accurate reset of the function. For OV2PTOV (59) the
618
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
TOV reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the
drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer: either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is
linearly decreased during the reset time.
tIReset1
tIReset1
Voltage
PICKUP
TRIP
PU_Overvolt1
HystAbs1
Measured
Voltage
Time
PICKUP
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer
Linearly
decreased
Instantaneous
Time
ANSI05000019 V3 EN
Figure 285:
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types
Technical manual
619
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
tIReset1
Voltage
PICKUP
PICKUP
tIReset1
HystAbs1
TRIP
Pickup1
Measured Voltage
Time
t
PICKUP
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer
Time
Instantaneous
Linearly decreased
ANSI05000020 V2 EN
Figure 286:
Voltage profile causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different reset
types
Definite time delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will trip as shown in figure 287. Detailed
figure 280 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s (where n means either 1 or 2
respectively), instantaneous reset of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.
620
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PU_ST1
tReset1
a
a>b
Vpickup>
t1
t
TRST1
AND
b
OFF
Delay
ON
Delay
ANSI10000100 V2 EN
Figure 287:
Detailed logic diagram for step 1, definite time delay, DT operation
Pickup1
PICKUP
TRIP
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000037 V2 EN
Figure 288:
Example for step 1, Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset
Technical manual
621
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Pickup1
PICKUP
TRIP
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000038 V2 EN
Figure 289:
9.2.7.3
Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation
Blocking
It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV, (59) partially or
completely, by binary input signals where:
9.2.7.4
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTR1:
BLK1:
BLKTR2:
BLK2:
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-ground
voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS filters
of input voltage signals are used. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set
value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A
special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the
PICKUP condition. The design of Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) is
schematically described in figure 290.
622
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VA
VB
VC
Comparator
VA >
Pickup 1
Comparator
VB >
Pickup 1
Comparator
VC >
Pickup 1
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
PU_ST1_A
Phase A
PU_ST1_B
Phase B
Phase C
Phase C
PICKUP
Pickup
t1
t1Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PU_ ST1_C
PU_ST1
OR
TRST1-A
Step1
MaxVoltSelect
Time integrator
tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
TRST1_B
TRIP
TRST1_C
TRST1
OR
Comparator
VA >
Pickup 2
Comparator
VB >
Pickup 2
Comparator
VC >
Pickup 2
Voltage Phase
Selector
Phase A
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
Phase B
Phase C
PICKUP
MaxVoltSelect
Time integrator
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
TRIP
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
Pickup
t2
t2Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PU_ST2_C
PU_ST2
OR
TRST2-A
Step 2
TRST2-B
TRST2-C
TRST2
OR
OR PICKUP
OR
TRIP
_
.
ANSI05000013 V2 EN
Figure 290:
Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)
Technical manual
623
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.2.8
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 309:
OV2PTOV (59) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip voltage, step 1

and 2
(1.0-200.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Absolute hysteresis
(0.050.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Inverse time
characteristics for
steps 1 and 2, see
table 988
See table 988

low step (step 1) at 0
to 1.2 x Vset
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
greater

high step (step 2) at 0
to 1.2 x Vset
(0.000-60.000) s
greater
Minimum trip time,

Inverse
characteristics
(0.000-60.000) s
Trip time, pickup at 0

to 2 x Vset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, pickup at

2 to 0 x Vset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Trip time, pickup at 0

to 1.2 x Vset
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, , pickup

at 1.2 to 0 x Vset
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
9.3
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

(59N)
9.3.1
Identification
Two step residual overvoltage
protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59N
ROV2PTOV
3U0
TRV V1 EN
624
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
9.3.2
Functionality
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during ground faults.
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) function calculates the
residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a
single voltage input transformer fed from a broken delta or neutral point voltage
transformer.
ROV2PTOV (59N) has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent ground faults.
9.3.3
Function block
ROV2PTOV (59N)
V3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
TRST1
BLKTR1
TRST2
BLK1
PICKUP
BLKTR2
PU_ST1
BLK2
PU_ST2
ANSI06000278 V2 EN
Figure 291:
9.3.4
ROV2PTOV (59N) function block
Signals
Table 310:
Name
ROV2PTOV (59N) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Three phase voltages
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR1
BOOLEAN
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLKTR2
BOOLEAN
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Table 311:
Name
ROV2PTOV (59N) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN

Technical manual
625
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
9.3.5
Table 312:
Name
Type
Description
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
Settings
ROV2PTOV (59N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OperationStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Pickup1
1.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
30.0
Voltage setting/pickup value (DT & TOV), step

1 in % of VBase
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

step 1
TD1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

for step 1
HystAbs1
0.0 - 50.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
OperationStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Pickup2
1.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
45.0
Voltage setting/pickup value (DT & TOV), step

2 in % of VBase
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
t2Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000

step 2
TD2
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05

step 2
HystAbs2
0.0 - 50.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
626
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 313:
Name
ROV2PTOV (59N) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025

curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous

step 1
tIReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv1
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 1
BCrv1
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00

curve for step 1
CCrv1
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0

curve for step 1
DCrv1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

curve for step 1
PCrv1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 1
CrvSat1
0 - 100

TOV curve, step 1
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
Time delay in Definite-Time reset (s), step 2
ResetTypeCrv2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
tIReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.025
ACrv2
0.005 - 200.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
BCrv2
0.50 - 100.00
0.01
1.00

curve for step 2
CCrv2
0.0 - 1.0
0.1
0.0

curve for step 2
DCrv2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000

curve for step 2
PCrv2
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

curve for step 2
CrvSat2
0 - 100

TOV curve, step 2
Table 314:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Step
Default
Description
ROV2PTOV (59N) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Technical manual
Description
groups
627
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.3.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Monitored data
Table 315:
ROV2PTOV (59N) Monitored data
Name
Type
VLevel
9.3.7
Values (Range)
REAL
Unit
kV
Description
Magnitude of measured
voltage
Operation principle
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) is used to detect high singlephase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3V0. The residual voltage can be
measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer or from
a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are connected in an open
delta. Another possibility is to measure the three-phase voltages and internally in the IED
calculate the corresponding residual voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage
to ROV2PTOV (59N). ROV2PTOV (59N) has two steps with separate time delays. If the
single-phase (residual) voltage remains above the set value for a time period
corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either,
definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV,
phase-phase.
9.3.7.1
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values, Pickup1
and Pickup2.
9.3.7.2
Time delay
delay (TOV). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C

628
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
t=
TD
V - Vpickup >
Vpickup >
(Equation 159)
where:
Vn>
Measured voltage

t=
TD 480
V - Vpickup >
- 0.5
32
Vpickup >
2.0
- 0.035
(Equation 160)
The type C curve is described as:

t=
TD 480
V - Vpickup >
- 0.5
32
Vpickup >
3.0
+ 0.035
(Equation 161)
The customer programmable curve can be created as:

t=
TD A
V - Vpickup
-C
B
Vpickup
+D
EQUATION1616 V1 EN
(Equation 162)
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to
compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup up to Vpickup (1.0 +
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the
CrvSatn
-C > 0
100
EQUATION1440 V1 EN
(Equation 163)
The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
characteristics".
Technical manual
629
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time
mode (TOV).
If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay
time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the
definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding PICKUP
output is reset, after the defined reset time has elapsed.
Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must
be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis
area. Also notice that for the overvoltage function TOV reset time is constant and does not
depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three
ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen
during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See
figure 285 and figure 286.
630
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
tIReset1
tIReset1
Voltage
PICKUP
TRIP
PU_Overvolt1
HystAbs1
Measured
Voltage
Time
PICKUP
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer
Linearly
decreased
Time
Instantaneous
ANSI05000019 V3 EN
Figure 292:
Voltage profile not causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
Technical manual
631
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
tIReset1
Voltage
PICKUP
PICKUP
tIReset1
HystAbs1
TRIP
Pickup1
Measured Voltage
Time
t
PICKUP
TRIP
Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer
Time
Instantaneous
Linearly decreased
ANSI05000020 V2 EN
Figure 293:
Voltage profile causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay
Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will trip as shown in figure 294. Detailed
figure 280 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset of the
definite time delayed stage is ensured.
632
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PU_ST1
tReset1
a
a>b
Vpickup>
t1
t
TRST1
AND
b
OFF
Delay
ON
Delay
ANSI10000100 V2 EN
Figure 294:
Detailed logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation
Pickup1
PICKUP
TRIP
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000037 V2 EN
Figure 295:
Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset
Technical manual
633
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Pickup1
PICKUP
TRIP
tReset1
t1
ANSI10000038 V2 EN
Figure 296:
9.3.7.3
Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation
Blocking
It is possible to block Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)
partially or completely, by binary input signals where:
9.3.7.4
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTR1:
BLK1:
BLKTR2:
BLK2:
blocks all pickup and trip inputs related to step 2
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive
Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal for the rated frequency. The single input
voltage is compared to the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. The design of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N)
is schematically described in figure 297.
634
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VN
Comparator
VN >
Pickup 1
Phase 1
PICKUP
Time integrator
tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1
Comparator
VN >
Pickup2
TRIP
TRST1
Pickup
t1
tReset1
&
Trip
Output
Logic
Step 1
PU_ST2
Phase 1
PICKUP
Time integrator
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2
PU_ ST1
TRIP
TRST2
Pickup
t2
tReset2
&
Trip
Output
Logic
Step 2
OR
PICKUP
OR
TRIP
ANSI05000748 V2 EN
Figure 297:
9.3.8
Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV (59N)
Technical data
Table 316:
ROV2PTOV (59N) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip voltage, step 1 and

step 2
(1.0-200.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
0.5% of Vn at V > Vn
Absolute hysteresis
(0.050.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
0.5% of Vn at V > Vn
Inverse time
characteristics for low
and high step, see
table 990
See table 990
Definite time delay low

step (step 1) at 0 to 1.2
x Vset
(0.006000.00) s
greater
Technical manual
635
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Definite time delay high

step (step 2) at 0 to 1.2
x Vset
(0.00060.000) s
greater
Minimum trip time
(0.000-60.000) s
greater
Trip time, pickup at 0 to

2 x Vset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, pickup at 2

to 0 x Vset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Trip time, pickup at 0 to

1.2 x Vset
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, pickup at

1.2 to 0 x Vset
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
9.4
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24)
9.4.1
Identification
Overexcitation protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
24
OEXPVPH
U/f >
SYMBOL-Q V1 EN
9.4.2
Functionality
When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a magnetic
flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated components
that are not designed to carry flux. This will cause eddy currents to flow. These eddy
currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent parts
in a relatively short time. The function has settable inverse operating curves and
independent alarm stages.
636
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
9.4.3
Function block
OEXPVPH (24)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
RESET
TRIP
PICKUP
ALARM
ANSI05000329 V2 EN
Figure 298:
9.4.4
OEXPVPH (24) function block
Signals
Table 317:
OEXPVPH (24) Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Current connection
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage connection
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset operation
OEXPVPH (24) Output signals
Name
Table 319:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 318:
9.4.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip from overexcitation function
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Overexcitation above set trip pickup (instantaneous)
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Overexcitation above set alarm pickup (delayed)
Settings
OEXPVPH (24) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Pickup1
100.0 - 180.0
%VB/f
0.1
110.0
Operate level of V/Hz at no load and rated freq

in % of (UBase/frated)
Pickup2
100.0 - 200.0
%VB/f
0.1
140.0
High level of V/Hz above which tMin is used, in

% of (VBase/frated)
XLeakage
0.000 - 200.000
Ohm
0.001
0.000
Winding leakage reactance in primary ohms
t_TripPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec)
Technical manual
637
Section 9
Voltage protection
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
t_MinTripDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
7.000
Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in

sec
t_MaxTripDelay
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
1800.00
Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in

sec
t_CoolingK
0.10 - 9000.00
0.01
1200.00
Transformer magnetic core cooling time

constant, in sec
CurveType
IEEE
Tailor made
IEEE
Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor made
TDForIEEECurve
1 - 60
Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type curve
AlarmPickup
50.0 - 120.0
0.1
100.0
Alarm pickup level as % of Step1 trip pickup

level
tAlarm
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
5.00
Alarm time delay, in sec
Default
Table 320:
Name
Step
Default
Description
OEXPVPH (24) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
t1_UserCurve
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
7200.00
Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made curve, in

sec
t2_UserCurve
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
3600.00
Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in sec
t3_UserCurve
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
1800.00
t4_UserCurve
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
900.00
t5_UserCurve
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
450.00
t6_UserCurve
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
225.00
Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made curve,

in sec
Step
Default
Table 321:
Name
Description
OEXPVPH (24) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Description
MeasuredV
PosSeq
AB
BC
CA
AB
Selection of measured voltage
MeasuredI
AB
BC
CA
PosSeq
AB
Selection of measured current
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
638
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
9.4.6
Monitored data
Table 322:
OEXPVPH (24) Monitored data
Name
9.4.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
TMTOTRIP
REAL
Calculated time to trip for

overexcitation, in sec
VPERHZ
REAL
V/Hz
Voltage to frequency ratio in

per-unit
THERMSTA
REAL
Overexcitation thermal status

in % of trip pickup
Operation principle
The importance of Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH, 24) function is growing as the
power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate near their
designated limits most of the time.
Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types. This
is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the improvement in the
uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. If an emergency that causes
overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged unless corrective action is taken.
Transformer manufacturers recommend an overexcitation protection as a part of the
transformer protection system.
Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with
below-normal frequency. Such conditions may occur when a transformer unit is loaded,
but are more likely to arise when the transformer is unloaded, or when loss of load occurs.
Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to experience
overexcitation conditions. It follows from the fundamental transformer equation, see
equation 164, that the peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to induced voltage
E, and inversely proportional to frequency f and turns n.
E = 4.44 f n B max A
(Equation 164)
EQUATION898 V2 EN
The relative excitation M is therefore according to equation 165.

M ( p.u.) =
E f
( Vr ) ( fn )
(Equation 165)
Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If the
core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9 Tesla), the
Technical manual
639
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
flux will no longer be contained within the core, but will extend into other (non-laminated)
parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current circulations.
Overexcitation will result in:
overheating of the non-laminated metal parts

a large increase in magnetizing currents
an increase in core and winding temperature
an increase in transformer vibration and noise
Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative volt per hertz (V/
Hz) ratio. Protection initiates a reduction of excitation, and if this fails, or if this is not
possible, the TRIP signal will disconnect the transformer from the source after a delay
ranging from seconds to minutes, typically 5-10 seconds.
Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected generator
unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected to a wide
range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine. In such cases,
OEXPVPH (24) may trip the field breaker during a start-up of a machine, by means of the
overexcitation ALARM signal. If this is not possible, the power transformer can be
disconnected from the source, after a delay, by the TRIP signal.
The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers operate continuously at not more
than 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the ratio of the
actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not exceed 1.1 times the
ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a sustained basis, see
equation 166.
E
f
1.1
Vn
fn
(Equation 166)
EQUATION1630 V1 EN
or equivalently, with 1.1 Vn = Pickup1 according to equation 167.

E
f
Pickup1
fn
(Equation 167)
where:
Pickup1 is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.
640
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Pickup1 is a setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 180%. If the user does not
know exactly what to set, then the default value for Pickup1 = 110 % given by the IEC
60076-1 standard shall be used.
In OEXPVPH (24), the relative excitation M is expressed according to equation 168.
M ( p.u.) =
E f
Vn fn
(Equation 168)
It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for any
E and f, where the ratio E/f is equal to Vn/fn. A power transformer is not overexcited as
long as the relative excitation is M Pickup1, Pickup1 expressed in % of Vn/fn.
The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage V which is in general
not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For no load
condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power transformer the
internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the voltage V which is measured
and fed to OEXPVPH (24), depending on the direction of the power flow through the
power transformer, the power transformer side where OEXPVPH (24) is applied, and the
power transformer leakage reactance of the winding. It is important to specify in the
application configuration on which side of the power transformer OEXPVPH (24) is
placed.
As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full load, 0.8
power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the transformer core,
will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage, no load, rated frequency,
provided that the short circuit impedance X can be equally divided between the primary
and the secondary winding: XLeakage = XLeakage1 = XLeakage2 = Xsc / 2 = 0.075 pu.
OEXPVPH (24) calculates the internal induced voltage E if XLeakage (meaning the
leakage reactance of the winding where OEXPVPH (24) is connected) is known to the
user. The assumption taken for two-winding power transformers that XLeakage = Xsc / 2
is unfortunately most often not true. For a two-winding power transformer the leakage
reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on the core with
respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers the situation is still
more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage reactance, then it should
applied. If a user has no idea about it, XLeakage can be set to Xc/2. OEXPVPH (24)
protection will then take the given measured voltage V, as the induced voltage E.
It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events such as
loss-of-load, etc. A high phase-to-ground voltage does not mean overexcitation. For
example, in an ungrounded power system, a single phase-to-ground fault means high
voltages of the healthy two phases-to-ground, but no overexcitation on any winding.
Technical manual
641
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially unchanged. The important voltage is
the voltage between the two ends of each winding.
9.4.7.1
Measured voltage
If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where overexcitation protection
is applied, then Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24) shall be set to measure this
voltage, MeasuredV. The particular voltage which is used determines the two currents that
must be used. This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI.
It is extremely important that MeasuredV and MeasuredI are set to same
value.
If, for example, voltage Vab is fed to OEXPVPH(24), then currents Ia, and Ib must be
applied. From these two input currents, current Iab = Ia - Ib is calculated internally by the
OEXPVPH (24) algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage must be higher than 70% of the
rated value, otherwise the protection algorithm exits without calculating the excitation.
ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V/Hz shows
0.000.
If three phase-to-ground voltages are available from the side where overexcitation is
connected, then OEXPVPH (24) shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage and
current. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current are
used by OEXPVPH (24). A check is made if the positive sequence voltage is higher than
70% of rated phase-to-ground voltage, when below this value, OEXPVPH (24) exits
immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed
value of relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.
9.4.7.2
OEXPVPH (24) can be connected to any power transformer side, independent from
the power flow.
The side with a possible load tap changer must not be used.
Operate time of the overexcitation protection

The operate time of OEXPVPH (24) is a function of the relative overexcitation.
Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose between:
642
the so called IEEE law, and

a tailor-made law.
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on analysis
of the various transformers overexcitation capability characteristics. They can match the
transformer core capability well.
The square law is according to equation 169.
top =
0.18 TD
PUV Hz - 1
0.18 TD
overexcitation
(Equation 169)
where:
M
the relative excitation
Pickup1 is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and
TD
is time multiplier for inverse time functions, see figure 300.

Parameter TD (time delay multiplier setting) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.
The relative excitation M is calculated using equation170
Vmeasured
fmeasured
=
Vmeasured
frated
VBase VBase fmeasured
frated
(Equation 170)
An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral expression,
which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to equation 171.
top
( M ( t ) - Pickup1)
dt 0.18 TD
0
(Equation 171)
A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (that is, j = n) where it becomes
true that:
Technical manual
643
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Dt
( M( j) - PUV / Hz )
0.18 TD
j=k
(Equation 172)
EQUATION1636 V1 EN
where:
is the time interval between two successive executions of OEXPVPH (24) and
Dt
M(j) - Pickup1 is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is given as
Vn/fn.
As long as M > Pickup1 (that is, overexcitation condition), the above sum can only be
larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will be
tripped at j = n.
Inverse delays as per figure 300, can be modified (limited) by two special definite delay
settings, namely t_MaxTripDelay and t_MinTripDelay, see figure 299.
delay in s
t_MaxTrip
Delay
under excitation
inverse delay law
overexcitation
t_MinTripDelay
0
Mmax Pickup1
M=Pickup1
Pickup1
Mmax
Emax
Overexcitation M-Pickup1
Excitation M
E (only if f = fn = const)
ANSI99001067-2en.vsd
ANSI99001067 V2 EN
Figure 299:
Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by t_MaxTripDelay and

t_MinTripDelay
A definite maximum time, t_MaxTripDelay, can be used to limit the operate time at low
degrees of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than t_MaxTripDelay will not be
allowed. In case the inverse delay is longer than t_MaxTripDelay, OEXPVPH (24) trips
after t_MaxTripDelay seconds.
A definite minimum time, t_MinTripDelay, can be used to limit the operate time at high
degrees of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than t_MinTripDelay,
OEXPVPH (24) function trips after t_MinTripDelay seconds. The inverse delay law is not
644
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
valid for values exceeding Mmax. The delay will be tMin, irrespective of the
overexcitation level, when values exceed Mmax (that is, M>Pickup1).
IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES
Time (s)
1000
100
TD = 60
TD = 20
TD = 10
TD = 9
TD = 8
TD = 7
TD = 6
TD = 5
10
TD = 4
TD = 3
TD = 2
TD = 1
1
10
20
OVEREXCITATION IN %
30
40
(M-Emaxcont)*100)
en01000373_ansi.vsd
ANSI01000373 V1 EN
Figure 300:
Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation
The critical value of excitation M is determined indirectly via OEXPVPH (24) setting
Pickup2. Pickup2 can be thought of as a no-load voltage at rated frequency, where the
inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, t_MinTripDelay. If, for example,
Pickup2 = 140 %, then M is according to equation 173.
M=
( Pickup2 f )
Vn/fn
= 1.40
Technical manual
(Equation 173)
645
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In this case
the interval between M = Pickup1, and M = Mmax is automatically divided into five equal
subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5 and t6) as shown in figure 301. These
times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5 => t6.
delay in s
t_MaxTripDelay
t_MinTripDelay
underexcitation
Overexcitation M-E maxcont

0
M max - E maxcont Excitation M
Emaxcont
M max
99001068_ansi.vsd
ANSI99001068 V1 EN
Figure 301:
An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic
Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by linear
interpolation.
Should it happen that t_MaxTripDelay be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the
actual delay would be t_MaxTripDelay. Above Mmax, the delay can only be
t_MinTripDelay.
9.4.7.3
Cooling
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24) is basically a thermal protection; therefore a
cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied. Parameter
Setting tool is an OEXPVPH (24) setting, with a default time constant t_CoolingK of 20
minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their previous normal
values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is assumed to be reached not
before approximately 5 times t_CoolingK minutes. If an overexcitation condition would
return before that, the time to trip will be shorter than it would be otherwise.
9.4.7.4
Overexcitation protection function measurands

A monitored data value, TMTOTRIP, is available on the local HMI and in PCM600. This
value is an estimation of the remaining time to trip (in seconds), if the overexcitation
remained on the level it had when the estimation was done. This information can be useful
during small or moderate overexcitation situations.
646
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is t_MaxTripDelay, then the estimation
of the remaining time to trip is done against t_MaxTripDelay.
The relative excitation M, shown on the local HMI and in PCM600 has a monitored data
value VPERHZ and is calculated from the expression:
M ( p.u.) =
E f
Vn fn
(Equation 174)
If VPERHZ value is less than setting Pickup1 (in %), the power transformer is
underexcited. If VPERHZ is equal to Pickup1 (in %), the excitation is exactly equal to the
power transformer continuous capability. If VPERHZ is higher than Pickup1, the
protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if VPERHZ = 1.100, while
Pickup1 = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum continuous
excitation limit.
The monitored data value THERMSTA shows the thermal status of the protected power
transformer iron core. THERMSTA gives the thermal status in % of the trip value which
corresponds to 100%. THERMSTA should reach 100% at the same time, as TMTOTRIP
reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then for some reason not switched
off, THERMSTA shall go over 100%.
If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by t_MaxTripDelay, and/or
t_MinTripDelay, then the Thermal status will generally not reach 100% at the same time,
when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the very
long delay is limited by t_MaxTripDelay, then the OEXPVPH (24) TRIP output signal
will be set to 1 before the Thermal status reaches 100%.
9.4.7.5
Overexcitation alarm
A separate step, AlarmPickup, is provided for alarming purpose. It is normally set 2%
lower than (Pickup1) and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the operator an
early warning.
Technical manual
647
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.4.7.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Logic diagram
BLOCK
AlarmPickup
0-tMax
0
I3P
&
ALARM
&
TRIP
tAlarm
M>Pickup1
V3P
t>tAlarm
Pickup1
Calculation
of internal
induced
voltage Ei
Ei
M=
(Ei / f)
(Vn / fn)
TD
IEEE law
&
0-tMax
M
0
Tailor-made law
t_MaxTripDelay
M>Pickup2
Xleakage
OR
0-tMin
t>tMin
0
Pickup2
t_MinTripDelay
M = relative Pickup as service value

ANSI05000162 V3 EN
Figure 302:
A simplified logic diagram of the Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH

(24)
Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are
calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and frequency
are separately checked against their respective limit values.
9.4.8
Technical data
Table 323:
OEXPVPH (24) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip value, pickup
(100180)% of (VBase/fn)
0.5% of V
Trip value, alarm
(50120)% of pickup level
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Trip value, high level
(100200)% of (VBase/fn)
0.5% of V
Curve type
IEEE or customer defined
5.0 % or 45 ms, whichever

is greater
IEEE : t =
(0.18 TD)
( M - 1) 2
EQUATION1645 V1 EN
(Equation 175)
where M = (E/f)/(Vn/fn)
648
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Minimum time delay for inverse

function
(0.00060.000) s
1.0% or 45 ms, whichever

is greater
Maximum time delay for inverse

function
(0.009000.00) s

is greater
Alarm time delay
(0.009000.00)

is greater
9.5
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60)
9.5.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Voltage differential protection
9.5.2
VDCPTOV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
60
Functionality
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from two
three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one trip step.
9.5.3
Function block
VDCPTOV (60)
V3P1*
V3P2*
BLOCK
TRIP
PICKUP
ALARM
V1LOW
V2LOW
VDIFF_A
VDIFF_B
VDIFF_C
ANSI06000528 V2 EN
Figure 303:
VDCPTOV (60) function block
Technical manual
649
Section 9
Voltage protection
9.5.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 324:
VDCPTOV (60) Input signals
Name
Type
Bus voltage
V3P2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Capacitor voltage
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
VDCPTOV (60) Output signals
Name
Table 326:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 325:
9.5.5
Default
V3P1
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Voltage differential protection operated
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Pickup of voltage differential protection
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Voltage differential protection alarm
V1LOW
BOOLEAN
Loss of V1 voltage
V2LOW
BOOLEAN
Loss of V2 voltage
VDIFF_A
REAL
Differential Voltage phase A
VDIFF_B
REAL
Differential Voltage phase B
VDIFF_C
REAL
Differential Voltage phase C
Settings
VDCPTOV (60) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
BlkDiffAtVLow
No
Yes
Yes
Block operation at low voltage
VDTrip
2.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
5.0
Operate level, in % of VBase
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Time delay for voltage differential operate, in

seconds
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for voltage differential reset, in

seconds
VDAlarm
2.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
2.0
Alarm level, in % of VBase
tAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Time delay for voltage differential alarm, in

seconds
V1Low
1.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
70.0
Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of VBase
V2Low
1.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
70.0
Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of VBase
tBlock
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Reset time for undervoltage block
650
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 327:
VDCPTOV (60) Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
RF_A
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000
Ratio compensation factor phase L1

U2L1*RFL1=U1L1
RF_B
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

U2L2*RFL2=U1L2
RF_C
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
1.000

U2L3*RFL3=U1L3
Table 328:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
9.5.6
Step
Default
Description
VDCPTOV (60) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
groups
Monitored data
Table 329:
Name
9.5.7
Unit
VDCPTOV (60) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VDIFF_A
REAL
kV
Differential Voltage phase A
VDIFF_B
REAL
kV
Differential Voltage phase B
VDIFF_C
REAL
kV
Differential Voltage phase C
Operation principle
The Voltage differential protection function VDCPTOV (60) is based on comparison of
the magnitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase. Possible differences between
the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage transformers can be compensated for with
a ratio correction factors RF_X. The voltage difference is evaluated and if it exceeds the
alarm level VDAlarm or trip level VDTrip signals for alarm (ALARM output) or trip
(TRIP output) is given after definite time delay tAlarm respectively tTrip. The two three
phase voltage supplies are also supervised with undervoltage settings V1Low and V2Low.
The outputs for loss of voltage V1LOW resp V2LOW will be activated. The V1 voltage
is supervised for loss of individual phases whereas the V2 voltage is supervised for loss
of all three phases.
Loss of all V1 or all V2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This blocking
can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No.
VDCPTOV (60) function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary
BLOCK input. It can, for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision function
FUFSPVC.
Technical manual
651
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as service

value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve full balance in
normal service.
The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 304.
VDTrip_A
AND
VDTrip_B
AND
VDTrip_C
O
R
0
0-tReset
0-tTrip
0
AND
AND
AND
VDAlarm_A
TRIP
PICKUP
AND
VDAlarm_B
AND
VDAlarm_C
O
R
0-tAlarm
0
AND
ALARM
AND
V1LOW
AND
V1Low_A
V1Low_B
AND
0-tAlarm
0
V1Low_C
AND
OR
BlkDiffAtULow
V2Low_A
V2Low_B
AND
0-t1
0
AND
V2LOW
V2Low_C
BLOCK
en06000382_2_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000382 V3 EN
Figure 304:
652
Principle logic for Voltage differential function VDCPTOV (60)
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
9.5.8
Technical data
Table 330:
VDCPTOV (60) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Voltage difference for alarm and

trip
(2.0100.0) % of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Under voltage level
(1.0100.0) % of VBase
0.5% of Vn

voltage differential alarm at 0.8 to
1.2 x VDAlarm
(0.00060.000)s
greater

voltage differential trip at 0.8 to
1.2 x VDTrip
(0.00060.000)s
greater

voltage differential reset at 1.2 to
0.8 x VDTrip
(0.00060.000)s
greater
9.6
100% Stator ground fault protection, 3rd harmonic

based STEFPHIZ (59THD)
9.6.1
Identification
100% Stator ground fault protection, 3rd
harmonic based
9.6.2
IEC 61850
identification
STEFPHIZ
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59THD
Functionality
Stator ground fault is a fault type having relatively high fault rate. The generator systems
normally have high impedance grounding, that is, grounding via a neutral point resistor.
This resistor is normally dimensioned to give an ground fault current in the range 3 15
A at a solid ground-fault directly at the generator high voltage terminal. The relatively
small ground fault currents give much less thermal and mechanical stress on the generator,
compared to the short circuit case, which is between conductors of two phases. Anyhow,
the ground faults in the generator have to be detected and the generator has to be tripped,
even if longer fault time compared to internal short circuits, can be allowed.
In normal non-faulted operation of the generating unit the neutral point voltage is close to
zero, and there is no zero sequence current flow in the generator. When a phase-to-ground
fault occurs the neutral point voltage will increase and there will be a current flow through
the neutral point resistor.
Technical manual
653
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
To detect a ground fault on the windings of a generating unit one may use a neutral point
overvoltage protection, a neutral point overcurrent protection, a zero sequence
overvoltage protection or a residual differential protection. These protections are simple
and have served well during many years. However, at best these simple schemes protect
only 95% of the stator winding. They leave 5% close to the neutral end unprotected. Under
unfavorable conditions the blind zone may extend up to 20% from the neutral.
The 95% stator ground fault protection measures the fundamental frequency voltage
component in the generator star point and it operates when the fundamental frequency
voltage exceeds the preset value. By applying this principle approximately 95% of the
stator winding can be protected. In order to protect the last 5% of the stator winding close
to the neutral end the 3rd harmonic voltage measurement can be performed. In 100%
Stator E/F 3rd harmonic protection either the 3rd harmonic voltage differential principle,
the neutral point 3rd harmonic undervoltage principle or the terminal side 3rd harmonic
overvoltage principle can be applied. However, differential principle is strongly
recommended. Combination of these two measuring principles provides coverage for
entire stator winding against ground faults.
stator winding
N
x E3
(1- x) E3
RN
uN
Samples of the
neutral voltage
from which the
fundamental and
3rd harmonic
voltages are
filtered out
CB 1 may not exist

T
CB 1
Transformer
Rf
CB 2
1- x
1 or 100 %
Neutral point fundamental frequency
over-voltage protection 5% - 100%
overvoltage protection 10% 100%
uT
Samples of the
terminal voltage
from which the
3rd harmonic
voltage is filtered
out
3rd
harmonic
Differential
differential
0% 30%
0% - 30%
ANSI10000202 V1 EN
Figure 305:
654
Protection principles for STEFPHIZ (59TD) function
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
9.6.3
Function block
STEFPHIZ (59THD)
NEUTVOLT
TRIP
TERMVOLT
TRIP3H
52A
TRIP_VN
BLOCK
PICKUP
BLOCK3RD
PU_3H
BLOCKVN
PU_VN
VT3
VN3
E3
ANGLE
DV3
BV3
V_N
ANSI11000211 V1 EN
Figure 306:
9.6.4
STEFPHIZ (59THD) function block
Signals
Table 331:
Name
STEFPHIZ (59THD) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
U3PNEUT
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage connection neutral side
U3PTERM
GROUP
SIGNAL
Open-Delta connection on Terminal side
52a
BOOLEAN
TRUE means breaker between gen. & trafo is closed
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Complete block of the stator ground fault protecion

function
BLOCK3RD
BOOLEAN
Block of the 3rd harmonic-based parts of the protection
BLOCKVN
BOOLEAN
Block of the fund. harmonic-based part of the protection
Table 332:
Name
STEFPHIZ (59THD) Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Main, common trip command
TRIP3H
BOOLEAN
Trip by one of two 3rd harmonic voltage-based prot.
TRIP_VN
BOOLEAN
Trip by fund. freq. neutral over-voltage protection
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Main, common pick up signal
PU_3H
BOOLEAN
Pickup by one of two 3rd harmonic voltage-based prot.
PU_VN
BOOLEAN
Pick up signal by fund. freq. neutral over-voltage prot.

Technical manual
655
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
9.6.5
Table 333:
Name
Type
Description
VT3
REAL
Mag. of 3rd harm. voltage at generator terminal side,

Volts
VN3
REAL
Mag. of 3rd harm. voltage at generator neutral side,

Volts
E3
REAL
Total induced stator 3rd harmonic voltage, primary Volts
ANGLE
REAL
Angle between 3rd harmonic votage phasors, radians
DV3
REAL
Diff. between 3rd harm. volt. at both sides of gen., Volts
BV3
REAL
Bias voltage, a part of voltN3rdHarmonic, primary Volts
V_N
REAL
Fund. frequency voltage at generator neutral, primary

Volts
Settings
STEFPHIZ (59THD) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Beta
0.50 - 10.00
0.01
3.00
Portion of voltN3rdHarmonic used as bias
CBexists
No
Yes
No
Defines if generator CB exists (between Gen &

Transformer)
FactorCBopen
1.00 - 10.00
0.01
1.00
Beta is multiplied by this factor when CB is

open
VN3rdHPU
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
Pickup 3rd Harm V< protection (when

activated) % of VB/1,732
VT3BlkLevel
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
If VT3 is below limit 3rdH Diff is blocked, in % of

VB/1,732
VNFundPU
1.0 - 50.0
0.1
5.0
Pickup fundamental VN> protection (95%

SEF), % of VB/1,732
t3rdH
0.020 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Operation delay of 3rd harm-based protection

(100% SEF) in s
tVNFund
0.020 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
Operation delay of fundamental VN>

protection (95% SEF) in s
Table 334:
Name
STEFPHIZ (59THD) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TVoltType
NoVoltage
ResidualVoltage
AllThreePhases
PhaseA
PhaseB
PhaseC
ResidualVoltage
Used connection type for gen. terminal voltage

transformer
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
656
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
9.6.6
Monitored data
Table 335:
Name
9.6.7
STEFPHIZ (59THD) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VT3
REAL
kV
Mag. of 3rd harm. voltage at

generator terminal side, Volts
VN3
REAL
kV
Mag. of 3rd harm. voltage at

generator neutral side, Volts
E3
REAL
kV
Total induced stator 3rd

harmonic voltage, primary
Volts
ANGLE
REAL
deg
Angle between 3rd harmonic

votage phasors, radians
DV3
REAL
kV
Diff. between 3rd harm. volt. at

both sides of gen., Volts
BV3
REAL
kV
Bias voltage, a part of

voltN3rdHarmonic, primary
Volts
V_N
REAL
kV
Fund. frequency voltage at

generator neutral, primary
Volts
Operation principle
The protection is a combination of the 95% fundamental frequency ground fault
protection and the 3 rd harmonic based stator earth fault protection, (STEFPHIZ, 59THD).
The 3rd harmonic based 100% stator ground fault protection is using the 3rd harmonic
voltage generated by the generator itself. To assure reliable function of the protection it is
necessary that the 3rd harmonic voltage generation is at least 0.8 V RMS on VT secondary
side.
The 3rd harmonic voltage generated by the generator has the same phase angle in the three
phases. It has the characteristic of a zero sequence component. If the generator is
connected to the power system via a block transformer that cannot transform zero
sequence voltages between the voltage levels, the 3rd harmonic voltage, that is V3N and
V3T in fig 307, in the generator system is not influenced by the external power system. At
normal operation the generator third harmonic voltage characteristic can be described as
in figure 307.
Note that angle between V3N and V3T is typically close to 180.
Technical manual
657
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
V3
- DV3 +
+
V3T,A
-
V3N
+
V3T,B
-
+
V3T,C
-
V3T
V3N
en06000448_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000448 V1 EN
Figure 307:
Generator 3rd harmonic voltage characteristic at normal operation
The generator is modeled as parts of a winding where a 3rd harmonic voltage is induced
along the winding, represented by the end voltages V3N (voltage drop across resistor) and
V3T in the figure. Via the winding capacitances to ground and the neutral point resistor
there will be a small 3rd harmonic current, giving the voltages V3N and V3T. The 3rd
harmonic voltage in the generator neutral point (V3N) will be close to zero in case of a
stator ground-fault close to the neutral. This fact alone can be used as an indication of
stator ground-fault. To enable better sensitivity and stability also measurement of the
generator's 3rd harmonic voltage V3T is also used. In addition to the decrease of V3N the
generator voltage V3T will increase under the stator ground-fault close to the generator
neutral point. Therefore the 3rd harmonic voltage V3T , (which is a zero sequence voltage)
is used by the protection. In the 3rd harmonic voltage differential protection algorithm
equation 176 is used:
658
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
V3N + V3T Beta V 3N

(Equation 176)
V3N, and V3T are third harmonic phasors with real and imaginary parts. The factor Beta
must be set not to risk operation under non-faulted conditions.
The voltage V3N is measured via a voltage transformer between the generator neutral point
and ground. The voltage V3T can be measured in different ways. The setting TVoltType
defines how the protection function is fed from voltage transformers at the high voltage
side of the generator. If V3T is lower than the set level VT3BlkLevel, STEFPHIZ (59THD)
function is blocked. The choices of TVoltType are:
NoVoltage: There is no voltage measured from the generator terminal side. This can be the
case when there are only phase-to-phase voltage transformers available at the generator
terminal side. In this case the protection will operate as a simple neutral point 3rd harmonic
undervoltage protection, which must be blocked externally during generator start-up and
shut-down.
ResidualVoltage: The function is fed from a broken delta connection of the phase to
ground connected voltage transformers at the generator terminal side,
V3T=(1/3)*V_Broken_Delta.
AllThreePhases: The function is fed from the three phase to ground connected voltage
transformers at the generator terminal side. The 3rd harmonic voltage V3T is calculated in
the IED, V3T=(1/3)*(V3A+V3B+V3C).
PhaseA, PhaseB, or PhaseC: The function is fed from one phase voltage transformer only.
The 3rd harmonic zero sequence voltage is assumed to be equal to any of the phase
voltages, as the third harmonic voltage is of zero sequence type, V3T=V3Lx.
A simplified block diagram describing the stator ground fault protection function shown
in figure 308.
Technical manual
659
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Samples:
Generator
terminal
voltage
3rd
harmonic
Fourier
filtering
giving VT3
Samples:
Generator
neutral point
voltage
3rd
harmonic
Fourier
filtering
giving VN3
Complex VT3
Stator
Ground
Fault
detection
3rd
harmonic
based
TRIP
TRIP3H
Pickup
TRIPVN
Pickup
and trip
logic
PU3H
PU_VN
Complex VN3
Fundamental frequency residual

voltage
Stator
Ground
Fault
detection
95 %
Pickup
CB Status
Block
en06000449_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000449 V2 EN
Figure 308:
Simplified logic diagram for stator ground fault protection
STEFPHIZ (59THD) function can be described in a simplified logical diagram as shown

in figure 309. Note that the 3rd harmonic numerical filters are not part of the stator groundfault protection function.
These third harmonic voltages are calculated by the preprocessing blocks connected to the
function.
660
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Beta
V3N
V3N+V3T
ba
PU3H
AND
t
0
VT3BlkLevel
V3T
ab
TRIP3H
PICKUP
OR
TRIP
OR
a
VNFundPU
V_N
PU_VN
ba
TRIPVN
t
0
ANSI07000001 V2 EN
Figure 309:
Simplified Pickup and Trip logical diagram of the 100% Stator earth fault
protection, 3rd harmonic based STEFPHIZ (59THD) protection
There are two different cases of generator block configuration; with or without generator
circuit breaker. If there is no generator breaker the capacitive coupling to ground is the
same under all operating conditions. When there is a generator breaker, the capacitive
coupling to ground differs between the operating conditions when the generator is running
with the generator breaker open (before synchronization) and with the circuit breaker
closed. This can be shown as in figure 310.
-
UV3
- DV3 +
+
V3T,A
-
V3N
+
V3T,B
-
+
V3T,C
-
Ctr/3
Ctr/3
Ctr/3
ANSI07000002 V2 EN
Figure 310:
Generator block with generator circuit breaker
Technical manual
661
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
With the circuit breaker open, the total capacitance will be smaller compared to normal
operating conditions. This means that the neutral point 3rd harmonic voltage will be
reduced compared to the normal operating condition. Therefore, there is a possibility to
reduce the sensitivity of the protection when the generator circuit breaker is open.
With the setting CBexists change of the sensitivity is enabled. If the binary input signal 52a
is activated the set sensitivity is valid. If the generator circuit breaker is opened the binary
input 52a is deactivated and the sensitivity is changed. This is done by changing the factor
Beta which is multiplied with a set constant FactorCBopen.
In addition to the binary outputs also some analog outputs are available from the
protection function in order to enable easier commissioning:
E3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage induced in the stator given in primary volts
VN3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage measured in the neutral point of the
generator
VT3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage measured in the terminal point of the
generator
ANGLE: the angle between the phasors VN3 and VT3 given in radians
DV3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic differential voltage
BV3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic bias voltage
V_N: the fundamental frequency voltage measured in the neutral point of the generator
9.6.8
Technical data
Table 336:
STEFPHIZ (59THD) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Fundamental frequency level VN

(95% Stator EF)
(1.050.0)% of VBase
0.25% of Vn
Third harmonic differential level
(0.510.0)% of VBase
0.25% of Vn
Third harmonic differential block

level
(0.110.0)% of VBase
0.25% of Vn
662
Technical manual
Section 9
Voltage protection
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy

fundamental VN > protection at 0
to 1.2 x VNFund>
(0.02060.000) s
greater

3rd harm-based protection at 0 to
5 x VN3rdH<
(0.02060.000) s
greater
Filter characteristic:
Fundamental
Third harmonic
Reject third harmonic by 140

Reject fundamental harmonic by
140
Technical manual
663
664
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 10
10.1
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81)
10.1.1
Identification
Underfrequency protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
SAPTUF
f<
SYMBOL-P V1 EN
10.1.2
Functionality
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the network.
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) measures frequency with high accuracy, and is
used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and so on.
Separate definite time delays are provided for trip and restore.
SAPTUF (81) is provided with undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phasephase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to
connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/
Setting guidelines
10.1.3
Function block
SAPTUF (81)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKREST
TRIP
PICKUP
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN
FREQ
ANSI06000279 V2 EN
Figure 311:
SAPTUF (81) function block
Technical manual
665
Section 10
10.1.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 337:
SAPTUF (81L) Input signals
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
Blocking operate output
BLKREST
BOOLEAN
Blocking restore output
SAPTUF (81L) Output signals
Name
Table 339:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 338:
10.1.5
Default
V3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
RESTORE
BOOLEAN
Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
Measurement blocked due to low voltage amplitude
FREQ
REAL
Measured frequency
Settings
SAPTUF (81L) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PUFrequency
35.00 - 75.00
Hz
0.01
48.80
Frequency set value
tDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Operate time delay
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for reset
tRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Restore time delay
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
Hz
0.01
50.10
Restore frequency value
TimerMode
Definite timer
Volt based timer
Definite timer
Setting for choosing timer mode
VNom
50.0 - 150.0
%VB
1.0
100.0
Nominal voltage for voltage based timer in % of

UBase
VMin
50.0 - 150.0
%VB
1.0
90.0
Lower operation limit for voltage based timer in

% of VBase
Exponent
0.0 - 5.0
0.1
1.0
For calculation of the curve form for voltage

based timer
t_MaxTripDelay
0.010 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Maximum time operation limit for voltage

based timer
t_MinTripDelay
0.010 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Minimum time operation limit for voltage based

timer
666
Technical manual
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 340:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
10.1.6
SAPTUF (81L) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Step
Default
1
Description
groups
Monitored data
Table 341:
Name
10.1.7
Unit
SAPTUF (81L) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VLevel
REAL
kV
Level of measured voltage
FREQ
REAL
Hz
Measured frequency
Operation principle
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is used to detect low power system frequency.
SAPTUF (81) can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time
delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied, the time delay will be
longer if the voltage is higher, and the delay will be shorter if the voltage is lower. If the
frequency remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time
delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain
frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the
function is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than
the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no
PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued.
10.1.7.1
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously, and
compared with the set value, PUFrequency. The frequency function is dependent on the
voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the setting
MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function, which is described in the Basic
IED Functions chapter and is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter,
SAPTUF (81) gets blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings
are made in percent of the setting VBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in
kV.
Technical manual
667
Section 10
10.1.7.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Time delay
The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) can be either a settable
definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay
depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low
voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting tDelay sets
the time delay.
For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings VNom,
VMin, Exponent, t_MaxTripDelay and t_MinTripDelay set the time delay according to
figure 312 and equation 177. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of
time delay to apply.
Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay tDelay. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured
frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user
defined reset time, tReset, the PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has
elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back
to the hysteresis area.
On the RESTORE output of SAPTUF (81) a 100ms pulse is issued, after a time delay
corresponding to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency returns to the level
corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.
10.1.7.3
Voltage dependent time delay

Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system, except
some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to decide, where to
take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the voltage level is very
suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas with low voltage.
Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced, to make sure that load
shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At constant voltage, V, the
voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to equation 177. At non-constant
voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a similar way as for the inverse time
characteristic for the undervoltage and overvoltage functions.
668
Technical manual
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
V - VMin
t=
VNom - VMin
Exponent
( t _ MaxTripDelay - t _ MinTripDelay ) + t _ MinTripDelay
(Equation 177)
EQUATION1559 V1 EN
where:
t
is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),
is the measured voltage
Exponent
is a setting,
VMin, VNom
are voltage settings corresponding to
t_MaxTripDelay, t_MinTripDelay are time settings.
The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 312, for:

VMin
= 90%
= 100%
t_MaxTrip
Delay
= 1.0 s
t_MinTripD
elay
= 0.0 s
Exponent
= 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4
TimeDlyOperate [s]
0
Exponenent
1
2
3
0.5
90
95
100
V [% of VBase]
en05000075_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000075 V1 EN
Figure 312:
Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency

protection SAPTUF (81). The time delay to trip is plotted as a function of
the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 respectively.
Technical manual
669
Section 10
10.1.7.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Blocking
It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) partially or completely, by
binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTRIP:
blocks the TRIP output
BLKREST:
blocks the RESTORE output
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked.
10.1.7.5
Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive
sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is
filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The time integrator can trip either
due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage dependent delay time. When the
frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued
after the time delay tRestore. The design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is
schematically described in figure 313.
670
Technical manual
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Block
OR
BLKDMAGN
BLOCK
Comparator
V < IntBlockLevel
Voltage
Frequency
Time integrator
Comparator
f < PuFrequency
TimerOperation Mode
Selector
PICKUP
TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
100 ms
Comparator
f > RestoreFreq
RESTORE
TimeDlyRestore
en05000726_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000726 V1 EN
Figure 313:
Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF (81)
10.2
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)
10.2.1
Identification
Overfrequency protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
SAPTOF
f>
SYMBOL-O V1 EN
Technical manual
671
Section 10
10.2.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Functionality
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF (81) is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.
Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network.
Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause over frequency.
SAPTOF (81) measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used mainly for generation
shedding and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency stage initiating load
restoring. A definite time delay is provided for trip.
SAPTOF (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phasephase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to
connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/
Setting guidelines
10.2.3
Function block
SAPTOF (81)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
TRIP
PICKUP
BLKDMAGN
FREQ
ANSI06000280 V2 EN
Figure 314:
10.2.4
Signals
Table 342:
Name
672
SAPTOF (81) function block
SAPTOF (81H) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 343:
SAPTOF (81H) Output signals
Name
10.2.5
Table 344:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
Measurement blocked due to low amplitude
FREQ
REAL
Measured frequency
Settings
SAPTOF (81H) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PUFrequency
35.00 - 90.00
Hz
0.01
51.20
Frequency set value
tDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Operate time delay
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Table 345:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
10.2.6
SAPTOF (81H) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Step
Default
1
Description
groups
Monitored data
Table 346:
Name
10.2.7
Unit
SAPTOF (81H) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VLevel
REAL
kV
Level of measured voltage
FREQ
REAL
Hz
Measured frequency
Operation principle
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is used to detect high power system frequency.
SAPTOF (81) has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains above the set
value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding TRIP
signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency measurement at
low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the
preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the
preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued.
Technical manual
673
Section 10
10.2.7.1
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured continuously,
and compared with the set value, PUFrequency. Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)
is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below the
setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function, which is discussed in the
Basic IED Functions chapter and is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter
VBase, SAPTOF (81) is blocked and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage
settings are made in percent of the VBase, which should be set as a phase-phase voltage in
kV. To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
10.2.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is a settable definite time
delay, specified by the setting tDelay.
TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay, tReset. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured
frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user
elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must
be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis
area.
The total time delay consists of the set value for time delay plus minimum
trip time of the pickup function (80 - 90 ms).
10.2.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) partially or completely, by
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTRIP:
preprocessing function both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked.
674
Technical manual
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
10.2.7.4
Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive
sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is
filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. The time
integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design of overfrequency protection
SAPTOF (81) is schematically described in figure 315.
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLOCK
Comparator
V < IntBlockLevel
Voltage
Time integrator
Definite Time Delay
Frequency
Comparator
f > PuFrequency
BLKDMAGN
OR
PICKUP
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
en05000735_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000735 V1 EN
Figure 315:
10.2.8
Simplified logic diagram for SAPTOF (81)
Technical data
Table 347:
SAPTOF (81) technical data
Function
Trip value, pickup function at
symmetrical three-phase voltage
Trip time, pickup at fset -0.02 Hz to
fset +0.02 Hz
Range or value
Accuracy
(35.00-90.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
fn = 50Hz
Min. = 80 ms
Max. = 95 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Min. = 65 ms
Max. = 80 ms
Technical manual
675
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Reset time, pickup at fset +0.02 Hz

to fset -0.02 Hz
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Trip time, definite time function at

fset -0.02 Hz to fset +0.02 Hz
(0.000-60.000)s
0.2% 100 ms
whichever is greater
Reset time, definite time function

at fset +0.02 Hz to fset -0.02 Hz
(0.000-60.000)s
0.2% 120 ms,

10.3
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)
10.3.1
Identification
Rate-of-change frequency protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
SAPFRC
df/dt >
<
SYMBOL-N V1 EN
10.3.2
Functionality
The rate-of-change frequency protection function SAPFRC (81) gives an early indication
of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC (81) measures frequency with high
accuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and remedial action
schemes. SAPFRC (81) can discriminate between a positive or negative change of
frequency. A definite time delay is provided for trip.
SAPFRC (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on
positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phaseneutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs,
refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting guidelines.
676
Technical manual
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
10.3.3
Function block
SAPFRC (81)
V3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
PICKUP
BLKTRIP
RESTORE
BLKREST
BLKDMAGN
ANSI06000281 V2 EN
Figure 316:
10.3.4
SAPFRC (81) function block
Signals
Table 348:
SAPFRC (81R) Input signals
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
BLKREST
BOOLEAN
Blocking restore output
SAPFRC (81R) Output signals
Name
Table 350:
Name
Description
V3P
Table 349:
10.3.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Operate/trip signal for frequency gradient
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Start/pick-up signal for frequency gradient
RESTORE
BOOLEAN
Restore signal for load restoring purposes
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
Blocking indication due to low magnitude
Settings
SAPFRC (81R) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PUFreqGrad
-10.00 - 10.00
Hz/s
0.01
0.50
Frequency gradient pick up value, the sign

defines direction
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Operate time delay in positive / negative

frequency gradient mode
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
Hz
0.01
49.90
Restore frequency value
tRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Restore time delay
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Technical manual
677
Section 10
10.3.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Monitored data
Table 351:
SAPFRC (81R) Monitored data
Name
Type
STARTDUR
10.3.7
REAL
Values (Range)
-
Unit
%
Description
Start duration in percents of
the total operation time
Operation principle
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes at an early stage. SAPFRC (81) has a settable definite time delay. If the
rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set value, for negative rate-of-change, for
a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued. If the rate-ofchange of frequency remains above the set value, for positive rate-of-change, for a time
period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip
due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude a voltage controlled
blocking of the function is available from the preprocessing function. If the voltage is
lower than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function the function is blocked
and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency
decrease, a restore signal is issued.
10.3.7.1
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured
continuously, and compared with the set value, PUFreqGrad. Rate-of-change frequency
protection SAPFRC (81) is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage
magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing function,
which is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter, SAPFRC (81) is blocked,
and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting PUFreqGrad, controls if
SAPFRC (81) reacts on a positive or on a negative change in frequency. If SAPFRC (81)
is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting PUFreqGrad has been given a negative
value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE
output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A
positive setting of PUFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC (81) to PICKUP and TRIP for frequency
increases.
10.3.7.2
Time delay
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) has a settable definite time delay,
tTrip. .
678
Technical manual
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues for
at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user
elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back
into the hysteresis area.
The RESTORE output of SAPFRC (81) is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of
tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to
RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the
restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality is
only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if a new
negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period, defined by the settings
RestoreFreq and tRestore.
10.3.7.3
Blocking
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81) can be partially or totally blocked, by
BLOCK:
blocks all outputs
BLKTRIP:
BLKREST:
blocks the RESTORE output
preprocessing function, both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked.
10.3.7.4
Design
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81) measuring element continuously
measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting
PUFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power system
switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time. When the
frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is issued
after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued. The sign of the
setting PUFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising or
lowering frequency conditions. The design of SAPFRC (81) is schematically described in
figure 317.
Technical manual
679
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKRESET
Voltage
Rate-of-Change
of Frequency
OR
BLOCK
BLKDMAGN
Comparator
V < IntBlockLevel
Comparator
If
[PickupFreqGrad<0
PICKUP
AND
df/dt < PickupFreqGrad]
OR
[PickupFreqGrad>0
AND
df/dt > PickupFreqGrad]
Then
PICKUP
Time integrator
Definite Time Delay
TimeDlyOperate
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
100 ms
Frequency
Comparator
f > RestoreFreq
TimeDlyRestore
RESTORE
en05000835_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000835 V1 EN
Figure 317:
10.3.8
Simplified logic diagram for SAPFRC (81)
Technical data
Table 352:
SAPFRC (81) Technical data
Function
680
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip value, pickup function
(-10.00-10.00) Hz/s
10.0 mHz/s
Trip value, restore enable

frequency
(45.00-65.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
Definite restore time delay
(0.000-60.000) s

greater
Definite time delay for frequency

gradient trip
(0.200-60.000) s

greater
Definite reset time delay
(0.000-60.000) s

greater
Technical manual
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
10.4
Frequency time accumulation protection function

FTAQFVR (81A)
10.4.1
Identification
Frequency time accumulation protection
10.4.2
IEC 61850
identification
FTAQFVR
IEC 60617
identification
f<>
ANSI/
IEEEidentification
81A
Functionality
Frequency time accumulation protection FTAQFVR (81A) is based on measured system
frequency and time counters. FTAQFVR (81A) for generator protection provides the
BFI_3P output for a particular settable frequency limit, when the system frequency falls
in that settable frequency band limit and positive sequence voltage within settable voltage
band limit. The BFI_3P signal triggers the individual event timer, which is the continuous
time spent within the given frequency band, and the accumulation timer, which is the
cumulative time spent within the given frequency band. Once the timers reach their limit,
an alarm or trip signal is activated to protect the turbine against the abnormal frequency
operation. This function is blocked during generator start-up or shut down conditions by
monitoring the circuit breaker position and current threshold value. The function is also
blocked when the system positive sequence voltage magnitude deviates from the given
voltage band limit which can be enabled by EnaVoltCheck setting.
It is possible to create functionality with more than one frequency band limit by using
multiple instances of the function. This can be achieved by a proper configuration based
on the turbine manufacturer specification.
10.4.3
Function block
FTAQFVR (81A)
I3P*
ERROR
V3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
TRIPACC
CBCLOSE
TRIPCONT
CBOPEN
BFI_3P
LOADINIT
ACCALARM
HOLDACC
STRORHLD
RESETACC
FREQOK
VOLTOK
ANSI14000023 V1 EN
Figure 318:
FTAQFVR (81A) function block
Technical manual
681
Section 10
10.4.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 353:
Name
Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for three phase current
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for three phase voltage
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
CBCLOSE
BOOLEAN
Circuit breaker closed status input
CBOPEN
BOOLEAN
Circuit breaker open status input
LOADINIT
BOOLEAN
Loads the initial accumulation time to the function
HOLDACC
BOOLEAN
Holds the time accumulation when input is activated
RESETACC
BOOLEAN
Resetting the accumulated time of the function block
Table 354:
Name
682
FTAQFVR (81A) Input signals
FTAQFVR (81A) Output signals

Type
Description
ERROR
BOOLEAN
Error output for incorrect settings
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal of the function
TRIPACC
BOOLEAN
Trip signal when accumulation time is exceeded the set

limit
TRIPCONT
BOOLEAN
Trip signal when continuous time is exceeded the set

limit
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal of the function
ACCALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm signal for reaching the frequency time

accumulation value
STRORHLD
BOOLEAN
Activated when function starts or HOLDACC input is

active
FREQOK
BOOLEAN
Indicates the system frequency within the frequency

band limits
VOLTOK
BOOLEAN
Indicates the system voltage within the voltage band

limits
Technical manual
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
10.4.5
Table 355:
Settings
FTAQFVR (81A) Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tContinuous
0.0 - 6000.0
0.1
20.0
Continuous time limit for frequency band limits
tAccLimit
10.0 - 90000.0
0.1
600.0
Accumulation time limit for frequency band

limits
FreqHighLimit
35.00 - 90.00
Hz
0.01
47.50
Frequency High limit value
FreqLowLimit
30.00 - 85.00
Hz
0.01
47.00
Frequency Low limit value
CBCheck
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enabling the generator start or stop detection

logic
PickupCurrentLevel
5.0 - 100.0
%IB
0.1
10.0
Threshold current value of generator in

percentage of base current
EnaVoltCheck
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enabling the voltage band limit check
VHighLimit
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
1.0
200.0
Voltage high limit for voltage band limit check
VLowLimit
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
1.0
0.0
Voltage low limit for voltage band limit check
Table 356:
Name
FTAQFVR (81A) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
initTimeAcc
0.000 - 90000.000
0.001
0.0
Initial accumulated time when LOADINIT

command is executed
10.4.6
Monitored data
Table 357:
Name
10.4.7
FTAQFVR (81A) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
FREQ
REAL
Hz
Measured frequency value
ACCTIME
REAL
Accumulated time for

frequency band limits
LASTEVTD
REAL
Accumulation time for last

event of frequency within band
Operation principle
Technical manual
683
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Frequency time accumulation protection function FTAQFVR (81A) is used to protect the
turbine against an abnormal frequency operation. During the startup and shutdown of the
turbine-generator set, FTAQFVR (81A) is blocked to avoid unnecessary accumulation of
time or tripping of generator. FTAQFVR (81A) is also blocked when the system positivesequence voltage magnitude deviates from the given voltage band limit, which can be
enabled with the EnaVoltCheck setting. The overall logic of FTAQFVR (81A) is
explained in Figure319.
The frequency of the measured input voltage is monitored continuously and compared to
the set frequency band limits FreqHighLimit and FreqLowLimit. When the measured
system frequency is above the FreqLowLimit setting and below the FreqHighLimit
setting, the FREQOK and PICKUP signals are activated. The BFI_3P signal is controlled
by the measured current and voltage input magnitude and the status of the circuit breaker
position.
FTAQFVR (81A) function will block BFI_3P signal activation and Accumulation of
time under two following conditions even if the system frequency falls within set band
limits.
When the generator is not synchronized as indicated by the CBOPEN signal input:
Generator currents are considered to detect whether the generator is supplying its unit
auxiliary supply transformers or not. FTAQFVR (81A) function will be blocked
when the measured current magnitude drops below the setting PickupCurrentLevel
and CBOPEN input is high. FTAQFVR (81A) remains blocked until the generator
returns to the operation condition. It can be verified by using the CBCLOSE signal.
Generator's start and stop detection logics for the BFI_3P output can be ignored by
disabling the CBCheck setting.
When the positive-sequence voltage of the measured input voltage is outside the band
limit.
The BFI_3P output will be blocked if the EnaVoltCheck setting is enabled and the
system positive sequence voltage is not within the voltage band limits.
Voltage band limit check will be ignored for the BFI_3P output if the EnaVoltCheck
setting is disabled. The voltage band limits are set with the settings VHighLimit and
VLowLimit.
The output VOLTOK is activated only if the system positive-sequence voltage falls
within the voltage band limits and the EnaVoltCheck setting is enabled.
To avoid oscillations of the BFI_3P output signal, a hysteresis has been added with
current input comparison and voltage input comparison. It is also possible to block
FTAQFVR (81A) completely by activating the binary input BLOCK and its function is to
reset all the binary outputs of FTAQFVR (81A) and freeze the accumulation time.
Time counters
FTAQFVR (81A) uses two time counters.
684
Technical manual
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
1.
2.
Individual event time: The individual event time counter registers the time passing if
the system frequency falls within the frequency band limits each time. It resets when
the frequency comes out of the frequency band limits and also when the BLOCK
binary input is activated and start from zero when a new start is activated.
Accumulation time: The accumulation time counter registers the time passing
whenever the BFI_3P output is activated. It holds the registered time value even
when the BFI_3P signal is deactivated and continues from the registered value when
the BFI_3P signal is reactivated.
The registration of accumulation time is frozen at its present value when the input
HOLDACC or BLOCK is activated. The accumulation time can be set to the initTimeAcc
parameter value by activating the LOADINT input with the LHMI and it can be reset to
zero by activating the RESETACC input. The RESETACC input can be activated by a
binary input. The accumulated time ACCTIME is provided as a service output.
The last completed individual event time is updated in the LASTEVTD output. This output
holds the last completed individual event time until the next event to complete.
Trip logic
The individual event and accumulation timer values are compared to the tCont and
tAcclLimit settings respectively. If these counter values exceed their limit values,
TRIPCONT and ACCALARM outputs will be activated. The TRIPACC output is activated
if both the ACCALARM and BFI_3P signals are activated. A common TRIP signal is
generated when either TRIPCONT or TRIPACC is activated.
Technical manual
685
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Comparator
If
FreqHighLimit <=
FreqLowLimit
Then
ERROR
ERROR
FREQ
FREQ
V3P
Comparator
If
f <= FreqHighLimit
AND
f > FreqLowLimit
Then
PICKUP
FREQOK
FREQOK
VOLTOK
VOLTOK
BFI_3P
Comparator
V01 <= VHighLimit
AND
V01 >= VLowLimit
I3P
Comparator
I < PickupCurrentLevel
CBOPEN
CBCLOSE
LOADINIT
PICKUP
Signal Routing
Based on
Generator
Start or Stop
Detection Logic
and
Voltage Band Limit
Check Logic
PICKUP
Accumulation time
counter
TRIPACC
Continuous time
counter
TRIPCONT
AND
Pickup & Trip
Output Logic
TRIP
ACCALARM
STRORHLD
RESETACC
ACCTIME
HOLDTIME
LASTEVTD
BLOCK
ANSI12000609 V1 EN
Figure 319:
Logical diagram
To achieve a proper operation, the set frequency high limit should be more than the set
frequency low limit. To avoid malfunction, a check is performed that FreqHighLimit is
greater than FreqLowLimit. If not, the ERROR signal is activated.
FTAQFVR (81A) can be instantiated with one or more frequency ranges according to the
turbine manufacturer's specification. When the frequency falls in to the common zone
when two frequency ranges overlap it is necessary to block one instance and keep only one
instance of FTAQFVR (81A) active. The STRORHLD output is activated when either the
BFI_3P output is active or when the HOLDACC input signal is on. The STRORHLD output
is connected to the input HOLDACC of the other instance of FTAQFVR (81A).
686
Technical manual
Section 10
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 358:
FTAQFVR (81A) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip value, frequency high limit

level at symmetrical three phase
voltage
(35.00 90.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
Trip value, frequency low limit

level at symmetrical three phase
voltage
(30.00 85.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
Trip value, voltage high and low

limit for voltage band limit check
(0.0 200.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Trip value, current pickup level
(5.0 100.0)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir or 0.01 A at IIn
Independent time delay for the

continuous time limit at fset+0.02
Hz to fset-0.02 Hz
(0.0 6000.0) s

greater
Independent time delay for the

accumulation time limit at fset
+0.02 Hz to fset-0.02 Hz
(10.0 90000.0) s

greater
Technical manual
687
688
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 11
11.1
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC
11.1.1
Identification
General current and voltage protection
11.1.2
IEC 61850
identification
CVGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
2(I>/U<)
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The protection module is recommended as a general backup protection with many
possible application areas due to its flexible measuring and setting facilities.
The built-in overcurrent protection feature has two settable current pickups. Both of them
can be used either with definite time or inverse time characteristic. The overcurrent
protection steps can be made directional with selectable voltage polarizing quantity.
Additionally they can be voltage and/or current controlled/restrained. 2nd harmonic
restraining facility is available as well. At too low polarizing voltage the overcurrent
feature can be either blocked, made non directional or ordered to use voltage memory in
accordance with a parameter setting.
Additionally two overvoltage and two undervoltage steps, either with definite time or
inverse time characteristic, are available within each function.
The general function suits applications with underimpedance and voltage controlled
overcurrent solutions. The general function can also be utilized for generator transformer
protection applications where positive, negative or zero sequence components of current
and voltage quantities are typically required.
Additionally, generator applications such as loss of field, inadvertent energizing, stator or
rotor overload, circuit breaker head flash-over and open phase detection are just a few of
possible protection arrangements with these functions.
Technical manual
689
Section 11
11.1.2.1
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Inadvertent generator energization

When the generator is taken out of service, and stand-still, there is a risk that the generator
circuit breaker flashes over or is closed by mistake.
To prevent damages on the generator or turbine, it is essential that high speed tripping is
provided in case of inadvertent energization of the generator. This tripping should be
almost instantaneous (< 100 ms).
There is a risk that the current into the generator at inadvertent energization will be limited
so that the normal overcurrent or underimpedance protection will not detect the
dangerous situation. The delay of these protection functions might be too long. For big and
important machines, fast protection against inadvertent energizing should, therefore, be
included in the protective scheme.
11.1.3
Function block
CVGAPC
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKOC1
BLKOC1TR
ENMLTOC1
BLKOC2
BLKOC2TR
ENMLTOC2
BLKUC1
BLKUC1TR
BLKUC2
BLKUC2TR
BLKOV1
BLKOV1TR
BLKOV2
BLKOV2TR
BLKUV1
BLKUV1TR
BLKUV2
BLKUV2TR
TRIP
TROC1
TROC2
TRUC1
TRUC2
TROV1
TROV2
TRUV1
TRUV2
PICKUP
PU_OC1
PU_OC2
PU_UC1
PU_UC2
PU_OV1
PU_OV2
PU_UV1
PU_UV2
BLK2ND
DIROC1
DIROC2
VDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
VIANGLE
ANSI05000372 V2 EN
Figure 320:
690
CVGAPC function block
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
11.1.4
Signals
Table 359:
Name
CVGAPC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKOC1
BOOLEAN
Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1
BOOLEAN
When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC1
BLKOC2
BOOLEAN
Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2
BOOLEAN
When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC2
BLKUC1
BOOLEAN
Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2
BOOLEAN
Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1
BOOLEAN
Block of over voltage function OV1
BLKOV1TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for over voltage function OV1
BLKOV2
BOOLEAN
Block of over voltage function OV2
BLKOV2TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for over voltage function OV2
BLKUV1
BOOLEAN
Block of under voltage function UV1
BLKUV1TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for under voltage function UV1
BLKUV2
BOOLEAN
Block of under voltage function UV2
BLKUV2TR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip for under voltage function UV2
Table 360:
Name
CVGAPC Output signals

Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Common trip signal
TROC1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1
TROC2
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2
TRUC1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1
TRUC2
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2
TROV1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1
TROV2
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2
Technical manual
691
Section 11
Name
692
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Type
Description
TRUV1
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1
TRUV2
BOOLEAN
Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_OC1
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from overcurrent function OC1
PU_OC2
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from overcurrent function OC2
PU_UC1
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from undercurrent function UC1
PU_UC2
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from undercurrent function UC2
PU_OV1
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from overvoltage function OV1
PU_OV2
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from overvoltage function OV2
PU_UV1
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from undervoltage function UV1
PU_UV2
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal from undervoltage function UV2
BLK2ND
BOOLEAN
Second harmonic block signal
DIROC1
INTEGER
Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)
DIROC2
INTEGER
Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)
VDIRLOW
BOOLEAN
Low voltage for directional polarization
CURRENT
REAL
Measured current value
ICOSFI
REAL
Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE
REAL
Measured voltage value
VIANGLE
REAL
Angle between voltage and current
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
11.1.5
Table 361:
Name
Settings
CVGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
CurrentInput
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
Phase AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
MaxPh
Select current signal which will be measured

inside function
VoltageInput
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
Phase AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
MaxPh
Select voltage signal which will be measured

inside function
OperHarmRestr
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable operation of 2nd harmonic

restrain
l_2nd/l_fund
10.0 - 50.0
1.0
20.0
Ratio of second to fundamental current

harmonic in %
BlkLevel2nd
10 - 5000
%IB
5000
Harm analyse disabled above this current level

in % of fundamental current
EnRestrainCurr
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable current restrain function
RestrCurrInput
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
Max
PosSeq
Select current signal which will be used for

current restrain
RestrCurrCoeff
0.00 - 5.00
0.01
0.00
Restraining current coefficient
RCADir
-180 - 180
Deg
-75
Relay Characteristic Angle
ROADir
1 - 90
Deg
75
Relay Operate Angle
Technical manual
693
Section 11
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
LowVolt_VM
0.0 - 5.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
Below this level in % of VBase setting

ActLowVolt takes over
Operation_OC1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation of OC1
PickupCurr_OC1
2.0 - 5000.0
%IB
1.0
120.0
Operate current level for OC1 in % of IBase
CurveType_OC1
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time delay curve type for OC1
tDef_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
Definite time delay OC1
TD_OC1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30
Time multiplier for the dependent time delay for

OC1
IMin1
1 - 10000
%IB
100

IBase
tMin_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for

OC1
VCntrlMode_OC1
Voltage control
Disabled
Disabled
Control mode for voltage controlled OC1

function
VDepMode_OC1
Step
Slope
Step
Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step, slope)
VDepFact_OC1
0.02 - 5.00
0.01
1.00
Multiplying factor for current pickup when OC1

is voltage dependent
VLowLimit_OC1
1.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of UBase
VHighLimit_OC1
1.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
100.0
Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of UBase
HarmRestr_OC1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain
DirMode_OC1
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,

reverse)
DirPrinc_OC1
I&V
IcosPhi&V
I&V
Measuring on IandV or IcosPhiandV for OC1
ActLowVolt1_VM
Non-directional
Block
Memory
Non-directional
Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1 (Nodir,

Blk, Mem)
694
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation_OC2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation od OC2
PickupCurr_OC2
2.0 - 5000.0
%IB
1.0
120.0
Operate current level for OC2 in % of IBase
CurveType_OC2
ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type
ANSI Def. Time
Selection of time delay curve type for OC2
tDef_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
Definite time delay OC2
TD_OC2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30

OC2
IMin2
1 - 10000
%IB
50

IBase
tMin_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves for

OC2
VCntrlMode_OC2
Voltage control
Disabled
Disabled
Control mode for voltage controlled OC2

function
VDepMode_OC2
Step
Slope
Step
Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step, slope)
VDepFact_OC2
0.02 - 5.00
0.01
1.00
Multiplying factor for current pickup when OC2

is voltage dependent
VLowLimit_OC2
1.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of UBase
VHighLimit_OC2
1.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
100.0
Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of UBase
HarmRestr_OC2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain
DirMode_OC2
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,

reverse)
DirPrinc_OC2
I&V
IcosPhi&V
I&V
Measuring on IandV or IcosPhiandV for OC2
ActLowVolt2_VM
Non-directional
Block
Memory
Non-directional
Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2 (Nodir,

Blk, Mem)
Operation_UC1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable operation of UC1
Technical manual
695
Section 11
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EnBlkLowI_UC1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable internal low current level blocking for

UC1
BlkLowCurr_UC1
0 - 150
%IB
20
Internal low current blocking level for UC1 in %

of IBase
PickupCurr_UC1
2.0 - 150.0
%IB
1.0
70.0
Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in % of

IBase
tDef_UC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
Definite time delay of UC1
tResetDef_UC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

curve UC1
HarmRestr_UC1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain
Operation_UC2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable operation of UC2
EnBlkLowI_UC2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable internal low current level blocking for

UC2
BlkLowCurr_UC2
0 - 150
%IB
20
Internal low current blocking level for UC2 in %

of IBase
PickupCurr_UC2
2.0 - 150.0
%IB
1.0
70.0
Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in % of

IBase
tDef_UC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
Definite time delay of UC2
HarmRestr_UC2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain
Operation_OV1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable operation of OV1
PickupVolt_OV1
2.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of VBase
CurveType_OV1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time delay curve type for OV1
tDef_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
Operate time delay in sec for definite time use

of OV1
tMin_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time curves

for OV1
TD_OV1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30

OV1
Operation_OV2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable operation of OV2
PickupVolt_OV2
2.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
Operate voltage level for OV2 in % of VBase
CurveType_OV2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time delay curve type for OV2
tDef_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00

of OV2

696
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
tMin_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05

for OV2
TD_OV2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30

OV2
Operation_UV1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable operation of UV1
PickupVolt_UV1
2.0 - 150.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in % of

VBase
CurveType_UV1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time delay curve type for UV1
tDef_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00

of UV1
tMin_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05

for UV1
TD_UV1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30

UV1
EnBlkLowV_UV1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled

UV1
BlkLowVolt_UV1
0.0 - 5.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in %

of VBase
Operation_UV2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable operation of UV2
PickupVolt_UV2
2.0 - 150.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
Operate undervoltage level for UV2 in % of

VBase
CurveType_UV2
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve
Definite time
Selection of time delay curve type for UV2
tDef_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00

of UV2
tMin_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05

for UV2
TD_UV2
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.30

UV2
EnBlkLowV_UV2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled

UV2
BlkLowVolt_UV2
0.0 - 5.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
Internal low voltage blocking level for UV2 in %

of VBase
Technical manual
Description
697
Section 11
Table 362:
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MultPU_OC1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset curve type for OC1
tResetDef_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

curve OC1
P_OC1
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020

curve for OC1
A_OC1
0.000 - 999.000
0.001
0.140

curve for OC1
B_OC1
0.000 - 99.000
0.001
0.000

curve for OC1
C_OC1
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000

curve for OC1
PR_OC1
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

curve for OC1
TR_OC1
0.005 - 600.000
0.001
13.500

curve for OC1
CR_OC1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

curve for OC1
MultPU_OC2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0

for OC2
ResCrvType_OC2
Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset
Instantaneous
Selection of reset curve type for OC2
tResetDef_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

curve OC2
P_OC2
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020

curve for OC2
A_OC2
0.000 - 999.000
0.001
0.140

curve for OC2
B_OC2
0.000 - 99.000
0.001
0.000

curve for OC2
C_OC2
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000

curve for OC2
PR_OC2
0.005 - 3.000
0.001
0.500

curve for OC2
TR_OC2
0.005 - 600.000
0.001
13.500

curve for OC2
CR_OC2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0

curve for OC2
tResetDef_UC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

curve UC2

698
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ResCrvType_OV1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset curve type for OV1
tResetDef_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for definite time use of

OV1
tResetIDMT_OV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00
Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time

curves for OV1
A_OV1
0.005 - 999.000
0.001
0.140

curve for OV1
B_OV1
0.500 - 99.000
0.001
1.000

curve for OV1
C_OV1
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000

curve for OV1
D_OV1
0.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

curve for OV1
P_OV1
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020

curve for OV1
ResCrvType_OV2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset curve type for OV2
tResetDef_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

OV2
tResetIDMT_OV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

curves for OV2
A_OV2
0.005 - 999.000
0.001
0.140

curve for OV2
B_OV2
0.500 - 99.000
0.001
1.000

curve for OV2
C_OV2
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000

curve for OV2
D_OV2
0.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

curve for OV2
P_OV2
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020

curve for OV2
ResCrvType_UV1
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset curve type for UV1
tResetDef_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

UV1
tResetIDMT_UV1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

curves for UV1
A_UV1
0.005 - 999.000
0.001
0.140

curve for UV1
B_UV1
0.500 - 99.000
0.001
1.000

curve for UV1
Technical manual
699
Section 11
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
C_UV1
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000

curve for UV1
D_UV1
0.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

curve for UV1
P_UV1
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020

curve for UV1
ResCrvType_UV2
Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased
Instantaneous
Selection of reset curve type for UV2
tResetDef_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

UV2
tResetIDMT_UV2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.00

curves for UV2
A_UV2
0.005 - 999.000
0.001
0.140

curve for UV2
B_UV2
0.500 - 99.000
0.001
1.000

curve for UV2
C_UV2
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000

curve for UV2
D_UV2
0.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

curve for UV2
P_UV2
0.001 - 10.000
0.001
0.020

curve for UV2
Table 363:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
11.1.6
CVGAPC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
groups
Monitored data
Table 364:
Name
CVGAPC Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
DIROC1
INTEGER
1=Forward
0=Nondirectional
2=Reverse
Directional mode of OC1

(nondir, forward,reverse)
DIROC2
INTEGER
1=Forward
0=Nondirectional
2=Reverse
Directional mode of OC2

(nondir, forward,reverse)
CURRENT
REAL
Measured current value
700
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
ICOSFI
REAL
Measured current multiplied

with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE
REAL
kV
Measured voltage value
VIANGLE
REAL
deg
Angle between voltage and

current
11.1.7
Operation principle
11.1.7.1
Measured quantities within CVGAPC

General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function is always connected to threephase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always
measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting
tool.
The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 365.
Table 365:
Current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the

parameter
CurrentInput
Comment
PhaseA
CVGAPC function will measure the phase A current phasor
PhaseB
CVGAPC function will measure the phase B current phasor
PhaseC
CVGAPC function will measure the phase C current phasor
PosSeq
CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence

current phasor
NegSeq
CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence

current phasor
3ZeroSeq
CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current

phasor multiplied by factor 3
MaxPh
CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude
MinPh
CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude
UnbalancePh
CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is

internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor of
the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
10
PhaseA-PhaseB
CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase A current phasor and phase B current
phasor (IA-IB)
Technical manual
701
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Set value for the

parameter
CurrentInput
Comment
11
PhaseB-PhaseC
vector difference between the phase B current phasor and phase C current
phasor (IB-IC)
12
PhaseC-PhaseA
vector difference between the phase C current phasor and phase A current
phasor ( IC-IA)
13
MaxPh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14
MinPh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15
UnbalancePh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is

internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph
current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor with
minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 366:
Table 366:
Voltage selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the

parameter
VoltageInput
Comment
PhaseA
CVGAPC function will measure the phase A voltage phasor
PhaseB
CVGAPC function will measure the phase B voltage phasor
PhaseC
CVGAPC function will measure the phase C voltage phasor
PosSeq

voltage phasor
-NegSeq

voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in
order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used.
-3ZeroSeq
CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage

phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated
for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when
used.
MaxPh
CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude
MinPh
CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude
UnbalancePh
CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is

internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage phasor of
the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
10
PhaseA-PhaseB
CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase A voltage phasor and phase B voltage
phasor (VA-VB)
702
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Set value for the

parameter
VoltageInput
Comment
11
PhaseB-PhaseC
vector difference between the phase B voltage phasor and phase C voltage
phasor (VB-VC)
12
PhaseC-PhaseA
vector difference between the phase C voltage phasor and phase A voltage
phasor ( VC-VA)
13
MaxPh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14
MinPh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15
UnbalancePh-Ph
CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is

internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the ph-ph
voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage phasor with
minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time
It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 366 is always applicable
regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be
connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB & VC or three phaseto-phase voltages VAB, VBC & VCA). This information about actual VT connection is
entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will then take automatic
care about it.
The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 367 for built-in current
restraint feature:
Table 367:
Restraint current selection for CVGAPC function
Set value for the

parameter RestrCurr
11.1.7.2
Comment
PosSeq

current phasor
NegSeq

current phasor
3ZeroSeq
CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current

phasor multiplied by factor 3
MaxPh
CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude
Base quantities for CVGAPC function

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for pickup
levels of all measuring stages, shall be entered as setting parameters for every CVGAPC
function.
Technical manual
703
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Base current shall be entered as:

1.
2.
rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured
Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 365.
rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by 3
(1.732*Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as
shown in table 365.
Base voltage shall be entered as:

1.
2.
11.1.7.3
rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 366.
rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 366.
Built-in overcurrent protection steps

Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see
table 365) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level. However
depending on other enabled built-in features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the
overcurrent step pickup signal. Pickup signal will only come if all of the enabled built-in
features in the overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.
Second harmonic feature

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component in the
measured current quantity (see table 365). However it shall be noted that this feature is not
applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:
PosSeq (positive sequence current)

NegSeq (negative sequence current)
UnbalancePh (unbalance phase current)
UnbalancePh-Ph (unbalance ph-ph current)
This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step pickup if the second-to-first harmonic
ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.
Directional feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent on the relevant phase
angle between measured current phasor (see table 365) and measured voltage phasor (see
table 366). In protection terminology it means that the General currrent and voltage
704
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
protection (CVGAPC) function can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature.
In that case overcurrent protection step will only trip if the current flow is in accordance
with the set direction (Forward, which means towards the protected object, or Reverse,
which means from the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost importance to
understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 366) and measured current phasor
(see table 365) will be used for directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility
of the end user to select the appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper
directional decision. CVGAPC function will NOT do this automatically. It will simply use
the current and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the directional
criteria.
Table 368 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for
these two quantities from traditional directional relays.
Table 368:
Set value for the
parameter
CurrentInput
Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature

Set value for the
parameter
VoltageInput
Comment
PosSeq
PosSeq
Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90
depending on the power system voltage level (X/R ratio)
NegSeq
-NegSeq
Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90
depending on the power system voltage level (X/R ratio)
3ZeroSeq
-3ZeroSeq
Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is obtained.

Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to -90 depending on
the power system grounding (that is, solidly grounding,
grounding via resistor)
Phase1
Phase2-Phase3
Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45
Phase2
Phase3-Phase1
Directional overcurrent function for the second phase is

Phase3
Phase1-Phase2
Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is

Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional feature
is enabled.
Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & V and IcosPhi&V. The
first principle, referred to as "I & V" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:
the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the relay
trip angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 321).
Technical manual
705
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
V=-3V0
RCADir
Ipickup
ROADir
I=3Io
Operate region
mta line
en05000252_anis.vsd
IEC05000252-ANIS V1 EN
Figure 321:
I & V directional operating principle for CVGAPC function
where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50
The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&V" in the parameter setting tool, checks
that:
706
that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the
Icos() straight line and the relay trip angle, ROADir parameter setting; see
figure 321).
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
V=-3V0
RCADir
Ipickup
ROADir
I=3Io
Operate region
mta line
en05000253_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000253 V1 EN
Figure 322:
CVGAPC, IcosPhi&V directional operating principle
where:
RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50
Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature shall
behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the pre-set value.
User can select one of the following three options:
Non-directional (operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage)

Block (operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage)
Memory (memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)
It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms. After
that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during memory time
and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage goes above set
voltage memory limit.
Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a measured voltage
quantity (see table 366). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not
constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the measured voltage
quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:
Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)
Technical manual
707
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
OC1 Stage Pickup Level
PickupCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * PickupCurr_OC1
VLowLimit_OC1
VHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000324 V1 EN
Figure 323:
Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of

measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation
Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Step)

OC1 Stage Pickup Level
PickupCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 *
PickupCurr_OC1
VHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000323 V1 EN
Figure 324:
Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of

measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation
This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will as well
affect the pickup current value for calculation of trip times for IDMT curves (overcurrent
with IDMT curve will trip faster during low voltage conditions).
708
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Current restraint feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a restraining current
quantity (see table 367). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent step is not
constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the restraining current.
IMeasured
e
Op
te
ra
ea
ar
IsetHigh
eff
Co
r
t
es
I>R
tr
es
*Ir
ain
IsetLow
atan(RestrCoeff)
Restraint
en05000255.vsd
IEC05000255 V1 EN
Figure 325:
Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude
This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to pickup if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for calculation of
trip times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve trip time will not be
influenced by the restrain current magnitude.
When set, the pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end user
setting.
11.1.7.4
Built-in undercurrent protection steps

Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the
magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 365) with the set pickup level. The
undercurrent step will pickup and set its pickup signal to one if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The pickup signal will start
definite time delay with set time delay. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time
Technical manual
709
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the setting.
11.1.7.5
Built-in overvoltage protection steps

Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see
table 366) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of
the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level.
The pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
setting.
11.1.7.6
Built-in undervoltage protection steps

Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see
table 366) with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the magnitude of
the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level.
The pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
setting.
11.1.7.7
Inadvertent generator energizing

The inadvertent energizing function is realized by means of the general current and
voltage protection function (CAGVPC). CVGAPC is configured as shown in figure 326.
710
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
CVGAPC
3IP
3VP
TROC1
TROV1
TRUV1
BLKOC1
ANSI10000028 V1 EN
Figure 326:
Configuration of the inadvertent energizing function
The setting of the general current and voltage function (typical values) is done as shown
in table 369.
Table 369:
The setting of the general current and voltage function

Measured Quantity
Pickup in % of generator
rating
Time delay in seconds
UndervoltagePickup
Maximum generator
Phase to Phase voltage
< 70%
10.0 s
Overvoltage Pickup
Maximum generator
Phase to Phase voltage
> 85%
1.0 s
OvercurrentPickup
Maximum generator
Phase current
> 50%
0.05 s
In normal operation the overvoltage trip signal is activated and the undervotage trip signal
is deactivated. This means that the overcurrent function is blocked.
Technical manual
711
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
When the generator is taken out of service the generator voltage gets low. The overvoltage
trip signal will be deactivated and the undervoltage trip signal will be activated after the
set delay. At this moment the block signal to the overcurrent function will be deactivated.
It the generator is energized at stand still conditions, that is, when the voltage is zero, the
overcurrent function will operate after the short set delay if the generator current is larger
than the set value.
When the generator is started the overvoltage trip signal will be activated the set time
delay after the moment when the voltage has reached the set value. At this moment the
blocking of the overcurrent function is activated.
The delay of the undervoltage function will prevent false operation at short circuits in the
external power grid.
11.1.7.8
Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following figures.
IED
Phasors &
samples
Current and voltage selection

settings
Selected current
Selection of which current

and voltage shall be given to
the built-in protection
elements
Selected voltage
Restraint current selection
Selection of restraint current
Selected restraint current
Phasors &
samples
individual currents
CVGAPC function
individual voltages
A/D conversion scaling

with CT ratio
52
A/D conversion
scaling with CT ratio
ADM
ANSI05000169 V2 EN
Figure 327:
712
Treatment of measured currents and voltages within IED for CVGAPC function
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Figure 327 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for multipurpose
protection function
The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function.
They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and kilovolts.
1.
2.
3.
Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase current
and one three-phase voltage input.
Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one three-phase
voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase
voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
The multipurpose protection function:

1.
2.
3.
Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 365) for internally
measured current.
Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 366) for internally
measured voltage.
Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 367) for internally
measured restraint current.
Technical manual
713
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
CURRENT
UC1
2
Selected current
TRUC1
nd
Harmonic
restraint
PU_UC2
UC2
nd
2 Harmonic
restraint
TRUC2
PU_OC1
OC1
Selected restraint current
2nd Harmonic
restraint
TROC1
OR
Current restraint
BLK2ND
DIROC1
Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint
PU_OC2
TROC2
OC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint
Directionality
OR
VDIRLOW
DIROC2
Voltage control /
restraint
PU_OV1
OV1
TROV1
PU_OV2
OV2
Selected voltage
TROV2
PU_UV1
UV1
TRUV1
PU_UV2
UV2
TRUV2
VOLTAGE
714
en05000170_ansi.vsd
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
ANSI05000170 V1 EN
Figure 328:
CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection elements
Logic in figure 328 can be summarized as follows:

1.
The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each
protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its PICKUP
and TRIP output signals.
More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following
four figures
Common PICKUP and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps
(internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.
2.
3.
Enable
second
harmonic
Second
harmonic check
DEF time
selected
a
b
AND
TROC1
OR
a>b
OC1=On
BLKOC1
BLKTROC1
0-DEF
0
Selected current
PickupCurr_OC1
NOT
PU_OC1
AND
Inverse
Voltage
control or
restraint
feature
Selected voltage
Selected restrain current
Directionality
check
DIR_OK
Inverse
time
selected
Current
Restraint
Feature
Imeasured > k Irestraint
en05000831_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000831 V1 EN
Figure 329:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the same
internal logic)
Technical manual
715
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Bin input: BLKUC1TR
Selected current
b>a
AND
PickupCurr_UC1
TRUC1
AND
0-DEF
0
Operation_UC1=On
PU_UC1
Bin input: BLKUC1
en05000750_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000750 V1 EN
Figure 330:
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has the same
internal logic)
DEF time
selected
0
Selected voltage
a
b
PickupVolt_OV1
BLKTROV1
0-DEF
AND
TROV1
OR
a>b
PU_OV1
AND
Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
BLKOV1
Inverse time
selected
en05000751_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000751 V1 EN
Figure 331:
716
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same internal
logic)
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
DEF time
selected
0
Selected voltage
BLKTRUV1
0-DEF
AND
TRUV1
OR
b>a
PU_UV1
AND
PickupVolt_UV1
Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
selected
BLKUV1
en05000752_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000752 V1 EN
Figure 332:
11.1.8
Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same internal
logic)
Technical data
Table 370:
CVGAPC technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Measuring current input
Phase A, Phase B, Phase C, PosSeq, NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,

UnbalancePh, Phase A-Phase B, Phase
B-Phase C, Phase C-Phase A, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Measuring voltage input
Phase A, Phase B, Phase C, PosSeq, NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,

UnbalancePh, Phase A-Phase B, Phase
B-Phase C, Phase C-Phase A, MaxPh-Ph,
MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph
Pickup overcurrent, step 1

-2
(2 - 5000)% of IBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Pickup undercurrent, step

1-2
(2 - 150)% of IBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Independent time delay,

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset,
step 1 - 2
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
greater

undercurrent at 2 to 0 x
Iset, step 1 - 2
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
greater
Overcurrent (nondirectional):
Technical manual
717
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Pickup time at 0 to 2 x Iset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 5 ms
Max. = 20 ms
Min. = 20 ms
Max. = 35 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
16 curve types
See table 977, 978 and table 979
Minimum operate time for

inverse curves, step 1 - 2
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
greater
Voltage level where

voltage memory takes
over
(0.0 - 5.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Pickup overvoltage, step 1

-2
(2.0 - 200.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Pickup undervoltage, step

1-2
(2.0 - 150.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn

overvoltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x
Vset, step 1 - 2
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
greater

undervoltage at 1.2 to 0.8
x Vset, step 1 - 2
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
greater
Pickup time at 0.8 to 1.2 x

Vset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 1.2 to 0.8 x

Vset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Pickup time at 1.2 to 0.8 x

Vset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 1.2 to 0.8 x

Vset
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Undercurrent:
Overcurrent:
Inverse time
characteristics, see table
977, 978 and table 979
Overcurrent:
Overvoltage:
Undervoltage:
Overvoltage:
718
Technical manual
Section 11
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
4 curve types
See table 988
Inverse time
989
3 curve types
See table 989
High and low voltage limit,

voltage dependent
operation, step 1 - 2
(1.0 - 200.0)% of VBase
1.0% of Vn at V Vn
1.0% of V at V > Vn
Directional function
Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse
(-180 to +180) degrees
2.0 degrees
Relay trip angle
(1 to 90) degrees
2.0 degrees
> 95%
Reset ratio, undercurrent
< 105%
Reset ratio, overvoltage
> 95%
Reset ratio, undervoltage
< 105%
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
10 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2 x Vset
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8 x Vset
Impulse margin time
15 ms typically
Inverse time
988
Undervoltage:
Overcurrent:
Undercurrent:
Overvoltage:
Undervoltage:
Technical manual
719
720
Section 12
System protection and control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 12
12.1
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC
12.1.1
Identification
12.1.2
IEC 61850
identification
Multipurpose filter
SMAIHPAC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The multi-purpose filter function block, SMAIHPAC, is arranged as a three-phase filter.
It has very much the same user interface (e.g. inputs and outputs) as the standard preprocessing function block SMAI. However the main difference is that it can be used to
extract any frequency component from the input signal. Thus it can, for example, be used
to build sub-synchronous resonance protection for synchronous generator.
12.1.3
Function block
SMAIHPAC
BLOCK
G3P*
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
IEC13000180 V1 EN
12.1.4
Signals
Table 371:
Name
SMAIHPAC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
G3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Analog input group from SMAI
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Technical manual
721
Section 12
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 372:
SMAIHPAC Output signals
Name
12.1.5
Table 373:
Name
Type
Description
AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
Analog input 3-phase group
AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
Analog input 1
AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
Analog input 2
AI3
GROUP SIGNAL
Analog input 3
AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
Analog input 4
Settings
SMAIHPAC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ConnectionType
Ph - Ph
Ph - N
Ph - N
Analogue input connection type
SetFrequency
2.0 - 500.0
Hz
0.1
50.0
Desired frequency to be extracted by the filter
FreqBandWidth
0.0 - 60.0
Hz
0.1
0.0
Extra added frequency band around the set

frequency
FilterLength
0.1 s
0.2 s
0.5 s
1.0 s
2.0 s
4.0 s
1.0 s
Approximate length of the filtering window in

seconds
OverLap
0 - 95
20
Filtering window overlap between two

calculations in percent
12.1.6
Operation principle
For all four analogue input signals into this filter (i.e. three phases and the residual
quantity) the input samples from the TRM module which are coming at rate of 20 samples
per fundamental system cycle are first stored. When enough samples are available in the
internal memory, the phasor values at set frequency defined by the setting parameter
SetFrequency are calculated. The following values are internally available for each of the
calculated phasors:
Magnitude
Phase angle
Exact frequency of the extracted signal
Note that the special filtering algorithm is used to extract these phasors. This algorithm is
different from the standard one-cycle Digital Fourier Filter typically used by the
722
Technical manual
Section 12
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
numerical IEDs. This filter provides extremely good accuracy of measurement and
excellent noise rejection, but at the same time it has much slower response time. It is
capable to extract phasor (i.e. magnitude, phase angle and actual frequency) of any signal
(e.g. 37,2Hz) present in the waveforms of the connected CTs and/or VTs. The magnitude
and the phase angle of this phasor are calculated with very high precision. For example the
magnitude and phase angle of the phasor can be estimated even if it has magnitude of one
per mille (i.e. 1 ) in comparison to the dominating signal (e.g. the fundamental
frequency component). Several instances of this function block are provided. These
instances are fully synchronized between each-other in respect of phase angle calculation.
Thus if two multi-purpose filters are used for some application, one for current and the
second one for the voltage signals, the power values (i.e. P & Q) at the set frequency can
be calculated from them by the over-/under-power function or CVMMXN measurement
function block.
In addition to these phasors the following quantities are internally calculated as well:
Phasors for the individual phases as well as phase-to-phase phasors

True RMS value of the input signal over all samples available in the memory
Positive sequence phasor
Negative sequence phasor
Zero sequence phasor
etc.
In order to properly calculate phase-to-phase phasors from the individual phase phasors or
vice versa, the setting parameters ConnectionType is provided. It defines what quantities
(i.e. individual phases or phase-to-phase quantities) are physically connected to the IED
analogue inputs by wiring. Then the IED knows which one of them are the measured
quantities and the other one is then internally calculated. This setting is only important for
the VT inputs, because the CTs are typically wye connected all the time.
Thus when this filter is used in conjunction with multi-purpose protection function or
overcurrent function or over-voltage function or over-power function many different
protection applications can be arranged. For example the following protection,
monitoring or measurement features can be realized:
Sub-synchronous resonance protection for turbo generators

Sub-synchronous protection for wind turbines/wind farms
Detection of sub-synchronous oscillation between HVDC links and synchronous
generators
Super-synchronous protection
Detection of presence of the geo-magnetic induced currents
Overcurrent or overvoltage protection at specific frequency harmonic, sub-harmonic,
inter-harmonic etc.
Presence of special railway frequencies (e.g. 16.7Hz or 25Hz) in the three-phase
power system
Technical manual
723
Section 12
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Sensitive reverse power protection

Stator or rotor ground fault protection for special injection frequencies (e.g. 25Hz)
etc.
The filter output can also be connected to the measurement function blocks such as
CVMMXN (Measurements), CMMXU (Phase current measurement), VMMXU (Phasephase voltage measurement), etc.
The filter has as well additional capability to report the exact frequency of the extracted
signal. Thus the user can check the actual frequency of some phenomenon in the power
system (e.g. frequency of the sub-synchronous currents) and compare it with expected
value obtained previously by either calculation or simulation. For the whole three-phase
filter group the frequency of the signal connected to the first input (i.e. phase A) is
reported. This value can be then used either by over-/under-frequency protections or
reported to the built-in HMI or any other external client via the measurement blocks such
is the CVMMXN.
How many samples in the memory are used for the phasor calculation depends on the
setting parameter FilterLength. Table 374 gives overview of the used number of samples
for phasor calculation by the filter. Note that the used number of samples is always a power
of number two.
Table 374:
Length of the filtering window
Value for parameter

FilterLength
Used No of samples for

calculation (fixed,
independent from rated
frequency)
Corresponding length of
the input waveform in
miliseconds for 50Hz
power system
Corresponding length of
the input waveform in
miliseconds for 60Hz
power system
0.1 s
128 = 27
128 ms
107 ms
0.2 s
256 = 28
256 ms
213 ms
0.5 s
512 = 29
512 ms
427 ms
1.0 s
1024 =
210
1024 ms
853 ms
2.0 s
2048 = 211
2048 ms
1707 ms
4.0 s
4096 = 212
4096 ms
3413 ms
Note that the selected value for the parameter FilterLength automatically defines certain
filter properties as described below:
First in order to secure proper filter operation the selected length of the filter shall always
be longer than three complete periods of the signal which shall be extracted. Actually the
best results are obtained if at least five complete periods are available within the filtering
window. Thus, this filter feature will limit which filter lengths can be used to extract low
frequency signals. For example if 16,7 Hz signal shall be extracted the minimum filter
length in milliseconds shall be:
724
Technical manual
Section 12
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
1000
16.7
= 180ms
(Equation 178)
EQUATION000028 V1 EN
Thus based on the data from Table 374 the minimum acceptable value for this parameter
would be FilterLength = 0.2 s but more accurate results will be obtained by using
FilterLength = 0.5 s
Second feature which is determined by the selected value for parameter FilterLength is the
capability of the filter to separate the desired signal from the other disturbing signals
which may have similar frequency value. Note that the filter output will be the phasor with
the highest magnitude within certain pass frequency band around the SetFrequency.
Table 375 defines the natural size of this pass frequency band for the filter, depending on
the selected value for parameter FilterLength.
Table 375:
Pass frequency band due to FilterLength
Value for parameter FilterLength
For 50Hz power system
For 60Hz power system
0.1 s
22.5 Hz
27.0 Hz
0.2 s
11.5 Hz
14.0 Hz
0.5 s
6.0 Hz
7.2 Hz
1.0 s
3.0 Hz
3.6 Hz
2.0 s
1.5 Hz
1.8 Hz
4.0 s
0.8 Hz
1.0 Hz
Thus the longer length of the filter the better capability it has to reject the disturbing
signals close to the required frequency component and any other noise present in the input
signal waveform. For example if 46 Hz signal wants to be extracted in 50Hz power
system, then from Table 375 it can be concluded that FilterLength=1,0 s shall be
selected as a minimum value. However if frequency deviation of the fundamental
frequency signal in the power system are taken into account it may be advisable to select
FilterLength=2,0 s for such application.
Note that in case when no clear magnitude peak exist in the set pass frequency band the
filter will return zero values for the phasor magnitude and angle while the signal frequency
will have value minus one. Finally the set value for parameter FilterLength also defines
the response time of the filter after a step change of the measured signal. The filter will
correctly estimate the new signal magnitude once 75% of the filter length has been filed
with the new signal value (i.e. after the change).
If for any reason this natural frequency band shall be extended (e.g. to get accurate but
wider filter) it is possible to increase the pass band by entering the value different from
zero for parameter FreqBandWidth. In such case the total filter pass band can be defined
as:
Technical manual
725
Section 12
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
(value given in Table 375 + one-half of the set FreqBandWidth value)

Example if in 60Hz system the selected values are FilterLength =1.0 s and
FreqBandWidth = 5.0 the total filter pass band will be (3.6+5.0/2)= 6.1 Hz.
It shall be noted that the phasor calculation is relatively computation demanding (required
certain amount of the CPU processing time). In order to control the CPU usage for this
filter, the setting parameter OverLap is used. This setting parameter defines how often the
new phasor value is calculated during time period defined by the set value for the
parameter FilterLength (see Table 374). The following list gives some examples how this
parameter influence the calculation rate for the extracted phasor:
12.1.7
when OverLap=0% the new phasor value is calculated only once per FilterLength
when OverLap=50% the new phasor value is calculated two times per FilterLength
when OverLap=75% the new phasor value is calculated four times per FilterLength
when OverLap=90% the new phasor value is calculated ten times per FilterLength
Filter calculation example

In the following Figure an example from an installation of this filter on a large, 50 Hz turbo
generator with a rating in excess of 1000 MVA is presented. In this installation filter is
used to measure the stator sub-synchronous resonance currents. For this particular
installation the following settings were used for the filter:
726
SetFrequency= 31.0 Hz
FilterLength= 1.0 s
OverLap = 75%
FreqBandWidth= 0.0 Hz
Technical manual
Section 12
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC13000178 V3 EN
Figure 333:
Example of filter calculation
The data shown in the Figure comes from the comtrade file captured by the IED. The
following traces are presented in this Figure.
a) Waveforms of the stator three-phase currents given in primary kA.
b) RMS value of the sub-synchronous resonance current extracted by the filter in primary
amperes.
c) Frequency of the extracted sub-synchronous resonance current provided by the filter in
Hz.
Note the very narrow scale on the y-axle for b) and c). Such small scale as well indicates
with which precision and consistency the filter calculates the phasor magnitude and
frequency of the extracted stator sub-synchronous current component.
The following can be observed in the Figure:
The stator total RMS current value is around 33 kA primary.

The measured magnitude of the sub-synchronous current is around 173 A primary
(that is, 0.5% of the fundamental 50 Hz component).
The frequency of this sub-synchronous current component is 31.24 Hz.
Technical manual
727
Section 12
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
With above given settings the sub-synchronous current magnitude and frequency are
calculated approximately four times per second (that is, correct value is four times per
1024 ms).
728
Technical manual
Section 13
Secondary system supervision
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 13
13.1
Current circuit supervision (87)
13.1.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Current circuit supervision
13.1.2
CCSSPVC
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87
Functionality
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many
protection functions such as differential, ground-fault current and negative-sequence
current functions.
Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC, 87) compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input
taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.
A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to block
protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping.
13.1.3
Function block
CCSSPVC (87)
I3P*
IREF*
BLOCK
FAIL
ALARM
ANSI13000304 V1 EN
Figure 334:
CCSSPVC (87) function block
Signal IREF must be connected in the configuration.
Technical manual
729
Section 13
13.1.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 376:
CCSSPVC (87) Input signals
Name
Type
Group signal for three phase current input
IREF
GROUP
SIGNAL
Residual reference current input
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
CCSSPVC (87) Output signals
Name
Table 378:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 377:
13.1.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
FAIL
BOOLEAN
Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for current circuit failure
Settings
CCSSPVC (87) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
IMinOp
10 - 200
%IB
20
Minimum operate current differential pickup in

% of IBase
Table 379:
Name
Pickup_Block
Table 380:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
730
CCSSPVC (87) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
20 - 500
Unit
%IB
Step
1
Default
150
Description
Block of the function at high phase current, in %
of IBase
CCSSPVC (87) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
groups
Technical manual
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
13.1.6
Operation principle
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC (87) compares the absolute value of the vectorial
sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual current
|Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 335.
The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:
The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of the
numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|.
The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than the set
trip value IMinOp.
No phase current has exceeded Pickup_Block during the last 10 ms.
CCSSPVC (87) is enabled by setting Operation = Enabled.
The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will be
issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND-gate
resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase current
supervision element(s) trip, for example, during a fault.
I>Pickup_Block
BLOCK
IA
IB
IC
I ref
IA
IB
IC
I ref
+
+
+
I>IMinOp
+
-
x
0,8
1,5 x Ir
OR
10 ms
OR
AND
FAIL
20 ms 100 ms
150 ms
OPERATION
1s
ALARM
BLOCK
en05000463_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000463 V1 EN
Figure 335:
Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC (87)
The trip characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 336.
Technical manual
731
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
| I phase | - | I ref |
Slope = 1
Operation
area
Slope = 0.8
I MinOp
| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
IEC99000068 V1 EN
Figure 336:
Trip characteristics
Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I phase
| + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.
13.1.7
Technical data
Table 381:
CCSSPVC(87) technical data
Function
13.2
732
Range or value
Trip current
(10-200)% of IBase
Reset ratio, Trip current
>90%
Block current
(20-500)% of IBase
Reset ratio, Block current
>90% at (50-500)% of IBase
Accuracy
10.0% of In at I In
10.0% of I at I > In
5.0% of In at I In
5.0% of I at I > In
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC
Technical manual
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
13.2.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
13.2.2
FUFSPVC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function FUFSPVC is to block voltage measuring
functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the IED
in order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise might occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection methods,
negative sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional delta voltage and
delta current detection.
The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or
high-impedance grounded networks. It is based on the negative-sequence quantities.
The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low impedance
grounded networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities.
The selection of different operation modes is possible by a setting parameter in order to
take into account the particular grounding of the network.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse
failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in practice
is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations.
13.2.3
Function block
FUFSPVC
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
52A
MCBOP
89B
BLKTRIP
BLKZ
BLKV
3PH
DLD1PH
DLD3PH
PU_DI
PU_DI_A
PU_DI_B
PU_DI_C
PU_DV
PU_DV_A
PU_DV_B
PU_DV_C
ANSI14000065 V1 EN
Figure 337:
FUFSPVC function block
Technical manual
733
Section 13
13.2.4
Signals
Table 382:
Name
FUFSPVC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Current connection
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Voltage connection
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
52a
BOOLEAN
Active when circuit breaker is closed
MCBOP
BOOLEAN
Active when external Miniature Circuit Breaker opens

protected voltage circuit
89b
BOOLEAN
Active when line disconnect switch is open
BLKTRIP
BOOLEAN
Blocks operation of function when active
Table 383:
Name
734
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
FUFSPVC Output signals

Type
Description
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKV
BOOLEAN
General pickup
3PH
BOOLEAN
Three-phase pickup
DLD1PH
BOOLEAN
Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH
BOOLEAN
Dead line condition in all three phases
PU_DI
BOOLEAN
Common pickup signal of sudden change in current
PU_DI_A
BOOLEAN
Pickupof sudden change in current, phase A
PU_DI_B
BOOLEAN
Start signal of sudden change in current, phase B
PU_DI_C
BOOLEAN
Start signal of sudden change in current, phase C
PU_DV
BOOLEAN
Common start signal of sudden change in voltage
PU_DV_A
BOOLEAN
Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase A
PU_DV_B
BOOLEAN
Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase B
PU_DV_C
BOOLEAN
Start signal of sudden change in voltage, phase C
Technical manual
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
13.2.5
Table 384:
Name
Settings
FUFSPVC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OpModeSel
Disabled
V2I2
V0I0
V0I0 OR V2I2
V0I0 AND V2I2
OptimZsNs
V0I0
Operating mode selection
3V0PU
1 - 100
%VB
30
Pickup of residual overvoltage element in % of

VBase
3I0PU
1 - 100
%IB
10
Pickup of residual undercurrent element in % of

IBase
3V2PU
1 - 100
%VB
30
Pickup of negative sequence overvoltage

element in % of VBase
3I2PU
1 - 100
%IB
10
Pickup of negative sequence undercurrent

element in % of IBase
OpDVDI
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation of change based function Disable/

Enable
DVPU
1 - 100
%VB
60
Pickup of change in phase voltage in % of

VBase
DIPU
1 - 100
%IB
15
Pickup of change in phase current in % of

IBase
VPPU
1 - 100
%VB
70
Pickup of phase voltage in % of VBase
IPPU
1 - 100
%IB
10
Pickup of phase current in % of IBase
SealIn
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Seal in functionality Disable/Enable
VSealInPU
1 - 100
%VB
70
Pickup of seal-in phase voltage in % of VBase
IDLDPU
1 - 100
%IB
Pickup for phase current detection in % of

IBase for dead line detection
VDLDPU
1 - 100
%VB
60
Pickup for phase voltage detection in % of

VBase for dead line detection
Table 385:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
FUFSPVC Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Technical manual
Description
groups
735
Section 13
13.2.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Monitored data
Table 386:
Name
FUFSPVC Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
3I0
REAL
Magnitude of zero sequence

current
3I2
REAL
Magnitude of negative
sequence current
3V0
REAL
kV
Magnitude of zero sequence

voltage
3V2
REAL
kV
Magnitude of negative
sequence voltage
13.2.7
Operation principle
13.2.7.1
Zero and negative sequence detection

The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and voltages
in all three phases and calculates, see figure 338:
the zero-sequence voltage 3V0

the zero-sequence current 3I0
the negative sequence current 3I2
the negative sequence voltage 3V2
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3V0PU and 3I0PU,
3V2PU and 3I2PU.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zerosequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V0PU and the measured zero-sequence
current is below the set value 3I0PU.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V2PU and the measured negative sequence
current is below the set value 3I2PU.
A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence current
will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the two line ends.
736
Technical manual
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Sequence Detection
3I0PU
IA
CurrZeroSeq
Zero
sequence
filter
IB
3I0
a
b
a>b
Negative
sequence
filter
IC
3I2
AND
a
b
3I2PU
CurrNegSeq
100 ms
0
a>b
100 ms
0
AND
3V0PU
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
FuseFailDetNegSeq
VoltZeroSeq
VA
Zero
sequence
filter
VB
Negative
sequence
filter
VC
a
b
3V0
a>b
VoltNegSeq
a
b
3V2
a>b
3V2PU
ANSI10000036 V2 EN
Figure 338:
Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part
The calculated values 3V0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3V2 are available as service values on local HMI
and monitoring tool in PCM600.
Input and output signals

The output signals 3PH, BLKV and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and DLD3PH
from dead line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions occur:
The input BLOCK is activated

The input BLKTRIP is activated and the internal signal FuseFailStarted is not present
The operation mode selector OpModeSel is set to Disable
The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)
The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive
a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions.
Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.
The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output from any of the
protection functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the
Technical manual
737
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
operation of the fuse failure is blocked; a fixed drop-out timer prolongs the block for 100
ms. The aim is to increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of
the breaker, which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might
operate.
The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The dead line detection signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the
N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit.
The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKV and BLKZ in order to block all the
voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpModeSel
selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal
to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non simultaneous
closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal 89b is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The 89b signal sets the output signal BLKV in
order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The
impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line disconnector since
there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection. If
89b=0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system and when the 89b=1 it signifies
that the line is disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKV is generated.
The output BLKV can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, energizing check and so on) except for the impedance
protection.
The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection function.
13.2.7.2
Delta current and delta voltage detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 339. The calculation of the
changes of currents and voltages is based on a sample analysis algorithm. The calculated
delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DIPU and DVPU. The
algorithm detects a fuse failure if a sufficient change in voltage without a sufficient change
in current is detected in each phase separately. The following quantities are calculated in
all three phases:
The change in voltage DV

The change in current DI
The internal FuseFailDetDVDI signal is activated if the following conditions are fulfilled:
738
Technical manual
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above VPPU for more than 1.5
cycles (i.e. 30 ms in a 50 Hz system)
The magnitude of DV in three phases are higher than the corresponding setting
DVPU
The magnitudes of DI in three phases are below the setting DI<
In addition to the above conditions, at least one of the following conditions shall be
fulfilled in order to activate the internal FuseFailDetDVDI signal:
The magnitude of the phase currents in three phases are higher than the setting IPPU
The circuit breaker is closed (52A = True)
The first criterion means that detection of failure in three phases together with high current
for the three phases will set the output. The measured phase current is used to reduce the
risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low, a voltage drop
in the system (not caused by fuse failure) may be followed by current change lower than
the setting DIPU, and therefore a false fuse failure might occur.
The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled at the same time as
circuit breaker is closed. If this is an important disadvantage, connect the 52A input to
FALSE , then only the first criterion can enable the delta function.If the DVDI detection
of three phases set the internal signal FuseFailDetDVDI at the level high, then the signal
FuseFailDetDVDI will remain high as long as the voltage of three phases are lower then
the setting VPPU.
In addition to fuse failure detection, two internal signals DeltaV and DeltaI are also
generated by the delta current and delta voltage DVDI detection algorithm. The internal
signals DelatV and DeltaI are activated when a sudden change of voltage, or respectively
current, is detected. The detection of the sudden change is based on a sample analysis
algorithm. In particular DelatV is activated if at least three consecutive voltage samples
are higher then the setting DVPU. In a similar way DelatI is activated if at least three
consecutive current samples are higher then the setting DIPU.When DeltaV or DeltaI are
active, the output signals PU_DV_A, PU_DV_B, PU_DV_C and respectively PU_DI_A,
PU_DI_B, PU_DI_C, based on a sudden change of voltage or current detection, are
activated with a 20 ms time off delay. The common pickup output signals PU_DV or
PU_DI are activated with a 60 ms time off delay, if any sudden change of voltage or
current is detected.
The delta function (except the sudden change of voltage and current
detection) is deactivated by setting the parameter OpDVDI to Disabled.
Technical manual
739
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
DVDI Detection
DVDI detection Phase 1
IA
IB
IC
DI detection based on sample analysis

DeltaIA
DIPU
VA
DV detection based on sample analysis

AND
DVPU
a
b
VPPU
a>b
1.5 cycle
t
20 ms
t
DeltaIB
IA
IB
IC
VB
IA
IB
IC
VC
VA
50P
Same logic as for phase 1
a
b
ab
AND
AND
a
b
IB
a
b
a
b
IC
a
b
OR
OR
AND
ab
AND
AND
VC
DeltaIC
DeltaVC
52A
VB
DeltaVB
Same logic as for phase 1
IA
DeltaVA
OR
OR
AND
ab
AND
AND
OR
OR
AND
AND
FuseFailDetDVDI
ANSI12000166 V3 EN
Figure 339:
740
Simplified logic diagram for the DV/DI detection part
Technical manual
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
intBlock
AND
DeltaIA
DeltaIB
DeltaIC
0
20 ms
OR
0
20 ms
0
20 ms
AND
PU_DI_A
AND
PU_DI_B
AND
AND
DeltaVA
DeltaVB
DeltaVC
0
20 ms
OR
0
20 ms
PU_DI
AND
AND
0
20 ms
AND
PU_DI_C
PU_DV
PU_DV_A
PU_DV_B
PU_DV_B
ANSI12000165 V2 EN
Figure 340:
13.2.7.3
Internal signals DeltaV or DeltaI and the corresponding output signals
Dead line detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 341. A dead phase condition
is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their respective setting
values VDLDPU and IDLDPU. If at least one phase is considered to be dead the output
DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated. If all three phases are
considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is activated
Technical manual
741
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Dead Line Detection

IA
a
b
IB
a
b
IC
a
b
a<b
AllCurrLow
AND
a<b
a<b
IDLDPU
VA
DeadLineDet1Ph
a
b
VB
a
b
VC
a
b
a<b
a<b
AND
OR
DLD1PH
AND
AND
a<b
AND
AND
AND
DLD3PH
VDLDPU
intBlock
ANSI0000035 V1 EN
Figure 341:
13.2.7.4
Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part
Main logic
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 342. The fuse failure
supervision function (FUFSPVC) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter
Operation to Enabled or Disabled.
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode
selector, OpModeSel, has been introduced to make it possible to select different operating
modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The different operation
modes are:
742
Disabled. The negative and zero sequence function is disabled.

V2I2. Negative sequence is selected.
V0I0. Zero sequence is selected.
V0I0 OR V2I2. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in parallel in
an OR-condition.
V0I0 AND V2I2. Both negative and zero sequence are activated and work in series
(AND-condition for operation).
OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that has the
highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated).
Technical manual
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 13
The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDVDI to Enabled. When
selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.
As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,
FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDVDI, and the specific functionality is released, the
function will activate the output signal BLKV. The output signal BLKZ will be activated
as well if the internal dead phase detection, DeadLineDet1Ph, is not activated at the same
time. The output BLKV can be used for blocking voltage related measuring functions
(under voltage protection, energizing check, and so on). The output BLKZ shall be used
to block the impedance protection functions.
If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter
SealIn is set to Enabled it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltage is below
the set value VSealInPU. This will keep the BLKV and BLKZ signals activated as long as
any phase voltage is below the set value VSealInPU. If all three phase voltages drop below
the set value VSealInPU and the setting parameter SealIn is set to Enabled the output
signal 3PH will also be activated. The signals 3PH, BLKV and BLKZ signals will now be
active as long as any phase voltage is below the set value VSealInPU.
If SealIn is set to Enabled the fuse failure condition is stored in the non-volatile memory
in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power interruption or re-start due to
configuration change) it uses the stored value in its non-volatile memory and reestablishes the conditions that were present before the shut down. All phase voltages must
be greater than VSealInPU before fuse failure is de-activated and resets the signals BLKU,
BLKZ and 3PH.
The output signal BLKV will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the
setting VSealInPU for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has
been above the set value 3V0PU and 3V2PU for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents
are below the setting IDLDPU (criteria for open phase detection) and the circuit breaker
is closed (input 52a is activated).
If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a binary input to the
N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary circuit.
The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKV and BLKZ in order to block all the
voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of OpModeSel
or OpDVDI. An additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of MCBOP
signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to non
simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal 89b is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the N.C.
auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The 89b signal sets the output signal BLKV in
order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is open. The
impedance protection function does not have to be affected since there will be no line
currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection.
Technical manual
743
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST
TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK
intBlock
OR
BLKTRIP
20 ms
t
AND
100 ms
t
FusefailStarted
All VL < VSealInPU

OR
AND
AND
AND
SealIn = Enabled
3PH
AND
Any VL < VSealInPU

FuseFailDetDUDI
AND
OpDVDI = Enabled
OR
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
5s
t
AND
AND
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
V2I2
OR
V0I0
OR
V0I0 OR V2I2
OpModeSel
V0I0 AND V2I2

OptimZsNs
CurrZeroSeq
CurrNegSeq
AND
a>b
OR
AND
200 ms
t
DeadLineDet1Ph
AND
150 ms
t
MCBOP
All VL > VSealInPU
60 s
t
VoltZeroSeq
VoltNegSeq
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
BLKZ
BLKV
AND
5s
t
AllCurrLow
52a
89b
ANSI10000033 V3 EN
744
Technical manual
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Figure 342:
13.2.8
Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main logic
Technical data
Table 387:
FUFSPVCtechnical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip voltage, zero sequence
(1-100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Trip current, zero sequence
(1100)% of IBase
0.5% of In
Trip voltage, negative sequence
(1-100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Trip current, negative sequence
(1100)% of IBase
0.5% of In
Trip voltage change pickup
(1-100)% of VBase
10.0% of Vn
Trip current change pickup
(1100)% of IBase
10.0% of In
Trip phase voltage
(1-100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Trip phase current
(1100)% of IBase
0.5% of In
Trip phase dead line voltage
(1-100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Trip phase dead line current
(1100)% of IBase
0.5% of In
Pickup time, 1 ph, pickup at 1 to 0 x Vn
Min. = 10 ms
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, 1 ph, pickup at 0 to 1 x Vn
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
13.3
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC (60)
13.3.1
Identification
13.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
VDSPVC
IEC 60617
identification
VTS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
60
Functionality
Different protection functions within the protection IED operates on the basis of measured
voltage at the relay point. Some example of protection functions are:
Technical manual
745
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Distance protection function.

Undervoltage function.
Energisation function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic.
These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits
between voltage instrument transformers and the IED. These unintentional operations can
be prevented by VDSPVC.
VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement circuit,
based on phase wise comparison of voltages of main and pilot fused circuits. VDSPVC
blocking output can be configured to block functions that need to be blocked in case of
faults in the voltage circuit.
13.3.3
Function block
VDSPVC (60)
V3P1*
V3P2*
BLOCK
MAINFUF
PILOTFUF
V1AFAIL
V1BFAIL
V1CFAIL
V2AFAIL
V2BFAIL
V2CFAIL
ANSI12000142 V2 EN
Figure 343:
13.3.4
VDSPVC function block
Signals
Table 388:
Name
VDSPVC (60) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
V3P1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Main fuse voltage
V3P2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Pilot fuse voltage
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Table 389:
Name
VDSPVC (60) Output signals

Type
Description
MAINFUF
BOOLEAN
Block of main fuse failure
PILOTFUF
BOOLEAN
Alarm of pilot fuse failure
V1AFAIL
BOOLEAN
Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase A
746
Technical manual
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
13.3.5
Table 390:
Name
Type
Description
V1BFAIL
BOOLEAN
Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase B
V1CFAIL
BOOLEAN
Fuse failure of Main fuse group phase C
V2AFAIL
BOOLEAN
Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase A
V2BFAIL
BOOLEAN
Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase B
V2CFAIL
BOOLEAN
Fuse failure of Pilot fuse group phase C
Settings
VDSPVC (60) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
On
Disabled
Vdif Main block
10.0 - 80.0
%VB
0.1
20.0
Blocking picked up voltage level in % of VBase

when main fuse fails
Vdif Pilot alarm
10.0 - 80.0
%VB
0.1
30.0
Alarm picked up voltage level in % of VBase

when pilot fuse fails
SealIn
Disabled
On
On
Seal in functionality Disable/Enable
VSealIn
0.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
70.0
Operate level of seal-in voltage in % of VBase
Step
Default
Table 391:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Table 392:
Name
VDSPVC (60) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 12
Unit
-
Description
groups
VDSPVC (60) Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ConTypeMain
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
Selection of connection type for main fuse

group
ConTypePilot
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
Selection of connection type for pilot fuse

group
Technical manual
747
Section 13
13.3.6
Monitored data
Table 393:
Name
13.3.7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VDSPVC (60) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VADIF_A
REAL
kV
Differential voltage phase A

for alarm functionality
VBDIF_A
REAL
kV
Differential voltage phase B

VCDIF_A
REAL
kV
Differential voltage phase C

VADIF_B
REAL
kV
Differential voltage phase A

for block functionality
VBDIF_B
REAL
kV
Differential voltage phase B

VCDIF_C
REAL
kV
Differential voltage phase C

Operation principle
VDSPVC requires six voltage inputs, which are the three phase voltages on main and pilot
fuse groups. The initial voltage difference between the two groups is theoretical zero in the
healthy condition. Any subsequent voltage difference will be due to a fuse failure.
If the main fuse voltage becomes smaller than the pilot fuse voltage (vMainA < vPilotA
or vMainB < vPilotB or vMainC < vPilotC) and the voltage difference exceeds the
operation level (Vdif Main block), a blocking signal will be initiated to indicate the main
fuse failure and block the voltage-dependent functions. In addition, the function also
indicates the phase in which the voltage reduction has occurred.
If the pilot fuse voltage becomes smaller than the main fuse voltage (vPilotA < vMainA
or vPilotB < vMainB or vPilotC < vMainC) and the voltage difference exceeds the
operation level (Vdif Pilot alarm), an alarm signal will be initiated to indicate the pilot fuse
failure and also the faulty phase where the voltage reduction occurred.
When SealIn is set to Enabled and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the
blocked protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions are
restored above the VSealIn setting. Fuse failure outputs are deactivated when normal
voltage conditions are restored.
748
Technical manual
Section 13
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
a
ab
AND
Vdif Main block
OR
0
MIN
ABS
a>b
Vdif Pilot alarm
MAINFUF
AND
V2AFAIL
BLOCK
OR
vPilotB
PILOTFUF
V1BFAIL
vMainB
Phase B, same as Phase A
V2BFAIL
vPilotC
vMainC
Phase C, same as Phase A
V2CFAIL
V1CFAIL
ANSI12000144 V3 EN
Figure 344:
13.3.8
Simplified logic diagram VDSPVC (60)
Technical data
Table 394:
technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate value, block of main fuse

failure
(10.0-80.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Reset ratio
<110%
Operate time, block of main fuse

failure at 1 to 0 x Vr
Min. = 5 ms
Reset time, block of main fuse

Min. = 15 ms
Operate value, alarm for pilot

fuse failure
(10.0-80.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Reset ratio
<110%
Operate time, alarm for pilot fuse

Min. = 5 ms
Reset time, alarm for pilot fuse

Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Max. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Technical manual
749
750
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 14
Control
14.1
Synchronism check, energizing check, and

synchronizing SESRSYN (25)
14.1.1
Identification
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and
synchronizing
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
25
SESRSYN
sc/vc
SYMBOL-M V1 EN
14.1.2
Functionality
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN (25) function checks that
the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one
side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.
SESRSYN (25) function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and
breaker-and-a-half or ring busbar arrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can
have different settings.
For systems, which are running asynchronous, a synchronizing function is provided. The
main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of circuit
breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. The synchronizing
function evaluates voltage difference, phase angle difference, slip frequency and
frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled closing of the circuit breaker. Breaker
closing time is a parameter setting.
Technical manual
751
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
However this function can not be used to automatically synchronize the generator to the
network.
14.1.3
Function block
SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1*
SYNOK
V3PB2*
AUTOSYOK
V3PL1*
AUTOENOK
V3PL2*
MANSYOK
BLOCK
MANENOK
BLKSYNCH
TSTSYNOK
BLKSC
TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG
TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP
TSTENOK
BUS1_CL
VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP
B1SEL
BUS2_CL
B2SEL
LINE1_OP
L1SEL
LINE1_CL
L2SEL
LINE2_OP
SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL
SYNFAIL
VB1OK
VOKSYN
VB1FF
VDIFFSYN
VB2OK
FRDIFSYN
VB2FF
FRDIFFOK
VL1OK
FRDERIVA
VL1FF
VOKSC
VL2OK
VDIFFSC
VL2FF
FRDIFFA
STARTSYN
PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH
FRDIFFM
TSTSC
PHDIFFM
TSTENERG
INADVCLS
AENMODE
VDIFFME
MENMODE
FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
VBUS
VLINE
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
ANSI10000046 V2 EN
Figure 345:
14.1.4
SESRSYN (25) function block
Signals
Table 395:
Name
SESRSYN (25) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
V3PB1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for phase to ground voltage input Phase A,

busbar 1
V3PB2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for phase to ground voltage input Phase A,

busbar 1
V3PL1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for phase to ground voltage input phase A,

line 1
752
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Default
Description
V3PL2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for phase to ground voltage input phase A,

line 2
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
General block
BLKSYNCH
BOOLEAN
Block synchronizing
BLKSC
BOOLEAN
Block synchro check
BLKENERG
BOOLEAN
Block energizing check
BUS1_OP
BOOLEAN
Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
BUS1_CL
BOOLEAN
Close status for CB and disconnector connected to bus1
BUS2_OP
BOOLEAN
Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2
BUS2_CL
BOOLEAN
Close status for CB and disconnector connected to bus2
LINE1_OP
BOOLEAN
Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
LINE1_CL
BOOLEAN
Close status for CB and disconnector connected to line1
LINE2_OP
BOOLEAN
Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
LINE2_CL
BOOLEAN
Close status for CB and disconnector connected to line2
VB1OK
BOOLEAN
Bus1 voltage transformer OK
VB1FF
BOOLEAN
Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
VB2OK
BOOLEAN
Bus2 voltage transformer OK
VB2FF
BOOLEAN
Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
VL1OK
BOOLEAN
Line1 voltage transformer OK
VL1FF
BOOLEAN
Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
VL2OK
BOOLEAN
Line2 voltage transformer OK
VL2FF
BOOLEAN
Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN
BOOLEAN
Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH
BOOLEAN
Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC
BOOLEAN
Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG
BOOLEAN
Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE
INTEGER
Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE
INTEGER
Input for setting of manual energizing mode
Table 396:
Name
SESRSYN (25) Output signals

Type
Description
SYNOK
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK
BOOLEAN
Auto synchronism-check OK
AUTOENOK
BOOLEAN
Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK
BOOLEAN
Manual synchronism-check OK
MANENOK
BOOLEAN
Manual energizing check OK

Technical manual
753
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
754
Type
Description
TSTSYNOK
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY
BOOLEAN
Auto synchronism-check OK test output
TSTMANSY
BOOLEAN
Manual synchronism-check OK test output
TSTENOK
BOOLEAN
Energizing check OK test output
VSELFAIL
BOOLEAN
Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL
BOOLEAN
Bus1 selected
B2SEL
BOOLEAN
Bus2 selected
L1SEL
BOOLEAN
Line1 selected
L2SEL
BOOLEAN
Line2 selected
SYNPROGR
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing failed
VOKSYN
BOOLEAN
Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set limits
VDIFFSYN
BOOLEAN
Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFSYN
BOOLEAN
Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFFOK
BOOLEAN
Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
FRDERIVA
BOOLEAN
Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
VOKSC
BOOLEAN
Voltage magnitudes above set limits
VDIFFSC
BOOLEAN
Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA
BOOLEAN
Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA
BOOLEAN
Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation
FRDIFFM
BOOLEAN
Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation
PHDIFFM
BOOLEAN
Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation
INADVCLS
BOOLEAN
Inadvertent circuit breaker closing
VDIFFME
REAL
Calculated difference of voltage in p.u of set voltage

base value
FRDIFFME
REAL
Calculated difference of frequency
PHDIFFME
REAL
Calculated difference of phase angle
VBUS
REAL
Bus voltage
VLINE
REAL
Line voltage
MODEAEN
INTEGER
Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN
INTEGER
Selected mode for manual energizing
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.1.5
Table 397:
Name
Settings
SESRSYN (25) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OperationSynch
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation for synchronizing function Off/On
VHighBusSynch
50.0 - 120.0
%UBB
1.0
80.0
Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing in % of

VBaseBus
VHighLineSynch
50.0 - 120.0
%UBL
1.0
80.0
Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in % of

VBaseLine
VDiffSynch
0.02 - 0.50
pu
0.01
0.10
Voltage difference limit for synchronizing in p.u

of set voltage base value
FreqDiffMin
0.003 - 0.250
Hz
0.001
0.010
Minimum frequency difference limit for

synchronizing
FreqDiffMax
0.050 - 0.500
Hz
0.001
0.200
Maximum frequency difference limit for

synchronizing
FreqRateChange
0.000 - 0.500
Hz/s
0.001
0.300
Maximum allowed frequency rate of change
tBreaker
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.080
Closing time of the breaker
tClosePulse
0.050 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Breaker closing pulse duration
tMaxSynch
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
600.00
Resets synch if no close has been made before

set time
tMinSynch
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Minimum time to accept synchronizing

conditions
OperationSC
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation for synchronism-check function

Off/On
VHighBusSC
50.0 - 120.0
%UBB
1.0
80.0
Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck in % of

VBaseBus
VHighLineSC
50.0 - 120.0
%UBL
1.0
80.0
Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in % of

VBaseLine
VDiffSC
0.02 - 0.50
pu
0.01
0.15
Voltage difference limit for synchrocheck in p.u

of set voltage base value
FreqDiffA
0.003 - 1.000
Hz
0.001
0.010
Frequency difference limit between bus and

line Auto
FreqDiffM
0.003 - 1.000
Hz
0.001
0.010
Frequency difference limit between bus and

line Manual
PhaseDiffA
5.0 - 90.0
Deg
1.0
25.0
Phase angle difference limit between bus and

line Auto
PhaseDiffM
5.0 - 90.0
Deg
1.0
25.0
Phase angle difference limit between bus and

line Manual
tSCA
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto
tSCM
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Time delay output for manual synchrocheck
Technical manual
755
Section 14
Control
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AutoEnerg
Disabled
DLLB
DBLL
Both
DLLB
Automatic energizing check mode
ManEnerg
Disabled
DLLB
DBLL
Both
Both
Manual energizing check mode
ManEnergDBDL
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Manual dead bus, dead line energizing
VLiveBusEnerg
50.0 - 120.0
%UBB
1.0
80.0
Voltage high limit bus for energizing check in %

of VBaseBus
VLiveLineEnerg
50.0 - 120.0
%UBL
1.0
80.0
Voltage high limit line for energizing check in %

of VBaseLine
VDeadBusEnerg
10.0 - 80.0
%UBB
1.0
40.0
Voltage low limit bus for energizing check in %

of VBaseBus
VDeadLineEnerg
10.0 - 80.0
%UBL
1.0
40.0
Voltage low limit line for energizing check in %

of VBaseLine
VMaxEnerg
50.0 - 180.0
%VB
1.0
115.0
Maximum voltage for energizing in % of VBase,

Line and/or Bus
tAutoEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Time delay for automatic energizing check
tManEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Time delay for manual energizing check
Table 398:
Name
SESRSYN (25) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SelPhaseBus1
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phases AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
Positive sequence
Phase A
Select phase for busbar1
GblBaseSelBus
1 - 12

groups, Bus
GblBaseSelLine
1 - 12

groups, Line
SelPhaseBus2
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phases AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
Positive sequence
Phase A
Select phase for busbar2
756
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SelPhaseLine1
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phases AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
Positive sequence
Phase A
Select phase for line1
SelPhaseLine2
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phases AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
Positive sequence
Phase A
Select phase for line2
CBConfig
No voltage sel.
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB
No voltage sel.
Select CB configuration
Table 399:
Name
PhaseShift
14.1.6
SESRSYN (25) Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
-180 - 180
Unit
Step
Deg
Default
0
Description
Additional phase angle for selected line voltage
Monitored data
Table 400:
Name
SESRSYN (25) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VDIFFME
REAL
Calculated difference of
voltage in p.u of set voltage
base value
FRDIFFME
REAL
Hz
Calculated difference of
frequency
PHDIFFME
REAL
deg
Calculated difference of phase

angle
VBUS
REAL
kV
Bus voltage
VLINE
REAL
kV
Line voltage
Technical manual
757
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.1.7
Operation principle
14.1.7.1
Basic functionality
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits.
The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to
both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual measured
quantities match the set conditions.
The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and also
determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker,
from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all measured conditions
are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed to give closure
at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the closing circuit.
For double bus single circuit breaker and breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangements,
the SESRSYN (25) function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage
selection. For double bus single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct
voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For breaker-and-a-half
circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of
the bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.
The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the setting
parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For
application related information, please refer to the application manual.
14.1.7.2
Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN function
components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and Voltage
selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.
Synchronism check
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the synchronism check function for
evaluation. By setting the phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings SelPhaseBus1,
SelPhaseBus2, SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2, a compensation is made automatically
for the voltage amplitude difference and the phase angle difference caused if different
setting values are selected for both sides of the breaker. If needed an additional phase angle
adjustment can be done for selected line voltage with the PhaseShift setting.
758
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
When the function is set to OperationSC = Enabled, the measuring will start.
The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
VHighBusSC and VHighLineSC.
If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with the set
values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference: FreqDiffA,
FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and VDiffSC. If additional phase angle adjustment
is done with the PhaseShift setting, the adjustment factor is deducted from the line voltage
before the comparison of the phase angle values.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must
not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference between
the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the set value
FreqDiff.
Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available and
used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete SESRSYN
(25) function and selective block of the Synchronism check function respectively. Input
TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to
a separate test output.
The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be
delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.
A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions.
VOKSC shows that the voltages are high, VDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM, PHDIFFA,
PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle
difference conditions are out of limits.
Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicates that the circuit breaker
has been closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated, if the voltage
conditions are fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference between bus and line
is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to smaller than 5 degrees.
Technical manual
759
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchronism check.

OperationSC = Enabled
AND
AND
TSTAUTSY
TSTSC
BLKSC
BLOCK
AND
OR
AND
tSCA
AND
VDiffSC
AND
VHighBusSC
AUTOSYOK
0-60 ms
0
50 ms
0
VOKSC
AND
VHighLineSC
VDIFFSC
FreqDiffA
PhaseDiffA
FRDIFFA
PHDIFFA
VDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue
PhDiff > 60
AND
0
32 ms
100 ms
INADVCLS
AND
PhDiff < 5
ANSI07000114 V4 EN
Figure 346:
Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchronism function
Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch = Enabled the measuring will be performed.
The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values for
VHighBusSynch and VHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the voltages are both
live. Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the set value for
VDiffSynch, which is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both sides are higher than
the set values and the voltage difference between bus and line is acceptable, the measured
values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency FreqDiffMax and
760
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency FreqRateChange and phase angle, which has to
be smaller than the internally preset value of 15 degrees.
Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency
will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to be
sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle release
internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK output will be
activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function resets. The function will also reset if
the synchronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch time. This
prevents that the function is, by mistake, maintained in operation for a long time, waiting
for conditions to be fulfilled.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively. TSTSYNCH
will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate
output.
SYN1
OPERATION SYNCH=ON
TEST MODE=ON
STARTSYN
AND
BLKSYNCH
OR
AND
S
R
VDiffSynch
VHighBusSynch
AND
50 ms
t
SYNOK
AND
VHighLineSynch
SYNPROGR
OR
FreqDiffMax
AND
FreqDiffMin
OR
FreqRateChange
AND
TSTSYNOK
tClose
Pulse
fBus&fLine 5Hz
Phase Diff < 15 deg
tMax
Synch
AND
SYNFAIL
PhaseDiff=closing angle
FreqDiff
tBreaker
Close pulse
in advance
ANSI06000636 V3 EN
Figure 347:
Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function
Technical manual
761
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the
Synchronism check function.
The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are live
or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values VLiveBusEnerg and
VDeadBusEnerg for bus energizing and VLiveLineEnerg and VDeadLineEnerg for line
energizing.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies must
not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.
The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the Automatic
functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs AUTOENOK and
MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision conditions are fulfilled.
The output signal can be delayed independently for MANENOK and AUTOENOK
conditions. The Energizing direction can also be selected by an integer input AENMODE
respective MENMODE, which for example, can be connected to a Binary to Integer
function block (B16I). Integers supplied shall be 1=Off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both.
Not connected input will mean that the setting is done from Parameter Setting tool. The
active position can be read on outputs MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are
0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN (25) function respective block of the Energizing check function. TSTENERG
will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate
test output.
762
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
manEnergOpenBays
MANENOK
OR
TSTENERG
BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK
selectedFuseOK
VLiveBusEnerg
DLLB
AND
VDeadLineEnerg
OR
AND
OR
0 60 s
tManEnerg
0
AND
BOTH
ManEnerg
DBLL
VDeadBusEnerg
AND
VLiveLineEnerg
AND
ManEnergDBDL
AND
TSTENOK
VMaxEnerg
fBus and fLine 5 Hz
ANSI14000031 V1 EN
Figure 348:
Manual energizing
TSTENERG
BLKENERG
OR
BLOCK
selectedFuseOK
VLiveBusEnerg
DLLB
AND
OR
VDeadLineEnerg
AND
OR
0 60 s
tAutoEnerg
0
AND
AUTOENOK
BOTH
AutoEnerg
VDeadBusEnerg
DBLL
AND
VLiveLineEnerg
VMaxEnerg
AND
TSTENOK
fBus and fLine 5 Hz
ANSI14000030 V1 EN
Figure 349:
Automatic energizing
Technical manual
763
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BLKENERG
BLOCK
OR
AND
manEnergOpenBays
ManEnerg
1 bus CB
CBConfig
AND
B1QOPEN
LN1QOPEN
AND
OR
B1QCLD
B2QOPEN
AND
LN2QOPEN
1 bus alt. CB
AND
B2QCLD
AND
OR
OR
AND
Tie CB
AND
AND
OR
AND
IEC14000032 V1 EN
Figure 350:
Open bays

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected to
binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN (25) function in the IED.
Alternatively, the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when
available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must be
connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs
labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is
faulty.
The VB1OK/VB2OK and VB1FF/VB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the
VLNOK and VLNFF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them to the binary
input or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of the busbar
and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check function is blocked.
The synchronism check function requires full voltage on both sides, thus no blocking at
fuse failure is needed.
764
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformers for
the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN (25) function and determines
the voltages fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check functions.
This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and MCB
supervision.
The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.
If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be V-Line1 and V-Bus1. This setting is also
used in the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for
the used inputs must also be connected.
The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are used for the
Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs.
For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to
supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an inverter
for one of the positions.
If breaker or disconnector positions not are available for deciding if energizing is allowed,
it is considered to be allowed to manually energize. This is only allowed for manual
energizing in breaker-and-a-half and Tie breaker arrangements. Manual energization of a
completely open diameter in 1 1/2 CB switchgear is allowed by internal logic.
Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars

The setting CBConfig selected for Double Bus activates the voltage selection for single
CB and double busbars. This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors
auxiliary contacts BUS1_OP-BUS1_CL for Bus 1, and BUS2_OP-BUS2_CL for Bus 2 to
select between bus 1 and bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 1 is closed
and the disconnector connected to bus 2 is opened the bus 1 voltage is used. All other
combinations use the bus 2 voltage. The outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate
the selected Bus voltage.
The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage transformers.
Inputs VB1OK-VB1FF supervise the MCB for Bus 1 and VB2OK-VB2FF supervises the
MCB for Bus 2. VL1OK and VL1FF supervises the MCB for the Line voltage
transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used dependent on
the available signal. If a VT failure is detected in the selected voltage source an output
signal VSELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have
a VT failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal
BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure 351.
Technical manual
765
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BUS1_OP
BUS1_CL
BUS2_OP
BUS2_CL
B1SEL
AND
AND
B2SEL
NOT
AND
invalidSelection
busVoltage
bus1Voltage
bus2Voltage
VB1OK
VB1FF
OR
VB2OK
VB2FF
OR
VL1OK
VL1FF
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
selectedFuseOK
VSELFAIL
BLOCK
ANSI05000779 V2 EN
Figure 351:
Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars
Voltage selection for a breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangement

Note that with breaker-and-a-half schemes three Synchronism check functions must be
used for the complete diameter. Below, the scheme for one Bus breaker and the Tie
breaker is described.
With the setting parameter CBConfig the selection of actual CB location in the 1 1/2 circuit
breaker switchgear is done. The settings are: 1 1/2 Bus CB, 1 1/2 alt. Bus CB or Tie CB.
This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and circuit
breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN function. For the
bus circuit breaker one side of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other
side is connected either to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the best selection
of voltage circuit.
Inputs LINE1_OP-LINE1_CL, BUS1_OP-BUS1_CL, BUS2_OP-BUS2_CL,
LINE2_OP-LINE2_CL are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors respectively
the Bus and Tie breakers. The outputs L1SEL, L2SEL and B2SEL will give indication of
766
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1 voltage, which indicates
B1SEL.
The fuse supervision is connected to VL1OK-VL1FF, VL2OK-VL2FF and with
alternative Healthy or Failing fuse signals depending on what is available from each fuse
(MCB).
The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and the
other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output combinations
are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.
The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit
breaker is closed.
The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 circuit
breaker is closed.
The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a VT
failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal VSELFAIL is set. This output
signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip. This output as well as
the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function block diagram for
the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in figure 352 and for the tie circuit
breaker in figure 353.
Technical manual
767
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
LINE1_OP
LINE1_CL
L1SEL
AND
BUS1_OP
BUS1_CL
L2SEL
AND
AND
LINE2_CL
AND
invalidSelection
AND
AND
BUS2_OP
BUS2_CL
B2SEL
OR
LINE2_OP
AND
lineVoltage
line1Voltage
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
VB1OK
VB1FF
VB2OK
VB2FF
OR
OR
OR
VL1OK
VL1FF
OR
VL2OK
VL2FF
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
selectedFuseOK
VSELFAIL
AND
BLOCK
ANSI05000780 V2 EN
Figure 352:
768
Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a breaker-and-ahalf arrangement
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
LINE1_OP
LINE1_CL
L1SEL
AND
B1SEL
NOT
BUS1_OP
BUS1_CL
AND
AND
AND
line1Voltage
busVoltage
bus1Voltage
LINE2_OP
LINE2_CL
L2SEL
AND
B2SEL
NOT
BUS2_OP
BUS2_CL
AND
AND
AND
OR
invalidSelection
lineVoltage
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
VB1OK
VB1FF
OR
VB2OK
VB2FF
OR
AND
OR
VL1OK
VL1FF
OR
VL2OK
VL2FF
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
selectedFuseOK
VSELFAIL
AND
BLOCK
ANSI05000781 V2 EN
Figure 353:
Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in breaker-and-ahalf arrangement.
Technical manual
769
Section 14
Control
14.1.8
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 401:
SESRSYN (25) technical data
Function
Range or value
Phase shift, jline - jbus
Voltage high limit for synchronism

check
Accuracy
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Reset ratio, synchronism check
> 95%
Frequency difference limit

between bus and line for
synchronism check
(0.003-1.000) Hz
2.5 mHz
Phase angle difference limit

between bus and line for
synchronism check
(5.0-90.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
Voltage difference limit between

bus and line for synchronism check
(0.02-0.5) p.u
0.5% of Vn
Time delay output for synchronism

check
(0.000-60.000) s
greater
Frequency difference minimum

limit for synchronizing
(0.003-0.250) Hz
2.5 mHz
Frequency difference maximum

limit for synchronizing
(0.050-0.500) Hz
2.5 mHz
Maximum allowed frequency rate

of change
(0.000-0.500) Hz/s
10.0 mHz/s
Breaker closing pulse duration
(0.050-60.000) s
greater
tMaxSynch, which resets

synchronizing function if no close
has been made before set time
(0.000-6000.00) s
greater
Minimum time to accept

synchronizing conditions
(0.000-60.000) s
greater
Voltage high limit for energizing

check
Reset ratio, voltage high limit
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
> 95%
Voltage low limit for energizing

check
Reset ratio, voltage low limit
Maximum voltage for energizing
0.5% of Vn
< 105%
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
770
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Time delay for energizing check

when voltage jumps from 0 to 90%
of Vrated
(0.000-60.000) s

greater
Trip time for synchrocheck function

when angle difference between
bus and line jumps from
PhaseDiff + 2 degrees to
PhaseDiff - 2 degrees
Min. = 15 ms
Max. = 30 ms
Trip time for energizing function

when voltage jumps from 0 to 90%
of Vrated
Min. = 70 ms
Max. = 90 ms
14.2
Interlocking (3)
14.2.1
Functionality
The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching
devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material
damage and/or accidental human injury.
Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements, each
handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each IED is not
dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs
communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.
The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the system
at any given time.
14.2.2
Operation principle
The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED. The
function is distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication
between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.
The reservation function (see section "Functionality") is used to ensure that HV
apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises
between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication system,
reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking condition of the
intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the operation is performed.
After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on the
status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other
Technical manual
771
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices
that may affect it.
The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay. The
interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the
switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or breaker-and-a-half bays have
different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard
interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking
signals can include the following kind of information:
Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
External release (to add special conditions for release)
Line voltage (to block operation of line grounding switch)
Output signals to release the HV apparatus
The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as shown
in figure 354.
Interlocking
modules in
other bays
Interlocking
module
Apparatus control
modules
SCILO
SCSWI
SXSWI
Apparatus control
modules
SCILO
SCSWI
SXCBR
152
Apparatus control
modules
SCILO
SCSWI
SXSWI
en04000526_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000526 V1 EN
Figure 354:
Interlocking module on bay level
Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:
772
Ungrounded busbars
Busbars connected together
Other bays connected to a busbar
Received data from other bays is valid
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Figure 355 illustrates the data exchange principle.

Station bus
Bay 1
Bay n
Disc 189 and 289 closed
WA1 not grounded

WA2 not grounded
WA1 and WA2 interconn
Bus coupler
Disc 189 and 289 closed
...
..
WA1 ungrounded
WA1 ungrounded
WA1 not grounded

WA2 not grounded

in other bay
WA1
WA2
189
289
189
289
289
189
189G
289G
152
152
152
989
989
en05000494_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000494 V1 EN
Figure 355:
Data exchange between interlocking modules
When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input board error
are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for execution of the
function will not be given.
On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the interlocking
function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.
For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:
The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and grounding

switches are always identical.
Grounding switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid grounding switches,
are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where they
are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a line
voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is no line
voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set to no
voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating.
Grounding switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example, without
load/voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section, that is, the
status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the grounding switch operation is
concerned.
Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems.
Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit
breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed
connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely isolated,
Technical manual
773
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections, or if they are

grounding on both sides.
Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its bay or
additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and grounding switch on
the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB and
transformer.
Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar transfer
is in progress.
To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of standardized

and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the interlocking conditions
are available:
Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE (3)

Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC (3)
Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO (3)
Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS (3)
Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC (3)
Busbar grounding switch, BB_ES (3)
Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A(3), DB_LINE(3), DB_BUS_B(3)
Breaker-and-a-half diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B (3)
The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific requirements, by
adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM600. The
inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions.
The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the
transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in TR
are intended for transfer to other bays.
14.2.3
Logical node for interlocking SCILO (3)
14.2.3.1
Identification
Logical node for interlocking
14.2.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
SCILO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The Logical node for interlocking SCILO(3) function is used to enable a switching
operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO (3) function itself does not provide
774
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in separate

function blocks containing the interlocking logic.
14.2.3.3
Function block
SCILO (3)
POSOPEN
EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE
EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
ANSI05000359 V1 EN
Figure 356:
14.2.3.4
SCILO (3) function block
Signals
Table 402:
SCILO (3) Input signals
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN
BOOLEAN
Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN
BOOLEAN
Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled
Table 403:
SCILO (3) Output signals
Name
14.2.3.5
Default
POSOPEN
Type
Description
EN_OPEN
BOOLEAN
Open operation at closed or intermediate or bad position

is enabled
EN_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Close operation at open or intermediate or bad position

is enabled
Logic diagram
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the
interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end
position for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is
false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in
the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the interlocking function.
The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/
SXSWI) and the enable signals come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are
connected to the logical node Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching
device is needed.
Technical manual
775
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
SCILO
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
XOR
NOT
EN_OPEN
AND
OR
AND
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
AND
EN_CLOSE
OR
AND
en04000525_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000525 V1 EN
Figure 357:
SCILO (3) function logic diagram
14.2.4
Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3)
14.2.4.1
Identification
Interlocking for busbar grounding
switch
14.2.4.2
IEC 61850
identification
BB_ES
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for busbar grounding switch (BB_ES, 3) function is used for one busbar
grounding switch on any busbar parts according to figure 358.
89G
en04000504.vsd
ANSI04000504 V1 EN
Figure 358:
776
Switchyard layout BB_ES (3)
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.2.4.3
Function block
BB_ES (3)
89G_OP
89GREL
89G_CL
89GITL
BB_DC_OP
BBGSOPTR
VP_BB_DC
BBGSCLTR
EXDU_BB
ANSI05000347 V2 EN
Figure 359:
14.2.4.4
BB_ES (3) function block
Logic diagram
BB_ES
VP_BB_DC
BB_DC_OP
EXDU_BB
AND
NOT
89G_OP
89G_CL
89GREL
89GITL
BBGSOPTR
BBGSCLTR
en04000546_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000546 V1 EN
14.2.4.5
Signals
Table 404:
Name
BB_ES (3) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
89G_OP
BOOLEAN
Busbar grounding switch 89G is in open position
89G_CL
BOOLEAN
Busbar grounding switch 89G is in closed position
BB_DC_OP
BOOLEAN
All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC
BOOLEAN
Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid
EXDU_BB
BOOLEAN
No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part
Table 405:
Name
BB_ES (3) Output signals

Type
Description
89GREL
BOOLEAN
Switching of 89G is allowed
89GITL
BOOLEAN
Switching of 89G is not allowed
BBGSOPTR
BOOLEAN
89G on this busbar part is in open position
BBGSCLTR
BOOLEAN
89G on this busbar part is in closed position
Technical manual
777
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.2.5
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)
14.2.5.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Interlocking for bus-section breaker
14.2.5.2
A1A2_BS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS ,3) function is used for one bussection circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 360. The function can
be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.
WA1 (A1)
189G
WA2 (A2)
189
289
289G
152
489G
389G
A1A2_BS
en04000516_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000516 V1 EN
Figure 360:
778
Switchyard layout A1A2_BS (3)
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.2.5.3
Function block
A1A2_BS (3)
152_OP
152OPREL
152_CL
152OPITL
189_OP
152CLREL
189_CL
152CLITL
289_OP
189REL
289_CL
189ITL
389G_OP
289REL
389G_CL
289ITL
489G_OP
389GREL
489G_CL
389GITL
S189G_OP
489GREL
S189G_CL
489GITL
S289G_OP
S1S2OPTR
S289G_CL
S1S2CLTR
BBTR_OP
189OPTR
VP_BBTR
189CLTR
EXDU_12
289OPTR
EXDU_89G
289CLTR
152O_EX1
VPS1S2TR
152O_EX2
VP189TR
152O_EX3
VP289TR
189_EX1
189_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2
ANSI05000348 V2 EN
Figure 361:
A1A2_BS (3) function block
Technical manual
779
Section 14
Control
14.2.5.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
289_OP
289_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
S1189G_OP
S1189G_CL
S2289G_OP
S2289G_CL
VP189
189_OP
152O_EX1
VP289
289_OP
152O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
EXDU_12
152O_EX3
VP189
VP289
VP152
VP389G
VP489G
VPS1189G
152_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
S1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP389G
VPS1189G
389G_CL
S1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2
A1A2_BS
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VP489G
XOR
VPS1189G
XOR
VPS2289G
AND
OR
NOT
152OPREL
152OPITL
AND
AND
AND
AND
NOT
OR
NOT
152CLREL
152CLITL
189REL
189ITL
AND
en04000542_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000542 V1 EN
780
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VP152
VP389G
VP489G
VPS2289G
152_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
S2289G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP489G
VPS2289G
489G_CL
S2289G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2
VP189
VP289
189_OP
289_OP
AND
289REL
289ITL
OR
NOT
AND
AND
NOT
NOT
389GREL
389GITL
489GREL
489GITL
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
189_OP
289_OP
152_OP
VP189
VP289
VP152
OR
NOT
S1S2OPTR
S1S2CLTR
VPS1S2TR
AND
en04000543_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000543 V1 EN
14.2.5.5
Signals
Table 406:
Name
A1A2_BS (3) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152 is in open position
152_CL
BOOLEAN
152 is in closed position
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G is in open position
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
389G is in closed position
489G_OP
BOOLEAN
489G_CL
BOOLEAN
S189G_OP
BOOLEAN
S189G on bus section 1 is in open position
S189G_CL
BOOLEAN
S189G on bus section 1 is in closed position
S289G_OP
BOOLEAN

Technical manual
781
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Default
Description
S289G_CL
BOOLEAN
BBTR_OP
BOOLEAN
No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR
BOOLEAN
Status are valid for apparatuses involved in the busbar

transfer
EXDU_12
BOOLEAN
No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and

2
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
No transm error from bays containing ground sw.

S189G or S289G
152O_EX1
BOOLEAN
External open condition for apparatus 152
152O_EX2
BOOLEAN
152O_EX3
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
External condition for apparatus 189
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
Table 407:
Name
A1A2_BS (3) Output signals

Type
Description
152OPREL
BOOLEAN
Opening of 152 is allowed
152OPITL
BOOLEAN
Opening of 152 is not allowed
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
Closing of 152 is allowed
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
Closing of 152 is not allowed
189REL
BOOLEAN
Switching of 189 is allowed
189ITL
BOOLEAN
Switching of 189 is not allowed
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
389GREL
BOOLEAN
389GITL
BOOLEAN
489GREL
BOOLEAN
489GITL
BOOLEAN
S1S2OPTR
BOOLEAN
No bus section connection between bus section 1 and 2
S1S2CLTR
BOOLEAN
Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2

exists
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
782
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Description
VPS1S2TR
BOOLEAN
Status of the apparatuses between bus section 1 and 2

are valid
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
14.2.6
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3)
14.2.6.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Interlocking for bus-section

disconnector
14.2.6.2
IEC 60617
identification
A1A2_DC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC, 3) function is used for one bussection disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 362. A1A2_DC (3)
function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.
WA1 (A1)
WA2 (A2)
52
289G
189G
A1A2_DC
en04000492_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000492 V1 EN
Figure 362:
Switchyard layout A1A2_DC (3)
Technical manual
783
Section 14
Control
14.2.6.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
A1A2_DC (3)
089_OP
089OPREL
089_CL
089OPITL
S189G_OP
089CLREL
S189G_CL
089CLITL
S289G_OP
DCOPTR
S289G_CL
DCCLTR
S1DC_OP
VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BB
089C_EX1
089C_EX2
089O_EX1
089O_EX2
089O_EX3
ANSI05000349 V2 EN
Figure 363:
14.2.6.4
A1A2_DC (3) function block
Logic diagram
A1A2_DC
89_OP
89_CL
S1189G_OP
S1189G_CL
S2289G_OP
S2289G_CL
VPS1189G
VPS2289G
VPS1_DC
S1189G_OP
S2289G_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_89G
XOR
VPQB
VPDCTR
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
VPS1189G
XOR
VPS2289G
XOR
AND
OR
NOT
89OPREL
89OPITL
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1
VPS1189
VPS2289G
VPS2_DC
S1189G_OP
S2289G_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_89G
AND
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2
VPS1189G
VPS2289G
S1189G_CL
S2289G_CL
EXDU_89G
QBOP_EX3
AND
en04000544_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000544 V1 EN
784
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC04000545 V1 EN
14.2.6.5
Signals
Table 408:
Name
A1A2_DC (3) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
089_OP
BOOLEAN
089_CL
BOOLEAN
S189G_OP
BOOLEAN
S189G_CL
BOOLEAN
S289G_OP
BOOLEAN
S289G_CL
BOOLEAN
S1DC_OP
BOOLEAN
All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position
S2DC_OP
BOOLEAN
All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position
VPS1_DC
BOOLEAN
Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid
VPS2_DC
BOOLEAN
Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
No transm error from bays containing ground sw.

S189G or S289G
EXDU_BB
BOOLEAN
No transm error from bays with disc conn to section 1

and 2
089C_EX1
BOOLEAN
External close condition for section disconnector 089
089C_EX2
BOOLEAN
External close condition for section disconnector 089
089O_EX1
BOOLEAN
External open condition for section disconnector 089
089O_EX2
BOOLEAN
089O_EX3
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
785
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 409:
A1A2_DC (3) Output signals
Name
Type
Description
089OPREL
BOOLEAN
089OPITL
BOOLEAN
089CLREL
BOOLEAN
089CLITL
BOOLEAN
DCOPTR
BOOLEAN
The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR
BOOLEAN
The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR
BOOLEAN
14.2.7
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3)
14.2.7.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay
14.2.7.2
ABC_BC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC, 3) function is used for a bus-coupler bay
connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 364. The function can also
be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar
arrangement without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
189
289
189G
2089
789
152
289G
en04000514_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000514 V1 EN
Figure 364:
786
Switchyard layout ABC_BC (3)

Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.2.7.3
Function block
ABC_BC (3)
152_OP
152OPREL
152_CL
152OPITL
189_OP
152CLREL
189_CL
152CLITL
289_OP
189REL
289_CL
189ITL
789_OP
289REL
789_CL
289ITL
2089_OP
789REL
2089_CL
789ITL
189G_OP
2089REL
189G_CL
2089ITL
289G_OP
189GREL
289G_CL
189GITL
1189G_OP
289GREL
1189G_CL
289GITL
2189G_OP
189OPTR
2189G_CL
189CLTR
7189G_OP
22089OTR
7189G_CL
22089CTR
BBTR_OP
789OPTR
BC_12_CL
789CLTR
VP_BBTR
1289OPTR
VP_BC_12
1289CLTR
EXDU_89G
BC12OPTR
EXDU_12
BC12CLTR
EXDU_BC
BC17OPTR
152O_EX1
BC17CLTR
152O_EX2
BC27OPTR
152O_EX3
BC27CLTR
189_EX1
VP189TR
189_EX2
V22089TR
189_EX3
VP789TR
289_EX1
VP1289TR
289_EX2
VPBC12TR
289_EX3
VPBC17TR
2089_EX1
VPBC27TR
2089_EX2
789_EX1
789_EX2
ANSI05000350 V2 EN
Figure 365:
ABC_BC (3) function block
Technical manual
787
Section 14
Control
14.2.7.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
2089_OP
2089_CL
789_OP
789_CL
289_OP
289_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
7189G_OP
7189G_CL
VP189
189_OP
152O_EX1
VP2089
2089_OP
152O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
EXDU_12
ABC_BC
VP152
XOR
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP2089
XOR
VP789
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP1189G
XOR
VP2189G
XOR
VP7189G
AND
152OPREL
152OPITL
OR
NOT
AND
AND
152O_EX3
VP189
VP289
VP789
VP2089
AND
NOT
152CLREL
152CLITL
en04000533_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000533 V1 EN
VP152
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP289
VP_BC_12
289_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX3
AND
OR
NOT
189REL
189ITL
AND
AND
en04000534_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000534 V1 EN
788
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VP152
VP189
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189
VP_BC_12
189_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
289_EX2
VP189G
VP2189G
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX3
AND
OR
NOT
289REL
289ITL
AND
AND
en04000535_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000535 V1 EN
VP152
VP2089
VP189G
VP289G
VP7189G
152_OP
2089_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
789_EX1
VP289G
VP7189G
289G_CL
7189G_CL
EXDU_89G
789_EX2
VP152
VP789
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
789_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
2089_EX1
VP289G
VP2189G
289G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
2089_EX2
AND
789REL
OR
NOT
789ITL
AND
AND
2089REL
OR
NOT
2089ITL
AND
en04000536_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000536 V1 EN
Technical manual
789
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VP189
VP2089
VP789
VP289
189_OP
2089_OP
789_OP
289_OP
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
2089_OP
289_OP
VP2089
VP289
789_OP
789_CL
VP789
189_OP
289_OP
VP189
VP289
152_OP
189_OP
2089_OP
VP152
VP189
VP2089
152_OP
189_OP
789_OP
VP152
VP189
VP789
152_OP
289_OP
789_OP
VP152
VP289
VP789
AND
NOT
NOT
AND
NOT
AND
OR
NOT
AND
OR
NOT
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
22089OTR
22089CTR
V22089TR
789OPTR
789CLTR
VP789TR
1289OPTR
1289CLTR
VP1289TR
BC12OPTR
BC12CLTR
VPBC12TR
AND
OR
NOT
BC17OPTR
BC17CLTR
VPBC17TR
AND
OR
NOT
BC27OPTR
BC27CLTR
VPBC27TR
AND
en04000537_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000537 V1 EN
14.2.7.5
Signals
Table 410:
Name
ABC_BC (3) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
789_OP
BOOLEAN
789_CL
BOOLEAN
2089_OP
BOOLEAN
2089_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
790
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Default
Description
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN
Grounding switch 1189G on busbar 1 is in open position
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN
Grounding switch 1189G on busbar 1 is in closed

position
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN

position
7189G_OP
BOOLEAN
7189G_CL
BOOLEAN

position
BBTR_OP
BOOLEAN
No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL
BOOLEAN
A bus coupler connection exists between busbar Bus1

and Bus2
VP_BBTR
BOOLEAN
Status are valid for apparatuses involved in the busbar

transfer
VP_BC_12
BOOLEAN
Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between Bus1

and Bus2 are valid
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
No transm error from any bay containing grounding

switches
EXDU_12
BOOLEAN
No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/WA2

busbars
EXDU_BC
BOOLEAN
No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay
152O_EX1
BOOLEAN
152O_EX2
BOOLEAN
152O_EX3
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX3
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX3
BOOLEAN
2089_EX1
BOOLEAN
2089_EX2
BOOLEAN
789_EX1
BOOLEAN
789_EX2
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
791
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 411:
Name
ABC_BC (3) Output signals

Type
Description
152OPREL
BOOLEAN
152OPITL
BOOLEAN
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
789REL
BOOLEAN
789ITL
BOOLEAN
2089REL
BOOLEAN
2089ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
22089OTR
BOOLEAN
289 and 2089 are in open position
22089CTR
BOOLEAN
289 or 2089 or both are not in open position
789OPTR
BOOLEAN
789CLTR
BOOLEAN
1289OPTR
BOOLEAN
189 or 289 or both are in open position
1289CLTR
BOOLEAN
189 and 289 are not in open position
BC12OPTR
BOOLEAN
No connection via the own bus coupler between Bus1

and Bus2
BC12CLTR
BOOLEAN
Connection exists via the own bus coupler between

Bus1 and Bus2
BC17OPTR
BOOLEAN
No connection via the own bus coupler between Bus1

and Bus 7
BC17CLTR
BOOLEAN

Bus1 and Bus7
BC27OPTR
BOOLEAN
No connection via the own bus coupler between Bus 2

and bus 7
BC27CLTR
BOOLEAN

Bus2 and Bus7
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
792
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Description
V22089TR
BOOLEAN
Switch status of 289 and 2089 are valid (open or closed)
VP789TR
BOOLEAN
VP1289TR
BOOLEAN
VPBC12TR
BOOLEAN

and Bus2 are valid
VPBC17TR
BOOLEAN
Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7

are valid
VPBC27TR
BOOLEAN

are valid
14.2.8
Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)
14.2.8.1
Identification
14.2.8.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half

diameter
BH_CONN

diameter
BH_LINE_A

diameter
BH_LINE_B
Functionality
The interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter (BH_CONN(3), BH_LINE_A(3),
BH_LINE_B(3)) functions are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half diameter
according to figure 366.
Technical manual
793
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189
289
189G
189G
152
152
289G
289G
689
689
389G
BH_LINE_A
389G
6189
152
BH_LINE_B
6289
989
989
189G
289G
989G
989G
BH_CONN
en04000513_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000513 V1 EN
Figure 366:
Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A (3) and
BH_LINE_B (3) are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN (3) is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker-and-a-half switchyard
layout.
794
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.2.8.3
Function blocks
BH_LINE_A (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
689_OP
689REL
689_CL
689ITL
189_OP
189REL
189_CL
189ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389G_OP
389GREL
389G_CL
389GITL
989_OP
989REL
989_CL
989ITL
989G_OP
989GREL
989G_CL
989GITL
C152_OP
189OPTR
C152_CL
189CLTR
C6189_OP
VP189TR
C6189_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_89G
689_EX1
689_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989_EX6
989_EX7
ANSI05000352 V2 EN
Figure 367:
BH_LINE_A (3) function block
Technical manual
795
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BH_LINE_B (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
689_OP
689REL
689_CL
689ITL
289_OP
289REL
289_CL
289ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389G_OP
389GREL
389G_CL
389GITL
989_OP
989REL
989_CL
989ITL
989G_OP
989GREL
989G_CL
989GITL
C152_OP
289OPTR
C152_CL
289CLTR
C6289_OP
VP289TR
C6289_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_89G
689_EX1
689_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989_EX6
989_EX7
ANSI05000353 V2 EN
Figure 368:
BH_LINE_B (3) function block
BH_CONN (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
6189_OP
6189REL
6189_CL
6189ITL
6289_OP
6289REL
6289_CL
6289ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
1389G_OP
1389G_CL
2389G_OP
2389G_CL
6189_EX1
6189_EX2
6289_EX1
6289_EX2
ANSI05000351 V2 EN
Figure 369:
796
BH_CONN (3) function block

Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.2.8.4
Logic diagrams
152_OP
152_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
1389G_OP
1389G_CL
2389G_OP
2389G_CL
VP6189
VP6289
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP1389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1389G_OP
6189_EX1
VP189G
VP1389G
189G_CL
1389G_CL
6189_EX2
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP2389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2389G_OP
6289_EX1
VP289G
VP2389G
289G_CL
2389G_CL
6289_EX2
VP6189
VP6289
6189_OP
6289_OP
BH_CONN
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP6189
XOR
VP6289
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP1389G
VP2389G
152CLREL
152CLITL
NOT
XOR
AND
AND
OR
NOT
6189REL
61891ITL
AND
AND
OR
NOT
6289REL
6289ITL
AND
AND
NOT
NOT
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
en04000560_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000560 V1 EN
Technical manual
797
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
689_OP
689_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
C152_OP
C152_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
C6189_OP
C6189_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP189
VP689
VP989
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
689_EX1
VP289G
VP389G
289G_CL
389G_CL
689_EX2
BH_LINE_A
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP689
XOR
VP989G
XOR
VP989
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VPC152
XOR
VPC189G
XOR
VPC289G
XOR
VPC6189
XOR
VP1189G
XOR
AND
AND
NOT
OR
NOT
VPVOLT
152CLREL
152CLITL
689REL
689ITL
AND
en04000554_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000554 V1 EN
798
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2
VP189
VP689
189_OP
689_OP
VP689
VP989
VPC6189
689_OP
989_OP
C6189_OP
VP152
VP689
VP989G
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VPC152
VPC6189
VPC189G
VPC289G
989_EX1
689_OP
989_EX2
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
989_EX3
AND
189REL
189ITL
OR
NOT
AND
AND
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
NOT
NOT
389GREL
389GITL
AND
NOT
AND
OR
NOT
989REL
989ITL
OR
AND
en04000555_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000555 V1 EN
C6189_OP
989_EX4
C152_OP
C189G_OP
C289G_OP
989_EX5
989G_OP
389G_OP
989_EX6
VP989G
VP389G
989G_CL
389G_CL
989_EX7
VP989
VPVOLT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
NOT
989GREL
989GITL
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
en04000556_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000556 V1 EN
Technical manual
799
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
152_OP
152_CL
289_OP
289_CL
689_OP
689_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
C152_OP
C152_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
C6289_OP
C6289_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP289
VP689
VP989
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
689_EX1
VP289G
VP389G
289G_CL
389G_CL
689_EX2
BH_LINE_B
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP689
XOR
VP989G
XOR
VP989
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VPC152
XOR
VPC189G
XOR
VPC289G
XOR
VPC6289
XOR
VP2189G
XOR
VPVOLT
152CLREL
152CLITL
AND
AND
NOT
OR
NOT
689REL
689ITL
AND
en04000557_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000557 V1 EN
800
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189G
VP2189G
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2
VP289
VP689
289_OP
689_OP
VP689
VP989
VPC6289
689_OP
989_OP
C6289_OP
VP152
VP689
VP989G
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VPC152
VPC6289
VPC189G
VPC289G
989_EX1
689_OP
989_EX2
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
989_EX3
289REL
OR
AND
289ITL
NOT
AND
AND
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
NOT
NOT
389GREL
389GITL
AND
NOT
989REL
AND
OR
NOT
989ITL
OR
AND
en04000558_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000558 V1 EN
C6289_OP
989_EX4
C152_OP
C189G_OP
C289G_OP
989_EX5
989G_OP
389G_OP
989_EX6
VP989G
VP389G
989G_CL
389G_CL
989_EX7
VP989
VPVOLT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
NOT
989GREL
989GITL
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
en04000559_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000559 V1 EN
Technical manual
801
Section 14
Control
14.2.8.5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 412:
Name
BH_LINE_A (3) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
689_OP
BOOLEAN
689_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
989_OP
BOOLEAN
989_CL
BOOLEAN
989G_OP
BOOLEAN
989G_CL
BOOLEAN
C152_OP
BOOLEAN
152 in module BH_CONN is in open position
C152_CL
BOOLEAN
152 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
C6189_OP
BOOLEAN
C6189_CL
BOOLEAN
C189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G in module BH_CONN is in open position
C189G_CL
BOOLEAN
189G in module BH_CONN is in closed position
C289G_OP
BOOLEAN
C289G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN

position
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN
There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
No transm error from bay containing grounding switch

1189G
689_EX1
BOOLEAN
External condition for disconnector 689
689_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
802
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Default
Description
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
989_EX1
BOOLEAN
989_EX2
BOOLEAN
989_EX3
BOOLEAN
989_EX4
BOOLEAN
989_EX5
BOOLEAN
989_EX6
BOOLEAN
989_EX7
BOOLEAN
Table 413:
Name
BH_LINE_A (3) Output signals

Type
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
689REL
BOOLEAN
689ITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
389GREL
BOOLEAN
389GITL
BOOLEAN
989REL
BOOLEAN
989ITL
BOOLEAN
989GREL
BOOLEAN
989GITL
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
803
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 414:
Name
BH_LINE_B (3) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
689_OP
BOOLEAN
689_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
989_OP
BOOLEAN
989_CL
BOOLEAN
989G_OP
BOOLEAN
989G_CL
BOOLEAN
C152_OP
BOOLEAN
C152_CL
BOOLEAN
C6289_OP
BOOLEAN
C6289_CL
BOOLEAN
C189G_OP
BOOLEAN
C189G_CL
BOOLEAN
C289G_OP
BOOLEAN
C289G_CL
BOOLEAN
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN

position
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN

2189G
689_EX1
BOOLEAN
689_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
989_EX1
BOOLEAN

804
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Default
Description
989_EX2
BOOLEAN
989_EX3
BOOLEAN
989_EX4
BOOLEAN
989_EX5
BOOLEAN
989_EX6
BOOLEAN
989_EX7
BOOLEAN
Table 415:
Name
BH_LINE_B (3) Output signals

Type
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
689REL
BOOLEAN
689ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
389GREL
BOOLEAN
389GITL
BOOLEAN
989REL
BOOLEAN
989ITL
BOOLEAN
989GREL
BOOLEAN
989GITL
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
Table 416:
Name
BH_CONN (3) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
6189_OP
BOOLEAN
6189_CL
BOOLEAN

Technical manual
805
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Description
6289_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
1389G_OP
BOOLEAN
1389G on line 1 is in open position
1389G_CL
BOOLEAN
1389G on line 1 is in closed position
2389G_OP
BOOLEAN
2389G on line 2 is in open position
2389G_CL
BOOLEAN
2389G on line 2 is in closed position
6189_EX1
BOOLEAN
6189_EX2
BOOLEAN
6289_EX1
BOOLEAN
6289_EX2
BOOLEAN
Name
806
Default
BOOLEAN
Table 417:
14.2.9
Type
6289_OP
BH_CONN (3) Output signals

Type
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
6189REL
BOOLEAN
6189ITL
BOOLEAN
6289REL
BOOLEAN
6289ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3)
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.2.9.1
Identification
14.2.9.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Interlocking for double CB bay
DB_BUS_A
DB_BUS_B
DB_LINE
Functionality
The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including DB_BUS_A
(3), DB_BUS_B (3) and DB_LINE (3) functions are used for a line connected to a double
busbar arrangement according to figure 370.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189
DB_BUS_A
289
189G
489G
DB_BUS_B
252
152
589G
289G
6189
6289
389G
DB_LINE
989
989G
en04000518_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000518 V1 EN
Figure 370:
Switchyard layout double circuit breaker
Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_BUS_A (3) handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and the
disconnectors and grounding switches of this section. DB_BUS_B (3) handles the circuit
breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and grounding
switches of this section.
Technical manual
807
Section 14
Control
14.2.9.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Logic diagrams
152_OP
152_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
189_OP
189_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
VP6189
VP189
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
6189_EX1
VP289G
VP389G
289G_CL
389G_CL
6189_EX2
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2
DB_BUS_A
VP152
XOR
XOR
VP6189
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP389G
XOR
NOT
VP1189G
152CLREL
152CLITL
NOT
6189REL
6189ITL
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
OR
NOT
189REL
189ITL
AND
en04000547_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000547 V1 EN
VP6189
VP189
6189_OP
189_OP
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
AND
NOT
NOT
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
en04000548_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000548 V1 EN
808
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
252_OP
252_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
289_OP
289_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
589G_OP
589G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VP6289
VP289
VP252
VP489G
VP589G
VP389G
252_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
389G_OP
6289_EX1
VP589G
VP389G
589G_CL
389G_CL
6289_EX2
VP252
VP489G
VP589G
VP2189G
252_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP489G
VP2189G
489G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2
DB_BUS_B
XOR
VP252
XOR
VP6289
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP489G
XOR
VP589G
VP389G
XOR
XOR
AND
AND
NOT
OR
NOT
VP2189G
252CLREL
252CLITL
6289REL
6289ITL
AND
AND
OR
NOT
289REL
289ITL
AND
en04000552_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000552 V1 EN
VP6289
VP289
6289_OP
289_OP
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
AND
NOT
NOT
489GREL
489GITL
589GREL
589GITL
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
en04000553_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000553 V1 EN
Technical manual
809
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
152_OP
152_CL
252_OP
252_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
589G_OP
589G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP152
VP252
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP489G
VP589G
VP989G
152_OP
252_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX1
DB_LINE
VP152
XOR
XOR
VP252
XOR
VP6189
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP6289
XOR
VP489G
XOR
VP589G
XOR
VP989
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VP989G
VPVOLT
XOR
AND
OR
NOT
989REL
989ITL
AND
en04000549_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000549 V1 EN
810
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP989G
VP6289
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
989G_OP
6289_OP
989_EX2
VP252
VP6189
VP389G
VP489G
VP589G
VP989G
252_OP
6189_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX3
VP389G
VP989G
VP6189
VP6289
389G_OP
989G_OP
6189_OP
6289_OP
989_EX4
VP389G
VP989G
389G_CL
989G_CL
989_EX5
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
en04000550_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000550 V1 EN
VP6189
VP6289
VP989
6189_OP
6289_OP
989_OP
VP989
VPVOLT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
NOT
389GREL
389GITL
NOT
989GREL
989GITL
AND
AND
en04000551_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000551 V1 EN
Technical manual
811
Section 14
Control
14.2.9.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
DB_BUS_A (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
189_OP
6189REL
189_CL
6189ITL
6189_OP
189REL
6189_CL
189ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389G_OP
189OPTR
389G_CL
189CLTR
1189G_OP
VP189TR
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
6189_EX1
6189_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
ANSI05000354 V2 EN
Figure 371:
DB_BUS_A (3) function block
DB_LINE (3)
152_OP
152_CL
252_OP
252_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
589G_OP
589G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989REL
989ITL
389GREL
389GITL
989GREL
989GITL
ANSI05000356 V2 EN
Figure 372:
812
DB_LINE (3) function block
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
DB_BUS_B (3)
252_OP
252CLREL
252_CL
252CLITL
289_OP
6289REL
289_CL
6289ITL
6289_OP
289REL
6289_CL
289ITL
489G_OP
489GREL
489G_CL
489GITL
589G_OP
589GREL
589G_CL
589GITL
389G_OP
289OPTR
389G_CL
289CLTR
2189G_OP
VP289TR
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
6289_EX1
6289_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2
ANSI05000355 V2 EN
Figure 373:
14.2.9.5
DB_BUS_B (3) function block
Signals
Table 418:
Name
DB_BUS_A (3) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
6189_OP
BOOLEAN
6189_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN

position
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN

1189G
6189_EX1
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
813
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Default
Description
6189_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
Table 419:
Name
DB_BUS_A (3) Output signals

Type
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
6189REL
BOOLEAN
6189ITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
Table 420:
Name
DB_BUS_B (3) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
252_OP
BOOLEAN
252_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
6289_OP
BOOLEAN
6289_CL
BOOLEAN
489G_OP
BOOLEAN
489G_CL
BOOLEAN
589G_OP
BOOLEAN
589G_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN

814
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Default
Description
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN

position
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN

2189G
6289_EX1
BOOLEAN
6289_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
Table 421:
Name
DB_BUS_B (3) Output signals

Type
Description
252CLREL
BOOLEAN
252CLITL
BOOLEAN
6289REL
BOOLEAN
6289ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
489GREL
BOOLEAN
489GITL
BOOLEAN
589GREL
BOOLEAN
589GITL
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
Table 422:
Name
DB_LINE (3) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
252_OP
BOOLEAN
252_CL
BOOLEAN
6189_OP
BOOLEAN
6189_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN

Technical manual
815
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Description
6289_OP
BOOLEAN
6289_CL
BOOLEAN
489G_OP
BOOLEAN
489G_CL
BOOLEAN
589G_OP
BOOLEAN
589G_CL
BOOLEAN
989_OP
BOOLEAN
989_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
989G_OP
BOOLEAN
989G_CL
BOOLEAN
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN
989_EX1
BOOLEAN
989_EX2
BOOLEAN
989_EX3
BOOLEAN
989_EX4
BOOLEAN
989_EX5
BOOLEAN
Name
816
Default
BOOLEAN
Table 423:
14.2.10
Type
289G_CL
DB_LINE (3) Output signals

Type
Description
989REL
BOOLEAN
989ITL
BOOLEAN
389GREL
BOOLEAN
389GITL
BOOLEAN
989GREL
BOOLEAN
989GITL
BOOLEAN
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.2.10.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Interlocking for line bay
14.2.10.2
ABC_LINE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function is used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 374. The function
can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single
busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
189
289
189G
789
152
289G
989
989G
en04000478_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000478 V1 EN
Figure 374:
Switchyard layout ABC_LINE (3)
Technical manual
817
Section 14
Control
14.2.10.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
ABC_LINE (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
989_OP
989REL
989_CL
989ITL
189_OP
189REL
189_CL
189ITL
289_OP
289REL
289_CL
289ITL
789_OP
789REL
789_CL
789ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
989G_OP
989GREL
989G_CL
989GITL
1189G_OP
189OPTR
1189G_CL
189CLTR
2189G_OP
289OPTR
2189G_CL
289CLTR
7189G_OP
789OPTR
7189G_CL
789CLTR
BB7_D_OP
1289OPTR
BC_12_CL
1289CLTR
BC_17_OP
VP189TR
BC_17_CL
VP289TR
BC_27_OP
VP789TR
BC_27_CL
VP1289TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
989_EX1
989_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
189_EX3
289_EX1
289_EX2
289_EX3
789_EX1
789_EX2
789_EX3
789_EX4
ANSI05000357 V2 EN
Figure 375:
818
ABC_LINE (3) function block
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.2.10.4
Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
989_OP
989_CL
189_OP
189_CL
289_OP
289_CL
789_OP
789_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
7189G_OP
7189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP989G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX1
VP289G
VP989G
289G_CL
989G_CL
989_EX2
ABC_LINE
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP989
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP789
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP989G
XOR
VP1189G
XOR
VP2189G
XOR
VP7189G
XOR
VPVOLT
AND
AND
OR
NOT
NOT
152CLREL
152CLITL
989REL
989ITL
AND
en04000527_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000527 V1 EN
Technical manual
819
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VP152
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
AND
VP289
AND
189REL
OR
NOT
189ITL
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP_BC_12
289_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
AND
189EX3
en04000528_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000528 V1 EN
820
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VP152
VP189
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
AND
VP189
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
AND
289REL
OR
NOT
289ITL
289_EX1
289_EX2
VP189G
VP2189G
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
AND
289_EX3
en04000529_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000529 V1 EN
Technical manual
821
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VP989G
VP7189G
AND
VP_BB7_D
789REL
OR
NOT
VP_BC_17
789ITL
VP_BC_27
989G_OP
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
789_EX1
VP152
VP189
VP989G
VP989
VP7189G
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
152_CL
189_CL
989G_OP
989_CL
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
AND
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL
EXDU_BC
789_EX2
en04000530_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000530 V1 EN
822
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VP152
VP289
VP989G
VP989
VP7189G
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
152_CL
289_CL
989G_OP
989_CL
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
AND
OR
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
789_EX3
VP989G
VP7189G
989G_CL
7189G_CL
EXDU_89G
789_EX4
VP189
VP289
VP989
189_OP
289_OP
989_OP
VP789
VP989
VPVOLT
789_OP
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
AND
AND
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
NOT
NOT
989GREL
989GITL
AND
NOT
en04000531_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000531 V1 EN
Technical manual
823
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
789_OP
789_CL
VP789
789OPTR
789CLTR
VP789TR
189_OP
289_OP
VP189
VP289
OR
NOT
AND
1289OPTR
1289CLTR
VP1289TR
en04000532_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000532 V1 EN
14.2.10.5
Signals
Table 424:
Name
ABC_LINE (3) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
989_OP
BOOLEAN
989_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
789_OP
BOOLEAN
789_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
989G_OP
BOOLEAN
989G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN

824
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Default
Description
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN

position
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN

position
7189G_OP
BOOLEAN
7189G_CL
BOOLEAN

position
BB7_D_OP
BOOLEAN
Disconnectors on busbar bus7 except in the own bay

are open
BC_12_CL
BOOLEAN

and Bus2
BC_17_OP
BOOLEAN
No bus coupler connection exists between busbar 1 and

Bus 7
BC_17_CL
BOOLEAN

and Bus7
BC_27_OP
BOOLEAN
No bus coupler connection exists between busbar 2 and

Bus 7
BC_27_CL
BOOLEAN

and Bus7
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN
VP_BB7_D
BOOLEAN
Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are

valid
VP_BC_12
BOOLEAN

and Bus2 are valid
VP_BC_17
BOOLEAN

are valid
VP_BC_27
BOOLEAN

are valid
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN

switches
EXDU_BPB
BOOLEAN
No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on

WA7
EXDU_BC
BOOLEAN
No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
989_EX1
BOOLEAN
989_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX3
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN

Technical manual
825
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
789_EX1
BOOLEAN
789_EX2
BOOLEAN
789_EX3
BOOLEAN
789_EX4
BOOLEAN
Table 425:
Name
826
Type
289_EX3
ABC_LINE (3) Output signals

Type
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
989REL
BOOLEAN
989ITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
789REL
BOOLEAN
789ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
989GREL
BOOLEAN
989GITL
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
789OPTR
BOOLEAN
789CLTR
BOOLEAN
1289OPTR
BOOLEAN
1289CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
VP789TR
BOOLEAN
VP1289TR
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.2.11
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)
14.2.11.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Interlocking for transformer bay
14.2.11.2
AB_TRAFO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO, 3) function is used for a transformer
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 376. The function is
used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise,
the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function can be used. This function can also
be used in single busbar arrangements.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189
289
189G
AB_TRAFO
152
289G
389G
252
489G
389
252 and 489G are not

used in this interlocking
489
en04000515_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000515 V1 EN
Figure 376:
Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO (3)
Technical manual
827
Section 14
Control
14.2.11.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
AB_TRAFO (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
189_OP
189REL
189_CL
189ITL
289_OP
289REL
289_CL
289ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389_OP
189OPTR
389_CL
189CLTR
489_OP
289OPTR
489_CL
289CLTR
389G_OP
1289OPTR
389G_CL
1289CLTR
1189G_OP
VP189TR
1189G_CL
VP289TR
2189G_OP
VP1289TR
2189G_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BC
152_EX1
152_EX2
152_EX3
189_EX1
189_EX2
189_EX3
289_EX1
289_EX2
289_EX3
ANSI05000358 V2 EN
Figure 377:
828
AB_TRAFO (3) function block
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.2.11.4
Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
289_OP
289_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389_OP
389_CL
489_OP
489_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VP189
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP389
VP489
VP389G
152_EX2
389G_OP
152_EX3
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
152_EX1
AB_TRAFO
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP389
XOR
VP489
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VP1189G
XOR
VP2189G
152CLREL
152CLITL
AND
NOT
OR
AND
en04000538_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000538 V1 EN
Technical manual
829
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VP152
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP289
VP389G
VP_BC_12
289_CL
389G_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP1189G
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX3
AND
189REL
OR
NOT
189ITL
AND
AND
en04000539_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000539 V1 EN
VP152
VP189
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189
VP389G
VP_BC_12
189_CL
389G_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
289_EX2
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP2189G
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX3
AND
OR
NOT
252REL
252ITL
AND
AND
en04000540_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000540 V1 EN
830
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VP189
VP289
VP389
VP489
189_OP
289_OP
389_OP
489_OP
AND
NOT
NOT
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
189_OP
289_OP
VP189
VP289
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
1289OPTR
1289CLTR
VP1289TR
OR
NOT
AND
en04000541_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000541 V1 EN
14.2.11.5
Signals
Table 426:
Name
AB_TRAFO (3) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
389_OP
BOOLEAN
389_CL
BOOLEAN
489_OP
BOOLEAN
489_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN
1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN
2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN
2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position
BC_12_CL
BOOLEAN

and Bus2

Technical manual
831
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Default
Description
BOOLEAN

and Bus2 are valid
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN

switches
EXDU_BC
BOOLEAN
No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
152_EX1
BOOLEAN
External condition for breaker 152
152_EX2
BOOLEAN
152_EX3
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX3
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX3
BOOLEAN
Table 427:
Name
832
Type
VP_BC_12
AB_TRAFO (3) Output signals

Type
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
1289OPTR
BOOLEAN
1289CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
VP1289TR
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.2.12
Position evaluation POS_EVAL
14.2.12.1
Identification
14.2.12.2
IEC 61850
identification
Position evaluation
POS_EVAL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS or
CLOSEPOS.
The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.
14.2.12.3
Function block
POSITION
POS_EVAL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
IEC09000079 V1 EN
Figure 378:
14.2.12.4
POS_EVAL function block
Logic diagram
Position including quality
POSITION
POS_EVAL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
Open/close position of
switch device
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN
Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not
used.
Input position (Value)
Signal quality
Output OPENPOS
Output CLOSEPOS
0 (Breaker intermediate)
Good
1 (Breaker open)
Good
2 (Breaker closed)
Good
3 (Breaker faulty)
Good
Any
Invalid
Any
Oscillatory
Technical manual
833
Section 14
Control
14.2.12.5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 428:
POS_EVAL Input signals
Name
Type
POSITION
Table 429:
INTEGER
Default
0
Description
Position status including quality
POS_EVAL Output signals
Name
Type
Description
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
Open position
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
Close position
14.3
Apparatus control APC
14.3.1
Functionality
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit breakers,
disconnectors and grounding switches within a bay. Permission to trip is given after
evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchronism check,
operator place selection and external or internal blockings.
Apparatus control features:
Select-Execute principle to give high reliability

Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation
Selection and supervision of operator place
Command supervision
Block/deblock of operation
Block/deblock of updating of position indications
Substitution of position and quality indications
Overriding of interlocking functions
Overriding of synchrocheck
Operation counter
Suppression of mid position
Two types of command models can be used:
834
Direct with normal security

SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is
not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command is evaluated with an
additional supervision of the status value of the control object. The command sequence
with enhanced security is always terminated by a CommandTermination service primitive
and an AddCause telling if the command was successful or if something went wrong.
Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with authority control if so
defined.
14.3.2
Operation principle
A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor bank.
The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the apparatus
control functions directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences.
Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation
Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function block that handles the
interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process
information used by higher-level control functions.
Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised by
one function block (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals used for the
control of a breaker respectively a disconnector are almost the same, the same function
block type is used to handle these two types of apparatuses.
The SCSWI function block is connected either to an SXCBR function block (for circuit
breakers) or to an SXSWI function block (for disconnectors and grounding switches). The
physical process in the switchyard is connected to these two function blocks via binary
inputs and outputs.
Four types of function blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision
within the bay. These function blocks are interconnected to form a control function
reflecting the switchyard configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard
configuration. These four types are:
Bay control QCBAY

Switch controller SCSWI
Circuit breaker SXCBR
Circuit switch SXSWI
The functions Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control (LOCREMCTRL),
to handle the local/remote switch, and the functions Bay reserve (QCRSV) and
Reservation input (RESIN), for the reservation function, also belong to the apparatus
control function. The principles of operation, function blocks, input and output signals and
setting parameters for all these functions are described below.
Technical manual
835
Section 14
Control
14.3.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Error handling
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will be
set with a value. Table 430 describes the cause values given on local HMI. The translation
to AddCause values specified in IEC 61850-8-1 is shown in Table 431. For IEC 61850-8-1
edition 2 only addcauses defined in the standard are used, for edition 1 also a number of
vendor specific causes are used. The values are available in the command response to
commands from IEC61850-8-1 clients. An output L_CAUSE on the function block for
Switch controller (SCSWI), Circuit breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI)
indicates the value of the cause during the latest command.
Table 430:
Values for "cause" signal
Cause
number
Name
Description
Supported
None
Control action successfully executed
Not-supported
Given for Cancel request with Direct Control in Ready state
Blocked-byswitching-hierarchy
Not successful since one of the downstream Loc switches

like in CSWI has the value TRUE
Select-failed
Cancelled due to an unsuccessful selection (select service)
Invalid-position
Control action is aborted due to invalid switch position (Pos

in XCBR or XSWI)
Position-reached
Switch is already in the intended position (Pos in XCBR or

XSWI)
Parameter-changein-execution
Control action is blocked due to running parameter change
Step-limit
Control action is blocked, because tap changer has

reached the limit (EndPosR or EndPosL in YLTC)
Blocked-by-Mode
Control action is blocked, because the LN (CSWI or XCBR/

XSWI)is in a mode (Mod) which doesnt allow any switching
Blocked-by-process
Control action is blocked due to some external event at

process level that prevents a successful operation, for
example blocking indication (EEHealth in XCBR or XSWI)
10
Blocked-byinterlocking
Control action is blocked due to interlocking of switching

devices (in CILO attribute EnaOpn.stVal=FALSE or
EnaCls.stVal=FALSE
11
Blocked-bysynchrocheck
Control action with synchrocheck is aborted due to exceed

of time limit and missing synchronism condition
12
Command-alreadyin-execution
Control, select or cancel service is rejected, because

control action is already running
13
Blocked-by-health
Control action is blocked due to some internal event that

prevents a successful operation (Health)
14
1-of-n-control
Control action is blocked, because another control action in

a domain (for example substation) is already running (in
any XCBR or XSWI of that domain, the
DPC.stSeld=TRUE)
15
Abortion-by-cancel
Control action is aborted due to cancel service

836
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Cause
number
Name
Description
Supported
16
Time-limit-over
Control action is terminated due to exceed of some time

limit
17
Abortion-by-trip
Control action is aborted due to a trip (PTRC with

ACT.general=TRUE)
18
Object-not-selected
Control action is rejected, because control object was not

selected
19
Object-alreadyselected
Select action is not executed, because the addressed

object is already selected
20
No-access-authority
Control action is blocked due to lack of access authority
21
Ended-withovershoot
Control action executed but the end position has overshoot
22
Abortion-due-todeviation
Control action is aborted due to deviation between the

command value and the measured value
23
Abortion-bycommunication-loss
Control action is aborted due to the loss of connection with

the client that issued the control
24
Blocked-bycommand
Control action is blocked due to the data attribute

CmdBlk.stVal is TRUE
26
Inconsistentparameters
The parameters between successive control services are

not consistent, for example the ctlNum of Select and
Operate service are different
27
Locked-by-otherclient
Another client has already reserved the object
-22
Wrong_CTL_Model
Command from client uses wrong control model
-24
Blocked_for_Open_C
md
Blocked for Open command
-25
Blocked_For_Close_
Cmd
Blocked for Close Command
-30
longOperationTime
Operation time too long
-31
switchNotStartMovin
g
Switch did not start moving
-32
persistantIntermediat
eState
Switch stopped in intermediate state
-33
switchReturnedToInit
Pos
Switch returned to the initial position
-34
switchInBadState
Switch is in a bad position state
-35
notExpectedFinalPos
ition
Switch did not reach the expected final position
Technical manual
837
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 431:
Internal Cause
Number
Translation of cause values for IEC61850 edition 2 and edition 1

AddCause in IEC61850-8-1
Ed 2
Name
Ed 1
25
None
Not-supported
Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
Select-failed
Invalid-position
Position-reached
Parameter-change-in-execution
Step-limit
Blocked-by-Mode
Blocked-by-process
10
10
10
Blocked-by-interlocking
11
11
11
Blocked-by-synchrocheck
12
12
12
Command-already-in-execution
13
13
13
Blocked-by-health
14
14
14
1-of-n-control
15
15
Abortion-by-cancel
16
16
16
Time-limit-over
17
17
17
Abortion-by-trip
18
18
18
Object-not-selected
19
19
Object-already-selected
20
20
No-access-authority
21
21
Ended-with-overshoot
22
22
Abortion-due-to-deviation
23
23
Abortion-by-communication-loss
24
24
-23
Blocked-by-command
26
26
Inconsistent-parameters
27
27
12
Locked-by-other-client
-22
-22
Wrong_CTL_Model
-24
24
-24
Blocked_for_Open_Cmd
-25
24
-25
Blocked_For_Close_Cmd
-30
24
-30
longOperationTime
-31
16
-31
switchNotStartMoving
-32
16
-32
persistantIntermediateState
838
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Internal Cause
Number
AddCause in IEC61850-8-1
Name
Ed 2
Ed 1
-33
22
-33
switchReturnedToInitPos
-34
-34
switchInBadState
-35
22
-35
notExpectedFinalPosition
14.3.4
Bay control QCBAY
14.3.4.1
Functionality
The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local remote
control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also
provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the bay.
14.3.4.2
Function block
QCBAY
LR_OFF
PSTO
LR_LOC
UPD_BLKD
LR_REM
CMD_BLKD
LR_VALID
LOC
BL_UPD
STA
BL_CMD
REM
IEC10000048 V2 EN
Figure 379:
14.3.4.3
QCBAY function block
Signals
Table 432:
Name
QCBAY Input signals

Type
Default
Description
LR_OFF
BOOLEAN
External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC
BOOLEAN
External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM
BOOLEAN
External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position
LR_VALID
BOOLEAN
Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD
BOOLEAN
Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD
BOOLEAN
Steady signal to block the command
Technical manual
839
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 433:
QCBAY Output signals
Name
14.3.4.4
Table 434:
Name
Type
Description
PSTO
INTEGER
Value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Function is blocked for commands
LOC
BOOLEAN
Local operation allowed
STA
BOOLEAN
Station operation allowed
REM
BOOLEAN
Remote operation allowed
Settings
QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AllPSTOValid
Priority
No priority
Priority
Override Priority of originators, commands

from both local, station and remote are allowed
RemoteIncStation
No
Yes
No
Both Station and Remote control are allowed

but not Local when local remote switch is in
remote
14.3.4.5
Operation principle
The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and
blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control
functions and voltage control functions. The functionality of the Bay control (QCBAY)
function is mainly described by the LLN0 node in the IEC61850-8-1 edition 2 standard,
applied to one bay. In IEC61850 edition 1 the functionality is not described by the LLN0
node or any other node, therefore the Bay control function is represented as a vendor
specific node in edition 1.
Local panel switch

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch
connected to this function can have three positions (remote/local/off). The positions are
here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station and/or remote
level and local means that operation is allowed from the IED level. The local/remote
switch is also on the control/protection IED itself, which means that the position of the
switch and its validity information are connected internally, not via I/O boards. When the
switch is mounted separately from the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/
O boards.
When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select this)
is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If the position
840
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set to faulty state
(3), which means no possibility to operate.
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the
function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to QCBAY.
Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source To
Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch position
according to Table 435. In addition, there are two parameters that affect the value of the
PSTO signal.
If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-switch position is in Local or Remote state,
the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is permitted to operate from both local and remote
level without any priority. When the external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO
value shows the actual state of the switch that is, 0. In this case it is not possible to control
anything
If the parameter RemoteIncStation is set and the LR-switch position is in Remote state, the
PSTO value is set to 2 (Station or Remote), that is, it is permitted to operate from both
station and remote level without any priority.
Table 435:
Local panel
switch positions
PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions

PSTO
value
AllPSTOValid RemoteInc
Station
(setting
(setting
parameter)
parameter)
LocSta.CtlVal Possible
(command)
locations that
shall be able to
operate
0 = Off
Not possible
to operate
1 = Local
Priority
Local Panel
1 = Local
No priority
Local or
Remote level
without any
priority
2 = Remote
Priority
No
TRUE
Station level
2 = Remote
Priority
No
FALSE
Remote level
2 = Remote
Priority
Yes
Station or
Remote level
2 = Remote
No priority
Local, Station
or Remote
level without
any priority
3 = Faulty
Not possible
to operate
Technical manual
841
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the
possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within a
complete bay.
The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:
Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related to
apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function
is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected
and functional and configuration data is visible.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined
in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control
without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool in PCM600.
14.3.5
Local/Remote switch LOCREM, LOCREMCTRL

The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are connected via
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAY function
block. The parameter ControlMode in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the
switch signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch
connected via binary inputs.
14.3.5.1
Function block
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
LOCCTRL
REMCTRL
LHMICTRL
OFF
LOCAL
REMOTE
VALID
IEC05000360 V2 EN
Figure 380:
842
LOCREM function block
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PSTO1
PSTO2
PSTO3
PSTO4
PSTO5
PSTO6
PSTO7
PSTO8
PSTO9
PSTO10
PSTO11
PSTO12
LOCREMCTRL
HMICTR1
HMICTR2
HMICTR3
HMICTR4
HMICTR5
HMICTR6
HMICTR7
HMICTR8
HMICTR9
HMICTR10
HMICTR11
HMICTR12
IEC05000361 V2 EN
Figure 381:
14.3.5.2
LOCREMCTRL function block
Signals
Table 436:
Name
LOCREM Input signals

Type
Default
Description
CTRLOFF
BOOLEAN
Disable control
LOCCTRL
BOOLEAN
Local in control
REMCTRL
BOOLEAN
Remote in control
LHMICTRL
INTEGER
LHMI control
Table 437:
Name
LOCREM Output signals

Type
Description
OFF
BOOLEAN
Control is disabled
LOCAL
BOOLEAN
Local control is activated
REMOTE
BOOLEAN
Remote control is activated
VALID
BOOLEAN
Outputs are valid
Table 438:
Name
LOCREMCTRL Input signals

Type
Default
Description
PSTO1
INTEGER
PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2
INTEGER
PSTO3
INTEGER
PSTO4
INTEGER
PSTO5
INTEGER
PSTO6
INTEGER
PSTO7
INTEGER
Technical manual
843
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
PSTO9
INTEGER
PSTO10
INTEGER
PSTO11
INTEGER
PSTO12
INTEGER
LOCREMCTRL Output signals
Name
Table 440:
Name
ControlMode
14.3.5.4
Description
INTEGER
Table 439:
14.3.5.3
Default
PSTO8
Type
Description
HMICTR1
INTEGER
Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2
INTEGER
HMICTR3
INTEGER
HMICTR4
INTEGER
HMICTR5
INTEGER
HMICTR6
INTEGER
HMICTR7
INTEGER
HMICTR8
INTEGER
HMICTR9
INTEGER
HMICTR10
INTEGER
HMICTR11
INTEGER
HMICTR12
INTEGER
Settings
LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Internal LR-switch
External LR-switch
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Internal LR-switch
Description
Control mode for internal/external LR-switch
Operation principle
The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the local/
remote switch. The connections are seen in Figure 382, where the inputs on function block
LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When the local
HMI is used, the inputs are not used. The switching between external and local HMI
source is done through the parameter ControlMode. The outputs from the LOCREM
844
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
function block control the output PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on Bay control
(QCBAY).
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
OFF
LOCCTRL
LOCAL
REMCTRL
REMOTE
LHMICTRL
VALID
QCBAY
LR_ OFF
PSTO
LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LOC
LR_ VALID
STA
BL_ UPD
REM
BL_ CMD
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
OFF
LOCCTRL
LOCAL
REMCTRL
REMOTE
LHMICTRL
VALID
QCBAY
LR_ OFF
PSTO
LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LOC
LR_ VALID
STA
BL_ UPD
REM
BL_ CMD
LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1
HMICTR1
PSTO2
HMICTR2
PSTO3
HMICTR3
PSTO4
HMICTR4
PSTO5
HMICTR5
PSTO6
HMICTR6
PSTO7
HMICTR7
PSTO8
HMICTR8
PSTO9
HMICTR9
PSTO 10
HMICTR 10
PSTO 11
HMICTR 11
PSTO 12
HMICTR 12
IEC10000052 V2 EN
Figure 382:
Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two bays
and two screen pages
If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be
different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the local/
remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page that
is presented on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control (LOCREMCTRL)
controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay and
screen page.
The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been defined
in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the control
without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the IED Users tool in PCM600.
Technical manual
845
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.3.6
Switch controller SCSWI
14.3.6.1
Functionality
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly select
and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate
on one three-phase device or up to three one-phase devices.
14.3.6.2
Function block
SCSWI
BLOCK
PSTO
L_SEL
L_OPEN
L_CLOSE
AU_OPEN
AU_CLOSE
BL_CMD
RES_GRT
RES_EXT
SY_INPRO
SYNC_OK
EN_OPEN
EN_CLOSE
XPOS1
XPOS2
XPOS3
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
SEL_OP
SEL_CL
SELECTED
RES_RQ
START_SY
CANC_SY
POSITION
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
POLEDISC
CMD_BLK
L_CAUSE
POS_INTR
XOUT
IEC05000337 V3 EN
Figure 383:
14.3.6.3
SCSWI function block
Signals
Table 441:
Name
SCSWI Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
Operator place selection
L_SEL
BOOLEAN
Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN
BOOLEAN
Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN
BOOLEAN
Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Used for local automation function
BL_CMD
BOOLEAN
Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT
BOOLEAN
Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made
RES_EXT
BOOLEAN
Reservation is made externally
846
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Default
Description
SY_INPRO
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK
BOOLEAN
Closing is permitted by the synchronism-check
EN_OPEN
BOOLEAN
Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Enables close operation
XPOSL1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase
XPOSL2
GROUP
SIGNAL
XPOSL3
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 442:
Name
SCSWI Output signals

Type
Description
EXE_OP
BOOLEAN
Execute Open command
EXE_CL
BOOLEAN
Execute Close command
SEL_OP
BOOLEAN
Selected for open command
SEL_CL
BOOLEAN
Selected for close command
SELECTED
BOOLEAN
Select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ
BOOLEAN
Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY
BOOLEAN
Starts the external synchronizing function
CANC_SY
BOOLEAN
Cancels the external synchronizing function, started

through START_SY
POSITION
INTEGER
Position indication
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
Open position indication
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
Closed position indication
POLEDISC
BOOLEAN
The positions for poles A, B and C are not equal after a

set time
CMD_BLK
BOOLEAN
Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE
INTEGER
Latest value of the error indication during command
POS_INTR
BOOLEAN
Stopped in intermediate position
XOUT
BOOLEAN
Execution information to XCBR/XSWI
AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated commands as

e.g. for load shedding for opening respectively closing to the SCSWI
function. They work without regard to how the operator place selector,
PSTO, is set. In order to have effect on the outputs EXE_OP and
Technical manual
847
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
EXE_CL, the corresponding enable input, EN_OPEN respectively

EN_CLOSE must be set, and that no interlocking is active.
L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command sequence
connected to binary inputs. In order to have effect, the operator place
selector, PSTO, must be set to local or to remote with no priority. If the
control model used is Select before operate, Also the corresponding
enable input must be set, and no interlocking is active. The L_SEL input
must be set before L_OPEN or L_CLOSE is operated, if the control model
is Select before operate.
14.3.6.4
Table 443:
Name
Settings
SCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CtlModel
Dir Norm
SBO Enh
SBO Enh
Specifies control model type
PosDependent
Always permitted
Not perm at 00/11
Always permitted
Permission to operate depending on the

position
tSelect
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
30.00
Maximum time between select and execute

signals
tResResponse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Allowed time from reservation request to

reservation granted
tSynchrocheck
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
10.00
Allowed time for synchronism-check to fulfil

close conditions
tSynchronizing
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
0.00
Supervision time to get the signal

synchronizing in progress
tExecutionFB
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
30.00
Maximum time from command execution to

termination
tPoleDiscord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Allowed time to have discrepancy between the

poles
SuppressMidPos
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Mid-position is suppressed during the time

tIntermediate
InterlockChk
Sel & Op phase

Op phase
Sel & Op phase
Selection if interlock check should be done in

select phase
14.3.6.5
Operation principle
The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation are
848
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
fulfilled. The involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking,
reservation, blockings and synchronism-check.
Control handling
.
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with normal
security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The parameter
CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The control model "direct
with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the "SBO with enhanced security"
command model requires a select before execution. The command sequence for a
command with control mode SBO with enhanced security is shown in figure 384, with
control mode direct with normal security is shown in figure 385.
Client
Reservation
logic
SXCBR /
SXSWI
SCSWI
select
selectAck/AddCause = 0
RES_RQ = TRUE
tSelect
tReservation
Response
RES_GRT = TRUE
SELECTED = TRUE
requestedPosition = 10
opRcvd = TRUE
EXE_CL
opOK = TRUE, tOpOk
operateAck/AddCause = 0
tExecutionFB
POSITION = 00, timeStamp


cmdTermination/
AddCause = 0

cmdTermination/AddCause = 0
RES_RQ = FALSE
RES_GRT = FALSE
SELECTED = FALSE
IEC15000416-1-EN.vsdx
IEC15000416 V1 EN
Figure 384:
Example of command sequence for a successful close command when

the control model SBO with enhanced security is used
Technical manual
849
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Reservation
core
client
SwitchCtrl
core
Switch
core
requestedPosition = 10
opRcvd = TRUE
RES_RQ
tReservation
Response
RES_GRT = TRUE
EXE_CL
opOK = TRUE, tOpOk

cmdTermination/
AddCause = 0
RES_RQ = FALSE
RES_GRT = FALSE
IEC15000417 V1 EN
Figure 385:
Example of command sequence for a successful close command when

the control model direct with normal security is used
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is
not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in
three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each step
ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command sequence
is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence, the sequence
is terminated. The last error (L_CAUSE) can be read from the function block and used for
example at commissioning.
There is no relation between the command direction and the actual
position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to
execute a close command.
Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter
PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no execution
command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution command is sent independent of
the position value.
Evaluation of position
The position output from the switches (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to the switch
controller SCSWI. The XPOS1, XPOS2 and XPOS3 input signals receive the position,
time stamps and quality attributes of the position which is used for further evaluation.
850
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the resulting
three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the one-phase switches,
following principles will be applied:
All switches in open position:
switch control position = open
All switches in close position:
switch control position = close
One switch =open, two switches= close (or

inversely):
switch control position = intermediate
Any switch in intermediate position:
switch control position = intermediate
Any switch in bad state:
switch control position = bad state
The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the time
stamp of the last changed phase when it reaches the end position. When it goes to
intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase.
In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change
position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discrepancy and is
supervised by this function. In case of a pole discrepancy situation, that is, the positions
of the one-phase switches are not equal positions for a time longer than the setting
tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.
In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values from
the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch (SXSWI). At error the
"cause" value with highest priority is shown.
Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY) and
via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.
The different blocking possibilities are:
Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position.

Blocking of function, BLOCK. If the BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function
is active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected
and functional and configuration data is visible.
The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.
Technical manual
851
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Dependence on Operator place

For commands from communication protocol, such as IEC61850-8-1 and DNP, and
through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE, the operator place is evaluated, and
only commands from enabled operator places are accepted, see Table 435. Commands
through the inputs L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are always from the local operator
place. For commands through the inputs AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE, the operator place is
not evaluated, thus also accepted when the operator place selector is set to Faulty or Off.
Interaction with synchronism-check and synchronizing functions

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchronism-check and the
synchronizing function (SESRSYN, 25). It is assumed that the synchronism-check
function is continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result from the
synchronism-check function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator
performs an override of the synchronism-check, the evaluation of the synchronism-check
state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchronism-check
function, SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function Circuit
breaker (SXCBR).
When there is no positive confirmation from the synchronism-check function, SCSWI
will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the
closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see
Figure 386. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of the
"synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the synchronizing
function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-synchronism-check" in the
"cause" signal. See also the time diagram in Figure 390.
852
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
SCSWI
EXE_CL
SXCBR
OR
CLOSE
SYNC_OK
START_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN
CLOSECMD
Synchro
check
Synchronizing
function
ANSI09000209 V1 EN
Figure 386:
Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (25) (synchronism

check and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function
Time diagrams
The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time
supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.
The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute
command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after
the selection of the object to operate.
select
execute command
tSelect
timer
t1
t1>tSelect, then longoperation-time in 'cause'

is set
en05000092.vsd
IEC05000092 V1 EN
Figure 387:
tSelect
The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation
granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
Technical manual
853
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
select
reservation request RES_RQ
reservation granted RES_GRT
tResResponse
timer
t1>tResResponse, then 1of-n-control in 'cause' is

set
t1
IEC05000093 V2 EN
Figure 388:
tResResponse
The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see Figure 389.
execute command
phase A open
close
phase B open
close
phase C open
close
command termination
phase A
command termination
phase B
command termination
phase C
command termination
circuit breaker open

close
tExecutionFB
timer
t1
t1>tExecutionFB, then
long-operation-time in
'cause' is set
* The command termination will be delayed one execution sample.

en05000094_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000094 V1 EN
Figure 389:
tExecutionFB
The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the
execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the
time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start.
The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchronism-check conditions are
not fulfilled.
854
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The parameter tSynchronizing is used to define the maximum allowed time between the
start signal for synchronizing and the confirmation that synchronizing is in progress.
execute command
SYNC_OK
tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY
SY_INPRO
tSynchronizing
t2
t2>tSynchronizing, then
blocked-by-synchronism
check in 'cause' is set
en05000095_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000095 V1 EN
Figure 390:
tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing
14.3.7
Circuit breaker SXCBR
14.3.7.1
Functionality
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions and
to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in
the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to supervise the switching
operation and position.
Technical manual
855
Section 14
Control
14.3.7.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
SXCBR
BLOCK
LR_SWI
OPEN
CLOSE
BL_OPEN
BL_CLOSE
BL_UPD
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
CBOPCAP
TR_OPEN
TR_CLOSE
RS_CNT
EEH_WARN
EEH_ALM
XIN*
XPOS
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
OP_BLKD
CL_BLKD
UPD_BLKD
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
TR_POS
CNT_VAL
L_CAUSE
EEHEALTH
CBOPCAP
IEC05000338 V4 EN
Figure 391:
14.3.7.3
Signals
Table 444:
Name
856
SXCBR function block
SXCBR Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
LR_SWI
BOOLEAN
Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN
BOOLEAN
Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN
BOOLEAN
Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD
BOOLEAN
Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN
BOOLEAN
Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
CBOPCAP
INTEGER
Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = CO, 4

= OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More
TR_OPEN
BOOLEAN
Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT
BOOLEAN
Resets the operation counter
EEH_WARN
BOOLEAN
Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM
BOOLEAN
Alarm from external equipment
XIN
BOOLEAN
Execution information from CSWI
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 445:
SXCBR Output signals
Name
14.3.7.4
Table 446:
Name
Type
Description
XPOS
GROUP SIGNAL
Group connection to CSWI for CB
EXE_OP
BOOLEAN
Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL
BOOLEAN
Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Indication that the function is blocked for open

commands
CL_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Indication that the function is blocked for close

commands
UPD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
Apparatus closed position
TR_POS
INTEGER
Truck position indication
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
Operation counter value
L_CAUSE
INTEGER
EEHEALTH
INTEGER
External equipment health. 1=No warning or alarm,

2=Warning, 3=Alarm
CBOPCAP
INTEGER
Breaker operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = CO, 4

= OCO, 5 = COCO, 6+ = More
Settings
SXCBR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
tStartMove
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Supervision time for the apparatus to move

after a command
tIntermediate
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse
Not adaptive
Adaptive
Not adaptive
Output resets when a new correct end position

is reached
tOpenPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Output pulse length for close command
InitialCount
0 - 20000
Initial number of operations (Initial count value)
14.3.7.5
Step
Default
Description
Operation principle
The Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is used by other functions such as for example,
switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client
residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands,
evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all
conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution
Technical manual
857
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause"

value, see Table 430.
SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value
can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from local HMI, a binary
input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point
Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) for example. The health of the external
equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to IEC61850-8-1. The operation
counter functionality and the external equipment health supervision are independent subfunctions of the circuit breaker function.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE
it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set
to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal
is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) are rejected, even trip commands
from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is
described in Figure 392.
UE
TR
From I/O
Local= Operation at
switch yard level
switchLR
FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN
Figure 392:
Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles
SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals
is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch controller,
protection functions and autoreclosure.
The blocking possibilities are:
858
Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values.
Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Substitution
The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position and quality of the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because
that the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then use the
manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position
indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution
is enabled, the other signals related to the position follow the substituted
position. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory. If the
function is blocked or blocked for update when the substitution is
released, the position value is kept the same as the last substitution value,
but the quality is changed to "questionable, old data", indicating that the
value is old and not reliable.
When the position of the SXCBR is substituted, its IEC61850-8-1 data

object is marked as substituted", in addition to the substituted quality, but
the position quality of the connected SCSWI is not dependent on the
substitution indication in the quality, so it does not show that it is derived
from a substituted value.
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate.
tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse
is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position.
Figure 393 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
Technical manual
859
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
AdaptivePulse = TRUE
EXE_CL
Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
if t1 > tStartMove then

"switch-not-start-moving"
attribute in 'cause' is set
tStartMove timer
t1
tStartMove
tIntermediate timer
t2
if t2 > tIntermediate then

"persisting-intermediate-state"
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN
Figure 393:
The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be
sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command
can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 394 shows the principle of the execute
output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect on both execute output pulses.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN
Figure 394:
860
Execute output pulse
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.
If the breaker reaches the final position before the execution pulse time
has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the function waits for the end
of the execution pulse before telling the activating function that the
command is completed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position
and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed position and a close
command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets
when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false
the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS
=1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only
when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown
in Figure 395 .
Technical manual
861
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN
Figure 395:
Open command with open position indication
14.3.8
Circuit switch SXSWI
14.3.8.1
Functionality
The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of positions
and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or grounding switches via binary output boards
and to supervise the switching operation and position.
862
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.3.8.2
Function block
SXSWI
BLOCK
LR_SWI
OPEN
CLOSE
BL_OPEN
BL_CLOSE
BL_UPD
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
SWOPCAP
RS_CNT
EEH_WARN
EEH_ALM
XIN
XPOS
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
OP_BLKD
CL_BLKD
UPD_BLKD
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
CNT_VAL
L_CAUSE
EEHEALTH
SWOPCAP
IEC05000339 V3 EN
Figure 396:
14.3.8.3
SXSWI function block
Signals
Table 447:
Name
SXSWI Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
LR_SWI
BOOLEAN
Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN
BOOLEAN
Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN
BOOLEAN
Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD
BOOLEAN
Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN
BOOLEAN
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
SWOPCAP
INTEGER
Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = C, 4 = O

and C
RS_CNT
BOOLEAN
EEH_WARN
BOOLEAN
Warning from external equipment
EEH_ALM
BOOLEAN
Alarm from external equipment
XIN
BOOLEAN
Execution information from CSWI
Technical manual
863
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 448:
SXSWI Output signals
Name
14.3.8.4
Table 449:
Name
Type
Description
XPOS
GROUP SIGNAL
Group connection to CSWI for DIS
EXE_OP
BOOLEAN
Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL
BOOLEAN
Executes the command for close direction
OP_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Indication that the function is blocked for open

commands
CL_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Indication that the function is blocked for close

commands
UPD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Update of position indication is blocked
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
Operation counter value
L_CAUSE
INTEGER
EEHEALTH
INTEGER
External equipment health. 1=No warning or alarm,

2=Warning, 3=Alarm
SWOPCAP
INTEGER
Switch operating capability 1 = None, 2 = O, 3 = C, 4 = O

and C
Settings
SXSWI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
tStartMove
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
Supervision time for the apparatus to move

after a command
tIntermediate
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
15.000
Allowed time for intermediate position
AdaptivePulse
Not adaptive
Adaptive
Not adaptive
Output resets when a new correct end position

is reached
tOpenPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Output pulse length for open command
tClosePulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Output pulse length for close command
SwitchType
Load Break
Disconnector
Grounding Switch
HS Groundg.
Switch
Disconnector
Load Break, Disconnector, Grounding Switch,

HS Grounding. Switch
InitialCount
0 - 20000
Initial number of operations (Initial count value)
14.3.8.5
Step
Default
Description
Operation principle
The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) are other functions such as for example, switch
controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client residing in
864
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands, evaluates block
conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions
indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs the execution command. In
case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value, see
Table 430.
SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter value
can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary input or
remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point Generic
Control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC), for example.
Also, the health of the external equipment, the switch, can be monitored according to
IEC61850-8-1.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote switch
position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to TRUE it means
that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the signal is set to FALSE
it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted. When the signal is set to
TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal IED clients are rejected, even
trip commands from protection functions are rejected. The functionality of the local/
remote switch is described in Figure 397.
UE
TR
From I/O
Local= Operation at
switch yard level
switchLR
FAL
SE
Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN
Figure 397:
Local/Remote switch
Blocking principles
SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking signals
is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, switch controller,
protection functions and autorecloser.
The blocking possibilities are:
Technical manual
865
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position values.
Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK. If BLOCK signal is set, it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.
The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.
Substitution
The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position and quality of the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because
the real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use the manually
entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the position
indication and the status information of the I/O board. When substitution
is enabled, the other signals related to the position follow the substituted
position. The substituted values are stored in a non-volatile memory. If the
function is blocked or blocked for update when the substitution is
released, the position value is kept the same as the last substitution value,
but the quality is changed to "questionable, old data", indicating that the
value is old and not reliable.
When the position of the SXSWI is substituted, its IEC61850-8-1 data

object is marked as substituted", in addition to the substituted quality, but
the position quality of the connected SCSWI is not dependent on the
substitution indication in the quality, so it does not show that it is derived
from a substituted value.
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and tIntermediate.
tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the execute output pulse
is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for intermediate position.
Figure 398 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
866
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
AdaptivePulse = TRUE
EXE_CL
Close pulse duration
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
if t1 > tStartMove then

"switch-not-start-moving"
tStartMove timer
t1
tStartMove
tIntermediate timer
t2
if t2 > tIntermediate then

"persisting-intermediate-state"
tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN
Figure 398:
The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to be
sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close command
can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive with the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 399 shows the principle of the execute
output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have effect on both execute output pulses.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN
Figure 399:
Execute output pulse
Technical manual
867
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.
If the controlled primary device reaches the final position before the
execution pulse time has elapsed, and AdaptivePulse is not true, the
function waits for the end of the execution pulse before telling the
activating function that the command is completed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open position
and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position and a close
command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always activated and resets
when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false
the execution output remains active until the pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS
=1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only
when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is shown
in Figure 400.
868
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN
Figure 400:
Open command with open position indication
14.3.9
Bay reserve QCRSV
14.3.9.1
Functionality
The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking information
between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard part, or
complete substation.
14.3.9.2
Function block
QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_RQ1
RES_RQ2
RES_RQ3
RES_RQ4
RES_RQ5
RES_RQ6
RES_RQ7
RES_RQ8
BLK_RES
OVERRIDE
RES_DATA
RES_GRT1
RES_GRT2
RES_GRT3
RES_GRT4
RES_GRT5
RES_GRT6
RES_GRT7
RES_GRT8
RES_BAYS
ACK_TO_B
RESERVED
EXCH_OUT
IEC05000340 V2 EN
Figure 401:
QCRSV function block
Technical manual
869
Section 14
Control
14.3.9.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 450:
Name
Type
Default
Description
EXCH_IN
INTEGER
Used for exchange signals between different BayRes

blocks
RES_RQ1
BOOLEAN
Signal for apparatus 1 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ2
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ3
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ4
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ5
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ6
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ7
BOOLEAN
RES_RQ8
BOOLEAN
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Reservation is not possible and the output signals are

reset
OVERRIDE
BOOLEAN
Signal to override the reservation
RES_DATA
INTEGER
Reservation data coming from function block ResIn
Table 451:
Name
870
QCRSV Input signals
QCRSV Output signals

Type
Description
RES_GRT1
BOOLEAN
Reservation is made and the apparatus 1 is allowed to

operate
RES_GRT2
BOOLEAN

operate
RES_GRT3
BOOLEAN

operate
RES_GRT4
BOOLEAN

operate
RES_GRT5
BOOLEAN

operate
RES_GRT6
BOOLEAN

operate
RES_GRT7
BOOLEAN

operate
RES_GRT8
BOOLEAN

operate
RES_BAYS
BOOLEAN
Request for reservation of other bays
ACK_TO_B
BOOLEAN
Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved
RESERVED
BOOLEAN
Indicates that the bay is reserved
EXCH_OUT
INTEGER
Used for exchange signals between different BayRes

blocks
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.3.9.4
Table 452:
Name
Settings
QCRSV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
tCancelRes
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000
Supervision time for canceling the reservation
ParamRequest1
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.
Reservation of the own bay only, at selection of

apparatus 1
ParamRequest2
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.

apparatus 2
ParamRequest3
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.

apparatus 3
ParamRequest4
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.

apparatus 4
ParamRequest5
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.

apparatus 5
ParamRequest6
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.

apparatus 6
ParamRequest7
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.

apparatus 7
ParamRequest8
Other bays res.

Only own bay res.
Only own bay res.

apparatus 8
14.3.9.5
Step
Default
Description
Operation principle
The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function starts to
operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if
there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the
function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input
signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller (SCWI). The signals for request
from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from function block RESIN.
These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are connected to
RES_DATA in QCRSV.
The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay only
(TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no reservation
request RES_BAYS is created.
Reservation request of own bay

If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know
which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input
signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the
requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of the current bay can be
permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already is reserved by itself or
another bay. This information is available in the output signal RESERVED.
Technical manual
871
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx
(where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch
controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset and
the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.
Reservation of other bays

When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that
requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it will
send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for their
response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done by activating the
output RES_BAYS.
When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the output
RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not
acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI
(tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-n-control"
in the "cause" signal.
Reservation request from another bay

When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding
function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into the
output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA in
QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the acknowledgment from
output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the bay already is reserved the
reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.
Blocking and overriding of reservation

If QCRSV function is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is blocked.
That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This can be set, for
example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent operations from another
operator place at the same time.
The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE input
signal, that is, reserving the own bay without waiting for the external acknowledge.
Bay with more than eight apparatuses

If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay that is, use of up to eight apparatuses, the
input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE.
If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional QCRSV.
The two QCRSV functions have to communicate and this is done through the input
EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to Figure 402. If more than one QCRSV are used,
the execution order is very important. The execution order must be in the way that the first
QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.
872
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_ GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_ GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_ GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_ GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_ GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_ GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_ GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_ GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_ BAYS
BLK_ RES
ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_ DATA EXCH_ OUT
QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_ GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_ GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_ GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_ GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_ GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_ GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_ GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_ GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_ BAYS
BLK_ RES
ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_ DATA EXCH_ OUT
OR
OR
OR
RES_ BAYS
ACK_TO_B
RESERVED
ANSI05000088 V2 EN
Figure 402:
Connection of two QCRSV function blocks
14.3.10
Reservation input RESIN
14.3.10.1
Functionality
The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from other
bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60
instances are available).
Technical manual
873
Section 14
Control
14.3.10.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
RESIN1
BAY_ACK
BAY_VAL
BAY_RES
ACK_F_B
ANY_ACK
VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC05000341 V2 EN
Figure 403:
RESIN1 function block
RESIN2
EXCH_IN
BAY_ACK
BAY_VAL
BAY_RES
ACK_F_B
ANY_ACK
VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC09000807 V1 EN
Figure 404:
14.3.10.3
Signals
Table 453:
Name
RESIN1 Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BAY_ACK
BOOLEAN
Another bay has acknowledged the reservation request

from this bay
BAY_VAL
BOOLEAN
The reservervation and acknowledge signals from

another bay are valid
BAY_RES
BOOLEAN
Request from other bay to reserve this bay
Table 454:
Name
874
RESIN2 function block
RESIN1 Output signals

Type
Description
ACK_F_B
BOOLEAN
All other bays have acknowledged the reservation

request from this bay
ANY_ACK
BOOLEAN
Any other bay has acknowledged the reservation

VALID_TX
BOOLEAN
The reservation and acknowledge signals from other

bays are valid
RE_RQ_B
BOOLEAN
V_RE_RQ
BOOLEAN
Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT
INTEGER
Used for exchange signals between different ResIn

blocks
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 455:
RESIN2 Input signals
Name
Type

blocks
BAY_ACK
BOOLEAN
Another bay has acknowledged the reservation request

from this bay
BAY_VAL
BOOLEAN
The reservervation and acknowledge signals from

another bay are valid
BAY_RES
BOOLEAN
RESIN2 Output signals
Name
Table 457:
Name
FutureUse
Table 458:
Name
FutureUse
14.3.10.5
Description
INTEGER
Table 456:
14.3.10.4
Default
EXCH_IN
Type
Description
ACK_F_B
BOOLEAN
All other bays have acknowledged the reservation

ANY_ACK
BOOLEAN
Any other bay has acknowledged the reservation

VALID_TX
BOOLEAN
The reservation and acknowledge signals from other

bays are valid
RE_RQ_B
BOOLEAN
V_RE_RQ
BOOLEAN
Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT
INTEGER

blocks
Settings
RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Bay in use
Bay future use
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Bay in use
Description
The bay for this ResIn block is for future use
RESIN2 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Bay in use
Bay future use
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Bay in use
Description
The bay for this ResIn block is for future use
Operation principle
The reservation input (RESIN) function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions. The
logic diagram in Figure 405 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs of the
Technical manual
875
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals transferred
over the station bus from another bay.
EXCH_IN
INT
BIN
ACK_F_B
AND
FutureUse
OR
BAY_ACK
ANY_ACK
OR
VALID_TX
AND
BAY_VAL
OR
RE_RQ_B
OR
BAY_RES
AND
V _RE_RQ
OR
BIN
EXCH_OUT
INT
INT..Integer
BIN..Binary
en05000089_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000089 V1 EN
Figure 405:
Logic diagram for RESIN
Figure 406 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules in the
current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the reservation
mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions are connected to
the module bay reserve (QCRSV) that handles the reservation function in the own bay.
876
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
Bay 1
Bay 2
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
Bay n
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
QCRSV
RES_DATA
en05000090.vsd
IEC05000090 V2 EN
Figure 406:
Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN
14.4
Voltage control
14.4.1
Identification
14.4.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Tap changer control and supervision, 6

binary inputs
TCMYLTC
84
Tap changer control and supervision, 32

binary inputs
TCLYLTC
84
Functionality
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC (84) as well as Tap
changer control and supervision, 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC (84) are is used for control
of power transformers with a on-load tap changer. The functions provide automatic
Technical manual
877
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
regulation of the voltage on the secondary side of transformers or alternatively on a load

point further out in the network.
Control of a single transformer, as well as control of up to eight transformers in parallel is
possible. For parallel control of power transformers, three alternative methods are
available, the master-follower method, the circulating current method and the reverse
reactance method. The first two methods require exchange of information between the
parallel transformers and this is provided for within IEC 61850-8-1.
Voltage control includes many extra features such as possibility of to avoid simultaneous
tapping of parallel transformers, hot stand by regulation of a transformer in a group which
regulates it to a correct tap position even though the LV CB is open, compensation for a
possible capacitor bank on the LV side bay of a transformer, extensive tap changer
monitoring including contact wear and hunting detection, monitoring of the power flow
in the transformer so that for example, the voltage control can be blocked if the power
reverses etc.
14.4.3
Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs TCMYLTC

(84) and TCLYLTC (84)
The Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs (TCMYLTC, 84) and 32 binary
inputs TCLYLTC (84) gives the tap commands to the tap changer, and supervises that
commands are carried through correctly. It has built-in extensive possibilities for tap
changer position measurement, as well as supervisory and monitoring features. This is
used in the voltage control and can also give information about tap position to the
transformer differential protection.
14.4.3.1
Operation principle
Reading of tap changer position
The tap changer position can be received to the tap changer control and supervision, 6
binary inputs TCMYLTC (84) or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC (84) function block in the
following ways:
1.
2.
3.
Via binary input signals, one per tap position (max. 6 or 32 positions).
Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals, or Gray coded
binary signals.
Via a mA input signal.
Via binary input signals, one per tap position

In this option, each tap position has a separate contact that is hard wired to a binary input
in the IED. Via the Signal Matrix tool in PCM600, the contacts on the binary input card
are then directly connected to the
878
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
inputs B1 B6 on TCMYLTC (84) function

or inputs B1 B32 on TCLYLTC (84) function.
Via coded binary (Binary), binary coded decimal (BCD) signals or Gray coded
binary signals
The Tap changer control and supervision, (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC ,84) decodes binary
data from up to six binary inputs to an integer value. The input pattern may be decoded
either as BIN, BCD or GRAY format depending on the setting of the parameter
CodeType.
It is also possible to use even parity check of the input binary signal. Whether the parity
check shall be used or not is set with the setting parameter UseParity.
The input BIERR on (TCMYLTC or TCLYLTC , 84) can be used as supervisory input for
indication of any external error ( Binary Input Module) in the system for reading of tap
changer position. Likewise, the input OUTERR can be used as a supervisory of the Binary
Input Module.
The truth table (see table 459) shows the conversion for Binary, Binary Coded Decimal,
and Gray coded signals.
Technical manual
879
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 459:
Binary, BCD and Gray conversion
IEC06000522 V1 EN
The Gray code conversion above is not complete and therefore the conversion from
decimal numbers to Gray code is given below.
880
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 460:
Gray code conversion
IEC06000523 V1 EN
Technical manual
881
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Via a mA input signal

Any of the six inputs on the mA card (MIM) can be used for the purpose of tap changer
position reading connected to the Tap changer control and supervision, 6 binary inputs
TCMYLTC (84) or 32 binary inputs TCLYLTC (84).
The measurement of the tap changer position via MIM module is based on the principle
that the specified mA input signal range (usually 4-20 mA) is divided into N intervals
corresponding to the number of positions available on the tap changer. All mA values
within one interval are then associated with one tap changer position value.
The number of available tap changer positions N is defined by the setting parameters
LowVoltTap and HighVoltTap, which define the tap position for lowest voltage and
highest voltage respectively.
14.4.4
Function block
TCMYLTC (84)
YLTCIN*
VRAISE
TCINPROG
VLOWER
INERR
HIPOSAL
RESETERR
LOPOSAL
OUTERR
POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT
CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT
TCERRAL
PARITY
POSOUT
BIERR
CONVERR
B1
NEWPOS
B2
HIDIFPOS
B3
INVALPOS
B4
TCPOS
B5
YLTCOUT
B6
MA
ANSI07000038 V2 EN
Figure 407:
882
TCMYLTC (84) function block
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
TCLYLTC (84)
YLTCIN*
VRAISE
TCINPROG
VLOWER
INERR
HIPOSAL
RESETERR
LOPOSAL
OUTERR
POSERRAL
RS_CLCNT
CMDERRAL
RS_OPCNT
TCERRAL
PARITY
POSOUT
BIERR
CONVERR
B1
NEWPOS
B2
HIDIFPOS
B3
INVALPOS
B4
TCPOS
B5
YLTCOUT
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
MA
ANSI07000037 V2 EN
Figure 408:
14.4.5
TCLYLTC (84) function block
Signals
Table 461:
Name
TCMYLTC (84) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
YLTCIN
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input group connection for YLTC
TCINPROG
BOOLEAN
Indication that tap is moving
INERR
BOOLEAN
Supervision signal of the input board
RESETERR
BOOLEAN
Reset of command and tap error
OUTERR
BOOLEAN
Supervision off the digital output board
RS_CLCNT
BOOLEAN
Reset of the contact life counter
Technical manual
883
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Default
Description
RS_OPCNT
BOOLEAN
PARITY
BOOLEAN
Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position
BIERR
BOOLEAN
Error bit from tap changer for the tap position
B1
BOOLEAN
Bit 1 from tap changer for the tap position
B2
BOOLEAN
B3
BOOLEAN
B4
BOOLEAN
B5
BOOLEAN
B6
BOOLEAN
MA
REAL
mA from tap changer for the tap position
Table 462:
Name
TCMYLTC (84) Output signals

Type
Description
VRAISE
BOOLEAN
Raise voltage command to tap changer
VLOWER
BOOLEAN
Lower voltage command to tap changer
HIPOSAL
BOOLEAN
Alarm for tap in highest volt position
LOPOSAL
BOOLEAN
Alarm for tap in lowest volt position
POSERRAL
BOOLEAN
Alarm that indicates a problem with the position

indication
CMDERRAL
BOOLEAN
Alarm for a command without an expected position

change
TCERRAL
BOOLEAN
Alarm for none or illegal tap position change
POSOUT
BOOLEAN
Tap position outside min and max position
CONVERR
BOOLEAN
General tap position conversion error
NEWPOS
BOOLEAN
A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse
HIDIFPOS
BOOLEAN
Tap position has changed more than one position
INVALPOS
BOOLEAN
Last position change was an invalid change
YLTCOUT
GROUP SIGNAL
Group connection to ATCCIN
Table 463:
Name
TCLYLTC (84) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
YLTCIN
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input group connection for YLTC
TCINPROG
BOOLEAN
Indication that tap is moving
INERR
BOOLEAN
Supervision signal of the input board
RESETERR
BOOLEAN
Reset of command and tap error
884
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Default
Description
OUTERR
BOOLEAN
Supervision off the digital output board
RS_CLCNT
BOOLEAN
Reset of the contact life counter
RS_OPCNT
BOOLEAN
PARITY
BOOLEAN
Parity bit from tap changer for the tap position
BIERR
BOOLEAN
Error bit from tap changer for the tap position
B1
BOOLEAN
B2
BOOLEAN
B3
BOOLEAN
B4
BOOLEAN
B5
BOOLEAN
B6
BOOLEAN
B7
BOOLEAN
B8
BOOLEAN
B9
BOOLEAN
B10
BOOLEAN
B11
BOOLEAN
B12
BOOLEAN
B13
BOOLEAN
B14
BOOLEAN
B15
BOOLEAN
B16
BOOLEAN
B17
BOOLEAN
B18
BOOLEAN
B19
BOOLEAN
B20
BOOLEAN
B21
BOOLEAN
B22
BOOLEAN
B23
BOOLEAN
B24
BOOLEAN
B25
BOOLEAN
B26
BOOLEAN
B27
BOOLEAN
B28
BOOLEAN
B29
BOOLEAN
B30
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
885
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
B32
BOOLEAN
MA
REAL
mA from tap changer for the tap position
Table 464:
Name
TCLYLTC (84) Output signals

Type
Description
VRAISE
BOOLEAN
Raise voltage command to tap changer
VLOWER
BOOLEAN
Lower voltage command to tap changer
HIPOSAL
BOOLEAN
Alarm for tap in highest volt position
LOPOSAL
BOOLEAN
Alarm for tap in lowest volt position
POSERRAL
BOOLEAN
Alarm that indicates a problem with the position

indication
CMDERRAL
BOOLEAN
Alarm for a command without an expected position

change
TCERRAL
BOOLEAN
Alarm for none or illegal tap position change
POSOUT
BOOLEAN
Tap position outside min and max position
CONVERR
BOOLEAN
General tap position conversion error
NEWPOS
BOOLEAN
A new tap position is reported, 1 sec pulse
HIDIFPOS
BOOLEAN
Tap position has changed more than one position
INVALPOS
BOOLEAN
Last position change was an invalid change
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
Number of operations on tap changer
TCPOS
INTEGER
Integer value corresponding to actual tap position
YLTCOUT
GROUP SIGNAL
Group connection to ATCCIN
Table 465:
Name
BLOCK
Table 466:
Name
886
Type
B31
VCTRRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block of function
VCTRRCV Output signals

Type
Description
VCTR_REC
GROUP SIGNAL
Received data from horizontal communication
COMVALID
BOOLEAN
Communication is valid
DATVALID
BOOLEAN
Data valid
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.4.6
Table 467:
Name
Settings
TCMYLTC (84) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tTCTimeout
1 - 120
Tap changer constant time-out
tPulseDur
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.5
Raise/lower command output pulse duration
Table 468:
Name
TCMYLTC (84) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
LowVoltTap
1 - 63
Tap position for lowest voltage
HighVoltTap
1 - 63
33
Tap position for highest voltage
mALow
0.000 - 25.000
mA
0.001
4.000
mA for lowest voltage tap position
mAHigh
0.000 - 25.000
mA
0.001
20.000
mA for highest voltage tap position
CodeType
BIN
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA
BIN
Type of code conversion
UseParity
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable parity check
tStable
1 - 60
Time after position change before the value is

accepted
CLFactor
1.0 - 3.0
0.1
2.0
Adjustable factor for contact life function
InitCLCounter
0 - 9999999
250000
CL counter start value
EnabTapCmd
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enable commands to tap changer
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
Table 469:
Name
TCLYLTC (84) Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tTCTimeout
1 - 120
tPulseDur
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.5
Raise/lower command output pulse duration
Technical manual
887
Section 14
Control
Table 470:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
TCLYLTC (84) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
LowVoltTap
1 - 63
Tap position for lowest voltage
HighVoltTap
1 - 63
33
Tap position for highest voltage
mALow
0.000 - 25.000
mA
0.001
4.000
mA for lowest voltage tap position
mAHigh
0.000 - 25.000
mA
0.001
20.000
mA for highest voltage tap position
CodeType
BIN
BCD
Gray
SINGLE
mA
BIN
UseParity
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable parity check
tStable
1 - 60
Time after position change before the value is

accepted
CLFactor
1.0 - 3.0
0.1
2.0
Adjustable factor for contact life function
InitCLCounter
0 - 9999999
250000
CL counter start value
EnabTapCmd
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enable commands to tap changer
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
14.4.7
Monitored data
Table 471:
Name
TCPOS
Table 472:
Name
Type
INTEGER
Values (Range)
-
Unit
-
Description
Integer value corresponding to
actual tap position
TCMYLTC (84) Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
Number of operations on tap

changer
CLCNT_VAL
REAL
Remaining number of
operations at rated load
TCPOS
INTEGER

actual tap position
Table 473:
Name
TCPOS
888
TCMYLTC (84) Monitored data
TCLYLTC (84) Monitored data

Type
INTEGER
Values (Range)
-
Unit
-
Description
actual tap position
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.4.8
Operation principle
Tap changer control and supervision
TCMYLTC (84), 6 binary inputs

TCLYLTC (84), 32 binary inputs
TCMYLTC (84) and TCLYLTC (84) also serve the purpose of giving information about
tap position to the transformer differential protection T2WPDIF (87T) and T3WPDIF
(87T).
14.4.9
Technical data
Table 474:
TCMYLTC (84) and TLCYLTC (84) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Transformer reactance
(0.1200.0), primary
Time delay for lower command

when fast step down mode is
activated
(1.0100.0) s
Voltage control set voltage
(85.0120.0)% of VBase
0.25 % of Vn
Outer voltage deadband
(0.29.0)% of VBase
Inner voltage deadband
(0.19.0)% of VBase
Upper limit of busbar voltage
(80180)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Lower limit of busbar voltage
(70120)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Undervoltage block level
(50120)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Time delay (long) for automatic

control commands
(31000) s
0.2% or 600 ms
Time delay (short) for automatic

control commands
(11000) s
0.2% or 600 ms
Minimum operating time in

inverse mode
(3120) s
0.2% or 600 ms
Line resistance
(0.00150.00), primary
Line reactance
(-150.00150.00), primary
Load voltage adjustment

constants
(-20.020.0)% of VBase
Load voltage auto correction
(-20.020.0)% of VBase
Duration time for the reverse

action block signal
(306000) s
0.2% or 600 ms
Current limit for reverse action

block
(0100)% of I1Base
Overcurrent block level
(5250)% of I1Base
1.0% of In at IIn
1.0% of I at I>In

Technical manual
889
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Level for number of counted raise/

lower within one hour
(030) operations/hour
Level for number of counted raise/

lower within 24 hours
(0100) operations/day
Time window for hunting alarm
(1120) minutes
Hunting detection alarm, max

operations/window
(330) operations/window
Alarm level of active power in

forward and reverse direction at
(10-200)% of Sn and (85-120)% of
VBase
(-9999.999999.99) MW
1.0% of Sn
Alarm level of reactive power in

forward and reverse direction at
(10-200)% of Sn and (85-120)% of
VBase
(-9999.999999.99) MVAr
1.0% of Sn
Time delay for alarms from power

supervision
(16000) s
0.2% or 600 ms
Tap position for lowest and

highest voltage
(163)
mA for lowest and highest voltage

tap position
(0.00025.000) mA
BIN, BCD, GRAY, SINGLE, mA
Time after position change before

the value is accepted
(160) s
0.2% or 200 ms
(1120) s
0.2% or 200 ms
Raise/lower command output

pulse duration
(0.510.0) s
0.2% or 200 ms
14.5
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGAPC
14.5.1
Identification
Logic rotating switch for function
selection and LHMI presentation
890
IEC 61850
identification
SLGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.5.2
Functionality
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC (or the
selector switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch functionality
compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches
are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set
values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system
reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The selector switch function eliminates all
these problems.
14.5.3
Function block
SLGAPC
BLOCK
PSTO
UP
DOWN
^P01
^P02
^P03
^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN
IEC14000005 V1 EN
Figure 409:
SLGAPC function block
Technical manual
891
Section 14
Control
14.5.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 475:
Name
SLGAPC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
UP
BOOLEAN
Binary "UP" command
DOWN
BOOLEAN
Binary "DOWN" command
Table 476:
SLGAPC Output signals
Name
Type
Description
P01
BOOLEAN
Selector switch position 1
P02
BOOLEAN
P03
BOOLEAN
P04
BOOLEAN
P05
BOOLEAN
P06
BOOLEAN
P07
BOOLEAN
P08
BOOLEAN
P09
BOOLEAN
P10
BOOLEAN
P11
BOOLEAN
P12
BOOLEAN
P13
BOOLEAN
P14
BOOLEAN
P15
BOOLEAN
P16
BOOLEAN
P17
BOOLEAN
P18
BOOLEAN
P19
BOOLEAN
P20
BOOLEAN
P21
BOOLEAN
P22
BOOLEAN
P23
BOOLEAN
P24
BOOLEAN
P25
BOOLEAN
P26
BOOLEAN

892
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
14.5.5
Table 477:
Name
Type
Description
P27
BOOLEAN
P28
BOOLEAN
P29
BOOLEAN
P30
BOOLEAN
P31
BOOLEAN
P32
BOOLEAN
SWPOSN
INTEGER
Switch position (integer)
Settings
SLGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
NrPos
2 - 32
32
Number of positions in the switch
OutType
Pulsed
Steady
Steady
Output type, steady or pulse
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Operate pulse duration, in [s]
tDelay
0.000 - 60000.000
0.010
0.000
Time delay on the output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Stop when min or max position is reached
14.5.6
Monitored data
Table 478:
Name
SWPOSN
14.5.7
SLGAPC Monitored data

Type
INTEGER
Values (Range)
-
Unit
-
Description
Switch position (integer)
Operation principle
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGAPC)
function has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the UP
input, the function will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
ascending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and one activates the
UP input then the output P04 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN
input, the function will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
descending order (for example if the present activated output is P03 and one activates the
DOWN input then the output P02 will be activated). Depending on the output settings the
Technical manual
893
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, the output will be active
till the time it receives next operation of UP/DOWN inputs. Also, depending on the
settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive
front and the output activation.
Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application
Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired
position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or
remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the function operation, by
activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be kept and further
operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified through the
PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal
function block can be connected. SLGAPC function block has also an integer value
output, that generates the actual position number. The positions and the block names are
fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the
position names instead of a number.
14.5.7.1
Graphical display
There are two possibilities for SLGAPC
if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual position
names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but only
the first three letters of the name will be used.
In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when
building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control, the
following sequence of commands will ensure:
894
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Change to the "Switches" page

of the SLD by left-right arrows.
Select switch by up-down
arrows
../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DAL
Control
Single Line Diagram
Commands
Control
Measurements
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Reset
Authorization
Language
Open
Close
SMBRREC control
WFM
Select switch. Press the

Open or Close key. A
dialog box appears.
Pilot setup
OFF
P: Disc
The pos will not be modified

(outputs will not be activated) until
you press the E-button for O.K.
OK
N: Disc Fe
Cancel
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DFW
ANSI06000421 V2 EN
Figure 410:
Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.
14.6
Selector mini switch VSGAPC
14.6.1
Identification
Selector mini switch
IEC 61850
identification
VSGAPC
Technical manual
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
895
Section 14
Control
14.6.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Functionality
The Selector mini switch VSGAPC function block is a multipurpose function used for a
variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.
VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu, from a symbol on the single line diagram
(SLD) on the local HMI or from Binary inputs
14.6.3
Function block
VSGAPC
BLOCK
PSTO
IPOS1
IPOS2
BLOCKED
POSITION
POS1
POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
IEC14000066 V1 EN
Figure 411:
14.6.4
Signals
Table 479:
Name
VSGAPC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
IPOS1
BOOLEAN
Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2
BOOLEAN
Position 2 indicating input
Table 480:
Name
896
VSGAPC function block
VSGAPC Output signals

Type
Description
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
The function is active but the functionality is blocked
POSITION
INTEGER
Position indication, integer
POS1
BOOLEAN
Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2
BOOLEAN
Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12
BOOLEAN
Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21
BOOLEAN
Execute command from position 2 to position 1
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.6.5
Table 481:
Name
Settings
VSGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
CtlModel
Dir Norm
SBO Enh
Dir Norm
Specifies the type for control model according

to IEC 61850
Mode
Steady
Pulsed
Pulsed
Operation mode
tSelect
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
30.000
Max time between select and execute signals
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Command pulse lenght
14.6.6
Operation principle
Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can be used for double purpose, in the same way
as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:
for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the
IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1 and
POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in the
configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command from
the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command from
the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated
with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on the
screen. A symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in PCM600.
The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of operators
place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote). An INTONE
connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow operation from local
HMI.
As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit representation,
where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the desired result.
The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name of
the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.
Technical manual
897
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IPOS1
IPOS2
Name of displayed string
Default string value
PosUndefined
P00
Position1
P01
Position2
P10
PosBadState
P11
14.7
Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC
14.7.1
Identification
Generic communication function for
Double Point indication
14.7.2
IEC 61850
identification
DPGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC function block is
used to send double indications to other systems, equipment or functions in the substation
through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is especially used in the
interlocking station-wide logics.
14.7.3
Function block
IEC13000081 V1 EN
Figure 412:
898
DPGAPC function block
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.7.4
Signals
Table 482:
DPGAPC Input signals
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
Open indication
CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Close indication
VALID
BOOLEAN
Valid indication
Table 483:
DPGAPC Output signals
Name
POSITION
14.7.5
Default
OPEN
Type
INTEGER
Description
Double point indication
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
14.7.6
Operation principle
When receiving the input signals, DPGAPC sends the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the
systems, equipment or functions that requests and thus subscribes on these signals. To be
able to get the signals into other systems, equipment or functions, one must use other tools,
described in the Engineering manual and define which function block in which systems,
equipment or functions should receive this information.
14.8
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC
14.8.1
Identification
Single point generic control 8 signals
14.8.2
IEC 61850
identification
SPC8GAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC function block is a collection of 8
single point commands that can be used for direct commands for example reset of LED's
Technical manual
899
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
or putting IED in "ChangeLock" state from remote. In this way, simple commands can be
sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result
of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and
SPGAPC function blocks. The commands can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse
time.
14.8.3
Function block
SPC8GAPC
BLOCK
PSTO
ÔUT1
ÔUT2
ÔUT3
ÔUT4
ÔUT5
ÔUT6
ÔUT7
ÔUT8
ANSI07000143 V1 EN
Figure 413:
14.8.4
Signals
Table 484:
Name
SPC8GAPC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Blocks the function operation
PSTO
INTEGER
Table 485:
Name
900
SPC8GAPC function block
SPC8GAPC Output signals

Type
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Command output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Command output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Command output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Command output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Command output 5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Command output 6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Command output 7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Command output 8
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.8.5
Table 486:
Name
Settings
SPC8GAPC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PulseMode1
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 1
tPulse1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Pulse time output 1
PulseMode2
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Pulse time output 2
PulseMode3
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse3
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Pulse time output 3
PulseMode4
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse4
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Pulse time output 4
PulseMode5
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse5
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Pulse time output 5
PulseMode6
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse6
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Pulse time output 6
PulseMode7
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse7
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Pulse time output 7
PulseMode8
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse8
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Pulse time output 8
14.8.6
Operation principle
The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the eight
outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected. The
settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if the
signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block
the operation of the function in case a command is sent, no output will be activated.
Technical manual
901
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions.
Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator
places only, REMOTE operator place is used in SPC8GAPC function.
14.9
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS
14.9.1
Identification
AutomationBits, command function for
DNP3
14.9.2
IEC 61850
identification
AUTOBITS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get into the
configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The AUTOBITS
function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC 61850) and
MULTICMDRCV (for LON).
902
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.9.3
Function block
AUTOBITS
BLOCK
PSTO
^CMDBIT1
^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32
IEC09000925 V1 EN
Figure 414:
14.9.4
AUTOBITS function block
Signals
Table 487:
Name
AUTOBITS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
Table 488:
Name
AUTOBITS Output signals

Type
Description
CMDBIT1
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 5

Technical manual
903
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
14.9.5
Table 489:
Name
Operation
904
Type
Description
CMDBIT6
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32
BOOLEAN
Command out bit 32
Settings
AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 490:
Name
Operation
Table 491:
Name
BaudRate
Table 492:
Name
DNPGEN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
CHSERRS485 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
300 Bd
600 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
57600 Bd
115200 Bd
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
9600 Bd
Description
Baud-rate for serial port
CHSERRS485 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DLinkConfirm
Never
Sometimes
Always
Never
Data-link confirm
tDLinkTimeout
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Data-link confirm timeout in s
DLinkRetries
0 - 255
Data-link maximum retries
tRxToTxMinDel
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Rx to Tx minimum delay in s
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048
Application layer maximum Rx fragment size
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048
Application layer maximum Tx fragment size
StopBits
1-2
Stop bits
Parity
No
Even
Odd
Even
Parity
tRTSWarmUp
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RTS warm-up in s
tRTSWarmDown
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RTS warm-down in s
tBackOffDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.050
RS485 back-off delay in s
tMaxRndDelBkOf
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
RS485 maximum back-off random delay in s
Technical manual
905
Section 14
Control
Table 493:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
CH1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Disabled
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000
UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from

master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDP portfor initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
UDP port to remote client/master
Table 494:
Name
CH1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048
Table 495:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Disabled
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000

master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDP port for initial NULL response
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
Table 496:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048
906
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 497:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Disabled
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000

master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
Table 498:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048
Table 499:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
Disabled
Operation mode
TCPIPLisPort
1 - 65535
20000
TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData
1 - 65535
20000

master
UDPPortInitNUL
1 - 65535
20000
UDPPortCliMast
0 - 65535
Table 500:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ApLayMaxRxSize
20 - 2048
2048
ApLayMaxTxSize
20 - 2048
2048
Technical manual
907
Section 14
Control
Table 501:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
MSTSER Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
ChToAssociate
RS485
Optical
RS485
Channel to associate to
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Object 1, default variation
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag
1:DIWithoutFlag
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
908
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 502:
Name
MSTSER Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
Validate source (master) address
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
Address query enable
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
Application layer confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes
Enable application for multiple fragment

response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
Confirm each multiple fragment
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
Unsolicited response enabled
UREvClassMask
Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Disabled
Unsolicited response, event class mask
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10
Unsolicited response retries before off-line

retry mode
tVRRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response retry delay in s
tVROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100
Unsolicited response class 1 event count

report treshold
tVREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer

timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100

report treshold
tVREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100

report treshold
tVREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
Delete oldest event when buffer is full
ExtTimeFormat
LocalTime
UTC
UTC
External time format
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
Yes
Allow DNP to set time in IED
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800
Time synch timeout before error status is

generated
Technical manual
909
Section 14
Control
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No
Time synchronization request after timeout
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
Use average of 3 time requests
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
Step
Default
Table 503:
Name
MST1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag
1:DIWithoutFlag
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
910
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 504:
Name
MST1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
UREvClassMask
Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Disabled
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10

retry mode
tVRRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
tVROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100

report treshold
Technical manual
911
Section 14
Control
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
tVREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100

report treshold
tVREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100

report treshold
tVREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
ExtTimeFormat
LocalTime
UTC
UTC
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800

generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
Broken connection timeout
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 505:
Name
Values (Range)
Description

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
912
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag
1:DIWithoutFlag
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 506:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

response
Technical manual
913
Section 14
Control
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
UREvClassMask
Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Disabled
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10

retry mode
tVRRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
tVROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100

report treshold
tVREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100

report treshold
tVREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100

report treshold
tVREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
ExtTimeFormat
LocalTime
UTC
UTC
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800

generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
914
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 507:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag
1:DIWithoutFlag
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Technical manual
915
Section 14
Control
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 508:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

response
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
UREvClassMask
Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Disabled
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10

retry mode
tVRRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
tVROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100

report treshold
916
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Unit
Step
Default
tVREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100

report treshold
tVREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100

report treshold
tVREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
ExtTimeFormat
LocalTime
UTC
UTC
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800

generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Table 509:
Name
Values (Range)
Description

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SlaveAddress
0 - 65519
Slave address
MasterAddres
0 - 65519
Master address
ValMasterAddr
No
Yes
Yes
MasterIP-Addr
0 - 18
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.255
Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar
1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus
1:BISingleBit
Technical manual
917
Section 14
Control
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Obj2DefVar
1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
3:BIChWithRelTim
e
Obj3DefVar
1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag
1:DIWithoutFlag
Obj4DefVar
1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
3:DIChWithRelTim
e
Obj10DefVar
1:BO
2:BOStatus
2:BOStatus
Obj20DefVar
1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
5:BinCnt32WoutF
Obj22DefVar
1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T
1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT
Obj30DefVar
1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF
3:AI32IntWithoutF
Obj32DefVar
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT
1:AI32IntEvWoutF
Table 510:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AddrQueryEnbl
No
Yes
Yes
tApplConfTout
0.00 - 300.00
0.01
10.00
ApplMultFrgRes
No
Yes
Yes

response
918
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ConfMultFrag
No
Yes
Yes
UREnable
No
Yes
Yes
UREvClassMask
Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Disabled
UROfflineRetry
0 - 10

retry mode
tVRRetryDelay
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00
tVROfflRtryDel
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
30.00
UREvCntThold1
1 - 100

report treshold
tVREvBufTout1
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

timeout
UREvCntThold2
1 - 100

report treshold
tVREvBufTout2
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

timeout
UREvCntThold3
1 - 100

report treshold
tVREvBufTout3
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
5.00

timeout
DelOldBufFull
No
Yes
No
ExtTimeFormat
LocalTime
UTC
UTC
DNPToSetTime
No
Yes
No
tSynchTimeout
30 - 3600
1800

generated
TSyncReqAfTout
No
Yes
No
Averag3TimeReq
No
Yes
No
PairedPoint
No
Yes
Yes
Enable paired point
tSelectTimeout
1.0 - 60.0
0.1
30.0
Select timeout
tBrokenConTout
0 - 3600
tKeepAliveT
0 - 3600
10
Keep-Alive timer
Technical manual
919
Section 14
Control
14.9.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Operation principle
AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be
mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in
DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To
operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulseOn, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were
appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive
100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.
There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the
same way the setting Operation: Enabled/Disabled does. That means that, upon activation
of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The BLOCK acts like an
overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master. Upon deactivation of
BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3 master again,
momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the operator place. The
command can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Local then no
change is applied to the outputs.
14.10
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD
14.10.1
Identification
14.10.2
IEC 61850
identification
SINGLECMD
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from the
local HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to
control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.
920
Technical manual
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
14.10.3
Function block
SINGLECMD
BLOCK
ÔUT1
ÔUT2
ÔUT3
ÔUT4
ÔUT5
ÔUT6
ÔUT7
ÔUT8
ÔUT9
ÔUT10
ÔUT11
ÔUT12
ÔUT13
ÔUT14
ÔUT15
ÔUT16
IEC05000698 V3 EN
Figure 415:
14.10.4
SINGLECMD function block
Signals
Table 511:
Name
BLOCK
Table 512:
Name
SINGLECMD Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block single command function
SINGLECMD Output signals

Type
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Single command output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
OUT3
BOOLEAN
OUT4
BOOLEAN
OUT5
BOOLEAN
OUT6
BOOLEAN
OUT7
BOOLEAN
OUT8
BOOLEAN
OUT9
BOOLEAN
OUT10
BOOLEAN
OUT11
BOOLEAN
OUT12
BOOLEAN
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
921
Section 14
Control
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
14.10.5
Table 513:
Name
Operation
14.10.6
Type
Description
OUT14
BOOLEAN
OUT15
BOOLEAN
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Settings
SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Steady
Pulsed
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation principle
Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals. The
outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or from the
local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13 characters in
PCM600.
The output signals can be of the types Disabled, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration
setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function block.
The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode, SINGLECMD function has
a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also a BLOCK
input is available used to block the updating of the outputs.
The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in functions
or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.
922
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 15
Logic
15.1
Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94)
15.1.1
Identification
Tripping logic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
94
SMPPTRC
I->O
SYMBOL-K V1 EN
15.1.2
Functionality
A function block for protection tripping is always provided as basic for each circuit
breaker involved in the tripping of the fault. It provides a settable pulse prolongation to
ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct cooperation with autoreclosing functions.
The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for evolving faults and
breaker lock-out.
Technical manual
923
Section 15
Logic
15.1.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
SMPPTRC (94)
BLOCK
TRIP
BLKLKOUT
TR_A
TRINP_3P
TR_B
TRINP_A
TR_C
TRINP_B
TR1P
TRINP_C
TR2P
PS_A
TR3P
PS_B
CLLKOUT
PS_C
1PTRZ
1PTRGF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT
ANSI05000707 V2 EN
Figure 416:
15.1.4
Signals
Table 514:
Name
924
SMPPTRC (94) function block
SMPPTRC (94) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRINP_3P
BOOLEAN
Trip all phases
TRINP_A
BOOLEAN
Trip phase A
TRINP_B
BOOLEAN
Trip phase B
TRINP_C
BOOLEAN
Trip phase C
PS_A
BOOLEAN
Input from phase selection, phase A
PS_B
BOOLEAN
Input from phase selection, phase B
PS_C
BOOLEAN
Input from phase selection, phase C
1PTRZ
BOOLEAN
Zone Trip with a separate phase selection
1PTRGF
BOOLEAN
Single phase Directional Ground Fault Overcurrent Trip

with phase selection
P3PTR
BOOLEAN
Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 515:
SMPPTRC (94) Output signals
Name
15.1.5
Table 516:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General trip output signal
TR_A
BOOLEAN
TR_B
BOOLEAN
TR_C
BOOLEAN
TR1P
BOOLEAN
Tripping single-pole
TR2P
BOOLEAN
Tripping two-pole
TR3P
BOOLEAN
Tripping three-pole
CLLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)
Settings
SMPPTRC (94) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Program
3 phase
1p/3p
1p/2p/3p
1p/3p
Three pole; single or three pole; single, two or

three pole trip
tTripMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Minimum duration of trip output signal
tWaitForPHS
0.020 - 0.500
0.001
0.050
Secures 3-pole trip when phase selection

failed
Table 517:
Name
SMPPTRC (94) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TripLockout
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
If TripLockout is set to On, it will activate output

(CLLKOUT) and trip latch. If set to Off it will
activate only CLLKOUT
AutoLock
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
If AutoLock is set to On i will activate lockout

from input (SETLKOUT) and trip, If set to Off it
will activate only from SETLKOUT
15.1.6
Operation principle
The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic common 3-phase output
SMPPTRC (94) is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure
the breaker opening.
Technical manual
925
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
For three-pole tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC (94) has a single input
(TRINP_3P) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the
IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are
routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary
outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.
BLOCK
tTripMin
TRIN
AND
OR
TRIP
Operation Mode = Enabled

Program = 3 phase
ANSI10000266 V1 EN
Figure 417:
Simplified logic diagram for three pole trip
SMPPTRC (94) function for single-pole and two-pole tripping has additional phase
segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs
enable single- pole and two-pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own
phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip output and not phase
segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated trip inputs of the
expanded SMPPTRC (94) function. Examples of such protection functions are the
residual overcurrent protections. The expanded SMPPTRC (94) function has two inputs
for these functions, one for impedance tripping (for example, carrier-aided tripping
commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for ground fault tripping (for
example, tripping output from a residual overcurrent protection).
Additional logic, including a timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip command for
these protection functions in the absence of the required phase selection signals.
The expanded SMPPTRC (94) function has three trip outputs TR_A, TR_B, TR_C
(besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the IEDs
binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. There
are also separate output signals indicating single-pole, two-pole or three-pole trip. These
signals are important for cooperation with the autorecloser SMBRREC (79) function.
The expanded SMPPTRC (94) function is equipped with logic which secures correct
operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input
is also provided which disables single- pole and two-pole tripping, forcing all tripping to
be three-pole.
In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC (94) function block is used for each
breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and autoreclosing is used.
926
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from
another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three-pole trip, if
desired.
It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing only
the choice is by setting TripLockout.
15.1.6.1
Logic diagram
TRINP_A
TRINP_B
OR
TRINP_C
OR
1PTRZ
1PTRGF
OR
TRINP_3P
AND
INTL_ABCTRIP
Program = 3 phase
ANSI05000517 V3 EN
Figure 418:
Three-phase front logic simplified logic diagram
Technical manual
927
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
TRINP_3P
TRINP_A
PS_A
TR_A
OR
AND
TRINP_B
TR_B
PS_B
OR
AND
TRINP_C
PS_C
TR_C
OR
AND
OR
OR
OR
- loop
-loop
OR
AND
1PTRGF
AND
AND
AND
tWaitForPHS
OR
1PTRZ
ANSI10000056 V3 EN
Figure 419:
928
Phase segregated front logic
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
ANSI05000519 V3 EN
Figure 420:
Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode
Technical manual
929
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BLOCK
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
tTripMin
tEvolvingFault
ANSI05000520 V4 EN
Figure 421:
930
Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
ANSI05000521-3.vsd
ANSI05000521 V3 EN
Figure 422:
15.1.7
Final tripping circuits
Technical data
Table 518:
SMPPTRC (94) technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip action
3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph
Minimum trip pulse length
(0.000-60.000) s
greater
3-pole trip delay
(0.020-0.500) s
greater
Evolving fault delay
(0.000-60.000) s
greater
Table 519:
Number of SMPPTRC instances
Function
SMPPTRC
Quantity with cycle time

3 ms
8 ms
100 ms
12
Technical manual
931
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.2
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC
15.2.1
Identification
Trip matrix logic
15.2.2
IEC 61850
identification
TMAGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The trip matrix logic TMAGAPC function is used to route trip signals and other logical
output signals to different output contacts on the IED.
The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected to
physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable pulse or
steady output.
932
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.2.3
Function block
TMAGAPC
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
BLK3
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
IEC13000197 V1 EN
Figure 423:
15.2.4
TMAGAPC function block
Signals
Table 520:
Name
TMAGAPC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of output 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of output 2
BLK3
BOOLEAN
Block of output 3
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4

Technical manual
933
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary input 16
INPUT17
BOOLEAN
Binary input 17
INPUT18
BOOLEAN
Binary input 18
INPUT19
BOOLEAN
Binary input 19
INPUT20
BOOLEAN
Binary input 20
INPUT21
BOOLEAN
Binary input 21
INPUT22
BOOLEAN
Binary input 22
INPUT23
BOOLEAN
Binary input 23
INPUT24
BOOLEAN
Binary input 24
INPUT25
BOOLEAN
Binary input 25
INPUT26
BOOLEAN
Binary input 26
INPUT27
BOOLEAN
Binary input 27
INPUT28
BOOLEAN
Binary input 28
INPUT29
BOOLEAN
Binary input 29
INPUT30
BOOLEAN
Binary input 30
INPUT31
BOOLEAN
Binary input 31
INPUT32
BOOLEAN
Binary input 32
Table 521:
Name
934
Type
INPUT5
TMAGAPC Output signals

Type
Description
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
OR function between inputs 1 to 32
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.2.5
Table 522:
Name
Settings
TMAGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PulseTime
0.050 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Output pulse time
OnDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Output on delay time
OffDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Output off delay time
ModeOutput1
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed
ModeOutput2
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed
ModeOutput3
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed
15.2.6
Operation principle
The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output
signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide
grouping of connected input signals to the three output signals from the function block.
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
1.
2.
3.
when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1 the
first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical value
1 the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1 the
third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.
By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime, OnDelay

and OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The OnDelay is always
active and will delay the input to output transition by the set time. The ModeOutput for
respective output decides whether the output shall be steady with an drop-off delay as set
by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse with duration set by PulseTime. Note that for pulsed
operation and that the inputs are connected in an OR-function, a new pulse will only be
given on the output if all related inputs are reset and then one is activated again. For steady
operation the OffDelay will pickup when all related inputs have reset. Detailed logical
diagram is shown in figure 424
Technical manual
935
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PulseTime
AND
ModeOutput1
INPUT 1
0-OnDelay
0
OR
INPUT 16
0
0-OffDelay
OR
AND
OUTPUT 1
PulseTime
AND
ModeOutput2
INPUT 17
0-OnDelay
0
OR
INPUT 32
0
0-OffDelay
OR
AND
OUTPUT 2
PulseTime
AND
ModeOutput3
OR
0-OnDelay
0
0
0-OffDelay
OR
AND
OUTPUT 3
ANSI10000055 V3 EN
Figure 424:
Trip matrix internal logic
Output signals from TMAGAPC are typically connected to other logic blocks or directly
to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit breaker(s) the
pulse time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain satisfactory minimum
duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.
15.2.7
Technical data
Table 523:
Function
TMAGAPC
936
Number of TMAGAPC instances

3 ms
6

8 ms
6
100 ms
-
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.3
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH
15.3.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Logic for group alarm
15.3.2
IEC 60617
identification
ALMCALH
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route several alarm signals to a
common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.
15.3.3
Function block
ALMCALH
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
ALARM
IEC13000181 V1 EN
15.3.4
Signals
Table 524:
Name
ALMCALH Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5

Technical manual
937
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Binary input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary input 16
ALMCALH Output signals
Name
Type
ALARM
Table 526:
Name
Operation
15.3.6
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 525:
15.3.5
Default
INPUT6
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
ALMCALH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation principle
The logic for group alarm ALMCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and one
ALARM output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to
provide grouping of connected input signals to the output ALARM signal from the
function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the ALARM
output signal will get logical value 1.
The function has a drop-off delay of 200 ms when all inputs are reset to provide a steady
signal.
938
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Input 1
Input 16
ALARM
200 ms
0
ANSI13000191 V1 EN
Figure 425:
15.3.7
Group alarm logic
Technical data
Table 527:
Number of ALMCALH instances
Function
ALMCALH
3 ms

8 ms
15.4
Logic for group warning WRNCALH
15.4.1
Identification
Logic for group warning
15.4.2
IEC 61850
identification
WRNCALH
100 ms
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The group warning logic function WRNCALH is used to route several warning signals to
a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.
Technical manual
939
Section 15
Logic
15.4.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
WRNCALH
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
WARNING
IEC13000182 V1 EN
15.4.4
Signals
Table 528:
Name
940
WRNCALH Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary input 16
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 529:
WRNCALH Output signals
Name
Type
WARNING
15.4.5
Table 530:
Name
Operation
15.4.6
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
WRNCALH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Disabled
Operation principle
The logic for group warning WRNCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1
WARNING output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order
to provide grouping of connected input signals to the output WARNING signal from the
function block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the
WARNING output signal will get logical value 1.
signal.
INPUT1
1
WARNING
200 ms
0
INPUT16
ANSI13000192 V1 EN
15.4.7
Technical data
Table 531:
Function
WRNCALH
Number of WRNCALH instances

3 ms
-

8 ms
-
Technical manual
100 ms
5
941
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.5
Logic for group indication INDCALH
15.5.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Logic for group indication
15.5.2
IEC 60617
identification
INDCALH
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route several indication signals
to a common indication, LED and/or contact, in the IED.
15.5.3
Function block
INDCALH
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
IND
IEC13000183 V1 EN
15.5.4
Signals
Table 532:
Name
INDCALH Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5

942
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Binary input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary input 16
INDCALH Output signals
Name
Type
IND
Table 534:
Name
Operation
15.5.6
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 533:
15.5.5
Default
INPUT6
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
INDCALH Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation principle
The logic for group indication INDCALH block is provided with 16 input signals and 1
IND output signal. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gate in order to
provide grouping of connected input signals to the output IND signal from the function
block.
When any one of 16 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1, the IND
output signal will get logical value 1.
signal.
Technical manual
943
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
INPUT1
1
IND
200 ms
0
INPUT16
ANSI13000193 V1 EN
15.5.7
Technical data
Table 535:
Function
INDCALH
15.6
Number of INDCALH instances

3 ms
-

8 ms
5
100 ms
-
Basic configurable logic blocks

The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagate the time stamp and quality of signals
(have no suffix QT at the end of their function name). A number of logic blocks and timers
are always available as basic for the user to adapt the configuration to the specific
application needs. The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their
features.
These logic blocks are also available as part of an extension logic package with the same
number of instances.
944
AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.
GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass from
the input to the output.
INVERTER function block that inverts one input signal to the output.
LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.
OR function block. Each block has up to six inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.6.1
PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.
RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two
inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state
it had before the power interruption. RESET input has priority.
SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two
inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory
setting controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state
it had before the power interruption. The SET input has priority.
TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the input
signal. The timer has a settable time delay.
XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.
AND function block AND

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The AND function block has up to four inputs and two outputs. One of the
outputs is inverted.
15.6.1.1
Function block
AND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
OUT
NOUT
IEC14000071 V1 EN
Figure 426:
AND function block
Technical manual
945
Section 15
Logic
15.6.1.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 536:
AND Input signals
Name
Type
Input signal 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input signal 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input signal 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input signal 4
AND Output signals
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Inverted output signal
Technical data
Table 538:
Number of AND instances
Logic block

8 ms
3 ms
AND
15.6.2
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 537:
15.6.1.3
Default
INPUT1
60
60
100 ms
160
Controllable gate function block GATE

The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal should be
able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.
15.6.2.1
Function block
GATE
INPUT
OUT
IEC04000410 V2 EN
Figure 427:
15.6.2.2
Signals
Table 539:
Name
INPUT
946
GATE function block
GATE Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Input to gate
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 540:
GATE Output signals
Name
Type
OUT
15.6.2.3
Table 541:
Name
Operation
15.6.2.4
Description
BOOLEAN
Output from gate
Settings
GATE Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Disabled
Enabled
Step
Default
Description
Disabled
Technical data
Table 542:
Number of GATE instances
Logic block

8 ms
3 ms
GATE
10
10
15.6.3
Inverter function block INV
15.6.3.1
Function block
100 ms
20
INV
INPUT
OUT
IEC04000404 V2 EN
Figure 428:
15.6.3.2
INV function block
Signals
Table 543:
Name
INPUT
Table 544:
Name
OUT
INV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Input
INV Output signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Description
Output
Technical manual
947
Section 15
Logic
15.6.3.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 545:
Number of INV instances
Logic block
INV
15.6.4

8 ms
3 ms
90
90
100 ms
240
Loop delay function block LLD

The Logic loop delay function block (LLD) function is used to delay the output signal one
execution cycle, that is, the cycle time of the function blocks used.
15.6.4.1
Function block
LLD
INPUT
OUT
IEC15000144.vsd
IEC15000144 V1 EN
Figure 429:
15.6.4.2
LLD function block
Signals
Table 546:
LLD Input signals
Name
Type
INPUT
Table 547:
BOOLEAN
Type
OUT
Description
Input signal
BOOLEAN
Description
Output signal delayed one execution cycle
Technical data
Table 548:
Logic block
LLD
948
LLD Output signals
Name
15.6.4.3
Default
Number of LLD instances

3 ms
10

8 ms
10
100 ms
20
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.6.5
OR function block OR
The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean variables.
The OR function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
15.6.5.1
Function block
OR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
OUT
NOUT
IEC04000405 V2 EN
Figure 430:
15.6.5.2
OR function block
Signals
Table 549:
OR Input signals
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
Input 1 to OR gate
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input 2 to OR gate
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input 3 to OR gate
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input 4 to OR gate
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Input 5 to OR gate
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Input 6 to OR gate
Table 550:
OR Output signals
Name
15.6.5.3
Default
INPUT1
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output from OR gate
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Inverted output from OR gate
Technical data
Table 551:
Logic block
OR
Number of OR instances
3 ms
60

8 ms
60
Technical manual
100 ms
160
949
Section 15
Logic
15.6.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER

The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting the operation time of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length. When the
input is 1, the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter t. Then it returns
to 0.
15.6.6.1
Function block
PULSETIMER
INPUT
OUT
IEC04000407 V3 EN
Figure 431:
15.6.6.2
PULSETIMER function block
Signals
Table 552:
PULSETIMER Input signals
Name
Type
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Table 553:
Name
t
15.6.6.4
Input to pulse timer
Description
BOOLEAN
Output from pulse timer
Settings
PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
0.000 - 90000.000
Unit
Step
Default
0.001
Description
0.010
Time delay of function
Technical data
Table 555:
Number of PULSETIMER instances
Logic block

3 ms
8 ms
100 ms
PULSETIMER
950
Type
OUT
Table 554:
Description
PULSETIMER Output signals
Name
15.6.6.3
Default
10
10
20
Range or Value
(0.00090000.000) s
Accuracy
0.5% 10 ms
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.6.7
Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY

The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory
that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY function
block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power
interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption.
For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher priority over SET input.
Table 556:
Truth table for RSMEMORY function block
RESET
15.6.7.1
SET
OUT
NOUT
Last
value
Inverted last
value
Function block
RSMEMORY
SET
RESET
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000294 V1 EN
Figure 432:
15.6.7.2
RSMEMORY function block
Signals
Table 557:
Name
RSMEMORY Input signals

Type
Default
Description
SET
BOOLEAN
Input signal to set
RESET
BOOLEAN
Input signal to reset
Table 558:
Name
RSMEMORY Output signals

Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
951
Section 15
Logic
15.6.7.3
Table 559:
Name
Memory
15.6.7.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Settings
RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Disabled
Enabled
Step
Description
Enabled
Operating mode of the memory function
Technical data
Table 560:
Number of RSMEMORY instances
Logic block

8 ms
3 ms
RSMEMORY
15.6.8
Default
10
10
100 ms
20
Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY

The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory that
can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block
has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power
interruption, the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption.
The input SET has priority.
Table 561:
SET
15.6.8.1
Truth table for SRMEMORY function block

RESET
OUT
NOUT
Last
value
Inverted
last value
Function block
SRMEMORY
SET
OUT
RESET
NOUT
IEC04000408 V2 EN
Figure 433:
952
SRMEMORY function block
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.6.8.2
Signals
Table 562:
SRMEMORY Input signals
Name
Type
Input signal to set
RESET
BOOLEAN
SRMEMORY Output signals
Name
Table 564:
Name
Memory
15.6.8.4
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Enabled
Technical data
Table 565:
Logic block
SRMEMORY
15.6.9
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 563:
15.6.8.3
Default
SET
Number of SRMEMORY instances

3 ms
10

8 ms
10
100 ms
20
Settable timer function block TIMERSET

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has two outputs for the delay of the
input signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an
Operation setting Enabled and Disabled that controls the operation of the timer.
Technical manual
953
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Input
tdelay
On
Off
tdelay
t
IEC08000289 V2 EN
Figure 434:
15.6.9.1
TIMERSET status diagram
Function block
TIMERSET
INPUT
ON
OFF
IEC04000411 V2 EN
Figure 435:
15.6.9.2
Signals
Table 566:
Name
INPUT
Table 567:
Name
954
TIMERSET function block
TIMERSET Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Input to timer
TIMERSET Output signals

Type
Description
ON
BOOLEAN
Output from timer, pickup delay
OFF
BOOLEAN
Output from timer, dropout delay
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.6.9.3
Table 568:
Name
Settings
TIMERSET Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
0.000 - 90000.000
0.001
0.000
Delay for settable timer n
15.6.9.4
Technical data
Table 569:
Number of TIMERSET instances
Logic block

3 ms
8 ms
100 ms
TIMERSET
15.6.10
15
15
30
Range or Value
(0.00090000.000) s
Accuracy
0.5% 10 ms
Exclusive OR function block XOR

The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.
Table 570:
Truth table for XOR function block
INPUT1
15.6.10.1
INPUT2
OUT
NOUT
Function block
XOR
INPUT1
INPUT2
OUT
NOUT
IEC04000409 V2 EN
Figure 436:
XOR function block
Technical manual
955
Section 15
Logic
15.6.10.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 571:
XOR Input signals
Name
Type
Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input 2 to XOR gate
XOR Output signals
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output from XOR gate
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Inverted output from XOR gate
Technical data
Table 573:
Logic block
XOR
15.7
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 572:
15.6.10.3
Default
INPUT1
Number of XOR instances

3 ms
10

8 ms
10
100 ms
20

The configurable logic blocks QT propagate the time stamp and the quality of the input
signals (have suffix QT at the end of their function name). The propagation of information
is part of the IEC 61850 capabilities.
The function blocks assist the user to adapt the IEDs' configuration to the specific
application needs. The list below shows a summary of the function blocks and their
features.
956
ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates the time stamp and the
quality of input signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.
INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group signal. Single position

input is copied to value part of SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied to time part of
SP_OUT output. Quality input bits are copied to the corresponding quality part of
SP_OUT output.
INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group signal input. The value part
of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output. The time part of single position
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
input is copied to TIME output. The quality bits in the common part and the indication
part of inputs signal are copied to the corresponding quality output.
INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid"

input. Inputs are copied to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality invalid bit is
set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The time stamp of an output
will be set to the latest time stamp of INPUT and VALID inputs.
INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal and propagates the time
stamp and the quality of the input signal.
ORQT OR function block that also propagates the time stamp and the quality of the
input signals. Each block has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.
PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, for example, for pulse
extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The function also propagates the time
stamp and the quality of the input signal.
RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the
state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates the time stamp
and the quality of the input signal.
SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the
state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates the time stamp
and the quality of the input signal.
TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay. The function also propagates the
time stamp and the quality of the input signal.
XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates the time stamp and the
quality of the input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.
Technical manual
957
Section 15
Logic
15.7.1
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
ANDQT function block

The ANDQT function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The ANDQT function block has four inputs and two outputs. It can propagate
the quality, value and timestamps of the signals via IEC61850.
15.7.1.1
Function block
ANDQT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000297 V1 EN
Figure 437:
15.7.1.2
ANDQT function block
Signals
Table 574:
ANDQT Input signals
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Input signal 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input signal 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input signal 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input signal 4
ANDQT Output signals
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Technical data
Table 576:
Logic block
ANDQT
958
Description
INPUT1
Table 575:
15.7.1.3
Default
Number of ANDQT instances

3 ms
-

8 ms
20
100 ms
100
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.7.2
Single point indication related signals combining function block

INDCOMBSPQT
The value of single point input (SP_IN) is copied to the value part of the SP_OUT output.
The TIME input is copied to the time part of the SP_OUT output. State input bits are
copied to the corresponding state part of the SP_OUT output. If the state or value on the
SP_OUT output changes, the Event bit in the state part is toggled.
INDCOMBSPQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals
via IEC61850.
15.7.2.1
Function block
INDCOMBSPQT
SP_IN*
TIME*
BLOCKED*
SUBST*
INVALID*
TEST*
SP_OUT
IEC15000146.vsd
IEC15000146 V1 EN
Figure 438:
15.7.2.2
INDCOMBSPQT function block
Signals
Table 577:
Name
INDCOMBSPQT Input signals

Type
Default
Description
SP_IN
BOOLEAN
Single point indication
TIME
GROUP
SIGNAL
Timestamp
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
Blocked for update
SUBST
BOOLEAN
Substituted
INVALID
BOOLEAN
Invalid value
TEST
BOOLEAN
Testmode
Table 578:
Name
SP_OUT
INDCOMBSPQT Output signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Description
Single point indication
Technical manual
959
Section 15
Logic
15.7.2.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 579:
Number of INDCOMBSPQT instances
Logic block
INDCOMBSPQT
15.7.3

8 ms
3 ms
-
10
100 ms
10
Single point input signal attributes converting function block

INDEXTSPQT
The value part of the single point input signal SI_IN is copied to SI_OUT output. The time
part of single point input is copied to the TIME output. The state bits in the common part
and the indication part of the input signal are copied to the corresponding state output.
INDEXTSPQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals via
IEC61850.
15.7.3.1
Function block
INDEXTSPQT
SI_IN*
SI_OUT
TIME
BLOCKED
SUBST
INVALID
TEST
IEC14000067 V1 EN
Figure 439:
15.7.3.2
Signals
Table 580:
Name
SI_IN
960
INDEXTSPQT function block
INDEXTSPQT Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Single indication
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 581:
INDEXTSPQT Output signals
Name
15.7.3.3
Description
BOOLEAN
Single indication
TIME
GROUP SIGNAL
Timestamp of input
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
Blocked for update
SUBST
BOOLEAN
Substituted
INVALID
BOOLEAN
Invalid value
TEST
BOOLEAN
Testmode
Technical data
Table 582:
Logic block
INDEXTSPQT
15.7.4
Type
SI_OUT
Number of INDEXTSPQT instances

3 ms
-

8 ms
10
100 ms
10
Invalid logic function block INVALIDQT

Component which sets quality invalid of outputs according to a "valid" input.
The values of the input signals INPUTx (where 1<x<16) are copied to the outputs
OUTPUTx (where 1<x<16). If the input VALID is 0 or if its quality bit is set invalid, all
outputs OUTPUTx (where 1<x<16) quality bit will be set to invalid. The time stamp of
any output OUTPUTx (where 1<x<16) will be set to the latest time stamp of any input and
the input VALID.
INVALIDQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals via
IEC61850.
Technical manual
961
Section 15
Logic
15.7.4.1
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
INVALIDQT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
VALID
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
iec08000169.vsd
IEC08000169 V1 EN
Figure 440:
15.7.4.2
Signals
Table 583:
Name
962
INVALIDQT function block
INVALIDQT Input signals

Type
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Indication input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Indication input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Indication input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Indication input 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Indication input 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Indication input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Indication input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Indication input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Indication input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Indication input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Indication input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Indication input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Indication input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Indication input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Indication input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Indication input 16
VALID
BOOLEAN
Inputs are valid or invalid
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 584:
INVALIDQT Output signals
Name
15.7.4.3
Type
BOOLEAN
Indication output 1
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
Indication output 2
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
Indication output 3
OUTPUT4
BOOLEAN
Indication output 4
OUTPUT5
BOOLEAN
Indication output 5
OUTPUT6
BOOLEAN
Indication output 6
OUTPUT7
BOOLEAN
Indication output 7
OUTPUT8
BOOLEAN
Indication output 8
OUTPUT9
BOOLEAN
Indication output 9
OUTPUT10
BOOLEAN
Indication output 10
OUTPUT11
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT12
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT13
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT14
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT15
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT16
BOOLEAN
Technical data
Table 585:
Number of INVALIDQT instances
Logic block
3 ms
INVALIDQT
15.7.5
Description
OUTPUT1

8 ms
100 ms
6
Inverter function block INVERTERQT

The INVERTERQT function block inverts one binary input signal to the output. It can
propagate the quality, value and the time stamps of the signals via IEC61850.
15.7.5.1
Function block
INVERTERQT
INPUT
OUT
IEC09000299 V1 EN
Figure 441:
INVERTERQT function block
Technical manual
963
Section 15
Logic
15.7.5.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 586:
INVERTERQT Input signals
Name
Type
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Table 587:
Type
OUT
BOOLEAN
Description
Input signal
Description
Output signal
Technical data
Table 588:
Number of INVERTERQT instances
Logic block
3 ms
INVERTERQT
15.7.6
INVERTERQT Output signals
Name
15.7.5.3
Default

8 ms
20
100 ms
100
ORQT function block

The ORQT function block (ORQT) is used to form general combinatory expressions OR
with boolean variables. ORQT function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One
of the outputs is inverted. It can propagate the quality, value and the timestamps of the
signals via IEC61850.
15.7.6.1
Function block
ORQT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000298 V1 EN
Figure 442:
15.7.6.2
964
ORQT function block
Signals
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 589:
ORQT Input signals
Name
Type
Input signal 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input signal 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input signal 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input signal 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Input signal 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Input signal 6
ORQT Output signals
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Technical data
Table 591:
Logic block
ORQT
15.7.7
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 590:
15.7.6.3
Default
INPUT1
Number of ORQT instances

3 ms
-

8 ms
20
100 ms
100
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMERQT

The pulse timer function block (PULSETIMERQT) can be used, for example, for pulse
extensions or for limiting the operation time of the outputs. PULSETIMERQT has a
settable output pulse length.
When the input goes to 1, the output will be 1 for the time set by the time delay parameter
t. Then it returns to 0.
When the output changes value, the time stamp of the output signal is updated.
The supported quality state bits are propagated from the input to the output at each
execution cycle. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated time stamp on the
output.
PULSETIMERQT can propagate the quality, value and the time stamps of the signals via
IEC61850.
Technical manual
965
Section 15
Logic
15.7.7.1
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
PULSETIMERQT
INPUT
OUT
IEC15000145.vsd
IEC15000145 V1 EN
Figure 443:
15.7.7.2
PULSETIMERQT function block
Signals
Table 592:
PULSETIMERQT Input signals
Name
Type
INPUT
Table 593:
Name
t
15.7.7.4
Description
BOOLEAN
Output signal
Settings
PULSETIMERQT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
0.000 - 90000.000
Unit
Step
Default
0.001
Description
0.010
Pulse time length
Technical data
Table 595:
Number of PULSETIMERQT instances
Logic block

3 ms
8 ms
100 ms
PULSETIMERQT
15.7.8
Input signal
Type
OUT
Table 594:
Description
PULSETIMERQT Output signals
Name
15.7.7.3
Default
BOOLEAN
10
30
Range or Value
(0.00090000.000) s
Accuracy
0.5% 10 ms
Reset/Set function block RSMEMORYQT

The Reset-set function (RSMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can reset or set
an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORYQT function block has two
outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power interruption,
966
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption. For a ResetSet flip-flop, the RESET input has higher priority than the SET input.
RSMEMORYQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals
via IEC61850.
Table 596:
Truth table for RSMEMORYQT function block
RESET
15.7.8.1
SET
OUT
NOUT
Last
value
Inverted last
value
Function block
RSMEMORYQT
SET
RESET
OUT
NOUT
IEC14000069 V1 EN
Figure 444:
15.7.8.2
RSMEMORYQT function block
Signals
Table 597:
Name
RSMEMORYQT Input signals

Type
Default
Description
SET
BOOLEAN
Input signal to set
RESET
BOOLEAN
Table 598:
Name
RSMEMORYQT Output signals

Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
967
Section 15
Logic
15.7.8.3
Table 599:
Name
Memory
15.7.8.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Settings
RSMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Disabled
Enabled
Step
Description
Enabled
Technical data
Table 600:
Number of RSMEMORYQT instances
Logic block

8 ms
3 ms
RSMEMORYQT
15.7.9
Default
10
100 ms
30
Set/Reset function block SRMEMORYQT

The Set-reset function (SRMEMORYQT) is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset
an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORYQT function block has two
outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if, after a power interruption,
the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had before the power interruption. The SET
input has priority.
SRMEMORYQT can propagate the quality, the value and the time stamps of the signals
via IEC61850.
Table 601:
SET
Truth table for SRMEMORYQT function block

RESET
OUT
NOUT
Last
value
Inverted
last value
If Memory parameter is Enabled, the output result is stored in semi-retained memory.
968
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.7.9.1
Function block
SRMEMORYQT
SET
RESET
OUT
NOUT
IEC14000070 V1 EN
Figure 445:
15.7.9.2
SRMEMORYQT function block
Signals
Table 602:
SRMEMORYQT Input signals
Name
Type
Input signal to set
RESET
BOOLEAN
SRMEMORYQT Output signals
Name
Table 604:
Name
Memory
15.7.9.4
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
SRMEMORYQT Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Enabled
Technical data
Table 605:
Logic block
SRMEMORYQT
15.7.10
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 603:
15.7.9.3
Default
SET
Number of SRMEMORYQT instances

3 ms
-

8 ms
10
100 ms
30
Settable timer function block TIMERSETQT
Technical manual
969
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The Settable timer function block (TIMERSETQT) has two outputs for delay of the input
signal at pick-up and drop-out. The timer has a settable time delay (t). It also has an
Operation setting On/Off that controls the operation of the timer.
When the output changes value, the timestamp of the output signal is updated. The
supported quality state bits are propagated from the input to the output at each execution
cycle. A change of these bits will not lead to an updated timestamp on the output.
TIMERSETQT can propagate the quality, value and the timestamps of the signals via
IEC61850.
15.7.10.1
Function block
TIMERSETQT
INPUT
ON
OFF
IEC14000068 V1 EN
Figure 446:
15.7.10.2
TIMERSETQT function
Signals
Table 606:
TIMERSETQT Input signals
Name
Type
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Table 607:
Table 608:
Name
Description
Input signal
TIMERSETQT Output signals
Name
15.7.10.3
Default
Type
Description
ON
BOOLEAN
Output signal, pick-up delayed
OFF
BOOLEAN
Output signal, drop-out delayed
Settings
TIMERSETQT Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
0.000 - 90000.000
0.001
0.000
Delay for settable timer n
970
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.7.10.4
Technical data
Table 609:
Number of TIMERSETQT instances
Logic block

3 ms
8 ms
100 ms
TIMERSETQT
15.7.11
10
Range or Value
30
(0.00090000.000) s
Accuracy
0.5% 10 ms
Exclusive OR function block XORQT

The exclusive OR function (XORQT) function is used to generate combinatory
expressions with boolean variables. XORQT function has two inputs and two outputs.
One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different
and 0 if they are equal.
Table 610:
Truth table for XORQT function block
INPUT1
INPUT2
OUT
NOUT
XORQT can propagate the quality, value and time stamps of the signals via IEC61850.
15.7.11.1
Function block
XORQT
INPUT1
INPUT2
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000300 V1 EN
Figure 447:
15.7.11.2
XORQT function block
Signals
Table 611:
Name
XORQT Input signals

Type
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Input signal 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input signal 2
Technical manual
971
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 612:
XORQT Output signals
Name
15.7.11.3
Type
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Technical data
Table 613:
Number of XORQT instances
Logic block
3 ms
XORQT
15.8
Description
OUT

8 ms
10
100 ms
30
Extension logic package

When extra configurable logic blocks are required, an additional package can be ordered.
Table 614:
Number of instances in the extension logic package
Logic block
972
3 ms

8 ms
100 ms
AND
40
40
100
GATE
49
INV
40
40
100
LLD
49
OR
40
40
100
PULSETIMER
49
SLGAPC
10
10
54
SRMEMORY
110
TIMERSET
49
VSGAPC
10
10
110
XOR
49
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.9
Fixed signals FXDSIGN
15.9.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Fixed signals
15.9.2
IEC 60617
identification
FXDSIGN
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be
used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function
blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer, floating
point, string types of signals are available.
One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.
15.9.3
Function block
FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF
IEC05000445 V3 EN
Figure 448:
15.9.4
FXDSIGN function block
Signals
Table 615:
Name
FXDSIGN Output signals

Type
Description
OFF
BOOLEAN
Boolean signal fixed off
ON
BOOLEAN
Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO
INTEGER
Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE
INTEGER
Integer signal fixed one
INTALONE
INTEGER
Integer signal fixed all ones
Technical manual
973
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
15.9.5
Type
Description
REALZERO
REAL
Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL
STRING
String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL
GROUP SIGNAL
Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF
GROUP SIGNAL
Group signal fixed off
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and Control
IED Manager (PCM600).
15.9.6
Operation principle
There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value

ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value
STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value
ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value
15.10
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I
15.10.1
Identification
Boolean 16 to integer conversion
IEC 61850
identification
B16I
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary

(logical) signals into an integer.
974
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.10.2
Function block
B16I
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
OUT
IEC07000128 V2 EN
Figure 449:
15.10.3
B16I function block
Signals
Table 616:
Name
B16I Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
Technical manual
975
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 617:
B16I Output signals
Name
Type
OUT
15.10.4
Output value
Monitored data
Table 618:
B16I Monitored data
Name
Type
OUT
15.10.5
Description
INTEGER
Values (Range)
INTEGER
Unit
Description
Output value
Settings
15.10.6
Operation principle
The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of up to
16 binary inputs INx, where 1x16, to an integer. Each INx represents a value according
to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where
1x16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output
OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an
integer. When all INx (where 1x16) are activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to
that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. The B16I function is designed for
receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the output at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1x16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT
on the function block B16I
Name of input
Type
Default
Description
Value when
activated
Value when
deactivated
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
16
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
32
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
64
976
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name of input
Type
Default
Description
Value when
activated
Value when
deactivated
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
128
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
256
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
512
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
1024
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
2048
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
4096
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
8192
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
16384
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
32768
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where 1x16)
are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to
an integer by the B16I function block.
15.10.7
Technical data
Table 619:
Number of B16I instances
Function
B16I

8 ms
3 ms
6
100 ms
8
15.11
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node

representation BTIGAPC
15.11.1
Identification
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with
logic node representation
IEC 61850
identification
BTIGAPC
Technical manual
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
977
Section 15
Logic
15.11.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function BTIGAPC is
used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The block input will
freeze the output at the last value.
BTIGAPC can receive remote values via IEC 61850 depending on the operator position
input (PSTO).
15.11.3
Function block
BTIGAPC
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
OUT
IEC13000303 V1 EN
Figure 450:
15.11.4
BTIGAPC function block
Signals
Table 620:
Name
BTIGAPC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
978
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Input 10
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
Table 621:
Name
OUT
15.11.5
Type
IN10
BTIGAPC Output signals

Type
Description
INTEGER
Output value
Settings
15.11.6
Monitored data
Table 622:
Name
OUT
15.11.7
BTIGAPC Monitored data

Type
INTEGER
Values (Range)
-
Unit
-
Description
Output value
Operation principle
The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
(BTIGAPC) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx, where 1x16, to
an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This
follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1x16. The sum of all the values on the
activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the integer values of all the
inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx (where 1x16) are
activated, that is = Boolean 1, it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the
output OUT. The BTIGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a
station computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1x16.
Technical manual
979
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
on the function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input
Type
Default
Description
Value when
activated
Value when
deactivated
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
16
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
32
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
64
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
128
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
256
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
512
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
1024
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
2048
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
4096
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
8192
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
16384
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
32768
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where 1x16)
are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to
an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.
15.11.8
Technical data
Table 623:
Function
BTIGAPC
980
Number of BTIGAPC instances

3 ms
4

8 ms
4
100 ms
8
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.12
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16
15.12.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Integer to boolean 16 conversion
15.12.2
IEC 60617
identification
IB16
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16 is used to transform an integer into a set
of 16 binary (logical) signals.
15.12.3
Function block
IB16
BLOCK
INP
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
ANSI06000501 V1 EN
Figure 451:
15.12.4
IB16 function block
Signals
Table 624:
Name
IB16 Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INP
INTEGER
Integer Input
Technical manual
981
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 625:
Name
15.12.5
IB16 Output signals

Type
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
15.12.6
Operation principle
With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5x16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance
with the table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1, OUT2
has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of these OUTx
is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.
This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where
1x16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.
982
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with a value
between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated outputs
OUTx where 1x16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal to the integer
on input INP. The values of the different OUTx are according to the table below. When an
OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.
When all OUTx where 1x16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that
integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for receiving the
integer input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at
the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1x16.
on the function block IB16.
Name of OUTx
Type
Description
Value when
activated
Value when
deactivated
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
16
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
32
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
64
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
128
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
256
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
512
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
1024
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
2048
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13
4096
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
8192
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
16384
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
32768
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx (where x = 1
to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be converted by
the IB16 function block.
Technical manual
983
Section 15
Logic
15.12.7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 626:
Number of IB16 instances
Function

8 ms
3 ms
IB16
100 ms
8
15.13
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC
15.13.1
Identification
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with
logic node representation
15.13.2
IEC 61850
identification
ITBGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function ITBGAPC is used
to transform an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by the function
to 16 binary coded (logic) output signals.
ITBGAPC function can only receive remote values over IEC 61850 when the R/L
(Remote/Local) push button on the front HMI, indicates that the control mode for the
operator is in position R (Remote i.e. the LED adjacent to R is lit ), and the corresponding
signal is connected to the input PSTO ITBGAPC function block. The input BLOCK will
freeze the output at the last received value and blocks new integer values to be received
and converted to binary coded outputs.
984
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.13.3
Function block
ITBGAPC
BLOCK
PSTO
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
IEC14000012 V1 EN
Figure 452:
15.13.4
ITBGAPC function block
Signals
Table 627:
Name
ITBGAPC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
Table 628:
Name
ITBGAPC Output signals

Type
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13

Technical manual
985
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
15.13.5
Type
Description
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
Settings
This function does not have any setting parameters.
15.13.6
Operation principle
An example is used to explain the principle of operation: With integer 15 sent to and
received by the ITBGAPC function on the IEC61850 the OUTx changes from 0 to 1 on
each of the OUT1; OUT2 OUT3 and OUT4. All other OUTx (5x16) remains 0. The
boolean interpretation of this is represented by the assigned values of each of the outputs
OUT1 = 1; and OUT2 = 2; and OUT3= 4; and OUT4 = 8. The sum of these OUTx (1x4)
is equal to the integer 15 received via the IEC61850 network. The remaining OUTx = 0
for (5x16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in accordance
with the Table 629. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
The value of each OUTx for 1x16 (1x16) follows the general formulae: OUTx = 2x-1
The sum of the values of all activated OUTx = 2x-1 where 1x16 will be equal to the
integer value received over IEC61850 to the ITBGAPC_1 function block.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function
(ITBGAPC) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated via
IEC61850 and connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a combination of activated
outputs OUTx where 1x16. The values represented by the different OUTx are
according to Table 629. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.
The ITBGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a station
computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze
the logical outputs at the last value.
Table 629:
Outputs and their values when activated
Name of OUTx
Type
Description
Value when
activated
Value when
deactivated
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
986
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name of OUTx
Type
Description
Value when
activated
Value when
deactivated
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
16
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
32
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
64
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
128
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
256
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
512
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
1024
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
2048
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13
4096
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
8192
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
16384
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
32768
The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx (1x16) are
active equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted to boolean by the
ITBGAPC function block.
The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number
that is communicated to the ITBGAPC can only be written to the block while the PSTO
is in position Remote. If PSTO is in position Off or Local, then no changes are
applied to the outputs.
15.13.7
Technical data
Table 630:
Function
ITBGAPC
15.14
Number of ITBGAPC instances

3 ms
4

8 ms
4
100 ms
8
Pulse integrator TIGAPC
Technical manual
987
Section 15
Logic
15.14.1
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Pulse integrator
15.14.2
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
TIGAPC
Functionality
The integrator function TIGAPC integrates input pulses and compares the integrated time
with a settable time delay to operate. Moreover, the time delay to reset the output is
settable in this function.
15.14.3
Function block
TIGAPC
IN
OUT
ANSI14000062 V1 EN
Figure 453:
15.14.4
TIGAPC function block
Signals
Table 631:
TIGAPC Input signals
Name
Type
IN
BOOLEAN
Table 632:
Type
OUT
Table 633:
Name
Description
Input to integrator
TIGAPC Output signals
Name
15.14.5
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Output from integrator
Settings
TIGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tDelay
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
1.000
Time delay to operate
tReset
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
1.000
Time delay to reset
988
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.14.6
Operation principle
In the pulse integrator TIGAPC, the time during which the input is high is integrated. This
means there is no output until the sum of the input pulses equals the set time delay to
operate. The output is deactivated when the input signal is FALSE and the time delay to
reset has elapsed.
1
In
t int
t Reset
0
t Delay
Integration
Out
t
IEC13000175 V2 EN
Figure 454:
IN pulse length sufficient for integration to reach the set tDelay, OUT is set
until the tReset time has elapsed, which resets tDelay and OUT
t Reset
In
t int
t Delay
Integration
Out
IEC13000174=2=en.vsd
IEC13000174 V1 EN
Figure 455:
IN pulse too short for integration to reach the set tDelay
Technical manual
989
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
t Reset
In
t int
t Delay
Integration
Out
t Reset
t Reset
t
IEC13000176 V1 EN
Figure 456:
IN pulse too short for integration to reach the set tDelay, and tReset resets
integration before next pulse can be integrated.
t Reset
In
tReset
t int
t Delay
Integration
tReset
Out
t
IEC13000177 V2 EN
Figure 457:
tint
The next IN pulse is received before tReset has elapsed. Sufficient time
during the pulses is accumulated to reach tDelay. When tDelay is reached,
OUT is set until tReset time has elapsed, which resets tDelay and OUT.
integration time
tReset time delay to reset

tDelay
990
time delay to operate
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 634:
TIGAPC technical data
Function
Cycle time (ms)
Time integration
continuous active
Range of value
Accuracy
greater
0-999999.99 s
Time integration
continuous active
0-999999.99 s
greater
Time integration
continuous active
100
0-999999.99 s

greater
Table 635:
Number of TIGAPC instances
Function
TIGAPC

8 ms
3 ms
-
30
100 ms
-
15.15
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC
15.15.1
Identification
Function Description
Elapsed time integrator
15.15.2
IEC 61850
identification
TEIGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

number
-
Functionality
Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed
time when a given binary signal has been high, see also Figure 458.
Technical manual
991
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BLOCK
RESET
IN
ACCTIME
Time Integration
with Retain
q-1
999 999 s
a>b
tWarning
a>b
tAlarm
q-1 = unit delay
a>b
AND
AND
AND
OVERFLOW
WARNING
ALARM
IEC13000290 V2 EN
Figure 458:
TEIGAPC logics
The main features of TEIGAPC
15.15.3
Applicable to long time integration up to 999 999.9 seconds

Supervision of overflow
Possibility to define a warning and an alarm with the resolution of 10 milliseconds
Retain the integration value
Possibilities for blocking and reset of the total integrated time
Report of the integrated time
Function block
TEIGAPC
BLOCK
IN
RESET
WARNING
ALARM
OVERFLOW
ACCTIME
IEC14000014 V1 EN
Figure 459:
992
TEIGAPC function block
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.15.4
Signals
Table 636:
TEIGAPC Input signals
Name
Type
Freeze the integration and block the other outputs
IN
BOOLEAN
The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed

time, when its value is high
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset the integration time
TEIGAPC Output signals
Name
Table 638:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 637:
15.15.5
Default
BLOCK
Type
Description
WARNING
BOOLEAN
Indicator of the integrated time has reached the warning

limit
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Indicator of the integrated time has reached the alarm

limit
OVERFLOW
BOOLEAN
Indicator of the integrated time has reached the overflow

limit
ACCTIME
REAL
Integrated elapsed time in seconds
Settings
TEIGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tWarning
1.00 - 999999.99
0.01
600.00
Time limit for warning supervision
tAlarm
1.00 - 999999.99
0.01
1200.00
Time limit for alarm supervision
15.15.6
Operation principle
The elapsed time integrator (TEIGAPC) provides
time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has been
high
blocking and reset of the total integrated time
supervision of limit transgression and overflow, the overflow limit is fixed to
999999.9 seconds
retaining of the integrated value
Technical manual
993
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Figure 460 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block Time
Integration covers the logics for the first two items listed above while the block
Transgression Supervision Plus Retain contains the logics for the last two.
Loop Delay
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
WARNING
Transgression Supervision
Plus Retain
ALARM
BLOCK
RESET
ACCTIME
Time Integration
IN
Loop Delay
IEC12000195 V3 EN
Figure 460:
TEIGAPC Simplified logic
TEIGAPC main functionalities
integration of the elapsed time when IN has been high
RESET: Reset of the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
unconditionally on the signal value

BLOCK request overrides RESET request
Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
994
unconditionally on the input IN value

reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero
BLOCK: Freeze the integration and block/reset the other outputs
applicable to long time integration (999 999.9 seconds)

output ACCTIME presents integrated value in seconds
integrated value is retained in nonvolatile memory
any retained value with a warning/alarm/overflow is used as initiation value for
the integration following by a restart
overflow if output ACCTIME >999999.9 seconds

alarm if ACCTIME > tAlarm
warning if ACCTIME > tWarning
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow, tAlarm
and tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.
tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is, there is
no check if tAlarm > tWarning.
tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms, depending on
the level of the defined values for the parameters.
The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds. The outputs freeze if
an overflow occurs.
15.15.6.1
Operation accuracy
The accuracy of TEIGAPC depends on essentially three factors
function cycle time

the pulse length
the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs
In principle, a shorter function cycle time, longer integrated time length or more pulses
may lead to reduced accuracy.
15.15.6.2
Memory storage
The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory.
15.15.7
Technical data
Table 639:
TEIGAPC Technical data
Function
Cycle time (ms)
Elapsed time integration
Table 640:
Function
TEIGAPC
Range or value
Accuracy
0 ~ 999999.9 s
0.2% or 20 ms
0 ~ 999999.9 s
0.2% or 100 ms
100
0 ~ 999999.9 s
0.2% or 250 ms
Number of TEIGAPC instances

3 ms
4

8 ms
4
Technical manual
100 ms
4
995
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.16
Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP
15.16.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Comparison of integer values
15.16.2
IEC 60617
identification
INTCOMP
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Int<=>
Functionality
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of integer values in the system
relative to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used
for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.
15.16.3
Function block
INTCOMP
INPUT
REF
INEQUAL
INHIGH
INLOW
IEC15000052 V1 EN
15.16.4
Signals
Table 641:
Name
Type
Default
Description
INPUT
INTEGER
Input value to be compared with reference value
REF
INTEGER
Reference value to be compared with input value
Table 642:
Name
996
INTCOMP Input signals
INTCOMP Output signals

Type
Description
INEQUAL
BOOLEAN
Input value is equal to the reference value
INHIGH
BOOLEAN
Input value is higher than the reference value
INLOW
BOOLEAN
Input value is lower than the reference value
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.16.5
Table 643:
Name
Settings
INTCOMP Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EnaAbs
Signed
Absolute
Signed
Selection for absolute or signed comparison
RefSource
Set Value
Input REF
Set Value
Selection for reference value either input or

setting
SetValue
-2000000000 2000000000
100
Set value for reference
15.16.6
Operation principle
The comparison can be done in two ways,
Between 2 inputs, INPUT and REF

Between INPUT and the value set by the user SetValue.
The selection of reference value for comparison can be done through setting RefSource. If
RefSource is selected as REF then the reference value for comparison is taken from second
input signal (REF). If RefSource is selected as SetValue then the reference value for
comparison is taken from setting (SetValue).
The comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values and it
depends on the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as Absolute then both input and
reference value is converted into absolute values and comparison is done. If EnaAbs is
selected as Signed then the comparison is done without any conversion.
The function has three state outputs high, low and equal to condition. It will check the
following condition and give corresponding outputs.
If the input is above the reference value then INHIGH will set
If the input is below the reference value then INLOW will set
If the input is equal to reference value then INEQUAL will set
Technical manual
997
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
EnaAbs
INPUT
ABS
b
a
INHIGH
a>b
INEQUAL
a=b
RefSource
REF
SetValue
ABS
INLOW
a<b
IEC15000129 V2 EN
Figure 461:
15.16.7
Function logic diagram for INTCOMP
Technical data
Table 644:
Number of INTCOMP instances
Function
3 ms
INTCOMP

8 ms
15.17
Comparator for real inputs - REALCOMP
15.17.1
Identification
Comparator for real inputs
15.17.2
IEC 61850
identification
REALCOMP
100 ms
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Real<=>
Functionality
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of real value signals in the system
relative to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used
for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.
998
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
15.17.3
Function block
REALCOMP
INPUT
REF
INEQUAL
INHIGH
INLOW
IEC15000053 V1 EN
15.17.4
Signals
Table 645:
REALCOMP Input signals
Name
Type
0.000
Input value to be compared with reference value
REF
REAL
0.000
Reference value to be compared with input value
REALCOMP Output signals
Name
Table 647:
Name
Description
REAL
Table 646:
15.17.5
Default
INPUT
Type
Description
INEQUAL
BOOLEAN
Input value is equal to the reference value
INHIGH
BOOLEAN
Input value is higher than the reference value
INLOW
BOOLEAN
Input value is lower than the reference value
Settings
REALCOMP Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EnaAbs
Signed
Absolute
Signed
Selection for absolute or signed comparison
RefSource
Set Value
Input REF
Set Value
Selection for reference value either input or

setting
SetValue
-999.999 - 999.999
0.001
0.001
Set value for reference
SetValPrefix
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
unit
Multiplication factor for SetValue
EqualBandHigh
0.10 - 10.00
0.01
0.50
Equal band high limit in % of reference value
EqualBandLow
0.10 - 10.00
0.01
0.50
Equal band low limit in % of reference value
Technical manual
999
Section 15
Logic
15.17.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Operation principle
The comparison can be done in two ways,
1.
2.
Between 2 inputs, INPUT and REF

Between INPUT and the value set by the user SetValue
The selection of reference value for comparison can be done through setting RefSource. If
RefSource is selected as REF then the reference value for comparison is taken from second
input signal (REF). If RefSource is selected as SetValue then the reference value for
comparison is taken from setting (SetValue).
Generally the inputs to the function are in SI units, but when the comparison is to be done
with respect to set level, then the user can set a value in any unit out of Milli to Giga range
in setting SetValue. The unit can be separately set with setting RefPrefix. Internally the
function handles the reference value for comparator as SetValue*RefPrefix.
Additionally the comparison can be done either between absolute values or signed values
and it depends on the setting EnaAbs. If EnaAbs is selected as Absolute then both input and
reference value is converted into absolute values and comparison is done. If EnaAbs is
selected as Signed then the comparison is done without any conversion.
EnaAbs
INPUT
ABS
T
F
High
Comparator
EqualBandHigh
RefSource
REF
SetValue
INHIGH
XOR
T
F
ABS
INEQUAL
T
F
Low
comparator
INLOW
RefPrefix
EqualBandLow
IEC15000130 V1 EN
Figure 462:
Logic diagram for REALCOMP
This function has two settings EqualBandHigh and EqualBandLow to provide margins
from reference value for equal to condition. When the INPUT value is within high and low
band, output INEQUAL will get set.
If the INPUT is above the equal high level margin then output INHIGH will set. Similarly
if the INPUT is below the equal low level margin then output INLOW will set. In order to
1000
Technical manual
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
avoid oscillations at boundary conditions of equal band low limit and high limit, hysteresis
has been provided
INEQUAL Reset / INHIGH Set
INEQUAL Set / INHIGH Reset
EqualBandHigh
Equal Band
Internal
Hysteresis for
equal band
REF or SetValue
EqualBandLow
INEQUAL Reset / INLOW Set
INEQUAL Set / INLOW Reset

IEC15000261 V1 EN
Figure 463:
Operation principle of REALCOMP
When EnaAbs is set as absolute comparison and SetValue is set less than
0.2% of the set unit then INLOW output will never pickups. During the
above mentioned condition, due to marginal value for avoiding
oscillations of function outputs, the INLOW output will never set.
15.17.7
Technical data
REALCOMP function can compare the values from milli value level to giga value level
and the maximum expectable accuracy level from the function is 10 .
Table 648:
REALCOMP Technical data

Function
Accuracy
Operate value,
EqualBandHigh
and EqualBandLow
0.5% of set value
Reset value,
EqualBandHigh
> 0.1% of set RefPrefix
Reset value,
EqualBandLow
< 0.1% of set RefPrefix
Technical manual
1001
Section 15
Logic
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 649:
Function
REALCOMP
1002
Number of REALCOMP instances

3 ms
4

8 ms
4
100 ms
4
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 16
Monitoring
16.1
Measurements
16.1.1
Identification
Measurements
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
CVMMXN
P, Q, S, I, U, f
SYMBOL-RR V1 EN
Phase current measurement
CMMXU
I
SYMBOL-SS V1 EN
Phase-phase voltage measurement
VMMXU
U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
Current sequence component

measurement
CMSQI
Voltage sequence component

measurement
VMSQI
I1, I2, I0
SYMBOL-VV V1 EN
U1, U2, U0
SYMBOL-TT V1 EN
Phase-neutral voltage measurement
VNMMXU
U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
Technical manual
1003
Section 16
Monitoring
16.1.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Functionality
Measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of
active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for
efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the
system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control
IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers (CTs
and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value from the
IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog measurement
chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction orientation for
distance or directional overcurrent protection function.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual
hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit, low
limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, that is,
the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of
noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when
change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since
the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based
on periodic reporting.
Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN
The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:
P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

PF: power factor
V: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude
I: phase current magnitude
F: power system frequency
,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical
quantities:
1004
I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU)

V: voltages (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltage, magnitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental

frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals. The
measured power quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated quantities
or, averaged values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on the selected
settings.
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and magnitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware,
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:
16.1.3
I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle)

V: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and
the logic configuration made in PCM600.
CVMMXN
I3P*
V3P*
S
S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
V
V_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
ANSI10000016 V1 EN
Figure 464:
CVMMXN function block
Technical manual
1005
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
CMMXU
I3P*
I_A
IA_RANGE
IA_ANGL
I_B
IB_RANGE
IB_ANGL
I_C
IC_RANGE
IC_ANGL
ANSI05000699 V2 EN
Figure 465:
CMMXU function block
VMMXU
V3P*
V_AB
VAB_RANG
VAB_ANGL
V_BC
VBC_RANG
VBC_ANGL
V_CA
VCA_RANG
VCA_ANGL
ANSI05000701 V2 EN
Figure 466:
VMMXU function block
CMSQI
I3P*
3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL
IEC05000703 V2 EN
Figure 467:
CMSQI function block
VMSQI
V3P*
3V0
3V0RANG
3V0ANGL
V1
V1RANG
V1ANGL
V2
V2RANG
V2ANGL
ANSI05000704 V2 EN
Figure 468:
1006
VMSQI function block
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VNMMXU
V3P*
V_A
VA_RANGE
VA_ANGL
V_B
VB_RANGE
VB_ANGL
V_C
VC_RANGE
VC_ANGL
ANSI09000850 V1 EN
Figure 469:
16.1.4
VNMMXU function block
Signals
Table 650:
Name
CVMMXN Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 651:
Name
CVMMXN Output signals

Type
Description
REAL
Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE
INTEGER
Apparent Power range
P_INST
REAL
Active Power
REAL
Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE
INTEGER
Active Power range
Q_INST
REAL
Reactive Power
REAL
Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE
INTEGER
Reactive Power range
PF
REAL
Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE
INTEGER
Power Factor range
ILAG
BOOLEAN
Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD
BOOLEAN
Current is leading voltage
REAL
Calculated voltage magnitude of deadband value
V_RANGE
INTEGER
Calculated voltage range
REAL
Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
I_RANGE
INTEGER
Calculated current range
REAL
System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE
INTEGER
System frequency range
Technical manual
1007
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 652:
Name
I3P
Table 653:
Name
Type
Default
GROUP
SIGNAL
Description
CMMXU Output signals

Type
Description
IA
REAL
Phase A current magnitude of reported value
IA_RANGE
INTEGER
Phase A current magnitude range
IA_ANGL
REAL
Phase A current magnitude angle
IB
REAL
Phase B current magnitude of reported value
IB_RANGE
INTEGER
Phase B current magnitude range
IB_ANGL
REAL
Phase B current magnitude angle
IC
REAL
Phase C current magnitude of reported value
IC_RANGE
INTEGER
Phase C current magnitude range
IC_ANGL
REAL
Phase C current magnitude angle
Table 654:
Name
V3P
Table 655:
Name
1008
CMMXU Input signals
VMMXU Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Default
-
Description
Group connection abstract block 2
VMMXU Output signals

Type
Description
VAB
REAL
VAB Reported magnitude value
VAB_RANG
INTEGER
VAB Magnitude range
VAB_ANGL
REAL
VAB Angle, magnitude of reported value
VBC
REAL
VBC Reported magnitude value
VBC_RANG
INTEGER
VBC Magnitude range
VBC_ANGL
REAL
VBC Angle, magnitude of reported value
VCA
REAL
VCA Reported magnitude value
VCA_RANG
INTEGER
VCA Magnitude range
VCA_ANGL
REAL
VCA Angle, magnitude of reported value
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 656:
Name
I3P
Table 657:
Name
CMSQI Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Default
-
Description
CMSQI Output signals

Type
Description
3I0
REAL
3I0 magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG
INTEGER
3I0 Magnitude range
3I0ANGL
REAL
3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I1
REAL
I1magnitude of reported value
I1RANG
INTEGER
I1 Magnitude range
I1ANGL
REAL
I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
I2
REAL
I2 Magnitude of reported value
I2RANG
INTEGER
I2 Magnitude range
I2ANGL
REAL
I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 658:
Name
V3P
Table 659:
Name
VMSQI Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Default
-
Description
VMSQI Output signals

Type
Description
3V0
REAL
3V0 Reported magnitude value
3V0RANG
INTEGER
3V0 Magnitude range
3V0ANGL
REAL
3V0 Magnitude angle
V1
REAL
V1 Reported magnitude value
V1RANG
INTEGER
V1 Magnitude range
V1ANGL
REAL
V1 Magnitude angle
V2
REAL
V2RANG
INTEGER
V2 Magnitude range
V2ANGL
REAL
V2 Magnitude angle
Technical manual
1009
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 660:
Name
V3P
Table 661:
Name
16.1.5
VNMMXU Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Default
-
Description
VNMMXU Output signals

Type
Description
VA
REAL
VA Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
VA_RANGE
INTEGER
VAAmplitude range
VA_ANGL
REAL
VA Angle, magnitude of reported value
VB
REAL
VB Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
VB_RANGE
INTEGER
VB Amplitude range
VB_ANGL
REAL
VB Angle, magnitude of reported value
VC
REAL
VC Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
VC_RANGE
INTEGER
VC Amplitude range
VC_ANGL
REAL
V_C Angle, magnitude of reported value
Settings
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
These six functions are not handled as a group, so parameter settings are only available in
the first setting group.
The following terms are used in the Unit and Description columns:
1010
VBase: Base voltage in primary kV. This voltage is used as reference for voltage
setting. It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary voltage supervised
object.
IBase: Base current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current setting.
It can be suitable to set this parameter to the rated primary current of the supervised
object.
SBase: Base setting for power values in MVA.
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 662:
Name
CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

Step
Default
SLowLim
Values (Range)
0.0 - 2000.0
Unit
%SB
0.1
80.0
Description
Low limit in % of SBase
SLowLowLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
60.0
Low Low limit in % of SBase
SMin
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
50.0
Minimum value in % of SBase
SMax
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
200.0
Maximum value in % of SBase
SRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
PMin
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-200.0
PMax
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
200.0
PRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
QMin
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-200.0
QMax
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
200.0
QRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
PFMin
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-1.000
Minimum value
PFMax
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
Maximum value
PFRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
VMin
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
Minimum value in % of VBase
VMax
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
Maximum value in % of VBase
VRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IMin
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
5.0
Minimum value in % of IBase
IMax
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
Maximum value in % of IBase
IRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
FrMin
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
FrMax
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
70.000
Maximum value
FrRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
Technical manual
1011
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Mode
A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
A, B, C
PowMagFact
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
1.000
Magnitude factor to scale power calculations
PowAngComp
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
Angle compensation for phase shift between

measured I & V
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
0.000

measurement, V and I
Table 663:
Name
CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
SZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range
SHiHiLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
High High limit in % of SBase
SHiLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
High limit in % of SBase
SLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Hysteresis value in % of range (common for all

limits)
PDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
PZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
PHiHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
PHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
PLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-120.0
PLowLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-150.0
PLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

limits)
QDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
QZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
QHiHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
QHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
QLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-120.0
QLowLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-150.0
QLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

limits)

1012
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PFDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
PFZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
PFHiHiLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
High High limit (physical value)
PFHiLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
0.800
High limit (physical value)
PFLowLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-0.800
Low limit (physical value)
PFLowLowLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-1.000
Low Low limit (physical value)
PFLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

limits)
VDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
VZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
VHiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
High High limit in % of UBase
VHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
High limit in % of VBase
VLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
Low limit in % of VBase
VLowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
Low Low limit in % of VBase
VLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

limits)
IDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
IZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
IHiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
High High limit in % of IBase
IHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
High limit in % of IBase
ILowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
Low limit in % of IBase
ILowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
Low Low limit in % of IBase
ILimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

limits)
FrDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
FrZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
FrHiHiLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
65.000
High High limit (physical value)
FrHiLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
63.000
High limit (physical value)
FrLowLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
47.000
Low limit (physical value)
FrLowLowLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
45.000
Low Low limit (physical value)
FrLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

limits)
VGenZeroDb
1 - 100
%VB
Zero point clamping in % of UBase
IGenZeroDb
1 - 100
%IB
Zero point clamping in % of IBase
VMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of

Vn

Technical manual
1013
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30% of

Vn
VMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100%

of Vn
IMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of In
IMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of

In
IMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100%

of In
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
Angle calibration for current at 5% of In
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
Table 664:
Name
CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IA_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disbled/Enabled operation
IA_Max
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
IA_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
IA_AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
IB_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
IB_Max
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
IB_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IB_AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
IC_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
IC_Max
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
IC_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IC_AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
1014
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 665:
Name
CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IA_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
IA_HiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
IA_HiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
IMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of In
IMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30% of

In
IA_LowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
IA_LowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
IMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100%

of In
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IA_Min
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IA_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
IB_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
IB_HiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
IB_HiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
IB_LowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
IB_LowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
IB_Min
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
IB_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
IC_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
IC_HiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
IC_HiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
IC_LowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
IC_LowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
IC_Min
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
IC_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
Technical manual
1015
Section 16
Monitoring
Table 666:
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VAB_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
VAB_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
VAB_Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
VAB_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
VAB_AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
VBC_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
VB_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
VBC_Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
VBC_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
VBC_AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
VCA_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
VC_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
VCA_Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
VCA_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
VCA_AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
Table 667:
Name
VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Step
Default
VAB_HiHiLim
Values (Range)
0.0 - 200.0
Unit
%VB
0.1
150.0
Description
VAB_HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
VAB_LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
VAB_LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
VMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

of Vn
1016
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Step
Default
VAB_Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
Minimum value in in % of VBase
VAB_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
VBC_HiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
VBC_HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
VBC_LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
VBC_LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
VBC_Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
VBC_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
VCA_HiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
VCA_HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
VCA_LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
VCA_LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
VCA_Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
VCA_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
Table 668:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3I0DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
3I0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
3I0Min
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
3I0Max
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
3I0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
3I0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
3I0AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
3I0AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
Technical manual
1017
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3I0AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I1DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
I1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
I1Min
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
I1Max
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
I1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
I1AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
I1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I2DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
I2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
I2Min
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
I2Max
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
I2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
I2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
I2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
I2AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
I2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Table 669:
Name
CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Step
Default
3I0HiHiLim
Values (Range)
0.0 - 500.0
Unit
%IB
0.1
150.0
Description
3I0HiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
3I0LowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
3I0LowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
3I0AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
1018
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Step
Default
I1HiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
I1HiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
I1LowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
I1LowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
I1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
I1AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
I1AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
I2HiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
I2HiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
I2LowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
I2LowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
I2AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
I2AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
Table 670:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3V0DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
3V0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
3V0Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
3V0Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
3V0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
3V0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
3V0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
3V0AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
3V0AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
3V0AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
3V0AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Technical manual
1019
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
V1DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
V1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
V1Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
V1Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
V1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
V1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
V1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
V2DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
V2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
V2Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
V2Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
V2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
V2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
V2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
V2AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
V2AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
V2AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UAmpPreComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at 5%

of Vr
UAmpPreComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at

30% of Vr
UAmpPreComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at

100% of Vr
Table 671:
Name
VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Step
Default
3V0HiHiLim
Values (Range)
0.0 - 200.0
Unit
%VB
0.1
150.0
Description
3V0HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
3V0LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
1020
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Step
Default
3V0LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
V1HiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
V1HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
V1LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
V1LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
V1AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
V1AngMin
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
-180.000
Minimum value
V1AngMax
-180.000 - 180.000
Deg
0.001
180.000
Maximum value
V1AngRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
V2HiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
V2HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
V2LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
V2LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
V2AngZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Table 672:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VA_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
VA_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
VA_Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
VA_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
VA_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
VA_AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
VB_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
VB_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
VB_Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
Technical manual
1021
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VB_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
VB_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
VB_AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
VC_DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
VC_ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
Zero point clamping
VC_Max
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
VC_RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
VC_LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

for all limits
VC_AnDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
Table 673:
Name
VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Step
Default
VA_HiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
VA_HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
VA_LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
VA_LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
VMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000

of Vn
VA_Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
VB_HiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
VB_HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
VB_LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
VB_LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
VB_Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
VC_HiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
VC_HiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
VC_LowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
VC_LowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
VC_Min
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
1022
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.1.6
Monitored data
Table 674:
Name
CVMMXN Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
REAL
MVA
Apparent Power magnitude of

deadband value
REAL
MW
Active Power magnitude of

deadband value
REAL
MVAr
Reactive Power magnitude of

deadband value
PF
REAL
Power Factor magnitude of

deadband value
REAL
kV
Calculated voltage magnitude

of deadband value
REAL
Calculated current magnitude

of deadband value
REAL
Hz
System frequency magnitude

of deadband value
Table 675:
Name
CMMXU Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IA
REAL
Phase A current magnitude of

reported value
IA_ANGL
REAL
deg
Phase A current magnitude

angle
IB
REAL
Phase B current magnitude of

reported value
IB_ANGL
REAL
deg
Phase B current magnitude

angle
IC
REAL
Phase C current magnitude of

reported value
IC_ANGL
REAL
deg
Phase C current magnitude

angle
Table 676:
Name
VMMXU Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VAB
REAL
kV
VAB Reported magnitude

value
VAB_ANGL
REAL
deg
VAB Angle, magnitude of

reported value
VBC
REAL
kV
VBC Reported magnitude

value
Technical manual
1023
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VBC_ANGL
REAL
deg
VBC Angle, magnitude of

reported value
VCA
REAL
kV
VCA Reported magnitude

value
VCA_ANGL
REAL
deg
VCA Angle, magnitude of

reported value
Table 677:
Name
CMSQI Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
3I0IMAG
REAL
3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of

instantaneous value
3I0
REAL
3I0 magnitude of reported

value
3I0ANGIM
REAL
3I0 Angle, magnitude of

instantaneous value
3I0ANGL
REAL
deg
3I0 Angle, magnitude of

reported value
I1IMAG
REAL
I1 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I1
REAL
I1magnitude of reported value
I1ANGIM
REAL
I1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I1ANGL
REAL
deg
reported value
I2IMAG
REAL
I2 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
I2
REAL
I2 Magnitude of reported value
I2ANGIM
REAL
instantaneous value
I2ANGL
REAL
deg
reported value
Table 678:
Name
VMSQI Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
3U0IMAG
REAL
3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of

instantaneous value
3V0
REAL
kV
3V0 Reported magnitude

value
3U0ANGIM
REAL
3U0 Angle, magnitude of

instantaneous value
3V0ANGL
REAL
deg
3V0 Magnitude angle
1024
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
U1IMAG
REAL
U1 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V1
REAL
kV
U1ANGIM
REAL
U1 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V1ANGL
REAL
deg
V1 Magnitude angle
U2IMAG
REAL
U2 Amplitude, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V2
REAL
kV
U2ANGIM
REAL
U2 Angle, magnitude of
instantaneous value
V2ANGL
REAL
deg
V2 Magnitude angle
Table 679:
Name
VNMMXU Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VA
REAL
kV
VA Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
VA_ANGL
REAL
deg
VA Angle, magnitude of
reported value
VB
REAL
kV
VB Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
VB_ANGL
REAL
deg
VB Angle, magnitude of
reported value
VC
REAL
kV
VC Amplitude, magnitude of
reported value
VC_ANGL
REAL
deg
V_C Angle, magnitude of

reported value
16.1.7
Operation principle
16.1.7.1
built-in options.
Technical manual
1025
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A

Phase angle reference

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General
setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference.
Zero point clamping

in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general setting
(XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, V, I, F, IA, IB, IC, VA, VB, VC, VAB, VBC,
VCA, I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2 or 3V0). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point
clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the measurement
values within CVMMXN.

1026
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Y
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1
Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
IEC05000657 V2 EN
Figure 470:


Technical manual
1027
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Cyclic reporting
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y4
Y1
Y5
t (*)
Value 5
Value 4
t (*)
Value 3
t (*)
Value 2
Value 1
t (*)
IEC05000500 V2 EN
Figure 471:
Periodic reporting

1028
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Value Reported
Y
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y1
Value Reported
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
t
IEC99000529 V2 EN
Figure 472:
the Y set limits.

Y3, Y4 and Y5).
Technical manual
1029
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A1 >=
pre-set value
Y
A >=
pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value
Y3
Y2
Value Reported
(1st)
A1
Value
Reported
A2
Value
Reported
Y1
Y4
Value
Reported
A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
A4
A3
A5
A6
A7
Y5
Value
Reported
t
IEC99000530 V2 EN
Figure 473:
16.1.7.2
Measurements CVMMXN
Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase
voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and
calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available
VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting,
which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used within the function.
Available options are summarized in the following table:
1030
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Set value for Formula used for complex, threephase power calculation
parameter
Mode
1
A, B, C
Formula used for voltage and

current magnitude calculation
S = VA I A* + VB I B* + VC I C*
EQUATION1561 V1 EN
(
I =( I
V = VA + VB + VC
+ IB + IC
)/
)/3
Comment
Used when three

phase-to-ground
voltages are
available
EQUATION1562 V1 EN
Arone
S = VAB I A - VBC I C
*
(Equation 179)
EQUATION1563 V1 EN
(
I =( I
V = VAB + VBC / 2
A
EQUATION1564 V1 EN
PosSeq
V =
S = 3 VPosSeq I PosSeq
*
(Equation 181)
EQUATION1565 V1 EN
AB
S = VAB I A - I B
*
(Equation 183)
EQUATION1567 V1 EN
I = I PosSeq
BC
S = VBC I B - I C
*
(Equation 185)
EQUATION1569 V1 EN
I = IA + IB / 2
CA
S = VCA I C - I A
EQUATION1571 V1 EN
(Equation 187)
I = I B + IC / 2
S = 3 VA I A
*
I = IC + I A / 2
EQUATION1573 V1 EN
(Equation 189)
V =
Used when only

VCA phase-tophase voltage is
available
(Equation 188)
3 VA
I = IA
EQUATION1574 V1 EN
Used when only

VBC phase-tophase voltage is
available
(Equation 186)
V = VCA
EQUATION1572 V1 EN
Used when only

VAB phase-tophase voltage is
available
(Equation 184)
V = VBC
EQUATION1570 V1 EN
Used when only

symmetrical three
phase power shall
be measured
(Equation 182)
V = VAB
EQUATION1568 V1 EN
(Equation 180)
3 VPosSeq
EQUATION1566 V1 EN
+ IC / 2
Used when three

two phase-tophase voltages
are available
Used when only

VA phase-toground voltage is
available
(Equation 190)
Technical manual
1031
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Set value for Formula used for complex, threephase power calculation
parameter
Mode
8
S = 3 VB I B
*
EQUATION1575 V1 EN
(Equation 191)
Formula used for voltage and

current magnitude calculation
V =
3 VB
I = IB
EQUATION1576 V1 EN
S = 3 VC I C
*
EQUATION1577 V1 EN
(Equation 193)
V =
Used when only

VB phase-toground voltage is
available
(Equation 192)
3 VC
I = IC
EQUATION1578 V1 EN
Comment
Used when only

VC phase-toground voltage is
available
(Equation 194)
* means complex conjugated value
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the measurement
function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes that is, from 3 to 9
it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully
symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF are
calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
(Equation 195)
EQUATION1403 V1 EN
Q = Im( S )
(Equation 196)
EQUATION1404 V1 EN
S = S =
P2 + Q2
(Equation 197)
EQUATION1405 V1 EN
PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN
(Equation 198)
Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function are
provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage phasors.
Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind voltage
phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is leading the
voltage phasor.
1032
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by magnitude and angle compensation at
5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above
100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 474.
% of In
Magnitude
compensation
+10
IMagComp5
Measured
current
IMagComp30
IMagComp100
30
% of In
0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant
-10
Degrees
100
Angle
compensation
+10
Measured
current
IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
30
100
% of In
-10
ANSI05000652 V3 EN
Figure 474:
Calibration curves
magnitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Low pass filtering

introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, V, I and
power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the
Technical manual
1033
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive

formula:
X = k X Old + (1 - k ) X Calculated
(Equation 199)
EQUATION1407 V1 EN
where:
X
is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, V, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld
is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay). When k
is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be
determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
Zero point clamping

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not
present, it is possible for the end user to set the magnitudeIGenZeroDb level for current
and voltage measurement VGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or voltage
measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power (P, Q and S)
and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement supervision
functionality, included in CVMMXN, is using these values the zero clamping will
influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero point clamping
within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement supervision").
Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is
possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by
setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to multiply
the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude (setting
parameter PowMagFact, default value 1.000) and angle (setting parameter
PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are
done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (complex constant
has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (for example,
around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this calibration it is
necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.
1034
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Directionality
If CT grounding parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and
reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown in the
following figure 475.
Busbar
52
IED
Q
Protected
Object
ANSI05000373 V2 EN
Figure 475:
Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements
Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they
flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values when
they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the
power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have actually
opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements. This can be
easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0 degrees. With such
setting the active and reactive power will have positive values when they flow from the
protected object towards the busbar.
Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained from
the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as an output.
16.1.7.3
Phase current measurement CMMXU

The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-phase
current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can
be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs
and IEC 61850. This is achieved by magnitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100%
Technical manual
1035
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
of rated current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in
between, see figure 474.
Phase currents (magnitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each magnitude
output has a corresponding supervision level output (Ix_RANGE). The supervision
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
16.1.7.4
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU,

VNMMXU
The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configuration
tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comes to
class 0.5 calibrations, see above.
The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) are available on the
outputs and each magnitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(Vxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section
"Measurement supervision".
16.1.7.5
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or voltage
(VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than X_RANG,
are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate the signals.
Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to corresponding
output.
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs
(voltage and current, magnitude and angle). Each magnitude output has a corresponding
supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4,
see section "Measurement supervision".
16.1.8
Technical data
Table 680:
CVMMXN technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Frequency
(0.95-1.05) x fn
2.0 mHz
Voltage
(10 to 300) V
0.3% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V> 50 V
Current
(0.1-4.0) x In
0.8% of I at 0.1 x In< I < 0.2 x In

0.5% of I at 0.2 x In< I < 0.5 x In
0.2% of I at 0.5 x In< I < 4.0 x In
1036
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
Active power, P
Reactive power, Q
Apparent power, S
Power factor, cos ()
Table 681:
Accuracy
(10 to 300) V
(0.1-4.0) x In
0.5% of Sn at S 0.5 x Sn
0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sn
(100 to 220) V
(0.5-2.0) x In
cos < 0.7
0.2% of P
(10 to 300) V
(0.1-4.0) x In
0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sn
(100 to 220) V
(0.5-2.0) x In
cos > 0.7
0.2% of Q
(10 to 300) V
(0.1-4.0) x In
0.5% of S at S >0.5 x Sn
(100 to 220) V
(0.5-2.0) x In
0.2% of S
(10 to 300) V
(0.1-4.0) x In
<0.02
(100 to 220) V
(0.5-2.0) x In
<0.01
CMMXU technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Current at symmetrical load
(0.1-4.0) In
0.3% of In at I 0.5 In
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 In
Phase angle at symmetrical load
(0.1-4.0) In
1.0 degrees at 0.1 In 50 V
Phase angle
(10 to 300) V
0.5 at V 50 V
0.2 at V > 50 V
Technical manual
Accuracy
1037
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 683:
CMSQI technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Current positive sequence, I1

Three phase settings
(0.14.0) In
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 In
Current zero sequence, 3I0

(0.11.0) In
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 In
Current negative sequence, I2

(0.11.0) In
0.3% of I at I > 0.5 In
Phase angle
(0.14.0) In

In
In
Table 684:
VMSQItechnical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Voltage positive sequence, V1
(10 to 300) V
0.5% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V
Voltage zero sequence, 3V0
(10 to 300) V
0.5% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V
Voltage negative sequence, V2
(10 to 300) V
0.5% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V
Phase angle
(10 to 300) V
0.5 degrees at V 50 V
0.2 degrees at V > 50 V
Table 685:
VNMMXU technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Voltage
(5 to 175) V
0.5% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V
Phase angle
(5 to 175) V
0.5 at V 50 V
0.2 at V > 50 V
16.2
Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63)
16.2.1
Identification
Gas medium supervision
1038
IEC 61850
identification
SSIMG
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
63
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.2.2
Functionality
Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker condition.
Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used as input signals
to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on received information.
16.2.3
Function block
SSIMG (63)
BLOCK
PRESSURE
BLK_ALM
PRES_ALM
PRESSURE
PRES_LO
TEMP
TEMP
PRES_ALM
TEMP_ALM
PRES_LO
TEMP_LO
SET_P_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO
ANSI09000129 V1 EN
Figure 476:
16.2.4
SSIMG (63) function block
Signals
Table 686:
Name
SSIMG (63) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK_ALM
BOOLEAN
Block all the alarms
PRESSURE
REAL
0.0
Pressure input from CB
TEMP
REAL
0.0
Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
PRES_ALM
BOOLEAN
Pressure alarm signal
PRES_LO
BOOLEAN
Pressure lockout signal
SET_P_LO
BOOLEAN
Set pressure lockout
SET_T_LO
BOOLEAN
Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO
BOOLEAN
Reset pressure and temperature lockout
Table 687:
Name
SSIMG (63) Output signals

Type
Description
PRESSURE
REAL
Pressure service value
PRES_ALM
BOOLEAN
Pressure below alarm level
PRES_LO
BOOLEAN
Pressure below lockout level

Technical manual
1039
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
16.2.5
Table 688:
Name
Type
Description
TEMP
REAL
Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM
BOOLEAN
Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO
BOOLEAN
Temperature above lockout level
Settings
SSIMG (63) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PressAlmLimit
1.00 - 100.00
0.01
5.00
Alarm setting for pressure
PressLOLimit
1.00 - 100.00
0.01
3.00
Pressure lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
Temperature alarm level setting of the medium
TempLOLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
Temperature lockout level of the medium
tPressureAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for pressure alarm
tPressureLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for pressure lockout indication
tTempAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for temperature alarm
tTempLockOut
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetPressAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Reset time delay for pressure alarm
tResetPressLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Reset time delay for pressure lockout
tResetTempLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Reset time delay for temperture alarm
16.2.6
Operation principle
Gas medium supervision SSIMG (63) is used to monitor the gas pressure in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of gas density PRES_ALM, PRES_LO, and gas pressure signal
PRESSURE, are taken into account to initiate the alarms PRES_ALM and PRES_LO.
When PRESSURE is less than PressAlmLimit or binary signal from CB PRES_ALM is
high then the gas pressure alarm, PRES_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if pressure input
PRESSURE is less than PressLOLimit or binary signal from CB PRES_LO is high or
temperature input TEMP is above lockout level TempLOLimit then the gas pressure
lockout, PRES_LO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in pressure of the gas for a very small time, for which the
function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tPressureAlarm or
tPressureLO have been included. If the pressure goes below the settings for more than
these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm PRES_ALM or lockout PRES_LO
1040
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
will be initiated. The SET_P_LO binary input is used for setting the gas pressure lockout.
The PRES_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input
RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the setting for relative and
absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the alarms, and the
BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The signal
is monitored to detect high temperature.
When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature alarm
TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is greater than
TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time, for
which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tTempAlarm
or tTempLockOut have been included. If the temperature goes above the settings for more
than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm TEMP_ALM or lockout
TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input is used for setting the
temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using
the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the setting
for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used to block the
alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.
16.2.7
Technical data
Table 689:
SSIMG (63) Technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Pressure alarm level
1.00-100.00
10.0% of set value
Pressure lockout level
1.00-100.00
10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level
-40.00-200.00
2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level
-40.00-200.00
2.5% of set value
Time delay for pressure alarm
(0.000-60.000) s

greater
Reset time delay for pressure

alarm
(0.000-60.000) s

greater
Time delay for pressure lockout
(0.000-60.000) s

greater
(0.000-60.000) s

greater
Reset time delay for temperature

alarm
(0.000-60.000) s

greater
Time delay for temperature

lockout
(0.000-60.000) s

greater
Technical manual
1041
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.3
Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71)
16.3.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Liquid medium supervision
16.3.2
IEC 60617
identification
SSIML
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
71
Functionality
Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker
condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is used as input
signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on received
information.
16.3.3
Function block
SSIML (71)
BLOCK
LEVEL
BLK_ALM
LVL_ALM
LEVEL
LVL_LO
TEMP
TEMP
LVL_ALM
TEMP_ALM
LEVEL_LO
TEMP_LO
SET_L_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO
ANSI09000128 V1 EN
Figure 477:
16.3.4
SSIML (71) function block
Signals
Table 690:
Name
SSIML (71) Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK_ALM
BOOLEAN
LEVEL
REAL
0.0
Level input from CB
TEMP
REAL
0.0
Temperature of the insulation medium from CB
LVL_ALM
BOOLEAN
Level alarm signal
LEVEL_LO
BOOLEAN
Level lockout signal
1042
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Set level lockout
SET_T_LO
BOOLEAN
Set temperature lockout
RESET_LO
BOOLEAN
Reset level and temperature lockout
SSIML (71) Output signals
Name
Table 692:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 691:
16.3.5
Default
SET_L_LO
Type
Description
LEVEL
REAL
Level service value
LVL_ALM
BOOLEAN
Level below alarm level
LVL_LO
BOOLEAN
Level below lockout level
TEMP
REAL
Temperature of the insulation medium
TEMP_ALM
BOOLEAN
Temperature above alarm level
TEMP_LO
BOOLEAN
Temperature above lockout level
Settings
SSIML (71) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
LevelAlmLimit
1.00 - 100.00
0.01
5.00
Alarm setting for level
LevelLOLimit
1.00 - 100.00
0.01
3.00
Level lockout setting
TempAlarmLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
Temperature alarm level setting of the medium
TempLOLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
Temperature lockout level of the medium
tLevelAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for level alarm
tLevelLockOut
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for level lockout indication
tTempAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tTempLockOut
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Time delay for temperture lockout
tResetLevelAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Reset time delay for level alarm
tResetLevelLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Reset time delay for level lockout
tResetTempLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Reset time delay for temperture lockout
tResetTempAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Reset time delay for temperture alarm
16.3.6
Operation principle
Liquid medium supervision SSIML (71) is used to monitor the oil level in the circuit
breaker. Binary inputs of oil level LVL_ALM, LEVEL_LO and oil level signal LEVEL
Technical manual
1043
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
are taken into account to initiate the alarms LVL_ALM and LVL_LO. When LEVEL is
less than LevelAlmLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_ALM is high, then the oil level
indication alarm, LVL_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if oil level input LEVEL is less
than LevelLOLimit or binary signal from CB LVL_LO is high or temperature input TEMP
is above lockout level TempLOLimit, then the oil level indication lockout, LVL_LO will
be initiated.
There may be sudden change in oil level for a very small time, for which the function need
not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tLevelAlarm or tLevelLockOut have
been included. If the oil level goes below the settings for more than these time delays, then
only the corresponding alarm LVL_ALM or lockout LVL_LO will be initiated. The
SET_L_LO binary input is used for setting the gas pressure lockout. The LVL_LO output
retains the last value until it is reset by using the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type
comparators have been used with the setting for relative and absolute hysteresis. The
binary input BLK_ALM can be used for blocking the alarms, and the BLOCK input can
block both alarms and the lockout indication.
Temperature of the medium is available from the input signal of temperature. The signal
is monitored to detect high temperature.
When temperature input TEMP is greater than TempAlarmLimit, then temperature alarm
TEMP_ALM will be initiated. Similarly, if temperature input TEMP is greater than
TempLOLimit, then TEMP_LO will be initiated.
There may be sudden change in temperature of the medium for a very small time, for
which the function need not to initiate any alarm. That is why two time delays tTempAlarm
or tTempLockOuthave been included. If the temperature goes above the settings for more
than these time delays, then only the corresponding alarm TEMP_ALM or lockout
TEMP_LO will be initiated. The SET_T_LO binary input is used for setting the
temperature lockout. The TEMP_LO output retains the last value until it is reset by using
the binary input RESET_LO. Hysteresis type comparators have been used with the setting
for relative and absolute hysteresis. The binary input BLK_ALM can be used for blocking
the alarms, and the BLOCK input can block both alarms and the lockout indication.
16.3.7
Technical data
Table 693:
SSIML(71) Technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Oil alarm level
1.00-100.00
10.0% of set value
Oil lockout level
1.00-100.00
10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level
-40.00-200.00
2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level
-40.00-200.00
2.5% of set value
Time delay for oil alarm
(0.000-60.000) s

greater

1044
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function
Range or value
(0.000-60.000) s

greater
Time delay for oil lockout
(0.000-60.000) s

greater
(0.000-60.000) s

greater
Reset time delay for temperature

alarm
(0.000-60.000) s

greater
Time delay for temperature

lockout
(0.000-60.000) s

greater
16.4
Breaker monitoring SSCBR
16.4.1
Identification
Breaker monitoring
16.4.2
Accuracy
Reset time delay for oil alarm
IEC 61850
identification
SSCBR
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The breaker monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different parameters of the
breaker condition. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations
reaches a predefined value. For a proper functioning of the circuit breaker, it is essential
to monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge indication or breaker wear, travel
time, number of operation cycles and estimate the accumulated energy during arcing
periods.
Technical manual
1045
Section 16
Monitoring
16.4.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
SSCBR
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKALM
TRIND
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
PRESALM
PRESLO
SPRCHRST
SPRCHRD
RSTCBWR
RSTTRVT
RSTIPOW
RSTSPCHT
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS
TRCMD
TRVTOPAL
TRVTCLAL
OPERALM
OPERLO
CBLIFEAL
MONALM
IPOWALPH
IPOWLOPH
SPCHALM
GPRESALM
GPRESLO
ANSI14000061 V1 EN
Figure 478:
16.4.4
Signals
Table 694:
Name
1046
SSCBR function block
SSCBR Input signals

Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block all the alarm and lockout indication
BLKALM
BOOLEAN
TRIND
BOOLEAN
Trip command from trip circuit
POSOPEN
BOOLEAN
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
PRESALM
BOOLEAN
Pressure alarm indication from CB
PRESLO
BOOLEAN
Pressure lockout indication from CB
SPRCHRST
BOOLEAN
CB spring charging started indication signal
SPRCHRD
BOOLEAN
CB spring charged indication signal
RSTCBWR
BOOLEAN
Reset of CB remaining life and operation counter
RSTTRVT
BOOLEAN
Reset of CB closing and opening travel times
RSTIPOW
BOOLEAN
Reset of accumulated I^CurrExponent
RSTSPCHT
BOOLEAN
Reset of CB spring charging time
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 695:
SSCBR Output signals
Name
16.4.5
Table 696:
Name
Type
Description
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
CB is in open position
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
CB is in closed position
INVDPOS
BOOLEAN
CB is in Invalid Position
TRCMD
BOOLEAN
Open command issued to CB
TRVTOPAL
BOOLEAN
CB open travel time exceeded set value
TRVTCLAL
BOOLEAN
CB close travel time exceeded set value
OPERALM
BOOLEAN
Number of CB operations exceeds alarm limit
OPERLO
BOOLEAN
Number of CB operations exceeds lockout limit
CBLIFEAL
BOOLEAN
Remaining life of CB reduced to Life alarm level
MONALM
BOOLEAN
CB 'not operated for long time' alarm
IPOWALPH
BOOLEAN
Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time

exceeds alarm limit
IPOWLOPH
BOOLEAN
Accum I^CurrExponent integr over CB open travel time

exceeds lockout limit
SPCHALM
BOOLEAN
Spring charging time has crossed the set value
GPRESALM
BOOLEAN
Pressure below alarm level
GPRESLO
BOOLEAN
Pressure below lockout level
Settings
SSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
PhSel
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Phase A
Phase selection
RatedOperCurr
100.00 - 5000.00
0.01
1000.00
Rated operating current of the breaker
OperNoRated
1 - 99999
10000
Number of operations possible at rated current
RatedFltCurr
500.00 - 99999.99
0.01
5000.00
Rated fault current of the breaker
OperNoFault
1 - 10000
1000
Number of operations possible at rated fault

current
tTrOpenAlm
0.000 - 0.200
0.001
0.040
Alarm level for open travel time
tTrCloseAlm
0.000 - 0.200
0.001
0.040
Alarm level for close travel time
OperAlmLevel
0 - 9999
200
Alarm level for number of operations
Technical manual
1047
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OperLOLevel
0 - 9999
300
Lockout level for number of operations
AccSelCal
Aux Contact
Trip Signal
Trip Signal
Accumulated energy calculation selection
CurrExponent
0.50 - 3.00
0.01
2.00
Current exponent value used for energy

calculation
AccStopCurr
5.00 - 100.00
%IB
0.01
10.00
RMS current level below which energy

accumulation stops
AlmAccCurrPwr
0.00 - 20000.00
0.01
2500.00
Alarm level for accumulated I^CurrExponent

integrated over CB open travel time
LOAccCurrPwr
0.00 - 20000.00
0.01
2500.00
Lockout level for accumulated I^CurrExponent

integrated over CB open travel time
SpChAlmTime
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
1.00
Alarm level for spring charging time
InitCBRemLife
1 - 99999
10000
Initial value for remaining life estimates
InactiveAlDays
0 - 9999
Day
2000
Alarm level for inactive days counter
Table 697:
Name
SSCBR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
OpenTimeCorr
-0.100 - 0.100
0.001
0.010
Correction for open travel time
CloseTimeCorr
-0.100 - 0.100
0.001
0.010
Correction for close travel time
DirCoef
-3.00 - -0.50
0.01
-1.50
Directional coefficient for CB life calculation
CBLifeAlmLevel
1 - 99999
5000
Alarm level for CB remaining life
ContTrCorr
-0.010 - 0.010
0.001
0.005
Correction for time difference in auxiliary and

main contacts open time
OperTimeDelay
0.000 - 0.200
0.001
0.020
Time delay between change of status of trip

output and start of main contact separation
tDGasPresAlm
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
0.10
Time delay for gas pressure alarm
tDGasPresLO
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
0.10
Time delay for gas pressure lockout
InitCounterVal
0 - 9999
Initial value for number of operations
InitAccCurrPwr
0.00 - 9999.99
0.01
0.00
Initial value for accum I^CurrExponent integr

over CB open travel time value
InitInactDays
0 - 9999
Day
Initial value for inactive days
InactiveAlHrs
0 - 23
Hour
Alarm time for inactive days counter in hours
1048
Step
Default
Description
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.4.6
Monitored data
Table 698:
Name
16.4.7
SSCBR Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
TTRVOP
REAL
ms
Travel time of the CB during

opening operation
TTRVCL
REAL
ms
Travel time of the CB during

closing operation
NOOPER
INTEGER
Number of CB operation cycle
CBLIFEPH
INTEGER
CB Remaining life of
respective phase
INADAYS
INTEGER
The number of days CB has

been inactive
IPOWPH
REAL
Accumulated I^CurrExponent
integrated over CB open travel
time
SPCHT
REAL
The charging time of the CB

spring
Operation principle
The breaker monitoring function includes metering and monitoring subfunctions. The
subfunctions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding
parameter values are Enabled and Disabled.
The operation of the subfunctions is described by the module diagram as shown in Figure
479. All the modules in the diagram are explained in subsequent sections.
Technical manual
1049
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
I3P-ILRMSPH
POSCLOSE
POSOPEN
BLOCK
TTRVOP
CB Contact Travel
Time
TTRVCL
TRVTOPAL
TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
RSTTRVT
OPENPOS
CB Status
CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS
CBLIFEAL
Remaining Life of CB
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR
TRCMD
I3P-IL
Accumulated
energy
TRIND
IPOWALPH
IPOWLOPH
IPOWPH
RSTIPOW
CB Operation
Cycles
OPERALM
CB Operation
Monitoring
MONALM
NOOPER
INADAYS
SPCHALM
SPRCHRST
SPRCHRD
CB Spring Charge
Monitoring
SPCHT
CB Gas Pressure
Indication
GPRESALM
RSTSPCHT
PRESALM
PRESLO
GPRESLO
1050
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC12000624 V3 EN
Figure 479:
16.4.7.1
Functional module diagram of breaker monitoring
Circuit breaker contact travel time

The circuit breaker contact travel time subfunction calculates the breaker contact travel
time for opening and closing operations. The operation of the breaker contact travel time
measurement is described in Figure 480.
POSCLOSE
POSOPEN
RSTTRVT
TTRVOP
Contact travel
time
calculation
TTRVCL
Alarm limit
check
BLOCK
TRVTOPAL
TRVTCLAL
BLKALM
IEC12000615 V2 EN
Figure 480:
Functional module diagram for circuit breaker contact travel time
Contact travel time calculation

The contact travel time of the breaker is calculated from the time between the state of
change of auxiliary contacts. The opening travel time is measured between the opening of
the POSCLOSE and closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contacts. Similarly, the closing
travel time is measured between the opening of the POSOPEN and closing of the
POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts. A compensation factor has been added to consider the
time difference between auxiliary contact operation and the actual physical opening of the
breaker main contact.
Technical manual
1051
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Main Contact
1
0
POSCLOSE
1
0
POSOPEN
1
0
t1
tOpen
t2
tTravelOpen = tOpen + t1 + t2
t3
tClose
t4
tTravelClose = tClose + t3 + t4
IEC12000616 V1 EN
Figure 481:
Travel time calculation
There is a time difference t1 between the pickup of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time difference t2
between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is
completely open. Therefore, a correction factor needs to be added to get the actual opening
time. This factor is added with the OpenTimeCorr (t1+t2) setting. The closing time is
calculated by adding the value set with the CloseTimeCorr (t3+t4) setting to the measured
closing time.
The last measured opening travel time (TTRVOP) and the closing travel time (TTRVCL)
are given as service values.
The values can be reset using the Clear menu on the LHMI or by activation the input
RSTCBWR.
Alarm limit check

When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set in the tTrOpenAlm
setting, the TRVTOPAL output is activated. Similarly, when the measured closing travel
time is longer than the value set in the tTrCloseAlm setting, the TRVTCLAL output is
activated.
It is also possible to block the TRVTCLAL and TRVTOPAL alarm signals by activating the
BLKALM input.
1052
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.4.7.2
Circuit breaker status

The circuit breaker status subfunction monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is,
whether the breaker is in the open, closed or error position. The operation is described in
Figure 482.
Phase current
check
I3P-ILRMSPH
Contact
position
indicator
POSCLOSE
POSOPEN
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
INVDPOS
IEC12000613 V3 EN
Figure 482:
Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status
Phase current check

The module compares the phase current I3P-ILRMSPH to the AccStopCurr setting. If the
current in the selected phase exceeds the set level, it is reported to the contact position
indicator module as closed circuit breaker.
Contact position indicator

The circuit breaker status is open when the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low, the
POSOPEN input is high and the phase current is less than the setting AccStopCurr value.
The circuit breaker is closed when the POSOPEN input is low and the POSCLOSE input
is high. The breaker is in the error state if both auxiliary contacts have the same value or
if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is low and the POSOPEN input is high but the
current is above the setting AccStopCurr.
The status of the breaker is indicated with the binary outputs OPENPOS, CLOSEPOS and
INVDPOS for open, closed and error position respectively.
16.4.7.3
Remaining life of circuit breaker

The Remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is used to give an indication on the wear
and tear of the circuit breaker. Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit
breaker reduces due to wear. The breaker wear depends on the interrupted current. The
remaining life of the breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by
the manufacturer. The remaining life is decreased by at least one when the circuit breaker
is opened. The operation of the remaining life of circuit breaker subfunction is described
in Figure 483.
Technical manual
1053
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
I3P-ILRMSPH
CB remaining
life estimation
POSCLOSE
CBLIFEPH
RSTCBWR
Alarm limit
Check
BLOCK
CBLIFEAL
BLKALM
IEC12000620 V3 EN
Figure 483:
Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker
Circuit breaker remaining life estimation

If the interrupted current is less than the rated operating current set using the
RatedOperCurr setting, the remaining operations of the breaker are reduced by one
operation. If the interrupted current is more than the rated fault current set using the
RatedFltCurr setting, the remaining operations of the circuit breaker are reduced by the
set OperNoRated divided by the set OperNoFault value. If the tripping current is between
these two values, the remaining life of the circuit breaker is calculated based on the
maintenance curve equation given by the manufacturer. The OperNoRated parameter sets
the number of operations the breaker can perform at the rated current. The OperNoFault
parameter sets the number of operations the breaker can perform at the rated fault current.
Alarm limit check

When the remaining life of a circuit breaker phase drops below the CBLifeAlmLevel
setting, the life alarm CBLIFEAL is activated.
It is possible to deactivate the CBLIFEAL alarm signal by activating the binary input
BLKALM.
The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the
InitCBRemLife parameter. The value can be reset using the Clear menu from LHMI or by
activating the input RSTCBWR.
16.4.7.4
Accumulated energy
The Accumulated energy subfunction calculates the accumulated energy (Iyt) based on
current samples, where the setting CurrExponent (y) ranges from 0.5 to 3.0. The operation
is described in Figure 484.
The TRCMD output is enabled when either of the trip indications from the trip coil circuit
TRIND is high or the breaker status is OPENPOS.
1054
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
I3P-IL
TRCMD
I3P-ILRMSPH
Accumulated
energy
calculation
POSCLOSE
TRIND
IPOWPH
LRSTIPOW
Alarm limit
Check
BLOCK
IPOWALPH
IPOWLOPH
BLKALM
IEC12000619 V3 EN
Figure 484:
Functional module diagram for estimating accumulated energy
Accumulated energy calculation

Accumulated energy can be calculated either with TRIND or POSCLOSE by selecting the
AccSelCal parameter value accordingly.
The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE or TRIND input events. It ends when the
RMS current is lower than the AccStopCurr setting.
The ContTrCorr setting is used to determine the accumulated energy in relation to the time
the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation of energy starts after the
auxiliary contact has opened and the delay equal to the value of the ContTrCorr setting has
passed. When the setting is negative, the calculation starts in advance by the correction
time in relation to when the auxiliary contact opened.
Main Contact
Main Contact
close
close
open
POSCLOSE
open
POSCLOSE 1
Energy
Accumulation
starts
Energy
Accumulation
starts
ContTrCorr
(Negative)
ContTrCorr
(Positive)
IEC12000618 V1 EN
Figure 485:
Significance of correction factor setting
Accumulated energy can also be calculated by using the change of state of the trip output.
TRIND is used to get the instance of the trip output and the time delay between the trip
Technical manual
1055
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
initiation and the opening of the main contact is introduced by the setting
OperTimeDelay.
The accumulated energy output IPOWPH is provided as a service value. The value can be
reset by enabling RSTIPOW through LHMI or by activating the input RSTIPOW.
Alarm limit check

The IPOWALPH alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the set value
AlmAccCurrPwr.
IPOWLOPH is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the limit of the
LOAccCurrPwr setting.
The IPOWALPH and IPOWLOPH outputs can be blocked by activating the binary input
BLKALM.
16.4.7.5
Circuit breaker operation cycles

The circuit breaker operation cycles subfunction counts the number of closing-opening
sequences of the breaker. The operation counter value is updated after each closingopening sequence. The operation is described in Figure 486.
POSCLOSE
Operation
counter
POSOPEN
NOOPER
RSTCBWR
Alarm limit
Check
BLOCK
BLKALM
OPERALM
OPERLO
IEC12000617 V2 EN
Figure 486:
Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation cycles
Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state of change of the
auxiliary contact inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.
The number of operations NOOPER is given as a service value. The old circuit breaker
operation counter value can be used by adding the value to the InitCounterVal parameter
and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the Clear menu on the LHMI or activating the input
RSTCBWR.
1056
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Alarm limit check

OPERALM is generated when the number of operations exceeds the set value of the
OperAlmLevel threshold setting.
If the number of operations increases and exceeds the limit value set with the
OperLOLevel setting, the OPERLO output is activated.
The binary outputs OPERALM and OPERALO are deactivated when the BLKALM input is
activated.
16.4.7.6
Circuit breaker operation monitoring

The circuit breaker operation monitoring subfunction indicates the inactive days of the
circuit breaker and gives an alarm when the number of days exceed the set level. The
operation of the circuit breaker operation monitoring is shown in Figure 487.
POSCLOSE
INADAYS
Inactive timer
POSOPEN
Alarm limit
Check
BLOCK
MONALM
BLKALM
IEC12000614 V2 EN
Figure 487:
Functional module diagram for circuit breaker operation monitoring
Inactive timer
The Inactive timer module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained
in the same open or closed state. The value is calculated by monitoring the states of the
POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.
The number of inactive days INADAYS is available as a service value. The initial number
of inactive days is set using the InitInactDays parameter.
Alarm limit check

MONALM is initiated when the number of inactive days and hours exceed the limit value
defined by the InactiveAlDays and InactivAlHrs setting. The alarm signal MONALM can be
blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.
Technical manual
1057
Section 16
Monitoring
16.4.7.7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring

The circuit breaker spring charge monitoring subfunction calculates the spring charging
time. The operation is described in Figure 488.
SPRCHRST
Spring charging
time
measurement
SPRCHRD
RSTSPCHT
SPCHT
Alarm limit
Check
BLOCK
SPCHALM
BLKALM
IEC12000621 V2 EN
Figure 488:
Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charge indication
Spring charging time measurement

The binary input SPRCHRST indicates the pickup of circuit breaker spring charging time.
SPRCHRD indicates that the circuit breaker spring is charged. The spring charging time is
calculated from the difference of these two signal timings. Spring charging indication is
described in Figure488.
The last measured spring charging time SPCHT is provided as a service value. The spring
charging time SPCHT can be reset on the LHMI or by activating the input RSTSPCHT.
Alarm limit check

If the time taken by the spring to charge is more than the value set with the SpChAlmTime
setting, the subfunction generates the SPCHALM alarm.
It is possible to block the SPCHALM alarm signal by activating the BLKALM binary input.
16.4.7.8
Circuit breaker gas pressure indication

The circuit breaker gas pressure indication subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside
the arc chamber. The operation is described in Figure 489.
1058
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PRESALM
BLOCK
AND
tDGasPresAlm
0
GPRESALM
BLKALM
PRESLO
AND
tDGasPresLO
0
GPRESLO
ANSI12000622 V1 EN
Figure 489:
Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure indication
When the PRESALM binary input is activated, the GPRESALM output is activated after a
time delay set with the tDGasPresAlm setting. The GPRESALM alarm can be blocked by
activating the BLKALM input.
If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRESLO binary input goes high,
activating the lockout alarm GPRESLO after a time delay set with the tDGasPresLO
setting. The GPRESLO alarm can be blocked by activating the BLKALM input.
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the BLOCK
input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from the function
can be blocked by activating the binary input BLKALM.
16.4.8
Technical data
Table 699:
SSCBR Technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Alarm level for open and close

travel time
(0 200) ms
3 ms
Alarm level for number of

operations
(0 9999)
Independent time delay for spring

charging time alarm
(0.00 60.00) s
greater
Independent time delay for gas

pressure alarm
(0.00 60.00) s
greater
Independent time delay for gas

pressure lockout
(0.00 60.00) s
greater
CB Contact Travel Time, opening

and closing
3 ms
Remaining Life of CB
2 operations
Accumulated Energy
1.0% or 0.5 whichever is

greater
Technical manual
1059
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.5
Event function EVENT
16.5.1
Identification
Event function
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
EVENT
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
S00946 V1 EN
16.5.2
Functionality
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, timetagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These
events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event
function (EVENT). The event function block is used for remote communication.
Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function.
16.5.3
Function block
EVENT
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
IEC05000697 V2 EN
Figure 490:
1060
EVENT function block
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.5.4
Signals
Table 700:
Name
EVENT Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 1
INPUT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 2
INPUT3
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 3
INPUT4
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 4
INPUT5
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 5
INPUT6
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 6
INPUT7
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 7
INPUT8
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 8
INPUT9
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 9
INPUT10
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 10
INPUT11
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 11
INPUT12
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 12
INPUT13
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 13
INPUT14
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 14
INPUT15
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 15
INPUT16
GROUP
SIGNAL
Input 16
Technical manual
1061
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.5.5
Table 701:
Settings
EVENT Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SPAChannelMask
Disabled
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
Disabled
SPA channel mask
LONChannelMask
Disabled
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
Disabled
LON channel mask
EventMask1
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
Reporting criteria for input 1
EventMask2
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask3
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask4
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask5
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask6
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask7
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask8
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
1062
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EventMask9
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask10
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask11
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask12
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask13
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask14
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask15
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
EventMask16
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
AutoDetect
MinRepIntVal1
0 - 3600
Minimum reporting interval input 1
MinRepIntVal2
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal3
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal4
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal5
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal6
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal7
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal8
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal9
0 - 3600

Technical manual
1063
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MinRepIntVal10
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal11
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal12
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal13
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal14
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal15
0 - 3600
MinRepIntVal16
0 - 3600
16.5.6
Operation principle
The main purpose of the event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the state or
value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state transition,
for which event generation is enabled.
Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a name
from the Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single
events, but are also intended for double indication events.
EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.
The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals and
binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing
module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module. The
time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have a
resolution corresponding to the execution cycle-time of the source application. The timetagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a resolution of 1
ms.
The outputs from EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and alarms
by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input is intended
to be used by the station level.
All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000
events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event
is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treated
commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The EventMask can be set
individually for each input channel. These settings are available:
1064
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
It is possible to define which part of EVENT function generates the events. This can be
performed individually for the SPAChannelMask and LONChannelMask respectively.
For each communication type these settings are available:
Disabled
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It is
possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input
channel.
To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate the
event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is implemented.
If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted quota then further
events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be removed when the input calms
down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the maximum burst quota. The maximum
burst quota per input channel is 45 events per second.
16.6
Disturbance report DRPRDRE
16.6.1
Identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Disturbance report
DRPRDRE
Disturbance report
A1RADR - A4RADR
Disturbance report
B1RBDR - B8RBDR
Technical manual
1065
Section 16
Monitoring
16.6.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Functionality
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.
Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all
selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a, maximum
of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:
Sequential of events
Indications
Event recorder
Trip value recorder
Disturbance recorder
The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding

configuration, initiating conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AnRADR or BnRBDR function
blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected signals from
pickup of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in the recording.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade format
as a reader file HDR, a configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The same applies to
all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. The local HMI is used to get
information about the recordings. The disturbance report files may be uploaded to
PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.
16.6.3
Function block
DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED
IEC05000406 V3 EN
Figure 491:
1066
DRPRDRE function block
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A1RADR
^GRP INPUT1
^GRP INPUT2
^GRP INPUT3
^GRP INPUT4
^GRP INPUT5
^GRP INPUT6
^GRP INPUT7
^GRP INPUT8
^GRP INPUT9
^GRP INPUT10
IEC05000430 V4 EN
Figure 492:
A1RADR function block example for A1RADR-A3RADR
A4RADR
ÎNPUT31
ÎNPUT32
ÎNPUT33
ÎNPUT34
ÎNPUT35
ÎNPUT36
ÎNPUT37
ÎNPUT38
ÎNPUT39
ÎNPUT40
IEC05000431 V3 EN
Figure 493:
A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs
B1RBDR
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
IEC05000432 V3 EN
Figure 494:
B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR - B8RBDR
Technical manual
1067
Section 16
Monitoring
16.6.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 702:
Name
DRPRDRE Output signals

Type
Description
DRPOFF
BOOLEAN
Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART
BOOLEAN
Disturbance recording started
RECMADE
BOOLEAN
Disturbance recording made
CLEARED
BOOLEAN
All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED
BOOLEAN
More than 80% of memory used
Table 703:
Name
A1RADR Input signals

Type
Default
Description
GRPINPUT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group signal for input 1
GRPINPUT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT3
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT4
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT5
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT6
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT7
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT8
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT9
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT10
GROUP
SIGNAL
A2RADR and A3RADR functions have the same input signal specifications as A1RADR
but with different numbering:
1068
A2RADR: GRPINPUT11 to GRPINPUT20 (group signal for inputs 11 to 20)

A3RADR: GRPINPUT21 to GRPINPUT30 (group signal for inputs 21 to 30)
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 704:
Name
A4RADR Input signals

Type
Default
Description
INPUT31
REAL
Analog channel 31
INPUT32
REAL
Analog channel 32
INPUT33
REAL
Analog channel 33
INPUT34
REAL
Analog channel 34
INPUT35
REAL
Analog channel 35
INPUT36
REAL
Analog channel 36
INPUT37
REAL
Analog channel 37
INPUT38
REAL
Analog channel 38
INPUT39
REAL
Analog channel 39
INPUT40
REAL
Analog channel 40
Table 705:
Name
B1RBDR Input signals

Type
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 16
B2RBDR to B8RBDR functions have the same input signal specifications as B1RBDR
Technical manual
1069
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.6.5
Table 706:
Name
B2RBDR: INPUT17 to INPUT32 (binary channels 17 to 32)

Settings
DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PreFaultRecT
0.05 - 9.90
0.01
0.10
Pre-fault recording time
PostFaultRecT
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
0.5
Post-fault recording time
TimeLimit
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
Fault recording time limit
PostRetrig
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)
MaxNoStoreRec
10 - 100
100
Maximum number of stored disturbances
ZeroAngleRef
1 - 30
Ch
Trip value recorder, phasor reference channel
OpModeTest
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation mode during test mode
Table 707:
Name
A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
1070
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Table 708:
Name
A1RADR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NomValue01
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
Nominal value for analog channel 1
UnderTrigOp01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Use under level trigger for analog channel 1

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01
0 - 200
50
Under trigger level for analog channel 1 in % of

signal
OverTrigOp01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Use over level trigger for analog channel 1 (on)

or not (off)
OverTrigLe01
0 - 5000
200
Over trigger level for analog channel 1 in % of

signal
NomValue02
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe02
0 - 200
50

signal
OverTrigOp02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

or not (off)
OverTrigLe02
0 - 5000
200

signal
NomValue03
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe03
0 - 200
50

signal
OverTrigOp03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

or not (off)
OverTrigLe03
0 - 5000
200
Overtrigger level for analog channel 3 in % of

signal
NomValue04
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe04
0 - 200
50

signal
OverTrigOp04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

or not (off)

Technical manual
1071
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OverTrigLe04
0 - 5000
200

signal
NomValue05
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe05
0 - 200
50

signal
OverTrigOp05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

or not (off)
OverTrigLe05
0 - 5000
200

signal
NomValue06
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe06
0 - 200
50

signal
OverTrigOp06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

or not (off)
OverTrigLe06
0 - 5000
200

signal
NomValue07
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe07
0 - 200
50

signal
OverTrigOp07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

or not (off)
OverTrigLe07
0 - 5000
200

signal
NomValue08
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe08
0 - 200
50

signal
OverTrigOp08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

or not (off)
OverTrigLe08
0 - 5000
200

signal
NomValue09
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe09
0 - 200
50

signal
1072
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OverTrigOp09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

or not (off)
OverTrigLe09
0 - 5000
200

signal
NomValue10
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe10
0 - 200
50
Under trigger level for analog channel 10 in %

of signal
OverTrigOp10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Use over level trigger for analog channel 10

(on) or not (off)
OverTrigLe10
0 - 5000
200

signal
A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as A1RADR
A2RADR: Operation11 to Operation20

A2RADR to A4RADR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as
A1RADR but with different numbering (examples given in brackets):
Table 709:
Name
A2RADR: 11 to 20 (NomValue11, nominal value for analog channel 11)

B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TrigDR01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Trigger operation On/Off
SetLED01
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
Set LED on HMI for binary channel 1
TrigDR02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED02
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

Technical manual
1073
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SetLED03
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED04
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED05
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED06
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED07
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED08
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED09
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED10
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR11
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
1074
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SetLED11
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR12
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED12
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR13
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED13
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR14
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED14
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR15
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED15
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
TrigDR16
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED16
Disabled
Pickup
Trip
Pickup and Trip
Disabled
FunType1
0 - 255
Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC

-60870-5-103)
InfNo1
0 - 255
Information number for binary channel 1 (IEC

-60870-5-103)
FunType2
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
InfNo2
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
FunType3
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
InfNo3
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
FunType4
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)

Technical manual
1075
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
InfNo4
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
FunType5
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
InfNo5
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
FunType6
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
InfNo6
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
FunType7
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
InfNo7
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
FunType8
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
InfNo8
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
FunType9
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
InfNo9
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
FunType10
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
InfNo10
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
FunType11
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
InfNo11
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
FunType12
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
InfNo12
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
FunType13
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
InfNo13
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
FunType14
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
InfNo14
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
FunType15
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
1076
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
InfNo15
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
FunType16
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
InfNo16
0 - 255

-60870-5-103)
Table 710:
Name
B1RBDR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TrigLevel01
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
Trigger on positive (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary input 1
IndicationMa01
Hide
Show
Show
Indication mask for binary channel 1
TrigLevel02
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 2
IndicationMa02
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel03
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 3
IndicationMa03
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel04
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 4
IndicationMa04
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel05
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 5
IndicationMa05
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel06
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 6
IndicationMa06
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel07
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 7
IndicationMa07
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel08
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 8
IndicationMa08
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel09
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 9
Technical manual
1077
Section 16
Monitoring
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IndicationMa09
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel10
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 10
IndicationMa10
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel11
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 11
IndicationMa11
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel12
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 12
IndicationMa12
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel13
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 13
IndicationMa13
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel14
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 14
IndicationMa14
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel15
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 15
IndicationMa15
Hide
Show
Show
TrigLevel16
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1

binary input 16
IndicationMa16
Hide
Show
Show
B2RBDR to B8RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (basic) as B1RBDR
but with different numbering (examples given in brackets):
B2RBDR: 17 to 32 (SetLED17, set LED on HMI for binary channel 17)

B2RBDR to B8RBDR functions have the same Non group settings (advanced) as
B1RBDR but with different numbering (examples given in brackets):
1078
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.6.6
B2RBDR: 17 to 32 (IndicationMa17, indication mask for binary channel 17)

Monitored data
Table 711:
Name
DRPRDRE Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
MemoryUsed
INTEGER
Memory usage (0-100%)
UnTrigStatCh1
BOOLEAN
Under level trig for analog

channel 1 activated
OvTrigStatCh1
BOOLEAN
Over level trig for analog

channel 1 activated
UnTrigStatCh2
BOOLEAN

channel 2 activated
OvTrigStatCh2
BOOLEAN

channel 2 activated
UnTrigStatCh3
BOOLEAN

channel 3 activated
OvTrigStatCh3
BOOLEAN

channel 3 activated
UnTrigStatCh4
BOOLEAN

channel 4 activated
OvTrigStatCh4
BOOLEAN

channel 4 activated
UnTrigStatCh5
BOOLEAN

channel 5 activated
OvTrigStatCh5
BOOLEAN

channel 5 activated
UnTrigStatCh6
BOOLEAN

channel 6 activated
OvTrigStatCh6
BOOLEAN

channel 6 activated
UnTrigStatCh7
BOOLEAN

channel 7 activated
OvTrigStatCh7
BOOLEAN

channel 7 activated
UnTrigStatCh8
BOOLEAN

channel 8 activated
Technical manual
1079
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OvTrigStatCh8
BOOLEAN

channel 8 activated
UnTrigStatCh9
BOOLEAN

channel 9 activated
OvTrigStatCh9
BOOLEAN

channel 9 activated
UnTrigStatCh10
BOOLEAN

channel 10 activated
OvTrigStatCh10
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh11
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh11
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh12
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh12
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh13
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh13
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh14
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh14
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh15
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh15
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh16
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh16
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh17
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh17
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh18
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh18
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh19
BOOLEAN

1080
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OvTrigStatCh19
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh20
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh20
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh21
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh21
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh22
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh22
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh23
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh23
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh24
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh24
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh25
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh25
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh26
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh26
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh27
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh27
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh28
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh28
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh29
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh29
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh30
BOOLEAN

Technical manual
1081
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
1082
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OvTrigStatCh30
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh31
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh31
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh32
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh32
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh33
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh33
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh34
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh34
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh35
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh35
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh36
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh36
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh37
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh37
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh38
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh38
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh39
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh39
BOOLEAN

UnTrigStatCh40
BOOLEAN

OvTrigStatCh40
BOOLEAN

FaultNumber
INTEGER
Disturbance fault number
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.6.7
Operation principle
Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the
operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the
system.
The functions included in the disturbance report are:
Sequential of events (SOE)

Indications (IND)
Event recorder (ER)
Trip value recorder(TVR)
Disturbance recorder (DR)
Figure 495 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and
function blocks. Sequential of events (SOE), Event recorder (ER) and Indications (IND)
uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder
(TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR).
Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both AxRADR and
BxRBDR.
Technical manual
1083
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
AxRADR
Disturbance Report
DRPRDRE
Analog signals
Trip value rec
BxRBDR
Disturbance
recorder
Binary signals
Sequential of
events
Event recorder
Indications
ANSI09000337 V2 EN
Figure 495:
Disturbance report functions and related function blocks
The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each
with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The sequential of events
function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time,
and so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash
memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each
report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.
Disturbance report
Record no. N
General dist.
information
Indications
Record no. N+1
Trip
values
Record no. N+100
Event
recordings
Disturbance
recording
Event list
(SOE)
en05000161_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000161 V1 EN
Figure 496:
1084
Disturbance report structure

Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded when

the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one. The total
recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling frequency,
number of analog and binary channels and recording time. Figure 497 shows the number
of recordings versus the total recording time tested for a typical configuration, that is, in a
60 Hz system it is possible to record 80 where the average recording time is 3.4 seconds.
The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report (Event list (EL), Event
recorder (ER), Indications (IND) and Trip value recorder (TVR)).
Number of recordings
100
3.4s
20 analog
96 binary
3.4s
80
40 analog
96 binary
60
6.3s
6.3s
50 Hz
6.3s
40
60 Hz
Total recording time

250
300
350
400 s
en05000488_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000488 V1 EN
Figure 497:
Example of number of recordings versus the total recording time
The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings
to less than 100.
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might
cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.
Technical manual
1085
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip values
are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the user must use
a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or MMS (over 61850)
client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or remotely via the station bus
(Ethernet ports).
Indications (IND)
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged).
Event recorder (ER)

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or
PCM600.
Sequential of events (SOE)

The sequetial of events may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The oldest
data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or PCM600.
Trip value recorder (TVR)

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and
during the fault.
Disturbance recorder (DR)

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the
fault.
Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time
tagging within the disturbance report
Recording times
Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a settable
time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report. Disturbance
recorder (DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register disturbance data and
events during tRecording, the total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording =
1086
PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on which

criterion stops the current disturbance recording
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT
PostFaultRecT
3
en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN
Figure 498:
The recording times definition
PreFaultRecT, 1
Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the trip time of
the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2
Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any valid
trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all activated
triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit
Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does not
reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a recording
and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the setting
TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for external
analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data communication module
(LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and summation block (3PHSUM).
The last 10 channels may be connected to internally calculated analog signals available as
function block output signals (mA input signals, phase differential currents, bias currents
and so on).
Technical manual
1087
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A1RADR
SMAI
External analog
signals
Block
^GRP2_A
AI3P
AI1
^GRP2_B
^GRP2_C
AI2
AI3
INPUT2
^GRP2_N
Type
AI4
AIN
INPUT4
A2RADR
INPUT1
A3RADR
INPUT3
INPUT5
INPUT6
...
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32
Internal analog signals
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
...
INPUT40
ANSI10000029 V1 EN
Figure 499:
Analog input function blocks
The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after configuration)
available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the SMAI function block.
The information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz).
Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle time of the specific
function. If a function is running at lower speed than the base sampling rate, Disturbance
recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new updated sample is available.
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In case
of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the Application
Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.
The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases where
only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the information
available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual output (AINoutput). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input signal the corresponding
information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the SMAI function block.
Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = Enabled means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and triggers
1088
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
even if operation is set to Disabled. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used as
trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.
If Operation = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph.
However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input
channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.
If Operation = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the
entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.
Binary signals
Up to 128 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The signals
can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is selected
to be recorded when:
the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

the signal is connected to the input of the function block
Each of the 128 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation =
Operation>TrigDR =Enabled). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED
on the local HMI (SetLED = Enabled).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, sequential of events and the
disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as
triggers. The indications are also selected from these 128 signals with local HMI
IndicationMask = Show/Hide.
Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the sequential of events,
which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete
disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled, there
is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance of
choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:
Manual trigger
Binary-signal trigger
Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via
station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is
Technical manual
1089
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to the operator's manual for
procedure.
Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger
from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the
disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in the
disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp, OverTrigLe and
UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found, the
absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value is above
the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with
a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent
trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure is
separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog trigger conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The trip time for this initiation is typically in the
range of one cycle, 16 2/3 ms for a 60 Hz network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.
Post Retrigger
Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition
during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However, under
certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for
instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig =
Enabled) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will pickup
and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.
When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Disabled), a new recording will not
pickup until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig
occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a new
complete recording will be started.
Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.
1090
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.6.8
Technical data
Table 712:
DRPRDRE technical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Pre-fault time
(0.059.90) s
Post-fault time
(0.110.0) s
Limit time
(0.510.0) s
Maximum number of recordings
100, first in - first out
Time tagging resolution
1 ms
See table 862
Maximum number of analog inputs
30 + 10 (external + internally
derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs
96
Maximum number of phasors in the Trip

Value recorder per recording
30
Maximum number of indications in a

disturbance report
96
Maximum number of events in the Event

recording per recording
150
Maximum number of events in the

Sequence of events
1000, first in - first out
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s

recording time and maximum number of
channels, typical value)
340 seconds (100 recordings) at

50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate
1 kHz at 50 Hz
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth
(5-300) Hz
16.7
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP
16.7.1
Identification
Logical signal status report
16.7.2
IEC 61850
identification
BINSTATREP
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a SPA
master to poll signals from various other functions.
Technical manual
1091
Section 16
Monitoring
16.7.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
BINSTATREP
BLOCK
OUTPUT1
ÎNPUT1
OUTPUT2
ÎNPUT2
OUTPUT3
ÎNPUT3
OUTPUT4
ÎNPUT4
OUTPUT5
ÎNPUT5
OUTPUT6
ÎNPUT6
OUTPUT7
ÎNPUT7
OUTPUT8
ÎNPUT8
OUTPUT9
ÎNPUT9
OUTPUT10
ÎNPUT10
OUTPUT11
ÎNPUT11
OUTPUT12
ÎNPUT12
OUTPUT13
ÎNPUT13
OUTPUT14
ÎNPUT14
OUTPUT15
ÎNPUT15
OUTPUT16
ÎNPUT16
IEC09000730 V1 EN
Figure 500:
16.7.4
Signals
Table 713:
Name
1092
BINSTATREP function block
BINSTATREP Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Single status report input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 714:
BINSTATREP Output signals
Name
16.7.5
Table 715:
Name
t
16.7.6
Type
Description
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
Logical status report output 1
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT4
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT5
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT6
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT7
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT8
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT9
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT10
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT11
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT12
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT13
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT14
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT15
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT16
BOOLEAN
Settings
BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
0.0 - 60.0
Unit
Step
Default
0.1
10.0
Description
Time delay of function
Operation principle
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16 outputs.
The output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or via SPA
communication.
When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input signal
remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal resets.
Technical manual
1093
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
INPUTn
OUTPUTn
t
t
IEC09000732 V1 EN
Figure 501:
BINSTATREP logical diagram
16.8
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP
16.8.1
Identification
Measured value expander block
16.8.2
IEC 61850
identification
RANGE_XP
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and
VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI)
and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are provided with
measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four
settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value
expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced to enable translating the integer
output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-low limit,
below low limit, normal, above high limit or above high-high limit. The output signals can
be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming purpose.
1094
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.8.3
Function block
RANGE*
RANGE_XP
HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW
IEC05000346 V2 EN
Figure 502:
16.8.4
RANGE_XP function block
Signals
Table 716:
RANGE_XP Input signals
Name
Type
RANGE
Table 717:
INTEGER
Description
Measured value range
RANGE_XP Output signals
Name
16.8.5
Default
Type
Description
HIGHHIGH
BOOLEAN
Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH
BOOLEAN
Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL
BOOLEAN
Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW
BOOLEAN
Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW
BOOLEAN
Measured value is below low-low limit
Operation principle
The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGAPC). The
function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according to
table 718.
Table 718:
Input integer value converted to binary output signals
Measured supervised
value is:
Output:
LOWLOW
LOW
below low-low between low

limit
low and low
limit
between low
and high limit
between high- above high-high

high and high limit
limit
High
High
NORMAL
HIGH
HIGHHIGH
Technical manual
High
High
High
1095
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.9
Limit counter L4UFCNT
16.9.1
Identification
16.9.1.1
Identification
Limit counter
16.9.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
L4UFCNT
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The 12 Up limit counter L4UFCNT provides a settable counter with four independent
limits where the number of positive and/or negative sides on the input signal are counted
against the setting values for limits. The output for each limit is activated when the counted
value reaches that limit.
Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.
16.9.3
Operation principle
Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative sides on the
binary input signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks if the
accumulated value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits. The four limit
outputs will be activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain activated until the
reset of the function. Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is stored in flash memory and
will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.
16.9.3.1
Design
Figure 503 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.
1096
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
BLOCK
INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
Detection
CountType
OVERFLOW
OnMaxValue
LIMIT1 4
Limit
Check
MaxValue
CounterLimit1...4
ERROR
Error
Detection
InitialValue
IEC12000625 V1 EN
Figure 503:
Logic diagram
The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of the
function. The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three possibilities
after reaching the maximum counted value are:
Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count
The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as
illustrated in figure 504.
Overflow indication
Actual value
... Max value -1
Max value
Counted value
... Max value -1
Max value
Max value +1
0
Max value +2
1
Max value +3 ...

2
...
IEC12000626 V1 EN
Figure 504:
Overflow indication when OnMaxValue is set to rollover pulsed
Technical manual
1097
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or initial
value setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting the input and
all the outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error condition remains
until the correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value setting(s) are applied.
The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is not
counted and outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can be
initialized after reset of the function. In this case the outputs remain in their initial states
until the release of the block input.
16.9.3.2
Reporting
The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.
Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.
Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely, for
example from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a measurement on
the local HMI graphical display.
16.9.4
Function block
L4UFCNT
BLOCK
INPUT
RESET
ERROR
OVERFLOW
LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE
IEC12000029 V1 EN
Figure 505:
16.9.5
Signals
Table 719:
Name
1098
L4UFCNT function block
L4UFCNT Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Input for counter
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset of function
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 720:
L4UFCNT Output signals
Name
16.9.6
Table 721:
Name
Type
Description
ERROR
BOOLEAN
Error indication on counter limit and/or initial value

settings
OVERFLOW
BOOLEAN
Overflow indication on count of greater than MaxValue
LIMIT1
BOOLEAN
Counted value is larger than or equal to CounterLimit1
LIMIT2
BOOLEAN
LIMIT3
BOOLEAN
LIMIT4
BOOLEAN
VALUE
INTEGER
Counted value
Settings
L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
On
Disabled
CountType
Positive edge
Negative edge
Both edges
Positive edge
Select counting on positive and/or negative

sides
CounterLimit1
1 - 65535
100
Value of the first limit
CounterLimit2
1 - 65535
200
Value of the second limit
CounterLimit3
1 - 65535
300
Value of the third limit
CounterLimit4
1 - 65535
400
Value of the fourth limit
MaxValue
1 - 65535
500
Maximum count value
OnMaxValue
Stop
Rollover Steady
Rollover Pulsed
Stop
Select if counter stops or rolls over after

reaching maxValue with steady or pulsed
overflow flag
InitialValue
0 - 65535
Initial count value after reset of the function
16.9.7
Monitored data
Table 722:
Name
VALUE
L4UFCNT Monitored data

Type
INTEGER
Values (Range)
-
Technical manual
Unit
-
Description
Counted value
1099
Section 16
Monitoring
16.9.8
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 723:
L4UFCNTtechnical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Counter value
0-65535
Max. count up speed
30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle)
16.10
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC
16.10.1
Identification
16.10.2
Function Description
IEC 61850
identification
Running hour-meter
TEILGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

number
-
Functionality
The Running hour-meter (TEILGAPC) function is a function that accumulates the elapsed
time when a given binary signal has been high, see also figure 506.
BLOCK
RESET
IN
ADDTIME
ACC_HOUR
Time Accumulation
with Retain
ACC_DAY
tAddToTime
q-1
99 999.9 h
a>b
tWarning
a>b
tAlarm
q-1 = unit delay
a>b
&
&
&
OVERFLOW
WARNING
ALARM
IEC15000321 V1 EN
Figure 506:
TEILGAPC logics
The main features of TEILGAPC are:
1100
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
16.10.3
Applicable to very long time accumulation ( 99999.9 hours)

Supervision of limit transgression conditions and rollover/overflow
Possibility to define a warning and alarm with the resolution of 0.1 hours
Retain any saved accumulation value at a restart
Possibilities for blocking and reset
Possibility for manual addition of accumulated time
Reporting of the accumulated time
Function block
TEILGAPC
BLOCK
IN
ADDTIME
RESET
ALARM
WARNING
OVERFLOW
ACC_HOUR
ACC_DAY
IEC15000323.vsdx
IEC15000323 V1 EN
Figure 507:
16.10.4
TEILGAPC function block
Signals
Table 724:
Name
TEILGAPC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Freeze the accumulation and block the outputs
IN
BOOLEAN
The input signal that is used to measure the elapsed

time, when its value is high
ADDTIME
BOOLEAN
Add time to the accumulation
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset accumulated time
Table 725:
Name
TEILGAPC Output signals

Type
Description
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Indicator that accumulated time has reached alarm limit
WARNING
BOOLEAN
Indicator that accumulated time has reached warning

limit
OVERFLOW
BOOLEAN
Indicator that accumulated time has reached overflow

limit
ACC_HOUR
REAL
Accumulated time in hours
ACC_DAY
REAL
Accumulated time in days
Technical manual
1101
Section 16
Monitoring
16.10.5
Table 726:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Settings
TEILGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tAlarm
1.0 - 99999.9
Hour
0.1
90000.0
Time limit for alarm supervision
tWarning
1.0 - 99999.9
Hour
0.1
50000.0
Time limit for warning supervision
tAddToTime
0.0 - 99999.9
Hour
0.1
0.0
Time to add to the accumulation
16.10.6
Operation principle
Figure 508 describes the simplified logic of the function.
Loop Delay
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision
Plus Retain
WARNING
ALARM
BLOCK
RESET
ACC_HOUR
Time Accumulation
IN
ACC_DAY
ADDTIME
tAddToTime
Loop Delay
IEC15000322.vsd
IEC15000322 V1 EN
Figure 508:
TEILGAPC Simplified logic
TEILGAPC main functionalities
1102
IN: Accumulation of the elapsed time when input IN is high
Technical manual
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
RESET: Reset of the accumulated value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
the amount of time to be added is defined by a setting tAddToTime

time is added through activation of input ADDTIME or from LHMI or with
IEC61850 command
BLOCK: Freeze the accumulation and block/reset the other outputs
independent of the input IN value

reset the value of the nonvolatile memory to zero
reset can be made by activation of input RESET or from LHMI or with
IEC61850 command
ADDTIME: Manually add time to the currently accumulated time
applicable to very long time accumulation (99999.9 hours)

output ACC_HOUR presents accumulated value in hours and ACC_DAY
presents accumulated value in days
accumulated value is retained in a non-volatile memory
any retained value is used as initiation value for the integration following by a
restart
independent of the input IN value

BLOCK request overrides RESET request
Monitor and report the conditions of limit transgression
overflow if output ACC_HOUR > 99 999.9 hours

alarm if output ACC_HOUR > tAlarm
warning if output ACC_HOUR > tWarning
The ACC_HOUR output represents the accumulated time in hours and the ACC_DAY
output represents the accumulated time in days.
tAlarm and tWarning are user settable time limit parameters in hours. They are also
independent of each other, that is, there is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.
tAddToTime is a user settable time parameter in hours.
tAlarm, tWarning and tAddToTime are possible to be defined with a resolution of 0.1 hours
(6 minutes).
The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 99999.9 hours. The outputs will reset and
the accumulated time will reset and pickup from zero if an overflow occurs.
16.10.6.1
Operation accuracy
The accuracy of TEILGAPC depends on essentially two factors
Technical manual
1103
Section 16
Monitoring
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
the pulse length

the number of pulses, that is, the number of rising and falling flank pairs
In principle, more pulses may lead to reduced accuracy.
16.10.6.2
Memory storage
The value of the accumulated time is retained in a non-volatile memory,
at every falling edge of the input IN

at every even 12 hours, after a rising edge of the input IN
after a manual addition of time
Consequently in case of a power failure, there is a risk of losing the difference in time
between actual time and last time stored in the non-volatile memory.
16.10.7
Technical data
Table 727:
TEILGAPC Technical data

Function
1104
Range or value
Accuracy
Time limit for alarm supervision,

tAlarm
(0 - 99999.9) hours
0.1% of set value
Time limit for warning supervision,

tWarning
(0 - 99999.9) hours
0.1% of set value
Time limit for overflow supervision
Fixed to 99999.9 hours
0.1%
Technical manual
Section 17
Metering
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 17
Metering
17.1
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT
17.1.1
Identification
Pulse-counter logic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
PCFCNT
S00947 V1 EN
17.1.2
Functionality
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read by
the PCFCNT function. A scaled service value is available over the station bus. The special
Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to
achieve this functionality.
17.1.3
Function block
PCFCNT
BLOCK
READ_VAL
BI_PULSE*
RS_CNT
INVALID
RESTART
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL
IEC09000335 V3 EN
Figure 509:
PCFCNT function block
Technical manual
1105
Section 17
Metering
17.1.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 728:
PCFCNT Input signals
Name
Type
Block of function
READ_VAL
BOOLEAN
Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE
BOOLEAN
Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT
BOOLEAN
Resets pulse counter value
PCFCNT Output signals
Name
Table 730:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 729:
17.1.5
Default
BLOCK
Type
Description
INVALID
BOOLEAN
The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART
BOOLEAN
The reported value does not comprise a complete

integration cycle
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL
BOOLEAN
A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL
REAL
Scaled value with time and status information
Settings
PCFCNT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
EventMask
NoEvents
ReportEvents
NoEvents
Report mask for analog events from pulse

counter
CountCriteria
Disabled
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
RisingEdge
Pulse counter criteria
Scale
1.000 - 90000.000
0.001
1.000
Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit per

counted value
Quantity
Count
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
Count
Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output
tReporting
0 - 3600
60
Cycle time for reporting of counter value
1106
Technical manual
Section 17
Metering
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
17.1.6
Monitored data
Table 731:
Name
17.1.7
PCFCNT Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
Actual pulse counter value
SCAL_VAL
REAL
Scaled value with time and

status information
Operation principle
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary
input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are sent
to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.
The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is
synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter values
can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All active
counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI) or IEC 61850.
Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental
counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit format,
that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range 0...+2147483647. The
counter is reset at initialization of the IED.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value
(pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality
consists of:
Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

Wrapped around
Blocked
Adjusted
The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is, the
value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database.
PCFCNT updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and
activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be connected to an
Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the station HMI. This time
corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the function.
The pulse-counter logic function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that
is specially adapted to the pulse-counter logic function.
Technical manual
1107
Section 17
Metering
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Figure 510 shows the pulse-counter logic function block with connections of the inputs
and outputs.
SingleCmdFunc
OUTx
SingleCmdFunc
OUTx
I/Omodule
Pulse
INPUT OUT
Pulse length >1s
Reset counter
PulseCounter
BLOCK
INVALID
RESTART
READ_VAL
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
BI_PULSE
RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL
SMS settings
1.Operation = Off/On
2.tReporting = 0s...60min
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000
EVENT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
IEC EVENT
Database
Pulse counter value:
0...2147483647
en05000744_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000744 V1 EN
Figure 510:
Overview of the pulse-counter logic function
The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command logics, which
are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as
the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to
READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be a
pulse with a length >1 second.
The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the Binary
Input Module (BIM).
The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.
Each pulse-counter logic function block has four binary output signals that can be
connected to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART,
BLOCKED and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event
function block.
The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where the
pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.
The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED pickup, in the
first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during last
integration cycle.
1108
Technical manual
Section 17
Metering
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There are
two reasons why the counter is blocked:
The BLOCK input is set, or

The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was updated
since last report.
Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.
The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time and
status information.
17.1.8
Technical data
Table 732:
PCFCNT technical data
Function
Setting range
Accuracy
Input frequency
See Binary Input Module (BIM)
Cycle time for report of counter

value
(13600) s
17.2
Function for energy calculation and demand handling

ETPMMTR
17.2.1
Identification
Function for energy calculation and
demand handling
17.2.2
IEC 61850
identification
ETPMMTR
IEC 60617
identification
W_Varh
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Measurements function block (CVMMXN) can be used to measure active as well as
reactive power values. Function for energy calculation and demand handling
(ETPMMTR) uses measured active and reactive power as input and calculates the
Technical manual
1109
Section 17
Metering
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
accumulated active and reactive energy pulses, in forward and reverse direction. Energy
values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are also
calculated by the function. This function includes zero point clamping to remove noise
from the input signal. As output of this function: periodic energy calculations, integration
of energy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarm signals for limit violation of energy
values and maximum power demand, can be found.
The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from the input power values by
integrating them over a selected time tEnergy. The integration of active and reactive
energy values will happen in both forward and reverse directions. These energy values are
available as output signals and also as pulse outputs. Integration of energy values can be
controlled by inputs (STARTACC and STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset
to initial values with RSTACC input.
The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are calculated for the set time
interval tEnergy and these values are updated every minute through output channels. The
active and reactive maximum power demand values are calculated for both forward and
reverse direction and these values can be reset with RSTDMD input.
17.2.3
Function block
ETPMMTR
P*
ACCINPRG
Q*
EAFPULSE
STARTACC
EARPULSE
STOPACC
ERFPULSE
RSTACC
ERRPULSE
RSTDMD
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
IEC14000019 V1 EN
Figure 511:
1110
ETPMMTR function block
Technical manual
Section 17
Metering
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
17.2.4
Signals
Table 733:
Name
ETPMMTR Input signals

Type
Default
Description
REAL
Measured active power
REAL
Measured reactive power
STARTACC
BOOLEAN
Start to accumulate energy values
STOPACC
BOOLEAN
Stop accumulating energy values
RSTACC
BOOLEAN
Reset of accumulated enery reading
RSTDMD
BOOLEAN
Reset of maximum demand reading
Table 734:
Name
ETPMMTR Output signals

Type
Description
ACCINPRG
BOOLEAN
Accumulation of energy values in progress
EAFPULSE
BOOLEAN
Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE
BOOLEAN
Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE
BOOLEAN
Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE
BOOLEAN
Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set

interval
EARALM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set

interval
ERFALM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set

interval
ERRALM
BOOLEAN
Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set

interval
EAFACC
REAL
Accumulated forward active energy value in Ws
EARACC
REAL
Accumulated reverse active energy value in Ws
ERFACC
REAL
Accumulated forward reactive energy value in VArS
ERRACC
REAL
Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in VArS
MAXPAFD
REAL
Maximum forward active power demand value for set

interval
MAXPARD
REAL
Maximum reverse active power demand value for set

interval
MAXPRFD
REAL
Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set

interval
MAXPRRD
REAL
Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse

direction
Technical manual
1111
Section 17
Metering
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
17.2.5
Table 735:
Name
Settings
ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
EnaAcc
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Activate the accumulation of energy values
tEnergy
1 Minute
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
1 Minute
Time interval for energy calculation
tEnergyOnPls
0.100 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
Energy accumulated pulse ON time in secs
tEnergyOffPls
0.100 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in secs
EAFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
100.000
Pulse quantity for active forward accumulated

energy value
EARAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
100.000
Pulse quantity for active reverse accumulated

energy value
ERFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
100.000
Pulse quantity for reactive forward

accumulated energy value
ERRAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
100.000
Pulse quantity for reactive reverse

accumulated energy value
Table 736:
Name
ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EALim
0.001 10000000000.000
MWh
0.001
1000000.000
Active energy limit
ERLim
0.001 10000000000.000
MVArh
0.001
1000.000
Reactive energy limit
EnZeroClamp
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enable of zero point clamping detection

function
LevZeroClampP
0.001 - 10000.000
MW
0.001
10.000
Zero point clamping level at active Power
LevZeroClampQ
0.001 - 10000.000
MVAr
0.001
10.000
Zero point clamping level at reactive Power
DirEnergyAct
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction of active energy flow Forward/

Reverse
DirEnergyReac
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/

Reverse
EAFPrestVal
0.000 100000000.000
MWh
0.001
0.000
Preset Initial value for forward active energy
1112
Technical manual
Section 17
Metering
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EARPrestVal
0.000 100000000.000
MWh
0.001
0.000
Preset Initial value for reverse active energy
ERFPresetVal
0.000 100000000.000
MVArh
0.001
0.000
Preset Initial value for forward reactive energy
ERRPresetVal
0.000 100000000.000
MVArh
0.001
0.000
Preset Initial value for reverse reactive energy
17.2.6
Monitored data
Table 737:
Name
17.2.7
ETPMMTR Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
EAFACC
REAL
MWh
Accumulated forward active

energy value in Ws
EARACC
REAL
MWh
Accumulated reverse active

energy value in Ws
ERFACC
REAL
MVArh
Accumulated forward reactive

energy value in VArS
ERRACC
REAL
MVArh
Accumulated reverse reactive

energy value in VArS
MAXPAFD
REAL
MW
Maximum forward active

power demand value for set
interval
MAXPARD
REAL
MW
Maximum reverse active

interval
MAXPRFD
REAL
MVAr
Maximum forward reactive

interval
MAXPRRD
REAL
MVAr
Maximum reactive power

demand value in reverse
direction
Operation principle
The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements
function CVMMXN are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to measure the
integrated energy. Figure 512 shows the overall functionality of the energy calculation
and demand handling function ETPMMTR.
Technical manual
1113
Section 17
Metering
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
MAXPAFD
RSTDMD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
Zero Clamping
Detection
MAXPRRD
Maximum Power
Demand Calculation
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
ACCINPRG
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
Energy Accumulation
Calculation
STARTACC
ERRPULSE
EAFACC
EARACC
STOPACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
RSTACC
IEC13000185 V2 EN
Figure 512:
ETPMMTR Functional overview logical diagram
The integration of energy values is enabled by the setting EnaAcc and controlled by the
STARTACC and STOPACC inputs. If the integration is in progress, the output ACCINPRG
is high. Otherwise, it is low. Figure 513 shows the logic of the ACCINPRG output.
ACCINPRG is active when the STARTACC input is active and the EnaAcc setting is
enabled. When the RSTACC input is in the active state, the output ACCINPRG is low even
if the integration of energy is enabled. ACCINPRG is deactivated by activating the
STOPACC input.
STOPACC
FALSE
STARTACC
&
EnaAcc
&
ACCINPRG
q-1
RSTACC
q-1 = unit delay
IEC13000186 V4 EN
Figure 513:
ACCINPRG Logic diagram
The accumulated energy values (in MWh and MVArh) are available as service values and
also as pulsed output depending on the ExxAccPlsQty setting, which can be connected to
a pulse counter. Accumulated energy outputs are available for forward as well as reverse
direction. The accumulated energy values can be reset to initial accumulated energy
values (ExxPrestVal) from the local HMI reset menu or with the input signal RSTACC.
1114
Technical manual
Section 17
Metering
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Figure 514 shows the logic for integration of energy in active forward direction. Similarly,
the integration of energy in active reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.
RSTACC
EAFPrestVal
ACCINPRG
P* (ACTIVE FORWARD)
X
60.0
T
T
EAFACC
&
q-1
T
EALim
-1
a
b
0.0
a>b
q-1 = unit delay
IEC13000187 V4 EN
Figure 514:
Logic for integration of active forward energy
The energy pulses generated by using internally calculated accumulated energy values
and energy per pulse (ExxAccPlsQty) setting. The accumulated energy values are divided
by the energy-per-pulse value to get the number of pulses. The number of pulses can be
reset to zero by activating RSTACC input or by using the local HMI reset menu. The pulse
on and off time duration is set by the settings tEnergyOnPls and tEnergyOffPls. Figure
515 shows the logic for pulse output generation for the integrated energy in the active
forward direction. Similarly, the pulse generation for integrated energy in the active
reverse, reactive forward and reactive reverse is done.
Technical manual
1115
Section 17
Metering
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
tEnergyOffPls
EAFACC
a
EALim
Counter
CU
CV
a>b
q-1
Rst
R
tOff
t
q-1
0
T
a
b
EAFAccPlsQty
a>b
TP
EAFPULSE
0
Counter
CU
CV
RSTACC
Rst
q-1
tEnergyOnPls
q-1 = unit delay
IEC13000188 V4 EN
Figure 515:
Logic for pulse generation of integrated active forward energy
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set time
interval tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and stored in a register
available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXPRFD and
MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction. When the
RSTDMD input is active from the local HMI reset menu, these outputs are reset to zero. The
energy alarm is activated once the periodic energy value crosses the energy limit ExLim.
Figure 516 shows the logic of alarm for active forward energy exceeds limit and
Maximum forward active power demand value. Similarly, the maximum power
calculation and energy alarm outputs in the active reverse, reactive forward and reactive
reverse is implemented.
P (ACTIVE FORWARD)
tEnergy
Average Power
Calculation
EAFALM
a>b
EALim
RSTMAXD
0.0
MAX
q-1 = unit delay
MAXPAFD
q-1
IEC13000189 V4 EN
Figure 516:
1116
Logic for maximum power demand calculation and energy alarm
Technical manual
Section 17
Metering
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
17.2.8
Technical data
17.2.8.1
Technical data
Table 738:
Function
Energy metering
Range or value
MWh Export/Import, MVarh
Export/Import
Technical manual
Accuracy
Input from MMXU. No extra error
at steady load
1117
1118
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 18
18.1
Communication protocols
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or
many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA)
bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.
Available communication protocols are:
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
DNP3.0 communication protocol
Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
18.2
Communication protocol diagnostics

Status of the protocols can be viewed in the LHMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Protocol diagnostics. The diagnostic values are:
Diagnostic value
Description
Off
Protocol is turned off
Error
An error has occured, refer to event list for more

information
Warning
Configuration inconsistency. Unable to locate data

point.
Ready
Protocol is ready
Technical manual
1119
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC15000400 V1 EN
Figure 517:
18.3
Protocol diagnostic screen in LHMI
DNP3 protocol
DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to
communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a detailed
description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.
1120
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.4
18.4.1
Communication interfaces and protocols

Table 739:
Supported station communication interfaces and protocols
Protocol
Ethernet
100BASE-FX (ST
connector)
Serial
Glass fibre (ST connector)
EIA-485
IEC 6185081
DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
= Supported
When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two ports are
connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-address
138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2 has IPaddress 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0
18.4.2
Table 740:
Settings
IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PortSelGOOSE
Front
LANAB
LANCD
LANAB
Port selection for GOOSE communication
PortSelMMS
Front
LANAB
LANCD
Any
Any
Port selection for MMS communication
ProtocolEdition
Ed 1
Ed 2
Ed 1
Protocol Edition
RemoteModControl
Disabled
Maintenance
All levels
Disabled
Remote Mode Control
AllowGOOSESimulation
No
Yes
No
Allow enabling of GOOSE Simulation
IEC61850BufTimEnable
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enable BRC buf time behavior
Technical manual
1121
Section 18
18.4.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 741:
Communication protocols
Function
Value
Protocol
IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs
100BASE-FX
Protocol
IEC 608705103
9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol
DNP3.0
30019200 Bd
Protocol
TCP/IP, Ethernet
100 Mbit/s
18.4.4
Generic communication function for Single Point indication

SPGAPC, SP16GAPC
18.4.4.1
Functionality
Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC is used to send one
single logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.
18.4.4.2
Function block
SPGAPC
BLOCK
ÎN
IEC14000021 V1 EN
Figure 518:
1122
SPGAPC function block
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
SP16GAPC
BLOCK
ÎN1
ÎN2
ÎN3
ÎN4
ÎN5
ÎN6
ÎN7
ÎN8
ÎN9
ÎN10
ÎN11
ÎN12
ÎN13
ÎN14
ÎN15
ÎN16
IEC14000020 V1 EN
Figure 519:
18.4.4.3
SP16GAPC function block
Signals
Table 742:
Name
SPGAPC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN
BOOLEAN
Input status
Table 743:
Name
SP16GAPC Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1 status
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2 status
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3 status
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4 status
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5 status
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6 status
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7 status
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8 status
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9 status
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10 status
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11 status
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12 status
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13 status
Technical manual
1123
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
18.4.4.4
Type
Default
Description
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14 status
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15 status
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16 status
Settings
18.4.4.5
Monitored data
Table 744:
Name
OUT
Table 745:
Name
SPGAPC Monitored data

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
Values (Range)
-
Unit
-
Description
Output status
SP16GAPC Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OUT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 1 status
OUT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 2 status
OUT3
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 3 status
OUT4
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 4 status
OUT5
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 5 status
OUT6
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 6 status
OUT7
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 7 status
OUT8
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 8 status
OUT9
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 9 status
OUT10
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 10 status
OUT11
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 11 status
OUT12
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 12 status

1124
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
18.4.4.6
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OUT13
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 13 status
OUT14
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 14 status
OUT15
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 15 status
OUT16
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 16 status
OUTOR
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output status logic OR gate for

input 1 to 16
Operation principle
Upon receiving a signal at its input, Generic communication function for Single Point
indication (SPGAPC) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or
system that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be used to define which
function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.
18.4.5
Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC
18.4.5.1
Functionality
Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC function is used to send
the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog
value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.
18.4.5.2
Function block
MVGAPC
BLOCK
ÎN
^VALUE
RANGE
IEC14000022 V1 EN
Figure 520:
MVGAPC function block
Technical manual
1125
Section 18
18.4.5.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 746:
MVGAPC Input signals
Name
Type
Block of function
IN
REAL
Analog input value
MVGAPC Output signals
Name
Table 748:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 747:
18.4.5.4
Default
BLOCK
Type
Description
VALUE
REAL
Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE
INTEGER
Range
Settings
MVGAPC Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
BasePrefix
micro
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
unit
Base prefix (multiplication factor)
MV db
1 - 300
Type
10

Db: In %s
MV zeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
MV hhLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
900.00
High High limit multiplied with the base prefix

(multiplication factor)
MV hLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
800.00
High limit multiplied with the base prefix

MV lLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
-800.00
Low limit multiplied with the base prefix

MV llLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
-900.00
Low Low limit multiplied with the base prefix

MV min
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
-1000.00
Minimum value multiplied with the base prefix

MV max
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
1000.00
Maximum value multiplied with the base prefix

MV dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
MV limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000

limits)
1126
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.4.5.5
Monitored data
Table 749:
MVGAPC Monitored data
Name
18.4.5.6
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VALUE
REAL
Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE
INTEGER
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
0=Normal
Range
Operation principle
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, Generic communication function for
Measured Value (MVGAPC) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range,
as output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to other IEC
61850 clients in the substation.
18.4.6
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication

18.4.6.1
LHMI and ACT

identification
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Parallel Redundancy
Protocol Status
PRPSTATUS
RCHLCCH
Duo driver
configuration
PRP
Functionality
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and IEC
62439-3 Edition 2 parallel redundancy protocol (PRP) are available as options when
ordering IEDs. Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 uses
both port AB and port CD on the OEM module.
18.4.6.2
Function block
PRPSTATUS
PRP-A LINK
PRP-A VALID
PRP-B LINK
PRP-B VALID
IEC09000757.vsd
IEC09000757 V2 EN
Figure 521:
PRPSTATUS function block
Technical manual
1127
Section 18
18.4.6.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 750:
PRPSTATUS Output signals
Name
18.4.6.4
Table 751:
Name
Type
Description
PRP-A LINK
BOOLEAN
PRP-A Link Status
PRP-A VALID
BOOLEAN
PRP-A Link Valid
PRP-B LINK
BOOLEAN
PRP-B Link Status
PRP-B VALID
BOOLEAN
PRP-B Link Valid
Settings
PRP Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PRPMode
PRP-0
PRP-1
PRP-1
PRP Mode
IPAddress
0 - 18
IP
Address
192.168.7.10
IP-Address
IPMask
0 - 18
IP
Address
255.255.255.0
IP-Mask
18.4.6.5
Monitored data
Table 752:
Name
1128
PRPSTATUS Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
AB Beh
INTEGER
2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On
AB Link Beh
CD Beh
INTEGER
1=On
2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
CD Link Beh
PRP Beh
INTEGER
2=Blocked
3=Test
4=Test blocked
5=Off
1=On
PRP Beh
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.4.6.6
Principle of operation
The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is transmitted
on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one channel is
compared with data package identity from the other channel, if they are the same, the last
package is discarded. The PRP communication is based on the so called duo driver
concept.
The PRPSTATUS function block supervise the redundant communication on the two
channels. If no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the last
10 s, the output PRP-A LINK and/or PRP-B LINK is set to 0 which indicates an error.
Technical manual
1129
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Station Control System

Redundancy
Supervision
Duo
Data
Data
Switch A
Switch B
1 2
1 2
Data
Data
AB
Configuration
PRP
IED
CD
OEM
PRPSTATUS
=IEC09000758=3=en=Original.vsd
IEC09000758 V3 EN
Figure 522:
1130
Redundant station bus
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.5
18.5.1
Functionality
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators workplace, from
the control center and also from other terminals.
LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3
from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. These
networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few bytes),
peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, low maintenance,
multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports the needs of
applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows the reference model
for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the International Standardization
Organization (ISO).
In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For
other addresses, refer to section "".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.
18.5.2
Table 753:
Name
Operation
Table 754:
Name
Settings
HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Disabled
Enabled
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation
ADE Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation
TimerClass
Slow
Normal
Fast
Slow
Timer class
TimeDomain
Local without DST

Local with DST
Local with DST
Time domain
Technical manual
1131
Section 18
18.5.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Operation principle
The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With protection
and control devices, fibre optic media is used, which enables the use of the maximum
speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the devices
connected to the network can communicate with each other. The own subnet and node
number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per one subnet).
The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The measured
values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to the higherlevel devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized values, setting
values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also enables the bay level
devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example, interlocking information
among the terminals without the need of a bus master.
The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network variables
and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages, such as
measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals. Explicit
messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as events and explicit read
and write messages to access device data.
The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems include
direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for multi-master
implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the terminals can
communicate with external devices using the same standard of network variables.
Introduction of LON protocol

For more information, refer to LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control,
Users manual and Technical description.
LON protocol
Configuration of LON
LON network tool (LNT) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network configuration.
All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks network, is easily
accessible on a single tool program.
Activate LON Communication
Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main Menu/
Configuration/Communication/Station communication/ LON/HORZCOMM:1,
where Operation must be set to ON.
Add LON Device Types LNT
A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing the
device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505 using SLDT package
version 1p2 r04.
1132
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
LON net address

To establish a LON connection, the IED has to be given a unique net address. The net
address consists of a subnet and node number. This is accomplished with the LON
Network Tool by creating one device for each IED.
Vertical communication
Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices and
protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed process
data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter data and
disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using explicit messages.
Events and indications
Events sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code 44H)
with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is changed
in the IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmitted from terminal.
Binary events
Binary events are generated in event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in the IEDs.
The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses. Table 755 shows the LON
addresses to the first input on the event function blocks. Addresses to the other inputs on
the event function block are consecutive after the first input. For example, input 15 on
event block EVENT:17 has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.
For double indications, only the first eight inputs 18 must be used. Inputs 916 can be
used for other types of events at the same event block.
Three event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast loop time (3 ms)
are available as basic in the IEDs.. The remaining event function blocks EVENT:4 to
EVENT:9 run with a loop time of 8 ms and EVENT:10 to EVENT:20 run with a loop time
of 100 ms. The event blocks are used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like
analogue data from measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter
signals.
16 pulse counter value function blocks PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16, and 24 mA input
service values function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the
IEDs.
The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 755
Table 755:
Function block
LON adresses for Event functions

First LON address in
function block
EVENT:1
1024
EVENT:2
1040
EVENT:3
1056
Technical manual
1133
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
First LON address in

function block
EVENT:4
1072
EVENT:5
1088
EVENT:6
1104
EVENT:7
1120
EVENT:8
1136
EVENT:9
1152
EVENT:10
1168
EVENT:11
1184
EVENT:12
1200
EVENT:13
1216
EVENT:14
1232
EVENT:15
1248
EVENT:16
1264
EVENT:17
1280
EVENT:18
1296
EVENT:19
1312
EVENT:20
1328
Event masks
The event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool (PST)
under: Settings/IED settings/ Monitoring / EventFunction or via parameter setting tool
(PST) as follows:
No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for
integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the event
function block.
Single indication
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always
reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. Other
Boolean signals, for example a pickup or a trip signal from a protection function is event
masked in the event function block.
Double indications
1134
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the event
reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is done in the
event function block.
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not possible
to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for the first 8
inputs on an event function block.
00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

01 generates an open event with the read status 1
10 generates a close event with the read status 2
11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3
Analog value
All analog values are reported cyclic. The reporting interval is taken from the connected
function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from the event function
block.
Command handling
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent SPAbus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character message
following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent using explicit
messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport service.
Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N) are
sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only one SPAbus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the next message.
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, That is, the
function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 30, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 24; the SPA
addresses are according to table 756.
Horizontal communication
Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 670 series
IEDs.Network variables are used for communication between 500 and 650 series IEDs
The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used to
communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.
Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the
information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for
the application by a multiple command receive function block (MULTICMDRCV). With
horizontal communication, the input BOUND on MULTICMDSND must be set to 1.
There are 10 MULTICMDSND and 60 MULTICMDRCV function blocks available.
These function blocks are connected using the LON network tool (LNT). The tool also
defines the service and addressing on LON.
Technical manual
1135
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
This is an overview for configuring the network variables for the IEDs.
Configuration of LON network variables
Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the LON
network tool (LNT). The following is an example of how to configure network variables
concerning, for example, interlocking between two IEDs.
LON
BAY E1
BAY E3
MULTICMDSND: 7
MULTICMDSND: 9
BAY E4
MULTICMDSND: 9
en05000718.vsd
IEC05000718 V2 EN
Figure 523:
Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and MULTICMDRCV

function blocks in three IEDs
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From LNT
window select Connections/ NVConnections/ New.
1136
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
en05000719.vsd
IEC05000719 V1 EN
Figure 524:
The network variables window in LNT
There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the dragand-drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the
Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there; or, they can
perform it by selecting the traditional menu, Configuration/ Download.
Technical manual
1137
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
en05000720.vsd
IEC05000720 V1 EN
Figure 525:
The download configuration window in LNT
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the Main
Processing Module (NUM) and is used for LON, SPA, IEC60870-5-103 and DNP
communication.
There are two types of IO connectors: 1) snap-in for plastic fibre cables, and 2) ST/bayonet
for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or a combination of both,
which is identified by a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre
to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling
and connection of fibre cables.
Table 756:
SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
BL_CMD
SCSWI01
1 I 5115
SPA parameters for block

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI02
1 I 5139

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI02
1 I 5161

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI04
1 I 5186

command

1138
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
BL_CMD
SCSWI05
1 I 5210

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI06
1 I 5234

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI07
1 I 5258

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI08
1 I 5283

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI09
1 I 5307

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI10
1 I 5331

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI11
1 I 5355

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI12
1 I 5379

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI13
1 I 5403

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI14
1 I 5427

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI15
1 I 5451

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI16
1 I 5475

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI17
1 I 5499

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI18
1 I 5523

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI19
1 I 5545

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI20
1 I 5571

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI21
1 I 5594

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI22
1 I 5619

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI23
1 I 5643

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI24
1 I 5667

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI25
1 I 5691

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI26
1 I 5715

command
Technical manual
1139
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
BL_CMD
SCSWI27
1 I 5739

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI28
1 I 5763

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI29
1 I 5787

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI30
1 I 5811

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI31
1 I 5835

command
BL_CMD
SCSWI32
1 I 5859

command
CANCEL
SCSWI01
1 I 5107
SPA parameters for cancel

command
CANCEL
SCSWI02
1 I 5131

command
CANCEL
SCSWI03
1 I 5153

command
CANCEL
SCSWI04
1 I 5178

command
CANCEL
SCSWI05
1 I 5202

command
CANCEL
SCSWI06
1 I 5226

command
CANCEL
SCSWI07
1 I 5250

command
CANCEL
SCSWI08
1 I 5275

command
CANCEL
SCSWI09
1 I 5299

command
CANCEL
SCSWI10
1 I 5323

command
CANCEL
SCSWI11
1 I 5347

command
CANCEL
SCSWI12
1 I 5371

command
CANCEL
SCSWI13
1 I 5395

command
CANCEL
SCSWI14
1 I 5419

command
CANCEL
SCSWI15
1 I 5443

command
CANCEL
SCSWI16
1 I 5467

command
1140
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
CANCEL
SCSWI17
1 I 5491

command
CANCEL
SCSWI18
1 I 5515

command
CANCEL
SCSWI19
1 I 5537

command
CANCEL
SCSWI20
1 I 5563

command
CANCEL
SCSWI21
1 I 5586

command
CANCEL
SCSWI22
1 I 5611

command
CANCEL
SCSWI23
1 I 5635

command
CANCEL
SCSWI24
1 I 5659

command
CANCEL
SCSWI25
1 I 5683

command
CANCEL
SCSWI26
1 I 5707

command
CANCEL
SCSWI27
1 I 5731

command
CANCEL
SCSWI28
1 I 5755

command
CANCEL
SCSWI29
1 I 5779

command
CANCEL
SCSWI30
1 I 5803

command
CANCEL
SCSWI31
1 I 5827

command
CANCEL
SCSWI32
1 I 5851

command
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01,
SELOpen+ILO=10,
SELClose+ILO=11,
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31
SCSWI01
1 I 5105
SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command
Note: Send select command before
operate command
SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.
SCSWI02
1 I 5129

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI03
1 I 5151

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI04
1 I 5176

Close) command

Technical manual
1141
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI05
1 I 5200

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI06
1 I 5224

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI07
1 I 5248

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI08
1 I 5273

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI09
1 I 5297

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI10
1 I 5321

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI11
1 I 5345

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI12
1 I 5369

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI13
1 I 5393

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI14
1 I 5417

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI15
1 I 5441

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI16
1 I 5465

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI17
1 I 5489

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI18
1 I 5513

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI19
1 I 5535

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI20
1 I 5561

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI21
1 I 5584

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI22
1 I 5609

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI23
1 I 5633

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI24
1 I 5657

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI25
1 I 5681

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI26
1 I 5705

Close) command
1142
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI27
1 I 5729

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI28
1 I 5753

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI29
1 I 5777

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI30
1 I 5801

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI31
1 I 5825

Close) command
SELECTOpen=00,
SCSWI32
1 I 5849

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01,
ExcOpen+ILO=10,
ExcClose+ILO=11,
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31
SCSWI01
1 I 5106
SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command
Note: Send select command before
operate command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI02
1 I 5130

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI02
1 I 5152

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI04
1 I 5177

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI05
1 I 5201

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI06
1 I 5225

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI07
1 I 5249

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI08
1 I 5274

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI09
1 I 5298

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI10
1 I 5322

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI11
1 I 5346

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI12
1 I 5370

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI13
1 I 5394

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI14
1 I 5418

Close) command

Technical manual
1143
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI15
1 I 5442

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI16
1 I 5466

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI17
1 I 5490

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI18
1 I 5514

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI19
1 I 5536

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI20
1 I 5562

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI21
1 I 5585

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI22
1 I 5610

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI23
1 I 5634

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI24
1 I 5658

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI25
1 I 5682

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI26
1 I 5706

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI27
1 I 5730

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI28
1 I 5754

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI29
1 I 5778

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI30
1 I 5802

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI31
1 I 5826

Close) command
ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.
SCSWI32
1 I 5850

Close) command
Sub Value
SXCBR01
2 I 7854
SPA parameter for position to be

substituted
Note: Send the value before Enable
Sub Value
SXCBR02
2 I 7866

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR03
2 I 7884

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR04
2 I 7904

substituted

1144
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Value
SXCBR05
2 I 7923

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR06
2 I 7942

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR07
2 I 7961

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR08
2 I 7980

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR09
3I7

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR10
3 I 26

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR11
3 I 45

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR12
3 I 56

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR13
3 I 74

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR14
3 I 94

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR15
3 I 120

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR16
3 I 133

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR17
3 I 158

substituted
Sub Value
SXCBR18
3 I 179

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI01
3 I 196

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI02
3 I 216

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI03
3 I 235

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI04
3 I 254

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI05
3 I 272

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI06
3 I 292

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI07
3 I 310

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI08
3 I 330

substituted
Technical manual
1145
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Value
SXSWI09
3 I 348

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI10
3 I 359

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI11
3 I 378

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI12
3 I 397

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI13
3 I 416

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI14
3 I 435

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI15
3 I 454

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI16
3 I 473

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI17
3 I 492

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI18
3 I 511

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI19
3 I 530

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI20
3 I 549

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI21
3 I 568

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI22
3 I 587

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI23
3 I 606

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI24
3 I 625

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI25
3 I 644

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI26
3 I 663

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI27
3 I 682

substituted
Sub Value
SXSWI28
3 I 701

substituted
Sub Enable
SXCBR01
2 I 7855
SPA parameter for substitute

enable command
Note: Send the Value before
Enable
1146
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Enable
SXCBR02
2 I 7865

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR03
2 I 7885

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR04
2 I 7903

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR05
2 I 7924

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR06
2 I 7941

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR07
2 I 7962

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR08
2 I 7979

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR09
3I8

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR10
3 I 25

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR11
3 I 46

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR12
3 I 55

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR13
3 I 75

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR14
3 I 93

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR15
3 I 121

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR16
3 I 132

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR17
3 I 159

enable command
Sub Enable
SXCBR18
3 I 178

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI01
3 I 197

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI02
3 I 215

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI03
3 I 234

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI04
3 I 252

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI05
3 I 271

enable command
Technical manual
1147
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Enable
SXSWI06
3 I 290

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI07
3 I 309

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI08
3 I 328

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI09
3 I 347

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI10
3 I 360

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI11
3I 379

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI12
3 I 398

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI13
3 I 417

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI14
3 I 436

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI15
3 I 455

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI16
3 I 474

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI17
3 I 493

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI18
3 I 512

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI19
3 I 531

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI20
3 I 550

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI21
3 I 569

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI22
3 I 588

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI23
3 I 607

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI24
3 I 626

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI25
3 I 645

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI26
3 I 664

enable command
Sub Enable
SXSWI27
3 I 683

enable command
1148
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Sub Enable
SXSWI28
3 I 702

enable command
Update Block
SXCBR01
2 I 7853
SPA parameter for update block

command
Update Block
SXCBR02
2 I 7864

command
Update Block
SXCBR03
2 I 7883

command
Update Block
SXCBR04
2 I 7905

command
Update Block
SXCBR05
2 I 7922

command
Update Block
SXCBR06
2 I 7943

command
Update Block
SXCBR07
2 I 7960

command
Update Block
SXCBR08
2 I 7981

command
Update Block
SXCBR09
3I6

command
Update Block
SXCBR10
3 I 27

command
Update Block
SXCBR11
3 I 44

command
Update Block
SXCBR12
3 I 57

command
Update Block
SXCBR13
3 I 73

command
Update Block
SXCBR14
3 I 92

command
Update Block
SXCBR15
3 I 122

command
Update Block
SXCBR16
3 I 131

command
Update Block
SXCBR17
3 I 160

command
Update Block
SXCBR18
3 I 177

command
Update Block
SXSWI01
3 I 198

command
Update Block
SXSWI02
3 I 214

command
Update Block
SXSWI03
3 I 236

command
Technical manual
1149
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Update Block
SXSWI04
3 I 253

command
Update Block
SXSWI05
3 I 273

command
Update Block
SXSWI06
3 I 291

command
Update Block
SXSWI07
3 I 311

command
Update Block
SXSWI08
3 I 329

command
Update Block
SXSWI09
3 I 349

command
Update Block
SXSWI10
3 I 358

command
Update Block
SXSWI11
3 I 377

command
Update Block
SXSWI12
3 I 396

command
Update Block
SXSWI13
3 I 415

command
Update Block
SXSWI14
3 I 434

command
Update Block
SXSWI15
3 I 453

command
Update Block
SXSWI16
3 I 472

command
Update Block
SXSWI17
3 I 491

command
Update Block
SXSWI18
3 I 510

command
Update Block
SXSWI19
3 I 529

command
Update Block
SXSWI20
3 I 548

command
Update Block
SXSWI21
3 I 567

command
Update Block
SXSWI22
3 I 586

command
Update Block
SXSWI23
3 I 605

command
Update Block
SXSWI24
3 I 624

command
Update Block
SXSWI25
3 I 643

command
1150
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
18.5.4
Function
block
SPA
address
Description
Update Block
SXSWI26
3 I 662

command
Update Block
SXSWI27
3 I 681

command
Update Block
SXSWI28
3 I 700

command
Technical data
Table 757:
Function
Value
Protocol
LON
Communication speed
1.25 Mbit/s
18.6
18.6.1
Functionality
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For
other addresses, refer to section "".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in general.
18.6.2
Design
Using the rear SPA port for either local or remote communication with a PC requires the
following equipment:
Optical fibres
Opto/electrical converter for the PC
PC
The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM600. (Note! SPA cannot be
used with PCM600 2.6 or later).
When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a
front-connection cable. Note! SPA cannot be used from LHMI front, except for using
"FSTACCS", that is, Field Service Tool Access.
Technical manual
1151
Section 18
18.6.3
Table 758:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Settings
SPA Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
BaudRate
300 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd
9600 Bd
Baudrate on serial line
Table 759:
Name
LONSPA Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation
SlaveAddress
1 - 899
30
Slave address
18.6.4
Operation principle
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data bits
+ even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For more information on
recommended baud rate for each type of IED, refer to Technical reference manual.
Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.
Introduction of SPA protocol

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need to
talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and,
consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to the slave.
Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling (for example, for
event information) or only on demand.
The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information to
the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common a
broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit and
receive lines is a logical "1".
SPA protocol
The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to an
IED with the SPA communication protocol implemented.
1152
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MIM3 to MIM16) are found in table
760.
Table 760:
SPA addresses for the MIM function
Function block
SPA address
MIM3-CH1
4-O-6508
MIM3-CH2
4-O-6511
MIM3-CH3
4-O-6512
MIM3-CH4
4-O-6515
MIM3-CH5
4-O-6516
MIM3-CH6
4-O-6519
MIM4-CH1
4-O-6527
MIM4-CH2
4-O-6530
MIM4-CH3
4-O-6531
MIM4-CH4
4-O-6534
MIM4-CH5
4-O-6535
MIM4-CH6
4-O-6538
MIM5-CH1
4-O-6546
MIM5-CH2
4-O-6549
MIM5-CH3
4-O-6550
MIM5-CH4
4-O-6553
MIM5-CH5
4-O-6554
MIM5-CH6
4-O-6557
MIM6-CH1
4-O-6565
MIM6-CH2
4-O-6568
MIM6-CH3
4-O-6569
MIM6-CH4
4-O-6572
MIM6-CH5
4-O-6573
MIM6-CH6
4-O-6576
MIM7-CH1
4-O-6584
MIM7-CH2
4-O-6587
MIM7-CH3
4-O-6588
MIM7-CH4
4-O-6591
MIM7-CH5
4-O-6592
MIM7-CH6
4-O-6595
MIM8-CH1
4-O-6603
MIM8-CH2
4-O-6606
MIM8-CH3
4-O-6607

Technical manual
1153
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
SPA address
MIM8-CH4
4-O-6610
MIM8-CH5
4-O-6611
MIM8-CH6
4-O-6614
MIM9-CH1
4-O-6622
MIM9-CH2
4-O-6625
MIM9-CH3
4-O-6626
MIM9-CH4
4-O-6629
MIM9-CH5
4-O-6630
MIM9-CH6
4-O-6633
MIM10-CH1
4-O-6641
MIM10-CH2
4-O-6644
MIM10-CH3
4-O-6645
MIM10-CH4
4-O-6648
MIM10-CH5
4-O-6649
MIM10-CH6
4-O-6652
MIM11-CH1
4-O-6660
MIM11-CH2
4-O-6663
MIM11-CH3
4-O-6664
MIM11-CH4
4-O-6667
MIM11-CH5
4-O-6668
MIM11-CH6
4-O-6671
MIM12-CH1
4-O-6679
MIM12-CH2
4-O-6682
MIM12-CH3
4-O-6683
MIM12-CH4
4-O-6686
MIM12-CH5
4-O-6687
MIM12-CH6
4-O-6690
MIM13-CH1
4-O-6698
MIM13-CH2
4-O-6701
MIM13-CH3
4-O-6702
MIM13-CH4
4-O-6705
MIM13-CH5
4-O-6706
MIM13-CH6
4-O-6709
MIM14-CH1
4-O-6717
MIM14-CH2
4-O-6720
MIM14-CH3
4-O-6721
1154
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
SPA address
MIM14-CH4
4-O-6724
MIM14-CH5
4-O-6725
MIM14-CH6
4-O-6728
MIM15-CH1
4-O-6736
MIM15-CH2
4-O-6739
MIM15-CH3
4-O-6740
MIM15-CH4
4-O-6743
MIM15-CH5
4-O-6744
MIM15-CH6
4-O-6747
MIM16-CH1
4-O-6755
MIM16-CH2
4-O-6758
MIM16-CH3
4-O-6759
MIM16-CH4
4-O-6762
MIM16-CH5
4-O-6763
MIM16-CH6
4-O-6766
The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCFCNT:1 to PCFCNT:16 are found in
table 761.
Table 761:
Function block
SPA addresses for the PCFCNT function

SPA address CNT_VAL
SPA address NEW_VAL
PCFCNT:1
6-O-2788
6-O-2787
PCFCNT:2
6-O-2794
6-O-2793
PCFCNT:3
6-O-2800
6-O-2799
PCFCNT:4
6-O-2806
6-O-2805
PCFCNT:5
6-O-2812
6-O-2811
PCFCNT:6
6-O-2818
6-O-2817
PCFCNT:7
6-O-2824
6-O-2823
PCFCNT:8
6-O-2830
6-O-2829
PCFCNT:9
6-O-2836
6-O-2835
PCFCNT:10
6-O-2842
6-O-2841
PCFCNT:11
6-O-2848
6-O-2847
PCFCNT:12
6-O-2854
6-O-2853
PCFCNT:13
6-O-2860
6-O-2859
PCFCNT:14
6-O-2866
6-O-2865
PCFCNT:15
6-O-2872
6-O-2871
PCFCNT:16
6-O-2878
6-O-2877
Technical manual
1155
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
I/O modules
To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function block
are used, that is, the addresses for BI1 BI16. For SPA addresses, refer to section Related
documents in Product Guide.
The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation
automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has 16 outputs
that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local
control functions, the local HMI can also be used.
Single command, 16 signals function consists of three function blocks; SINGLECMD:1
to SINGLECMD:3 for 16 binary output signals each.
The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control
gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 3 signals function
block, SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first output. The other
outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the
SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533 address.
The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to
SINGLECMD:3 are found in table 762.
Table 762:
SPA addresses for SINGLECMD function
Function block
SPA address CMD Input
SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD1-Cmd1
4-S-4639
5-O-511
SINGLECMD1-Cmd2
4-S-4640
5-O-512
SINGLECMD1-Cmd3
4-S-4641
5-O-513
SINGLECMD1-Cmd4
4-S-4642
5-O-514
SINGLECMD1-Cmd5
4-S-4643
5-O-515
SINGLECMD1-Cmd6
4-S-4644
5-O-516
SINGLECMD1-Cmd7
4-S-4645
5-O-517
SINGLECMD1-Cmd8
4-S-4646
5-O-518
SINGLECMD1-Cmd9
4-S-4647
5-O-519
SINGLECMD1-Cmd10
4-S-4648
5-O-520
SINGLECMD1-Cmd11
4-S-4649
5-O-521
SINGLECMD1-Cmd12
4-S-4650
5-O-522
SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13
4-S-4651
5-O-523
SINGLECMD1-Cmd14
4-S-4652
5-O-524
SINGLECMD1-Cmd15
4-S-4653
5-O-525
SINGLECMD1-Cmd16
4-S-4654
5-O-526
1156
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
SPA address CMD Input
SPA address CMD output
SINGLECMD2-Cmd1
4-S-4672
5-O-527
SINGLECMD2-Cmd2
4-S-4673
5-O-528
SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3
4-S-4674
5-O-529
SINGLECMD2-Cmd4
4-S-4675
5-O-530
SINGLECMD2-Cmd5
4-S-4676
5-O-531
SINGLECMD2-Cmd6
4-S-4677
5-O-532
SINGLECMD2-Cmd7
4-S-4678
5-O-533
SINGLECMD2-Cmd8
4-S-4679
5-O-534
SINGLECMD2-Cmd9
4-S-4680
5-O-535
SINGLECMD2-Cmd10
4-S-4681
5-O-536
SINGLECMD2-Cmd11
4-S-4682
5-O-537
SINGLECMD2-Cmd12
4-S-4683
5-O-538
SINGLECMD2-Cmd13
4-S-4684
5-O-539
SINGLECMD2-Cmd14
4-S-4685
5-O-540
SINGLECMD2-Cmd15
4-S-4686
5-O-541
SINGLECMD2-Cmd16
4-S-4687
5-O-542
SINGLECMD3-Cmd1
4-S-4705
5-O-543
SINGLECMD3-Cmd2
4-S-4706
5-O-544
SINGLECMD3-Cmd3
4-S-4707
5-O-545
SINGLECMD3-Cmd4
4-S-4708
5-O-546
SINGLECMD3-Cmd5
4-S-4709
5-O-547
SINGLECMD3-Cmd6
4-S-4710
5-O-548
SINGLECMD3-Cmd7
4-S-4711
5-O-549
SINGLECMD3-Cmd8
4-S-4712
5-O-550
SINGLECMD3-Cmd9
4-S-4713
5-O-551
SINGLECMD3-Cmd10
4-S-4714
5-O-552
SINGLECMD3-Cmd11
4-S-4715
5-O-553
SINGLECMD3-Cmd12
4-S-4716
5-O-554
SINGLECMD3-Cmd13
4-S-4717
5-O-555
SINGLECMD3-Cmd14
4-S-4718
5-O-556
SINGLECMD3-Cmd15
4-S-4719
5-O-557
SINGLECMD3-Cmd16
4-S-4720
5-O-558
Figure 526 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way, connect
the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection IED for control
of a circuit breaker.
Technical manual
1157
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command control.
The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in SINGLECMD:1 are shown
in table 762.
#CD01-CMDOUT1
#CD01-CMDOUT2
#CD01-CMDOUT3
#CD01-CMDOUT4
#CD01-CMDOUT5
#CD01-CMDOUT6
#CD01-CMDOUT7
#CD01-CMDOUT8
#CD01-CMDOUT9
#CD01-CMDOUT10
#CD01-CMDOUT11
#CD01-CMDOUT12
#CD01-CMDOUT13
#CD01-CMDOUT14
#CD01-CMDOUT15
#CD01-CMDOUT16
SINGLECMD
BLOCK
ÔUT1
ÔUT2
ÔUT3
ÔUT4
ÔUT5
ÔUT6
ÔUT7
ÔUT8
ÔUT9
ÔUT10
ÔUT11
ÔUT12
ÔUT13
ÔUT14
ÔUT15
ÔUT16
PULSETIMER
INPUT
AND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
OUT
To output board, CLOSE
OUT
To output board, OPEN
PULSETIMER
OUT
NOUT
INPUT
SYNCH OK
IEC05000717 V3 EN
Figure 526:
Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of a

circuit breaker
The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady or
setable pulse length signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Main
Menu/Settings / IED Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command or via
Parameter Setting Tool (PST).
Event function
Event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (for example,
operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an event list.
The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input channels. All
the internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input
channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are produced according
to the set of event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and
SPA channels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which
contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is
read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED, Terminal
Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).
The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST)
under: Main Menu/Settings / IED Settings / Monitoring / Event Function or via
parameter Setting Tool (PST) as follows:
1158
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for
integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 763.
Table 763:
Event block
Status and event codes

Status
Single indication1)
Set event
Reset
event
Double indication
Intermedi Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined
ate 00
11
EVENT:1
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
Input 15
Input 16
22O1
22O2
22O3
22O4
22O5
22O6
22O7
22O8
22O9
22O10
22O11
22O12
22O13
22O14
22O15
22O16
22E33
22E35
22E37
22E39
22E41
22E43
22E45
22E47
22E49
22E51
22E53
22E55
22E57
22E59
22E61
22E63
22E32
22E34
22E36
22E38
22E40
22E42
22E44
22E46
22E48
22E50
22E52
22E54
22E56
22E58
22E60
22E62
22E0
22E4
22E8
22E12
22E16
22E20
22E24
22E28
-
22E1
22E5
22E9
22E13
22E17
22E21
22E25
22E29
-
22E2
22E6
22E10
22E14
22E18
22E22
22E26
22E30
-
22E3
22E7
22E11
22E15
22E19
22E23
22E27
22E31
-
EVENT:2
EVENT:3
EVENT:20
230..
240..
410..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
23E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
23E..
24E..
41E..
These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked OFF.
Connection of signals as events
Signals coming from different protection and control functions and must be sent as events
to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the Event function
block according to figure 527.
Technical manual
1159
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
EVENT
Block
ILRANG
PSTO
VABRANG
VBCRANG
VCARANG
3I0RANG
3V0RANG
FALSE
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
ÎNPUT10
ÎNPUT11
ÎNPUT12
ÎNPUT13
ÎNPUT14
ÎNPUT15
ÎNPUT16
ANSI07000065 V1 EN
Figure 527:
18.6.4.1
Connection of protection signals for event handling
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is a mezzanine module placed on the numeric
processing module (NUM) and is used for LON, SPA, IEC60870-5-103, or DNP
communication.
There are two types of IO connectors: 1) snap-in for plastic fibre cables and 2) ST/bayonet
for glass fibre cables. The SLM can be equipped with either type or a combination of both,
which is identified by a tag.
Connect the incoming optical fibre to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical fibre
to the TX transmitter output. Pay special attention to the instructions concerning handling
and connection of fibre cables.
For setting the transfer rate (baud rate) and slave number, please refer to the Application
Manual and Commissioning Manual respectively.
1160
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.6.5
Technical data
Table 764:
Function
Value
Protocol
SPA
Communication speed
300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd
Slave number
1 to 899
18.7
18.7.1
Introduction
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED
communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have
software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
18.7.2
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS
18.7.2.1
Functionality
103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on
connected signals.
The set of connected input will control which ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)
are generated.
9 Will be generated if at least IA is connected. IB, IC, VA, VB, VC, P, Q, F are
optional but there can be no holes.
3.4 Will be generated if IN and VN are present.
3.3 Will be generated if IB, VAB, P and Q present.
3.2 Will be generated if IB, VAB, and P or Q missing.
3.1 Will be generated if IB is present and IA is missing (otherwise I_B in 9).
Description for I103MEAS function block:
9 = IA
3.4 = IN AND VN
3.3 = IB AND VAB AND P AND Q
3.2 = IB AND VAB AND NOT 3.3
3.1 = IB AND NOT (3.2 OR 3.3 OR 9)
Technical manual
1161
Section 18
18.7.2.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Identification
Function block
name
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103
18.7.2.3
IEC 60617
identification
I103MEAS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
I103MEAS
BLOCK
I_A
I_B
I_C
IN
V_A
V_B
V_C
V_AB
V_N
P
Q
F
ANSI10000287 V1 EN
Figure 528:
18.7.2.4
Signals
Table 765:
Name
1162
I103MEAS function block
I103MEAS Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of service value reporting
IA
REAL
0.0
Service value for current phase A
IB
REAL
0.0
Service value for current phase B
IC
REAL
0.0
Service value for current phase C
IN
REAL
0.0
Service value for residual current IN
VA
REAL
0.0
Service value for voltage phase A
VB
REAL
0.0
Service value for voltage phase B
VC
REAL
0.0
Service value for voltage phase C
V_AB
REAL
0.0
Service value for voltage phase-phase AB
V_N
REAL
0.0
Service value for residual voltage VN
REAL
0.0
Service value for active power
REAL
0.0
Service value for reactive power
REAL
0.0
Service value for system frequency
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.7.2.5
Table 766:
Name
Settings
I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
Function type (1-255)
MaxIa
1 - 99999
3000
Maximum current phase A
MaxIb
1 - 99999
3000
Maximum current phase B
MaxIc
1 - 99999
3000
Maximum current phase C
MaxIN
1 - 99999
3000
Maximum residual current IN
MaxVa
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
Maximum voltage for phase A
MaxVb
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
Maximum voltage for phase B
MaxVc
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
Maximum voltage for phase C
MaxVab
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Maximum voltage for phase-phase AB
MaxVn
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
Maximum residual voltage VN
MaxP
0.00 - 2000.00
MW
0.05
1200.00
Maximum value for active power
MaxQ
0.00 - 2000.00
MVAr
0.05
1200.00
Maximum value for reactive power
MaxF
45.0 - 66.0
Hz
1.0
51.0
Maximum system frequency
18.7.3
Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR
18.7.3.1
Functionality
I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor
direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the
private range, and the Information number parameter for each block.
18.7.3.2
Identification
Measurands user defined signals for
IEC 60870-5-103
Function block
name
I103MEASUSR
Technical manual
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
1163
Section 18
18.7.3.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
ÎNPUT1
ÎNPUT2
ÎNPUT3
ÎNPUT4
ÎNPUT5
ÎNPUT6
ÎNPUT7
ÎNPUT8
ÎNPUT9
IEC10000288 V1 EN
Figure 529:
18.7.3.4
I103MEASUSR function block
Signals
Table 767:
I103MEASUSR Input signals
Name
18.7.3.5
Table 768:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of service value reporting
INPUT1
REAL
0.0
Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2
REAL
0.0
INPUT3
REAL
0.0
INPUT4
REAL
0.0
INPUT5
REAL
0.0
INPUT6
REAL
0.0
INPUT7
REAL
0.0
INPUT8
REAL
0.0
INPUT9
REAL
0.0
Settings
I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
25
InfNo
1 - 255
Information number for measurands (1-255)
MaxMeasur1
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
Maximum value for measurement on input 1
MaxMeasur2
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
1164
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MaxMeasur3
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur4
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur5
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur6
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur7
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur8
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur9
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
18.7.4
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR
18.7.4.1
Functionality
I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number
parameter is defined for each output signal.
18.7.4.2
Identification
Function status auto-recloser for IEC
60870-5-103
18.7.4.3
Function block
name
I103AR
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD
IEC10000289 V2 EN
Figure 530:
I103AR function block
Technical manual
1165
Section 18
18.7.4.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 769:
I103AR Input signals
Name
18.7.4.5
Table 770:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of status reporting
16_ARACT
BOOLEAN
Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON
BOOLEAN
Information number 128, circuit breaker on by autorecloser
130_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Information number 130, auto-recloser blocked
Settings
I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
1 - 255
Step
Default
1
Description
18.7.5
Function status ground-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF
18.7.5.1
Functionality
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for ground fault indications in monitor
direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information number
parameter is defined for each output signal.
18.7.5.2
Identification
Function status earth-fault for IEC
60870-5-103
18.7.5.3
Function block
name
I103EF
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV
IEC10000290 V1 EN
Figure 531:
1166
I103EF function block
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.7.5.4
Signals
Table 771:
I103EF Input signals
Name
18.7.5.5
Table 772:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
51_EFFW
BOOLEAN
Information number 51, ground-fault forward
52_EFREV
BOOLEAN
Information number 52, ground-fault reverse
Settings
I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
160
Description
18.7.6
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT
18.7.6.1
Functionality
I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the
function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a
correspondent signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN represents
the General Trip of the device, and therefore must be connected to the general trip signal
SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.
The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is
triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC
60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.
18.7.6.2
Identification
Function status fault protection for IEC
60870-5-103
Function block
name
I103FLTPROT
Technical manual
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
1167
Section 18
18.7.6.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_PU_A
65_PU_B
66_PU_C
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TR_A
70_TR_B
71_TR_C
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTR_A
87_MTR_B
88_MTR_C
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC
ANSI10000291 V1 EN
Figure 532:
18.7.6.4
I103FLTPROT function block
Signals
Table 773:
Name
I103FLTPROT Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of status reporting.
64_PU_A
BOOLEAN
Information number 64, pickup phase A
65_PU_B
BOOLEAN
Information number 64, pickup phase B
66_PU_C
BOOLEAN
Information number 64, pickup phase C
67_STIN
BOOLEAN
Information number 67, start residual current IN
68_TRGEN
BOOLEAN
Information number 68, trip general
69_TR_A
BOOLEAN
Information number 69, trip phase A
70_TR_B
BOOLEAN
Information number 70, trip phase B
71_TR_C
BOOLEAN
Information number 71, trip phase C
72_TRBKUP
BOOLEAN
Information number 72, back up trip I>>
73_SCL
REAL
Information number 73, fault location in ohm

1168
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
18.7.6.5
Table 774:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
74_FW
BOOLEAN
Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV
BOOLEAN
Information number 75, reverse/busbar
76_TRANS
BOOLEAN
Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV
BOOLEAN
Information number 77, signal received
78_ZONE1
BOOLEAN
Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2
BOOLEAN
80_ZONE3
BOOLEAN
81_ZONE4
BOOLEAN
82_ZONE5
BOOLEAN
84_STGEN
BOOLEAN
Information number 84, start general
85_BFP
BOOLEAN
Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTR_A
BOOLEAN
Information number 86, trip measuring system phase A
87_MTR_B
BOOLEAN
Information number 87, trip measuring system phase B
88_MTR_C
BOOLEAN
Information number 88, trip measuring system phase C
89_MTRN
BOOLEAN
Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N
90_IOC
BOOLEAN
Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC
BOOLEAN
Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF
BOOLEAN
Information number 92, ground-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF
BOOLEAN
Information number 93, ground-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG
BOOLEAN
Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
FLTLOC
BOOLEAN
Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLOCALCMADE)
Settings
I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
128
Description
18.7.7
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED
18.7.7.1
Functionality
I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This block
uses parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined for each
input signal.
Technical manual
1169
Section 18
18.7.7.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Identification
Function block
name
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103
18.7.7.3
IEC 60617
identification
I103IED
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
IEC10000292 V2 EN
Figure 533:
18.7.7.4
I103IED function block
Signals
Table 775:
I103IED Input signals
Name
18.7.7.5
Table 776:
Name
FunctionType
1170
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
19_LEDRS
BOOLEAN
Information number 19, reset LEDs
21_TESTM
BOOLEAN
Information number 21, test mode is active
22_SETCH
BOOLEAN
Information number 22, setting changed
23_GRP1
BOOLEAN
Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2
BOOLEAN
25_GRP3
BOOLEAN
26_GRP4
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103IED Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.7.8
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV
18.7.8.1
Functionality
I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information
number parameter is defined for each output signal.
18.7.8.2
Identification
Function block
name
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103
18.7.8.3
IEC 60617
identification
I103SUPERV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL
IEC10000293 V1 EN
Figure 534:
18.7.8.4
I103SUPERV function block
Signals
Table 777:
Name
I103SUPERV Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
32_MEASI
BOOLEAN
Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU
BOOLEAN
Information number 33, measurand supervision of V
37_IBKUP
BOOLEAN
Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection
38_VTFF
BOOLEAN
Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA
BOOLEAN
Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL
BOOLEAN
Information number 47, group alarm
Technical manual
1171
Section 18
18.7.8.5
Table 778:
Name
FunctionType
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Settings
I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
Step
Default
Description
18.7.9
Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRDEF
18.7.9.1
Functionality
I103USRDEF is a function block with user defined input signals in monitor direction.
Each instance is associated with a Function Type (FUN) and each input signal with an
Information Number (INF). Additionally, all input signals may be defined to use relative
time and how to respond to a GI request.
The user is responsible for assigning a proper FUN value and proper INF values to all
connected inputs. See Settings for details.
18.7.9.2
Identification
Status for user defined signals for IEC
60870-5-103
18.7.9.3
Function block
name
I103USRDEF
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
IEC10000294 V2 EN
Figure 535:
1172
I103USRDEF function block
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.7.9.4
Signals
Table 779:
I103USRDEF Input signals
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary signal input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
RT_START
BOOLEAN
Trig to set base of relative time
RT_START registers the positive transition (0->1) of a pulse and sets the time from
which relative time is derived. Relative time is assigned only to inputs where the
corresponding TypNo parameter is set to Relative. The maximum relative time and unit
conform to the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
18.7.9.5
Table 780:
Name
Settings
I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
InfNo1
1 - 255
Information number for binary input 1 (1-255)
InfNo2
1 - 255
InfNo3
1 - 255
InfNo4
1 - 255
InfNo5
1 - 255
InfNo6
1 - 255
InfNo7
1 - 255
InfNo8
1 - 255
TypNo1
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
Type identification (TYP)
TypNo2
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
TypNo3
Absolute
Relative
Absolute

Technical manual
1173
Section 18
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TypNo4
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
TypNo5
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
TypNo6
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
TypNo7
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
TypNo8
Absolute
Relative
Absolute
GiNo1
Excluded
Included
Included
Response and status change (GI)
GiNo2
Excluded
Included
Included
GiNo3
Excluded
Included
Included
GiNo4
Excluded
Included
Included
GiNo5
Excluded
Included
Included
GiNo6
Excluded
Included
Included
GiNo7
Excluded
Included
Included
GiNo8
Excluded
Included
Included
The FunctionType parameter associates a particular instance of the function block with
a FUN. Refer to the IEC60870-5-103 standard for details.
The InfNon parameters are used to associate each individual input signal with a
userdefined INF. Refer to the IEC60870-5-103 standard for details.
The TypNon parameters determine if messages use absolute or relative time. This adheres
to the TYPE IDENTIFICATION (TYP) message types 1 (time-tagged message) and 2
(time-tagged message with relative time) of the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
The GiNon parameters determine whether a message is sent as a part of a GI reply or not.
Refer to the IEC60870-5-103 standard for details.
1174
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.7.10
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD
18.7.10.1
Functionality
I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output
signals. The signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of restart.
18.7.10.2
Identification
Function block
name
Function commands for IEC

60870-5-103
18.7.10.3
IEC 60617
identification
I103CMD
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
I103CMD
BLOCK
16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT
IEC10000282 V1 EN
Figure 536:
18.7.10.4
I103CMD function block
Signals
Table 781:
I103CMD Input signals
Name
Type
BLOCK
Table 782:
Table 783:
Name
FunctionType
Description
Block of commands
I103CMD Output signals
Name
18.7.10.5
Default
BOOLEAN
Type
Description
16-AR
BOOLEAN
Information number 16 disable/enable autorecloser
17-DIFF
BOOLEAN
Information number 17, block of differential protection
18-PROT
BOOLEAN
Information number 18, block of protection
Settings
I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Technical manual
Description
1175
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.7.11
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD
18.7.11.1
Functionality
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions. All
outputs are pulsed and they are NOT stored. Pulse-time is a hidden parameter.
18.7.11.2
Identification
Function block
name
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103
18.7.11.3
IEC 60617
identification
I103IEDCMD
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
BLOCK
I103IEDCMD
19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4
IEC10000283 V1 EN
Figure 537:
18.7.11.4
Signals
Table 784:
Name
BLOCK
Table 785:
Name
1176
I103IEDCMD function block
I103IEDCMD Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block of commands
I103IEDCMD Output signals

Type
Description
19-LEDRS
BOOLEAN
Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1
BOOLEAN
Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2
BOOLEAN
25-GRP3
BOOLEAN
26-GRP4
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.7.11.5
Table 786:
Name
FunctionType
Settings
I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
1 - 255
Step
Default
Description
255
18.7.12
Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103

I103USRCMD
18.7.12.1
Functionality
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output signals.
These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private
range, and the Information number parameter for each output signal.
18.7.12.2
Identification
Function block
name
Function commands user defined for

IEC 60870-5-103
18.7.12.3
IEC 60617
identification
I103USRCMD
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
BLOCK
I103USRCMD
ÔUTPUT1
ÔUTPUT2
ÔUTPUT3
ÔUTPUT4
ÔUTPUT5
ÔUTPUT6
ÔUTPUT7
ÔUTPUT8
IEC10000284 V1 EN
Figure 538:
18.7.12.4
I103USRCMD function block
Signals
Table 787:
Name
BLOCK
I103USRCMD Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block of commands
Technical manual
1177
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 788:
I103USRCMD Output signals
Name
18.7.12.5
Table 789:
Name
Type
Description
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
Command output 1
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
Command output 2
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
Command output 3
OUTPUT4
BOOLEAN
Command output 4
OUTPUT5
BOOLEAN
Command output 5
OUTPUT6
BOOLEAN
Command output 6
OUTPUT7
BOOLEAN
Command output 7
OUTPUT8
BOOLEAN
Command output 8
Settings
I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
PulseMode
Steady
Pulsed
Pulsed
Pulse mode
PulseLength
0.200 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Pulse length
InfNo_1
1 - 255
Information number for output 1 (1-255)
InfNo_2
1 - 255
InfNo_3
1 - 255
InfNo_4
1 - 255
InfNo_5
1 - 255
InfNo_6
1 - 255
InfNo_7
1 - 255
InfNo_8
1 - 255
18.7.13
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103

I103GENCMD
18.7.13.1
Functionality
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103. The
function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to implement
double-point command schemes.
1178
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2 steady

ON/OFF outputs. The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2, while the OFF
output is pulsed with a command value 1. If in steady mode is ON asserted and OFF
deasserted with command 2 and vice versa with command 1. Steady mode is selected by
setting PulseLength=0. The I103GENCMD is retained, and a command in steady mode
will be reissued on restart.
18.7.13.2
Identification
Function block
name
Function commands generic for IEC

60870-5-103
18.7.13.3
IEC 60617
identification
I103GENCMD
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
BLOCK
I103GENCMD
^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON
IEC10000285 V1 EN
Figure 539:
18.7.13.4
I103GENCMD function block
Signals
Table 790:
Name
BLOCK
Table 791:
Name
I103GENCMD Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block of command
I103GENCMD Output signals

Type
Description
CMD_OFF
BOOLEAN
Command output OFF
CMD_ON
BOOLEAN
Command output ON
Technical manual
1179
Section 18
18.7.13.5
Table 792:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Settings
I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
PulseLength
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Pulse length
InfNo
1 - 255
Information number for command output

(1-255)
18.7.14
IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103

I103POSCMD
18.7.14.1
Functionality
The I103POSCMD is a transceiver function that monitors activity on its input signals and
interprets any state transition into commands then sent over an established IEC103 link.
Additionally, it listens for general interrogation (GI) requests, to which it will reply with
a GI response message with the current state of each connected input.
The Position input is a double-indication signal and is GI enabled. This means that any
state transition, i.e. to ON, OFF, intermediate and faulty, will be reported spontaneously.
However, the intermediate and faulty states may be suppressed by setting the "Report
Intermediate Position" to "Off". See the settings for RS485 and optical serial
communication for more information.
The Select input is a single-indication signal and is also GI enabled. State transitions to
ON and OFF are reported spontaneously.
When the Block input is ON, the function will ignore GI requests and cease all monitoring
activity. Consequently, no transitions will be detected.
The I103POSCMD is also equipped with two additional commands; Operate and Cancel.
These are hidden in ACT and respond only to the base INF +2 and +3 respectively. See
table below. The base INF (Information Number) parameter is an IEC 60870-5-103
identifier that associates a function in a 103 Master (such as Scada) with its equivalent in
the IED.
18.7.14.2
Identification
IED commands with position and select
for IEC 60870-5-103
1180
Function block
name
I103POSCMD
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.7.14.3
Function block
I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT
IEC10000286 V1 EN
Figure 540:
18.7.14.4
I103POSCMD function block
Signals
Table 793:
I103POSCMD Input signals
Name
18.7.14.5
Table 794:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of command
POSITION
INTEGER
Position of controllable object
SELECT
BOOLEAN
Select of controllable object
Default
Description
Settings
I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
FunctionType
1 - 255
Function type
InfNo
160 - 236
160
Information number for command output
18.7.15
Operation principle
18.7.15.1
General
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial
communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer
rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and a secondary
station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master
must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
Introduction to IEC 608705103 protocol

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol functionality consists of the following functions:
Event handling
Report of analog service values (measurements)
Fault location
Technical manual
1181
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Command handling
Autorecloser ON/OFF
Teleprotection ON/OFF
Protection ON/OFF
LED reset
Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
File transfer (disturbance files)

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard part 5:
Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the informative
interface of protection equipment.
IEC 60870-5-103 vendor specific implementation

The signal and setting tables specify the information types supported by the IEDs with the
communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.
The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in the
protection and control IED.
Be aware of that different cycle times for function blocks must be
considered to ensure correct time stamping.
Commands in control direction

Commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD
Command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signals.
Table 795:
I103IEDCMD supported indications
INF
Description
19
LED Reset
23
Activate setting group 1
24
25
26
Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD

1182
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.

Information number is defined for each output signals.
Table 796:
INF
Pre-defined I103CMD supported indications

Description
16
Auto-recloser on/off
17
Teleprotection on/off
18
Protection on/off
Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103USRCMD

Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.
Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with parameter
FunctionType.
Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.
Table 797:
INF
I103USRCMD supported indications

Description
11)
Output signal 01
2*
Output signal 02
3*
Output signal 03
4*
Output signal 04
5*
Output signal 05
6*
Output signal 06
7*
Output signal 07
8*
Output signal 08
1) * User defined information number
Status
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.
Technical manual
1183
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A

Information number is defined for each input signals.
Table 798:
I103IED supported functions
INF
Description
19
LED reset
21
TestMode
22
Local Parameter setting
23
Setting group 1 active
24
25
26
Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103USRDEF

Function indication block in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.
Information number is required for each input signal.
Table 799:
INF
I103USRDEF Information number default values

Description
GI
TYP
COT
11)
Input signal 01
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
2*
Input signal 02
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
3*
Input signal 03
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
4*
Input signal 04
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
5*
Input signal 05
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
6*
Input signal 06
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
7*
Input signal 07
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
8*
Input signal 08
x/-
1/2
1,7,(9)
1) * User defined information number
Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103SUPERV

Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.
1184
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Information number is defined for output signals.

Table 800:
Info. no.
I103SUPERV supported functions

Typ
GI
32
Message
Measurand supervision I
COT
1,7,9
33
Measurand supervision V
1,7,9
37
I>>back-up operation
1,7,9
38
VT fuse failure
1,7,9
46
Group warning
1,7,9
47
Group alarm
1,7,9
Ground fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF

Indication block for ground fault in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Table 801:
INF
I103EF supported indications

Description
51
Ground fault forward
52
Ground fault reverse
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for distance protection function.
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
64
Pickup A
Yes
65
Pickup B
Yes
66
Pickup C
Yes
67
Pickup IN
Yes
84
General pickup
Yes

Technical manual
1185
Section 18
Info. no.
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Message
Supported
69
Trip A
Yes
70
Trip B
Yes
71
Trip C
Yes
68
General trip
Yes
74
Fault forward/line
Yes
75
Fault reverse/busbar
Yes
78
Zone 1
Yes
79
Zone 2
Yes
80
Zone 3
Yes
81
Zone 4
Yes
82
Zone 5
Yes
76
Signal transmitted
Yes
77
Signal received
Yes
73
SCL, Fault location in ohm
Yes
Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for line differential, transformer differential, overcurrent and
ground fault protection functions.
FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
Info. no.
Message
Supported
64
Pickup A
Yes
65
Pickup B
Yes
66
Pickup C
Yes
67
Pickup IN
Yes
84
General pickup
Yes
69
Trip A
Yes
70
Trip B
Yes
71
Trip C
Yes
68
General trip
Yes
74
Fault forward/line
Yes
75
Fault reverse/busbar
Yes

1186
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Info. no.
Message
Supported
85
Breaker failure
Yes
86
Trip measuring system A
Yes
87
Trip measuring system B
Yes
88
Trip measuring system C
Yes
89
Trip measuring system N
Yes
90
Over current trip I>
Yes
91
Over current trip I>>
Yes
92
Ground fault trip IN>
Yes
93
Ground fault trip IN>>
Yes
Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Table 802:
INF
I103AR supported indications

Description
16
Autorecloser active
128
CB on by Autorecloser
130
Autorecloser blocked
Measurands
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to
monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXN.
Measurands in public range, I103MEAS
The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.
Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
The upper limit is the maximum value that can be encoded into the ASDU (Application
Service Data Unit). Any value higher than this value will be tagged as OVERFLOW. The
factors 1.2 and 2.4 are taken from the 103 standard and require that a rated value to use as
Technical manual
1187
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
base exists, and then use 1.2 or 2.4 times <rated> as maxVal. You can use 2.4 times rated as
maxVal, but as there is no way to propagate value to client, the use of a scale factor on
<rated> does not make much difference.
You can configure client:client-scaled-max ::= 1.2 * <rated> or
client-scaled-max ::= 1.0 * <maxVal>
If the client has a hard-coded gain of 1.2 * <rated> then client-scaled-max ::=
1.2 times <maxVal>/1.2
Resolution is <maxVal> / 4095 and hence the lowest possible maxVal yields the best
accuracy.
Table 803:
INF
I103MEAS supported indications

Description
148
I_A
144, 145,
146, 148
I_B
148
I_C
147
IN, Neutral current
148
V_A
148
V_B
148
V_C
145, 146
V_A-V_B
147
UN, Neutral voltage
146, 148
P, active power
146, 148
Q, reactive power
148
f, frequency
Measurands in private range, I103MEASUSR

Function type parameter for each block in private range.
Information number must be selected for measurands.
1188
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 804:
I103MEASUSR supported indications
INF
FUN
TYP
COT
*1)
*2)
GI
No, polled
with CL2
*3)
2,7
Description
Meas1
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas2
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas3
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas4
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas5
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas6
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas7
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas8
No, polled
with CL2
2,7
Meas9
1) * User defined information value (PARAM.3)

2) * User defined information value (PARAM.2)
3) 9 = Measurands II, Format = Measurand II (7.3.1.8 in IEC 60870-5-103:1997), semantics per IE is defined
by semantics of connected source.
<Number of information elements> is defined by index of first input not connected.

Example: Input1, Input2, and Input4 are connected, Input3 is not connected.
<Number of information elements> will be 3 (Input3 NOT connected) -1 = 2, that is, only
Input1 and Input2 will be transmitted.
Disturbance recordings
The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units) defined
in the standard.
Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified.
Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:
IA connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR

IB connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block A1RADR
IC connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block A1RADR
IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block A1RADR
VAE connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block A1RADR
Technical manual
1189
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
VBE connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block A1RADR

VCE connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block A1RADR
VEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block A1RADR
Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private range
64 to 95.
Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION TYPE
and an INFORMATION NUMBER.
Disturbance upload
All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be reported
to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the
master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the master) will not be
reported to the master again.
When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded disturbances
will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can be sent whenever
something has happened to disturbances in this list. For example, when a disturbance is
deleted (by other client, for example, SPA) or when a new disturbance has been recorded
or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.
Deviations from the standard
Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some of
the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in the IED
series.
This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.
ASDU23
In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF (status
of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether:
Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or test
mode.
Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than
pick-up
The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information is
always set (hard coded) to:
1190
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
TP
Recorded fault with trip. [1]
TM
Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]
OTEV
Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]
Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the
standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action. FAN
is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for each disturbance.
ASDU26 / ASDU31
When a disturbance has been selected by the master by sending ASDU24, the protection
equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information element named
NOF (number of grid faults). This number must indicate fault number in the power
system,that is, a fault in the power system with several trip and auto-reclosing has the same
NOF (while the FAN must be incremented). NOF is just as FAN, equal to disturbance
number.
Interoperability, physical layer

Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485
No
number of loads
No
Optical interface
glass fibre
Yes
plastic fibre
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s
Yes
19200 bit/s
Yes
Link Layer
DFC-bit used
Yes
Connectors
connector F-SMA
No
connector BFOC/2.5
Yes
Technical manual
1191
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Interoperability, application layer

Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU
Yes
Time-tagged message
Yes
Time-tagged message with rel. time
Yes
Measurands I
Yes
Time-tagged message with rel. time
Yes
Identification
Yes
Yes
End of general interrogation
Yes
Measurands II
Yes
10
Generic data
No
11
Generic identification
No
23
List of recorded disturbances
Yes
26
Ready for transm. of disturbance data
Yes
27
Ready for transm. of a channel
Yes
28
Ready for transm of tags
Yes
29
Transmission of tags
Yes
30
Transmission fo disturbance data
Yes
31
End of transmission
Yes
Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction

ASDU
Yes
Yes
General interrogation
Yes
10
Generic data
No
20
General command
Yes
21
Generic command
No
24
Order for disturbance data transmission
Yes
25
Acknowledgement for distance data transmission
Yes
Selection of basic application functions
1192
Test mode
No
Blocking of monitoring direction
Yes
Disturbance data
Yes
Private data
Yes
Generic services
No
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.7.15.2
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP and
LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the
Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can have
connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre cables (ST, bayonet) or
a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different types are available depending on
type of fibre.
The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing optical
fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay special
attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of the optical fibres.
The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
18.7.16
Technical data
Table 805:
Function
Value
Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103
Communication speed
9600, 19200 Bd
18.8

GOOSEINTLKRCV
18.8.1
Functionality
GOOSE communication can be used for exchanging information between IEDs via the
IEC 61850-8-1 station communication bus. This is typically used for sending apparatus
position indications for interlocking or reservation signals for 1-of-n control. GOOSE can
also be used to exchange any boolean, integer, double point and analog measured values
between IEDs.
Technical manual
1193
Section 18
18.8.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK
^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
ÂPP1_OP
ÂPP1_CL
APP1VAL
ÂPP2_OP
ÂPP2_CL
APP2VAL
ÂPP3_OP
ÂPP3_CL
APP3VAL
ÂPP4_OP
ÂPP4_CL
APP4VAL
ÂPP5_OP
ÂPP5_CL
APP5VAL
ÂPP6_OP
ÂPP6_CL
APP6VAL
ÂPP7_OP
ÂPP7_CL
APP7VAL
ÂPP8_OP
ÂPP8_CL
APP8VAL
ÂPP9_OP
ÂPP9_CL
APP9VAL
ÂPP10_OP
ÂPP10_CL
APP10VAL
ÂPP11_OP
ÂPP11_CL
APP11VAL
ÂPP12_OP
ÂPP12_CL
APP12VAL
ÂPP13_OP
ÂPP13_CL
APP13VAL
ÂPP14_OP
ÂPP14_CL
APP14VAL
ÂPP15_OP
ÂPP15_CL
APP15VAL
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC07000048.vsd
IEC07000048 V3 EN
Figure 541:
1194
GOOSEINTLKRCV function block
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.8.3
Signals
Table 806:
Name
BLOCK
Table 807:
Name
GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block of output signals
GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Type
Description
RESREQ
BOOLEAN
Reservation request
RESGRANT
BOOLEAN
Reservation granted
APP1_OP
BOOLEAN
Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL
BOOLEAN
Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL
BOOLEAN
Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP
BOOLEAN
APP2_CL
BOOLEAN
APP2VAL
BOOLEAN
APP3_OP
BOOLEAN
APP3_CL
BOOLEAN
APP3VAL
BOOLEAN
APP4_OP
BOOLEAN
APP4_CL
BOOLEAN
APP4VAL
BOOLEAN
APP5_OP
BOOLEAN
APP5_CL
BOOLEAN
APP5VAL
BOOLEAN
APP6_OP
BOOLEAN
APP6_CL
BOOLEAN
APP6VAL
BOOLEAN
APP7_OP
BOOLEAN
APP7_CL
BOOLEAN
APP7VAL
BOOLEAN
APP8_OP
BOOLEAN
APP8_CL
BOOLEAN
APP8VAL
BOOLEAN
APP9_OP
BOOLEAN
APP9_CL
BOOLEAN
APP9VAL
BOOLEAN

Technical manual
1195
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
APP10_CL
BOOLEAN
APP10VAL
BOOLEAN
APP11_OP
BOOLEAN
APP11_CL
BOOLEAN
APP11VAL
BOOLEAN
APP12_OP
BOOLEAN
APP12_CL
BOOLEAN
APP12VAL
BOOLEAN
APP13_OP
BOOLEAN
APP13_CL
BOOLEAN
APP13VAL
BOOLEAN
APP14_OP
BOOLEAN
APP14_CL
BOOLEAN
APP14VAL
BOOLEAN
APP15_OP
BOOLEAN
APP15_CL
BOOLEAN
APP15VAL
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
Communication Valid
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test Output
18.8.4
Settings
Table 808:
GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)
Name
Operation
1196
Description
APP10_OP
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.9
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV
18.9.1
Function block
GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK
ÔUT1
DVALID1
ÔUT2
DVALID2
ÔUT3
DVALID3
ÔUT4
DVALID4
ÔUT5
DVALID5
ÔUT6
DVALID6
ÔUT7
DVALID7
ÔUT8
DVALID8
ÔUT9
DVALID9
ÔUT10
DVALID10
ÔUT11
DVALID11
ÔUT12
DVALID12
ÔUT13
DVALID13
ÔUT14
DVALID14
ÔUT15
DVALID15
ÔUT16
DVALID16
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC07000047.vsd
IEC07000047 V3 EN
Figure 542:
18.9.2
GOOSEBINRCV function block
Signals
Table 809:
Name
BLOCK
Table 810:
Name
GOOSEBINRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block of output signals
GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Type
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary output 1
DVALID1
BOOLEAN
Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary output 2
Technical manual
1197
Section 18
Name
1198
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Type
Description
DVALID2
BOOLEAN
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary output 3
DVALID3
BOOLEAN
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary output 4
DVALID4
BOOLEAN
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary output 5
DVALID5
BOOLEAN
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary output 6
DVALID6
BOOLEAN
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary output 7
DVALID7
BOOLEAN
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary output 8
DVALID8
BOOLEAN
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary output 9
DVALID9
BOOLEAN
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary output 10
DVALID10
BOOLEAN
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary output 11
DVALID11
BOOLEAN
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary output 12
DVALID12
BOOLEAN
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary output 13
DVALID13
BOOLEAN
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary output 14
DVALID14
BOOLEAN
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary output 15
DVALID15
BOOLEAN
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary output 16
DVALID16
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
Communication Valid
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test Output
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.9.3
Table 811:
Name
Operation
Settings
GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Disabled
Enabled
Step
Default
Description
Disabled
18.10

GOOSEDPRCV
18.10.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
GOOSE function block to receive a

double point value
18.10.2
IEC 60617
identification
GOOSEDPRCV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
18.10.3
Function block
GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK
^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000249 V1 EN
Figure 543:
18.10.4
GOOSEDPRCV function block
Signals
Table 812:
Name
BLOCK
GOOSEDPRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block of function
Technical manual
1199
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 813:
GOOSEDPRCV Output signals
Name
18.10.5
Table 814:
Name
Operation
18.10.6
Type
Description
DPOUT
INTEGER
Double point output
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
Data valid for double point output
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
Communication valid for double point output
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
Settings
GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total failure
condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a cross
to receive the double point values.
The implementation for IEC61850 quality data handling is restricted to a

simple level. If quality data validity is GOOD then the DATAVALID
output will be HIGH. If quality data validity is INVALID,
QUESTIONABLE, OVERFLOW, FAILURE or OLD DATA then the
DATAVALID output will be LOW.
1200
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.11
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value

GOOSEINTRCV
18.11.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
GOOSE function block to receive an

integer value
18.11.2
IEC 60617
identification
GOOSEINTRCV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
18.11.3
Function block
BLOCK
GOOSEINTRCV
ÎNTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000250 V1 EN
Figure 544:
18.11.4
GOOSEINTRCV function block
Signals
Table 815:
Name
BLOCK
Table 816:
Name
GOOSEINTRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block of function
GOOSEINTRCV Output signals

Type
Description
INTOUT
INTEGER
Integer output
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
Data valid for integer output
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
Communication valid for integer output
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
Technical manual
1201
Section 18
18.11.5
Table 817:
Name
Operation
18.11.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Settings
GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation principle
to receive the integer values.

18.12
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value

GOOSEMVRCV
18.12.1
Identification
measurand value
1202
IEC 61850
identification
GOOSEMVRCV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.12.2
Functionality
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
18.12.3
Function block
BLOCK
GOOSEMVRCV
^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000251 V1 EN
Figure 545:
18.12.4
GOOSEMVRCV function block
Signals
Table 818:
GOOSEMVRCV Input signals
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Table 819:
Table 820:
Name
Operation
18.12.6
Description
Block of function
GOOSEMVRCV Output signals
Name
18.12.5
Default
Type
Description
MVOUT
REAL
Measurand value output
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
Data valid for measurand value output
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
Communication valid for measurand value output
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
Settings
GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation principle
Technical manual
1203
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
to receive the measured value.

18.13
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value

GOOSESPRCV
18.13.1
Identification
single point value
18.13.2
IEC 61850
identification
GOOSESPRCV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
18.13.3
Function block
GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK
^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000248 V1 EN
Figure 546:
1204
GOOSESPRCV function block
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.13.4
Signals
Table 821:
GOOSESPRCV Input signals
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Table 822:
Table 823:
Name
Operation
18.13.6
Description
Block of function
GOOSESPRCV Output signals
Name
18.13.5
Default
Type
Description
SPOUT
BOOLEAN
Single point output
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
Data valid for single point output
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
Communication valid for single point output
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
Settings
GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation principle
to receive the binary single point values.

Technical manual
1205
Section 18
18.14
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND

18.14.1
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Multiple command and receive
MULTICMDRCV
Multiple command and send
MULTICMDSND
Functionality
The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive signals
via the interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes 16 binary
inputs. LON enables these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving function block,
MULTICMDRCV, which has 16 binary outputs.
18.14.2
Design
18.14.2.1
General
The common behavior for all 16 outputs of the MULTICMDRCV is set to either of two
modes: Steady or Pulse.
1206
1 = Steady: This mode simply forwards the received signals to the binary outputs.
2 = Pulse: When a received signal transitions from 0 (zero) to 1 (one), a pulse with a
duration of exactly one execution cycle is triggered on the corresponding binary
output. This means that no connected function block may have a cycle time that is
higher than the execution cycle time of the particular MULTICMDRCV instance.
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.14.3
Function block
MULTICMDRCV
BLOCK
ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID
IEC06000007 V2 EN
Figure 547:
MULTICMDRCV function block
MULTICMDSND
BLOCK
ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
IEC06000008 V2 EN
Figure 548:
18.14.4
MULTICMDSND function block
Signals
Table 824:
Name
BLOCK
MULTICMDRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Block of function
Technical manual
1207
Section 18
Table 825:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
MULTICMDSND Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
Table 826:
Name
MULTICMDRCV Output signals

Type
Description
ERROR
BOOLEAN
MultiReceive error
NEWDATA
BOOLEAN
New data is received
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUTPUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUTPUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
OUTPUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
OUTPUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
OUTPUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
OUTPUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
OUTPUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
OUTPUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
OUTPUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
1208
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Output 13
OUTPUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
OUTPUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
OUTPUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
VALID
BOOLEAN
Output data is valid
Table 827:
MULTICMDSND Output signals
Name
Type
ERROR
18.14.5
Table 828:
Name
Description
OUTPUT13
Description
BOOLEAN
MultiSend error
Settings
MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tMaxCycleTime
0.050 - 200.000
0.001
11.000
Maximum cycle time between receptions of

input data
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum cycle time between receptions of

input data
Mode
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
Mode for output signals
tPulseTime
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Pulse length for multi command outputs
Table 829:
Name
MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
tMaxCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
5.000
Maximum time interval between transmission

of output data
tMinCycleTime
0.000 - 200.000
0.001
0.000
Minimum time interval between transmission of

output data
18.14.6
Operation principle
There are 10 instances of the MULTICMDSND function block. The first two are fast (8
ms cycle time) while the others are slow (100 ms cycle time). Each instance has 16 binary
inputs, to which 16 independent signals can be connected. Connected signals are sent
through MULTICMDSND to the receiving equivalent, MULTICMDRCV, located on a
different IED.
Technical manual
1209
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The MULTICMDRCV function block has 16 binary outputs, all controlled through the
command block of one or many MULTICMDSND function blocks. There are 60
instances of the MULTICMDRCV where the first 12 are fast (8 ms), and the others are
slow (100 ms). Additionally, the MULTICMDRCV has a supervision function, which
sets the output connector "VALID" to 0 (zero) if its block does not receive any data within
the time defined by tMaxCycleTime.
LON connections are established using LON network tool (LNT).
18.15
Security events on protocols SECALARM
18.15.1
Security alarm SECALARM
18.15.1.1
Signals
Table 830:
SECALARM Output signals
Name
18.15.1.2
Table 831:
Name
Operation
Type
Description
EVENTID
INTEGER
EventId of the generated security event
SEQNUMBER
INTEGER
Sequence number of the generated security event
Settings
SECALARM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Enabled
Description
Operation On/Off
18.16
Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG
18.16.1
Activity logging ACTIVLOG

ACTIVLOG contains all settings for activity logging.
There can be 6 external log servers to send syslog events to. Each server can be configured
with IP address; IP port number and protocol format. The format can be either syslog
(RFC 5424) or Common Event Format (CEF) from ArcSight.
1210
Technical manual
Section 18
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
18.16.2
Table 832:
Name
Settings
ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ExtLogSrv1Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
External log server 1 type
ExtLogSrv1Port
1 - 65535
514
External log server 1 port number
ExtLogSrv1IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
External log server 1 IP-address
ExtLogSrv2Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv2Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv2IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
ExtLogSrv3Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv3Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv3IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
ExtLogSrv4Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv4Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv4IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
ExtLogSrv5Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv5Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv5IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
ExtLogSrv6Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv6Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv6IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
Technical manual
1211
1212
Section 19
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 19
19.1
Binary signal transfer
19.1.1
Identification
19.1.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
BinSignReceive
BinSignTransm
Functionality
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current values
with a maximum of 8 binary signals in the line differential protection IED, or for the
transmission of only binary signals (up to 192) in the other IEDs. The binary signals are
freely configurable and can, thus, be used for any purpose, for example, communication
scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals between IEDs.
Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with a Line Data
Communication Module (LCDM). The LDCMs then act as interfaces to a 64 kbit/s
communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.
The IED can be equipped with up to two short range or medium range LDCMs.
Technical manual
1213
Section 19
19.1.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
LDCMRecBinStat1
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL
IEC07000043 V2 EN
LDCMRecBinStat2
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
IEC07000044 V2 EN
Figure 549:
LDCMRecBinStat function blocks
LDCMRecBinStat3
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
IEC05000451 V2 EN
Figure 550:
1214
LDCMRecBinStat function block
Technical manual
Section 19
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
19.1.4
Signals
Table 833:
Name
LDCMRecBinStat1 Output signals

Type
Description
COMFAIL
BOOLEAN
Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT
BOOLEAN
Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR
BOOLEAN
No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS
BOOLEAN
No start and stop flags identified for the incoming

message
ADDRERR
BOOLEAN
Incoming message from non-valid address
LNGTHERR
BOOLEAN
Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR
BOOLEAN
Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
REMCOMF
BOOLEAN
Remote terminal indicates problem with received

message
LOWLEVEL
BOOLEAN
Low signal level on the receive link
Table 834:
Name

Type
Description
CH1
STRING
Remote communication channel 1
CH2
STRING
CH3
STRING
CH4
STRING
COMFAIL
BOOLEAN
YBIT
BOOLEAN
NOCARR
BOOLEAN
NOMESS
BOOLEAN

message
ADDRERR
BOOLEAN
LNGTHERR
BOOLEAN
CRCERROR
BOOLEAN
TRDELERR
BOOLEAN
Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR
BOOLEAN
Error in echo synchronization
REMCOMF
BOOLEAN

message
REMGPSER
BOOLEAN
Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS

synchronization
SUBSTITU
BOOLEAN
Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
1215
Section 19
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 835:
Name
Type
STRING
CH2
STRING
CH3
STRING
CH4
STRING
COMFAIL
BOOLEAN
YBIT
BOOLEAN
NOCARR
BOOLEAN
NOMESS
BOOLEAN

message
ADDRERR
BOOLEAN
LNGTHERR
BOOLEAN
CRCERROR
BOOLEAN
TRDELERR
BOOLEAN
Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR
BOOLEAN
Error in echo synchronization
REMCOMF
BOOLEAN

message
REMGPSER
BOOLEAN
Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS

synchronization
SUBSTITU
BOOLEAN
Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL
BOOLEAN
19.1.5
Settings
Table 836:
LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings (basic)
Name
Description
CH1
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ChannelMode
Blocked
Normal
OutOfService
Normal
Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,

2=OutOfService
TerminalNo
0 - 255
Terminal number used for line differential

communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
Terminal number on remote terminal
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave
Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,

0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High
1216
Technical manual
Section 19
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
ms
100
Time delay before communication error signal

is activated
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
ms
100
Reset delay before communication error signal

is reset
InvertPolX21
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Invert polarization for X21 communication
Table 837:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ChannelMode
Blocked
Normal
OutOfService
Normal

2=OutOfService
TerminalNo
0 - 255

communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
DiffSync
Echo
GPS
Echo
Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO,

1=GPS
GPSSyncErr
Block
Echo
Block
Operation mode when GPS synchroniation

signal is lost
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave

0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
CT-GRP1
Summation mode for transmitted current

values
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
ms
100

is activated
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
ms
100

is reset
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
Time delay before switching in redundant

channel
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
ms
100
Time delay before switching back from

redundant channel
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
ms
0.01
0.00
Asymmetric delay when communication use

echo synch.
AnalogLatency
2 - 20
Latency between local analogue data and

transmitted
remAinLatency
2 - 20
Analog latency of remote terminal
MaxTransmDelay
0 - 40
ms
20
Max allowed transmission delay
Technical manual
1217
Section 19
Name
Values (Range)
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CompRange
0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
0-25kA
Compression range
MaxtDiffLevel
200 - 2000
us
600
Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff
200 - 1000
us
300
Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Table 838:
Name

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ChannelMode
Blocked
Normal
OutOfService
Normal

2=OutOfService
TerminalNo
0 - 255

communication
RemoteTermNo
0 - 255
DiffSync
Echo
GPS
Echo
Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM, 0=ECHO,

1=GPS
GPSSyncErr
Block
Echo
Block
Operation mode when GPS synchroniation

signal is lost
CommSync
Slave
Master
Slave

0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower
LowPower
HighPower
LowPower
TransmCurr
CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChannel
CT-GRP1
Summation mode for transmitted current

values
ComFailAlrmDel
5 - 500
ms
100

is activated
ComFailResDel
5 - 500
ms
100

is reset
RedChSwTime
5 - 500
ms
Time delay before switching in redundant

channel
RedChRturnTime
5 - 500
ms
100
Time delay before switching back from

redundant channel
AsymDelay
-20.00 - 20.00
ms
0.01
0.00
Asymmetric delay when communication use

echo synch.
AnalogLatency
2 - 20
Latency between local analogue data and

transmitted
remAinLatency
2 - 20
Analog latency of remote terminal
1218
Technical manual
Section 19
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MaxTransmDelay
0 - 40
ms
20
Max allowed transmission delay
CompRange
0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
0-25kA
Compression range
MaxtDiffLevel
200 - 2000
us
600
Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up
DeadbandtDiff
200 - 1000
us
300
Deadband for t Diff
InvertPolX21
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
19.1.6
Monitored data
Table 839:
Name
CommStatus
Table 840:
Name
CommStatus
LDCMRecBinStat1 Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
Unit
-
Description
Status of communication link

Type
BOOLEAN
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
Technical manual
Unit
-
Description
1219
Section 19
Table 841:
Name
CommStatus
19.1.7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A

Type
BOOLEAN
Values (Range)
Unit
0=Ok
1=SyncErr
2=No RXD
3=LocalGPSErr
4=RemGPSErr
5=LocAndRemG
PSErr
6=LocalADErr
7=RemADErr
8=LocAndRemA
DErr
9=AddressErr
10=FreqConfErr
11=LatencyConf
Err
Description
Operation principle
The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s channels. It
is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same in 50 Hz and 60
Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is C37.94 and one
telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be transmitted, Cyclic
Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated with C37.94).
Start
flag
8 bits
Information
n x 16 bits
CRC
Stop
flag
16 bits
8 bits
en01000134.vsd
IEC01000134 V1 EN
Figure 551:
Data message structure
The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the
HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition. The
optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing is
included in the data field.
The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the
correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the messages
up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then programmed to
accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function detects a faulty
message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation.
When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data
consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight
1220
Technical manual
Section 19
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented as
sampled values.
When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity of
the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the capacity
of 192 signals.
19.2
Transmission of analog data from LDCM

LDCMTransmit
19.2.1
Function block
LDCMTRN
^CT1L1
^CT1L2
^CT1L3
^CT1N
^CT2L1
^CT2L2
^CT2L3
^CT2N
IEC10000017 V1 EN
Figure 552:
LDCMTransmit function block
The function blocks are not represented in the Application Configuration

tool except for the LDCMTRN function block that is visible in ACT. The
signals appear only in the Signal Matrix tool when a LDCM is included in
the configuration with the function selector tool.
19.2.2
Signals
Table 842:
Name
LDCMTRN Input signals

Type
Default
Description
CT1L1
STRING
Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L1 to remote

end
CT1L2
STRING

end
CT1L3
STRING

end
CT1N
STRING
Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 neutral N to

remote end

Technical manual
1221
Section 19
Name
1222
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Type
Default
Description
CT2L1
STRING

end
CT2L2
STRING

end
CT2L3
STRING

end
CT2N
STRING
Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 neutral N to

remote end
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.1
Authority check ATHCHCK
20.1.1
Identification
Authority check
20.1.2
IEC 61850
identification
ATHCHCK
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are accessing
the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization handling of
the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:
local, through the local HMI

remote, through the communication ports
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited with PCM600 IED user management
tool.
Technical manual
1223
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC12000202 V2 EN
Figure 553:
20.1.3
PCM600 user management tool
Operation principle
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas of
the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 843.
Ensure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when
writing particular data to the IED from PCM600.
The meaning of the legends used in the table:
1224
R= Read
W= Write
- = No access rights
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 843:
Pre-defined user types
Access rights
Guest
Super User
SPA Guest
System
Operator
Protection
Engineer
Design
Engineer
User
Administrator
Basic setting possibilities (change

setting group, control settings, limit
supervision)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Advanced setting possibilities (for

example protection settings)
R/W
R/W
R/W
Basic control possibilities (process

control, no bypass)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Advanced control possibilities (process

control including interlock trigg)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Basic command handling (for example

clear LEDs, manual trigg)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Advanced command handling (for

example clear disturbance record)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Basic configuration possibilities (I/Oconfiguration in SMT)
R/W
R/W
R/W
Advanced configuration possibilities

(application configuration including
SMT, GDE and CMT)
R/W
R/W
R/W
File loading (database loading from

XML-file)
R/W
R/W
R/W
File dumping (database dumping to

XML-file)
R/W
R/W
R/W
File transfer (FTP file transfer)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
File transfer (limited) (FTP file transfer)
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
File Transfer (SPA File Transfer)
R/W
R/W
Database access for normal user
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
User administration (user management

FTP File Transfer)
R/W
R/W
User administration (user management

SPA File Transfer)
R/W
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management
within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED, there
are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.
If the IED is Central Account Management enabled, users can only be
created, deleted or edited in the Central Account Management server. In
that case, only the user rights can be edited using the PCM600 tool. See
Cyber Security Deployment Guidelines manual.
Technical manual
1225
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and

passwords.
The maximum of characters in a password is 18.
At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to be

able to write users, created in PCM600, to IED.
At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED
until a user has been created with the IED User Management..
Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on,
introducing the password assigned in the tool.
If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: No user
defined!
If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main menu/
Settings/General Settings/HMI/Screen/Display Timeout) elapses, the IED returns to
Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 60 minutes at
delivery.
If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and downloaded
into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or when the user attempts
to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log on window will appear.
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the
key, the user can
change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and down arrows.
After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E key again. When it comes
to password, upon pressing the
key, the following character will show up: $. After
all the letters are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and press the
key again.
If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the Authorization
screen. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a password protected
setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log on has failed, then the
Log on window opens again, until either the user makes it right or presses Cancel.
20.1.3.1
Authorization with Central Account Management enabled IED

The users, their roles and rights are created, deleted and edited only in the Central Account
Management server (SDM600). However, the user rights can be edited in the IED by using
the PCM600 user tool.
1226
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
One user can have one or several user roles. By default, the users in Table 273 are created
in the IED, and when creating new users in the SDM600 server, the predefined roles from
Table 845 can be used.
At delivery, the IED user has full access as SuperUser when using the
LHMI and as Administrator when using FTP or PCM600 until Central
Account Management is activated.
Table 844:
Default users
User name
User rights
SuperUser
Full rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default until other users are
defined
Guest
Only read rights, only presented in LHMI. LHMI is logged on by default when other users
are defined (same as VIEWER)
Administrator
Full rights. Password: Administrator. This user has to be used when reading out
disturbances with third party FTP-client.
Table 845:
Predefined user roles according to IEC 62351-8
User roles
Role explanation
User rights
VIEWER
Viewer
Can read parameters and browse the menus from LHMI
OPERATOR
Operator
Can read parameters and browse the menus as well as perform

control actions
ENGINEER
Engineer
Can create and load configurations and change settings for the
IED and also run commands and manage disturbances
INSTALLER
Installer
Can load configurations and change settings for the IED
SECADM
Security
administrator
Can change role assignments and security settings. Can

deploy certificates.
SECAUD
Security auditor
Can view audit logs
RBACMNT
RBAC
management
Can change role assignment
ADMINISTRATOR
Administrator
rights
Sum of all rights for SECADM, SECAUD and RBACMNT

This User role is vendor specific and not
defined in IEC 623518
Changes in user management settings do not cause an IED reboot.
Technical manual
1227
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The PCM600 tool caches the login credentials after successful login for 15
minutes. During that time no more login will be necessary.
The successfully activation of Central Account Management will disable built-in users or
remove all local created users from PCM600.
Management of user credentials and roles is handled on the central Account Management
server e.g. SDM600 The IED employs two strategies to ensure availability of the
authentication system even if there is a problem with the network or authentication server:
A substation can be equipped with two redundant authentication servers operating in

a hot standby mode.
If configured by the security administrator, the IED itself maintains a local replica in
the database with selected users. This database is periodically updated with data from
the server and used as fallback if none of the servers are reachable.
Note that not all users in the SDM600 server are part of the replica. There might be users
that are not assigned to any replication group. IED only replicates those users which are
part of replication group configured in the IED.
This replication can be disabled using PCM600 by the security administrator, which
means that the IED will forward login requests to the SDM600 for authorization and in
case of problems with the network users will not be able to log in to the IED.
If user replication has been disabled in a CAM-enabled IED and if
communication with SDM600 is lost, access to that IED will be denied
until communication is re-established.
All communication between the central management and the IEDs is protected using
secure communication. Customers using SDM600 are required to generate and distribute
certificates during the engineering process of the substation. These certificates ensure
mutual trust between IED and for example SDM600, FTP, PCM600 and other system.
1228
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 846:
Authority-related IED functions
Function
Description
Authority status
ATHSTAT
This function is an indication function block for user logon activity.

User denied attempt to logon and user successful logon are reported.
Authority check
ATHCHCK
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The
authorization handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access
points to the IED:
local, through the local HMI

remote, through the communication ports
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only in the CAM server.
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the
maintenance menu logon time out.
Authority
management
AUTHMAN
For more information on the functions Authority Management (AUTHMAN), Authority

Status (ATHSTAT), and Authority Check (ATHCHCK) functions, refer to chapter
Basic IED functions in the Technical Manual.
20.2
Authority management AUTHMAN
20.2.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Authority management
20.2.2
AUTHMAN
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
AUTHMAN
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the maintenance
menu log on time out.
20.2.3
Table 847:
Settings
AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MaintMenuDisAuth
Disable
Enable
Enable
In maintenance menu, disable authority

selection is shown
AuthTimeout
600 - 3600
600
600
Authority blocking timeout
Technical manual
1229
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
20.3
FTP access with password FTPACCS
20.3.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
FTP access with SSL
20.3.2
FTPACCS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
FTP access with TLS, FTPACCS

The FTP Client defaults to the best possible security mode when trying to negotiate with
TLS.
The automatic negotiation mode acts on configured port number 21 and server features,
it tries to negotiate with explicit TLS via AUTH TLS. If the specified port is any other, it
tries to negotiate in a similar way.
Using FTP without TLS encryption gives the FTP client reduced capabilities. This mode
is only for accessing disturbance recorder data from the IED.
If normal FTP is required to read out disturbance recordings, create a
specific account for this purpose with rights only to do File transfer. The
password of this user will be exposed in clear text on the wire.
20.3.3
Table 848:
Name
Settings
FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PortSelection
None
Front
LANAB
LANCD
Any
Any
Port selection for communication
SSLMode
FTP+FTPS
FTPS
FTPS
Support for AUTH TLS/SSL
TCPPortFTP
1 - 65535
21
TCP port for FTP and FTP with Explicit SSL
1230
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
20.4
Authority status ATHSTAT
20.4.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Authority status
20.4.2
IEC 60617
identification
ATHSTAT
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on
activity.
User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.
20.4.3
Function block
ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON
IEC06000503 V2 EN
Figure 554:
20.4.4
ATHSTAT function block
Signals
Table 849:
Name
ATHSTAT Output signals

Type
Description
USRBLKED
BOOLEAN
At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON
BOOLEAN
At least one user is logged on
The output signal USRBLKED is not valid if the IED is Centralized

Account Management enabled.
20.4.5
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or in Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
Technical manual
1231
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.4.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Operation principle
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and
the user authorization:
the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event (EVENT)
function block for LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC 61850 station bus.
20.5
Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG
20.5.1
Functionality
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal system
events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events
are saved in an internal event list presented on the LHMI and in PCM600 event viewer
tool.
20.5.2
Function block
INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYN CERR
RTCERR
STUPBLK
IEC09000787 V2 EN
Figure 555:
1232
INTERRSIG function block
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
20.5.3
Signals
Table 850:
Name
20.5.4
INTERRSIG Output signals

Type
Description
FAIL
BOOLEAN
Internal fail
WARNING
BOOLEAN
Internal warning
TSYNCERR
BOOLEAN
Time synchronization error
RTCERR
BOOLEAN
Real time clock error
DISABLE
BOOLEAN
Application Disable
Settings
20.5.5
Operation principle
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:
Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

Checking of digitized measuring signals.
Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.
The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI or from the
Event Viewer in PCM600.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI, the actual information from the selfsupervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main menu/
Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General. The
information from the self-supervision function is also available in the Event Viewer in
PCM600.
Technical manual
1233
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC15000414 V1 EN
Figure 556:
IED general status in local HM
The self supervision records internal signal changes in an internal event list. A maximum
of 40 internal events are stored in a first-in, first-out manner.
GUID-B481701F-05B4-4B29-83D4-18F13886FEBE V1 EN
Figure 557:
Self-supervision event list in local HMI
A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of an output relay with potential

free alarm contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. This contact
is closed when the IED either does not have auxiliary power, or when one or more error
conditions are present in the IED (for example harware error).
Some output signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from
this function block are sent as events via IEC61850 to the station level of the control
system. These signals can also be connected to binary outputs for signalization via output
relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in the
Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from the
INTERRSIG function block via two outputs TSYNCERR and RTCERR .
1234
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
20.5.5.1
Internal signals
Self supervision provides several status signals that give information about the internal
status of the IED. For this reason they are also called internal signals. These internal
signals , available on local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General,
can be divided into two groups.
Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see table 851.
Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see table 852.
Table 851:
Self-supervision's standard internal signals
Name of signal
Description
Displayed on
local HMI as
Reasons for activation
FAIL
Internal
Fail status
Internal fail
This signal will be active if one or more of the

following internal signals are active; LMDERROR,
WATCHDOG, APPERROR, RTEERROR, or any of
the HW dependent signals
WARNING
Internal
Warning
status
Internal
warning

following internal signals are active; RTCERROR,
IEC61850ERROR, TIMESYNCHERROR
RTCERROR
Real Time
Clock
status
Real time
clock
This signal will be active when there is a hardware

error with the real time clock.
TIMESYNCHERROR
Time
Synchroniz
ation
status
Time synch
This signal will be active when the source of the time

synchronization is lost, or when the time system has
to make a time reset.
RTEERROR
Runtime
Execution
Error
status
Runtime
execution
This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed

to do some actions with the application threads. The
actions can be loading of settings or parameters for
components, changing of setting groups, loading or
unloading of application threads.
IEC61850ERROR
IEC 61850
Error
status
IEC61850
This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did

not succeed in some actions like reading IEC 61850
configuration, startup, for example
DNP3
DNP3 error
status
DNP3
This signal will be active when DNP3 detects any

configuration error during startup.
LMDERROR
LON/Mip
Device
Error
status
SLM301
LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an

unrecoverable error state.
Technical manual
1235
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name of signal
Description
APPERROR
Runtime
Application
Error
status
Runtime App
Error

application threads are not in the state that Runtime
Engine expects. The states can be CREATED,
INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example
SETCHGD
Settings
changed
Settings
changed
This signal will generate an Internal Event to the

Internal Event list if any settings are changed.
SETGRPCHGD
Setting
groups
changed
Settings
changed
This signal will generate an Internal Event to the

Internal Event list if any setting groups are changed.
Table 852:
Card
Displayed on
local HMI as
Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Name of signal
Description
Displayed on
local HMI as
PSM
PSM-Error
Power
Supply
Module
Error
status
PSM1
Activated if the module has a hardware error.
BIM
BIM-Error
Binary In
Module
Error
status
BIMn

n = slot number
BOM
BOM-Error
Binary Out
Module
Error
status
BOMn

n = slot number
IOM
IOM-Error
In/Out
Module
Error
status
IOMn

n = slot number
MIM
MIM-Error
Millampere
Input
Module
Error
status
MIMn

n = slot number
SOM
SOM-Error
Static Out
Module
Error
status
SOMn

n = slot number
NUM
NUM-Error
Numerical/
CPU
Module
Error
status
NUM30
Activated if the module has a hardware or

software error.
ADM
ADM-Error
A/D
Module
Error
status
ADM31
1236
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Card
20.5.5.2
Name of signal
Description
Displayed on
local HMI as
ADM
ADM-Error
A/D
Module
Error
status
ADM32
OEM
OEM-Error
Optical
Ethernet
Module
Error
status
OEM3nn

n = slot number
LDCM
LDCM-Error
Line
Differential
Communic
ation
Module
Error
status
LDCM3nn

n = slot number
TRM
TRM-Error
Transform
er Module
Error
status
TRM40
TRM
TRM-Error
Transform
er Module
Error
status
TRM41
Supervision of analog inputs

The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification.
When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of the
two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be
informed and an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.
20.5.6
Technical data
Table 853:
Self supervision with internal event list
Data
Value
Recording manner
Continuous, event controlled
List size
40 events, first in-first out
Technical manual
1237
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
20.6
20.6.1
Functionality
The time synchronization function is used to select a common source of absolute time for
the synchronization of the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it
possible to compare events and disturbance data between all IEDs within a station
automation system and in between sub-stations.
Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time synchronization
source.
20.6.2
Settings
There are two groups of parameter settings related to time:
System time
Synchronization
The System time group relates to setting the on/off and start/end of the Daylight Saving
Time (DST) for the local time zone in relation to Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The
Synchronization group relates to selecting the coarse and fine synchronization sources. As
well as defining the synchronization master and accuracy levels specifically for
IEC61850-9-2.
All the settings and parameters related to time are available via Local HMI under Main
menu/Configuration/Time/System time and via PCM600 under IED Configuration/
Time.
1238
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 854:
Name
TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CoarseSyncSrc
Disabled
SPA
LON
SNTP
DNP
IEC103
Disabled
Coarse time synchronization source
FineSyncSource
Disabled
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
Disabled
Fine time synchronization source
SyncMaster
Disabled
SNTP-Server
Disabled
Activate IEDas synchronization master
TimeAdjustRate
Slow
Fast
Fast
Adjust rate for time synchronization
HWSyncSrc
Disabled
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS
Disabled
Hardware time synchronization source
AppSynch
NoSynch
Synch
NoSynch
Time synchronization mode for application
SyncAccLevel
Class T5 (1us)
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified
Unspecified
Wanted time synchronization accuracy
Table 855:
Name
BININPUT Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ModulePosition
3 - 16
Hardware position of IO module for time

synchronization
BinaryInput
1 - 16
Binary input number for time synchronization
BinDetection
PositiveEdge
NegativeEdge
PositiveEdge
Positive or negative edge detection
Technical manual
1239
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 856:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
SNTP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ServerIP-Add
0 - 255
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Server IP-address
RedServIP-Add
0 - 255
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Redundant server IP-address
Table 857:
Name
DST Enable
Table 858:
Name
DSTENABLE Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Enabled
Description
Enables or disables the use of Daylight Saving
Time
DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
March
Month in year when daylight time starts
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Day in week when daylight time starts
WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
Week in month when daylight time starts
UTCTimeOfDay
-24:00
-23:30
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00
1:00
UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time

starts
1240
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 859:
Name
DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
October
Month in year when daylight time ends
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Day in week when daylight time ends
WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
Week in month when daylight time ends
UTCTimeOfDay
-24:00
-23:30
...
-00:30
00:00
00:30
...
48:00
1:00
UTC Time of day in hours when daylight time

ends
Technical manual
1241
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 860:
Name
TimeZone
Table 861:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
-12:00
-11:00
-10:00
-9:30
-9:00
-8:00
-7:00
-6:00
-5:00
-4:30
-4:00
-3:30
-3:00
-2:00
-1:00
0:00
1:00
2:00
3:00
3:30
4:00
4:30
5:00
5:30
5:45
6:00
6:30
7:00
8:00
8:45
9:00
9:30
10:00
10:30
11:00
11:30
12:00
12:45
13:00
14:00
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
1:00
Description
Local time from UTC
IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SynchType
BNC
Opto
Opto
Type of synchronization
TimeDomain
LocalTime
UTC
LocalTime
Time domain
Encoding
IRIG-B
1344
1344TZ
IRIG-B
Type of encoding
TimeZoneAs1344
MinusTZ
PlusTZ
PlusTZ
Time zone as in 1344 standard
1242
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
20.6.3
Operation principle
20.6.3.1
General concepts
Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time the
clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the time
gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to
compensate for them.
Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

The time system is based on software and hardware clocks that run independently from
each other. See figure 558
External
Synchronization
sources
Time tagging and general synchronisation
Off
LON
SPA
Min. pulse
GPS
SNTP
DNP
Communication
TimeRegulator
(Setting,
see
technical
reference
manual)
Events
Protection
and control
functions
SW-time
Connected when GPS-time is
used for differential protection
IRIG-B
PPS
Off
GPS
IRIG-B
TimeRegulator
(fast or slow)
PPS
Synchronization for differential protection

(ECHO-mode or GPS)
HW-time
A/D
converter
Diff.communication
Transducers*
*IEC 61850-9-2
IEC08000287 V2 EN
Figure 558:
Design of the time system (clock synchronization)
All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When, for example, a status signal is
changed in the protection system of a function based on the free running hardware clock,
Technical manual
1243
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
the event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the event recorder. The
hardware clock can thus run independently.
The echo mode of differential protection is based on the hardware clock. Thus, there is no
need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.
The synchronization of the hardware clock to the software clock is necessary only when
GPS or IRIG B 00X with optical fibre, IEEE 1344 is used for differential protection. The
two clock systems are synchronized by a special clock synchronization unit with two
modes, fast and slow. A special feature, an automatic fast clock time regulator is used. The
automatic fast mode makes the synchronization time as short as possible during pickup or
at interruptions/disturbances in the GPS timing. The fast and slow settings are also
available on the local HMI.
The hardware and software clocks are not synchronized if a GPS clock is used.
Fast clock synchronization mode

At start-up and after interruptions in the GPS or IRIG B time signals, the deviation
between the GPS time and the internal differential time system can be substantial. A new
start-up is also required, for example, after maintenance of the auxiliary voltage system.
When the time difference is >16s, the differential function is blocked and the time
regulator for the hardware clock automatically uses a fast mode to synchronize the clock
systems. The time adjustment is made with an exponential function, that is, with big time
adjustment steps in the beginning, and then smaller steps until a time deviation between
the GPS time and the differential time system of <16s has been reached. The differential
function is then enabled and the synchronization remains in fast mode or switches to slow
mode depending on the setting.
Slow clock synchronization mode

During normal service, a setting with slow synchronization mode is used. This prevents
the hardware clock to make too big time steps, >16s, emanating from the differential
protection requirement of correct timing.
Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A
function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.
1244
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Synchronization from
a higher level
Function
Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level
IEC09000342 V1 EN
Figure 559:
Synchronization principle
A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization

messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the synchronization
decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of synchronization, with
different maximum errors. This gives the function the possibility to choose the source with
the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock based on this source. The maximum error
of a clock can be defined as:
20.6.3.2
The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

The time since the last used synchronization message
The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.
Real-time clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The clock
has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.
Real-time clock at power off

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time clock
that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the time
in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time the time will
be lost completely.
Real-time clock at startup

Time synchronization startup procedure
The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON, SNTP and GPS) gives
an accurate time to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of the three following
Technical manual
1245
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
conditions happens with each of the coming synchronization messages configured as

FineSynchSource:
If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an offset
compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for
synchronization, which means, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at
the next coming time message.
If the synchronization message has a large offset compared to the other messages, a
spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
If the synchronization message has a large offset and the following message also has
a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the synchronization
message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 500 milliseconds. If the offset is
more than the threshold, the clock jumps a whole number of seconds so the remaining
offset is less than 500ms. The remaining offset is then slowly adjusted with 1000 ppm
until the offset is removed. With an adjustment of 1000ppm it takes 500 seconds to
remove an offset of 500 milliseconds.
Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the
time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and only
an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.
Rate accuracy
The Rate accuracy is the accuracy of the internal clock while the external time signal is lost
(e.g. GPS lost). In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is
synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding
temperature is constant. It can take up to one hour after a cold start of the IED to reach to
a stable rate due to the normal warming-up procedure of the IED.
Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces have a time-out, and a configured interface must receive
time synchronization messages regularly in order not to give an error signal
(TSYNCERR) that is reported from the INTERRSIG function block. The time-out is such
that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more than one message
is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.
20.6.3.3
Synchronization alternatives
Four main alternatives of external synchronization sources are available. The
synchronization message is applied:
1246
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including date
and time
as a minute pulse connected to a binary input
via GPS
via IRIG-B or PPS
Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an IED
to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a reception
time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet network that
connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to operate properly, there
must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the same station. The SNTP
synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms accuracy for binary inputs. The
IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.
SNTP provides complete time-information and can be used as both fine and coarse time
synch source. However SNTP shall normally be used as fine synch only. The only reason
to use SNTP as coarse synch is in combination with PPS as fine source. The combination
SNTP as both fine and coarse source shall not be used.
SNTP server requirements
The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5
switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at
least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server
software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable
source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without
synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not
recommended.
Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are sent.
Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, that is,
year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.
The SLM module is located on the Numeric processing module (NUM).
Synchronization via Built-in-GPS

The built-in GPS clock modules receive and decode time information from the global
positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization Module
(GTM).
Technical manual
1247
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Synchronization via binary input

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be generated
from, for example station master clock. If the station master clock is not synchronized
from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the substation. Both
positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered as
a fine time synchronization signal.
The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED. The
electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.
If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation and
if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute pulse
generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute pulse
generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the IED.
The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As only
the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after the last
flank.
Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.
Pulse data:
Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.

Pulse length (b):
Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.

Maximum pulse length is optional.
Magnitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".
Deviations in the period time (a) larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.
a
b
c
en05000251.vsd
IEC05000251 V1 EN
Figure 560:
1248
Binary minute pulses
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute pulse
is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.
If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The next
minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.
If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses,
contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting the
system. If contact bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is less than 59950 ms
between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will not be
accepted.
Binary synchronization example
An IED is configured to use only binary input for time synchronization, and a valid binary
input is applied to a binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate
time, and the minute pulse is then used to synchronize the IED. Minute pulse means that
each pulse occurs one minute after the previous pulse, so the first pulse is not used at all.
The second pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will give
the IED a good time, and will reset the time so that the fourth pulse will occur on a minute
border. After the first three minutes, the time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is
set properly via the HMI or if the RTC backup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the
minute pulse is removed, for example, for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum
the error rate in the internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse is
automatically rejected. The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter.
The third pulse will set the time if the time offset is more than 500 ms or adjust the time
if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe
state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within
one minute.
Synchronization via IRIG-B module
IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local time
of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are transmitted
and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there are numbers stating if and how
the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.
To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic BNC
connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via the
galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic
interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a number in the range of
0-7.
00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B
module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz modulation is
used. In this case the information must go into the module via the BNC connector.
Technical manual
1249
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information
of the year. If the x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year,
and year information has to be set via PCM600 or local HMI.
The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B clocks,
as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is compatible with
IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the time-zone.
20.6.4
Technical data
Table 862:
Time synchronization, time tagging
Function
Value
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values
1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse

synchronization), events and sampled measurement values
1.0 ms typically
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement

values
1.0 ms typically
20.7
Parameter setting groups
20.7.1
Functionality
Use the six different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different power
system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either from the
local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can be
applied to a variety of power system scenarios.
20.7.2
Function block
ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1
GRP1
ACTGRP2
GRP2
ACTGRP3
GRP3
ACTGRP4
GRP4
ACTGRP5
GRP5
ACTGRP6
GRP6
GRP_CHGD
ANSI05000433 V2 EN
Figure 561:
1250
ActiveGroup function block
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
20.7.3
Signals
Table 863:
ACTVGRP Input signals
Name
Type
Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP3
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP4
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP5
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP6
BOOLEAN
ACTVGRP Output signals
Name
Table 865:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 864:
20.7.4
Default
ACTGRP1
Type
Description
GRP1
BOOLEAN
Setting group 1 is active
GRP2
BOOLEAN
GRP3
BOOLEAN
GRP4
BOOLEAN
GRP5
BOOLEAN
GRP6
BOOLEAN
GRP_CHGD
BOOLEAN
Pulse when setting changed
REMSETEN
BOOLEAN
Settings over IEC 61850 enabled
Settings
SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ActiveSetGrp
SettingGroup1
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6
SettingGroup1
Active setting group
MaxNoSetGrp
1-6
Max number of setting groups 1-6
20.7.5
Operation principle
Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these
Technical manual
1251
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
inputs changes the active setting group. Eight functional output signals are available for
configuration purposes, so that information on the active setting group is always available.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by activating
the corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block.
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary inputs
in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when adaptive
functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups must be either
permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order
setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group two
are set to be activated, group two will be the one activated.
Every time a setting is changed, the output signal GRP_CHGD is sending a pulse.
Activating or deactivating test mode is made by changing a parameter, consequently this
will also cause a pulse on the GRP_CHGD output.
The parameter MaxNoSetGrp defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between.
The output REMSETEN indicates whether setting changes over IEC61850 are enabled or
not. Per default, this is not enabled, which results in REMSETEN being at a logical low
level. If setting changes via IEC61850 are enabled, then REMSETEN will be a logical high.
The setting changes over IEC61850 is enabled with the setting EnableSettings in the
IEC61850-8-1 configuration under Main menu/Configuration/Communication/
Station communication/IEC61850-8-1/IEC61850-8-1. Please refer to documentation
for IEC61850 for further details.
Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of setting groups
selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will be shown on the
Parameter Setting Tool.
1252
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
ACTIVATE GROUP 1
+RL2
IOx-Bly1
IOx-Bly2
IOx-Bly3
IOx-Bly4
ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1
GRP1
ACTGRP2
GRP2
ACTGRP3
GRP3
ACTGRP4
GRP4
IOx-Bly5
ACTGRP5
GRP5
IOx-Bly6
ACTGRP6
GRP6
GRP_CHGD
ANSI05000119 V2 EN
Figure 562:
Connection of the function to external circuits
The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which group
that is active.
20.8
ChangeLock function CHNGLCK
20.8.1
Functionality
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to block
inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.
The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.
Technical manual
1253
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.8.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
CHNGLCK
LOCK*
ACTIVE
OVERRIDE
IEC09000946.vsd
IEC09000946 V2 EN
Figure 563:
20.8.3
Signals
Table 866:
Name
LOCK
Table 867:
Name
20.8.4
CHNGLCK function block
CHNGLCK Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Activate change lock
CHNGLCK Output signals

Type
Description
ACTIVE
BOOLEAN
Change lock active
OVERRIDE
BOOLEAN
Change lock override
Operation principle
The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.
The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state that
does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
1254
Monitoring
Reading events
Resetting events
Reading disturbance data
Clear disturbances
Reset LEDs
Reset counters and other runtime component states
Control operations
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Set system time

Enter and exit from test mode
Change of active setting group
The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input
Function
Activated
Deactivated
20.9
Test mode functionality TEST
20.9.1
Functionality
When entering IED test mode there is an option to block all functions. Active test mode
is indicated by a flashing yellow Pickup LED on the LHMI. After that, it is possible to
unblock arbitrarily selected functions from the LHMI to perform required tests.
When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed (except for functions that have
their block input active), and the IED resumes normal operation. However, if during
TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later restored, the IED will remain in
TESTMODE with the same protection functions blocked or unblocked as before the
power was removed. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values
within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus mistakes are avoided.
Forcing of binary input and output signals is only possible when the IED is in IED test
mode.
20.9.2
Function block
TESTMODE
IED_TEST
TEST
IED_TEST
BLOCK
NOEVENT
INPUT
SETTING
IEC61850
IEC09000219 V2 EN
Figure 564:
TESTMODE function block
Technical manual
1255
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.9.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Signals
Table 868:
TESTMODE Input signals
Name
Type
IED_TEST
BOOLEAN
Table 869:
Table 870:
Name
Description
Activate IED test mode
TESTMODE Output signals
Name
20.9.4
Default
Type
Description
TEST
BOOLEAN
In test via IED TEST or via LD0 Mode
IED_TEST
BOOLEAN
IED test mode is active
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Active when LD0 is blocked or test blocked
NOEVENT
BOOLEAN
Event disabled during test mode
INPUT
BOOLEAN
IED TEST input is active
SETTING
BOOLEAN
IED test mode setting is On
IEC61850
BOOLEAN
Active when LD0 Mode is in Blocked, Test or Test

blocked
Settings
TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IEDTestMode
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Activate IED Test mode
EventDisable
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Event disable during test mode
BlockAllFunc
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Block all functions when entering IED test

mode
CmdTestEd1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Require test bit in command at test mode (only

for IEC61850 Ed1)
20.9.5
Operation principle
Set the IED in test mode by
1256
configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

setting TestMode to Enabled in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test
mode.
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is
activated. The other outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the
"Test mode: Enabled" state input from configuration (OUTPUT signal is activated) or
setting from local HMI (SETTING signal is activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow Pickup LED will flash and all functions can be
blocked depending on the configuration of the testmode component. Any function can be
unblocked individually regarding functionality and event signalling.
The functions will be blocked next time if the testmode component is configured to block
components upon puting the IED into testmode.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no
outputs will be activated.
If the IED is restarted while set to IED testmode by a binary input all
functions will be temporarily unblocked during startup, which might
cause unwanted operations.
The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when a
test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30)
or an FT switch finger can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the
TESTMODE function block.
Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to
prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a
commissioning or maintenance test.
20.10
IED identifiers
20.10.1
Functionality
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in
the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.
Technical manual
1257
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.10.2
Table 871:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Settings
TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
StationName
0 - 18
Station name
Station name
StationNumber
0 - 99999
Station number
ObjectName
0 - 18
Object name
Object name
ObjectNumber
0 - 99999
Object number
UnitName
0 - 18
Unit name
Unit name
UnitNumber
0 - 99999
Unit number
IEDMainFunType
0 - 255
IED main function type for IEC60870-5-103
TechnicalKey
0 - 16
AA0B0Q0A0
Technical key (part 1)
0 - 16
0 - 16
0 - 16
20.11
Product information
20.11.1
Functionality
The Product identifiers function contains constant data (i.e. not possible to change) that
uniquely identifies the IED:
ProductVer
ProductDef
FirmwareVer
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
IEDProdType
The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
Product identifiersand underMain menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/IED identifiers
This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (e.g. during
repair and maintenance).
1258
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
20.11.2
Settings
20.11.3
Factory defined settings

The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very
helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different
Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be
changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local
HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers
The following identifiers are available:
IEDProdType
ProductDef
Describes the product version. Example: 2.1.0

1
is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the product
is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new hardware
added to the product
is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware is either
changed or enhanced in the product
IEDMainFunType
Describes the firmware version.

The firmware version can be checked from Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers
Firmware version numbers run independently from the release production
numbers. For every release number there can be one or more firmware versions
depending on the small issues corrected in between releases.
ProductVer
Describes the release number from the production. Example: 2.1.0
FirmwareVer
Describes the type of the IED. Example: REL670
Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128

(meaning line protection).
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
Technical manual
1259
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
20.12
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI
20.12.1
Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the
application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought in for one IED
configuration.
20.12.2
Function block
SMBI
^VIN1
^VIN2
^VIN3
^VIN4
^VIN5
^VIN6
^VIN7
^VIN8
^VIN9
^VIN10
^BI1
^BI2
^BI3
^BI4
^BI5
^BI6
^BI7
^BI8
^BI9
^BI10
IEC05000434 V2 EN
Figure 565:
20.12.3
Signals
Table 872:
Name
1260
SMBI function block
SMBI Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BI1
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
BI2
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
BI3
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
BI4
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
BI5
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
BI6
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
BI7
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
BI8
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
BI9
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
BI10
BOOLEAN
SMT Connect input
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 873:
SMBI Output signals
Name
20.12.4
Type
Description
BI1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
BI2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
BI3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
BI4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
BI5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
BI6
BOOLEAN
Binary input 6
BI7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
BI8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
BI9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
BI10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
Operation principle
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 565, receives its inputs
from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and makes them
available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to BI10. The inputs and
outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given a user defined name. These names will
be represented in SMT as information which signals shall be connected between physical
IO and SMBI function. The input/output user defined name will also appear on the
respective output/input signal.
20.13
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO
20.13.1
Functionality
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see the
application manual to get information about how binary inputs are sent from one IED
configuration.
Technical manual
1261
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.13.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Function block
SMBO
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10
^BO1
^BO2
^BO3
^BO4
^BO5
^BO6
^BO7
^BO8
^BO9
^BO10
IEC05000439 V2 EN
Figure 566:
20.13.3
Signals
Table 874:
Name
20.13.4
SMBO function block
SMBO Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BO1
BOOLEAN
Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO2
BOOLEAN
BO3
BOOLEAN
BO4
BOOLEAN
BO5
BOOLEAN
BO6
BOOLEAN
BO7
BOOLEAN
BO8
BOOLEAN
BO9
BOOLEAN
BO10
BOOLEAN
Operation principle
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 566, receives logical
signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via
the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). The inputs in SMBO are BO1 to BO10 and they, as well
as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT as
information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBO.
20.14
1262
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
20.14.1
Functionality
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). See the
Application Manual for information about how milliamp (mA) inputs from external
transducers are physically connected to the MIM board inputs used in an IED. Via the
SMMI, the signals are brought into the IED configuration, for example, to the input for
ambient temperature compensation of the thermal overload function when there is a need
for ambient temperature compensation in the thermal function.
20.14.2
Function block
SMMI
ÂI1
ÂI2
ÂI3
ÂI4
ÂI5
ÂI6
ÂI1
ÂI2
ÂI3
ÂI4
ÂI5
ÂI6
IEC05000440.vsd
IEC05000440 V3 EN
Figure 567:
20.14.3
SMMI function block
Signals
Table 875:
Name
SMMI Input signals

Type
Default
Description
AI1
REAL
SMT connected milliampere input
AI2
REAL
AI3
REAL
AI4
REAL
AI5
REAL
AI6
REAL
Table 876:
Name
SMMI Output signals

Type
Description
AI1
REAL
Analog milliampere input 1
AI2
REAL
AI3
REAL
AI4
REAL
AI5
REAL
AI6
REAL
Technical manual
1263
Section 20
Basic IED functions
20.14.4
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Operation principle
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function, see figure 567, receives its inputs from
the real (hardware) mA inputs (the MIM boards) via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and
makes them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named AI1 to
AI6. The inputs, outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given user-defined names
which will be represented in SMT and ACT.
The outputs on SMMI can also be connected to the IEC61850 generic communication I/
O functions (MVGAPC) for further use of the mA signals elsewhere in a substation
system.
20.15
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI
20.15.1
Functionality
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function block,
analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and calculates all
relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase angle, frequency, true
RMS value, harmonics, sequence components and so on. This information is then used by
the respective functions connected to this SMAI block in ACT (for example protection,
measurement or monitoring functions).
20.15.2
Function block
SMAI1
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
REVROT
^GRP1_A
^GRP1_B
^GRP1_C
^GRP1_N
SPFCOUT
G1AI3P
G1AI1
G1AI2
G1AI3
G1AI4
G1N
ANSI14000027 V1 EN
Figure 568:
SMAI1 function block
Figure 568 is an example of SMAI1:n in each of the three task time groups 1, 2 or 3 where:
1264
n=112 in task group 1

Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The task time defines the execution repetition rate, and is 1, 3 or 8 ms respectively for the
three task time groups.
SMAI2
BLOCK
REVROT
^GRP2_A
^GRP2_B
^GRP2_C
^GRP2_N
G2AI3P
G2AI1
G2AI2
G2AI3
G2AI4
G2N
ANSI14000028 V1 EN
Figure 569:
SMAI2 function block
Figure 569 is an example of SMAI2:n to SMAI12:m in each of the three task time groups
1, 2 or 3 where:
n=2 and m=12 in task group 1

The task time defines the execution repetition rate, and is 3, 8 or 1 ms respectively for the
three task time groups.
20.15.3
Signals
Table 877:
Name
SMAI1 Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block group 1
DFTSPFC
REAL
20.0
Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT

calculation
REVROT
BOOLEAN
Reverse rotation group 1
GRP1_A
STRING
First analog input used for phase A or AB quantity
GRP1_B
STRING
Second analog input used for phase B or BC quantity
GRP1_C
STRING
Third analog input used for phase C or CA quantity
GRP1_N
STRING
Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity
Table 878:
Name
SMAI1 Output signals

Type
Description
SPFCOUT
REAL
Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal

DFT reference function
G1AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
G1AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
Group 1 analog input 1
G1AI2
GROUP SIGNAL

Technical manual
1265
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Description
GROUP SIGNAL
G1AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
G1N
GROUP SIGNAL
Group parameter for residual sample
Table 879:
Name
SMAI2 Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block group 2
REVROT
BOOLEAN
Reverse rotation group 2
GRP2_A
STRING
First analog input used for phase A or AB quantity
GRP2_B
STRING
Second analog input used for phase B or BC quantity
GRP2_C
STRING
Third analog input used for phase C or CA quantity
GRP2_N
STRING
Fourth analog input used for residual or neutral quantity
Table 880:
Name
20.15.4
Type
G1AI3
SMAI2 Output signals

Type
Description
G2AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
G2AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
G2AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
G2AI3
GROUP SIGNAL
G2AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
G2N
GROUP SIGNAL
Group parameter for residual sample
Settings
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value
InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal frequency
DFT reference is then the reference.
1266
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 881:
Name
SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
DFTRefExtOut
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference for external output
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
Input connection type
AnalogInputType
Voltage
Current
Voltage
Analog input signal type
Table 882:
Name
SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Negation
Disabled
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Disabled
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
Limit for frequency calculation in % of VBase
Technical manual
1267
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 883:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
Input connection type
AnalogInputType
Voltage
Current
Voltage
Analog input signal type
Table 884:
Name
SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Negation
Disabled
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Disabled
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
Limit for frequency calculation in % of VBase
20.15.5
Operation principle
Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog signals
(three phases and one neutral or residual value), either voltage or current, see figure 568
and figure 569. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog
signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. 244
values in total). The BLOCK input will force all outputs to value zero.
System phase rotation and frequency are defined using the PhaseRotation and Frequency
settings in the primary system values PRIMVAL function. Logic 1 in the REVROT input
to the SMAI function means that the phase rotation is changed relative to the set
PhaseRotation in PRIMVAL.
The output signal AI1 to AI4 are direct output of the, in SMT, connected input to GRPx_A,
GRPxB, GRPxC and GRPx_N, x=1-12. AIN is always calculated residual sum from the
1268
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
first three inputs. A3P is grouped, three-phase information containing all relevant
information about four connected inputs. Note that all other functions, with a few
exceptions, use this output in configuration. Note that the SMAI function will always
calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if the input GRPxN is not connected in SMT.
Applications with a few exceptions shall always be connected to AI3P.
20.15.5.1
Frequency values
The SMAI function includes a functionality based on the level of positive sequence
voltage, MinValFreqMeas, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If the
positive sequence voltage is lower than MinValFreqMeas, the function freezes the
frequency output value for 500 ms and after that the frequency output is set to the nominal
value. A signal is available for the SMAI function to prevent operation due to non-valid
frequency values. MinValFreqMeas is set as % of VBase/3
If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, at least two of the inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B
and GRPx_C, where 1x12, must be connected in order to calculate the positive
sequence voltage. Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as follows:
A-B to GRPxA, B-C to GRPxB, C-A to GRPxC. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is PhN, all three inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and GRPx_C must be connected in order to
calculate the positive sequence voltage.
If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph,
the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and
GRPx_C to the same voltage input as shown in figure 570 to make SMAI calculate a
positive sequence voltage.
SMAI1
VAB
TRM_40.CH7(U)
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
REVROT
PHASEA
^GRP1_A
PHASEB
^GRP1_B
PHASEC
^GRP1_C
NEUTRAL
^GRP1_N
SPFCOUT
G1AI3P
G1AI1
G1AI2
G1AI4
SAPTOF
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
TRIP
PICK UP
BLKDMAGN
FREQ
SAPTOF(1)_TRIP
G1N
ANSI10000060 V1 EN
Figure 570:
Connection example
The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting

ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-ground voltage is available,
the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI ConnectionType
setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be accounted for when setting
MinValFreqMeas. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N and the same
Technical manual
1269
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
voltage is connected to all three SMAI inputs, the positive sequence

voltage will be zero and the frequency functions will not work properly.
The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used for
Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF, 81), Underfrequency protection
(SAPTUF, 81) and Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81)
due to that all other information except frequency and positive sequence
voltage might be wrongly calculated.
The same phase-phase voltage connection principle shall be used for frequency tracking
master SMAI block in pump-storage power plant applications when swapping of positive
and negative sequence voltages happens during generator/motor mode of operation.
20.16
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM
20.16.1
Functionality
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of threephase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.
20.16.2
Function block
3PHSUM
BLOCK
REVROT
^G1AI3P*
^G2AI3P*
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
IEC05000441 V3 EN
Figure 571:
1270
3PHSUM function block
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
20.16.3
Signals
Table 885:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block
BLKGR1
BOOLEAN
Block input for group 1
BLKGR2
BOOLEAN
Block input for group 2
REVROT
BOOLEAN
Reverse rotation
G1AI3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group 1 three phase analog input from first SMAI
G2AI3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Group 2 three phase analog input from second SMAI
Table 886:
Name
20.16.4
3PHSUM Input signals
3PHSUM Output signals

Type
Description
SPFCOUT
REAL
Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal

DFT reference function
AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
Linear combination of two connected three phase inputs
AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
Linear combination of input 1 signals from both SMAI

blocks
AI2
GROUP SIGNAL

blocks
AI3
GROUP SIGNAL

blocks
AI4
GROUP SIGNAL

blocks
Settings
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value
InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.
Technical manual
1271
Section 20
Basic IED functions
Table 887:
Name
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1 - 12

groups
SummationType
Group1+Group2
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
Group1+Group2
Summation type
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
DFTRefExtOut
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference for external output
Table 888:
Name
FreqMeasMinVal
20.16.5
3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
5 - 200
Unit
%
Step
1
Default
10
Description
Amplitude limit for frequency calculation in % of
UBase
Operation principle
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal matrix
for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset all the
outputs of the function to 0.
20.17
Global base values GBASVAL
20.17.1
Identification
20.17.2
IEC 61850
identification
Global base values
GBASVAL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common for
all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values for
current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have twelve different sets.
1272
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of base
values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single point
for updating values when necessary.
Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out of
the twelve sets of GBASVAL functions.
20.17.3
Table 889:
Name
Settings
GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
VBase
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
Description
Global base voltage
IBase
1 - 99999
3000
Global base current
SBase
1.00 - 200000.00
MVA
0.05
2000.00
Global base apparent power
20.18
Primary system values PRIMVAL
20.18.1
Identification
IEC 61850
identification
Primary system values
20.18.2
PRIMVAL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The rated system frequency and phase rotation direction are set under Main menu/
Configuration/ Power system/ Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600
parameter setting tree.
20.18.3
Table 890:
Name
Settings
PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Frequency
50.0 - 60.0
Hz
10.0
50.0
Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation
Normal=ABC
Inverse=ACB
Normal=ABC
System phase rotation
Technical manual
1273
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
20.19
Denial of service DOS
20.19.1
Functionality
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) are
designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The
communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of
the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network
loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of
malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.
20.19.2
Function blocks
DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000749 V1 EN
Figure 572:
DOSFRNT function block
DOSLANAB
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC13000308 V1 EN
Figure 573:
DOSLANAB function block
DOSLANCD
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC13000309 V1 EN
Figure 574:
20.19.3
Signals
Table 891:
Name
1274
DOSLANCD function block
DOSFRNT Output signals

Type
Description
LINKUP
BOOLEAN
Ethernet link status
WARNING
BOOLEAN
Frame rate is higher than normal state
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Frame rate is higher than throttle state
Technical manual
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 892:
Name
Type
Description
LINKUP
BOOLEAN
WARNING
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Table 893:
Name
20.19.4
DOSLANAB Output signals
DOSLANCD Output signals

Type
Description
LINKUP
BOOLEAN
WARNING
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Settings
20.19.5
Monitored data
Table 894:
Name
DOSFRNT Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
State
INTEGER
0=Off
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Frame rate control state
Quota
INTEGER
Quota level in percent 0-100
Table 895:
Name
DOSLANAB Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
DoSStatus
INTEGER
0=Off
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota
INTEGER
Technical manual
1275
Section 20
Basic IED functions
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 896:
Name
20.19.6
DOSLANCD Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
DoSStatus
INTEGER
0=Off
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota
INTEGER
Operation principle
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSLANAB and DOSLANCD) measures
the IED load from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs
control and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following
outputs:
1276
LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status

WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 21
IED hardware
21.1
Overview
21.1.1
Variants of case size with local HMI display
ANSI04000458-2-en.psd
ANSI04000458 V2 EN
Figure 575:
1/2 19 case with local HMI display.
Technical manual
1277
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
ANSI05000762-2-en.psd
ANSI05000762 V2 EN
Figure 576:
ANSI04000460 -2-en.psd
ANSI04000460 V2 EN
Figure 577:
1278
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.1.2
Table 897:
Case from the rear side

Designations for 1/2 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11
BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or

MIM
X31 and X32 etc. to X51

and X52
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or GTM
X312, X313
TRM
X401
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
Technical manual
1279
Section 21
IED hardware
Table 898:
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11

MIM
X31 and X32 etc. to

X101 and X102
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM
X312, X313
TRM
X401
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
1280
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 899:
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11

MIM
X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and

X72
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or GTM
X312, X313, X322, X323
TRM 1
X401
TRM 2
X411
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
Technical manual
1281
Section 21
IED hardware
Table 900:
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11
BIM, BOM, SOM,

IOM or MIM

X162
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or
RS485
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM,RS485 or
GTM
X312, X313
TRM
X401
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
1282
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 901:
Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slots
Module
Rear Positions
PSM
X11
BIM, BOM, SOM,

IOM or MIM

X132
SLM
X301:A, B, C, D
LDCM, IRIG-B or
RS485
X302
LDCM or RS485
X303
OEM
X311:A, B, C, D
LDCM, RS485 or
GTM
X312, X313, X322, X323
TRM 1
X401
TRM 2
X411
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V.3 EN
1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V3 EN
Technical manual
1283
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.2
Hardware modules
21.2.1
Overview
Table 902:
Basic modules
Module
Description
Power supply module (PSM)
Including a regulated DC/DC converter that supplies

auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.
Numerical module (NUM)
Module for overall application control. All information is

processed or passed through this module, such as
configuration, settings and communication.
Local Human machine interface (LHMI)
The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push button

keyboard and an ethernet connector used to connect a
PC to the IED.
Transformer input module (TRM)
Transformer module that galvanically separates the

internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has 12
analog inputs.
Analog digital conversion module (ADM)
Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.
Table 903:
Application specific modules
Module
1284
An internal fail alarm output is available.
Description
Binary input module (BIM)
Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs
Binary output module (BOM)
Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole

command outputs including supervision function
Binary I/O module (IOM)
Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10 outputs

and 2 fast signalling outputs.
Line data communication modules (LDCM), short

range, medium range ,long range,X21
Modules used for digital communication to remote

terminal.
Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103

communication modules (SLM)
Used for SPA/LON/IEC 608705103 communication
Optical ethernet module (OEM)
PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.
mA input module (MIM)
Analog input module with 6 independent, galvanically

separated channels.
GPS time synchronization module (GSM)
Used to provide the IED with GPS time synchronization.
IRIG-B Time synchronization module (IRIG-B)
Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling both

pulse-width modulated signals and amplitude
modulated signals and one is used for optical input type
ST for PPS time synchronization.
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.2.2
Numeric processing module (NUM)
21.2.2.1
Introduction
The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection
functions and logic.
For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high speed
serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is the compact
PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and receives interrupts.
21.2.2.2
Functionality
The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, compact-PCI CPU
module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the backplane is via two compact
PCI connectors and an euro connector.
The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP slots onto
which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.
To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one internal
PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI accesses
through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.
The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash file
system.
The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of the
real time clock.
No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power dissipation.
Technical manual
1285
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.2.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Block diagram
Compact
Flash
Logic
PMC
connector
Memory
Ethernet
UBM
connector
PC-MIP
PCI-PCIbridge
Backplane
connector
North
bridge
CPU
en04000473.vsd
IEC04000473 V1 EN
Figure 578:
Numeric processing module block diagram
21.2.3
Power supply module (PSM)
21.2.3.1
Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full isolation
between the IED and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is available.
1286
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.2.3.2
Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC input
voltage ranges see table 904. The power supply module contains a built-in, self-regulated
DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the external battery
system.
Connection diagram
IEC08000476 V2 EN
Figure 579:
21.2.3.3
PSM Connection diagram.
Technical data
Table 904:
PSM - Power supply module
Quantity
21.2.4
Rated value
Nominal range
Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input)
EL = (24 - 60) V
EL = (90 - 250) V
EL 20%
EL 20%
Power consumption
50 W typically
Auxiliary DC power in-rush
< 10 A during 0.1 s
Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)

Refer to section "" for information.
21.2.5
Transformer input module (TRM)
21.2.5.1
Introduction
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and adapt the secondary
currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module has twelve
inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs. Either protection class or
metering class CT inputs are available.
Technical manual
1287
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.
21.2.5.2
Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the
module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers.
Basic versions:
6 current channels and 6 voltage channels

12 current channels
6 current channels
The rated values and channel type, measurement or protection, of the current inputs are
selected at order.
Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with current
transformers intended for protection purposes, due to limitations in
overload characteristics.
The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for analog
inputs SMAI".
1288
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC08000479 V2 EN
Figure 580:
21.2.5.3
TRM connection diagram
Technical data
Table 905:
TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer modules
Quantity
Rated value
Current
In = 1 or 5 A
Operative range
(0-100) x In
Permissive overload
4 In cont.
100 In for 1 s *)
Burden
< 150 mVA at In = 5 A

< 20 mVA at In = 1 A
Ac voltage
Vn = 120 V
Operative range
(0340) V
Permissive overload
420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Nominal range
(0.2-40) In
0.5288 V
Technical manual
1289
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Quantity
Rated value
Burden
< 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency
fn = 60/50 Hz
*)
Nominal range
5%
max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.
Table 906:
TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer modules
Quantity
Rated value
Current
In = 1 or 5 A
Permissive overload
1.1 In cont.
Burden
< 350 mVA at In = 5 A

< 200 mVA at In = 1 A
Ac voltage
Vn = 120 V
Operative range
(0340) V
Permissive overload
420 V cont.
450 V 10 s
Burden
< 20 mVA at 110 V
Frequency
fn = 60/50 Hz
Nominal range
(0-1.8) In at In = 1 A
(0-1.6) In at In = 5 A
0.5288 V
5%
21.2.6

(ADM)
21.2.6.1
Introduction
The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC slot. The
PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards according to table
907. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board.
Table 907:
PC-MIP cards
PC-MIP cards and PMC cards

PMC cards
LDCM
SLM
LR-LDCM
OEM 1 ch
MR-LDCM
OEM 2 ch
X21-LDCM
IRIG-B
RS485
1290
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.2.6.2
Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the
transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic voltage
level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate A\D channels
are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is obtained with a 16
bit A\D converter.
Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency
and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and are
reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency and 1,2
kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
Technical manual
1291
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
AD1
AD2
1.2v
AD3
AD4
PMC
level shift
PC-MIP
2.5v
PCI to PCI
PC-MIP
en05000474.vsd
IEC05000474 V1 EN
Figure 581:
1292
The ADM layout
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.2.7
Binary input module (BIM)
21.2.7.1
Introduction
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two versions,
one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs to be used
with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable and can be
used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in
the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables extensive
monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.
21.2.7.2
Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level of
the binary input is selected at order.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBI".
A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a hysteresis
function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it possible to use
the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery supply
ground faults, see figure 582 The figure shows the typical operating characteristics of the
binary inputs of the four voltage levels.
The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand
disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required. Inputs are
debounced by software.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.
Technical manual
1293
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
[V]
300
176
144
88
72
38
32
19
17
24/30V
48/60V
110/125V
220/250V
xx99000517-2_ansi.vsd
ANSI99000517 V2 EN
Figure 582:
Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

Operation
Operation uncertain
No operation
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN
This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM).
The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is shown
in figure 583 and 584.
1294
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
[mA]
50
55
[ms]
en07000104-3.vsd
IEC07000104 V3 EN
Figure 583:
Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of BIM.
[mA]
50
5.5
[ms]
en07000105-1.vsd
IEC07000105 V2 EN
Figure 584:
Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities.
Technical manual
1295
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC99000503 V3 EN
Figure 585:
21.2.7.3
Connection diagram
Signals
Table 908:
Name
BIM Output signals

Type
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
Binary input module status
BI1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
BI2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
BI3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
1296
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
21.2.7.4
Table 909:
Name
Type
Description
BI4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
BI5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
BI6
BOOLEAN
Binary input 6
BI7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
BI8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
BI9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
BI10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
BI11
BOOLEAN
Binary input 11
BI12
BOOLEAN
Binary input 12
BI13
BOOLEAN
Binary input 13
BI14
BOOLEAN
Binary input 14
BI15
BOOLEAN
Binary input 15
BI16
BOOLEAN
Binary input 16
Settings
BIM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
DebounceTime
0.001 - 0.020
0.001
0.001
OscBlock
1 - 40
Hz
40
OscRelease
1 - 30
Hz
30
21.2.7.5
Monitored data
Table 910:
Name
STATUS
BIM Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Technical manual
Unit
-
Description
Binary input module status
1297
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.7.6
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 911:
BIM - Binary input module
Quantity
Rated value
Nominal range
Binary inputs
16
DC voltage, RL
24/30 V
48/60 V
125 V
220/250 V
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V, 50mA
48/60 V, 50mA
125 V, 50mA
220/250 V, 50mA
220/250 V, 110mA
max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input
max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency
10 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator
Blocking settable 140 Hz

Release settable 130 Hz
Debounce filter
Settable 120ms
Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously

with influencing factors within nominal range.
Table 912:
BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity
1298
Rated value
Nominal range
Binary inputs
16
DC voltage, RL
24/30 V
48/60 V
125 V
220/250 V
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V
48/60 V
125 V
220/250 V
max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input
10 pulses/s max
Balanced counter input frequency
40 pulses/s max
Blocking settable 140 Hz

Release settable 130 Hz
Debounce filter
Settable 1-20 ms
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A

21.2.8
Binary output modules (BOM)
21.2.8.1
Introduction
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output or
any signaling purpose.
21.2.8.2
Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair of
relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 586. This should be
considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the back of the IED.
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker trip
and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker auxiliary
contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is required.
For configuration of the output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMBO".
Output module
3
ANSI_xx00000299.vsd
ANSI00000299 V1 EN
Figure 586:
Relay pair example
1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2
Technical manual
1299
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC99000505 V3 EN
Figure 587:
21.2.8.3
Connection diagram
Signals
Table 913:
Name
BOM Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block binary outputs
BO1
BOOLEAN
Binary output 1
BO2
BOOLEAN
Binary output 2
BO3
BOOLEAN
Binary output 3
BO4
BOOLEAN
Binary output 4
BO5
BOOLEAN
Binary output 5
BO6
BOOLEAN
Binary output 6
BO7
BOOLEAN
Binary output 7
BO8
BOOLEAN
Binary output 8
BO9
BOOLEAN
Binary output 9

1300
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Binary output 10
BO11
BOOLEAN
Binary output 11
BO12
BOOLEAN
Binary output 12
BO13
BOOLEAN
Binary output 13
BO14
BOOLEAN
Binary output 14
BO15
BOOLEAN
Binary output 15
BO16
BOOLEAN
Binary output 16
BO17
BOOLEAN
Binary output 17
BO18
BOOLEAN
Binary output 18
BO19
BOOLEAN
Binary output 19
BO20
BOOLEAN
Binary output 20
BO21
BOOLEAN
Binary output 21
BO22
BOOLEAN
Binary output 22
BO23
BOOLEAN
Binary output 23
BO24
BOOLEAN
Binary output 24
BOM Output signals
Name
Type
STATUS
Table 915:
Name
Operation
21.2.8.5
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 914:
21.2.8.4
Default
BO10
Description
BOOLEAN
Binary output part of IOM module status
Settings
BOM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
Step
Default
Enabled
Description
Monitored data
Table 916:
Name
BOM Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
0=Ok
1=Error
Binary output part of IOM

module status
BO1VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
Binary output 1 value
BO1FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
Binary output 1 force

Technical manual
1301
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO1
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Binary output 1 status
BO2VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO2FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO2
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO3FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO3
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO4FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO4
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO5FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO5
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO6FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO6
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO7FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO7
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0

1302
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO8FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO8
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO9FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO9
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO10FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO10
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
nary output 11 value
BO11FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO11
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO12FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO12
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO13VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO13FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO13
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO14VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO14FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO14
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

Technical manual
1303
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO15VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO15FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO15
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO16VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO16FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO16
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO17VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
B017FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO17
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO18VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO18FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO18
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO19VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO19FORCE
BOOLEAN
1=Forced
0=Normal
BO19
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO20VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO20FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO20
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO21VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO21FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
1304
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
21.2.8.6
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO21
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO22VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO22FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO22
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO23VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO23FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO23
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO24VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO24FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
nary output 24 force
BO24
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Technical data
Table 917:
BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity
Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs
24
Max system voltage
250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min
1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity

Per relay, continuous
Per relay, 1 s
Per process connector pin, continuous
8A
10 A
12 A
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms

0.2 s
1.0 s
30 A
10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4
250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Technical manual
1305
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing

factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may be
activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms.
48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is possible
with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the temperature
rise will adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum two relays per
BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated continuously due to power
dissipation.
21.2.9
Static binary output module (SOM)
21.2.9.1
Introduction
The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output
relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.
21.2.9.2
Design
The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6
electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.
The SOM consists mainly of:
An MCU
A CAN-driver
6 static relays outputs
6 electromechanical relay outputs
A DC/DC converter
Connectors interfacing
CAN-bus to backplane CBM

IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)
The following parts are supervised:
1306
Interruption in relay coil

Short circuit of relay coil
Driver failure
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC09000974 V1 EN
Figure 588:
SOM Static output principle
1MRK002802-AB-13-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 589:
21.2.9.3
Connection diagram of the static output module
Signals
Table 918:
Name
SOM Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
BO1
BOOLEAN
Binary output 1
BO2
BOOLEAN
Binary output 2
BO3
BOOLEAN
Binary output 3
BO4
BOOLEAN
Binary output 4
BO5
BOOLEAN
Binary output 5
BO6
BOOLEAN
Binary output 6
BO7
BOOLEAN
Static binary output 7
BO8
BOOLEAN
BO9
BOOLEAN
BO10
BOOLEAN
BO11
BOOLEAN
BO12
BOOLEAN
Technical manual
1307
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 919:
SOM Output signals
Name
Type
STATUS
21.2.9.4
Table 920:
Name
Operation
21.2.9.5
Description
BOOLEAN
Static binary output module status
Settings
SOM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
Step
Default
Enabled
Description
Monitored data
Table 921:
Name
SOM Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
0=Ok
1=Error
Static binary output module

status
BO1VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO1FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO1
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO2FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO2
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO3FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO3
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO4FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
1308
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO4
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO5FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO5
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO6FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO6
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO7FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO7
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO8FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO8
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO9FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO9
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO10VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO10FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO10
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0

Technical manual
1309
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
21.2.9.6
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO11FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO11
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO12FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO12
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Technical data
Table 922:
SOM - Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs
Function of quantity
Static binary output trip
Rated voltage
48 - 60 VDC
110 - 250 VDC
Number of outputs
Impedance open state
~300 k
~810 k
Test voltage across open contact, 1

min
No galvanic separation
No galvanic separation
Continuous
5A
5A
1.0s
10A
10A
0.2s
30A
30A
1.0s
10A
10A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R

40ms
48V / 1A
110V / 0.4A
60V / 0.75A
125V / 0.35A
Current carrying capacity:
Making capacity at capacitive load

with the maximum capacitance of 0.2
F :
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A
Operating time
1310
<1ms
<1ms
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 923:
SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Electromechanical
relay outputs
Function of quantity
Trip and signal relays
Max system voltage
250V AC/DC
Number of outputs
1000V rms
Current carrying capacity:

Continuous
8A
1.0s
10A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum

capacitance of 0.2 F:
0.2s
30A
1.0s
10A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 40ms
48V / 1A
110V / 0.4A
125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A

dissipation.
21.2.10
Binary input/output module (IOM)
21.2.10.1
Introduction
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels are
needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signaling purpose.
The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where short operating
time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for required binary input
information.
Technical manual
1311
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.10.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Design
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with unprotected
contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the
disturbance immunity during normal protection trip times. This is achieved with a high
peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure 583. Inputs are
debounced by software.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery supply
ground faults, see figure 582.
The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.
The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays. One
of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are
connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other group
has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see figure 590.
The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay is
connected in parallel to the standard output relay.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to sections "Signal matrix for
binary inputs SMBI" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO".
The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.
1312
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC1MRK002801-AA11-UTAN-RAM V2 EN
IEC1MRK002802-AA-13 V1 EN
Figure 590:
Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds to

rear position X31, X41, and so on, and output contacts named XB to rear
position X32, X42, and so on
The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for example be
used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause excessive wear of
the contacts.
The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the binary
input/output module.
Technical manual
1313
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
xx04000069.vsd
IEC04000069 V1 EN
Figure 591:
21.2.10.3
IOM with MOV protection, relay example
Signals
Table 924:
Name
IOMIN Output signals

Type
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
Binary input part of IOM module status
BI1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
BI2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
BI3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
BI4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
BI5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
BI6
BOOLEAN
Binary input 6
BI7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
BI8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
Table 925:
Name
IOMOUT Input signals

Type
Default
Description
BLKOUT
BOOLEAN
BO1
BOOLEAN
Binary output 1
BO2
BOOLEAN
Binary output 2
BO3
BOOLEAN
Binary output 3
BO4
BOOLEAN
Binary output 4
BO5
BOOLEAN
Binary output 5
BO6
BOOLEAN
Binary output 6
BO7
BOOLEAN
Binary output 7
BO8
BOOLEAN
Binary output 8
BO9
BOOLEAN
Binary output 9
1314
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
21.2.10.4
Table 926:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BO10
BOOLEAN
Binary output 10
BO11
BOOLEAN
Binary output 11
BO12
BOOLEAN
Binary output 12
Settings
IOMIN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Binary input/output module in operation (On) or

not (Off)
DebounceTime
0.001 - 0.020
0.001
0.001
OscBlock
1 - 40
Hz
40
OscRelease
1 - 30
Hz
30
21.2.10.5
Monitored data
Table 927:
Name
STATUS
Table 928:
Name
IOMIN Monitored data

Type
BOOLEAN
Values (Range)
0=Ok
1=Error
Unit
-
Description
Binary input part of IOM
module status
IOMOUT Monitored data

Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO1VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO1FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO1
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO2VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO2FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO2
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO3VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
Technical manual
1315
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO3FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO3
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO4VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO4FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO4
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO5VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO5FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO5
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO6VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO6FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO6
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO7VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO7FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO7
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO8VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO8FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO8
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO9VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO9FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO9
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked

1316
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
21.2.10.6
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
BO10VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO10FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO10
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO11VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO11FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO11
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
BO12VALUE
BOOLEAN
1=1
0=0
BO12FORCE
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
BO12
BOOLEAN
0=Normal
1=Forced
2=Blocked
Technical data
Table 929:
IOM - Binary input/output module
Quantity
Rated value
Nominal range
Binary inputs
DC voltage, RL
24/30 V
48/60 V
125 V
220/250 V
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
Power consumption
24/30 V, 50 mA
48/60 V, 50 mA
125 V, 50 mA
220/250 V, 50 mA
220/250 V, 110 mA
max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input
max. 0.5 W/input
10 pulses/s max
Blocking settable 1-40 Hz

Release settable 1-30 Hz
Debounce filter
Settable 1-20 ms
Technical manual
1317
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A

Table 930:
IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Trip and signal relays
Fast signal relays (parallel reed

relay)
Binary outputs
10
Max system voltage
250 V AC, DC
250 V DC
1000 V rms
800 V DC

Per relay, 1 s
Per process connector pin, continuous
8A
10 A
12 A
8A
10 A
12 A
30 A
10 A
0.4 A
0.4 A
0.2 s
1.0 s
30 A
10 A
220250 V/0.4 A
110125 V/0.4 A
4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos > 0.4
250 V/8.0 A
250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40

ms
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load
10 nF
Making capacity at inductive load with

L/R>10 ms
0.2 s
1.0 s
Making capacity at resistive load

dissipation.
1318
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 931:
IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA - contact data (reference standard: IEC
61810-2)
Trip and Signal relays
Fast signal relays (parallel reed

relay)
Binary outputs
IOM: 10
IOM: 2
Max system voltage
250 V AC, DC
250 V DC
Test voltage across open contact,

1 min
250 V rms
250 V rms
8A
10 A
12 A
8A
10 A
12 A
30 A
10 A
0.4 A
0.4 A
0.2 s
1.0 s
30 A
10 A
220250 V/0.4 A
110125 V/0.4 A
4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos

j>0.4
250 V/8.0 A
250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R

< 40 ms
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load
10 nF

Per relay, 1 s
Per process connector pin,
continuous
Making capacity at inductive
loadwith L/R>10 ms
0.2 s
1.0 s
Making capacity at resistive load

dissipation.
Technical manual
1319
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.2.11
mA input module (MIM)
21.2.11.1
Introduction
The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the 20 to +20
mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure transducers. The
module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.
21.2.11.2
Design
The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated
protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input
making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMMI".
The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D converter has
a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately The
filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory on the
module.
The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical
calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range.
1320
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC99000504 V2 EN
Figure 592:
MIM connection diagram
Technical manual
1321
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.2.11.3
Signals
Table 932:
MIM Output signals
Name
21.2.11.4
Table 933:
Name
Type
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
Milliampere input module status
CH1
REAL
Analog input 1
CH2
REAL
Analog input 2
CH3
REAL
Analog input 3
CH4
REAL
Analog input 4
CH5
REAL
Analog input 5
CH6
REAL
Analog input 6
Settings
MIM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
MaxReportT
0 - 3600
Maximum time between reports
EnDeadBandCh1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enable amplitude deadband reporting for

channel 1
DeadBandCh1
0.00 - 20.00
mA
0.01
1.00
Deadband amplitude for channel 1
IMinCh1
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
4.00
Min current of transducer for Channel 1
IMaxCh1
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
20.00
Max current of transducer for Channel 1
ValueMinCh1
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
4.000
Min primary value corr. to IMinCh1
ValueMaxCh1
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
20.000
Max primary value corr. to IMaxCh1
EnDeadBandCh2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

channel 2
DeadBandCh2
0.00 - 20.00
mA
0.01
1.00
IMinCh2
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
4.00
IMaxCh2
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
20.00
ValueMinCh2
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
4.000
ValueMaxCh2
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
20.000
EnDeadBandCh3
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

channel 3
DeadBandCh3
0.00 - 20.00
mA
0.01
1.00
1322
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
IMinCh3
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
4.00
IMaxCh3
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
20.00
ValueMinCh3
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
4.000
ValueMaxCh3
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
20.000
EnDeadBandCh4
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

channel 4
DeadBandCh4
0.00 - 20.00
mA
0.01
1.00
IMinCh4
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
4.00
IMaxCh4
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
20.00
ValueMinCh4
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
4.000
ValueMaxCh4
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
20.000
EnDeadBandCh5
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

channel 5
DeadBandCh5
0.00 - 20.00
mA
0.01
1.00
IMinCh5
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
4.00
IMaxCh5
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
20.00
ValueMinCh5
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
4.000
ValueMaxCh5
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
20.000
EnDeadBandCh6
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled

channel 6
DeadBandCh6
0.00 - 20.00
mA
0.01
1.00
IMinCh6
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
4.00
IMaxCh6
-25.00 - 25.00
mA
0.01
20.00
ValueMinCh6
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
4.000
ValueMaxCh6
-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000
0.001
20.000
Technical manual
Description
1323
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.11.5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Monitored data
Table 934:
MIM Monitored data
Name
21.2.11.6
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
STATUS
BOOLEAN
0=Ok
1=Error
Milliampere input module

status
CH1
REAL
Analog input 1
CH2
REAL
Analog input 2
CH3
REAL
Analog input 3
CH4
REAL
Analog input 4
CH5
REAL
Analog input 5
CH6
REAL
Analog input 6
CH1
REAL
Service value analog input 1
CH2
REAL
CH3
REAL
CH4
REAL
CH5
REAL
CH6
REAL
Technical data
Table 935:
MIM - mA input module
Quantity:
Rated value:
Nominal range:
Input resistance
Rin = 194 Ohm
Input range
5, 10, 20mA
0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA
Power consumption
each mA-board
each mA input
2W
0.1 W
21.2.12
Serial and LON communication module (SLM)
21.2.12.1
Introduction
The serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC 60870-5-103,
DNP3 and LON communication. The module has two optical communication ports for
plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or glass/glass. One port is used for serial communication
(SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 port) and one port is dedicated for LON
communication.
1324
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.2.12.2
Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module. Three variants of the SLM are available with different combinations of optical
fiber connectors, see figure 593. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in type and the
glass fiber connectors are of ST type.
I
EC0500760=1=en=Or
i
gi
nal
.
psd
IEC05000760 V2 EN
Figure 593:
The SLM variants, component side view
Receiver, LON
Transmitter, LON
Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3
Snap in connector for plastic fiber
ST connector for glass fiber
Observe that when the SLM connectors are viewed from the rear side of
the IED, contact 4 above is in the uppermost position and contact 1 in the
lowest position.
Technical manual
1325
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.12.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Technical data
Table 936:
SLM LON port
Quantity
Range or value
Optical connector
Glass fiber: type ST

Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget
Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *)

Plastic fiber: 7 dB (10m/35ft typically *)
Fiber diameter
Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation
Table 937:
SLM SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port
Quantity
Range or value
Optical connector
Glass fiber: type ST

Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget
Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000ft m typically *)

Plastic fiber: 7 dB (25m/80ft m typically *)
Fiber diameter
Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fiber: 1 mm
21.2.13
Galvanic RS485 communication module
21.2.13.1
Introduction
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0 and IEC
60870-5-103 communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The
RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire
connections. A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a multidrop
communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires however a control
of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for RX and TX multidrop
communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves. No special control signal
is needed in this case.
21.2.13.2
Design
The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module.
1326
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
RS485 connector pinouts

The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 594) are presented in table
938:
Table 938:
The arrangement for the pins
Pin
Name 2-wire
Name 4-wire
Description
RS485+
TX+
Receive/transmit high or transmit high
RS485
TX
Receive/transmit
Term
T-Term
Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver in 2

wir case) (connect to TX+)
N.A.
R-Term
Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX+)
N.A.
RX
Receive low
N.A.
RX+
Receive high
Angle
bracket
Screw
terminal
X3
Screw
terminal
X1
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
RS485
PWB
Backplane
IEC06000517 V1 EN
Figure 594:
RS485 connector
2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5
Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3
Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6
Soft ground connector pinouts

A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be used
in two combinations like:
Technical manual
1327
Section 21
IED hardware
21.2.13.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part .
Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a MOV
Technical data
Table 939:
Galvanic RS485 communication module
Quantity
Range or value
Communication speed
240019200 bauds
External connectors
RS-485 6-pole connector

Soft ground 2-pole connector
21.2.14
Optical ethernet module (OEM)
21.2.14.1
Introduction
The optical fast-ethernet module is used for fast and interference-free communication of
synchrophasor data over IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 protocols. It is also used to
connect an IED to the communication buses (like the station bus) that use the IEC
61850-8-1 protocol (port A, B). The module has one or two optical ports with ST
connectors.
21.2.14.2
Functionality
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according to
IEC6185081 have been implemented.
21.2.14.3
Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card on
the ADM. The OEM is a 100BASE-FXmodule and available as a single channel or double
channel unit.
1328
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC05000472=1=en=Original.vsd
IEC05000472 V3 EN
Figure 595:
21.2.14.4
OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels
1: Transmitter
2: Receiver
Technical data
Table 940:
OEM - Optical ethernet module
Quantity
Rated value
Number of channels
1 or 2
1 or 2 (port A, B for IEC 61850-8-1 / IEEE C37.118)
Standard
IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber
62.5/125 mm multimode fibre
Wave length
1300 nm
Optical connector
Type ST
Communication speed
Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s
21.2.15
Line data communication module (LDCM)
21.2.15.1
Introduction
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between the
IEDs situated at distances <68 miles or from the IED to optical to electrical converter with
G.703 interface located on a distances <1.9 miles away. The LDCM module sends and
Technical manual
1329
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/ANSI standard format is
used.
The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module has
one optical port with ST connectors see figure 596.
Line data communication module LDCM

Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED
communicates.
Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm single
mode) and Short range (850 nm multi mode) are available.
Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes. Never
look into the laser beam.
21.2.15.2
Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be mounted
on:
the ADM
the NUM
ST
IO-connector
ST
IEC07000087 V2 EN
Figure 596:
1330
The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI
connectors and one I/O ST type connector
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC06000393 V2 EN
Figure 597:
21.2.15.3
The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format
with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector
Technical data
Table 941:
Line data communication module
Characteristic
Type of LDCM
Range or value
Short range (SR)
Medium range (MR)
Long range (LR)
Graded-index
multimode
62.5/125 m
Singlemode 9/125
m
Singlemode 9/125 m
820 nm
865 nm
792 nm
1310 nm
1330 nm
1290 nm
1550 nm
1580 nm
1520 nm
13 dB (typical
distance about 2
mile *)
9 dB (typical
distance about 1
mile *)
22 dB (typical
distance 50 mile *)
26 dB (typical distance 68 mile *)
Optical connector
Type ST
Type FC/PC
Type FC/PC
Protocol
C37.94
C37.94
implementation **)
C37.94 implementation **)
Data transmission
Synchronous
Synchronous
Synchronous
Type of fiber
Peak Emission Wave

length
Nominal
Maximum
Minimum
Optical budget
Graded-index multimode
62.5/125 mm,
Graded-index multimode
50/125 mm
Technical manual
1331
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Characteristic
Type of LDCM
Range or value
Short range (SR)
Medium range (MR)
Long range (LR)
Transmission rate / Data

rate
2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s
Clock source
Internal or derived
from received
signal
Internal or derived
from received signal
Internal or derived from received

signal

**) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94
21.2.16
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)
21.2.16.1
Introduction
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module is used for connection to
telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module supports
64 kbit/s data communication between IEDs.
Examples of applications:
21.2.16.2
Line differential protection

Design
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP Type
II format.
1332
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
en07000196.vsd
IEC07000196 V1 EN
Figure 598:
Overview of the X.21 LDCM module
1
1
15
en07000239.wmf
IEC07000239 V1 EN
Figure 599:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The X.21 LDCM module external connectors
Ground selection connector for IO, screw terminals, 2-pole

Ground pin
Soft ground pin, see figure 600
X.21 Micro D-sub 15 pole male connector according to the V11 (X:27) balanced
version
Technical manual
1333
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
I/O
100kW
100nF
Soft ground
en07000242.vsd
IEC07000242 V1 EN
Figure 600:
Schematic view of soft ground
Grounding
At special problems with ground loops, the soft ground connection for the IIO-ground can
be tested.
Three different kinds of grounding principles can be set (used for fault tracing):
1.
2.
3.
Direct ground - The normal grounding is direct ground, connect terminal 2 directly to
the chassis.
No ground - Leave the connector without any connection.
Soft ground - Connect soft ground pin (3), see figure 599
X.21 connector
Table 942:
Pinout for the X.21 communication connector
Pin number
Signal
Shield (ground)
TXD A
Control A
RXD A
Signal timing A
Ground
TXD B
10
Control B
1334
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.2.16.3
11
RXD B
13
Signal timing B
5,7,12,14,15
Not used
Functionality
The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is 64 kbit/
s.
A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data (deviation
from X.21 standard cable length).
Synchronization
The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally expecting
synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The transmission is normally
synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a device is a DTE. When the
signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and when the signal is low it will write data
to the transmitter. This behaviour can be inverted in the control register.
Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.
When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set as a
master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE Signal Element
Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.
The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices.
21.2.16.4
Technical data
Table 943:
Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)
Quantity
Range or value
Connector, X.21
Micro D-sub, 15-pole male, 1.27 mm (0.050") pitch
Connector, ground selection
2 pole screw terminal
Standard
CCITT X21
Communication speed
64 kbit/s
Insulation
1 kV
Maximum cable length
100 m
Technical manual
1335
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.2.17
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
21.2.17.1
Introduction
This module includes a GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has one
SMA contact for connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS ST-connector
output.
21.2.17.2
Design
The GTM is a PCMIP-format card and is placed only on one of the ADM slots. The
antenna input connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to eliminate
the risk of electromagnetic interference.
All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the PCI-bus. PPS time data is
sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at sampling
level. An optical transmitter for PPS output is available for time synchronization of
another relay with an optical PPS input. The PPS output connector is of ST-type for
multimode fibre and could be used up to 1 km.
21.2.17.3
Monitored data
Table 944:
SYNCHGPS Monitored data
Name
Type
NoOfSatellites
21.2.17.4
INTEGER
Values (Range)
-
Description
Number of GPS signals from
satellites
Technical data
Table 945:
GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
Function
1336
Unit
Range or value
Accuracy
Receiver
1s relative UTC
Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new

position or after power loss longer than 1 month
<30 minutes
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longer

than 48 hours
<15 minutes
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorter

than 48 hours
<5 minutes
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.2.18
GPS antenna
21.2.18.1
Introduction
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna with
applicable cable must be used.
21.2.18.2
Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on an
antenna mast. See figure 601
2
3
xx04000155.vsd
IEC04000155 V2 EN
Figure 601:
Antenna with console
where:
1
GPS antenna
TNC connector
Console, (2'6.7"x4'11')
Mounting holes about 1/5"
Tab for securing of antenna cable
Vertical mounting position
Horizontal mounting position
Technical manual
1337
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Antenna cable
Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male
SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GTM. Choose cable type and
length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.
Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to the
antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna cable with
some metal device, when first connected to the antenna. When the antenna
is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the receiver. The IED must
be switched off when the antenna cable is connected.
21.2.18.3
Technical data
Table 946:
GPS Antenna and cable
Function
Value
Max antenna cable attenuation
26 db @ 1.6 GHz
Antenna cable impedance
50 ohm
Lightning protection
Must be provided externally
Antenna cable connector
SMA in receiver end

TNC in antenna end
Accuracy
+/-1s
21.2.19
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B
21.2.19.1
Introduction
The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of the
IED from a station clock.
The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input shall be used for synchronizing when IEC 61850-9-2LE
is used.
Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.
21.2.19.2
Design
The IRIG-B module has two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle both a
pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude modulated
signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type ST for optical
pulse-width modulated signal (IRIG-B 00X).
1338
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
ST
A1
Y2
IEC06000304=1=en=Original.ai
IEC06000304 V2 EN
Figure 602:
21.2.19.3
Table 947:
Name
IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for optical IRIG-B 00X
820 nm multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector
for IRIG-B signal input
Settings
IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SynchType
BNC
Opto
Opto
Type of synchronization
TimeDomain
LocalTime
UTC
LocalTime
Time domain
Encoding
IRIG-B
1344
1344TZ
IRIG-B
Type of encoding
TimeZoneAs1344
MinusTZ
PlusTZ
PlusTZ
Time zone as in 1344 standard
21.2.19.4
Technical data
Table 948:
IRIG-B
Quantity
Rated value
Number of channels IRIG-B
Number of optical channels
Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B
BNC
Technical manual
1339
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Quantity
Rated value
Pulse-width modulated
5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated
low level
high level
1-3 Vpp
3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
Supported formats
IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x
Accuracy
+/-10s for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100s for IRIG-B 12x
Input impedance
100 k ohm
Optical connector:
1340
Optical connector IRIG-B
Type ST
Type of fibre
62.5/125 m multimode fibre
Supported formats
IRIG-B 00x
Accuracy
+/- 1s
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.3
Dimensions
21.3.1
Case without rear cover
A
D
C
IEC08000164 V2 EN
Figure 603:
Case without rear cover
Technical manual
1341
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
K
F
G
H
J
xx08000166.vsd
IEC08000166 V1 EN
Figure 604:
Case size
(inches)
Case without rear cover with 19 rack mounting kit
6U, 1/2 x 19
10.47
8.81
7.92
9.96
8.10
7.50
8.02
18.31
7.39
19.00
6U, 3/4 x 19
10.47
13.23
7.92
9.96
12.52
7.50
12.44
18.31
7.39
19.00
6U, 1/1 x 19
10.47
17.65
7.92
9.96
16.94
7.50
16.86
18.31
7.39
19.00
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit
1342
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.3.2
Case with rear cover
IEC08000163 V2 EN
Figure 605:
Case with rear cover
Technical manual
1343
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
K
F
G
H
J
xx08000165.vsd
IEC08000165 V1 EN
Figure 606:
Case with rear cover and 19 rack mounting kit
IEC05000503 V2 EN
Figure 607:
1344
Rear cover case with details
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Case size
(inches)
6U, 1/2 x 19
10.47
8.81
9.53
10.07
8.10
7.50
8.02
18.31
9.00
19.00
6U, 3/4 x 19
10.47
13.23
9.53
10.07
12.52
7.50
12.4
18.31
9.00
19.00
6U, 1/1 x 19
10.47
17.65
9.53
10.07
16.86
7.50
16.86
18.31
9.00
19.00
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.
21.3.3
Flush mounting dimensions
A
B
E
D
IEC08000162 V2 EN
Figure 608:
Flush mounting
Technical manual
1345
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Case size
Tolerance
Cut-out dimensions (inches)

A
+/0.04
B
+/0.04
6U, 1/2 x 19
8.27
10.01
0.160.39
0.49
6U, 3/4 x 19
12.69
10.01
0.160.39
0.49
6U, 1/1 x 19
17.11
10.01
0.160.39
0.49
E = 7.42 without rear protection cover, 9.03 with rear protection cover
21.3.4
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions
IEC06000182 V2 EN
Figure 609:
1346
A 1/2 x 19 size IED side-by-side with RHGS6
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
C
xx05000505.vsd
IEC05000505 V1 EN
Figure 610:
Case size
(inches)
Tolerance
A
0.04
B
0.04
Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting
C
0.04
D
0.04
E
0.04
F
0.04
G
0.04
6U, 1/2 x 19
8.42
10.21
9.46
7.50
1.35
0.52
0.25 diam
6U, 3/4 x 19
12.85
10.21
13.89
7.50
1.35
0.52
0.25 diam
6U, 1/1 x 19
17.27
10.21
18.31
7.50
1.35
0.52
0.25 diam
Technical manual
1347
Section 21
IED hardware
21.3.5
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Wall mounting dimensions
IEC04000471 V2 EN
Figure 611:
Case size (inches)
Wall mounting
6U, 1/2 x 19
10.50
10.52
10.74
15.36
9.57
6U, 3/4 x 19
15.92
14.94
10.74
15.36
9.57
6U, 1/1 x 19
20.31
19.33
10.74
15.36
9.57
21.3.6
External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection

WARNING! - USE EXTREME CAUTION!Dangerously high
voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate with
resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object protected with
this equipment is de-energized. If required by national law/standard
enclose the plate with resistors with a protective cover or in a separate box!
1348
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
[6.97]
[4.02]
[1.48]
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
[18.31]
[0.33]
[0.79]
[7.68]
[18.98]
Dimension
mm [inches]
xx06000232.eps
IEC06000232 V2 EN
Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit
[7.50]
[10.47]
[1.50]
Figure 612:
[0.33]
[18.31]
[0.79]
[7.68]
[18.98]
[inches]
en06000234.eps
IEC06000234 V2 EN
Figure 613:
Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit
Technical manual
1349
Section 21
IED hardware
21.3.7
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
External current transformer unit
57 [2.24]
89 [3.5]
482.6 [19]
Dimension
mm [inches]
xx06000233.vsd
IEC06000233 V1 EN
Figure 614:
Dimension drawing of summation current transformers
21.4
Mounting alternatives
21.4.1
Flush mounting
21.4.1.1
Overview
The flush mounting kit can be used for case sizes:
1/2 x 19
3/4 x 19
1/1 x 19
1/4 x 19 (RHGS6 6U)
Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54
protection.
Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when IP54
class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when mounting
two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.
To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing

must be ordered when ordering the IED.
1350
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.4.1.2
Mounting procedure for flush mounting

1
5
2
6
3
IEC08000161 V2 EN
Figure 615:
Flush mounting details.
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54

class. The sealing strip is factory
mounted between the case and
front plate.
Fastener
Groove
Screw, self tapping
2.9x9.5 mm
Joining point of sealing strip
Panel
Technical manual
1351
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.4.2
19 panel rack mounting
21.4.2.1
Overview
All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using a suitably sized
mounting kit consisting of two mounting angles and their fastening screws.
The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19 or 3/4
x 19 either to the left or the right side of the cubicle.
A separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-side mounted IEDs or
IEDs together with RHGS cases should be selected so that the total size
equals 19.
When mounting the mounting angles, use screws that follow the
recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions may
damage the PCBs inside the IED.
1352
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.4.2.2
Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting

2
1a
1b
IEC08000160 V2 EN
Figure 616:
19 panel rack mounting details
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
1a, 1b
Mounting angles, can be mounted

either to the left or the right side of the
case
Screw
M4x6
Technical manual
1353
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.4.3
Wall mounting
21.4.3.1
Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19,1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also possible to
mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.
When mounting the side plates, use screws that follow the recommended
dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions may damage the PCBs
inside the IED.
If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall
mounting is therefore not recommended for any communication modules
with fiber connection.
1354
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.4.3.2
Mounting procedure for wall mounting
2
3
5
6
IEC130 00266-1-en.vsd
IEC13000266 V1 EN
Figure 617:
21.4.3.3
Wall mounting details.
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Bushing
Screw
M4x10
Screw
M6x12 or
corresponding
Mounting bar
Screw
M5x8
Side plate
How to reach the rear side of the IED

The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover recommended to be used with this
type of mounting. See figure 618.
Technical manual
1355
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 3.2 inches is required on the unhinged
side.
View from above
1
3.2"
(80 mm)
ANSI_en06000135.vsd
ANSI06000135 V1 EN
Figure 618:
How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.
PosNo
Description
Type
Screw
M4x10
Screw
M5x8
Rear protection cover
(Ordered separately)
21.4.4
Side-by-side 19 rack mounting
21.4.4.1
Overview
IED case size 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 and RHGS cases can be mounted side-by-side up to
a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting kit
together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be
ordered separately.
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, use screws that
follow the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other
dimensions may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
1356
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
21.4.4.2
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting

2
1
IEC04000456 V2 EN
Figure 619:
21.4.4.3
Side-by-side rack mounting details.
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Mounting plate
2, 3
Screw
16
M4x6
Mounting angle
IED mounted with a RHGS6 case

A 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS case (6 or 12 depending
on IED size). The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24. It
also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of, for example, a DCswitch or two trip IEDs.
Technical manual
1357
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEC06000180 V2 EN
Figure 620:
IED (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test switch
module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal base
21.4.5
Side-by-side flush mounting
21.4.5.1
Overview
It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is required. If
your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting details
kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to be ordered
separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19.
With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is
obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the IEDs
separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see
section "Flush mounting".
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use screws
that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other
dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
1358
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT switches
on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.
21.4.5.2
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting

1
3
4
IEC06000181 V2 EN
Figure 621:
Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x 19

IED).
PosNo
Description
Quantity
Type
Mounting plate
2, 3
Screw
16
M4x6
Mounting angle
21.5
Technical data
21.5.1
Enclosure
Table 949:
Material
Case
Steel sheet
Front plate
Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment
Aluzink preplated steel
Finish
Light grey (RAL 7035)
Technical manual
1359
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 950:
Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529
Front
IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)
Sides, top and bottom
IP20
Rear side
IP20 with screw compression type

IP10 with ring lug terminals
Table 951:
Weight
Case size
21.5.2
Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19
6U, 3/4 x 19
33 lb
6U, 1/1 x 19
40 lb
Electrical safety
Table 952:
21.5.3
Electrical safety according to IEC 60255-27
Equipment class
I (protective earthed)
Overvoltage category
III
Pollution degree
2 (normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a

temporary conductivity caused by condensation is to be expected)
Connection system
Table 953:
CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type
Rated voltage and current

250 V AC, 20 A
4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)

lug terminals
250 V AC, 20 A
4 mm2 (AWG12)
Table 954:
Auxiliary power supply and binary I/O connectors
Connector type
1360
Rated voltage
250 V AC
2.5 mm2 (AWG14)

2 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)

lug terminals
300 V AC
3 mm2 (AWG14)
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered for

Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two adjacent
IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.
21.5.4
Influencing factors
Table 955:
Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter
Reference value
Nominal range
Influence
Ambient temperature,
operate value
+20C
-10 C to +55C
0.02% / C
Relative humidity
Operative range
10%-90%
0%-95%
10%-90%
Storage temperature
-40 C to +70 C
Table 956:
Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation
Dependence on
Reference value
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage

Operative range
max. 2%
Full wave rectified
Within nominal range Influence

15% of EL
0.01% / %
Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate

value
20% of EL
0.01% / %
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage
24-60 V DC 20%
90-250 V DC 20%
Interruption
interval
050 ms
Table 957:
No restart
0 s
Correct behaviour
at power down
Restart time
<300 s
Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 602551)
Dependence on
Within nominal range
Influence
Frequency dependence,
operate value
fn 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz
fn 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
1.0% / Hz
Frequency dependence for

distance protection operate
value
fn 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz
fn 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
2.0% / Hz
Harmonic frequency
dependence (20% content)
2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fn
2.0%
Technical manual
1361
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Dependence on
21.5.5
Within nominal range
Influence
Harmonic frequency
dependence for high
impedance differential
protection (10% content)
5.0%
Harmonic frequency
dependence for high
impedance differential
protection (10% content)
10.0%
Harmonic frequency
dependence for overcurrent
protection
2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr
3.0% / Hz
Type tests according to standard

Table 958:
Electromagnetic compatibility
Test
Type test values
Reference standards
1 MHz Oscillatory burst

disturbance
2.5 kV
IEC 60255-26
100 kHz slow damped oscillatory

wave immunity test
2.5 kV
IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
Ring wave immunity test, 100 kHz
2-4 kV
IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV
Surge withstand capability test
2.5 kV, oscillatory

4.0 kV, fast transient
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application
15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
IEC 60255-26
Direct application
15 kV air discharge
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
Fast transient disturbance
4 kV
IEC 60255-26, Zone A
Surge immunity test
2-4 kV, 1.2/50 ms

high energy
Power frequency immunity test
150-300 V
Conducted common mode

immunity test
15 Hz-150 kHz
Power frequency magnetic field

test
1000 A/m, 3 s
100 A/m, cont.
IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
Pulse magnetic field immunity test
1000 A/m
IEC 6100049, Class V
Damped oscillatory magnetic field

test
100 A/m
IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
Radiated electromagnetic field

disturbance
20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz
IEC 60255-26
1.4-2.7 GHz
1362
Technical manual
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Test
Type test values
Reference standards

disturbance
20 V/m
80-1000 MHz
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
Conducted electromagnetic field

disturbance
10 V, 0.15-80 MHz
IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission
30-5000 MHz
IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission
30-5000 MHz
IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC
Conducted emission
0.15-30 MHz
IEC 60255-26
Table 959:
Insulation
Test
Type test values
Reference standard
Dielectric test
2.0 kV AC, 1 min.
Impulse voltage test
5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J
Insulation resistance
>100 MW at 500 VDC
Table 960:
IEC 60255-27
ANSI C37.90
Environmental tests
Test
Type test value
Reference standard
Cold operation test
Test Ad for 16 h at -25C
IEC 60068-2-1
Cold storage test
Test Ab for 16 h at -40C
IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat operation test
Test Bd for 16 h at +70C
IEC 60068-2-2
Dry heat storage test
Test Bb for 16 h at +85C
IEC 60068-2-2
Change of temperature test
Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25C to

+70C
IEC 60068-2-14
Damp heat test, steady state
Test Ca for 10 days at +40C and

humidity 93%
IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat test, cyclic
Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to

+55C and humidity 93 to 95% (1
cycle = 24 hours)
IEC 60068-2-30
Table 961:
CE compliance
Test
According to
Immunity
EN 6025526
Emissivity
EN 6025526
Low voltage directive
EN 6025527
Technical manual
1363
Section 21
IED hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 962:
Mechanical tests
Test
1364
Type test values
Reference standards
Vibration response test
Class II
IEC 60255-21-1
Vibration endurance test
Class I
IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test
Class I
IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test
Class I
IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test
Class I
IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test
Class II
IEC 60255-21-3
Technical manual
Section 22
Injection equipment hardware
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 22
This chapter describes the hardware equipment used for sensitive rotor earth fault
protection and 100% stator earth fault protection by injection. The descriptions includes
diagrams from different elevations indicating the location of connection terminals and
modules as well as dimensions and drilling plan.
22.1
Overview
22.1.1
Front view of injection unit, coupling capacitor and shunt resitor

unit
22.1.1.1

The injection unit REX060 is used to inject voltage and current signals to the generator or
motor stator and rotor circuits. REX060 generates two square wave signals with different
frequencies for injection into the stator and rotor circuits respectively. The response from
the injected voltage and currents are then measured by the REX060 unit and amplified to
a level suitable for the analog voltage inputs of IED.
For local operation, the REX060 unit is provided with a control panel on the front.
Local operation shall only be performed according to the operation
regulations set up by the relevant operation authority of the plant.
Technical manual
1365
Section 22
22.1.1.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
REX060 Front panel controls
IEC11000053 V1 EN
Figure 622:
1366
REX060 front panel
Technical manual
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 963:
Key
HMI keys on the front of the injection unit REX060

Function
The Injection switch enables injection at rotor and stator 2 s
after switching on. A LED indicates that the injection switch is
set to enable injection. The injection switch can be padlocked in
off position in order to cut-off both injection signals.
The Key-lock button enables/disables the keypad.

Hold the Key-lock button for a period of 1.2 s to 4 s to lock or
unlock the keys. A key-lock LED indicates when the keypad is
unlocked.
Moves the cursor in the direction of the arrows

When the cursor is in the value change state, pressing
the up button increases the value and pressing the down
button decreases the value.
Pressing the clear button cancels changes that have not been
stored.
Pressing the enter button stores the changed value. If the value
is outside range, the limit value is stored.
Technical manual
1367
Section 22
22.1.1.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Coupling capacitor unit REX061
X1
X2
IEC11000019 V1 EN
Figure 623:

217 [8,54]
155 [6,1]
84 [3,3]
84 [3,3]
223 [8,78]
5,5 [0,22]
38 [1,5]
199 [7,83]
235 [9,25]
255 [10]
2 [0,079]
IEC11000037 V2 EN
Figure 624:
1368
Measure and drilling plan
Technical manual
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
REX061 shall be mounted close to the generator in order to limit the exposure of the field
circuit. Alternatively it can be located in the excitation cubicle.
The surface of REX061 unit may be temporarily very hot due to heat
dissipation, up to about 50 C above the ambient temperature. It must be
installed to get a open air convection and prevent contact with
combustible material to the surface.
22.1.1.4
Shunt resistor unit REX062
X1
IEC11000038 V1 EN
Figure 625:
Technical manual
1369
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
217 [8,54]
155 [6,1]
84 [3,3]
84 [3,3]
223 [8,78]
5,5 [0,22]
38 [1,5]
199 [7,83]
235 [9,25]
255 [10]
2 [0,079]
IEC11000039 V2 EN
Figure 626:
REX062 measures and drilling plan
REX062 shall be mounted close to the IED. It is recommended that REX060 and REX062
are mounted in the same cubicle as the IED.
The surface of REX061 unit may be temporarily very hot due to heat
dissipation, up to about 65 C above the ambient temperature. It must be
installed to get a open air convection and prevent contact with
combustible material to the surface.
1370
Technical manual
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
22.1.2
Injection unit REX060 from rear side
22.1.2.1

IED and
Injection
connectors
Power
connector
Top view
Back view
X11
X61
Front view
X81
18
Stator
Power
X62
BackPlane
HMI and Logic
18
X82
Rotor
Power Supply
Stator Injection
Rotor Injection
Front-plate
Injection switch
IEC11000018 V1 EN
Figure 627:
Rear and top view of injection unit REX060
22.2
22.2.1
Introduction
The injection unit REX060 is used to inject voltage and current signals to the generator or
motor stator and rotor circuits. REX060 generates two square wave signals with different
frequencies for injection into the stator and rotor circuits respectively. The response from
the injected voltage and currents are then measured by the REX060 unit and amplified to
a level suitable for the analog voltage inputs of IED.
22.2.2
Design
REX060 consists of a standard enclosure (6U, 1/2 x 19"). In this enclosure, the modules
for stator (SIM) and/or rotor (RIM) earth fault protection are installed. The stator injection
transformer and the power supply are also installed inside the enclosure.
On the front of the enclosure there is a backlit LCD, control buttons and a key switch.
In figure 628 below the content of display is shown for a REX060 with one SIM and one
RIM module. Row 1 contains mains frequency information. Row 2-3 contains stator
Technical manual
1371
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
information and row 4-5 rotor. Column 1 (empty) gives status, column 2 and 3 are
informative and column 4 contains variables, settable by the keypad.
Column
1
Row
1
2
3
4
5
System
[Hz] :
50
STATOR
[Hz] :
087
[V] :
120
[Hz] :
113
UmaxEF
ROTOR
Gain
4
IEC10000334 V1 EN
Figure 628:
Normal display content
When the injection unit REX060 is energized, the ABB logotype is shown followed by
current REX060 revision status. When the start up sequence is completed, the main menu
(normal display content) is shown. The duration of the start up sequence is a few seconds.
LCD backlight is active during a period of 30 seconds after pressing any button. Backlight
activation by pressing a button will not cause any normal button action.
Column 1 is a status column (empty in the above picture), where the following symbols
are displayed when applicable:
1372
Technical manual
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 964:
Status symbol
IEC10000329 V1 EN
IEC10000330 V1 EN
IEC10000332 V1 EN
Status symbols and their description

Description of the status
Over voltage occurred, injection is blocked. This can occur on both
X61/62 and X81/82 (Stator & Rotor) simultaneously or on either of
them. The symbol is displayed in the status column (column 1) in row
2 for X61/62 and in row 4 for X81/82. The injection is blocked until a
manual reset of the blocking occurs.
Priority
Injection blocked by the injection switch. The symbol is displayed in

the status column (column 1) and is always shown in both row 2 and
4.
2
Over voltage
blocked status
overrides
displaying of
this status
Injection blocked by binary input. Blocked injection will be shown in the

status column (column 1) depending on binary in status. This can
occur on both X61/62 then shown in row 2 and X81/82 then shown in
row 4 (Stator & Rotor) simultaneously or on ether of them.
3
Injection switch
and over
voltage blocked
overrides
displaying of
this status
Analog output saturation. This status is set when the analog signal,
current and or voltage, to REG670 IED is too high and may thereby be
incorrect due to saturation in amplifier stage. Saturation status will be
shown in the status column (column 1) in row 3 or 5 depending on the
saturation occurrence
Not applicable
Overvoltage reset
Stator module (SIM) and rotor module (RIM) injection outputs are protected against
voltages exceeding maximum operating range (10% of rated VT/DT for the stator and
75 % of max voltage during gain dependent time for the rotor) by a relay blocking the
injection circuit. This blocking is controlled by measuring the sense voltage, and remains
blocked by stored status in non-volatile memory. Injection block is released by
performing the following sequence:
1.
2.
3.
Power off the REX060

Simultaneous press the C and key buttons
Power on the REX060 and wait until status indication Over-voltage is removed from
display
Stator and rotor overvoltage protection of injection circuit

Both rotor and stator have two levels of protection, injection circuit interruption controlled
by the voltage sense input and a fuse for over-current protection. The voltage controlled
interruption, overvoltage, will normally occur prior to interruption by fuse and the reset
sequence is described above. A blown fuse requires module disassembling to replace the
fuse (F 4 A 250 V for stator and F 160 mA 250 V for rotor). However, if this occurs it is
recommended to identify the reason for the over-current and take necessary actions to
Technical manual
1373
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
reduce the current before restarting the unit. The problem must be outside the injection
unit since this unit cannot provide enough energy to blow the fuse.
Saturation
When the voltage or current amplifiers in an injection module saturates due to high voltage
level, it is indicated with a warning symbol in the status column in the REX060 display .
Besides this a binary out for the specific module is set active to indicate to the IED that the
signal may not be reliable due to saturation and could cause incorrect measurements.
Binary in
The injection can be blocked by application in the IED. For this purpose, two binary inputs
to the REX060 exist:
BLOCK on X61 terminal 1, 2 or 3: Prohibits injection on the injection unit inserted

in X62
BLOCK on X81 terminal 1, 2 or 3: Prohibits injection on the injection unit inserted
in X82
The used terminal is depending on actual binary voltage, pin 1 for 220 V, 2 for 110 V, 3
for 48 V and 4 for return (common).
Binary out
The following binary outputs exist on the REX060:
INJ_BLOCKED_NC on X61 terminal 5:

Indicates to the IED that the injection on X62 is blocked. The reason for blocking is
indicated in the REX060 LCD.
SAT_NO on X61 pin 6:
Indicates to the IED that there is a risk of saturated amplifier on voltage and/or current
output at X61, indication is also given in the REX060 LCD.
COMMON on X61 terminal 7:
Common return for X61 terminal 5 and 6
INJ_BLOCKED_NC on X81 pin 5:
Indicates to the IED that the injection on X82 is blocked. The reason for blocking is
indicated in the REX060 LCD.
SAT_NO on X81 pin 6:
Indicates to the IED that there is a risk of saturated amplifier on voltage and/or current
output at X81, indication is also given in the REX060 LCD.
COMMON on X81 terminal 7:
Common return for X81 terminal 5 and 6
Power status
1374
X11 terminal 3:
Technical manual
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Fail, power off NC

X11 terminal 1:
Ready, power off NO
X11 terminal 2:
Common
22.3
22.3.1
Introduction
REX061 isolates the injection circuit from the rotor exciter voltage.
The REX061 coupling capacitor unit grounding point and grounding brush of the rotor
shaft should be properly interconnected.
22.3.2
Design
Measure points are added to the capacitor box that enables the measuring of rotor voltages
without any connection to a hazardous voltage, by the use of protective impedance. This
enables the usage of standard oscilloscope or handheld DVM.
The measure ports cause an additional rotor impedance of 20 M per
terminal to ground. However, the rotor calibration procedure extracts this
impedance.
Technical manual
1375
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
REX061
Coupling Capacitor unit
Measuring point +
Ground (measuring)
Rotor+
Injection
Ground (injection)
RotorMeasuring pointPE
IEC11000040 V1 EN
Figure 629:
REX062 principle design
22.4
22.4.1
Introduction
REX062 is typically used when injection is done via a grounding transformer.
22.4.2
Design
REX062 for stator protection is used when either injection via a grounding transformer
(i.e. not via a VT) is used or when maximum voltage posed on injection equipment by the
generator is bigger than 120V.
1376
Technical manual
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
REX062
Shunt Resistor unit
Injection A
External A
Fuse
Injection B
External B
I sense A
PE
I sense B
IEC11000041 V1 EN
Figure 630:
REX062 Principal design
REX062 input protection

REX062 limits overvoltage by a varistor at the injection output to stator. Normally ,
REX060 will interrupt the injection circuit in case of excessive over-current in the
injection chain. Fuse within REX062 is an additional protection in case of failure within
REX062 during over-voltage condition.
A blown REX062 fuse requires a module disassembling to replace the fuse (F 6.3 A 250
V). However, if this occurs it is recommended to identify the reason for the over-current
and do needed actions to reduce the current.
Technical manual
1377
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
REX060
Injection unit
REG670
X11:4
X11:5
Power Supply Module

REX061
Coupling Capacitor unit
Exciter
source
Ready; X11:1
Common; X11:2
Fail; X11:3
X1:1 ; Rotor +
Rotor
X82:1 ; InjA
X82:3 ; InjA
Injection; X1:9
X82:4 ; InjB
X82:5 ; InjB
Ground; X1:10
X1:7 ; Rotor-
X82:2 ; InjShB
PE
X81:16; IA sense
X81:14; IA sense
X81:15; IB sense
X81:12; VA sense
X81:13; VB sense
R
Distribution
Transformer
X1:2 ; Injection A
External A; X1:9
X1:4 ; Injection B
External B; X1:10
I sense A; X1:6
I sense B; X1:8
PE
X62:1 ; InjExtA
X62:3 ; InjA
X62:4 ; InjB
X62:5 ; InjB
X62:2 ; InjExtB
(BI)
BO
RL-
UA Out; X81:8
UB Out; X81:9
Stator Module( SIM)

Block 220V ; X61:1
Block 110V ; X61:2
Block48V ; X61:3
Block Common; X61:4
X61:14 ; IA sense
IA Out; X61:10
IB Out; X61:11
X61:12 ; VA sense
VA Out; X61:8
PE
BI
RL+
IB Out; X81:11
X61:15 ; IB sense
X61:13 ; VB sense
EL
IA Out; X81:10
Blocked; X81:5
Saturation; X81:6
Common; X81:7
REX062
Shunt Resistor unit
Stator
Rotor Module( RIM)

Block 220V ; X81:1
Block 110V ; X81:2
Block48V ; X81:3
Block Common; X81:4
BI
BI
RL+
BO
RL-
AI (V) , current measure
AI (V) , voltage measure
VB Out; X61:9
Blocked; X61:5
Saturation; X61:6
Common; X61:7
BI
BI
RL+
PE
ANSI11000017 V1 EN
Figure 631:
Example installation when REX062 unit is required
22.5
Technical data
22.5.1
Hardware
Table 965:
REX060 Technical data
Specifications
Values
Case size
6U, 1/2 19; 8.81 x 9.65 x 10.51 inches (W x D x H)
Weight
17.64 lbs
Burden, binary inputs
BI 220 V: burden 0.4 W

Burden, RIM injection
< 10 VA at 100 V external disturbance
Burden, SIM injection
< 10 VA at 12 V ground fault voltage

0 VA at > 10% of maximum ground fault voltage
1378
Technical manual
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Specifications
Values
Burden, SIM injection with REX062
Burden, measuring transformer SIM
< 60 mVA at 24 V; 87 Hz
Burden, measuring transformer RIM
< 60 mVA at 50 V; 113 Hz
Installation category
III
Pollution degree
Table 966:
REX060 Power supply Technical data
Quantity
Rated value
Nominal range
Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input)
EL = (24 60) V
EL = (90 250) V
EL 20%
EL 20%
Power consumption
30 W
Auxiliary DC power in-rush
< 5 A during 0.1 s
Table 967:
Function
Range or values
Accuracy
For machines with:
rated field voltage up to
800 V DC
static exciter with rated

supply voltage up to
1600 V 50/60 Hz
Specifications
Values
Case size
8.58 x 5.91 x 9.57 inches (W x D x H)
Weight
10.58 lbs
Assembling
6 x 0.20 inch screws (3 at bottom and 3 at top)
Rated rotor injection voltage
250 V
Burden, static excitation system X1:1 to X1:7
< 0.5 VA at 100 V external disturbance
Burden, static excitation system X1:1 or X1:7 to 0

V
Burden, brushless excitation system X1:1 and

X1:7 to 0 V
III
Pollution degree
Technical manual
1379
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 968:
Specifications
Values
Case size
8.58 x 5.91 x 9.57 inches (W x D x H)
Weight
9.92 lbs
Assembling
6 x 0.20 inch screws (3 at bottom and 3 at top)
Rated stator injection voltage
240 V
Rated stator voltage
240 V
Burden, injection X1:2 and X1:4

III
Pollution degree
Table 969:
Degree of protection
Description
22.5.2
Values
REX060
Front
Panel mounted, front
Rear, sides, top, bottom and connection terminals
IP40
IP54
IP20
REX061 and REX062

Top
Front, rear, sides and bottom
IP41
IP20
Type tests according to standards

Table 970:
Electromagnetic compatibility tests
Test
Type test values
Reference standards
1 MHz Oscillatory burst

disturbance
2.5 kV
IEC 60255-26
100 kHz slow damped oscillatory

wave immunity test
2.5 kV
IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
Surge withstand capability test
2.5 kV, oscillatory

4.0 kV, fast transient
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
Direct application
15 kV air discharge
IEC 60255-26
Direct application
15 kV air discharge
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.3
Fast transient disturbance test
4 kV
Surge immunity test
1-2 kV, and 2-4 kV, 1.2/50 s

High energy
Power frequency immunity test
150-300 V

1380
Technical manual
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Test
Type test values
Reference standards
Power frequency magnetic field

test
1000 A/m, 3 s
100 A/m, cont.
IEC 61000-4-8

disturbance test
20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz

1.4-2.7 GHz
IEC 60255-26

disturbance test
20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
Conducted electromagnetic field

disturbance test
10 V, 0.15-80 MHz
IEC 60255-26
Voltage dips and short

interruptions
Dips:
40% /200 ms
70% /500 ms
Interruptions:
0-50 ms: No restart
0 s: Correct behaviour at
power down
IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission
30-1000 MHz
IEC 60255-26
Conducted emission
0.15-30 MHz
IEC 60255-26
Table 971:
Insulation tests, REX060, REX062 and REG670
Test
Type test values
Reference standard
Dielectric test
2.0 kV AC, 1 min
IEC 60255-27
5.0 kV, 1.2/50 s, 0.5 J
IEC 60255-27
>100 M at 500V DC
IEC 60255-27
Table 972:
Insulation tests, REX061
Test
Dielectric test
Type test values
IEEE 421.3
2.8 kV DC, 1 min
IEC 60255-27
12.0 kV, 1.2/50 s, 0.5 J

(connections to rotor)
IEC 60664-1
5.0 kV, 1.2/50 s, 0.5 J

Reference standard
7.48 kV DC, 1min

(connections to rotor)
>100 M at 500V DC
Technical manual
IEC 60255-27
IEC 60255-27
1381
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 973:
Mechanical tests
Test
Reference standards
Vibration response test
IEC 60255-21-1
Vibration endurance test

REG670 and REX060
REX061 and REX062
IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test

REG670 and REX060
REX061 and REX062
IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test

REG670 and REX060
REX061 and REX062
IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test
REG670 and REX060
REX061 and REX062
IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test
REG670 and REX060
REX061 and REX062
IEC 60255-21-3
Table 974:
Type test value
Cold test
operation
storage
16 h at -25C
16 h at -40C
Dry heat test

operation
storage
16 h at +70C
16 h at +85C
Damp heat test

steady state
240 h at +40C
humidity 93%
6 cycles at +25 to +55C
humidity 93-95%
cyclic
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1
Class 2
Class 2
Class 2 extended
Reference standard
IEC 60068-2-1
IEC 60068-2-2
IEC 60068-2-78
IEC 60068-2-30
Influencing factors
Table 975:
Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence
Test
1382
Class 2
Environmental tests
Test
22.5.3
Requirements
Type test values
Influence
Auxiliary voltage dependence,

operate value
20% of EL
0.01% /%
Ripple in DC auxiliary voltage,

operate value
15% of EL
0.01% /%
Technical manual
Section 22
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 976:
Temperature influence
Test
Type test values
Influence
Ambient temperature, operate

value
-25 C to +55C
0.02% /C
Storage temperature
-40 C to +85C
Technical manual
1383
1384
Section 23
Labels
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 23
Labels
23.1
Labels on IED
Front view of IED
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
xx06000574.ep
IEC06000574 V1 EN
Technical manual
1385
Section 23
Labels
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Product type, description and serial number
Order number, dc supply voltage and rated

frequency
Optional, customer specific information
Manufacturer
Transformer input module, rated currents and

voltages
Transformer designations
Ordering and serial number
IEC06000577-CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC V1 EN
IEC06000576-POS-NO V1 EN
1386
Technical manual
Section 23
Labels
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Rear view of IED
1
2
3
4
en06000573.ep
IEC06000573 V1 EN
Warning label
Caution label
Class 1 laser product label
IEC06000575 V1 EN
Warning label
Technical manual
1387
Section 23
Labels
23.2
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Labels on injection equipment

Front view of injection unit REX060
IEC11000226 V1 EN
1a
Product type, description and

serial number
1b
Order number and dc supply

voltage
1c
Stator and rotor input module

designations
1d
Manufacturer
1a
1b
1c
1d
IEC11000233 V1 EN
1388
Technical manual
Section 23
Labels
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
2 Ordering and serial number

2
IEC11000234 V1 EN
Rear view of injection unit REX060
IEC11000227 V1 EN
Warning label
Caution label
ESD label
Warning label
Technical manual
1389
Section 23
Labels
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Front view of coupling capacitor unit REX061
IEC11000229 V1 EN
Warning label (hot surface)
Ordering number
Rear view of coupling capacitor unit REX061
IEC11000228 V1 EN
1390
Warning label
Caution label
ESD label
Warning label
Technical manual
Section 23
Labels
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Front view of shunt resistor unit REX062
IEC11000231 V1 EN
Warning label (hot surface)
Ordering number
Rear view of shunt resistor unit REX062
IEC11000230 V1 EN
Warning label
Caution label
ESD label
Warning label
Technical manual
1391
1392
Section 24
Connection diagrams
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 24
Connection diagrams
The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as part of
the product delivery.
The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from
http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.
Connection diagrams for Customized products
Connection diagram, 670 series 2.1 1MRK002802-AF
Connection diagrams for Injection equipment
Connection diagram, Injection unit REX060 1MRK002501-BA
Connection diagram, Generator protection REG670 with injection unit REX060
1MRK002504-BA
Connection diagram, Injection unit REX060 and coupling capacitor unit REX061
1MRK002504-CA
Connection diagram, Injection unit REX060 and optional shunt resistor unit REX062
1MRK002504-DA
Connection diagram, Coupling capacitor unit REX061 1MRK002551-BA
Connection diagram, Shunt resistor unit REX062 1MRK002556-BA
Technical manual
1393
1394
Section 25
Inverse time characteristics
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 25
25.1
Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at different
points in the network different time delays for the different protections are normally used.
The simplest way to do this is to use definite time-lag. In more sophisticated applications
current dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are shown in a simple
application with three overcurrent protections operating in series.
IPickup
IPickup
IPickup
xx05000129_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000129 V1 EN
Figure 632:
Three overcurrent protections operating in series

Stage 3
Time
Stage 2
Stage 2
Stage 1
Stage 1
Stage 1
Fault point
position
en05000130.vsd
IEC05000130 V1 EN
Figure 633:
Definite time overcurrent characteristics
Technical manual
1395
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Time
Fault point
position
en05000131.vsd
IEC05000131 V1 EN
Figure 634:
Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function
The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time and
still assure the selectivity between protections.
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following
factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:
Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co-ordinated

Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
Reset times of the protections
Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections
Assume we have the following network case.
1396
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A1
B1
51
51
Feeder
Time axis
t=0
t=t1
t=t2
t=t3
en05000132_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000132 V1 EN
Figure 635:
Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1
where:
t=0
is The fault occurs
t=t1
is Protection B1 trips
t=t2
is Breaker at B1 opens
t=t3
is Protection A1 resets
In the case protection B1 shall trip without any intentional delay (instantaneous). When
the fault occurs the protections pickup to detect the fault current. After the time t1 the
protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its delay
timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between the two
protections. There is a possibility that A1 will pickup before the trip is sent to the B1 circuit
breaker. At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the
fault current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults.
The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the
timer of protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, that is the timer is
stopped.
In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when the
current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be
minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed
reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following applications:
Technical manual
1397
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults, picks up
and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the release
function.
25.2
Principle of operation
25.2.1
Mode of operation
The function can trip in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse time mode.
For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are
available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the component inputs: p, A,
B, C pr, tr, and cr.
Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.
If current in any phase exceeds the set pickup current value (here internal signal
pickupValue), a timer, according to the selected operating mode, is started. The
component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level
used in timing calculations.
In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached or
until the current drops below the reset value (pickup value minus the hysteresis) and the
reset time has elapsed.
For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are chosen.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 200.
1398
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A
t [s ] =
P
Pickupn
-C
+ B td
(Equation 200)
EQUATION1640 V1 EN
where:
p, A, B, C
are constants defined for each curve type,
Pickupn
is the set pickup current for step n,
td
is set time multiplier for step n and
is the measured current.
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set
pickup level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:
( top - B td ) Pickupn
-C
= A td
(Equation 201)
EQUATION1642 V1 EN
where:
top
is the operating time of the protection
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to
equation 202, in addition to the constant time delay:
t
Pickupn
0
- C dt A td
EQUATION1643 V1 EN
(Equation 202)
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
Technical manual
1399
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
i ( j ) P
- C A td
Pickupn
j =1
Dt
(Equation 203)
EQUATION1644 V1 EN
where:
j=1
is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected,
that is, when
i
Pickupn
>1
EQUATION1646 V1 EN
Dt
is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the

protection algorithm,
is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time
equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j)
is the fault current at time j
For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC and
ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 636.
1400
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Operate
time
tMin
Current
IMin
IEC05000133 V2 EN
Figure 636:
Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set to
the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve for
measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operating time
value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two additional
inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.
The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA
relay RI. The curve is described by equation 205:
td
t [s ] =
0.339 - 0.235 Pickupn
i
(Equation 205)
EQUATION1647 V1 EN
where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n
td
is set time multiplier for step n
is the measured current
Technical manual
1401
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection
RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual
ground-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive ground faults. The
curve is described by equation 206:
td Pickupn
[ ]
t s = 5.8 - 1.35 ln
(Equation 206)
EQUATION1648 V1 EN
where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n,
td
is set time multiplier for step n and
is the measured current
If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse time
curve according to the general equation 207.
A
t [s ] =
P
Pickupn
-C
+ B td
(Equation 207)
EQUATION1640 V1 EN
Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the possibility to
choose between three different reset time-lags.
Instantaneous Reset
IEC Reset
ANSI Reset.
If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops
below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis.
If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current drops
below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis.
If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault
clearance (when the current drops below the pickup current level minus the hysteresis).
The timer will reset according to equation 208.
1402
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
tr
td
t [s] =
i 2
-1
pickupn
(Equation 208)
where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.
The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the choice
of time delay characteristic.
For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are instantaneous
and IEC constant time reset.
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are
available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent reset time.
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC set constant time reset).
For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current
dependent reset time. If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be
given, see equation 209:
tr
td
t [s] =
i pr
- cr
pickupn
(Equation 209)
For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the trip time of
the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time
delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is important to set
the definite time delay for that stage to zero.
Technical manual
1403
Section 25
25.3
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Inverse characteristics
Table 977:
ANSI Inverse time characteristics
Function
Range or value
Operating characteristic:
t =
A
P
( I - 1)
0.10 td 3.00
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset
Accuracy
ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
2.0% or 40 ms
+ B td
EQUATION1651 V1 EN
Reset characteristic:
t =
(I
tr
2
td
-1
EQUATION1652 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
1404
ANSI Extremely Inverse
A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse
A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse
A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,

tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse
A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,

tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse
A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 978:
IEC Inverse time characteristics
Function
Range or value
t =
A
P
td
( I - 1)
0.10 td 3.00
Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 2.0%
or 40 ms whichever is
greater
EQUATION1653 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Very inverse
A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse
A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse
A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse
A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic
Trip characteristic:
td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of
0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
t =
A
P
(I - C )
+ B td
EQUATION1654 V1 EN
t =
(I
TR
PR
- CR
td
EQUATION1655 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 979:
RI and RD type inverse time characteristics
Function
Range or value
RI type inverse characteristic

1
t =
0.339 -
0.236
0.10 td 3.00
Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 2.0%
greater
td
EQUATION1656 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
I
td
EQUATION1657 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Technical manual
1405
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 980:
ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential Protection
Function
Range or value
t =
A
P
( I - 1)
td = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01
Accuracy
ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 40 ms
+ B td
EQUATION1651 V1 EN
t =
(I
tr
2
td
-1
EQUATION1652 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
1406
A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse
A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse
A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,

tr=0.46
A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,

tr=4.85
A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 981:
IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Function
Range or value
t =
td = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01
A
P
td
( I - 1)
Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
greater
EQUATION1653 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Very inverse
A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=80.0, P=2.0
A=0.05, P=0.04
A=120, P=1.0
Operate characteristic:
td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of
0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
t =
A
P
(I - C )
+ B td
EQUATION1654 V1 EN
t =
(I
TR
PR
- CR
td
EQUATION1655 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be used,

since this parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.
Technical manual
1407
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 982:
RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Function
Range or value

1
t =
0.339 -
0.236
td = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01
Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
greater
td
EQUATION1656 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
td
I
EQUATION1657 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 983:
ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power
protection
Function
Range or value
t =
A
P
( I - 1)
0.10 k 2.00
Accuracy
ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 160 ms
+ B td
EQUATION1651 V1 EN
t =
(I
tr
2
td
-1
EQUATION1652 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
1408
A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse
A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse
A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,

tr=0.46
A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,

tr=4.85
A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 984:
IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power
protection
Function
Range or value
t =
A
P
td
( I - 1)
0.10 k 2.00
Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
greater
EQUATION1653 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Very inverse
A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=80.0, P=2.0
A=0.05, P=0.04
A=120, P=1.0
Trip characteristic:
td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of
0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
t =
A
P
(I - C )
+ B td
EQUATION1654 V1 EN
t =
(I
TR
PR
- CR
td
EQUATION1655 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/Reserved shall not be used,

since this parameter setting is for future use and not implemented yet.
Technical manual
1409
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 985:
RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent
and power protection
Function
Range or value

1
t =
0.339 -
0.236
0.10 k 2.00
Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
greater
td
EQUATION1656 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
td
I
EQUATION1657 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 986:
ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function
Range or value
t =
A
P
( I - 1)
td = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01
Accuracy
ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,
5.0% or 40 ms
+ B td
EQUATION1651 V1 EN
t =
(I
tr
2
td
-1
EQUATION1652 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
1410
A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse
A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse
A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,

tr=0.46
A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,

tr=4.85
A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 987:
IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection
Function
t =
Range or value
td = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01
A
P
td
( I - 1)
Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 5.0%
greater
EQUATION1653 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Very inverse
A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=80.0, P=2.0
A=0.05, P=0.04
A=120, P=1.0
Technical manual
1411
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 988:
Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Accuracy
5.0% or 45 ms
td
V - VPickup
VPickup
EQUATION1661 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Type B curve:
t =
td 480
V VPickup
0.5
32
VPickup
+ 0.035
2.0
EQUATION1662 V2 EN
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Type C curve:
t =
td 480
V VPickup
0.5
32
VPickup
3.0
+ 0.035
EQUATION1663 V2 EN
Programmable curve:
t =
td A
V - VPickup
B
VPickup
EQUATION1664 V1 EN
1412
-C
+D
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 989:
Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Accuracy
5.0% or 45 ms
td
VPickup - V
VPickup
EQUATION1658 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
Type B curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
td 480
VPickup - V
32
VPickup
- 0.5
2.0
+ 0.055
EQUATION1659 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
Programmable curve:
t =
td A
VPickup - V
B
VPickup
EQUATION1660 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
+D
P

-C

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001
Technical manual
1413
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Table 990:
Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Accuracy
5.0% or 45 ms
td
V - VPickup
VPickup
EQUATION1661 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Type B curve:
t =
td 480
V VPickup
0.5
32
VPickup
+ 0.035
2.0
EQUATION1662 V2 EN
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
Type C curve:
t =
td 480
V VPickup
0.5
32
VPickup
3.0
+ 0.035
EQUATION1663 V2 EN
Programmable curve:
t =
td A
V - VPickup
B
VPickup
EQUATION1664 V1 EN
1414
-C
+D
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps of
0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070750 V2 EN
Figure 637:
ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
1415
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070751 V2 EN
Figure 638:
1416
ANSI Very inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070752 V2 EN
Figure 639:
ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
1417
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070753 V2 EN
Figure 640:
1418
ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070817 V2 EN
Figure 641:
ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
1419
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070818 V2 EN
Figure 642:
1420
ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070819 V2 EN
Figure 643:
ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
1421
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070820 V2 EN
Figure 644:
1422
IEC Normal inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070821 V2 EN
Figure 645:
IEC Very inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
1423
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070822 V2 EN
Figure 646:
1424
IEC Inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070823 V2 EN
Figure 647:
IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
1425
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070824 V2 EN
Figure 648:
1426
IEC Short time inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070825 V2 EN
Figure 649:
IEC Long time inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
1427
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070826 V2 EN
Figure 650:
1428
RI-type inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
A070827 V2 EN
Figure 651:
RD-type inverse time characteristics
Technical manual
1429
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN
Figure 652:
1430
Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN
Figure 653:
Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection
Technical manual
1431
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN
Figure 654:
1432
Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection
Technical manual
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN
Figure 655:
Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection
Technical manual
1433
Section 25
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN
Figure 656:
1434
Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection
Technical manual
Section 26
Glossary
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
Section 26
Glossary
26.1
Glossary
AC
Alternating current
ACC
Actual channel
ACT
Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter
Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS
Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM
AI
Analog input
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AR
Autoreclosing
ASCT
Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD
Adaptive signal detection
ASDU
Application service data unit
AWG
American Wire Gauge standard
BBP
Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5
Bayonet fibre optic connector
BFP
Breaker failure protection
BI
Binary input
BIM
Binary input module
BOM
Binary output module
BOS
Binary outputs status
BR
External bistable relay
BS
British Standards
BSR
Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST
Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
Technical manual
1435
Section 26
Glossary
1436
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
C37.94
IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between

IEDs
CAN
Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial

communication
CB
Circuit breaker
CBM
Combined backplane module
CCITT
Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and

Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body within
the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM
CAN carrier module
CCVT
Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C
Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS
Combined megapulses per second
CMT
Communication Management tool in PCM600
CO cycle
Close-open cycle
Codirectional
Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two

twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both
directions
COM
Command
COMTRADE
Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange format

for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI C37.111,
1999 / IEC60255-24
Contra-directional
Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four

twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting data in both
directions and two for transmitting clock signals
COT
Cause of transmission
CPU
Central processing unit
CR
Carrier receive
CRC
Cyclic redundancy check
CROB
Control relay output block
CS
Carrier send
CT
Current transformer
CU
Communication unit
CVT or CCVT
Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR
Delayed autoreclosing
Technical manual
Section 26
Glossary
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
DARPA
Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US

developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL
Dead bus dead line
DBLL
Dead bus live line
DC
Direct current
DFC
Data flow control
DFT
Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch
Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI
Digital input
DLLB
Dead line live bus
DNP
Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR
Disturbance recorder
DRAM
Dynamic random access memory
DRH
Disturbance report handler
DSP
Digital signal processor
DTT
Direct transfer trip scheme
EHV network
Extra high voltage network
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF
Electromotive force
EMI
Electromagnetic interference
EnFP
End fault protection
EPA
Enhanced performance architecture
ESD
F-SMA
Type of optical fibre connector
FAN
Fault number
FCB
Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20
Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data

and protection signals
FOX 512/515
Access multiplexer
Technical manual
1437
Section 26
Glossary
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
FOX 6Plus
Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to

seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
FUN
Function type
G.703
Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by

local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced
and unbalanced lines
GCM
Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver

module
GDE
Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI
General interrogation command
GIS
Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE
Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS
Global positioning system
GSAL
Generic security application
GSE
Generic substation event
HDLC protocol
High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC

standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
1438
HMI
Human-machine interface
HSAR
High speed autoreclosing
HV
High-voltage
HVDC
High-voltage direct current
ICT
Installation and Commissioning Tool for injection based

protection in REG670
IDBS
Integrating deadband supervision
IEC
International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6
IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6: Requirements

for protective current transformers for transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103
Communication standard for protection equipment. A serial

master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850
Substation automation communication standard
IEC 6185081
Communication protocol standard
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

Technical manual
Section 26
Glossary
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
IEEE 802.12
A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on

twisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1
PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.

References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common
Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI
specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for the
electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686
Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs)

Cyber Security Capabilities
IED
Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS
Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM
Binary input/output module
Instance
When several occurrences of the same function are available in

the IED, they are referred to as instances of that function. One
instance of a function is identical to another of the same kind but
has a different number in the IED user interfaces. The word
"instance" is sometimes defined as an item of information that is
representative of a type. In the same way an instance of a
function in the IED is representative of a type of function.
IP
1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol

suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless,
best-effort packet-switching protocol. It provides packet
routing, fragmentation and reassembly through the data link
layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529
IP 20
Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level

IP20- Protected against solid foreign objects of 12.5mm
diameter and greater.
IP 40
Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level IP40Protected against solid foreign objects of 1mm diameter and
greater.
IP 54
Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level

IP54-Dust-protected, protected against splashing water.
IRF
Internal failure signal
IRIG-B:
InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,

standard 200
ITU
International Telecommunications Union
LAN
Local area network
Technical manual
1439
Section 26
Glossary
1440
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
LIB 520
High-voltage software module
LCD
Liquid crystal display
LDCM
Line differential communication module
LDD
Local detection device
LED
Light-emitting diode
LNT
LON network tool
LON
Local operating network
MCB
Miniature circuit breaker
MCM
Mezzanine carrier module
MIM
Milli-ampere module
MPM
Main processing module
MVAL
Value of measurement
MVB
Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally

developed for use in trains.
NCC
National Control Centre
NOF
Number of grid faults
NUM
Numerical module
OCO cycle
Open-close-open cycle
OCP
Overcurrent protection
OEM
Optical Ethernet module
OLTC
On-load tap changer
OTEV
Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start/

pick-up
OV
Overvoltage
Overreach
A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault

condition. For example, a distance relay is overreaching when
the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, that is, the
set reach. The relay sees the fault but perhaps it should not
have seen it.
PCI
Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM
Pulse code modulation
PCM600
Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP
Mezzanine card standard

Technical manual
Section 26
Glossary
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
PMC
PCI Mezzanine card
POR
Permissive overreach
POTT
Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus
Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity
to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM
Power supply module
PST
Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PT ratio
Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT
Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC
Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA
RISC
Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value
Root mean square value
RS422
A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in

point-to-point connections
RS485
Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC
Real-time clock
RTU
Remote terminal unit
SA
Substation Automation
SBO
Select-before-operate
SC
Switch or push button to close
SCL
Short circuit location
SCS
Station control system
SCADA
Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT
System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU
Service data unit
SLM
Serial communication module.
SMA connector
Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant

impedance.
SMT
Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS
Station monitoring system
SNTP
Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize

computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
Technical manual
1441
Section 26
Glossary
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every

embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the required
accuracy.
SOF
Status of fault
SPA
Strmberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/slave

protocol for point-to-point and ring communication.
SRY
Switch for CB ready condition
ST
Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint
Neutral/Wye point of transformer or generator
SVC
Static VAr compensation
TC
Trip coil
TCS
Trip circuit supervision
TCP
Transmission control protocol. The most common transport

layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP
Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de

facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD
Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for Internet working
and encompasses both network layer and transport layer
protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific
protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US
Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these,
including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF
Time delayed gound-fault protection function
TLS
Transport Layer Security
TM
Transmit (disturbance data)
TNC connector
Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance

version of a BNC connector
TP
Trip (recorded fault)
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC
1442
TRM
Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and

voltages taken from the process into levels suitable for further
signal processing.
TYP
Type identification
UMT
User management tool
Underreach
A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault

condition. For example, a distance relay is underreaching when
Technical manual
Section 26
Glossary
1MRK 502 066-UUS A
the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent

impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, that is, the
set reach. The relay does not see the fault but perhaps it should
have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC
Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale,

maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures
(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination
of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from
International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole
number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal Time
1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's orbit,
the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the
Earth's irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The
Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour
clock, and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane
and ship navigation, where it is also sometimes known by the
military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet
stands for "Z", which stands for longitude zero.
UV
Undervoltage
WEI
Weak end infeed logic
VT
Voltage transformer
X.21
A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom

equipment
3IO
Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the

residual or the ground-fault current
3VO
Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the

residual voltage or the neutral point voltage
Technical manual
1443
1444
1445
For more information please contact:

ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Vsters, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
www.abb.com/substationautomation
Note:
We reserve the right to make technical changes or modify the
contents of this document without prior notice. ABB AB does
not accept any responsibility whatsoever for potential errors or
possible lack of information in this document.
We reserve all rights in this document and in the subject matter
and illustrations contained herein. Any reproduction,
disclosure to third parties or utilization of its contents in whole
or in part is forbidden without prior written consent of ABB AB.
Copyright 2016 ABB.

All rights reserved.
Scan this QR code to visit our website
1MRK 502 066-UUS
Contact us

1MRK502066-UUS A en Technical Manual Generator Protection REG670 2.1 ANSI

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1MRK502066-UUS A en Technical Manual Generator Protection REG670 2.1 ANSI

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Relion 670 series

Generator protection REG670 2.1 ANSI and

Document ID: 1MRK 502 066-UUS

Copyright 2016 ABB. All rights reserved

Binary input and output modules.........................................83

Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI ...............................85

Local HMI screen behaviour................................................................... 85

Differential protection........................................................ 113

Logic diagram............................................................................. 153

Algorithm of the restricted ground fault protection......................194

Simplified logic diagrams............................................................242

Under impedance protection for generators and transformers

Directional supervision element with integrated directional

Pole discrepancy signaling from circuit breaker......................... 536

Voltage protection............................................................. 597

Technical data................................................................................. 635

Section 10 Frequency protection.........................................................665

Function block................................................................................. 665

Section 11 Multipurpose protection..................................................... 689

Section 12 System protection and control...........................................721

Section 13 Secondary system supervision..........................................729

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation

Logic for group indication INDCALH.....................................................942

Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY....................... 952

Technical data............................................................................ 965

Technical data................................................................................. 977

Operation accuracy.................................................................. 1103

Section 17 Metering.......................................................................... 1105

Section 18 Station communication.................................................... 1119

Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC.. 1125

Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV.............................................. 1197

Operation principle........................................................................ 1209

Section 19 Remote communication...................................................1213

Section 20 Basic IED functions......................................................... 1223

Functionality ................................................................................. 1274

Section 21 IED hardware.................................................................. 1277

Side-by-side 19 rack mounting.....................................................1356

Section 22 Injection equipment hardware......................................... 1365

Section 24 Connection diagrams...................................................... 1393

Section 26 Glossary.......................................................................... 1435

1MRK 502 066-UUS A

Product documentation set

Planning & purchase

1MRK 502 066-UUS A

The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

1MRK 502 066-UUS A

Document revision history

1MRK 502 066-UUS A

1MRK 502 065-UUS

1MRK 502 067-UUS

1MRK 502 068-BEN

1MRK 502 066-UUS

Type test certificate

1MRK 502 068-TUS

670 series manuals

1MRK 500 123-UUS

1MRK 511 355-UUS

1MRK 514 024-UUS

Communication protocol manual, DNP3

1MRK 511 348-UUS

Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition

1MRK 511 350-UEN

Point list manual, DNP3